diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4990-0.txt | 4957 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4990-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 105167 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4990-8.txt | 4956 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4990-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 104806 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4990-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 109897 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4990-h/4990-h.htm | 5644 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4990.txt | 4956 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 4990.zip | bin | 0 -> 104777 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/4990-h.htm.2021-01-27 | 5643 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/aboyr10.txt | 4958 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/aboyr10.zip | bin | 0 -> 104168 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/aboyr10h.htm | 5440 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/aboyr10h.zip | bin | 0 -> 107801 bytes |
16 files changed, 36570 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/4990-0.txt b/4990-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1a51204 --- /dev/null +++ b/4990-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4957 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Adventures of a Boy Reporter + +Author: Harry Steele Morrison + +Posting Date: March 23, 2009 +Release Date: January, 2004 [EBook #4990] +Last Updated: November 16, 2016 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + + + + +Produced by Jim Weiler + + + + + + + + +THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER + +by Harry Steele Morrison + +1900 + + +CONTENTS. + +CHAPTER I. + +LIVING IN THE COUNTRY--LIFE AT SCHOOL--THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED--THE +COMING OF THE CIRCUS + +CHAPTER II. + +ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS--A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE +HENRY + +CHAPTER III. + +ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK--LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT + +CHAPTER IV. + +WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY--CRUEL TREATMENT + +CHAPTER V. + +THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS--THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS + +CHAPTER VI. + +STEALING A RIDE--KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN + +CHAPTER VII. + +ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK--A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE + +CHAPTER VIII. + +LOOKING FOR WORK--WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT + +CHAPTER IX. + +IN THE STREET AGAIN--THE POLICE STATION--VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, +AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR + +CHAPTER X. + +LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN--FEATURED AS “THE BOY REPORTER” + +CHAPTER XI. + +A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND--RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN + +CHAPTER XII. + +A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER--THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT +TO THE PHILIPPINES--LEAVING NEW YORK--IN CHICAGO + +CHAPTER XIII. + +SAN FRANCISCO--THE TRANSPORT GONE--WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY +PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER--THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT--A STORM AT SEA--ARRIVAL IN MANILA + +CHAPTER XV. + +ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR, AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES +AMONG THE NATIVES--SEIZED BY THE REBELS + +CHAPTER XVI. + +A PLEASANT CAPTOR--BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE--FIRST +GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO + +CHAPTER XVII. + +ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS--ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS--THE FIRST BATTLE--ARCHIE WOUNDED + +CHAPTER XIX. + +RETURN TO MANILA--IN THE HOSPITAL--CONGRATULATED BY ALL--WRITING TO THE +PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES + +CHAPTER XX. + +AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP--BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN + +CHAPTER XXI. + +CONTINUING THE CRUISE--ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED--THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE’S +FRIEND--A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY--LONGING TO BE HOME +AGAIN + +CHAPTER XXII. + +RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS--A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO +RETURN TO NEW YORK--BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +HONG KONG--A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO--HONOLULU AGAIN--ARRIVAL IN SAN +FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS--ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN +NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +DOING “SPECIAL” WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER--INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS +MEN--CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS + +CHAPTER XXV. + +PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE--STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL--LIVING +AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +DECIDES TO VISIT HOME--A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN--A PUBLIC CHARACTER +NOW--DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB--DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL--A TELEGRAM +FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE + + + + + + +THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER. + + + +CHAPTER I. + + LIVING IN THE COUNTRY--LIFE AT SCHOOL--THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED--THE + COMING OF THE CIRCUS. + +“YES,” said Mrs. Dunn to her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan, “we are expecting +great things of Archie, and yet we sometimes hardly know what to think +of the boy. He has the most remarkable ideas of things, and there seems +to be absolutely no limit to his ambition. He has long since determined +that he will some day be President, and he expects to enter politics the +day he is twenty-one.” + +“Is that so, indeed,” said Mrs. Sullivan. “Well, we can never tell +what is going to come of our boys. As I says to Dannie to-day, says +I, ‘Dannie, you must do your best to be somebody and make something of +yourself, for you and Jack bees all that I has to depend upon now.’ But +Dannie pays no attention to my entreaties, and somehow it seems to me +that since Mr. Sullivan died the boys are gettin’ worse and worse. It’s +beyond me to control them, anyhow.” + +“Oh, take heart, Mrs. Sullivan,” said Mrs. Dunn, “our boys will all turn +out well in the end, and all we can do is to bring them up in the best +way we know, and trust to them to take care of themselves after they +leave home. Now Dannie is certainly an industrious lad. I hear him +pounding nails all day long in the back yard, and he made a good job of +shingling the woodshed the other day. He seems made to be a carpenter.” + +“Yes, I think so myself,” said the Widow Sullivan. “The whole lot of +them is out by the railroad now, building a hut. They’ve organised a +‘Hut Club’ to-day, and never a lick of work have I had out of them boys +since mornin’. They’ve always got something going on, and when I want +a bit of water from the well, or a little wood from the shed, they’re +never around.” + +“Yes, but boys will be boys, Mrs. Sullivan, and we’d better keep them +contented at home as long as we can. They’ll be leaving us soon enough. +It seems that no boys are content to stay in town any longer; they’re +all anxious to be off to the city.” + +“That’s true, that’s true, Mrs. Dunn,” said Mrs. Sullivan. “I must be +going now. I’m much obliged for the rain-water, and whenever you want a +bit of milk call over the fence, and I’ll bring it to you with pleasure. +It’s a good neighbour you are, Mrs. Dunn.” + +And Mrs. Sullivan went slowly around the house and out at the front +gate, while good Mrs. Dunn returned to her ironing, a few clothes having +to be ready for Sunday. + +While these mothers were discussing their boys, the youngsters +themselves were busy behind the barn, building a hut down near the +railway track. There were six of them altogether, the three extra ones, +besides Archie Dunn and the Sullivan boys, having come from across +the railway to play for the day. Two hours before they had solemnly +organised themselves into the “Hut Club,” each boy walking three times +around the block blindfolded, and swearing upon his return to be true +to all the rules and regulations of the organisation, which had been +written with chalk on the side of the barn. The regulations were +numerous, but the most important one was that no East Side boys were to +be allowed within the club-room when it was built, and that the club’s +policy should be one of warfare against the East Siders on every +occasion when they met. This fight against the East Side was, indeed, +responsible for the organisation of the club. It was felt necessary to +have some head to their forces, and some means of holding together. So +the club was organised, and now the next thing on the programme was the +erection of a hut to serve as a club-house. Archie Dunn, who had been +elected president, volunteered to get three boards and a hammer if the +other boys would each get two boards and some nails. This proposition +was agreed to, and when the boys returned from their foraging +expeditions it was found that there were more than enough boards to +build the hut, so the work began at once. Holes were dug in the ground, +and some posts planted as supports for the structure, and then the +boards were hastily nailed together from post to post. In three hours +the hut was practically completed, and it remained only to lay a floor +until they could hold their first meeting in the new club-house. The +floor itself was down by noon, and the club then served a memorable +dinner to mark the completion of the structure. + +A hole was dug in the ground outside the door, and a furnace made. A +skillet was brought from Archie’s house, together with some dishes and a +coffee-pot, and Dan Sullivan brought some more dishes, and six eggs from +his nests under the barn. The boys were obliged to make several trips +to and from the houses, but finally nearly everything was ready, and the +eggs were carefully cooked by Archie, who was really a good housekeeper, +from long experience in the kitchen with his mother. Some potatoes were +fried in the grease remaining in the skillet after the eggs were cooked, +and then the feast began. The eggs may have been rather black with +grease, and the potatoes were certainly not done, but the boys all +pronounced it the finest meal of their lives, notwithstanding the bitter +coffee, and the dirty bread, which had been allowed to fall into the +gutter beside the railway track. They were eating in their own house, +and they had cooked in the open air, “just like tramps,” Harry Rafe +said, and it was little wonder that they enjoyed the novel experience. + +The only trouble came when the meal was finished. No one wanted to +wash the dishes, and, finally, it was decided to return them to their +respective kitchens just as they were, and to let them be washed with +the rest of the dinner dishes at home. And this decision came near +putting an end to Hut Club dinners, for both Mrs. Dunn and the Widow +Sullivan were determined not to wash any more dirty dishes from the hut. + +When the meal was over, the boys lounged about the hut, and Dan Sullivan +brought a lot of things from his sister’s playhouse with which to +furnish it more suitably. Archie Dunn brought a lot of hay from the loft +in his mother’s barn, and when a piece of old carpet was spread upon it +it made an acceptable couch. A piece of old carpet was laid in front of +the hut, too, where the boys could sit and watch the trains switching +back and forth on the railway, and the tramps who were heating coffee in +cans over by the cattle-pen. + +Finally, some cattle arrived in the pen to be loaded into cars for the +city, and the boys had just decided to go and watch the men loading +them, when an engine came up the side-track with the most beautiful car +they had ever seen, behind it. The car was painted in all colours of the +rainbow, and in giant letters was printed the magic name of “The World’s +Greatest Show.” + +The boys lost no time in getting down from the cattle-pen fence, and the +car had barely stopped when they were aboard. “Hooray,” shouted Charlie +Huffman, “we’ll all get jobs of passin’ bills.” And it was with this +end in view that they sought the advertising manager in the car, who +promised to give them all jobs when the circus came in two weeks. +The boys deluged him with questions of every sort. “Will there be any +elephants?” “Is there goin’ to be a parade?” and “Will there be any +trapeze performances?” The poor man was finally obliged to lock the +door to keep them out, and the boys stood about the car until nearly +six o’clock, admiring the paintings, and speculating as to whether they +would be able to work their way into the circus or not, when it finally +came. Their speculations were interrupted by the appearance on the scene +of the Widow Sullivan with a good-sized maple switch, which she used +to good effect in getting the two Sullivans and Archie Dunn home for +supper. For Mrs. Dunn had given Mrs. Sullivan instructions before she +started, so that when Archie complained that he had been whipped by +“that woman next door,” he received no sympathy whatever. + +And when he went to bed at nine o’clock, he could hardly sleep for +thinking of the wonderful things which had happened this day. The coming +circus and the great Hut Club kept him awake until far after ten, so +that he got up too late for Sunday school the next morning, and was +punished accordingly. + +The next week was a hard one at school, and the boys had but little +time to devote to the club. But after four o’clock in the afternoon +they sometimes got together and did various things which improved their +club-house. Some very fair chairs were constructed from empty soap +boxes, and various contrivances were put together to guard against the +intrusion of any East Siders or tramps while they were away at school. +There was no padlock used, and any one coming up to the hut would +imagine it a simple thing to enter--until he tried. But the boys had +fixed a secret cord which, when pulled, shifted the bar inside, and +every boy was sworn not to betray the existence of the cord. + +The day set for the circus came nearer and nearer, and the boys began +to be anxious for fear the schools would not close, so that they could +attend. But the superintendent finally announced that they would; so +early on the eventful day the entire club was on the grounds, waiting +to get some work to do. Archie Dunn got the first job, being selected +to carry water for the elephant because he was stronger than any of the +others. But the rest were given something to do, and when the day was +over they had all seen the circus, and went to bed happy, to dream of +the great trip to be taken by the Hut Club on the next Saturday. + + + +CHAPTER II. + + ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS--A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE + HENRY. + +THE Hut Club went out on a picnic the next Saturday, and had a jolly +time. They camped upon an island in the middle of a shallow stream, and +while there made coffee and cooked their dinner, having brought most of +the necessary apparatus from the Hut. They fished a little, and hunted +for turtles in the water, and altogether had a good time, if nothing +exciting did occur. It was after nine o’clock at night when they reached +town again, footsore and weary, and Archie Dunn had hardly entered the +house before he was on the dining-room lounge, half-asleep. His mother +seemed to be out, and as he lay there he wondered how long it would be +before she came back. Archie truly loved his mother, but of late he +had often thought that he would like to leave home and go to the famous +city, where he felt sure he could get something to do. But he disliked +the idea of leaving his mother. + +“I’m getting to be a big boy, now,” he often said to himself, “and it’s +time that I began to look out for myself. I’m nearly seventeen, and I +think I ought to be earning some money. This thing of belonging to Hut +Clubs and spending my time in going to picnics and to circuses ought to +stop. It’s all right for boys, but I’m getting to be a man, now.” + +All these thoughts were flying through his mind when his mother came in. +“Oh, Archie,” she exclaimed, “I’ve been so worried about you. I’ve just +been over to Mrs. Sullivan’s to see if Dannie had come home, and whether +he had seen you. Wherever have you been?” + +“We didn’t think it would take so long to walk home,” said Archie, +jumping up from the sofa, “but we were awfully tired, and we didn’t come +very fast. I’m so sorry you were worried. + +“And I’m as hungry as a bear, mother. Can’t you find me something to +eat?” + +“Yes, dear,” said Mrs. Dunn, softly, “and when you’ve finished your +supper I have something for you. I won’t give it to you now for fear you +won’t be able to eat, but as soon as you have finished your meal, you +shall have it.” + +So Archie was obliged to eat his baked beans and brown bread and drink +his milk without knowing what was in store for him, and he hurried as +fast as he could, so that he could learn. When he had finished he went +into the sitting-room, and found his mother sitting with a letter spread +open upon her lap. “Uncle Henry has written me asking if you cannot go +with him to New York on Monday, for a couple of days. He is obliged to +go down there on business, and says he will be glad to take you along +and show you something of the wonderful city, for he knows you won’t be +any trouble to him. Now I hardly know what to say, Archie. If I can feel +that you are behaving yourself properly, and are doing your best to be +as little trouble as possible, I am willing that you shall go.” + +“Oh, mother,” cried Archie, “I’ll promise anything. Only let me go this +once, and I’ll promise to stay at home all the rest of the summer.” + +“All right, then,” said Mrs. Dunn. “You shall go on the first train +Monday morning, and Uncle Henry will join you at Heddens Corner. Run +along to bed now.” + +Archie went up-stairs almost dumb with delight Was it really true that +he was to see the great city at last? He had heard some of the boys at +school telling what their fathers saw there, but he had never even hoped +that he would see it for himself so soon. Of course he had determined to +see it all some day, but that was to be far in the future. The lad +could hardly sleep for the joy of it all, and when he did finally +lose consciousness, it was only to dream of streets of gold, and great +buildings reaching to the skies. + +Sunday passed slowly by. At Sunday school, Archie told the boys that +he was going to New York on the morrow, and from that moment he was the +hero of the class. The boys looked at him with wondering admiration, and +seemed scarcely able to realise that one of their number was to go so +far from home. The city was in reality little more than a hundred miles, +but to their boyish minds this distance seemed wonderfully great. + +Early on Monday morning Archie was at the depot waiting for the train. +His mother was there to see him off, and there were tears in her eyes +at the thought of parting with her only child, if only for a day or two. +And Archie was radiant with delight at the glorious prospect ahead of +him. He walked nervously up and down the platform, and wished frequently +that it were not so early in the morning, so that some of the boys might +be there to see him off. Finally, the great hissing locomotive drew up, +with its long train of coaches, and Archie was soon aboard, hurrying off +to Heddens Corner and the city. In a few minutes Uncle Henry was with +him, a tall, fine-looking man, with an air of business. Uncle Henry +kept the general store at the Corner, and was an important person in the +neighbourhood. He was of some importance in the city, too, for his +name was known in politics, and his custom was always desired at +the wholesale stores. So Archie was going to see the city under good +auspices, if his uncle would only have time to take him about with him. + +After a couple of hours, during which Archie kept his face glued to +the window-pane, watching the flying landscape, the great train pulled +through a long, dark tunnel, and finally entered an immense shed, +covered with glass where it came to a final stop. Crowds left the +coaches, and passed out of the station, where they were swallowed up in +the great rush of traffic. Some drove away in cabs and carriages. Some +entered the street-cars, and some went up a stairway and entered what +seemed to Archie a railway train in the air. + +Uncle Henry told Archie to follow him carefully, and they, too, were +soon flying away from the neighbourhood of the terminal, past hotels, +stores, and dwellings, until they finally left the trolley-car, and +passed through a cross street into a long, quiet thoroughfare which +looked old enough to have been there for a hundred years. The houses +were built far back from the street, with pillars in front, and into one +of these quaint old dwellings went Archie and his uncle. + +“I always stop down-town,” explained Uncle Henry, “because I am near to +the great wholesale establishments. It is central to the retail stores, +too, and to many of the places of interest.” + +When they were settled in their room, Uncle Henry explained that he +would have to be away most of this first day, but that to-morrow he +would take Archie out and show him the sights. So Archie expected to +remain indoors all day; but when his uncle had left the house he +decided that he couldn’t possibly remain in this close room when so many +wonderful things were taking place outside. So he decided to walk up and +down the street, anyhow, and when he went out he felt like a prisoner +just escaped from a cell. But the noise was terrible, and there were a +great many wagons and trucks passing through the street. The greatest +crowd seemed to be on that cross street about two blocks away, so Archie +decided to go there, and see if there was anything new on that street. + +He saw many wonderful things. There were cars running along without any +apparent motive power, there were thousands and thousands of people in +the streets, and the stores looked so handsome and interesting that he +simply couldn’t resist going into one or two of them, just to see what +they were like. And when he had finished with one or two he could think +of no reason why he shouldn’t go on up the street, where he was sure he +would find a great many more interesting things to see. So on and on +he went, until at last he was tired and hungry, and then, for the first +time, he was a little frightened, because he thought of all he had read +about people losing their way in the city, and not being able to find +their relatives again. But he was a brave boy, so he determined to make +an effort to find his way back without appealing to a policeman. And +after a time he was successful, and entered the queer old house in the +ancient street at just three o’clock in the afternoon. His uncle was +there waiting for him, and was nearly beside himself with apprehension. + +“I was about to send out a general alarm for you, at the police +station,” he said. “How did you happen to go away?” + +“Oh, I was so very tired of staying in the house,” said Archie, “and I +felt sure that I could find my way back without getting lost at all. +And to-morrow I’m sure I can get along all right, Uncle Henry, so you +needn’t bother with me at all, unless you want to.” + +And it so happened that Mr. Kirk was very busy the next day, and would +have found it quite impossible to show Archie about. So it was fortunate +that he was able to go everywhere alone, or he would have had to return +home without seeing anything at all of the city. + +As it was, he went here, there, and everywhere, and saw a great deal of +the city, the people, and the way in which they lived. The entire place +had a strange fascination for him, and all the time he was thinking how +glad he would be to live where he could see all this rush of business, +this varied life, every day. And he fully determined to return some day +and get something to do, so that he might work himself up, and come +to own one of the handsome houses on the avenues, or drive one of the +elegant carriages on the boulevard. And he observed every boy who +passed him, and talked with several of them, trying to find out whether +positions were easy to secure, and whether they paid much when they were +secured. + +So when they took the four o’clock train for home, and arrived at +Archie’s house in time for supper, he told more about the city boys and +their work than about the tall buildings, the Brooklyn Bridge, or the +Central Park. He talked so much, in fact, about the delights of the city +boy, and the money he earned, that after he had gone to bed Mrs. Dunn +took her brother aside and talked with him concerning Archie’s future. +And between them they definitely decided that Archie must not go to the +city to work. + + + +CHAPTER III. + + ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK--LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT. + +ARCHIE DUNN was not more ambitious than many other boys of his age, +but he possessed one quality which is not developed in every boy, +determination. Once Archie decided upon doing a thing, once he had made +up his mind that it was truly a good thing to do, nothing could keep him +from putting his plans into action, and making an effort, at least, to +accomplish his ends. Most boys of seventeen have not decided what they +want to become when they are men, and, until his visit to the city, +Archie was equally at sea concerning his future. He knew, of course, +that he wanted to be rich and famous, but when he tried to think up +some suitable profession which would bring him these possessions, he was +never able to decide. + +The two days in the city with Uncle Henry had opened to his boyish +mind a new world, and when he returned to the humble home surrounded by +gardens, he felt that he would never be satisfied to live and work in +this small town. There was now no question in his mind but what the city +was the place for any one who wished to become either rich or famous. It +would certainly be impossible for him to make a name for himself in this +village, while in the city he would have every opportunity for improving +himself, and advancing himself in every way. He wondered, indeed, that +he had never thought of going to New York before, and was disgusted with +himself when he thought of the time he had wasted here at home. + +But there was no use in thinking of the past. The thing to do now was to +get to the city as quickly as possible, for to Archie every day seemed +precious, and each delay kept him further from the consummation of +his hopes. It never occurred to the boy that his mother might have +objections to his leaving home. She had always been very ambitious for +his future, and he supposed that she would be delighted at the idea +of having her boy in the great city, where he would have innumerable +chances for improving himself. So when they sat on the front porch, +one evening, and he told her of his plan, he was surprised to hear his +mother pleading with him to remain at home. “Archie,” she said, “I am +almost sure you will come to some bad end in the city. You really must +not go, for my sake, if for no other reason.” + +“But, mother, I can’t remain here in town always. I must go out into +the world some time to earn a living and make a place for myself, and I +think the sooner I go the better, don’t you?” + +“Yes, Archie, but you’re so young, and you’ve had no experience. You +have no idea of the things there are in great cities to drag young men +down. I don’t think I could stand it to have you so far away from home +and in such danger.” + +“Well, mother,” said Archie, “there isn’t much use in arguing about it. +I have reached a point where I don’t think I can be any longer satisfied +at home. I have been here seventeen years, and I think I can remain here +that much longer without improving myself. In the city I am sure I can +make rapid progress, and in a year or two you can come there and live +with me.” + +Archie got up from the porch and went down the street, while poor Mrs. +Dunn ran over next door to see her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan. When she +had entered the disorderly kitchen, and seated herself on one of the +home-made chairs, the anxious mother burst into tears. “I don’t know +what to think of Archie, Mrs. Sullivan,” she said. “He is determined, +now, to go to New York, and I know that if he goes I will never be able +to see him again. I am nigh distracted with worrying over it. I have +talked with him, but he seems determined, and I know I can never hold +out against his entreaties and arguments.” + +“Sure, now, Mrs. Dunn,” said the Widow Sullivan, “don’t yez be a +worryin’ about ‘im at all. That Archie is a smart boy, he is, and if he +goes to New York he’ll come out all right, never fear, I only wish my +Dannie had as much get-up about him as your boy.” + +“Yes, yes, Archie is very ambitious for his age,” said Mrs. Dunn, “but +I sometimes wish he were less so. I know I could keep him at home longer +if he wasn’t so anxious to be at work. I don’t believe I can let him go, +Mrs. Sullivan, not yet. I want him to stay in school another year, and +then I’ll think about it.” + +“Well, ye’re wise, Mrs. Dunn, ye’re a wise woman,” said the Widow +Sullivan. “Since yer husband died ye’ve been a good mother to the lad, +and have brought ‘im up well. And now, how is yer chickens, Mrs. Dunn? +Have ye got that cochin hen a ‘settin’’ yit?” + +And the two women began to discuss their various fowls, and the +conversation was so interesting that Mrs. Dunn remained late, and found +Archie in bed when she went home. “Ah, well, poor boy, I’ll have to tell +him of my decision in the morning. He’ll be terribly disappointed, and I +hate to do it I’m afraid it’s selfishness that makes me want to keep +him with me. I almost wish he would take things into his own hands, and +start for the city himself. I would be rid then of the responsibility +of sending him, and the question would be settled for me. Boys sometimes +know best how to settle their own difficulties, anyhow.” + +Mrs. Dunn kneaded the bread before retiring, for to-morrow was Saturday, +and, therefore, baking-day, and then she went into her little room +off the kitchen, and prayed earnestly for her boy before sleeping. +She prayed that she might be helped in advising him, and that he might +always do what was best for himself and for his mother. + +The next day was Saturday, and in the morning the Hut Club met, as +usual, and prepared to have an open-air dinner for this day. The +furnace, which had been knocked down during the week by the East Siders, +was rebuilt, and the skillet and other utensils were brought from the +nearest kitchens. Archie went to the grocery around the corner and +bought five cents’ worth of cakes, and then the six boys sat down in +a circle and prepared to devour their home-made feast. But before they +began Archie stood up. “I want to say that this will probably be my +farewell dinner with the club,” he said, in a low tone, “and I hope that +you will appoint another president in my place.” + +The boys were horror-struck, but Archie refused to explain where and +when he was going. Finally, they refused to appoint another president, +all agreeing that Archie should hold that office for ever, wherever he +was. And the meal was eaten in silence, for the announcement had thrown +a sort of chill over the proceedings. When they had finished, Archie +silently shook hands with each of the boys, who were dumb with +amazement, gathered up his skillet and coffee-pot, and went home through +the gate to the chicken-lot. + +“I wonder what he’s goin’ to do,” they all said, as in one breath, and +as there was seldom much fun in the club when Archie was absent, they +all went home in a few minutes, or down-town to watch the farmers, who +were in town to do their weekly buying. + +When Archie reached home he went up-stairs to his little room, and began +to lay out a few things which he wanted to take with him, for he had +determined to start for New York this very night. Then he tied the +things up in a small bundle, and sat down to write a note to his mother. +When he had finished it, he pinned it up at the head of his cot, and +this is what it said: + + “MY DARLING MOTHER:--Please don’t worry about me, I’m bound to + come through all right, and if anything happens to me, I promise + that I will write to you immediately and let you know. I have the + ten dollars which I have saved, and if I don’t get work at once I + will write to you for some more. Now, I am not doing this thing for + the sake of adventure, but because I am sure it is the best thing + for me, and I don’t want you to worry at all. I shall write to you + often and let you know just what I’m doing, so don’t worry, but be + a brave mother. I’m not going off this way as a sneak, but because + I want to avoid a ‘scene.’ + + “Your loving + + “ARCHIE.” + +And at three o’clock the next morning Archie Dunn got out of bed, +shouldered his bundle, and started off for the great city, which seemed +to be drawing him like a magnet. + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY--CRUEL TREATMENT. + +WHEN daylight came, Archie was far out of the town walking quickly along +the southern road. He figured that he had walked nearly six miles in the +two hours since he had let himself out of the back door at home, and, +as he looked ahead, he planned that he would walk at least thirty miles +every day. Of course, he had never done much walking before, or he would +have known better than to have expected to accomplish so much in twelve +hours, but he felt fresh and full of strength this morning, and nothing +seemed too hard to accomplish. As yet he had not regretted his departure +from home. The excitement of it all, and the adventurous side of his +exploit, had kept him interested, and made him feel that he was a real +hero. But he was not so foolish as to imagine that there would not be +times when he would regret having set out for New York. He was too old +and too sensible for his age to allow his ambition to run away with him +entirely, and he fully expected to meet with many great discouragements. +“But I’m sure of one thing,” he said to himself, as he walked along, “I +never will return home until I have something to show for the trip. I +won’t have the club boys and the neighbours saying that Archie Dunn had +to come home discouraged. If I return without accomplishing anything, I +will be held up to the whole town as a boy who made a fool of himself by +not taking his friends’ advice, and I never will be made an example +of if I can help it.” And Archie walked faster as he thought of the +possibility of failure. + +When seven o’clock came he was passing through the county-seat, but +though there were many interesting things to look at in the town, Archie +determined not to stop. He was afraid he might meet some one he knew, +who would be sure to ask him where he was going with his bundle, and +what he was doing out so early. And anyhow he was very hungry, and +decided to get out of the town and to the farmhouses as soon as +possible. “I can work for my meal at a farmhouse,” he said to himself, +“but in the town they’ll take me for a regular tramp.” + +So poor Archie walked quickly through the town, still keeping to the +southern road, and saying to himself, as he passed every milestone, +“So much nearer New York.” About a mile out in the country he came to a +large farmhouse, and he determined to enter and ask for a meal. He had +hard work to muster up enough courage to go in and ask for anything, but +finally he knocked timidly at the kitchen door, and was frightened by +a large dog which came barking around the corner. It seemed to him that +the animal would surely bite, but a large fat woman opened the door +just in time to let him in. “Hurry in, boy,” she said, “fer there’s +no tellin’ what Tige might do ef he once gets a hold of ye.” So Archie +stepped into the large kitchen, with its rafters overhead, and its +dining-table in the corner. “Sit down, boy,” said the woman. “I reckon +you’s thet new lad thet’s come ter work over at Mullins’s, ain’t ye?” + +“No’m,” said Archie, “I don’t work anywhere. I’m on my way to New York, +where I expect to find a position, and I thought perhaps you’d allow me +to do a little work here this morning to earn my breakfast.” + +Good Mrs. Lane, for that was the woman’s name, was horrified to think +that any one was alive and without breakfast at eight o’clock in the +morning. “Goodness me!” said she. “Why, you must be half-famished fer +want of food, ain’t ye?” And she bustled about the kitchen, putting the +kettle on to boil, and stirring up the fire. “You’ll have some nice ham +and eggs, my boy, and then I have somethin’ in mind fer you. I reckon +yer ain’t in no hurry ter get ter the city, be ye? Well, even if ye +do be in a hurry, I reckon you’ll be glad of the chance to earn four +dollars. I ain’t goin’ to ask ye no questions about how ye come to be +walkin’ to New York, because I never wuz no hand ter meddle in other +folkses affairs, but ye look to be a likely lad, and a strong un, and ez +my sister’s husband, what lives two miles down the pike, needs a boy to +drive a plough fer a week, I b’lieve ye’ll suit ‘im first-rate. So ez +soon ez ye have finished yer vittles, I’ll walk down there with ye, and +we’ll see the old man.” + +Archie hardly knew whether to be delighted with the prospect or not. Of +course four dollars would be nice to have, but he was anxious to get +to the city as soon as possible, and every day counted. But perhaps it +would be wrong, he thought, to throw away such a good chance to earn +some money, and he had decided to accept any offer the farmer made +him, long before he finished his breakfast. When he got up from the +straight-backed chair, he felt that he had never eaten a better meal +in his life, and when Mrs. Lane started off down the road, he gladly +followed her. A week on such a farm as this would be no unpleasant +experience. Such food was not to be had every day, he knew, and he of +course would have precious little that was good to eat when he reached +the city. + +They soon covered the two miles, Mrs. Lane getting along very fast for +such a large woman, and at last they stood before Hiram Tinch, who owned +the farm. Archie was made to describe his intentions, and was thoroughly +examined by Mr. Tinch. He told the farmer that he knew nothing about +farm work, but Mr. Tinch said he would soon teach him, and it was +settled that Archie was to remain on the farm a week. Mrs. Lane went +inside the house to see her sister, who looked sick with too much work, +and the farmer told Archie that he might as well start in, as there was +no object in waiting. So the boy donned a pair of “blue jean” trousers, +and was taken into a field, where a one-horse plough was standing. +Archie knew how to hitch a horse, so he went to the stable and secured +his steed, and then harnessed him to the plough. The farmer didn’t +see fit to give him any instructions about ploughing, and the poor boy +hardly knew what to do, but rather than ask he started off, and tried to +guide the animal in the right direction, as far as he knew it. Of course +the horse went wrong, and the plough refused to stay in the earth, +and altogether the attempt was a miserable failure. The farmer leaned +against the fence, picking his teeth with a pin, but when he saw the +horse going crooked, and the plough bounding along over the earth, his +face grew livid with anger. For a minute he seemed unable to speak, but +strode toward Archie with a fierce look in his eyes. Then he found his +tongue, and opened such a tirade of vile words that the poor boy shrank +from him in terror. He was in mortal fear lest the man should lay hands +on him and commit some crime, so intense was his rage, but Hiram Tinch +seemed to know how far to go, and after five minutes of cursing and +swearing he took the plough in his own hands, and guided it through the +earth. “Now take it,” he growled at Archie, when he had gone a furrow’s +length, “and see ef ye can do better this time. Remember, not a bite of +dinner do ye get until this field is ploughed.” + +Poor Archie was weak from fright, but there was nothing to do but to +obey. He looked at the vast field before him, and made up his mind that +he would get nothing to eat until night, anyhow, for it was already +nearly noon. He felt very much like bursting into tears, but he was too +proud to give way to his feelings. But he couldn’t help wishing that he +were at home, playing with the members of the Hut Club. “Those boys are +much better off than I am,” he said, over and over, “though they have +made no effort to improve themselves.” After a time, however, his +ambition returned, and as he looked ahead into the future, and +remembered the wonderful things he was going to accomplish, he felt more +like working. + +He finished the field at five o’clock in the afternoon, and was almost +fainting from hunger and from the hard work. The ploughing was fairly +well done, but Hiram Tinch could see no merit in the work. He swore at +Archie again, and gave him a supper of mush and milk. Mrs. Tinch sat by, +and Archie could see that she did not approve of his treatment. The poor +woman seemed afraid to speak, almost, but it was plain that she had a +good heart. So when Archie heard a noise in his garret room that night, +he was not surprised to see Mrs. Tinch at the window, placing some +doughnuts and sandwiches there for him to eat. + + + +CHAPTER V. + + THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS--THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS. + +IT seemed to Archie that he had just fallen asleep when old Hiram Tinch +was shaking him awake. “Git up out o’ here now, ye lazy beggar, and +git to the field and finish that there ploughin’,” he growled, and the +frightened lad awakened from a horrible nightmare, only to find a worse +experience awaiting him in the light of day. He hastily drew on his +trousers, and didn’t wait to don either shoes or stockings, for if he +was to spend the day ploughing in a field, he knew he would be more +comfortable in his bare feet. When he reached the kitchen, he found +that Farmer Tinch had already eaten his breakfast, though it was not +daylight. Archie was glad that he was out of the way, and good Mrs. +Tinch was glad of it, too, for she was able to give the boy a good +breakfast, and some good advice with it. “Don’t you pay no attention to +what my man says, laddie. He’s a powerful man to swear and carry on, but +I don’t think he’ll have the meanness to strike you. Ef he does, ye must +come to me, and I’ll see thet he doesn’t do it no more.” + +Archie was grateful for this spirit of friendliness, but in his heart +he thought that cruel words were often more painful than lashes, and he +heartily wished that his week was over. + +All this day he spent on the farm, without once going into the road. +Farmer Tinch had warned him that if he saw him making for the road at +any time, he could go and never come back, and he would forfeit what +money he had already earned. So Archie ploughed the field from daylight +till dark, with a half hour at noon for a hurried dinner. He was glad +when darkness came, and after another supper of mush and milk he was +thankful to have a corn-husk bed to sleep on, and was soon in a stupor +which was so sound as to be almost like death. + +Again the next morning he was awakened at daylight, and he was made +to work even harder than on the second day. He had by this time become +somewhat used to the labour, however, and stood it better. He was more +successful in his work, too, and Farmer Tinch had less opportunity for +cursing him. But at night he seemed more tired, even, than before, and +he longed for his home again. He thought of the cosy bed he would now +be enjoying if he had only taken his mother’s advice, and he felt almost +like getting up in the night and stealing away on the road to the north. +But, always a sensible lad, Archie realised that this discouragement +could not last, and he lost himself in sleep, looking forward three +days, when his week should be up, and he would be on his way to the +city, with four dollars more to add to his slender store. + +The three days passed slowly, but at length the Saturday night came, and +he prepared to be off. But good Mrs. Tinch entreated him to remain with +them over Sunday, and, as Archie wasn’t sure that it would be quite +right for him to travel on Sunday, he decided to do so. So the next day +he brushed his only suit of clothes, and drove with his late employer to +church, where Farmer Tinch sat in a front seat and passed the bread +and wine at communion. Archie’s heart rose to his throat as he saw +this paragon so devout in church. He felt like rising in his seat and +denouncing him before all the people as a tyrant and a hard-hearted +wretch. But he kept quiet, though he found it impossible to partake of +the communion under such circumstances. + +The Tinches had brought their dinner with them, and at noon they all sat +on one of the grassy mounds in the churchyard, to take some refreshment +before the afternoon service began. When they had finished, Archie +wandered off, and came to a crowd of boys who were romping behind the +church. When they saw him approach, they all stopped their noise, +and looked at him wonderingly. Evidently they were not used to seeing +strange boys. The silence was soon broken, however, by one of the boys +calling out, “Why, fellers, thet’s the chap what’s been workin’ fer +Hiram Tinch.” This announcement was enough to make Archie an even +greater object of interest than before, for the boys seemed to think +that any person who could work for Farmer Tinch, and come out of the +ordeal none the worse for wear, must be something wonderful. Archie was +soon on good terms with them all, however, and told them of his plan of +going to New York. The boys were all attention, and soon he was the hero +of the occasion. When the bell rung for the afternoon service he was +still telling them of the things he was going to do, and none of them +wanted to go into the church. Archie persuaded them to enter, however, +but he was not surprised to meet them all along the road when he left +Tinch’s early Monday morning. + +It was almost time to go to bed when they reached the farmhouse that +night, so Archie went at once to his attic, being anxious to start fresh +on his journey the next day. He was now determined to push on as rapidly +as possible, hoping to reach the city within three or four days. He was +somewhat afraid that he wouldn’t be able to do this, but he was going to +try, anyhow. + +At daylight Monday morning he was on the way, and when the various boys +he met the day before said good-bye to him and wished him good luck, +he felt that his stay at Tinch’s had not been without benefits of some +sort. He had made some boy friends, and he was four dollars richer, +Archie was sensible enough, too, to realise that his experience would be +a valuable one to him in the future. He knew now what hard work was, at +any rate. + +The morning walk was delightful. The September weather was perfect, and +all along the road were fruit-trees laden with every sort of good +thing to eat a boy could wish for. And as the trees were on the public +thoroughfare, Archie did net hesitate to help himself freely as he went +along, so that he didn’t require any meal at noon. + +As night drew near, however, he began to wonder what he would do for a +bed, and the question became more important with every hour. He had come +to no towns since morning, and knew that he couldn’t expect to reach +one of any size until the next day, anyhow. There were farmhouses, of +course, but after his experience of the past week the lad felt that he +would rather remain outdoors all night than risk being thrown in with +another Hiram Tinch. He didn’t know enough of farmers to know that few +of them resemble Mr. Tinch in nature, and he did what he thought was +best in keeping away from farmhouses after this. + +It was five o’clock in the evening, and Archie was beginning to feel +very tired and hungry, when he came to the ruins of an old colonial +mansion, which lay far back from the road, surrounded by trees, and +almost hid with shrubbery. “How interesting,” he thought to himself. “It +looks just like the pictures of old ruins we see in geographies. I think +I must go up and see what they look like at close range.” And, fired +with a spirit of adventure, and making believe that he was an explorer +in an ancient country, the boy made his way through the trees and +shrubbery. The ruins looked more and more interesting as he advanced. +This had evidently been a magnificent estate at one time. There were +massive pillars which had once supported a stately portico at the front +of the house, and above all there rose a massive chimney, which +seemed to be exceedingly well preserved. As Archie came nearer, he was +surprised to notice a thin column of smoke rising from the top of the +chimney, and for a moment he stood still with fright. What could this +mean? Who could be building a fire in the midst of these ruins. It was +almost like what one reads about in books, he thought. + +For some time he could not decide what to do, whether he had better keep +on, or whether the wisest policy would be to get back to the road as +quickly as possible. Finally, his curiosity and thirst for adventure +persuaded him to go on, and he continued to push his way through the +shrubbery until he stood before the ruins. He then climbed a flight of +steps, and stood in what had once been the main entrance to this +massive palace. Before him he saw a scene which was almost weird in its +unusualness. A fire of pine-knots was blazing in the ruins of the great +fireplace, and seated in a semicircle around the fire were several men +of picturesque appearance, whose faces looked up angrily when they were +disturbed. + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + STEALING A RIDE--KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN. + +ARCHIE was dumbfounded. Never before had he been among such a motley +crowd, and his first impulse was to turn and run. But on second thought +he decided that it would be best to put on a bold face and walk up to +the men. This he did, and when he reached the fire the men jumped up and +asked him who he was. In a few words he told them his simple story, and +they all laughed and sat down again about the fire, making a place for +him. “You’re one of us, then, laddie,” said the leader of the gang. +“We’re all soldiers of fortune, all dependent upon the generous public +for our livelihood. But we’re not goin’ to the city. There’s nothin’ +there for us, and our advice to you is for you to steer clear of the +place, too. Them police takes ye and throws ye into jail as quick as +a wink, and there’s no chance of gettin’ anythink to eat at basement +doors, neither. They’re all on to us, there, laddie, and ye’d better +stick to the country.” + +This bit of advice was endorsed by the entire company, and it was in +vain that Archie tried to make them understand that he was no ordinary +tramp, walking about the country in search of an easy time. He tried +to tell them that he was going to the city to work, not to beg; but the +leader, a big, dirty fellow, weighing two hundred pounds or over, said, +“Never mind, laddie, we knows you’ve run away from home to get away from +the folks, and we appreciates yer position. If yer a mind to stand by +us, we’ll stand by you, and see thet ye comes to no harm.” + +On thinking things over, Archie decided that it was perhaps the wisest +thing for him to appear to sympathise with the tramps, and make himself +agreeable while with them. He had undoubtedly run into a gang of the +worst sort of vagabonds, and there was no way of getting away from there +without arousing their suspicions. So he partook of their slender meal, +and joined in the general laughter when the leader, “Fattie Foy,” made +some crude attempt at punning. The meal was one to be remembered. The +coffee had been heated in an empty tomato can over the fire, and from +its taste was evidently a combination of various collections made from +the farmhouses round about. Besides the coffee there was a various +collection of sandwiches and bread and butter, and two pieces of cake. +One man had succeeded in striking a good house, and came back laden with +pickles and crackers and cheese, which were probably the remains of some +picnic basket. Another fellow had brought some pieces of cold bacon, +and these were warmed on sticks over the fire until they looked really +appetising. From some barn had come a half-dozen fresh eggs, and these +were quickly boiled in a can of hot water, and made a very fair showing +on the slab of granite which served as a table. + +When everything was ready the provisions were equally divided among the +crowd, and every one shared alike. It made no difference how much more +one man collected than another, it was always shared with the entire +crowd. Poor Archie found it almost impossible to eat, but the men +insisted that he take something, so he did manage to swallow a few sips +of coffee and eat a slice of bread and butter. But as he looked about +him at the dirty hands and faces, and the filthy garments of the tramps, +he determined not to eat again while with them. + +When the meal was over the two tin cans were washed at a spring of +water, and as it was now quite dark, they all sat close to the fire, in +order to see. Some one produced a pack of dirty cards, and they began a +game of some kind. Archie was asked to join, but he told them he didn’t +know anything about card-playing. The poor lad was beginning to wish he +had never left home, and felt more miserable than at any other period +of the journey. He walked over to a corner of the ruins where the light +from the fire did not penetrate, and, once there, he sat down and sobbed +bitterly for a time. When he had finished crying it seemed impossible +for him to sleep. The scene about the fire fascinated him. The men were +seated in every sort of picturesque attitude, and as the flickering +light fell upon their dark faces it wasn’t hard for the poor lad to +imagine that he had fallen among a crowd of brigands. He watched them as +they played until he could see no longer, and then he fell into a sound +sleep. + +When Archie woke it was still dark, but the moon was shining brightly +overhead, making everything as light as day. He rubbed his eyes and sat +up, and it was some time before he could realise where he was. Then, as +he saw the tramps lying about the ground, he remembered his adventures +of the night before, and, horrified that he had allowed himself to +sleep, he hastily jumped up, and determined to get away from the ruins +as quickly as possible. The tramps were all sleeping soundly, and +the only noises to be heard were the sound of their breathing and +the blood-curdling hoot of some owl perched on the pillars of the old +portico. The boy picked his way carefully between the bodies of the +sleeping men, and in a minute stood once more on the grand flight of +steps outside. He was trembling for fear some tramp would awake and +prevent his going, and when a bat brushed him in its flight he almost +screamed with terror. Far out beyond the trees and the shrubby he could +see the road glistening in the moonlight, and he made his way as rapidly +as possible out of the grounds, and was once more on his way to the +city. + +It was lonesome work, walking along a country road at night, and +Archie remembered with longing his cosy bed at home. The feeling of +homesickness kept growing within him, despite his efforts to down it, +and when at last the glorious autumn sun rose over the eastern horizon +he was miserable with longing for mother and for home. But he was too +proud to even think of turning back. He must reach the city at all +hazards, homesick or not. + +Archie did not think of breakfast this morning. His experience of the +night before seemed to have taken away his appetite entirely, and his +only thought was to walk as fast as possible, so that he could reach the +city soon. About nine o’clock he entered the outskirts of a busy town, +and while there he observed that the railroad going to the city passed +through the place. All at once a new idea occurred to him. He had so +often heard men and boys tell of how they had stolen a ride from one +town to another. Why shouldn’t he be able to get a ride on a freight +train to the city. Would it be wrong? Archie thought not, since so +many men did it. And anyhow it didn’t seem a wicked thing to cheat the +railroad. He had heard people say that the company ought to be cheated +whenever possible, since it cheated so many others. So, from being so +tired and so anxious to reach New York, Archie decided to try and steal +a ride. He entered the yards, where a train was being made up for the +south, and there he saw a cattle-car with an open door. He immediately +jumped inside and shut the door, squeezing himself into the farthest +corner, hoping that he wouldn’t be discovered. He soon found that he +wasn’t alone, for a couple of tramps were in the opposite corner, and +they whispered to him not to make any noise. “The brakie,” they said, +“will soon be ‘round, and if he finds ye he’ll put us all in jail.” + +Poor Archie grew pale at the thought of being put in jail, and huddled +himself closer in the corner. After a time the train started, and the +tramps, he noticed, climbed up into some sort of compartment under the +roof of the car, where they wouldn’t be observed, leaving Archie alone +down-stairs. Things went smoothly for a time. The train went flying +along, and Archie counted every mile which brought him nearer to the +city. Finally the train pulled up at a crossing, and a brakeman came +along and threw open the door of the car. He was not long in discovering +the cowering figure in the corner, and his wrath was dreadful to look +upon. “So, ye cussed vagabond,” he growled, “ye thought ye’d steal a +ride, did ye? Get out o’ this now. Quick, out with ye.” Archie could +have fainted, and, as it was, he almost fell out of the car, propelled +by the brakeman’s boot. For awhile he stood dazed beside the track, and +finally moved on. “I’ll keep a ‘stiff upper lip,’” he said, “whatever +happens.” But this was by far the most discouraging adventure yet. + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK--A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE. + +ON and on for the rest of the day walked Archie. His feet were sore, +he was weak from hunger, and he was made miserable with being homesick. +People who met him on the road turned around to look at the slender lad +with the pale face and the weary step, but he kept walking on, stopping +for nothing, and noticing no one. At noon he picked some apples in an +orchard, and these appeased his hunger. When evening drew near, however, +he felt that he could go without food no longer, so he didn’t hesitate +to stop at a house and ask for food. “I know mother would give a boy +food if one should come to our door,” he said to himself, “so I do not +think it wrong for me to ask for food here.” He was fortunate enough to +strike a pleasant housewife, who took him in and made him sit down at +the kitchen table, which she covered with good things to eat. There was +cold roast beef, some fried potatoes and a glass of good fresh milk. And +then she gave him some apple pie, so that when he had finished Archie +felt better than for many a day. While he ate he told the good woman why +he was going to New York, and her sympathy was enlisted at once. “Why, +you poor lad,” she exclaimed, “just to think of your being in the city +all alone. And what will your mother think?” + +Archie couldn’t imagine what his mother did think. He had remembered her +every minute during the last few days, and was anxious to write her, +so he decided to ask the woman for some paper and a pencil. These were +gladly given him, and he sat down and told his mother that he was almost +to New York and that he had been having a splendid time. He was careful +not to say anything about his experience with Farmer Tinch, or the +night he spent with the tramps. He knew these things would only make her +unhappy, and it was just as well that she should think everything was +smooth sailing for him. His letter was filled with his enthusiasm and +his hope for the morrow, so that when good Mrs. Dunn received it she +was overjoyed, and hurried over to show it to the Widow Sullivan, who +enjoyed it thoroughly and said “I told you so.” Poor Mrs. Dunn had +been having a very miserable time of it. She was hardly surprised that +morning when she awoke and found Archie gone, but she was naturally much +worried for fear some accident would happen to him before he reached New +York. Once there, she felt that she needn’t worry much about him, for, +strange to say, Mrs. Dunn had a firm belief in the ability of city +policemen to take care of every one, and she knew that Archie would not +be allowed to suffer for want of food and a place to sleep. And when she +received this letter, saying that Archie was nearly to New York, and had +even been so successful as to earn some money, she felt more comfortable +than for some time, Of course she supposed that he would be home before +long. She was positive that he wouldn’t be able to get any work in the +city, and knew that as soon as his money gave out he would return. “It’s +all for the best,” she said to Mrs. Sullivan. “The habit of running away +from home was born in the boy. His father left home when he was no older +than Archie, and no harm ever came to him. So I’m not going to worry, +Mrs. Sullivan.” And then Mrs. Dunn would go back to her home, and at +sight of Archie’s old hat or some of his football paraphernalia, would +burst into tears. + +The good woman who gave Archie his supper refused to let him start out +again on the road that night. She told him that he must remain with +them, for they had an extra bed up over the kitchen which was never +needed, and that he might just as well sleep there as not. So for the +first time in nearly a week Archie slept comfortably, and, as he heard +the familiar sounds in the kitchen below him in the morning, it was hard +for him to make up his mind that he was not at home, and that it was not +his mother who was grinding the coffee in the kitchen below. He heard +the ham frying in the skillet, and the rattle of the dishes as his +hostess set the table, and then he dressed himself and hastened +downstairs, feeling ready for a good day’s walking. + +When he had eaten his breakfast he started out again. The woman told him +that it was only about fifteen miles to New York, and that after he +had walked about six of them he could take a trolley-car and ride the +remainder of the distance for five cents. So he thanked her for her +kindness, and promised to let her know how he succeeded in the city, +for the woman was much interested in his future. He felt almost sorry +to leave the home-like place, but the prospect of reaching the city this +very day was enough to make him anxious to be off. He covered the six +miles to the trolley-car before eleven o’clock in the morning, and then +in an hour and a quarter more the trolley landed him in lower New York. + +His sensations as he was whirled along the smooth pavements, past +beautiful buildings and handsome residences, may be better imagined than +described. After looking forward to this day for so long, he was almost +overcome at the realisation of his hopes, and took the utmost delight in +everything about him. When the car stopped at the terminus of the line, +he got out and walked up the busiest street in the neighbourhood. He +hardly knew what to do first, but continued walking until he came to the +New York end of the great Brooklyn Bridge. Then he couldn’t resist the +desire to walk across the bridge, and he started out upon the journey. +Up the steps he walked, and soon he had climbed as far as the middle +of the magnificent structure. There he stood for some time, looking +out over Governor’s Island, nestled like a green egg in a nest of red +buildings, and past Staten Island to the open sea beyond It was all +grander, more beautiful than anything he had ever seen before, and +he felt glad that he had come. Then in another direction he saw the +never-ending succession of buildings, some tall, some low ones, but all +inhabited with swarms of people. “There are three million people in this +great city,” he said to himself, “and over them in New Jersey, in those +cities I see, there are a million more, and I am one of four million.” + The thought was too much for the boy, and he continued his walk across +the bridge. Once across, he came back again, for Brooklyn was a strange +place to him. In New York City he felt more at home, for he had at least +spent two days within its limits. + +Once back in the busy streets, he decided to look about for a cheap +place to stay for the night. It was the middle of the afternoon now, and +he felt that he ought to make some preparation. He knew better than to +apply at the police station for lodging, for he knew they would probably +turn him over to the famous Gerry Society, which would send him back +home before a day had passed, and then where would his ambitions be? + +He remembered the place where he had stayed with Uncle Henry, but +he knew that this would be too high-priced for his pocketbook, so he +started up the Bowery, where he expected to find some very cheap places. +He didn’t like the looks of the people he met in the street, but +his experiences on the way to New York had taught him not to be too +particular about a little dirt. So when he came to a rickety building +with a sign up, “Beds, ten and fifteen cents,” he immediately went up +the dark, filthy stairway, and found himself in a large room at the top +which served as the “hotel” office. There were rows of chairs in +front of the windows and along the walls, and in the chairs were +the queerest-looking lot of men he had ever seen. He didn’t pay any +attention to them, though, but went up to the seedy individual behind +the desk, and asked him if he could get a bed for the night. “Sure, +Mike,” the man replied, and Archie signed his name in a dirty book with +torn pages. He paid the man ten cents, and asked if he could leave his +bundle while he went outside. “Sure, Mike,” was again his answer, and +the man took his little bundle of necessities and threw them on the +floor behind the counter. When Archie had gone out, a fat man with a +baby face came up and whispered to the clerk. “Anything in the bloke?” + he inquired. “Nit,” said the clerk, “don’t yer see his baggage? Does +it look like there’s anything in it?” And the mysterious conversation +closed, to be continued later in the evening. + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + LOOKING FOR WORK--WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT. + +AFTER a couple of hours spent in going about the streets, Archie went +into a place where he bought some coffee and rolls for his supper. He +paid only five cents for three sweet rolls and a large cup of coffee +which was not at all bad to taste, and he returned to the lodging-house +on the Bowery feeling better than he had expected to feel when he +started out from the homestead where he spent the previous night, If +he could get a good meal for five or ten cents, and could sleep for ten +cents more, he would have enough to keep him going for some time. + +The Bowery at night presented a wonderful appearance to Archie’s mind. +The brilliantly lighted shops, the cheap theatres with their bands of +musicians on the sidewalk in front of the entrance, were all attractive +to his boyish eyes, but he was wise enough to pass them all by, and +to make his way as quickly as possible to the cheap lodging-house. The +street was jammed with persons of every description. He was surprised +particularly at the number of Chinamen he met, for he didn’t know that a +block or two away was the centre of the Chinese population of New York, +where the Celestials have their theatre, their hotels, their great +stores, and their joss-house. There were many Italians in the street, +too, and Polish Jews, to say nothing of Frenchmen and Germans. Then +there was the typical Bowery “tough,” who swaggered up and down, looking +for trouble, which he usually finds before an evening passes. Archie was +not afraid in this cosmopolitan crowd. No one seemed to notice him, and, +anyhow, there were a great many policemen about, who seemed to keep a +sharp lookout all the time. And as Archie shared his mother’s faith in +the city policeman, he felt no fear. + +In the lodging-house everything looked very much as before. The chairs +were still occupied with filthy-looking men, who smoked and spat and +talked in undertones among themselves. The boy paid no attention to any +of them, but, walking up to the seedy individual behind the counter, +asked him if he could go to bed now. The man answered, “Certainly,” and +sent a fellow with Archie to show him his bed. It was in a long, narrow +room, which was poorly lighted with a few gas-jets here and there, and +which was filled with about thirty beds, all narrow, and all dirty. One +of these was pointed out to Archie, and then the man left him. The poor +lad felt more homesick than ever, and had it not been that he had a +glorious to-morrow to look forward to, he would have been very miserable +indeed. As it was, he undressed and got between the chilly sheets, when +he remembered that he hadn’t looked after his little roll of bills for a +long time, and that some of them might be missing. He crawled out of +bed again, and felt inside the lining of his coat for the purse. He had +sewed it there for safe-keeping until he reached the city, for he had +some little change in his pocket, which he knew would last him for +several days. + +The poor boy’s hand felt nothing but a cut in the lining, where the roll +of bills had been, and all at once he realised that the money must have +been stolen from him. And he at once thought of the night in the ruins, +when he fell asleep among the tramps, and there was no doubt in his mind +but that they had taken his money from him. This was a terrible blow. +Here he was, with just a few cents in his pocket, and no one to whom he +could appeal for aid. It was the worst predicament Archie had ever +been in, and he hardly knew what to do. He sat on the side of his dirty +little bed for awhile, and then he snuggled under the covers and was +soon asleep again. For a boy who has been walking all day seldom stays +awake from worry. + +But when he awoke in the morning, it was to realise the fact that he +must get some money this very day or go to the police station. The few +cents he had remaining were only enough to buy some coffee and bread for +breakfast, and the poor lad didn’t know where his next meal would +come from. As he went out, the clerk in the filthy office of the +lodging-house told him that he needn’t come back any more. + +“Why did you tell him that?” asked the fat man with a sly face. + +“Because I went through his clothes last night when he was asleep, and +he had only six cents in his pocket. We don’t want no starvin’ brats +around here, to bring the Gerry Society down upon us.” + +It was well that Archie didn’t know his pockets had been searched while +he was asleep, or his faith in human nature would have been more +shaken than ever before. He had not suspected that the men in this +lodging-house might be dishonest. + +“They are poor,” he said to himself when he saw them first, “but they +may be good men for all that.” + +After a slender meal, Archie found a library where he looked over the +advertising columns of the morning papers, trying to find some position +open which he thought he might fill. There were several advertisements +calling for office boys, and all these he made note of, and then as he +looked down the page he noticed that a boy was wanted in a restaurant to +wash dishes. He decided that if he didn’t succeed in getting a place +as office boy, he might get the restaurant place. He knew that in a +restaurant he would be likely at least to get enough to eat. + +For two hours he called at addresses of men who wanted office boys, but +at every place he was turned away. “We have already hired one,” some +of them said, and others told him that they never took any boys in +the office who were living away from home. Some asked him for +recommendations, and when he had none, they looked at him and told him +“good morning.” It was all terribly discouraging, and with every minute +Archie was wishing more and more that he were back home again. Somehow +the city seemed different now from what it had been when Uncle Henry +was with him. Everything was less bright, and the things he had been +delighted with before were less interesting now. + +Finally, he entered a large, handsome suite of rooms, in one of the +great sky-scrapers, and was shown into a very elegant private office. +There he found an old gentleman seated in a great easy chair, looking +over papers, and keeping one eye upon a buzzing instrument at his side +which seemed to be spitting out long strips of paper, like a magician +in a side-show. The man looked up as he entered, and cleared his throat. +“Ahem,” he said, “you look as if you were from the country. I wonder, +now, if you have came to the city to seek your fortune.” + +Archie was embarrassed. “Yes, sir, I suppose you might put it that way,” + he replied. + +“Well,” continued the old gentleman, “my advice to you is to go back +where you came from as quickly as you can. Not one boy in a thousand +will gain either fame or fortune in New York, and you stand a wonderful +chance of sinking lower every year. And even if you do succeed, you will +miss many beautiful things in your life which may come to you in the +country. You can have a pleasant home there, and live an easy, natural +life, while here it will be years before you can expect to accomplish +much, and you will spend your life in a nervous strain. Think well, +young man, before choosing the great city as your sphere of usefulness.” + +“I’ve made up my mind, sir,” said Archie. “I have quite decided to +remain in the city.” + +“Very well,” said the old gentleman, “I hope you may never regret it. +But we have already hired an office boy. Good morning.” + +Archie walked out, more discouraged than ever. Perhaps, after all, a +country life was not to be so much despised. This man ought to know what +he was talking about. But once outside, in the Broadway crowd, Archie +forgot everything about the country, and was lost in the delight of +being one of four million. + +He now decided to accept the place in the restaurant, if it were +not taken, and, fortunately for him, it was not. So he rolled up his +sleeves, and began to wash dishes as if he had done nothing else in all +his life before. + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + IN THE STREET AGAIN--THE POLICE STATION--VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, + AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR. + +ALL day long Archie washed dishes, and before night came he decided that +he had never before had such discouraging work. The restaurant was +a popular one, and there were very many dishes to be washed, to say +nothing of the pots and pans which were always dirty. Archie no sooner +finished one sink full of dishes than another large pile was waiting +to be put through the same operation, and there was no time at all for +looking about him. There was hardly time for eating, even, and at +noon he was only able to snatch a few mouthfuls. The work was not +interesting, and it was a new sort of labour to Archie, so that +altogether he did not get on as well as he might have wished. The cook +was constantly nagging him, and telling him to hurry up, and the poor +lad tried his best to please him. But somehow everything went wrong, and +he was hardly surprised when the proprietor came in at six o’clock +with a new man for the place. “Come around in the morning,” he said to +Archie, “and I’ll pay your day’s wages.” + +So the boy was in the street once more, with no money, and no place to +sleep. He wasn’t hungry, that was one thing, for he had been allowed +to eat a good meal before leaving the restaurant. But where was he to +sleep, and what was he to do on the morrow, when he would surely be +hungry? His experience at looking for work had not been encouraging, and +he began to have serious doubts as to whether he would ever get a place. +Certainly he would starve if he waited around New York long without +anything to do. + +It was quite dark at seven o’clock, and Archie walked over to the +brilliantly lighted street which ran north and south through the city. +He had never failed to find something interesting to look at there, and +he felt now that he would like to see the bright side of city life, even +if he couldn’t enjoy it himself. So all the evening he walked up and +down the street, watching the well-dressed crowds hurrying into the +theatres and the other almost innumerable places of amusement. He stared +in open-mouthed amazement at some of the costumes of the women he saw +alighting from carriages. Never before had he seen anything half so +beautiful, and if any one had told him that there were such dresses he +would have told them he didn’t believe it. Some of them, he thought, +must cost hundreds of dollars, and the jewels worn with them many +hundreds more. How interesting, how new, it all was to him! Once he +thought of the little home in the village, and at first wished that his +mother might be there to enjoy the sights with him. “But I wouldn’t want +her to see me,” he thought, “not while I am so miserable, and feeling +so discouraged.” For Archie was beginning to wonder if he hadn’t made +a mistake in leaving home, whether he had not been overconfident and +hot-headed. But he decided to try it a few days more, that is, if he +could manage to live for that length of time in the city. + +At twelve o’clock he was walking up and down the street, which was still +bright with millions of lights, though the crowds had gone home from the +theatres, and the restaurants were beginning to be less popular. He was +still wondering how he was going to find a place to sleep, when he was +accosted by a policeman, and taken into a doorway. “I’ve been watching +you,” said the officer, “and I want to know why you are walking up and +down the street at this time of night.” + +Archie could have cried from fright, but he remembered that he was under +suspicion, so decided to tell the policeman his whole story, and perhaps +he could help him out in some way. So he described his experiences +during the day, and was surprised at the interest shown by the officer +in the recital. When he had finished he was told that he would be +taken to the police station. “You needn’t be afraid, my lad,” said the +policeman. “I’ll see that the Gerry Society doesn’t get you and send you +home, that is, if you think you want to try it here a few days longer. +You can sleep at the station to-night, and the next morning you can try +it again.” So to the station they went, and Archie was, naturally, a +little frightened when he saw, for the first time, the cells, and the +terribly severe appearance of all his surroundings. But he was given a +good bed in which to sleep, and he passed a delightful night, dreaming +of the wonderful adventures which befell him in the city. + +He was not awakened until eight o’clock, and then he found the good +policeman waiting to take him out to breakfast, He expressed surprise +that he should be so kind to him. + +“I always thought that officers were cross and unpleasant,” he said, +“but you’re not that kind, anyhow.” + +“Well,” laughed the officer, “we have to be cross very often, though +we’re sometimes sorry to be so. But I’ve taken a fancy to you, my lad. I +like to see a boy who does things. When a boy of seventeen is willing +to come to New York alone, and make his own way, without friends +or influence of any kind, it shows a proper spirit, and he ought to +succeed. I know you’ll get along if you only persevere. I’d advise you +to keep on trying.” + +“Oh, I’m going to, now,” said Archie. “I was very homesick and +discouraged last night, but since I’ve met you I seem to have received a +new impetus, and I’m ready to make a new beginning.” + +So Archie and the policeman parted friends. + +“Come around to the station to-night if you want a bed, and you shall +be cared for,” said the officer, as he turned around the corner into the +busy street, where he was lost in the crowd. + +Archie walked down the street, hardly knowing what to do first. He +didn’t feel like answering any more advertisements in the newspapers, +and he decided to go into a few stores and ask for work. He was about to +do this when he saw before him the magnificent building of the New York +Enterprise. It was a truly beautiful structure, rising fifteen stories +above the ground, and surmounted with an artistic tower, which could be +seen from almost any part of the city. The home of the city’s greatest +daily, it looked as if it were always welcoming strangers to the +metropolis, and Archie felt an irresistible impulse to enter. Everything +connected with a newspaper had for him the greatest fascination, and he +knew he would enjoy seeing through this wonderful building, which was +almost wholly occupied by the departments of the Enterprise. So he +entered the door, and passed from one floor to another, finally arriving +at the highest floor of all, where were located the editorial rooms of +the Evening Enterprise. All at once a new plan entered Archie’s fertile +brain. Why shouldn’t he be able to get something to do on a newspaper? +It had always been his greatest ambition to become a reporter, and here, +although he didn’t think the editor would take him in that capacity, he +thought he might get some sort of work in which he could work himself +up. + +There upon the door were the magic words: “Editor of the Evening +enterprise. No Admittance.” Archie opened the door and entered. He knew +it would be useless to send in his name. It was best to see the editor +at once, and without ceremony. He was seated before a large desk, +which was littered with papers of every description, and he was a very +pleasant person in appearance. Archie stood hesitating near the door, +and remained there a minute or two before the editor looked up. + +“Well, my boy, what is it?” + +Archie took courage. + +“I--I want to be a reporter, sir, and I thought it would do no harm to +ask you for such a position, anyhow.” + +The distinguished journalist wheeled about in his chair. + +“What!” he exclaimed, “you want to be a reporter. Why, my dear boy, how +old are you?” + +“I’ll be eighteen my next birthday,” said Archie, “and, sir, I’ve had +some experiences in the last two weeks, which make me feel as if I were +about five years older than I really am. I’ve been through some very +trying experiences, sir.” + +The editor was interested at once. “Tell me what your experiences have +been,” he said, and Archie began, and told him his whole story; how he +had left home to win fame and fortune, and how he had worked on the farm +for a week with Farmer Tinch; how he had been robbed the night he stayed +with the tramps in the ancient ruins, and how he had finally reached +the city. Then he told him of the night in the lodging-house, of his +dish-washing experience in the restaurant, and how he had been taken +from the street by a policeman the night before, and allowed to sleep in +the station-house. When he had finished the editor had a broad grin upon +his face. + +“By Jove!” he exclaimed, “this is certainly rich stuff. There’s a good +story in it, I’ll be bound.” + +Then, speaking to Archie, he said: + +“Just wait here a minute, my boy, and I’ll see if we can’t put some +money in your way.” + +He pressed a button at the side of his desk, and when a boy appeared, he +told him to bring “Mr. Jones, please, or one of the other reporters. And +tell Jones to bring an artist with him.” + +The reporter and the artist soon stood before the editor, who told them, +with great glee, that he had a leading feature for the next evening +edition of the Enterprise. “Just talk to this boy, Jones, and see if +you can’t make two good columns on the front page and two for the inside +from his story. I think it’s great, myself. And you Cash,” he said, +turning to the artist, “you make a good sketch of the boy.” + +Archie could hardly believe his eyes and ears. Just to think that he +was being interviewed, and that his picture was to be in the paper. It +seemed almost too good to be true. + +When the reporter had finished with him, he was taken down-stairs to the +cashier’s office and given thirty dollars in bills. “This will pay you +for the interview,” said the editor, “and give you enough to fix up +with. Now, to-morrow, you come in again, and I think I can give you +steady employment.” + +Oh, how happy Archie was! He went out into the street, and seemed to +fairly walk on air. Then he heard the newsboys crying, “Extra paper, +read about the Enterprise’s Boy Reporter.” And when Archie saw the +paper, there on the front page was his picture, together with the story +of his “startling adventures.” + + + +CHAPTER X. + + LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN--FEATURED AS “THE BOY REPORTER.” + +ARCHIE often speaks of the day when he visited the newspaper office +for the first time as the happiest day in all his life. The change from +despair and homesickness to the joy of being appreciated by some one +was so rapid that it made his head fairly swim with the exhilaration of +success. With thirty dollars in his pocket, and the knowledge that he +would have steady employment of the kind he desired on the morrow, he +walked up the Bowery feeling like a prince. He entered the lodging-house +where he had left his bundle of clothing, and so surprised the clerk +by his new appearance that he was invited to remain there for another +night. The shrewd man guessed that some good fortune must have befallen +Archie, or he wouldn’t be so happy. But the one night of misery which +he had spent in the squalid hotel was enough for Archie, and he walked +hastily up-town with his bundle, keeping a sharp lookout for a pleasant +place where he might get a room. In his previous wanderings he had seen +several nice houses with rooms to rent, but now that he wanted a room he +found it difficult to find any of these neighbourhoods. He was anxious +to get settled as quickly as possible, for he wanted to get everything +done to-day, so that to-morrow he could have time to do anything +required of him by the editor of the Enterprise. He must get a new suit +of clothes, he must get his hair cut, and last, but not least, he must +write home to mother and tell her of his great good fortune. + +Finally, in his wanderings, Archie came to a beautiful square which +was surrounded on every side by business houses and tenements. But the +square itself and the houses on it were very quaint and very handsome, +so that it seemed to be a very oasis in the desert. The green trees, +just a little tinged with the brown and gold of autumn, reminded Archie +of the front yard at home, and he decided to get a room in one of the +houses here if he could possibly do so. + +It so happened that there was a hall bedroom empty in one of the +best-looking places, and Archie at once engaged it. The price was more +reasonable than he had hoped for, even, and this made him happy, for as +yet he had no idea how much his earnings would be, and he was anxious to +be able to save something to send home, if he possibly could. The room +was nicely furnished, and looked out upon the fountain, with the green +trees, so that it was highly satisfactory in every respect. It didn’t +take Archie long to undo his bundle, and it was a pitiful display that +greeted him when it was opened. The little comb and brush, a piece of +soap, a Testament given him last Christmas by the teacher at Sunday +school, a suit of underwear, and a couple of handkerchiefs. The whole +lot of things hardly filled a corner in one of the bureau drawers, and +Archie realised that he must buy a great many things within a week or +two. + +But before going out to do any shopping, he sat down and wrote a long +letter home, describing his success of the morning, and telling his +mother of the editor’s promise to give him regular employment. He +enclosed a copy of the paper with his picture and the story of his +adventures, and it made him very happy to think of his mother’s feelings +when she read it all. Then, when he had finished, he went out to a +post-office, and bought a money-order for ten dollars, which he also +enclosed. “I know I can spare it,” he said to himself, “and it will +gratify her so much.” Then, when the letter with its contents was safely +mailed, he bought himself a new suit of clothing, and renovated himself +in many ways, so that when he returned to his room in the square it was +nearly dark, and he looked a different boy entirely. + +Before going to bed, he determined to see his policeman friend, and tell +him of his good fortune. “He is probably expecting me to sleep in the +station,” Archie thought, “and it will be a great surprise to him.” + But when he met the good man, he found that he had already heard of his +success. + +“I bought the Enterprise, and could hardly believe my eyes,” said he, +“but I always thought you would find some one to appreciate your pluck. +I’m mighty glad for you, my lad, and you must always let me know how +you are getting along.” This Archie promised to do, and returned to his +lodging to sleep. + +The next morning he was on hand at the Enterprise office before the +editor himself was down. The place was quite as fascinating as it had +been on the preceding day, and he found something new to look at +every minute. The reporters at their desks, several of whom introduced +themselves and congratulated Archie on his perseverance, were a source +of great interest to him, and the copy-boys, running here and there with +special copy for the first edition, gave an air of hustling activity to +the place that was very attractive to this new reporter. + +When the editor came he had already thought of something for Archie to +do. “Now you’ve been introduced to the public,” he said, “and we want to +feature you for a few days. Every one will be interested in knowing what +you are doing, and what is going to become of you. You must write us +an article for the paper to-day, telling about your experiences since +yesterday, about getting a new suit, and about hunting for a room. And +you can tell about your policeman friend, too.” + +This was surprising. Archie couldn’t imagine why any one should +be interested in knowing about his daily life, but he sat down and +succeeded in writing a very interesting two columns about it. He was +much surprised that he should be able to write so easily and so well. Of +course he knew that composition and rhetoric had been his two strongest +studies at school, but he had never realised before that he had any +great talent for writing. When he had finished this article, the editor +looked it over, and said, “That’s great. You’re all right, my boy. We’ll +make a great journalist of you yet,” and of course this made Archie very +happy. “Wait until this story is set up,” said Mr. Jennings, the editor, +“and I’ll see what you can do in the way of correcting proofs.” + +When the proofs came, in a very short time, he hardly knew what to do +with them. But in reading them he discovered several mistakes, which he +lost no time in correcting, and Mr. Jennings said that he had done very +well indeed. “Now you can spend the day in doing what you please. +I would suggest that you go about New York and have as many strange +experiences as possible, so that to-morrow you can write them up for us. +And it will pay you, by the way, to go out to Coney Island, which is a +different place from any you have seen before. You are sure to see some +unusual things, and in the morning you can bring me in two columns about +it.” + +Before leaving, Archie was asked if he needed any money. “You mustn’t +hesitate to ask for it, because you can have it as well to-day as on +Saturday.” But as he had left several dollars of the thirty he had +received the day before, Archie didn’t draw any more, and he thought it +most remarkable that the editor should have so much money to pay out. + +He had no difficulty in getting a trolley-car to Coney Island, and, +after an hour’s riding through Brooklyn streets, he found himself in the +most unique and most delightful place imaginable, It was a queer-looking +town, with great wheels in the air, high towers, with elevators and +innumerable merry-go-rounds, and other sources of amusement. The noise +was something terrific. Hand-organs, street-pianos, and German bands +were all playing at the same time, while people hurried about from one +place to another, enjoying the hundreds of games and riding the various +scenic railways and carrousels. Archie stood mute with delight at it +all, but before five minutes had passed he had shot the chutes, and had +ridden over a steeplechase which took him through dark caverns, where +dragons glared at him and where electrical sparks were constantly flying +through the air. It was all so new, so different from anything he had +seen before, that he was simply lost in admiration. He was standing +near a theatre, when a short, dark man touched him on the arm, and said, +“Come this way, young man, and I’ll teach you the best game of all.” + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND--RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN. + +ARCHIE was at first too much surprised to answer the man at all, but in +a few moments he remembered that he was now a reporter, and that it +was his duty to see all that he could, and have all the new experiences +possible. So he decided to follow the man, and find out what “the best +thing of all” in Coney Island was like. He was taken through several +narrow alleyways, and finally he found himself in front of a tumble-down +structure, built out directly over the water. It was very modest in +appearance, and everything seemed quiet about the place. The shades were +carefully drawn, and the dark man had to knock three times before the +door was opened and they were permitted to enter. Inside, Archie found +himself in a handsomely furnished apartment which differed greatly in +appearance from the exterior of the building. There was a rich velvet +carpet, mahogany furniture, and a great many small tables standing about +the room. The place was filled with men, mostly well-dressed, who were +playing various games. Some were dealing cards, others were twirling +wheels with numbers on them, and some were playing games with chips. +It didn’t take Archie long to realise that he had been steered into a +gambling den of the worst kind, and he was immediately on the alert for +future developments. He watched every movement of his new friend, and +noticed that he found it necessary to speak to several of those present +in a low undertone. This didn’t worry Archie, because he knew that +he was in no danger except of losing money, and he felt that he could +afford to lose some money, since he was sure to earn more by writing +about the experience for the newspaper. + +So he carefully observed all that was going on, making mental notes of +the peculiarities of the place and the people. When at last the dark +man came up and inquired if he wouldn’t like a chance to earn some money +easily, he very readily answered yes, and the man was overjoyed to +find so willing a victim. Then, of course, Archie was introduced to the +mysteries of the famous roulette wheel, of which he had read so much. +Archie was interested in everything, and didn’t mind losing four dollars +in learning so much that was new. He succeeded in getting away when +he had lost this sum, though the man assured him that he couldn’t help +winning back all he had lost, and much more, too, if he would but remain +awhile longer. Archie was firm, however, and passed out into the narrow +alleyways again, feeling that he had learned a great deal through a very +small expenditure of money. He gradually found his way back into the +crowded Surf Avenue, where there were hundreds of things, evidently, +which he had not yet seen. The crowds, too, seemed greater even than +before, and there seemed to be thousands of people arriving every hour +from New York and Brooklyn, over the various street-car and railway +lines, and by the excursion boats landing at the great iron pier. The +noise was still deafening, and every one seemed to be having a splendid +time in every way. “Surely,” said Archie to himself, “no one can feel +blue or despondent in such a place as this, where every one is full of +fun, and apparently determined to have a good time while here.” And he +felt that he would like to remain longer, but he knew he should go +back again to the city, so that he might see the editor, and tell him +something about what he had seen and done. + +So again he rode over the great Brooklyn bridge, and stopped on the +other side at the handsome building of the Enterprise. It made Archie +very happy to feel that he was now a reporter on such a great paper, and +he found it hard to realise that so much good fortune had come to him in +such a short time. He met reporters in the various hallways, and all of +them spoke to him pleasantly, so that he began to feel that he had never +been thrown with such pleasant men before. + +He had no difficulty in seeing the editor this time, and found him a +ready listener to the story of his Coney Island experiences. He insisted +on Archie’s describing all the men he had seen in the gambling den, and +then asked him if he could identify them, if necessary, and also if he +would be able to find the place again. Archie gave good descriptions of +most of the men, and said that he could take any one to the place at any +time. The editor lost himself in thought for a few minutes, and at the +end of that time he rang for a copy-boy. “Ring for a messenger boy,” he +said, “and when he arrives come for a note which I want him to take to +Mr. Pultzer’s house.” Archie stared with amazement at Mr. Jennings, and +waited for further information. He wondered what was going to be done. +He knew that Mr. Pultzer owned the newspaper, and he knew that it must +be something important that Mr. Jennings wanted to write him about. He +wasn’t long left in the dark, and he felt very proud that Mr. Jennings +should have confidence enough in him to tell him about his plans. “I +think you have discovered something which will prove very important to +the paper and the public,” he said to Archie. “We have suspected for a +long time that gambling dens have been flourishing in Coney Island, but +up to now we have not been able to locate any of them. Now that you have +found one, we hope to arouse public opinion to the danger there is in +such places, and we hope to inspire a reform movement which will be +strong enough to wipe them out entirely. I will hear from Mr. Pultzer +in a short time, and then I want you to go down to the Island with +some plain-clothes detectives and two other reporters. And I don’t +mind telling you now that there will be a good sum in it for you if you +succeed in arresting any of the leaders of this gang. You can be excused +for an hour now, if there’s anything you want to do.” + +Full of enthusiasm over the coming adventure and his part in it, Archie +hurried out to a quick-lunch counter and bought himself a light meal, +for he feared that he would have to remain at Coney Island through +the evening. Then, when he had finished, he returned to the newspaper +office, where he spent some time in getting acquainted with some of the +reporters who were working on the Morning Enterprise. He found them all +very pleasant to meet, and he learned a great many helpful things from +their conversation. The older men were able to give him many pointers +concerning things that he should, and should not, do. While he was in +the office of the Morning Enterprise Mr. Jennings came in, and, taking +him along into the private room of the managing editor, introduced him +to Mr. Van Bunting, who was the editorial head of the morning edition. +Then Mr. Jennings told of the new scheme, and Mr. Van Bunting entered +into it so thoroughly that before an hour three detectives, two +reporters, and Archie were on their way to the Island. + +Once arrived in the resort, which was as noisy and bright as in the +afternoon, they all made a bee-line for the gambling den, headed by +Archie, who surprised the others with his certainty and confidence as to +which was the right direction. In a very few minutes they all stood in +front of the dilapidated structure built out over tide-water, and Archie +heard one of the detectives say that the place looked “mighty suspicious +like.” He gave three knocks just as the dark man had done in the +afternoon, and in a few minutes the door was cautiously opened and a +head made its appearance. The detectives lost no time in pushing their +way in, amid great confusion and cries of fear, and it seemed only a +few seconds until all the inmates were huddled in a corner, covered with +pistols, and wailing in fear, when they weren’t cursing through anger. +Then they were all arrested and taken to the police station, where they +were all refused bail, and placed in cells overnight. Then the reporters +returned to the office of the Enterprise, where Archie was told by Mr. +Van Bunting to write the story of his experience for the morning paper. +This was his first work for the morning edition, and he took great pains +to make his descriptions as complete as possible, and the details as +accurate as he knew how to make them. And his hard work was rewarded by +words of praise from the managing editor when he turned the copy in for +editing. + +Tired from his hard day’s work, Archie then went up-town to the quiet +square in which he had his home, and he was glad to get to bed. He had +been nervous and excited all day, and found it difficult to sleep, but +finally the tired eyelids lay quietly over the tired eyes, and Archie +was dreaming of the cool and pleasant arbour of grapes at home, and of +how the Hut Club was holding a special meeting there to devise ways and +means of welcoming home their distinguished fellow member, Mr. Archie +Dunn, who had achieved such great success in the city. + +Notwithstanding his tired feeling, Archie was up early the next morning, +and out at the corner to buy an Enterprise. He hastily turned the pages, +trying to find the story of his Coney Island adventures, but he looked +in vain. It wasn’t visible anywhere. He was about to think that it had +not been thought worth while printing when he noticed on the front +page, in large letters, “The Boy Reporter’s Great Discovery,” and then +followed the complete account, just as he had written it. This was +the best thing yet. Just to think that his story had been considered +important enough to print upon the front page! He could hardly believe +it. Surely he had made great strides, and Archie began to realise that +it is not experience that is most needed in journalism, but something to +write about. “I have simply been fortunate in finding some interesting +things,” he said, to himself, and then, after a light breakfast in a +quaint Italian restaurant around the corner, he hurried down-town to the +office of the newspaper. + +Archie was beginning to feel, by now, that he had worked for a long time +upon the paper, and as he had become acquainted with almost every one +connected with it, this wasn’t a strange feeling for him to have. And +it was evident, too, that the editors intended to keep him busy for some +time to come, and Archie realised that he was in newspaper work to stay, +for a time, at least. And he was overjoyed at the prospect, for he found +the whole business as fascinating and as interesting as he had expected +it would be. + +Mr. Jennings, of the evening edition, was at the office when Archie +arrived, and sent for him to come in. “Here is fifty dollars,” he said, +“for your work of yesterday, and you will have more coming to you if +these men are convicted. I want to congratulate you on what you have +done so far. Come in this afternoon, and I think Mr. Van Bunting will +have a new plan for you.” + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER--THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT + TO THE PHILIPPINES--LEAVING NEW YORK--IN CHICAGO. + +AT three o’clock in the afternoon Archie was seated in Mr. Van Bunting’s +office, together with Mr. Jennings and several of the chief members +of the editorial staffs of both editions of the paper. The editors had +spread out before them, on the large table, several maps, and most of +them were busily engaged in making notes on little paper pads. All the +time, however, an excited conversation was being carried on, for some +editors wanted Archie to proceed to the Philippines one way, and some +thought that the better plan would be for him to go by some other route. +But the important fact with Archie was that he was really going to be +sent to the Philippines as a war correspondent, and that he was going +to start very shortly. He had called on Mr. Van Bunting early in the +afternoon, and had then learned for the first time what the new plan was +to be. When the managing editor asked him how he would like to go to the +Philippines, Archie could scarcely reply, so delighted was he with the +brilliant prospect before him. He managed to stammer out a few words, +though, in spite of his surprise. “I always thought war correspondents +were selected from the most experienced men in journalism,” he said, +but Mr. Van Bunting only laughed. “That’s what we have already done, my +boy,” he said, “and so far none of our distinguished correspondents have +sent us a thing worth printing that we didn’t already know. You see they +can’t send any more to us in the way of news than we can get from the +War Department in Washington, and most of these men are too old fogy to +send us anything out of the ordinary line of war correspondence. Now, +what we want is for you to go over there and have some adventures, and +write us something which will be different from what we have had before +from the Philippines. We are sending you, because you have had no +experience at such work, and will be sure to send us something unusual, +and that is what we want. If you can only do as well in the tropics as +you have done here in New York, we shall be more than satisfied with +your work. I am sorry that I won’t have time to give you very complete +instructions, but perhaps it will be as well. And now some of the men +are waiting outside to come in and talk this matter over, so we’ll have +them in now.” + +And Archie found himself in the midst of an editorial conference, during +which many things were discussed. The meeting lasted more than two +hours, and finally it was decided that Archie should travel from New +York to San Francisco, and go from there to Manila on the army transport +which was to sail on the twenty-fifth of the month. This meant that he +would have to leave the city in two days’ time, and Archie announced +himself as quite willing to do this, as he had few preparations to make. +The editors gave him many instructions about how he was to address his +correspondence, and how he should proceed in the event of finding it +necessary to send despatches by cable. And at the end of the conference +he felt that he knew all that he would need to know, so that he could +start off without fear of not being able to fulfil his mission. As far +as Archie could understand it, his chief instructions as to duty were to +the effect that he must have as many experiences as possible of as +many different kinds, and that he must write about them in a perfectly +natural way, just as if he were writing a letter to the folks at home. +And he thought, of course, that this would be very easy to do. + +Mr. Van Bunting gave him a letter of credit for six hundred dollars, +which amount, he said, would probably be sufficient to pay his expenses +while he was in the Philippines, and he also gave him a cheque for three +hundred dollars, which was intended to pay the expense of getting to +Manila. “Of course,” said Mr. Van Bunting, “you can spend as much or as +little of this as you please, and if you need more, and we find that +the venture is paying us, why, we will send it on demand.” Archie was so +overcome with the knowledge that he possessed nine hundred dollars, that +he could hardly thank the editor enough, and he made up his mind that he +would spend as little as possible of the sum, and bring back part of it +to Mr. Van Bunting upon his return. He couldn’t imagine how it would be +possible for him to spend so much money, and he felt that, after some of +his experiences since he left home, he ought to be able to economise in +many ways where other reporters wouldn’t know how to save at all. + +When the two days were up Archie had made all his preparation, and was +ready to leave New York for Manila. He had sent a long letter home +to his mother, telling her of his great good fortune, and enclosing a +cheque for a hundred dollars, which she was to spend while he was gone. +He told her that he would send her more money from time to time, and +felt very proud as he mailed the letter. He told her, too, that if at +any time she didn’t hear from him on time, she could write to Mr. +Van Bunting, and he would let her know of his whereabouts. This was +something which Mr. Van Bunting had very thoughtfully advised him to do. +“Your mother is sure to worry if the mails are overdue,” he had said, +“and if she writes to me, I will always be able to tell her of your +whereabouts, for we can hear of you through our other correspondents, if +not from your own despatches.” So Archie felt that his mother shouldn’t +worry, since he was such a fortunate boy in so many ways. + +The night before leaving he took a long farewell walk up Broadway. +Everything was bright with light, and there was, as usual, a great crowd +of pleasure-seekers on the sidewalks. It was all as fascinating as ever +to Archie, and he felt sorry that he was to leave it so soon. New York +had begun to grow on him, as it grows on any one living there for +any length of time, who is in a position to appreciate the city’s +attractions. He felt that he would almost rather be on Broadway than in +the Philippines, but of course he forgot this feeling when he remembered +the confidence which Mr. Van Bunting had reposed in him by sending him +upon such an important mission. So, after he had passed all the bright +theatres and restaurants, he turned down a quiet side street and +returned to his lodging, so that he might have a good night’s rest +before starting on his long journey. + +At seven in the morning he was up again, and at nine o’clock he was +bidding farewell to his many friends in the editorial rooms of the +Evening Enterprise. Every one congratulated him upon his great good luck +in getting such a chance to distinguish himself, and when they had done +telling him that he had a great future before him, Archie felt happier +than ever before in all his life. + +The train left the Grand Central Station at one o’clock, and Mr. +Jennings went with him to the station to see him well started upon the +journey. “You may be sure we are all much interested in you, Archie,” he +said, as the train was leaving, “and we shall look forward anxiously to +your safe return.” These words made Archie very glad, for it cheered him +to know that at least one of the editors liked him for himself as well +as for what he could do. + +The Southwestern Limited seemed to fairly fly along the banks of the +beautiful Hudson, and everything was so delightful that Archie could +scarcely believe that only a week or two before he had been walking +along country roads, anxious to reach New York, that he might become an +office boy. Every thing in this train was as perfect as modern ingenuity +could make it, and there was no lack of interesting things to be +examined, when Archie tired of the landscape. Then, when the train had +been two hours out of New York, he discovered that the famous president +of this great railway system was aboard, and, mustering up his courage, +he determined to introduce himself. He had long been anxious to see this +famous after-dinner orator and statesman, and here was a chance which +might not come soon again. So he went back to the drawing-room, and +found the great man to be quite as pleasant as he was interesting, +and Archie was asked to seat himself and tell something about his +experiences since leaving home. Everything he said was listened to with +great interest, and this distinguished wit seemed to find many of the +adventures very funny indeed. “You have certainly had some wonderful +experiences,” he said, when Archie had finished, “and I can appreciate +your anxiety to leave school. I had that desire myself when I was a boy +of about fifteen, but my father succeeded in making me change my opinion +on the subject, and without much argument, unless you can call an +ox-team and a stony pasture an argument. I had been asking to stay +at home from school for a long time. I said that I was too old to be +sitting there with a lot of girls and some younger boys, and that I +wanted to work. Finally, my father said that I could stay at home if I +cared to, and that he would let me work on the farm for a time. I was +overjoyed, of course, at the prospect of staying out of school. + +“The next morning I was awakened at four o’clock, and had to swallow my +breakfast in a hurry, because I was late, my father said. Then he took +me out to the barn and ordered me to hitch up the ox-team, and when this +was done he took me out to a pasture lot and told me to pick up all the +boulders there. Well, I picked up boulders all day long, and by evening +my back and arms were so sore I could hardly move them. I was too tired +to eat supper, and was soon asleep in bed. When my father awoke me at +four the next morning, I told him to let me alone and that I was going +back to school. After that I was content to stay in school, and said +nothing more about leaving until I had finished the course and was ready +to go to college.” + +And Archie thought it very queer that such a famous man should have had +such experiences when a boy. He remained in the drawing-room for more +than an hour, and when he left he felt perfectly sure that he had been +talking with the most charming man in the world. + +The train sped on and on, and when daylight came the next morning they +were passing through Northern Ohio. Early in the afternoon they reached +a great smoky metropolis, spread out for miles over the plains. Archie +knew that this must be Chicago, and he decided, as this was Saturday, +and the steamer wouldn’t leave San Francisco until the next Friday, that +he would have time to remain here over Sunday. So he left the train at +the station in Pacific Avenue, and, Finding a hotel near the station, he +started out to see something of the city famous for its dirt and for the +World’s Fair, two widely different things. + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + SAN FRANCISCO--THE TRANSPORT GONE--WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY + PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER--THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII. + +ARCHIE found Chicago to be so widely different from New York that +everything he saw was new and interesting to him. In the afternoon he +managed to see something of the congested business section of the city, +the tall office buildings, the great stores, and the famous Board of +Trade. It was all very fine, he thought, but still it wasn’t nearly so +fascinating to him as New York had been on the first day he visited it. +“Chicago seems so very much like some great town,” he explained to the +hotel clerk in the evening. “I feel as if I were not in a great city +at all, because there are not the evidences of a large and wealthy +population that we have everywhere in New York.” Archie spoke of New +York as if he had lived there always, and found much to criticise in +Chicago. But toward evening he went up to Lincoln Park and the beautiful +North Shore, and he felt that there was nothing more beautiful in New +York than this magnificent park, and this handsome Lake Shore Drive, +with its great houses whose lawns reached down almost to the lake +itself. On the South Side of the city, too, he found some handsome +streets and residences, but there was always that feeling of being in +some rapidly growing town. It wasn’t hard for Archie to realise that +there were older houses in his native town than could be found anywhere +in the great city of Chicago. + +The greatest difference between Chicago and New York was to be noticed +in the evening. Instead of the brilliantly lighted thoroughfares of +upper Broadway and Twenty-third and Thirty-fourth Streets, he found +but one street in Chicago which was at all illuminated, and the +illuminations there were chiefly signs in front of dime museums. The +streets, too, were not so crowded, and Archie almost longed that he +could be back on Broadway, if only for a little while. + +On Sunday he found Chicago to be a more noisy city than he had ever been +in before on that day, and he found that the people made good use +of their one weekly holiday. All places of amusement were open, and +everything was running in “full blast.” + +The parks seemed to be very popular, indeed, and there were numerous +water excursions upon Lake Michigan, to Milwaukee, St. Joe, and various +other neighbouring cities. The street-cars were crowded all day long, +many of them taking people to a Sunday game of baseball at the Athletic +Park. All of this was very interesting and very new to Archie, but it +didn’t make him anxious to remain in Chicago any longer than Monday +morning, so on that day he took the limited train for the Pacific Coast, +for he had determined not to stop off again until he reached Denver. + +Days of weary travel over a level, uninteresting stretch of ground +followed the departure of the train from Chicago, and had not Archie +found some interesting persons to talk with he would have been very +weary long before reaching Denver. As it was, he managed to pass the +time very pleasantly until the train entered Colorado, and after that +he found much that was new to look at until he reached Denver. Here he +remained for half a day, just long enough to see something of the city +and a little of the neighbouring country. Then, taking a train for San +Francisco, he reached that city on Thursday afternoon, and immediately +began to make arrangements for sailing. He found, to his great +disappointment, that the army transport had sailed the previous day, +contrary to the expectations of the editors, and of the War Department +itself, until the arrival of important despatches from Manila, which +made it necessary to start the transport at once with supplies of +ammunition. Archie hardly knew what to do. He had not anticipated +anything like this, and could scarcely think of any plan for a time, +but, finally, he proved himself equal to the emergency. He went to the +naval agent and asked him when the transport would be due at Honolulu, +and then he ascertained that a passenger steamer sailing for that port +on Saturday would reach the destination three days sooner than the +transport, so that by taking the liner he would have three extra days in +Honolulu, and would be able to reach Manila on schedule time, after all. +He at once decided that this was the thing for him to do, and as soon +as he thought of taking the steamer it occurred to him that he might +possibly be able to work his way to Honolulu, instead of paying the +regular passenger fare, which he knew was high. So he went down to the +great docks, and, after interviewing the second steward, he approached +the chief steward himself, and asked if there wasn’t something that +he could do aboard the ship to earn his passage. The chief steward was +thoughtful for a time, and finally said, “Well, yes, I believe there is. +We haven’t any one to peel vegetables yet, and if you think you care to +do that work I guess we can fix you up all right.” Archie didn’t wait +to consider whether peeling vegetables was hard work or not. He was too +glad to have a position of any kind aboard ship to be particular about +what his work was like, so he told the steward that he was willing to +take the place. “Well, be on hand at about eight in the morning, and +we’ll see that you get to Honolulu.” + +Archie was overjoyed at his good management. “I am going to save about +a hundred dollars,” he said to himself, “and I will have this money to +send home to mother.” The rest of the afternoon and the evening he spent +in going about San Francisco, and he found it to be more like New York +than any city he had yet seen. There was the same cosmopolitan crowd on +the main thoroughfares, and the same foreign districts here and there +throughout the city. He found a great deal to interest him, especially +at the Presidio, where everything connected with the army monopolised +his attention. He made friends with many of the soldiers who were +waiting to be sent to the Philippines, and hoped, on leaving, that he +would meet some of them there, but he hardly expected that he would meet +some of them in such a strange manner as it was his fate to do in Luzon. + +After a good night’s rest he was on hand early at the great steamer, +where there was such a scene of bustle and confusion as he had never +seen before, not even in New York. There was a throng of men with trucks +who were loading the late freight, and there was a constant din of noisy +voices, which, combined with the shrieks of escaping steam, made it +impossible to carry on a conversation. Archie hurried aboard to find the +steward, who immediately took him into the galley and introduced him to +the cook, a large, fat Frenchman, with small, blue eyes set far back +in his head. He seemed to be a pleasant man, and Archie thought that he +would like him very much. + +“Well, does ze youngster vant to vork, eh! Eef he do, I say you pare zis +potate for dinee as quick you can.” And the fellow pointed to a great +bag of potatoes and a paring-knife. “Now you sit zere in da corner,” + continued the cook, “and keep out uf my vay.” Archie found a stool and +sat down, and, having brought an apron with him, he put it on and began +work. The cook watched him closely, so that Archie soon learned to pare +the potatoes very nicely, and of course he was able to get along faster +and faster as he became more and more experienced. He managed, through +great effort, to get the bag finished in time for dinner, or luncheon, +as it was called on the bill of fare, and then he soon had to begin on +other vegetables, which were to be served at the more complete evening +meal. There were more potatoes, and some turnips and apples as well, +to be prepared, and it kept the boy busy all the afternoon, cleaning +as hard as he could, and never seeming to get done. The cook urged him +always to hurry, and seemed determined to have everything ready on time. +And Archie began to realise that he was working under a rather severe +master. + +He was again successful in getting the vegetables finished in time for +the evening meal, and then he had an idea that he might be allowed to +rest for awhile, but he soon realised his mistake. He was advised to +begin work on the potatoes for breakfast if he didn’t want to get up at +two o’clock in the morning and pare them, so once more he took up the +knife and began to clean and scrape. It was ten o’clock before he +had finished, and he found himself too tired to spend any time on the +after-deck with the crew, but went at once down into the small, stuffy +room where he was to sleep with some of the stewards. His back ached +from bending over, and his hands were all sore from being scraped. + +Things were not very pleasant in this bedroom, but poor Archie was glad +enough to be able to lie down on the hard straw tick and go to sleep. +He slept soundly until he was awakened at four o’clock in the morning by +the second cook, who ordered him up-stairs to work. There was no time to +wash, and no place where he could wash, so the boy was obliged to go up +just as he was, much as he disliked doing so. And once up-stairs there +were various chores which were waiting for him in the galley, so that +he was kept running until breakfast was served. And then it was time +to begin paring vegetables again. This turned out to be the invariable +daily programme, and Archie became rather discouraged. Had it not been +for the thought that by doing this he was saving money to send home, he +would have been miserable indeed, but this idea kept him hopeful. He was +seasick, too, for a time, and was obliged to keep cleaning vegetables +in the galley during the whole period of his suffering. The days when he +was ill in this way were the most disagreeable ones of the voyage, and +Archie often described afterward his feelings as he sat peeling potatoes +with a bucket standing beside him. Each night he slept like a log, and +each morning he was obliged to get up at four o’clock and start work +again. It was the same thing day after day, tiresome and monotonous, so +that Archie wasn’t sorry when the beautiful island hove in sight, and +they anchored in the picturesque bay of Honolulu. + +Once at Honolulu, Archie’s term of service on board the liner was +over, and he was glad, indeed, to get ashore, where he learned that the +transport had not yet arrived, but was expected in two or three days’ +time. These two or three days Archie determined to spend in sightseeing, +and he spent his time to excellent advantage in visiting every quarter +of Honolulu and seeing every side of life in the Hawaiian capital. He +found it a delightful place. There was much that was interesting to see, +the people were pleasant to meet, and the climate was perfect. He was +almost sorry when he learned that the transport had anchored in the bay! + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT--A STORM AT SEA--ARRIVAL IN MANILA. + +THE transport did not remain long at Honolulu, and before leaving Archie +had several things which he wanted to do. In the first place, he felt +that he ought to write the story of his experiences so far, and send +it to Mr. Van Bunting; so he did sit down and describe in detail his +experiences at cleaning vegetables on board the Pacific liner. He wasn’t +sure whether this was anything that Mr. Van Bunting would care to print, +but he decided to send it on, anyhow. He would have been surprised +had he observed the enthusiasm with which this letter was read in the +Enterprise office a month later. He would have been no longer in any +doubt as to whether it was anything worth printing had he read the +Enterprise of the following day, when the letter appeared on the second +page as one of the chief features of the paper. + +Before leaving, too, Archie sent a long, cheerful letter home, saying +nothing of his being seasick on board the liner, or of his having had to +work so hard. He devoted his letter to telling of the many interesting +things he had seen, and of his bright prospects for becoming a +successful newspaper man. He wrote a shorter letter to Jack Sullivan, +which was intended to be read to all the members of the Hut Club, +for Archie felt that it was no more than right that they should know +something of his success. He found it very hard to realise, away off +here in Honolulu, that he had ever been a member of the club, and that +he had ever lived in tents behind the barn. He felt very manly now, and +his boyhood seemed far away behind him, so far away that he now felt +like a man of twenty-five rather than like a boy of eighteen. He was +beginning to realise that age is not always governed by years alone, but +that experience does much to make one old. + +As soon as the transport had anchored in the bay, Archie went aboard to +present his credentials to the commanding officer. He found the general +very pleasant to meet, and a very appreciative listener as he told of +his scheme for overtaking the transport. The officer was surprised, +of course, that such a young fellow should be going to the islands as +correspondent, but the things he said were very encouraging to Archie, +“I tell you what,” the general remarked, at one time during the +conversation, “I believe that a young fellow like Dunn, here, can find +out a great many more interesting things than an older man could ever +discover. You see the youngster has ambition and energy on his side, +and ambition and energy are two mighty powerful things when they’re +combined. I’d hate to buck up against ‘em myself.” The other officers +agreed with the general in this remark, and Archie began to feel that, +after all, he might not have such a hard time finding interesting things +to write about as he had expected. + +The transport remained in port but one day, and in thirty hours after +her arrival Archie found himself sailing again over the blue Pacific. +The weather, for a few days, was almost perfect. A cloudless sky +overhead, a warm breeze from the west, and a smooth sea made things very +pleasant aboard ship, and Archie began to realise that there are times +when it is delightful to be at sea. The vessel was very much overcrowded +with troops, and the sleeping quarters were but little more pleasant +than aboard the liner. Archie shared a stateroom with three sergeants, +and they managed to have a lively time during the voyage. They played +games, told stories, and slept in the afternoons, but all this, of +course, grew rather tiresome after a time, and the voyage was becoming +monotonous, when there came a severe storm which kept things moving for +three days. + +None of the navigating officers had expected a gale, so that when it +came every one was taken wholly by surprise, and it came so suddenly +that there was no time at all for preparation. The sky became quickly +dark one afternoon about three o’clock, and soon the whole horizon was a +mass of great black clouds, which every moment seemed to come lower and +lower until they directly overhung the ship. There was great excitement +aboard the ship. Officers hurried here and there shouting orders to +their men, and the cavalrymen rushed about in a frenzy of haste, trying +to devise means to save their horses, most of which were stabled upon +the deck. Archie looked on in breathless interest, and was surprised +to find that he wasn’t at all frightened. He even found himself making +mental notes of the scene, so that he could send the story of it all to +Mr. Van Bunting when he reached Manila. + +There was but little time for rushing about, and it was soon evident +that the horses would many of them be lost, because there seemed to be +absolutely no way of saving them if the waves were high enough to break +over the bulwarks. The storm soon broke in great fury, beginning with a +fierce wind which swept the waves before it. There was but little rain, +and the waves rose higher and higher with every minute, until the heavy +ship began to roll and pitch in a frightful way, so that the soldiers +began to think, some of them, that she would certainly sink. Finally the +waves were so high they dashed themselves over the decks, and no one was +allowed above the gangways. The cries of the poor horses, as they felt +themselves being washed overboard, were frightful to hear, and many +a trooper cried himself as he thought of his horse foundering in the +raging sea without. Before many minutes all was as dark as night, though +the watch pointed to but four o’clock, and all lights were burning below +deck. It was impossible to keep a light above, for no lantern could burn +in such a storm. + +The waves began gradually to subside at ten o’clock at night, and a slow +steady rain came, which soon calmed the sea to a great extent. As soon +as it was safe to go above deck, it was found that more than a hundred +horses had been lost overboard, and that one mast had been carried away. +Down below nearly every man was in his bunk, for there was scarcely a +person who was not seasick, and most of them wouldn’t have cared if +the ship had gone down with all aboard, such was their feeling of +despondency. Archie was as sick as any of the others, but was able to +make notes of occurrences just the same. And when he grew better the +next day, he wrote an excellent account of the storm to send to the +Enterprise on his arrival in Manila. + +After this rough weather experience, every man aboard was anxious +to reach port, and when, after many more days, the Bay of Cavité was +reached, a great cheer went up from a thousand throats, for everyone was +overjoyed at the sight of land. + +The transport came to anchor off the forts which had once been Spain’s, +and it was announced that no one would be allowed to land for two days, +until advices could be had from Manila and the interior of the island. +This was very trying for Archie, being obliged to sit on deck for two +whole days, looking at a shore which seemed very inviting, in spite of +the general dilapidated appearance of the various buildings and docks. +Everything looked different from anything he had seen before, and the +boy felt that he could hardly wait to be allowed to explore some of +those streets which were so narrow, and those houses which were built in +such a peculiar fashion. + +Finally, the permission came for the troops to land, and Archie received +the permission of the general to remain with them as long as he wanted +to do so. And as he had no other plans, the young correspondent decided +that it would be a good plan for him to stay right with one of these +regiments, for the time being at any rate. He knew that they would be +likely to be sent to the front immediately, and the front seemed the +place for him to be. + +And then he was already acquainted with many of the men, and with the +colonel, and he realised that this would be an advantage to him in his +work. So he made his plans to keep with them. + +First they went to Manila, where they remained for a week. The quaint +old city was a veritable fairy-land of wonders to Archie, who had never +before been in a city so ancient, and here there were so many unusual +things to be seen. There seemed to be absolutely no end to the winding +streets, delightful old houses, and interesting churches, and the boy +spent many days in exploring every corner of the island capital. The +colonel warned him several times that he must look out for robbers and +other suspicious characters, but Archie laughed at his fears. But the +colonel was right, as he found later on. + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES + AMONG THE NATIVES--SEIZED BY THE REBELS. + +THE days passed very quickly in Manila, the regiment was quartered in +an old palace which had once been used as a residence by the Spanish +governors of the islands, and Archie remained in the palace with them. +There was very little to do while they were there. Each morning there +were anxious inquiries for news from the front, but there was always the +same discouraging reply that no trace had yet been found of the fleeing +Aguinaldo. The men were gradually becoming disheartened at the long +wait, and there were frequent statements by the officers that +Aguinaldo would soon be caught if they were sent out after him. The +dissatisfaction with the general in command grew stronger every day, and +at last things reached a point where there was very little loyalty and +patriotism displayed among the troops. + +The drilling was continued, however, by order of the colonel, and every +morning the troops marched out to a public square near the palace, and +went through the same old manoeuvres which they had practised for months +past. And it was harder for them to drill each week. At first they were +willing enough to work, for there was then some prospect of their being +able to use their knowledge in a fight, but now it was beginning to +seem that they would simply remain in this old palace for a few months +longer, and then go back again to San Francisco. With this opinion in +their hearts, it is not to be wondered at that most of the men became +slouchy and careless in their manners and dress, or that even the +officers themselves became disgusted at the long wait for marching +orders. + +Things had been going on in this way for a long time, when Archie made +up his mind that it was time he was hustling about and finding something +to write about which would be interesting to readers of the Enterprise. +He had sent two articles describing his life with the soldiers in the +old palace, but he knew that he ought to find something more exciting, +and more like his first articles. So, after much thought, he decided +that a good plan would be for him to take a little trip into the +interior of the island, to see whether he could find any traces of the +insurgents. The colonel had held all along for a month, now, that the +Filipinos were probably all about Manila, and still he couldn’t get +the permission of the general in command to go out and investigate +the matter. The colonel figured that it would be an easy thing for the +insurgents to come as near to the city as they cared to now, for Lawton +and Wheeler were far away in the interior after Aguinaldo, and the +troops in Manila were quietly drilling, and eating, and sleeping, with +no thought of doing anything else. This line of argument seemed very +reasonable to Archie, and he volunteered to go out and see if he could +make any discoveries. The colonel assured him that he would be in no +danger, even if he were caught by the rebels, for they would never +suspect a boy of Archie’s age and size of being a spy. So the lad felt +no fear at all, and made what few preparations there were to be made +before starting. He secured a knapsack from the commissary officer, +and in this he placed what few belongings he wanted to take with him, +together with his note-books and some provisions for the trip. Then he +secured a small pistol, which he carried in his hip pocket, and he was +disappointed because the colonel would not allow him to carry a rifle. +And when he had everything ready he said good-bye to his friends in the +regiment, and departed from the palace amid a multitude of cheers. At +the last moment the colonel tried to dissuade him from starting, for +fear he might meet with some accident, but Archie was determined to make +the attempt. + +It was his plan not to go farther than fifty miles in the interior, for +he thought that if he found no traces of the rebels in that distance +there would be little use in going farther into the forest, for, it +would be almost impossible to find them there. So he set out gaily upon +his trip of exploration, and Archie couldn’t remember when he had been +so happy before, save on that day when he first visited the office of +the Enterprise. This adventure was exciting enough to please the wildest +boy in America, and Archie could imagine how envious the other boys +would be if they could but know the trip he was having. It had an +official air to it, too, for had not the colonel been most anxious, +in the beginning, that he should go, and did he not say that he would +reward him handsomely if he were successful in locating any of the +insurgents, or in proving that he had been right when he said they were +near Manila? It was all as perfect an adventure as Archie could have +imagined. He could not have planned a better one if he had been able to +select any trip he could think of. + +He planned that it would take him at least three days to walk fifty +miles, and perhaps longer, for the roads were not very good in some +places. He knew that he would find many villages and towns along the +way, too, for the island was thinly settled in this neighbourhood. So if +he were obliged to rest, he would never be at a loss for a place to +get a bed. Archie couldn’t help thinking, as he walked along the road +outside Manila, this first morning, that he might find a body of the +insurgents in possession of one of these towns. They were very bold, +he had heard, and they probably knew that there were no American troops +anywhere in the neighbourhood, outside the city of Manila itself. And, +knowing this, he knew they wouldn’t hesitate to camp at the very gates +of the city, for they were marvellously successful in getting away into +the interior whenever an American force made its appearance. + +As he thought of this possibility, Archie couldn’t help being a little +fearful of what might happen to him should he fall into the hands of +the insurgents, and he began to wonder if he had not been a little +foolhardy, after all, in starting off on such a wild-goose chase. “But +I will have something new to send Mr. Van Bunting about the interior +towns,” he said to himself, “and if I am captured, why, I will have a +great deal to write about when I am released.” This thought made the lad +happy again, and he trudged along the road with as much vim and energy +as he had displayed during those weary days when he was walking to New +York to make his fortune. And it was a much more interesting country in +which to walk than the New York State counties had been. The vegetation +was rich and luxuriant everywhere, palm-trees, vines, and flowers +growing in profusion all along the road. In every dooryard, in front of +every hut, there grew what seemed to Archie a veritable fairy bower of +the most richly coloured flowers in existence. And they were growing, +apparently, without cultivation. He had seen nothing like them before, +even in California, and he longed to pluck some of them to send home, if +they had only been wax instead of nature’s blossoms. As it was, he kept +his arms filled with them for awhile, but after a time he grew tired +carrying them, and was obliged to drop them by the roadside. + +The country looked as if it might have been very prosperous at one +time. There were plantations laid out in excellent fashion, and the soil +seemed rich and fertile. But instead of growing crops, and storehouses +filled with spices and coffee, there was desolation everywhere, and it +was easy to see that the Spaniards had determined to leave but little +behind them for the Yankees. Every other farmhouse and wayside hut was +deserted, their occupants having gone, apparently, to join Aguinaldo, +and the whole country, outside the towns, seemed to be wholly deserted +and left to grow up in weeds and tangled vines. + +The sun was warm, the sky was a perfect blue, and it seemed a delightful +day in every way. But it made Archie sad to walk through a district +which had been made so desolate, and he hadn’t walked many hours before +he wished that he might soon reach a town, where he could find some +life, and where he could remain overnight. For by the middle of the +afternoon he was tired walking, and made up his mind that fifteen miles +was enough for any one to do in one day. But he was obliged to keep on +walking for two hours longer before he reached a village, and the great +sun was just sinking behind the blue hills in the distance when he +entered the one main village street, which was long and narrow, winding +in and out among the cabins and huts, as if it had been laid out after +the houses were built, for the convenience of the people. It was a poor +excuse for a public thoroughfare. There had probably been a pavement of +some sort at one time, but now the street was a mass of rubbish of every +sort, straw, dust, old bricks, and bits of stone being thrown together +in every rut, so that it was exceedingly difficult to walk along with +any comfort. + +There was no life visible in the settlement. Almost every hut had its +shades drawn at the windows, and there was absolutely no one to be seen +in the street. As he passed down the road, Archie could catch occasional +glimpses of black eyes staring at him through a lattice, or he could +hear some muttered word as he walked close to a window. From these signs +he knew that he was observed, and he felt very much embarrassed as he +continued his walk down this deserted lane, for he felt instinctively +now that hundreds of eyes were watching his every movement. + +Finally, he came to the public square, and he sat down here to look +about him. From general appearances, he judged this to be a town of +some two thousand inhabitants, for there was a very respectable +administration building, and a good-sized church. There were but two +streets of any consequence, the one by which he had entered the town, +and another running at right angles in the opposite direction. In this +latter street, as he stood in the square, he noticed a three-story +structure with a sign outside, and he decided to go there and make +inquiries as to where he might be able to secure a lodging for the +night. It looked as if it might be an inn of some sort, or at least a +store, so he walked rapidly up to the entrance and knocked twice upon +the door. This place, in spite of its sign, looked more deserted and +shut-up than any other building he had yet seen in the town, and he +wondered whether he would receive any answer to his knocks. It was +indeed a long time before he heard a sound within, but at last there was +some muttering inside, the door flew open, and Archie found himself in +the arms of three Filipinos, who threw him upon the floor and bound him, +hands and feet. It was all so sudden that he had no time to cry out, and +before he could say anything at all he was thrown into a dark room, and +the door shut behind him. + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + A PLEASANT CAPTOR--BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE--FIRST + GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO. + +FOR a long time Archie lay still upon the floor, being unable to move a +muscle from the shock of his encounter with the men, and because he was +tightly bound with ropes. And then he at last went off to sleep, feeling +frightened because he was in the hands of strange men, and a little +satisfied, too, because he was the victim of some adventure which might +turn out in a very interesting way. + +When he awoke, it was morning, and the light came into the room through +two small square windows, set high up in the wall. Archie looked about +the room with great curiosity, but found little there to interest him. +There was nothing to be seen but an old bed without spring or mattress, +and a rickety chair with but three legs, which stood in one corner. +The walls, he was surprised to observe, were handsomely decorated with +tapestries, and Archie at once made up his mind that this had at one +time been a private dwelling-house, and had probably been owned by some +rich Spaniard who kept a store on the ground floor, and lived in these +rooms. The insurgents had probably driven the family out of the country +and had taken possession of the house, which they had stripped of +everything useful, leaving the tapestries and works of art behind them. + +These suppositions were cut short by the entrance of a man who appeared +to be a half-breed, and who immediately began to speak to Archie in +broken English. The fellow had a pleasant face, and presented a fairly +good appearance, and Archie wondered how he could have come to this +place. “I suppose you have been wondering,” said the man, “why you have +been thrown into this room, and it won’t take me long to explain things. +You see this town belongs to us just now, and we don’t propose to have +any Yankee spies around here to tell Otis of our whereabouts. There +ain’t no troops in this town now, but there’s likely to be any minute, +and we patriots was sent here to take possession of things and arrange +quarters for our army. Let me tell you that the Filipino army will be +in this town to-day, and if you don’t look sharp you’ll be the first +prisoner to be shot. Aguinaldo isn’t a man to deal easily with spies, +and if he thought you was out here for that purpose he’d have you +riddled with bullets in a minute.” The man came up to Archie and began +to undo the ropes. “I reckon I can trust you free for awhile, for +there’s no use in your trying to get away, with the Filipino army all +around the town. Sit down there now, and I’ll see that you get some +breakfast. You can tell, perhaps, that I ain’t no Filipino, nor never +was one. I’m from Arizona, U. S. A., and I’m fightin’ with these rebels +for what there is in it just now. I’m mighty curious to find out how you +come to be out in these diggin’s, youngster.” + +Archie was willing enough to tell all about himself. He liked this man, +in spite of his being with the rebels, and he felt that he would be able +to make friends with him if he were careful to do so. And the best plan +seemed to be for him to tell all about himself, how he happened to go to +New York, and how he had been sent out here as a boy correspondent for +the Enterprise. The man from Arizona listened to the recital with +open mouth and eyes, and he frequently laughed outright at some of the +experiences Archie described. When the narrative was finished, he seized +Archie’s hand, and said, “My name’s Bill Hickson, and you can count on +me after this fer a friend, youngster. I’ll swan if I ever heard tell +of sich nerve in my life. I’ll see that you get out of this scrape all +right, but you must be careful to keep up appearances of being under +guard. I’m a big-bug in this Filipino shack, but I wouldn’t dare to let +you out openly. So you jist kind of lay around and look despondent, +and depend on me to make things as easy for you as I can. You kin come +down-stairs now, if you like, and I’ll present you to my friends. +There don’t none of ‘em speak no English but me, and all I can do is to +interduce you, and tell ‘em that you ain’t no spy, and that you are +very sorry you ever ran up agin this here town. And I guess I’ll be +expressin’ your sentiments exactly, won’t I?” Archie nodded, but in his +heart he felt that he wasn’t sorry he had run up against the town. This +Bill Hickson, in himself, was a character worth going miles to meet, +and if what he said was true, Archie stood a good chance of seeing the +notorious Aguinaldo, with his army of Filipinos, before the day was +over. + +When he reached the lower floor, he found several men lounging about in +another poorly furnished room, and they were all similar in appearance +to the men he had seen at the door the night before. They looked at +him in an indifferent way, and didn’t seem surprised that he should +be walking about without restraint. Bill Hickson stepped up to some of +them, and, after a few words in some language Archie didn’t understand, +motioned for the boy to step up. He was told to shake hands with “all +the gents,” and after he had done so he was offered a cigar, and Archie +began to realise that it was a very good thing that he had a friend at +the Filipino court. He thought, too, that if these men were samples, +Aguinaldo had a very poor lot of retainers, and later on he perceived +the real cause for the failure of the rebels to do anything more than +keep up a constant retreat. It was plain to see that the followers +of the rebel leader were “in it for what it was worth.” They had no +difficulty, any of them, in getting enough to eat, and often they had +opportunities to enjoy themselves in great fashion by taking possession +of some Filipino village and ejecting the inmates of some particularly +fine house, with a well-stocked wine-cellar. + +In looking out of the window Archie perceived that the town looked very +different this morning than when he saw it the evening before. Instead +of drawn blinds and shuttered windows, there was everywhere an evident +attempt at decoration in honour of the coming army. The streets were +crowded with a throng in holiday garb, and some of the soldiers of the +rebel army had already arrived, as they could be easily distinguished by +their ragged dress and ridiculous airs, walking up and down the street. +It was all such a scene as Archie had never seen before, and would have +made a great success as the scenario for a comic opera. But as a welcome +to an army, supposedly victorious, it was a dismal failure, and Archie +wondered what General Aguinaldo would think when he entered the town and +saw such shoddy patriotism everywhere. He hadn’t long to wait, +however, before seeing the famous rebel and the effect upon him of the +celebration in his honour. It was about ten o’clock in the morning when +he rode into the public square, followed by about two hundred ragged +Filipinos, armed with all sorts of guns and pistols. Archie saw the +arrival from the roof of the building which was his mock prison, and he +could scarcely refrain from laughing outright when he saw the boasted +Filipino “army.” It was the poorest excuse for a body of troops that he +could imagine. + +Aguinaldo rode a fine bay horse, as did several of his followers, but by +far the majority of the regiment, if such it could be called, was afoot, +and most of them were barefooted, too. The rebel leader looked very much +like most of his pictures, with the exception that he had an older look, +and some gray hairs about the temples. He was attired in a gaudy uniform +of some sort, with epaulets and a Spanish general’s hat, and he carried +himself with great dignity of manner. Dismounting from his horse, he +entered the administration building, where he held a conference with the +town officials, and probably made them pay over whatever money was in +the treasury “for the cause.” He remained within for two hours or more, +and all this time Archie stood upon the roof and watched the remarkable +scene in the streets below. The troops had scattered, and were engaged +in robbing the housewives of whatever they had in their houses to eat. +And the women seemed willing to provide them with whatever they could +afford, and there was much enthusiasm evident everywhere. But the +celebration was very quiet, in spite of the friendly reception, There +were no bands of music, no cheering, and no singing of battle-hymns. +The whole affair reminded Archie of some camp of a section of the famous +Coxey army, when he had seen it long ago. The soldiers were no better +dressed than tramps, and there was but little more discipline among +them. + +And the celebration and occupation of the town came to a sudden end. +While Archie stood upon the roof at noontime, he saw a runner enter the +administration building in great haste, and in a minute Aguinaldo +came hurrying down the steps. Then there was a great commotion in the +streets, and the two hundred followers of the chief were seen assembled +in the square, and before they were all there the general was riding out +of the town toward the interior of the island. There was no noise, and +the inhabitants stood about apparently speechless, and wondering what +had happened. Their reception had come to an untimely end, and their +hero had left them unceremoniously. Soon the last of the straggling +troops were out of the town, and just as Archie was beginning to think +of going down from the roof Bill Hickson stuck his head up and gave him +some astonishing news. “Stay where you’re at, young feller, till these +fool Filipinos gits away from here. You saw how they skedaddled, didn’t +ye? Well, Uncle Sam is comin’ after ‘em with shot-guns, and old Aggy +heard the news just in time. He is bound for the jungle, about forty +miles southeast, and he won’t reach it until to-morrow night, anyhow, +and if the officers are quick they may be able to catch him. Now you +stay here, lad, and give ‘em the news when they git here. They’ll +thank you for it, and you may be the means of gittin’ this fool of an +Aguinaldo captured. If you does, why, your future’s all right. And ye +can tell the colonel, or whoever’s in command, that Bill Hickson is +still with ‘em, and that he’s doin’ his best fer Uncle Sam, and tell ‘em +that Aggy has got about three thousand troops altogether, but only about +a thousand with him. Now, good-bye, lad, and I hope I’ll see ye again.” + +And Archie saw brave Bill Hickson get down from the roof. He brushed +some tears from his eyes as he realised that here was a brave soldier +doing good work for his country. A moment later he saw him running +across the square with four of the Filipinos, and waving his hat to +the “youngster” as he went. He followed him with his eyes as long as +he could, and then he sat down and made a solemn vow that Bill Hickson +should be named among the heroes of the war. + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS--ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT. + +ARCHIE descended from the roof, and found everything below in a state of +wild disorder. The fleeing rebels had taken with them all they had time +to get together, but in their haste they had left behind many of their +most useful belongings. In a cupboard of the dining-room Archie found a +supply of food and wines sufficient to feed several people for a week, +so he supposed that it had been the intention of the occupants of the +house to remain for some days. The news that the Americans were coming +upset all their plans, however, and now, as often before, they were +obliged to flee before them, leaving behind most of their creature +comforts in the way of food and furniture. + +“What a life they must be leading,” thought Archie to himself, “going +from one place to another, constantly endeavouring to hide from the +Americans. Now in some town, now in the wilderness, and again venturing +as near as possible to the boundaries of Manila.” And he could scarcely +help admiring their courage, or recklessness, rather, in camping so +near the head of the American government, where they might expect to be +caught in a trap at any moment. But Archie realised, too, that such an +army can get away in a very short time, and he began to have serious +doubts as to whether the Americans would ever be able to capture +Aguinaldo and his men. For knowing the islands perfectly, and being able +to get from one point to another in the easiest and quickest way, the +rebels have a great deal in their favour. + +Selecting some canned beef and some native bread and cheese, Archie +managed to make a very good meal for himself, though he ate hurriedly +for fear some of the rebels might return. As soon as he had finished he +returned to his position on the roof, for there he knew that he would be +safe in case the building was entered by the townspeople. From his high +perch he looked down into the streets, and was surprised to find them as +quiet and as much deserted as they had been the night before. The +news of the coming of the Americans had been effective in quieting the +enthusiasm of the morning, and all the townsfolk had again entered their +homes and put the shutters up before their windows. One would have taken +the place for a deserted village, judging from appearances. But Archie +knew that within the shuttered windows and barred doors there were +hundreds of people waiting anxiously for the arrival of the American +troops, and making ready to come out, when required to do so, and again +declare their allegiance to the stars and stripes. The cowardly wretches +were diplomatic enough to be always on the side of the victorious. +When the rebels occupied the town they were loyal to them, and when the +Americans came, as they often did, they came out into the square and +cheered loudly for Uncle Sam. But of course the Americans knew very well +that their sympathies were with the rebels, and the rebels knew it, too, +or they would never have dared to venture so near Manila. + +About five in the afternoon, there was a sound of many men marching +along the road, and in a little while Archie was able to see the +Americans coming down the street. It was a sight to cheer his heart +after all his experiences of the last day and night. The column was +marching at double-quick, and the handsome colonel rode a great gray +horse at the head of the regiment. Archie saw that they would reach the +square in two or three minutes, and, throwing discretion to the winds, +he descended from the roof, almost fell down the stairways in his haste, +and was soon running toward the administration building. He mounted the +great steps leading up to the portico, just as the colonel rode into the +square, and the expression of surprise on the faces of all the men was +funny to see. In a minute every hat was off, and the regiment was +giving “three cheers for the boy reporter,” while the colonel, rapidly +dismounting, hurried up to speak with Archie. + +“Why, how did you come here?” he demanded. “Haven’t the rebels been +here, and how did you escape them? Which way did they go, and was +Aguinaldo with them? For pity’s sake, say something.” + +Archie wasn’t long explaining things, and his news was so explicit and +so valuable that the colonel grasped his hand and said, almost with +tears in his eyes, “God bless you, lad. You may have aided us to catch +the gang, and anyhow you’ve proved your bravery.” + +By this time the regiment was standing at ease, and all the men were +watching Archie and the colonel with great interest. Knowing that they +were all curious to learn how the lad happened to have escaped the +rebels, the good colonel made a short speech in which he explained +everything. He dwelt particularly upon the bravery of Bill Hickson, and +held him up as a model for all the men to follow. “And now three cheers +for Bill Hickson and our boy reporter again,” he cried, when he had +finished, and they were given with a will by all the men. + +The regimental officers held a short consultation, and it was decided, +on the strength of the news brought by Archie, to push on after the +rebels as fast as was possible. But it was now sunset, and there was no +use trying to go farther to-night, so it was agreed that the best plan +would be to give the men a good rest overnight, as they had made the +entire march from Manila since five o’clock in the morning. “They will +do all the better to-morrow for the rest,” said the colonel. Archie was +valuable in being able to guide the officers to the building where he +had been confined, assuring them that they would find everything needful +there in the way of food, and a place to sleep. Some of the soldiers +were quartered in various houses of the town, for the people had soon +turned out into the street again, and had expressed their friendship for +their “masters,” as they called them. Archie could hardly refrain from +laughing as he saw some of those who in the morning had bowed down to +Aguinaldo vowing everlasting allegiance to our flag, and he assured +the colonel that he couldn’t be too careful while in the town to guard +against surprises. “No one knows the beasts better than I do,” was the +answer. “I know they can’t be trusted.” + +Archie was invited to remain in the building with the officers, and +while they prepared and ate a lunch he busied himself in writing a +description of his last two days’ experiences. He knew that a messenger +would soon start for Manila, and that a boat would leave that city on +the next day for Hong Kong, so he wanted to get his narrative written +in order to send it to Mr. Van Bunting at once. He felt that he had +some very interesting things to write about, for it wasn’t every +correspondent who had seen Aguinaldo, and had been captured by the rebel +army. He knew that most of them were content to remain in Manila, and +send only what they could get from the general in command, and that this +description of the rebels would be something new, at any rate. So he +wrote it very carefully, and succeeded in getting it ready in time to +send, so that it would be in the office of the Enterprise in less than +a month. As he sat at the table writing, Archie thought of the great +changes which can take place in one’s surroundings in a few weeks. It +seemed ages to him since the day when he left home for the first time, +and the experiences he had on his way to New York seemed now to belong +to the far-away period of his boyhood. He was beginning to feel very old +now, because he had been through so much of late, and he could hardly +realise that he was still eighteen. + +He wrote a short note to his mother at home, telling her not to worry, +and assuring her that he was in good health and in no danger whatever +of being captured by the rebels, for Archie felt quite safe after his +experience with the insurgent leaders. He knew that no one of their +prisoners was ever likely to come to a very bad end. They were far too +slipshod in their methods of holding prisoners. He was sorry not to be +able to send a longer letter home, but he knew that this note was much +better than sending nothing at all, and that it would make his mother +very happy to hear from him at all. + +The officers, when Archie returned to the dining-room, if such it could +be called, were engaged in making a very good meal from the provisions +in the cupboard, and they thanked Archie warmly for leading them to such +a good place. “By Jove,” said one of the captains, “we sha’n’t want to +return to Manila at all, when we can get such grub as this is outside.” + But the colonel assured them all that they needn’t expect to find such +accommodations everywhere in the interior of the country. “No doubt +we’ll all be living on plantains in a day or two, if we don’t catch that +fox of an Aguinaldo. And I’m willin’ to bet now that we won’t find him. +That feller’s too slick for us. He’s proved it many a time before.” + +“And to think that he was here only this morning! The nerve of him, to +come within twenty-five miles of Manila!” said another. + +“I’ll be mighty well satisfied if we can catch a few of his ragged men,” + continued the colonel. “That will be something to have accomplished, +anyhow, and more than some other regiments have done, when they were +sent after him. He’s the cutest feller I’ve heard of in a long while. If +it wasn’t for Bill Hickson we’d never hear tell of him, even. He could +enter Manila, I believe, and go out again without us ever knowin’ it at +all.” + +Archie was now called on to tell something of the rebel leader’s +appearance, and how he had acted while in the town. + +“I didn’t see very much of him,” said Archie, “because he spent most of +the morning with the big-bugs of the town, over in the administration +building. But when he rode into town on his horse he looked mighty +dignified, though he fell some in my estimation when I saw him standing +up. He looked rather dumpy then. He carried himself with a lot of +dignity, a little more than was becoming, I thought, and he received the +cheers of the people as a matter of course, and hardly took the trouble +to acknowledge them, even by a bow. The officers of the town treated +him with great deference, and I guess there’s no doubt but what the +Filipinos look upon him as their leader.” + +“Oh, there’s no doubt of that,” said the colonel. “We’ve learned that +long ago. They stand up for him whenever he needs them, and they give +him all they’ve got to help carry on the war.” + +The meal finished, the officers smoked awhile, and then went to bed, for +they were to be up at four in the morning. + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS--THE FIRST BATTLE--ARCHIE WOUNDED. + +ARCHIE was awakened at four the next morning by the sound of the bugle, +and, hastily dressing, he hurried down-stairs to learn the plans of the +officers. He found that they were going to start on the march as soon +as the men had drunk their morning coffee, and Archie immediately made +preparations to go with them. The colonel looked on in amazement. “Why +are you packing your knapsack!” he asked. “You surely don’t think you’re +going with us? You never in the world can stand this hard march in the +hot sun.” + +“Oh, yes, I think I can,” said Archie. “You see I have walked a great +deal in these last two months, and I don’t think I will have any +difficulty in keeping up with the troops. And I do so want to see some +fighting, and to learn whether you capture Aguinaldo. You don’t object +to my going, now, do you?” + +“No,” said the colonel. “If you think you can stand the marching, and +are so anxious to come, why, I suppose you can do so. But you mustn’t +blame me if anything should happen to you.” + +Archie was ready enough to promise this, for he had no idea that he +would meet with an accident of any kind, and so he continued to pack his +things in the knapsack. The rebels had emptied everything in a corner, +and had evidently intended taking the knapsack with them when they went; +but they left so hurriedly they couldn’t possibly think of everything, +and so had left it behind, much to Archie’s relief, for he would have +been unable to secure another one anywhere outside Manila. In a very +short time the regiment gathered in the streets immediately about the +square, and soon the men were marching out of the town, much to the +gratification of the residents, who watched them from their roofs +and windows. Archie fell in at the head of the column, and found no +difficulty in keeping up with the soldiers near him, though they were +marching at a rapid rate. + +The town limits were soon passed, and they swung into the white country +road, which presented the same scene of desolation which had been +everywhere visible to Archie on his way from Manila. The farm-houses +were nearly all deserted, and there was but little attempt at +cultivating the soil, which would have been productive enough had it not +been overgrown with tangled vines and weeds. And as they went farther +into the country the wilderness increased, until at last the road itself +was filled with growing vines, and the men had difficulty in walking. +Every little while some trooper would fall headlong, tripped by some +vine, and the others would laughingly help him up before passing on. +These little incidents did much to enliven the march, which became +monotonous after the first six or seven hours, and Archie appreciated +the mishaps very much until he took a few tumbles himself. He was +usually, much to the amusement of the officers, marching at the very +head of the regiment, and “setting the pace,” he said, so that he was +more likely to trip than any of the others. He was always the first to +discover a snake in the road, too, and kept a great stick with which to +kill them. He seemed to have no fear of them, but walked up to lay them +out, and on one occasion the colonel warned him just in time or he would +certainly have been bitten by a snake whose bite is certain death. This +experience made him more careful, but he still kept his place at the +head of the regiment, and came to be called the mascot by the men. + +At noon the regiment halted at a grassy spot, where there were trees, +and made their dinners from their knapsacks. The officers warned them +to go carefully, or they would find themselves without provisions before +returning to Manila, for they had been so sure of catching the rebels +at the town behind that they had neglected to bring along many supplies. +Now, of course, they didn’t know how long it would take them to find +them,--two days at least, and probably longer. + +Archie had stocked his knapsack with some food from the old headquarters +in the town, so that he felt safe for a few days, at any rate. He +ate carefully, however, and was careful not to waste anything, for he +realised that he might be called upon to aid some of the soldiers before +long. + +Dinner over, the regiment marched on again, for the officers now began +to think that they had made a mistake in not pursuing the fleeing +rebels the night before. They met several Spaniards, who told them that +Aguinaldo had marched all night long without stopping, so that he was +now at least thirty-six hours ahead of them, and some of the men began +to be discouraged, saying that it was no use following him up with such +a small force. “Other regiments have tried to find him in this way, and +none of them have succeeded,” said one of the privates to Archie. “They +keep us marching for three or four days, and finally they decide to +return to Manila, without having found any trace of the rascal beyond +hearing that he had passed this way or that.” + +The officers couldn’t depend upon what the natives told them of +Aguinaldo’s movements, for, almost without exception, they were in his +favour, and always lied to the Americans to try to throw them off the +track. It was due to this that they proceeded very cautiously, and +still, notwithstanding their extreme care, they found themselves, when +night came on this first day, in a small village where no one had seen +anything of the rebel army. There was no denying the fact that they were +off the trail, and the colonel stormed about in a terrible way when he +learned of their mistake. There was no use going back in the dark to +hunt for a trail they had mistaken in the daylight, so the regiment +remained in the village overnight. They were a lot of very discouraged +men, and the officers were enraged at the mistake, for which there was +no one but themselves to blame. + +Early in the morning they retraced their way, and started off in an +opposite direction to the one taken yesterday. It seemed that this must +certainly be the path taken by the rebels, but the regiment marched +until nearly noon without seeing any signs of them. Then, when they had +halted for dinner, the colonel decided to let the men rest while two +companies were sent ahead to reconnoitre, and report as to whether there +were any signs of men having passed this way. He was beginning to think +that the whole affair would be a wild-goose chase, and he decided that, +if these companies found nothing, the whole regiment would return to +Manila forthwith, probably to be the laughing-stock of the army there. + +The remaining companies had nothing to do now but lay about on the soft +grass, and rest. They were encamped in a stretch of grassy loam in +the midst of what appeared to be a dense forest, and all about were +evidences of the great fertility of the soil. The vegetation was so +dense that one could scarcely see through it, and the glade was cool and +pleasant, though overhead the sun was shining as warm as ever. It was a +lovely oasis in a wilderness of undergrowth, and the men enjoyed it to +the utmost. + +About three in the afternoon the sound of firing was heard in the +distance. First there was one shot, then another, and several more at +rapid intervals. Archie was one of the first to jump to his feet, but in +a second every man was at attention, with his musket in his hands. The +colonel listened closely for two minutes, and then the firing began once +more, and this time it seemed nearer. He hesitated no longer, but gave +the order to march ahead. “They’ve evidently found the cowards at last,” + he muttered to Archie. “You stay here, where you will be out of danger.” + But Archie was determined to do nothing of the kind. He felt his pistol +safe in his hip pocket, and when the companies swung out of the forest +and into the road he was marching in his old place at the head of the +column. Again the colonel ordered him to remain behind, but Archie +insisted that he would not, “Then go to the rear,” cried the colonel, +angry for the moment. “I will not have you shot down by a rebel +sharpshooter the very first one.” And Archie knew that he would have to +obey. + +The column went ahead at double-quick, and finally broke into a steady +run. Every minute the noise of rifle-shots sounded nearer, and it seemed +probable that the two companies were retreating before the insurgents. +The men were wild to reach the scene of the firing, and the officers had +all they could do to keep them in line. All the time they were running +hardly a sound was heard save the noise of their boots upon the soft +earth, and they all knew that they could probably take the insurgents by +surprise. + +Archie’s heart was beating very hard as they drew nearer and nearer to +the scene. He felt that he was about to see his first fighting, and he +determined not to miss any part of it. So he gradually ran ahead until +finally he was almost at the head of the column again. + +The troops made so little noise that the two companies, retreating +slowly, were upon them without knowing it. But when they discovered +that their comrades had come to their aid they set up such a cheering +as Archie had never heard before, and immediately faced about and went +ahead again. The rebels were about a quarter of a mile behind, marching +rapidly forward, and firing as they came. Some of them were running +among the trees at the roadside, firing incessantly, and hitting +some poor soldier almost every time they fired. They were the famous +sharpshooters, of whom the soldiers in Manila had heard so much. + +When the rebels observed that the Americans had received reinforcements, +they halted suddenly, and before they could turn about the Yankees were +almost upon them, firing volleys into them as they came. Many of the +insurgents fell in the roadway, and the others fled wildly in every +direction. Most of them entered the dense forest, where the Americans +captured nearly a hundred of them after the others had surrendered, +and some were such good runners that they escaped down the roadway. The +whole rebel army presented a scene of wild confusion. Some of the men +knelt and begged for mercy, and some cried out in a horrible way as they +saw the dreaded Yankees advancing. But it was all over very soon. The +prisoners were placed in line, and marched back along the road, and the +dead, of which there were about fifty, were soon buried. Aguinaldo had +escaped in the forest, and no one suggested that he should be followed. +All the officers knew that such a course would be useless, and most of +them were very well satisfied with what had already been accomplished. +The prisoners numbered more than six hundred, and the dead a hundred +more, while there were about seventy-five wounded. So if what Bill +Hickson said were true, not more than two hundred insurgents could have +escaped. + +Among the seriously wounded was a man whom Archie recognised immediately +as one of his captors of two days previous, and while he was looking +over the bodies for the other men, he came suddenly to brave Bill +Hickson, lying face downward in the road. He almost screamed with fear +that he might be dead, and when one of the men hurried up to him he told +him who the man was. The colonel was soon on hand, and it was found that +the brave spy was not seriously wounded, and would recover soon under +proper treatment. + +When the insurgent wounded were cared for, it was discovered that the +two companies sent out to reconnoitre had also suffered losses, and when +they marched back along the line of their retreat no less than five dead +and about twenty wounded were found. This sad news threw a gloom over +the entire regiment, and when they started back to Manila they marched +in quiet, and without rejoicing over their victory, which had proved so +costly. + +Poor Archie, when they started to march, found, to his great disgust, +that he was so weak he couldn’t walk far, and he thought this must be +due to the fright he had received. He was very angry with himself, until +the surgeon examined him and announced that he had a bullet in his arm. +And then Archie confessed that he had felt a stinging sensation at one +time during the firing, but had thought nothing of it. Now his disgust +was turned to great delight, for the idea of being wounded in battle was +glorious to his mind. “I’ll bet I wounded more than one insurgent,” he +told the surgeon, “for I discharged every barrel of my revolver.” The +wound was not at all serious, but he was told to be quiet for a few +days. He was given one of the rebel horses to ride back to Manila, and +he felt like a real hero in many ways. + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + RETURN TO MANILA--IN THE HOSPITAL--CONGRATULATED BY ALL--WRITING TO + THE PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES. + +IT took the regiment much longer to march back to Manila than it had +taken it to follow the rebels, for the wounded of both sides had to be +carried, and the arrangements for carrying them were very imperfect. +Fortunately, most of them were able to ride horses, and the officers +were successful in securing wagons enough to carry most of the others, +but there were about a dozen who could neither ride horses or lie in +wagons, but had to be carried on stretchers all the time. Of course this +was slow work, and the officers were glad enough when they reached the +town with the three-story building. Here they found things very much as +they had left them, two days before, save that the inhabitants were more +abject than ever to them, now that they had captured most of the rebel +force. + +It wasn’t an easy matter to find quarters for so many men, and some of +the Filipinos were obliged to camp in the public square overnight, while +the wounded and ill were given beds in the various houses of the town. +The inhabitants were required to furnish food, too, for the Americans +were entirely out of almost everything. They still had some hardtack, +but of meat and coffee there was none. The people of the town pretended +to be very glad to serve their “masters,” but every one knew that the +natives would be only too glad of a chance to cut the throat of every +Yankee soldier. + +The officers again occupied the old building which they had used during +their former stay, and Archie was invited to share it with them, for +they expected to rest in this town over the next day, before proceeding +to Manila. The men’s uniforms and equipment generally needed cleaning +and repairing, and the colonel was anxious for them all to appear as +well as possible when they returned victorious to the island capital. So +the next day was spent in cleaning and washing, and by evening most +of the soldiers looked as if they had never left Manila. Then came a +surprise for every one, for into the town marched a regiment of +militia from Manila, sent out to see whether the first regiment needed +reinforcements. They set up a great cheer when they learned that most +of the rebel force had been captured, and the night was spent in a +celebration of the great event. A band was scraped up in the town, the +great hall of the administration building was thrown open, and there was +dancing and music until an early hour in the morning. All the belles of +the town turned out to welcome the soldiers, hypocrites that they were, +and they danced with their enemies as readily as they would waltz with +their own dear Filipinos. Every one seemed to have a good time, and +the soldiers went to bed just in time to get three hours’ sleep before +starting for Manila in the morning. + +It was a great sight to see the two regiments, with the prisoners, march +out of the town at five the next morning. They made a fine appearance in +their well-brushed uniforms and bright equipment. The townsfolk watched +them out of sight, and then most likely cursed them for a lot of +vagabonds, but the soldiers didn’t mind their curses. They were all very +happy at the prospect of getting back to Manila again, and no one was +more glad than Archie. He had somewhat recovered from his wound now, and +rode in his old place at the head of the column, where he was the centre +of interest to every one. The men congratulated him on having proved +such an excellent mascot, and he laughed and talked with them until he +was tired. + +The outskirts of the city were reached about five in the afternoon, +and as they marched through the streets to headquarters a band of music +preceded them, playing popular and patriotic airs. The sidewalks were +crowded with people, and Archie felt happier than for a long time, +because every one was curious to know who that boy could be riding at +the head of the troops, alongside the colonel. He was known to most of +the other troops in Manila, and received many a cheer from them as they +saw his arm in a sling, and when they finally reached the general’s +headquarters, he was honoured with a handshake and the congratulations +of the commander himself. This was the climax to a very happy day, and +Archie went to bed in his little old bunk feeling that he was a very +lucky boy for having been wounded in battle. + +Of course the next few days were very busy ones for all the men, and +for Archie, too. He was obliged to tell, over and over, the story of his +experiences, and how he had managed to escape from the rebels when +they had him. This story always made the men roar with laughter, and +increased their already strong contempt for the Filipino army. He told, +too, about brave Bill Hickson, and that gentleman’s cot was always the +centre of an admiring throng of visitors, who shook his hand and told +him how proud they were of what he had accomplished. And all the poor +hero could do was to smile feebly, for he was still too ill to talk +much. + +Archie felt that he had almost volumes to write about his experiences in +battle, and he did send a very long account of this encounter to Mr. Van +Bunting. It was written in his boyish way, but one of the officers who +read it said that it was the best thing of its kind he had ever read, +so he wasn’t at all backward about mailing it. All the other newspaper +correspondents in Manila were wishing they had gone with the regiment +and witnessed the battle, but they had stayed in Manila, thinking that +this would be like the other expeditions of the kind, a mere wild-goose +chase, which wouldn’t amount to anything at all. They were all very +anxious to get the details of the affair from Archie, but he was shrewd +enough not to tell them anything of value. And the other correspondent +of the Enterprise in Manila insisted that Archie should send a cable +message describing the affair, as well as a written account, and this +he finally consented to do. The correspondent added a long account +of Archie’s personal bravery, how he had been wounded, and how he had +ridden back to Manila at the head of the column. Archie would have been +very much embarrassed had he known this, for he was still modest, but +the first thing he knew of it was from a letter he received a few +weeks later from Mr. Van Bunting, congratulating him on what he had +accomplished, and telling him that he had long since more than earned +his six hundred dollars. But for weeks he was ignorant that any one in +New York knew of his being wounded. + +The days now began to pass as before in the camp at Manila. The wound +in Archie’s arm was healing slowly, but he was hardly able to use that +member for a month or six weeks. Bill Hickson did not fare so well. He +lay for weeks on his cot in the hospital building, and was hardly strong +enough, for awhile, to talk. He was improving slowly, but the doctors +said it might be two months before he was able to walk about and take +his former active part in the campaign against the insurgents. This +enforced quiet was very trying to the brave man, and Archie spent many +hours reading to him, and telling of various things he had learned at +school and elsewhere. This constant companionship served to strengthen +their already close friendship, and it was soon known among all the +troops that Bill Hickson and the boy reporter were inseparable. And +every one who knew the story of their experiences looked upon them as +the two chief heroes of the war so far, because as yet there had been +few feats of bravery in the desultory campaigning against the rebels. +General Funston had swum the river, of course, but many held that not +even that feat compared with the bravery of Bill Hickson in serving as +a spy under Aguinaldo’s very nose. The more people heard about his +experiences, the more remarkable they thought him to be, until at last +he was by far the most popular man in the army at Manila. + +Archie sent many interesting letters to Mr. Van Bunting, telling of the +adventures of the brave spy, and one day he received a cablegram telling +him to send at least one of these letters by every steamer, for people +had become interested in hearing about him. So for some time Archie +wrote about Bill Hickson rather than about himself, and was glad of the +opportunity to do so. He knew that if a letter were published every week +or two in the Enterprise Bill Hickson would soon be famous, and this was +something he was very anxious to accomplish. He felt that no fame could +be too great for such a man, and no praise too strong. + +The commanding general decided, about this time, to begin a more active +campaign against the insurgents. It was now the month of December, and +with the beginning of the new year he wanted to inaugurate a series of +attacks against them in every part of the islands. He was beginning to +feel the criticisms of the papers at home, and of the newspaper men at +Manila, and he felt that something must be done immediately to retrieve +his lost reputation for active fighting. Every one, as soon as this +announcement was made, wondered what plan would be pursued to worry +the rebels into submission, for it was now generally agreed that the +Americans would hardly be able to capture the whole rebel army. It was +too evident that they were familiar with numerous hiding-places in the +islands. The only thing to do seemed to be to prevent their getting +supplies, and to drive them from one point to another, hoping that they +would become discouraged in the end and submit to the inevitable. + +So far the campaigning had consisted chiefly of such expeditions as that +accompanied by Archie, and most of these had returned to Manila without +having even seen a rebel soldier. It was not surprising, then, that the +general was becoming discouraged, and that he was anxious to try a new +policy. + +No one knew what the new plan would be until one day several cruisers +and gunboats made their appearance in the harbour. There had been no +war-ships at Manila for several weeks, and every one was surprised that +so many should arrive at once. There were rumours of a German onslaught, +and also gossip saying that Japan had decided to interfere, but all +these were set at naught when the general announced that the war-ships +were to be sent around the islands to bombard the rebel villages, and to +drive the rebel troops to the interior of the islands, where it would be +hard for them to receive supplies. + +This news made Archie very happy, and a plan at once occurred to him. +Why shouldn’t he and Bill Hickson be allowed aboard a cruiser? It would +be the best thing possible for their health, and he set about getting +the necessary permit from the admiral. + +Bill Hickson was able to be about now, and he was overjoyed when Archie +said he thought they could arrange to go. “I’d like nothing better than +a voyage in the good salt air. I believe it will do me more good than +a month in the hospital,” he said. Archie secured a very strong letter +from the general, and one day he stepped aboard the flag-ship in the +harbour. He had no difficulty in seeing the admiral, and found him to be +a very pleasant man to talk with. He read the letter carefully, and then +shook Archie cordially by the hand. “Yes,” he said, “I’ve heard of +you, and of your friend, too. Every one in Hong Kong knows how you two +together bearded old Aguinaldo in his den, and robbed him of most of his +troops. It did me good to read about it in the New York papers, too, and +to know that you are both getting your just measure of credit for the +achievement.” + +Archie blushed, and assured the admiral that he didn’t do very much, +that it was all owing to Bill Hickson’s bravery. “Oh, yes, I know,” + laughed the admiral, “you lay it to him, and he will most likely give +you the credit. I’ve seen your kind before. But I like you all the +better for your modesty, lad. Of course you and your friend can have a +berth aboard ship, and aboard the flag-ship, too, where I can see you +both very often. You can come aboard whenever you wish, and stay as long +as you like.” + +Archie could hardly thank the good officer for his kindness, and hurried +back to Manila. He found Bill Hickson waiting for him at the wharf, and +they rejoiced together over the good news. + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP--BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN. + +IT was early one morning that Bill Hickson and Archie went aboard the +flag-ship, but all hands were on duty there, and the gallant cruiser was +raising anchor preparatory to sailing off on her errand of pacification +by means of shell and shot, The two newcomers were assigned a pleasant +stateroom where they would not be far from the cabin of the admiral +himself, and where they could step out of their door upon the +quarter-deck, and get all the fresh air they needed. It was a very +comfortable place, with two soft bunks, and every convenience usually +found aboard the fastest ocean liner. When the fellows saw it first, +they could hardly believe it could all be for them, but the officer +assured them that it had been given them by the admiral’s own orders. So +there was nothing for them to do but accept the kindness, and to settle +themselves down to having just as pleasant a time as possible during the +coming weeks at sea. + +It was generally understood that the cruiser was to make a complete tour +around the island of Luzon, investigating every suspicious port, and +shelling towns when such action proved necessary to convince the rebels +of Uncle Sam’s superiority. The voyage was expected to occupy nearly a +month, for there was no reason for them to hurry, and the admiral said +he would like to take things easy. + +Neither Hickson nor Archie had ever before been aboard a war-ship, and +they both found much to interest them during the first few days at +sea. Every movement of the crew, every action of the ship, was of great +moment to them, and they found no lack of entertainment in examining the +great guns and the equipment of the vessel in the way of firearms +and ammunition. Archie became much interested, too, in the science of +navigation, and spent much time with the captain on the bridge, or with +the pilot in the lookout, learning as much as possible about how the +movement of the vessel is controlled. Before long he had mastered the +rudiments of the art, and the captain told him that he might some day +make an excellent navigator if he continued to take as much interest in +the charts as he did now. And Archie told him that he was determined to +master as much as possible of the business during the voyage. Before he +returned to Manila he knew more about it all than even the captain would +believe he knew, and the knowledge was very valuable to him in days to +come. + +The two visitors aboard took their meals at the officers’ table, and +they kept the whole party interested for many days, with their stories +of the war in Luzon and of their very unusual adventures both at home +and in the Philippines. For it turned out that Bill Hickson had visited +almost every part of the United States, and had lived in all sorts of +places. He had been a cowboy in Texas, and a miner in the Klondike, and +he had also been a policeman in Chicago. He knew more stories to tell +than any other man at the table could think of, and he told them in a +way that was wholly charming. + +Archie found that every one was very much interested in hearing about +his leaving home, and how he had happened to become a reporter on the +New York Enterprise. No one seemed to tire of listening to his stories +of his adventures in the great American city, and many of the officers +told him that they would give a good deal to have had his experiences in +life. + +And so it wasn’t long until the two chums were friendly with all on +board, and after awhile things went along as though Archie and Bill had +never lived elsewhere than aboard ship. There was nothing exciting for +nearly a week. The cruiser steamed slowly along the shore, sometimes +stopping entirely, while the officers levelled their glasses upon the +beach, to see whether there were any signs of the rebels being there. +Sometimes, if things looked suspicious, parties were sent ashore to +reconnoitre, but they seldom returned with news that would encourage +the admiral to investigate further. The days passed quietly, and the +two convalescents enjoyed themselves well enough. They were both much +improved already by the trip, and felt almost as well as ever. They +each had a steamer chair, and hour after hour they sat upon the deck and +watched the ever-changing panorama of the tropical shore. Now the beach +would descend slowly to the sea, and there would be numerous palm-trees +and luxuriant vegetation growing close within view, but again there +would be steep clips, which looked menacing to a ship in the dark. But +it was all beautiful, cliffs or sandy beach, and Archie thought he had +seldom passed such a wholly delightful week. + +But, of course, it all became monotonous in time, and every one, even +the officers, longed for a change. The reconnoitring parties were sent +out more frequently now, and every one hoped each time that they would +return with news of the rebels, but they were always disappointed. The +admiral now determined to steam ahead more rapidly, so that they might +get around the western end of the island. It was evident that there were +no insurgents along this shore, and as there were no villages of any +consequence, either, he was anxious to reach the southern shore, where +it was known the rebels had recently been gathering. The towns, too, +were very numerous here on account of the excellent fishing, and it was +hoped that some good work might be accomplished for Uncle Sam before +another week passed. + +Subsequent events soon proved the wisdom of the admiral’s plan. The +cruiser, it seemed, had no sooner rounded the western point than signs +were visible of rebel activity ashore. It was one Tuesday morning that +a village was sighted, built around a narrow inlet of the sea. When the +binoculars were levelled upon this harmless-appearing settlement, it was +soon perceived by the admiral that there were soldiers in the streets +with the rebel uniform, and that the insurgent flag was flying from the +administration building in the village square. All this was just what +had been expected, and there was great rejoicing aboard the cruiser. +Every man, without exception, almost, was anxious to be one of a party +to be sent ashore to attack the rebels, but the admiral hesitated before +sending any one at all. “It is impossible to tell from here,” he said, +“how numerous the rebels are, and it is quite possible that they may +have a large force of men in the village. If the appearance of the +streets is any sign, there must be quite a force of them in the place.” + But every one laughed at the very idea of there being a rebel company of +any consequence in the place, and the admiral was finally prevailed upon +to send a boat ashore, armed with thirty men. + +“Remember,” he said, “if you come to grief, that I advised against this +venture. Don’t be too bold, or risk too much, for though I can shell the +place, that won’t help you any, once you are captives.” + +But every one was anxious to be one of the party in the boat, and the +officers had a hard time making selections. “You can go, Archie, because +you’re a correspondent,” said the captain, “and you can go, Mr. Hickson, +because you’re a brave man,” and then he continued to pick out men until +the required number was secured. Of course there were many disappointed +ones left aboard the cruiser, but the captain assured them that they +might have their chance yet. + +The boat was soon off, and it was noticed that there was great +excitement ashore as soon as the departure was observed. All the +inhabitants, it seemed, were gathered upon the beach, anxiously awaiting +developments. They seemed to be absolutely ignorant of what the presence +of a war-ship in their harbour meant, and were apparently not at all +anxious as to the outcome of this visit. One of the men told Archie that +they had probably never seen a war-ship before, and that they wouldn’t +know a cannon at all. “But we’ll let them know the meaning of our +presence,” declared the sailor, “if they shoot at us.” The boat drew +every minute nearer the shore, and it was soon perceived that there +were many soldiers among the crowd on the beach. Every one thought it +remarkable that they should be so quiet, but not one of the natives made +a move until the boat was within two hundred feet of the shore. Then one +of the rebel soldiers suddenly raised his rifle and fired at the boat. +The lieutenant in command stood up in the boat and gave the order to +return the fire, and a perfect volley of shot was poured into the crowd, +which immediately scattered in every direction. The rebel soldiers, +however, seemed determined to stand their ground, and they were so +numerous, and kept up such a steady fire, that it was deemed best to +return to the cruiser, which was signalling for this action on their +part. So the boat was turned about as quickly as possible, and +the sailors pulled for the cruiser, amid the derisive yells of the +Filipinos, who had gathered again upon the beach. The rebel soldiers +continued their firing, but were such poor marksmen that but three of +their shots took effect. One sailor was shot in the arm, another in the +side, and still another was shot in the leg as he stood up to take aim +at the rebels. None of these wounds, it was afterward discovered, were +at all serious, though they were enough to arouse the anger of the +entire crew. + +When the boat reached the cruiser again, preparations were at once begun +for bombarding the town. The natives still stood upon the shore, and it +could be seen that they were immensely proud of their present victory. +It was amusing, then, to see the change in their behaviour when the +great six-inch gun of the cruiser belched forth a cloud of fire and +smoke, and a burning shell landed in the village street, apparently just +in front of the administration building, which was soon afire. The poor +natives fled in every direction, and the rebel soldiers followed their +noble example, and took to their heels, too. Another shell followed +the first, and soon several buildings were burning in the village. The +admiral watched developments carefully, and finally he decided that they +would be glad to surrender the village if another boat was sent ashore. + +Accordingly, the same boat started out again, with three new men in +place of those who were wounded, and for sake of effect the cruiser +steamed farther in toward shore. This time there were no crowds upon the +beach, and the thirty men marched to the burning buildings, where the +natives fell before them, begging for mercy. The soldiers were nowhere +to be seen, so the crew took possession of the town and slept there, in +company with thirty more sailors, that night. + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + CONTINUING THE CRUISE--ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED--THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE’S + FRIEND--A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY--LONGING TO BE HOME + AGAIN. + +IT may go without saying that the sixty men from the cruiser had a very +interesting time before the night was over. The entire village was in a +constant uproar; the poor natives, horrified by what they had witnessed +during the afternoon, ran hither and thither, some even leaving the +place entirely and starting for the interior with their goods and +families. The rebel soldiers had evidently gone for good, and a small +party sent out to look for traces of them returned without learning +anything of their whereabouts. The bombardment of the village had +certainly had great effect. + +It was only a tiny place, with possibly not more than a thousand +inhabitants, but there were evidences that it had been formerly a +flourishing town. There were fine residences in some of the streets, +which were now quite deserted, and there were some very respectable +business houses in the village square. All these had once been occupied +by Spanish traders, who had been driven away when the rebels came, and +if the insurgents had never come the town might now have been a booming +place. But the rebels were lazy, as usual, and did no work, so that now +the fine residences were vacant, and the business blocks stood empty. + +Some of the sailors looked about for a casino, where they might be able +to find entertainment of some kind for the evening, but every place +of amusement was closed, and the streets were deserted. Since the +occurrences of the afternoon all the people had locked themselves into +their houses, to await the departure of the Americans. But, even though +the casino was closed, the Yankees managed to have a good time. They +sang and danced and played the banjo until an early hour in the morning, +when they finally went to sleep, leaving only two for a night watch, +for there was no danger that the insurgents would return, after their +engagement, in which they had lost six men. + +When morning came, some officers landed from the cruiser, and all +the villagers were summoned to the public square and made to swear +allegiance to the American flag. + +In the afternoon the cruiser steamed away again on her errand of +forcible pacification, and more days of quiet watchfulness followed, as +the vessel steamed along near the shore. There were many small +villages along this coast, but all of them seemed peaceful and free +of insurgents. The captain even said that some of the people in them +probably didn’t know that there had ever been a war between Spain and +the United States. Archie, who had enjoyed his experiences during the +occupation of the last village, now began to be impatient again at +the long quiet. The day when the cruiser bombarded the administration +building would be a memorable one to him, and the succeeding events were +just such as he had been longing to see for months. And then to think +that he had taken part in the occupation of the village. It was all very +wonderful, but very real, too, and for several days he took much pains +in writing an article for the paper describing the events leading up +to and including the capture of the village. And in the narration Bill +Hickson was an important character. He had again proved himself a hero +of the first water by insisting that the boat proceed when the first +attempt was made to land, and by being the first man ashore when a +landing was finally effected. He was a leader in everything that was +done. He marched at the head of the squad when they marched through the +streets of the village, calling all the people to assemble in the public +square, and he stood beside the officers with his rifle handy when the +ceremony of swearing allegiance was gone through with. When it was +all over he was called to the admiral’s cabin aboard the cruiser and +congratulated for being so brave and so ever-ready to lead in any +dangerous undertaking; but Bill Hickson simply blushed and said +he hadn’t done “anything worth mentionin’.” The men aboard thought +differently, however, and he was even a greater hero after this +adventure than he had been before. + +Archie, too, received the congratulations of the admiral. “You have been +a brave boy,” he said, “and deserve much credit for showing so little +fear in the face of danger. I hope you will be rewarded upon your return +to New York for your bravery while with us here.” Archie, too, blushed, +and said that he had no doubt that Mr. Van Bunting would treat him +fairly when he reached New York again. + +And Archie was now beginning to wish that the time for his return would +soon arrive. It was the month of February, and he had been away from +America an age, it seemed to him. He felt that he had seen most of what +there was to be seen in the Philippines, and when this naval tour was +over with, the active campaigning would no doubt cease until the rainy +season was over. So for many reasons the boy wished he might be able to +start home soon, and as the days passed he became more and more anxious +to receive word from the Enterprise that he might return. He had sent +many interesting articles to the paper, and would be able to write many +more just as interesting upon his return, so he felt that the editors +wouldn’t object to his early return. + +For an entire week the cruiser found no signs of the rebels, but at last +there came a day when they were steaming slowly along near the shore, +and saw, back among the trees, some specks of white resembling tents +in shape. Immediately the whole vessel was excited, and there was much +gossip and wonder as to what the tents could be doing there. The admiral +at last decided to send two boats ashore to investigate, and gave strict +orders that the men should be cautious and not allow themselves to be +ambushed or caught in a trap of any kind. Of course Archie and Bill +Hickson were among the crew of the first boat, and each was as fully +armed as any of the sailors. + +The two boats pulled quietly for the shore, keeping close together, and +they were beached at the same time. The natives, or whoever occupied the +tents, had evidently not yet discovered them, and the men halted upon +landing to decide what they had better do. The tents could be plainly +seen through the trees, and there was smoke rising from a fire somewhere +in the neighbourhood, but there were no noises which could be heard +so far away. It was decided to march up to the tents and find out who +occupied them, and the column kept close together as they advanced, for +things were so quiet it was feared the rebels, if such they were, might +be in ambush. + +The men got within a hundred feet of the camp, when they heard several +terrible yells in succession, and several natives ran out from behind +one of the tents, screaming at the top of their voices, and not pausing +to look around at all. The officer in command of the company of men was +much disturbed by this demonstration, and, without pausing a moment, +gave the order to fire. Five of the natives fell immediately, but the +other six kept running, and soon disappeared among the trees on the +other side of the clearing. The men stood still awaiting developments, +but though they waited several minutes nothing more was heard, and it +was decided that the camp must be deserted. So they marched up to the +tents, and then the officer almost fainted, for inside the first one +he entered was standing an American flag, and scattered about were the +accoutrements and camp equipment belonging to an American force in the +field. There was now no doubt but what the tents belonged to an +American regiment, and that the fleeing natives were either servants or +prisoners, more likely the former. The men were all much excited at this +discovery, and the officer ordered the natives to be looked after at +once. It was found, however, that all but one were dead, and he expired +within an hour, so that the men felt that they had killed five innocent +men, a thought which made some of them weep, hardened though they were. + +It was now decided to await the return of the regiment, which was out, +the officer thought, on a practice march, and could not possibly be +gone much longer. So the men lounged about on the grass for more than an +hour. Then, about three in the afternoon, a rifle-shot was heard in the +near distance, and instantly every man was on his feet, rifle in hand. +“They must have found the rebels,” said the officer; “so be ready, +men, to help them out, should they be retreating to the camp.” This +supposition turned out to be correct, for a few minutes later some +members of the regiment came running into camp and announced that a +large body of insurgents was after them. Later the remainder of the +regiment followed, and the joy of the colonel when he found these +unexpected reinforcements was very great. “There must be more than +fifteen hundred rebels,” he said, “and they will all be on us here in +less than an hour, for their sharpshooters have been following us up for +a long time. I was beginning to think that we would be unable to fight +them, for they seem to be well equipped, but with the cruiser to kelp +us we can whip them at once. The thing to do will be to let them come +on without suspecting that we have received any help, and then, when the +fight is getting a little warm, or they are about to charge us, let the +cruiser fire a few shells into the air, and it will all be over. Most of +them are country troops, and have never seen a cruiser, so they will be +too much frightened to speak when they hear the thunder of the guns, and +see the shells explode in the air. And then they have a village about +three miles back from the coast, and if you can send a few shells into +that village it will simply ruin the insurgents. + +“I had no idea of meeting these rebels,” the colonel then explained. “I +took the men out for a little practice marching, but before we had gone +far we encountered these sharpshooters, and later discovered that they +had all these men about a mile and a half away. Then we decided to +return to camp as quickly as possible, to get more ammunition, and we +felt, too, that we would stand a better chance of resisting them here +among the trees. But now we will soon finish them up, if you will just +send a man out to tell the admiral of our plans.” Archie immediately +volunteered to carry the information, and as he could be spared better +than one of the soldiers or sailors, he was permitted to undertake the +mission. So he started out, and was on board the cruiser in a very short +time. The admiral was dumbfounded to learn that American troops were +encamped on the shore, and in imminent danger of being defeated, and he +at once set about giving orders with great vigour. “We will show them +how they can attack a small regiment of Americans with their ridiculous +army,” he declared, and at once gave orders for the vessel to move +inshore. “But wait,” he cried, a minute later, “I see by my chart +that there is a deep stream about a mile up the coast, and if I am +not mistaken we can enter this stream and perhaps get very near the +advancing rebels. We may even be able to destroy them before they have +a chance at our soldiers,” and the old admiral almost danced in the +enthusiasm of this idea. So the cruiser steamed rapidly up the coast, +and was soon at the mouth of the stream, which seemed to be the estuary +of some great river. Then she steamed up-stream, and, sure enough, the +admiral soon discovered the rebels marching rapidly along the road, +about half a mile away. They had evidently not perceived the cruiser, on +account of the high reeds growing along the banks, and the admiral gave +orders to begin firing. + +The first shell rose high in the air and exploded with a deafening +thunder, and when the smoke cleared away it was seen that the insurgents +were almost paralysed with fright, and had just discovered the cruiser +in the river. But this first shell had not hurt any one, and another +was immediately ignited. This one exploded over the very heads of the +troops, and many of them must have been killed. Those who were not +either killed or wounded turned about and began to run, and their +leaders were powerless to make them stand their ground. One shell +followed another from the cruiser, and hundreds must have been killed +outright among the insurgents. Finally they were all running, and it was +soon perceived that the Americans had advanced, and were now pursuing +them with great energy. So the cruiser could fire no more shells, and +the admiral ordered her about and back to the anchorage onshore. + +It would take many pages to describe in detail the events of the +remainder of that afternoon, as Archie witnessed them from the deck of +the cruiser, and learned of them later from Bill Hickson. The insurgents +were nearly all killed or taken prisoners, and it was found that they +numbered nearly two thousand. So it was a great achievement to have +vanquished them all. The affair turned out to have been the greatest +victory of the war, so far. + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS--A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO + RETURN TO NEW YORK--BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO. + +ARCHIE left the cruiser when she was once more at anchor, and, going +ashore to the American camp, he found things in a very lively condition +at the close of the afternoon’s battle. Every man was very jubilant over +the retreat which had been turned into a great victory, and Archie was +congratulated on having been the lucky man to carry the news of the +coming of the rebels to the admiral. The officers were all in the best +of humour, except the colonel, who felt somewhat sad on account of the +death of his five faithful servants, as the men first shot turned out to +have been. + +“There were never any better men than they,” said the colonel, “and I +would almost as soon my own men had been shot.” But he bore the ship’s +company no malice for their mistake, which he said was a very natural +one. + +After the capture of so many rebels, and the killing of so many others, +it was felt that the rebel army in this part of the island was pretty +well disbanded, and that it would soon disappear altogether. It had been +known, from the very beginning of hostilities, that there was a large +force of insurgents somewhere in this neighbourhood, but not until +to-day had the colonel seen anything of them. But it was impossible, all +the officers said, that there could be any more troops about, for these +two thousand represented a very considerable portion of the entire rebel +army. And now that these were done away with, the colonel said there +was no need of his remaining any longer in this place, and that he would +like to get back to Manila as quickly as possible. Hearing this, the +admiral said he thought room could be made for all the men aboard the +cruiser, and that they could all return at once if they so desired. This +generous offer was at once accepted by the colonel, and the next day the +work of embarkation began. By night every man was aboard, and a place +of some kind had been found where he could sleep, but of course, every +portion of the vessel was much overcrowded. This only made things all +the more lively, however, and Archie, as well as all the others, thought +he had never enjoyed any trip so much as these three days spent in +getting back again to Manila. There was always fun of some sort going +on. If some one wasn’t dancing, there was sure to be singing. And then +there were several ingenious games which were invented for the occasion, +so that time never passed slowly. Indeed, there were many who were sorry +when the capital was finally reached, but Archie was not among these, +for he expected some mail to be awaiting him from the editor of the +Enterprise. And he hoped that in this mail he would find permission to +return to New York. + +All officials were very much surprised when the cruiser anchored off +Cavité, but the admiral explained that he thought it no use to spend +more time in touring the island, even though the month which it was +supposed to take him had not yet expired. He said that he felt sure +there were no more insurgent villages along the coast, because it was +perfectly evident, from all signs, that the rebels were all in one +division. And this division, of course, had been vanquished four days +previously. + +When the report of the engagement went the rounds there was much +enthusiasm, for it was felt that at last some progress was being made +against the insurgents. The admiral was a popular hero at once, and +Archie, with Bill Hickson, was again the centre of admiration and +interest in the old palace, where they both returned. + +Archie was surprised to find no mail awaiting him, but he was not +discouraged, and wrote two long articles to send to the Enterprise. One +described the great engagement, and the other was descriptive of the +daily life aboard ship upon the return to Manila. These articles, with +the others he had written during the latter part of the cruise, were +sent off at once, and Archie felt confident that they would be read +with great interest by Mr. Van Bunting. And now the days passed very +pleasantly in Manila. He had a great deal to tell his comrades in the +old regiment, for none of them had been out of Manila since he left, +and were very anxious indeed to hear about the events of the +round-the-island tour. And Archie was very willing to tell them all he +could, for he had been much interested in the entire voyage, and never +tired of talking about it. + +Still, while things were very pleasant, and he was having a good time in +many ways, Archie was very anxious to see New York again and to get back +to America. And then, what was even more important with him, was the +knowledge that he would certainly be allowed to visit his mother upon +his return. Therefore he was a very happy boy when he one day received +two letters from the Enterprise office, one from Mr. Van Bunting, +and one from Mr. Jennings. They were both very encouraging and very +friendly. Mr. Van Bunting wrote to tell Archie how delighted they all +had been with his success in finding interesting things to write about, +and he enclosed a check for three hundred dollars, which he thought +“would come in handy now.” The letter from Mr. Jennings was of later +date, and stated that he had prevailed upon Mr. Van Bunting to allow +Archie to return to New York, to work upon the Evening Enterprise. It +was a very delightful letter, Archie thought. “We believe,” wrote Mr. +Jennings, “that we can use you here to very good advantage, and we will +be glad to have you return as soon as possible. I enclose two hundred +dollars to pay your expenses home again.” + +So now it was all settled that Archie was to leave Manila for New York, +and, now that it was sure he was going, he felt somewhat reluctant to +leave the soldiers with whom he had become friendly, and to get away +from all this life of adventure which had been so interesting and so +delightful in many ways. It was hard, too, to leave the dear old palace +in Manila, through which he had wandered so often, and every room +of which had for him some story of a Spanish prince or a great +governor-general, wealthy and wise. There would be none of all this at +home or in New York, but then there would be something better; there +would be mother, and the old grape arbour, and the Hut Club. + +On investigation, Archie found that the quickest way to get home would +be to travel by way of Hong Kong and Yokohama, taking the steamer from +there to San Francisco. It would take him more than a month to make +the trip, and, as it was now the second week in March, he could hardly +expect to reach New York before the first of May. He at once cabled +Mr. Jennings that he would leave at once for Hong Kong, and received +an answer telling him to do so by all means, and to continue to write +letters describing his trip. Archie knew that these letters would +probably not reach New York any sooner than he would, but he did write +them, anyhow, and he did see some of them appear in the paper after his +arrival. + +Archie was overjoyed to learn one day that Bill Hickson had received +permission from the commanding general to return to the United States, +and he at once hunted up the bashful hero, and insisted that he leave at +once, and make the trip with him. This was finally agreed to, and when +it was settled that the two old chums were to travel homeward together +the whole camp in Manila was interested in the news. They were both +very popular, and almost every night before their departure there was a +pleasure party of some kind arranged for them. One night they would give +a regular “stag,” as they called them, and then again they would arrange +a sort of musicale, at which there would be clog-dancing, banjo music, +and various games to increase the fun. + +The four days passed very quickly indeed, and at last the day for +sailing arrived. There was a great throng at the pier to see them off, +and there was no end of good wishes and stories of the good times now +gone by. When the steamer finally moved out into the open, there were +three cheers each for Archie and “brave Bill Hickson,” in which every +man appeared to join with all his heart and voice. And there were tears +in Archie’s eyes at having to part from such true friends. It was hard +to tell, too, when he would ever see any of them again. He realised +that hereafter his path and theirs would probably lie in different +directions. He was going to New York to work as a reporter, and they, if +they were not killed in battle, would be scattered in all parts of the +great United States, at the mustering out of the troops. It was all very +sad, and even Bill Hickson seemed to feel the solemnity of the occasion, +for he had nothing to say for many hours after the vessel had started on +its journey. + +Archie, too, felt homesick at having to leave, and they went to bed very +early, apparently feeling that the best thing under such circumstances +was to be asleep. And when morning came they both felt somewhat better, +for Archie arose filled with hope for the future, and more anxious than +ever to reach home. Bill Hickson, too, was not loath to return to the +United States, even though he had no relatives waiting there to +welcome him. The poor fellow had been through a great deal while in the +Philippines, and his constitution was almost wrecked by the constant +strain to which he was subjected. He had never fully recovered from his +accident of several weeks before, and he felt that he needed a rest from +the constant excitement and worry of life in the army. He was tired, +too, of being a spy. He had never relished the work, but he had realised +how necessary it was for the Americans to have some one to follow up +Aguinaldo and let the general know of his movements. “They’ll be a long +time catching him now,” he said, time and again, to Archie. “He’s a much +shrewder man than they think, and he knows his Philippine Islands like +a book. He can go from one place to another without the Americans ever +knowing where he disappeared to, and without some one to follow him they +will never be able to learn anything of his movements.” + +Bill had received nearly two hundred dollars in back pay, so he felt +quite rich, and Archie told him that if he should happen to run out, and +need more money, he would be very glad to furnish it to him, For Archie +was now determined to take Bill Hickson to New York, and introduce him +to Mr. Van Bunting, feeling sure that the wise editor would thank him +for bringing to his attention a man at once so interesting and so worthy +as this hero of the war had proved himself to be. But for the present +Bill would discuss nothing of the kind. He was thoroughly content to +sit beside Archie on the warm steamer deck, and watch the ever varied +surface of the Indian Ocean. + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + HONG KONG--A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO--HONOLULU AGAIN--ARRIVAL IN SAN + FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS--ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN + NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR. + +AFTER a short and pleasant voyage they reached Hong Kong, and Archie +found this city to be much more interesting than he had expected to find +it. It was charming, he thought, to run across a place which combined +the conveniences of England and America with the picturesque oddities +of China and Japan, and he enjoyed himself to the utmost during the two +days they spent there. Bill Hickson enjoyed the place, too, and they +would both have liked to remain longer had it been possible for them to +do so, but they were anxious to see something of Japan before sailing +for San Francisco, and their steamer was due to leave Yokohama in eleven +days. + +But they did enjoy Hong Kong to the utmost while they were there. They +called first, of course, upon the American consul, whom they found to be +an exceedingly pleasant man. They learned, to their great surprise, that +he had read of Archie Dunn, and of Bill Hickson, too, in the Enterprise, +and Archie began to think that his paper had a much wider circulation +than even the editors claimed for it. He thought it very remarkable, +at first, that a man living in Hong Kong should have read about his +Philippine experiences in a New York paper, but of course, after he +thought of it awhile, it didn’t seem such a very remarkable thing, after +all. And after this, when they heard of people having read of them, +they weren’t so much surprised, having come to realise the tremendous +circulation of this paper. + +The consul did all in his power to make their stay in Hong Kong +pleasant. He was anxious to have a formal dinner for them, but Bill +Hickson said that he would much prefer not having to dress up, and +Archie was willing for Bill’s sake to forego the honour. So they spent +their two days in going about the city, visiting the quaint Chinese +shops, and seeing everything of particular interest. They found many +wonderful things to look at, and Archie said that he couldn’t imagine +any more delightful place; but Bill told him to wait until they reached +Japan, for he’d find that much more charming than Hong Kong. “I’ve been +there before,” said Bill, “and I know what I’m talkin’ about, and I say +there ain’t no such place on earth as Japan for interestin’ things to +look at, and pleasant things to do.” And when, a few days later, +Archie was initiated into some of the mysteries of Japanese life by +his experienced friend, he was willing to admit the truth of all he +had heard concerning the land of the chrysanthemum. He found everything +quite beyond his expectations. The people themselves were more quaint +in their dress and manners than he had expected to find them, and the +houses and the pagodas were much more picturesque than he had imagined +they would be. And the whole atmosphere of the country seemed filled +with romance and history, and it wasn’t at all hard to believe that the +Japanese have longer family trees than any other nation on earth. + +They spent a few days travelling through the provincial districts of the +little kingdom, and then they reached Tokio, where Bill was anxious to +spend several days. “I know some folks here who can take us around and +show us everything that’s worth seeing,” he said, “and we can spend our +time to better advantage here than anywhere else I know of.” And sure +enough, Bill did know some people in the capital city, some pleasant +English people, who had met the open-hearted Westerner when he was in +the city years before, and who had at once appreciated the true nobility +of his character. They were very kind to Archie,--so kind that the lad +thought he had never before met such pleasant people. And they were +thoroughly interested in all his adventures, from the time he left home +late in the preceding summer until now. He had to tell them all about +his New York adventures, and also about their experiences together in +the Philippines, and his new friends showed the greatest interest in all +he had to say, and seemed to find it all vastly entertaining. They were +anxious, Archie thought, to make him have a very good time in Tokio, to +make up for some of his hard experiences, and if this were indeed their +object, they succeeded admirably in accomplishing it. Every day was +filled with surprises, and every night Archie thought he had enjoyed +himself more this day than the day before. They travelled about the city +so persistently, on foot and in the quaint jinrikishas, that he felt +that he knew almost every part of Tokio, and he witnessed every side of +native existence, as well as the life in the foreign quarter. It was +all charmingly new and interesting, and, as in Hong Kong, they were +both sorry when the day for their sailing came around. And always since +Archie has declared that no one can be more kindly hospitable than the +English. + +The voyage from Yokohama to San Francisco was slow and monotonous, +Archie thought, for he was now very impatient to reach the United +States, and he had also grown very tired of travel by water. There were +some very pleasant passengers, but Archie couldn’t see that he had a +much better time than when he was peeling potatoes corning over. That +was interesting enough, anyhow. The only break in the monotony was the +day they were enabled to spend in Honolulu, and on that day Archie went +again to some of the places he had seen during his first visit to the +attractive city. And he called again upon some of the friends of his +first visit, and found that most of them had read of his great success +as a war correspondent, and of his many exciting experiences in the +Philippines. They were all profuse in congratulating him upon what +he had accomplished, and every one seemed to think he had been very +successful indeed. + +While they were in Honolulu a vessel arrived, bound for Japan, and +Archie was delighted to find it was the same vessel upon which he had +worked his passage from San Francisco on his way to Manila. He went +aboard and met some of the friends he had made there, and found that +they all knew now who it was they had carried as chore-boy in the +galley. They all seemed glad to hear of his success, and to know that +he was coming home as a first-class passenger. The cook treated him with +much deference, and started to apologise for his treatment of Archie on +the way over; but the boy stopped him, and told him that no apology +was necessary. “I think I may have been an unwilling worker,” he said, +“because of course I didn’t like the work at all, and it was hard for +me to take an interest in peeling potatoes when I was looking forward to +accomplishing such great things in the Philippines.” + +“Oh,” said the cook, “you was a fine worker. Sure, I ain’t had so good +a boy since.” And Archie laughed to see the change in opinion which is +sometimes brought about by a change in circumstances. + +Archie enjoyed the city quite as much as before, but he was glad, +nevertheless, when the steamer continued her voyage east. And then he +began to count the days until they should arrive in San Francisco, and +of course these last days seemed the longest ones of the voyage. But +they gradually passed away, and as they steamed ahead, coming nearer +every hour to that dear land called “home,” both Archie and Bill began +to wonder how they would like it all, after their adventurous life in +the Philippines. Bill, in particular, was doubtful whether he would +again be able to settle down to a quiet existence in some small place, +and Archie assured him that he must live in New York, where he would be +sure to find things lively enough to suit him. + +At last came the eventful day when the great steamer threaded her way +through the beautiful Golden Gate, and discharged her passengers at the +pier. As Archie and Bill had but little baggage, they were almost the +first ones to leave the vessel, and were hurrying away to find a hotel +where they could remain overnight when Archie felt some one touch him on +the shoulder, and, turning about and seeing no one he knew, was about +to go on, when a man introduced himself as being the San Francisco +correspondent of the Enterprise. “And these gentlemen here,” said he, +“are reporters from the newspapers here. They would be glad to have +you say a few words about your experiences during the last few months.” + Archie was quite dumbfounded. It had never occurred to him that he was a +person so important as to be interviewed, but he was willing and glad to +accommodate the reporters, and told them to accompany him to his hotel. +Once there, he answered all their questions, and didn’t find it hard at +all to give them his opinion of the situation in the Philippines, and +what he thought should be done by the government to stop the rebellion. +“The President will soon put an end to it,” he said, “if he can only +have the support of Congress. But as long as there are members of +Congress fighting his policy, the insurgents are going to continue their +insane efforts to establish an independent government.” And some of the +reporters smiled to hear so young a fellow talking about the policy in +the Philippines. They felt that he was well-informed, however, and put +down every word he said. + +The interviews over, Archie and Bill went early to bed. The Enterprise +correspondent had telegraphed the news of their arrival to New York, and +had received word from Mr. Van Bunting to send them on to New York at +once. So, early in the morning, the two started for the East, and the +train seemed to travel quite as slowly as the steamer. “It does seem +good to be in our own country again,” they said a hundred times during +the days that followed, and when they reached the Empire State and began +their journey down the Hudson River, Archie could hardly restrain his +enthusiasm at being again in his native commonwealth. + +There was quite a delegation at the Grand Central Station to meet them. +Mr. Jennings was there in person, and he explained that Mr. Van +Bunting was waiting anxiously at the office to see him. Then there were +reporters from the various other city papers, who wanted interviews, +but Archie was told to say whatever he had to say in the columns of the +Enterprise, so he had to deny the reporters for the first time. Bill +Hickson was introduced at once, and became the lion of the hour. Every +one had read of him, and was glad to shake his hand, and poor Bill was +quite bewildered by so much attention. They didn’t linger long at the +station, however, but hurried down to the Enterprise office, where Mr. +Van Bunting was awaiting them. He grasped Archie’s hand in his as they +entered, and cried, “Well done, my boy, well done.” And Archie felt as +if he had grown three feet that instant. + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + DOING “SPECIAL” WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER--INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS + MEN--CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS. + +THERE was so much to tell Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting, that Archie +didn’t get away from the Enterprise office until seven o’clock in the +evening. And what a lot they did say to each other during the afternoon! +Archie told of all his experiences, and found them all anxious to hear +about them. He learned, to his joy, that everything he had sent had been +printed, and that the articles had made a great hit with the public. “We +would have liked to keep you there longer, but we knew you must be worn +out, and then we want you to stay right here, now, and see if you +cannot get us some good interviews and articles of various kinds for the +Evening Enterprise. The paper has been losing ground somewhat, of late, +and we need some new life for its pages. Of course the morning paper +profited greatly by your articles, but the evening edition seemed very +weak in comparison, and we think it only fair to Mr. Jennings to let +him have you on his staff for awhile now. So if you are willing, you can +start in to-morrow as a member of the staff. We will see that you are +well paid for what you write, or we will put you on salary, whichever +you like. You can think it over, and in the morning you can tell us +which plan you like best.” + +Archie wanted to ask for a few days’ absence to return home, but he +felt, somehow, that he ought not to ask it just now. So he contented +himself with writing a long letter to his mother, in which he enclosed a +very large check, money which he had not used on his return to New York. +He told her that he would be home just as soon as he could get off for +any length of time, and he knew that she would now be looking forward to +the visit every day. She had written him about the enthusiasm displayed +by every one over his achievements, and how proud she was of what he +had accomplished. “I think I am the proudest mother in the country,” she +wrote one day, and this sentence made Archie very happy, of course, and +more anxious than ever to return home. He received a letter, too, from +Jack Sullivan, telling him how much the boys all thought of his success, +and how every member of the Hut Club had longed time and again to be +with him. “It all reads just like some book,” Jack wrote, “and we are +dying to have you come home and tell us all about it.” Then his mother +sent him clippings from the town papers, eulogising his efforts, and +calling him the “coming man of the State.” All this was very pleasant +and very encouraging, and Archie couldn’t help having a kindly feeling +for the townsfolk who thought so much of him. + +New York was as delightful as ever. It was now the last of April, and +the trees were all green with fresh leaves, and the numerous little +parks scattered over the city were looking their very best. The asphalt +pavements looked clean and elegant when Archie thought of some other +streets he had seen, and the tall office buildings lifted their ornate +domes and cupolas into a sky of clear blue. “Surely,” he thought to +himself, “this is the most charming city in all the world.” Fifth +Avenue, with its crowds of fashionable folk, and its throng of vehicles, +was a delight of which he never tired, and when he went into the +Bowery, just to see how things were looking now, he found it quite as +interesting and as dirty as in the fall. + +But the first place he visited was the dear little square away +down-town, where he had lived during those few happy days spent in New +York. It, too, looked the same, only the flowers and grass were fresher +now, and the fountain seemed to flow more joyously, now that spring was +here. The house where he had lodged was as clean as ever, and Archie +at once decided to engage a room here, where he could have his New York +home. So he called upon the motherly landlady, and was glad to learn +that the room he had first was still vacant, and that he could take +possession at once. + +As before, when he came to this house, Archie was almost out of +clothing, so he went out and fitted himself with everything he needed. +And this time he felt able to buy the best to be had, for he thought he +had now earned the privilege to dress well if he liked. And then, when +he had everything he needed to wear, he went out and bought many pretty +things for his room, for he felt that he would like to have it just as +cosy and home-like as possible. He wasn’t able to do much at it this +first night, but in the succeeding days he furnished the place in a +charming way, so that the landlady said it was the “handsomest room in +the house, sir.” The dear old lady could hardly understand this great +change in her lodger’s circumstances. She worried about it very often, +and discussed the question with many of the neighbours. “He come here +last fall looking mighty poor-like, but, lawsy me, he’s as fine now as +any man on the avenue.” And she never did understand it until one day +she learned that her lodger was the “very young man who had been to the +war in the Philippines, and writ about his battles in the Enterprise.” + +There was no ceremony when Archie began work on the evening paper. Mr. +Jennings told him that he thought they understood each other pretty +well, and that he could use his own discretion, very often, about +getting articles. “You can be as independent as you like, Archie,” he +said, “and use your own ideas as much as you like.” This pleased the boy +very much indeed. He was beginning to feel now that he had really won +his spurs, and that he was a full-fledged journalist. It seemed scarcely +possible that it had taken him little more than six months to make +this great advance in circumstances, and yet he could see himself a few +months previous, sleeping in the station-house. Now his days of poverty +were surely over, and he would have a clear path ahead of him to +accomplish his great ambition to be a successful author and writer of +books. For the present, it was good experience for him to be working +upon the Enterprise, and he felt that he ought to be very much +contented, since there were men old enough to be his father who were not +earning as much money. + +He liked the work upon the evening paper very much. He didn’t have to +get down early in the morning, and at three o’clock in the afternoon +he was always through. He was very glad indeed that there was no night +work, for he now spent his evenings in studying shorthand, which he +thought might be helpful to him in many ways. He didn’t have much +routine work to do upon the paper in the beginning, but he told Mr. +Jennings that he would like to get as much experience as possible, so +the good editor gave him a lot of regular reporting to do, as well as +the special work which was daily featured in the paper. This special +work consisted of interviews with various successful men. Archie had +always felt a great admiration for men who had “done something,” and +as New York was simply filled with wealthy and successful men, who had +started as poor boys, he found a wide field for work. He found it very +interesting to meet these men of affairs, and have them tell him of +their early struggles, how they had begun on the farm or in the factory, +and had worked themselves up through industry and perseverance to the +high places they now occupied. He found it very easy to get access +to most of them, for they had all read of his experiences in the +Enterprise, and Archie found that his fame as the “Boy Reporter” was +quite general and widespread. Some of the great men were quite as much +determined to interview him as he was anxious to interview them, so +that he usually got along very well by telling them first of his own +experiences, and then asking them about their own boyhood days. It +was work that never became monotonous, for each day he saw a man quite +different in most respects from the man he had interviewed the day +before, and of course every one had something different to say. + +These interviews proved very successful when published in the Evening +Enterprise, and Mr. Jennings had him continue them during all the weeks +Archie was connected with the paper. And of course he did other things, +too, work which took him into every part of the great city, looking +up this event, or investigating this reported disappearance or murder. +Archie was quite successful in this line, too, and, as he was being paid +by the column, his weekly income was something larger than he had ever +dared to hope for in all his life. He was now enabled to study his +stenography at the best school, and to indulge himself in many things +which had been denied him before. He could, for instance, attend the +performances of grand opera, and hear the great musical artists of the +world. He was able, too, to read the best literature, and he gradually +learned to appreciate all the many good things in life. He was very glad +to find himself broadening in such a way, for he realised that he +would not always want to be a “Boy Reporter,” and that he had better be +developing his mind in every possible way. + +He had not been back long in New York before he met all his old friends. +One of the first upon whom he called was the good policeman who had been +so very kind to him when he had no place to sleep. The large-hearted man +was as enthusiastic over his success as if he had been his own son, +and Archie felt that here was one true friend upon whom he could always +depend. The policeman never tired of telling about that first night when +he found Archie walking up and down Broadway, and he always spoke of him +to the other officers as “that boy of mine.” So the boy, who was now a +full-fledged reporter, spent as much time with this friend as possible, +and many a time he sat at the station-house telling them all of his +adventures in the Orient. + +Another friend whom he met was the great railway president with whom he +had travelled to Chicago on his way to San Francisco. Archie had liked +this man from the very first, and he felt that in him he would +always find a friend, because he had shown such interest in his first +undertaking. And when he called upon him in his elegant office, he +received a very cordial greeting. + +“No, indeed,” said the great man of affairs, “I have never forgotten our +trip West together, and I have followed you with much interest through +the columns of the Enterprise. And I am glad that you are back again in +New York, for I hope to see a great deal of you. You must come up to my +house some evening and tell us all about yourself.” + +Archie was naturally much surprised to receive an invitation of this +kind, but he resolved to accept it, nevertheless. + +Bill Hickson was now employed in the Brooklyn navy yard. He had been +featured for several days in the Enterprise, and had enjoyed the +excitement of New York for awhile, but he decided he would like to be at +work. So one day Archie learned that he was working at the navy yard. + +“I’ve got to be with Uncle Sam,” was all the reason Bill would give for +his action. + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE--STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL--LIVING + AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS. + +IT was now September. Archie had been in New York the whole summer +through, attending carefully to his work on the Evening Enterprise, and +continuing his study of stenography. He had taken occasional trips to +Long Branch and Asbury Park on Saturday afternoons, but every other day +he spent in working up ideas for the paper, and each evening he devoted +to the shorthand school. By this time, though, he felt that he knew all +that was necessary of shorthand, and found himself more free to go about +in the evenings. He visited his friends more frequently, and sometimes +spent whole evenings in studying works on English literature, for he was +ambitious to know more of the great work he had decided to make his own. +This study was not really work to him, for his interest in everything +connected with literature was so great that he found a pleasure in +reading even the most classical books on the subject, and of course so +much reading of this sort did a great deal to educate his mind along +this line of work. + +One evening in the early fall, Archie decided to accept the invitation +of Mr. Depaw, the railway president, to call. So he carefully dressed +himself in the best he had, and walked up Fifth Avenue and into the side +street where the great man had his home. He rang the bell and presented +his card, and waited in the drawing-room for an answer. The footman was +gone but a moment, and returning, announced that the family would be +down directly. Archie was very much pleased that he was to meet the +entire family, and looked about him with great interest at the elegant +furnishings of the room in which he sat. He couldn’t help thinking how +lovely it must be to have so many books, so many pictures, and so many +works of art of every kind. The boy thought then that he would like to +be a wealthy man, just to be able to gratify his desires for beautiful +things. + +He had to wait only a short time before the genial Mr. Depaw entered the +room, accompanied by several members of the family. Archie was greeted +very warmly, and introduced to every one, and then they immediately +began an animated conversation, in which Archie soon found himself +taking an active part, much to his surprise. He felt that he had +never before realised what a great gift it is to be able to talk +entertainingly, and this evening was a revelation to him in the ways of +good society. He found that every one was much interested in the story +of his adventures, and he talked more about them than for a long time +past. He was now beginning to feel that his Philippine experiences were +an old story, but he learned that they were quite as entertaining as +ever to these people. But they did not talk entirely about Archie. They +realised that this would be embarrassing to him, and they were careful +to guide the conversation into a discussion of music and literature, and +whatever else they imagined him to like. And so it was that the evening +passed very quickly, and it was time to leave before he knew it. Then he +was asked to be sure to call again, and Mr. Depaw, as he accompanied +him to the door, requested him to call at his office on the following +Wednesday, if possible. Archie promised, and walked home down the +avenue, wondering what it could be that Mr. Depaw wanted to talk to him +about. He didn’t worry long about it, however, but went home and to +bed as quickly as possible, for he had formed a habit of rising at six +o’clock in the morning to study. + +The days passed quickly until Wednesday, and the afternoon of that day +found Archie in the waiting-room of Mr. Depaw’s office. He had not long +to sit there after sending in his card, for the busy man received him as +soon as he could get rid of his present visitor. He shook Archie warmly +by the hand as he entered, and then, pulling two chairs together, they +sat down. “I have been thinking for some time,” said Mr. Depaw, “that +I need a sort of private secretary. Of course I have men here at the +office who take dictation from me, and who fulfil the duties of a +secretary to a certain extent, but I want a young man who can attend +somewhat to my personal affairs; I want one whom I can trust, and one +who is likely to grow as he works along, so that eventually he may +be able to fill any place I may have open for him.” Then he stopped a +moment, and Archie felt his heart beating very fast beneath his coat. He +waited almost breathlessly to hear what Mr. Depaw would say next. + +“Ever since I met you first,” he at last went on, “I have somehow +thought that you are the kind of a young fellow I would like. You are +ambitious, you are persevering, and you are willing to learn. You say, +too, that you know shorthand, and I know that you are a good penman. You +have seen quite a little of the world, I am sure, and I think you +can prove yourself equal to almost any occasion. The only question is +whether you will care to give up reporting for a position of this kind. +I can assure you that I will pay you as much as you are earning now, and +I shall be glad to offer you a home at my house, because I shall want +you at my right hand all the time. Do you think you will care to take +the place?” + +Archie could hardly speak, it was all so wonderful, but finally he +recovered himself sufficiently to explain his hesitancy in accepting +the position. “I would like just one day,” he said, “to consult with my +friends on the newspaper. You see Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting have +been very good to me, and I shouldn’t care to leave them now if they +object very strongly.” + +“That’s quite right, quite right,” said Mr. Depaw. “I can appreciate +your feelings, and you can tell the editor that you will have some time +for writing, and that you will contribute occasional articles to his +paper.” Archie was now delighted. “Oh, thank you,” he cried. “I am sure +I can come now.” + +“Well, come in at this time to-morrow,” said Mr. Depaw, “and let me know +what you have decided to do.” + +Archie hurried at once to Mr. Jennings’s office to tell him the good +news. He wondered how his friend would take it, but all his fears +were soon put at rest. “Archie,” said Mr. Jennings, “this is the best +opportunity you can ever have to improve yourself in every way. Mr. +Depaw is a man highly respected all over the country, and a man who is +known to be extraordinary in many ways. Association with such a man will +do more for you than four years in college, and you will make a mistake +if you do not accept his offer. Of course we shall all be sorry to lose +you here, but, as Mr. Depaw says, you will have some time for writing, +and we hope you will always continue to do some work for us.” + +Archie could almost have thrown his arms about Mr. Jennings’s neck to +hug him for his splendid feeling, and when, a little later, Mr. Van +Bunting said practically the same thing, he felt that he had never known +two such men. He assured them both that he would never forget them, but +would try and spend as much time as possible in the Enterprise office. + +The next day he called again on Mr. Depaw, and told him of his decision +to accept the place, and the good man seemed overjoyed. “I will see that +you never forget it, Archie,” he said. It was arranged for him to begin +work the very next day. “You can transfer your things to my house as +soon as you like, for your room is waiting for you, and I will begin +to-morrow to teach you how to do things.” + +And now Archie found it hard to leave the dear little room in the quaint +old square, which was looking now just as when he saw it first. The +leaves in the trees were turning brown and gold, and Archie realised +that he had been away from home more than a year. “Oh, I must go back +soon,” he said to himself, “or I shall simply die of homesickness.” + +In a couple of days he was installed as a member of the Depaw household, +and he soon felt at home there. Every one was very kind to him, he was +given a handsome room, and everything seemed almost perfect. One of the +best things about it all was that he had access to the fine library, +and he longed for the long winter evenings when he could devour the many +interesting books he saw there. He was soon initiated into his work, and +it was much easier than he had expected. Mr. Depaw, of course, started +him very gradually, so that he learned as he went along. Every morning +at eight o’clock he was in the library with Mr. Depaw, taking dictation, +and receiving instructions for the day. They remained together here +until ten o’clock, when Mr. Depaw either walked or drove to his office. +Archie always accompanied him, and took charge of some of the mail +there, attending to it during the morning. Then at noon he returned to +the house, where he spent the afternoon in writing the letters which had +been dictated in the morning, and in doing various things for Mr. Depaw. +The evenings he always had to himself, and he had no difficulty in +finding enough to do at home without going out. He almost invariably +passed the evenings in reading, but occasionally he was asked to +accompany the family to some musical event at the opera house, for they +had soon learned of his love for music. + +In work and study the winter passed quickly and happily for Archie, who +now felt quite at ease amid his elegant surroundings. His only wish was +that he might go home, and as spring approached Mr. Depaw promised him +that he should have a short vacation. The suggestion of Mr. Depaw that +Archie’s mother come to New York for a week was heartily accepted by +Archie, but when he wrote home Mrs. Dunn replied that she would rather +wait for Archie at home. She had never visited New York, and felt that +she wouldn’t like it. + +Bill Hickson came over very often from the navy yard, and was always a +welcome visitor at Mr. Depaw’s office. He didn’t seem to care for his +work in Brooklyn, however, and Archie finally requested a place for him +about the elegant new station which the road had just constructed in the +city. Mr. Depaw very readily gave him an excellent position, one which +he could keep always if he so desired. And Bill was highly pleased +with his new work, so much so that he surprised them all one day in the +spring by leading into the once a young lady whom he introduced as his +wife. Of course Archie was very much pleased at this new development, +for he had often thought that his friend must be very lonely, living in +a boarding-house. + +The days were all busy ones for Archie now. He had learned the work +so thoroughly that he was given more than ever to do, and he still +continued to write, too, for the Enterprise. He worked too hard, +however, and in April he looked so thin that Mr. Depaw sent him home for +a week’s rest. + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + DECIDES TO VISIT HOME--A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN--A PUBLIC + CHARACTER NOW--DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB--DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL-- + A TELEGRAM FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE. + +IT was a beautiful April day. There had been a light shower in the +morning, and now everything looked as fresh and green as possible all +along the railway. Archie lay back in his comfortable Wagner seat, +admiring the beauties of spring, and thinking, too, of the days he spent +in walking along this very road. It seemed hard to believe that he +was now secretary to the president of this railroad, and that he was +returning home, after a year and a half, a very successful young man. He +had much to think of in the hours it would take him to reach the little +town. He tried to remember everything about the place, and his mother as +he saw her last, and it wasn’t at all difficult for him to do so. But, +oh, how he hoped that things had not changed! He almost dreaded going +home for fear he would find things different. + +He had changed, that much was sure. He knew that he had grown to +look much older than his years, and he knew that he was not looking +particularly strong. He used to be so sturdy, and he had such a splendid +colour in his cheeks. Mother would be sorry to see him now, but of +course he would be sure to improve very much during the week he was to +remain among old friends. + +He was very anxious to see his boy friends, the members of the Hut +Club, and the boys and girls who were in his class at school. He had +telegraphed his mother that he was coming, so she would probably tell +the boys about it. He was sure they would be there. + +Now the stations looked more familiar. This one just passed was near +the Tinch farm, and Archie remembered the days he spent working for old +Hiram, and how he had suffered. He wondered if the farmer had ever seen +any copies of the Enterprise. It would be very interesting to him to +know that his chore-boy was now a secretary to a millionaire. This next +station he remembered very well indeed, because he used to come here +every fall to visit the county fair, where he marvelled at the wonderful +things he saw in the side-shows. + +And now the train was entering the limits of his own town. Here was +the old elevator, and the machine shop near the railway track. And, oh, +there was his own home, looking green and pleasant as the train sped by. +It almost brought tears to Archie’s eyes to think that he was so soon to +see his mother. Now they had reached the station, and he stood upon the +car platform ready to alight. My, what a crowd there was! and why did +they cheer as he made his appearance? All at once it dawned upon him +that all these people were here to meet him, and to bid him welcome +home. He could hardly speak as he found himself in his mother’s arms, +and then he began to shake the hands of the big crowd. They were all +old friends, and then there was the mayor, and the superintendent of +schools, and quite a delegation of leading citizens. How nice it was of +them to welcome him in this way! + +After awhile the handshaking was over, and the mayor was able to get +a few minutes with Archie. “We are all very proud of what you have +accomplished,” he said, “and we want to give you a public reception +to-morrow night in the town hall, if you don’t object.” Archie stared +blankly at the mayor, and it was several moments before he realised the +meaning of the words. Then he was almost overcome. It was almost too +good to be true, it seemed, but he warmly thanked the mayor, and told +him how he appreciated the honour which they had done him. He said that +he would be glad to attend the reception. + +The crowd was scattering now, and Archie, wild to reach home, took his +mother to a carriage, in which they drove rapidly out to the little +house among the trees and arbours. The old town looked beautiful in +every way. The great maple and oak trees along the road were green with +new leaves, and every dooryard was bright with snowballs and yellow +roses. “This is the very best time of the year,” he said to his mother, +“and I am the very happiest boy in all the world.” + +“And I am the happiest mother,” was the answer. Then they sat in silence +until they reached the old home. They entered by the kitchen door, and, +once inside, and seated in the old cane rocking-chair, Archie bowed his +head in tears of joy at being home with mother once again. + +The hours which followed were sweet with joy. Mrs. Dunn busied herself +in preparing the supper, and Archie hung around the kitchen, telling +some of the many things he had planned to tell. Mrs. Dunn was smiling, +and Archie thought her the sweetest mother any boy could have. She was +changed somewhat, but she looked very young to-day. + +Supper over, Archie went over the fence to see the Sullivan boys, and +he found them looking much the same. He was truly glad to see them, and +they, of course, were glad to see him, too, though at first they were +just a little bashful, remembering, no doubt, all the things which had +happened to Archie since they saw him last. The boys were soon telling +all about the Hut Club, though, and Archie learned to his joy that it +was still a flourishing organisation. “We spoke of you every time we +were together,” said Jack, “and we always wished you were back again.” + Archie was delighted to hear that he had been missed, and all at once +an idea came to him which he put into execution three days later. He +determined to give an elegant dinner to this club of boys, and the very +next day he sent to New York for a caterer to arrange it. He wanted +it to be something finer than any of the boys had ever seen, and it +certainly turned out to be so. The caterer did his best, and when, three +days later, the Hut Club sat down together for the first time in more +than eighteen months, they partook of a dinner which would have done +credit to Mr. Depaw’s table. It was a memorable night for them all, and +every boy enjoyed himself. + +Archie enjoyed this Hut Club dinner more than anything else while he +was at home, though of course the great event of his stay was the public +reception at the Town Hall on the second evening after his arrival. This +was a truly grand affair. The town authorities hired a brass band, which +played inside the hall and out, and there was such a crowd in attendance +that many were turned away from the doors. It was a night that Archie +will never be able to forget. He sat on the platform, in company with +the mayor and other town officials, and he listened to several speeches +congratulating him on what he had accomplished since leaving the town. +Then he had to get up and tell them all of his experiences, from the +time he left until now. He told it in a simple manner, but from the +close attention he received it was evident his audience was deeply +interested. When he had finished, there were calls for “three cheers for +Archie Dunn,” and they were given with a will. Then Archie, rising +from his seat, called for “three cheers for the President of the United +States,” and they, too, were given, for Archie had told them all his +feelings on the subject of the President’s policy in the war. After this +there were three cheers for Mr. Depaw, whom one man said would be the +next United States Senator from the State. The meeting closed with some +cheers for the New York Enterprise, and then followed a long siege of +handshaking for Archie, who stood beside his mother on the floor in +front of the platform. It was a happy night for them both, and Mrs. Dunn +said afterward that she could never wish for anything more the rest of +her life. + +The fourth day of his visit was a Sunday, and, to Archie’s joy, brave +Bill Hickson and his wife came up from the city to spend the day. What +a jolly time they had, all day long! They went to church in the morning, +where they saw all the people, it seemed, whom they hadn’t seen before, +and in the afternoon there were many callers at the little house. The +evening was spent quietly by the happy four, talking of old times and +plans for the future. The town authorities were anxious to give Bill +Hickson a reception while he was in town, but the bashful hero declined +the honour, and returned with his wife to New York by the midnight +train. + +During the two succeeding days Archie talked a great deal with his +mother, and finally gained her consent to come to New York to live in +a year’s time. Mrs. Dunn had never really understood that Archie had so +good a position, but now that she realised what a splendid beginning +he had made, she was very willing to come and keep house for him. This +question settled, everything seemed wholly delightful in the cosy home, +and Archie settled down to enjoy the two remaining days of his visit in +quiet rest. He had already much improved during his stay, and was sure +of going back to the city feeling much better than for a long time past, +and this made Mrs. Dunn very happy. + +But Archie didn’t stay his week out at home. On the fifth night he +attended a reception in his honour at one of the neighbours’ houses, and +he was just in the midst of a description of Tokio when a messenger boy +entered with a telegram for him. He opened it at once, and read it aloud +to the company: + +“Dear Archie,” it said, “return as soon as possible. I sail for Europe +on Saturday’s steamer to remain six months, and wish you to accompany +me.” It was signed by Mr. Depaw, and there was great applause from the +crowd when he finished reading it. But Archie’s face was a study. He +wasn’t sure whether he wanted to go to Europe or not, but of course +there was no question about what he should do. He at once telegraphed +a reply, saying that he would reach the city to-morrow at noon, leaving +home on the early morning train. + +Of course the reception soon broke up, and Archie walked quietly home +with his mother, who was saddened at the prospect of losing him so soon +again. She soon brightened, however, and began to plan things for him to +do abroad, and soon she entered into the preparation for his departure +with all her heart. But Archie was not so soon made glad, and he didn’t +rest until he made his mother promise to accompany him to the city on +the morrow to spend the two days previous to his departure in helping +him get ready. Mrs. Dunn wasn’t anxious to make the trip, but for +Archie’s sake she consented. + +And early the next morning they left for the city, where the time passed +rapidly until the hour of the steamer’s sailing. At the pier they said +good-bye. Archie could hardly speak, but Mrs. Dunn was brave. “Archie,” + she said, “God has been with you so far and he will keep you yet. And +remember that a boy with honest ambition will always get along. You +are sure to have friends about you always, for you have proved that +you possess energy, perseverance and a good heart.” She said good-bye +without a tear, but as the steamer left the pier Archie saw, on looking +back, a sweet mother seated on a coil of rope, with her handkerchief to +her eyes. + + THE END. + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + +***** This file should be named 4990-0.txt or 4990-0.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/9/4990/ + +Produced by Jim Weiler + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” + or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project +Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +“Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.” + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +“Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right +of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’ WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm’s +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. + +The Foundation’s principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation’s web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/4990-0.zip b/4990-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a25e505 --- /dev/null +++ b/4990-0.zip diff --git a/4990-8.txt b/4990-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a15a85c --- /dev/null +++ b/4990-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4956 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Adventures of a Boy Reporter + +Author: Harry Steele Morrison + +Posting Date: March 23, 2009 +Release Date: January, 2004 [EBook #4990] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + + + + +Produced by Jim Weiler + + + + + + + + +THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER + +by Harry Steele Morrison + +1900 + + +CONTENTS. + +CHAPTER I. + +LIVING IN THE COUNTRY--LIFE AT SCHOOL--THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED--THE +COMING OF THE CIRCUS + +CHAPTER II. + +ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS--A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE +HENRY + +CHAPTER III. + +ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK--LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT + +CHAPTER IV. + +WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY--CRUEL TREATMENT + +CHAPTER V. + +THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS--THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS + +CHAPTER VI. + +STEALING A RIDE--KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN + +CHAPTER VII. + +ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK--A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE + +CHAPTER VIII. + +LOOKING FOR WORK--WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT + +CHAPTER IX. + +IN THE STREET AGAIN--THE POLICE STATION--VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, +AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR + +CHAPTER X. + +LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN--FEATURED AS "THE BOY REPORTER" + +CHAPTER XI. + +A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND--RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN + +CHAPTER XII. + +A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER--THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT +TO THE PHILIPPINES--LEAVING NEW YORK--IN CHICAGO + +CHAPTER XIII. + +SAN FRANCISCO--THE TRANSPORT GONE--WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY +PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER--THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT--A STORM AT SEA--ARRIVAL IN MANILA + +CHAPTER XV. + +ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR, AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES +AMONG THE NATIVES--SEIZED BY THE REBELS + +CHAPTER XVI. + +A PLEASANT CAPTOR--BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE--FIRST +GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO + +CHAPTER XVII. + +ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS--ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS--THE FIRST BATTLE--ARCHIE WOUNDED + +CHAPTER XIX. + +RETURN TO MANILA--IN THE HOSPITAL--CONGRATULATED BY ALL--WRITING TO THE +PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES + +CHAPTER XX. + +AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP--BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN + +CHAPTER XXI. + +CONTINUING THE CRUISE--ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED--THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE'S +FRIEND--A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY--LONGING TO BE HOME +AGAIN + +CHAPTER XXII. + +RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS--A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO +RETURN TO NEW YORK--BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +HONG KONG--A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO--HONOLULU AGAIN--ARRIVAL IN SAN +FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS--ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN +NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +DOING "SPECIAL" WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER--INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS +MEN--CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS + +CHAPTER XXV. + +PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE--STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL--LIVING +AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +DECIDES TO VISIT HOME--A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN--A PUBLIC CHARACTER +NOW--DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB--DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL--A TELEGRAM +FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE + + + + + + +THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER. + + + +CHAPTER I. + + LIVING IN THE COUNTRY--LIFE AT SCHOOL--THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED--THE + COMING OF THE CIRCUS. + +"YES," said Mrs. Dunn to her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan, "we are expecting +great things of Archie, and yet we sometimes hardly know what to think +of the boy. He has the most remarkable ideas of things, and there seems +to be absolutely no limit to his ambition. He has long since determined +that he will some day be President, and he expects to enter politics the +day he is twenty-one." + +"Is that so, indeed," said Mrs. Sullivan. "Well, we can never tell +what is going to come of our boys. As I says to Dannie to-day, says +I, 'Dannie, you must do your best to be somebody and make something of +yourself, for you and Jack bees all that I has to depend upon now.' But +Dannie pays no attention to my entreaties, and somehow it seems to me +that since Mr. Sullivan died the boys are gettin' worse and worse. It's +beyond me to control them, anyhow." + +"Oh, take heart, Mrs. Sullivan," said Mrs. Dunn, "our boys will all turn +out well in the end, and all we can do is to bring them up in the best +way we know, and trust to them to take care of themselves after they +leave home. Now Dannie is certainly an industrious lad. I hear him +pounding nails all day long in the back yard, and he made a good job of +shingling the woodshed the other day. He seems made to be a carpenter." + +"Yes, I think so myself," said the Widow Sullivan. "The whole lot of +them is out by the railroad now, building a hut. They've organised a +'Hut Club' to-day, and never a lick of work have I had out of them boys +since mornin'. They've always got something going on, and when I want +a bit of water from the well, or a little wood from the shed, they're +never around." + +"Yes, but boys will be boys, Mrs. Sullivan, and we'd better keep them +contented at home as long as we can. They'll be leaving us soon enough. +It seems that no boys are content to stay in town any longer; they're +all anxious to be off to the city." + +"That's true, that's true, Mrs. Dunn," said Mrs. Sullivan. "I must be +going now. I'm much obliged for the rain-water, and whenever you want a +bit of milk call over the fence, and I'll bring it to you with pleasure. +It's a good neighbour you are, Mrs. Dunn." + +And Mrs. Sullivan went slowly around the house and out at the front +gate, while good Mrs. Dunn returned to her ironing, a few clothes having +to be ready for Sunday. + +While these mothers were discussing their boys, the youngsters +themselves were busy behind the barn, building a hut down near the +railway track. There were six of them altogether, the three extra ones, +besides Archie Dunn and the Sullivan boys, having come from across +the railway to play for the day. Two hours before they had solemnly +organised themselves into the "Hut Club," each boy walking three times +around the block blindfolded, and swearing upon his return to be true +to all the rules and regulations of the organisation, which had been +written with chalk on the side of the barn. The regulations were +numerous, but the most important one was that no East Side boys were to +be allowed within the club-room when it was built, and that the club's +policy should be one of warfare against the East Siders on every +occasion when they met. This fight against the East Side was, indeed, +responsible for the organisation of the club. It was felt necessary to +have some head to their forces, and some means of holding together. So +the club was organised, and now the next thing on the programme was the +erection of a hut to serve as a club-house. Archie Dunn, who had been +elected president, volunteered to get three boards and a hammer if the +other boys would each get two boards and some nails. This proposition +was agreed to, and when the boys returned from their foraging +expeditions it was found that there were more than enough boards to +build the hut, so the work began at once. Holes were dug in the ground, +and some posts planted as supports for the structure, and then the +boards were hastily nailed together from post to post. In three hours +the hut was practically completed, and it remained only to lay a floor +until they could hold their first meeting in the new club-house. The +floor itself was down by noon, and the club then served a memorable +dinner to mark the completion of the structure. + +A hole was dug in the ground outside the door, and a furnace made. A +skillet was brought from Archie's house, together with some dishes and a +coffee-pot, and Dan Sullivan brought some more dishes, and six eggs from +his nests under the barn. The boys were obliged to make several trips +to and from the houses, but finally nearly everything was ready, and the +eggs were carefully cooked by Archie, who was really a good housekeeper, +from long experience in the kitchen with his mother. Some potatoes were +fried in the grease remaining in the skillet after the eggs were cooked, +and then the feast began. The eggs may have been rather black with +grease, and the potatoes were certainly not done, but the boys all +pronounced it the finest meal of their lives, notwithstanding the bitter +coffee, and the dirty bread, which had been allowed to fall into the +gutter beside the railway track. They were eating in their own house, +and they had cooked in the open air, "just like tramps," Harry Rafe +said, and it was little wonder that they enjoyed the novel experience. + +The only trouble came when the meal was finished. No one wanted to +wash the dishes, and, finally, it was decided to return them to their +respective kitchens just as they were, and to let them be washed with +the rest of the dinner dishes at home. And this decision came near +putting an end to Hut Club dinners, for both Mrs. Dunn and the Widow +Sullivan were determined not to wash any more dirty dishes from the hut. + +When the meal was over, the boys lounged about the hut, and Dan Sullivan +brought a lot of things from his sister's playhouse with which to +furnish it more suitably. Archie Dunn brought a lot of hay from the loft +in his mother's barn, and when a piece of old carpet was spread upon it +it made an acceptable couch. A piece of old carpet was laid in front of +the hut, too, where the boys could sit and watch the trains switching +back and forth on the railway, and the tramps who were heating coffee in +cans over by the cattle-pen. + +Finally, some cattle arrived in the pen to be loaded into cars for the +city, and the boys had just decided to go and watch the men loading +them, when an engine came up the side-track with the most beautiful car +they had ever seen, behind it. The car was painted in all colours of the +rainbow, and in giant letters was printed the magic name of "The World's +Greatest Show." + +The boys lost no time in getting down from the cattle-pen fence, and the +car had barely stopped when they were aboard. "Hooray," shouted Charlie +Huffman, "we'll all get jobs of passin' bills." And it was with this +end in view that they sought the advertising manager in the car, who +promised to give them all jobs when the circus came in two weeks. +The boys deluged him with questions of every sort. "Will there be any +elephants?" "Is there goin' to be a parade?" and "Will there be any +trapeze performances?" The poor man was finally obliged to lock the +door to keep them out, and the boys stood about the car until nearly +six o'clock, admiring the paintings, and speculating as to whether they +would be able to work their way into the circus or not, when it finally +came. Their speculations were interrupted by the appearance on the scene +of the Widow Sullivan with a good-sized maple switch, which she used +to good effect in getting the two Sullivans and Archie Dunn home for +supper. For Mrs. Dunn had given Mrs. Sullivan instructions before she +started, so that when Archie complained that he had been whipped by +"that woman next door," he received no sympathy whatever. + +And when he went to bed at nine o'clock, he could hardly sleep for +thinking of the wonderful things which had happened this day. The coming +circus and the great Hut Club kept him awake until far after ten, so +that he got up too late for Sunday school the next morning, and was +punished accordingly. + +The next week was a hard one at school, and the boys had but little +time to devote to the club. But after four o'clock in the afternoon +they sometimes got together and did various things which improved their +club-house. Some very fair chairs were constructed from empty soap +boxes, and various contrivances were put together to guard against the +intrusion of any East Siders or tramps while they were away at school. +There was no padlock used, and any one coming up to the hut would +imagine it a simple thing to enter--until he tried. But the boys had +fixed a secret cord which, when pulled, shifted the bar inside, and +every boy was sworn not to betray the existence of the cord. + +The day set for the circus came nearer and nearer, and the boys began +to be anxious for fear the schools would not close, so that they could +attend. But the superintendent finally announced that they would; so +early on the eventful day the entire club was on the grounds, waiting +to get some work to do. Archie Dunn got the first job, being selected +to carry water for the elephant because he was stronger than any of the +others. But the rest were given something to do, and when the day was +over they had all seen the circus, and went to bed happy, to dream of +the great trip to be taken by the Hut Club on the next Saturday. + + + +CHAPTER II. + + ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS--A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE + HENRY. + +THE Hut Club went out on a picnic the next Saturday, and had a jolly +time. They camped upon an island in the middle of a shallow stream, and +while there made coffee and cooked their dinner, having brought most of +the necessary apparatus from the Hut. They fished a little, and hunted +for turtles in the water, and altogether had a good time, if nothing +exciting did occur. It was after nine o'clock at night when they reached +town again, footsore and weary, and Archie Dunn had hardly entered the +house before he was on the dining-room lounge, half-asleep. His mother +seemed to be out, and as he lay there he wondered how long it would be +before she came back. Archie truly loved his mother, but of late he +had often thought that he would like to leave home and go to the famous +city, where he felt sure he could get something to do. But he disliked +the idea of leaving his mother. + +"I'm getting to be a big boy, now," he often said to himself, "and it's +time that I began to look out for myself. I'm nearly seventeen, and I +think I ought to be earning some money. This thing of belonging to Hut +Clubs and spending my time in going to picnics and to circuses ought to +stop. It's all right for boys, but I'm getting to be a man, now." + +All these thoughts were flying through his mind when his mother came in. +"Oh, Archie," she exclaimed, "I've been so worried about you. I've just +been over to Mrs. Sullivan's to see if Dannie had come home, and whether +he had seen you. Wherever have you been?" + +"We didn't think it would take so long to walk home," said Archie, +jumping up from the sofa, "but we were awfully tired, and we didn't come +very fast. I'm so sorry you were worried. + +"And I'm as hungry as a bear, mother. Can't you find me something to +eat?" + +"Yes, dear," said Mrs. Dunn, softly, "and when you've finished your +supper I have something for you. I won't give it to you now for fear you +won't be able to eat, but as soon as you have finished your meal, you +shall have it." + +So Archie was obliged to eat his baked beans and brown bread and drink +his milk without knowing what was in store for him, and he hurried as +fast as he could, so that he could learn. When he had finished he went +into the sitting-room, and found his mother sitting with a letter spread +open upon her lap. "Uncle Henry has written me asking if you cannot go +with him to New York on Monday, for a couple of days. He is obliged to +go down there on business, and says he will be glad to take you along +and show you something of the wonderful city, for he knows you won't be +any trouble to him. Now I hardly know what to say, Archie. If I can feel +that you are behaving yourself properly, and are doing your best to be +as little trouble as possible, I am willing that you shall go." + +"Oh, mother," cried Archie, "I'll promise anything. Only let me go this +once, and I'll promise to stay at home all the rest of the summer." + +"All right, then," said Mrs. Dunn. "You shall go on the first train +Monday morning, and Uncle Henry will join you at Heddens Corner. Run +along to bed now." + +Archie went up-stairs almost dumb with delight Was it really true that +he was to see the great city at last? He had heard some of the boys at +school telling what their fathers saw there, but he had never even hoped +that he would see it for himself so soon. Of course he had determined to +see it all some day, but that was to be far in the future. The lad +could hardly sleep for the joy of it all, and when he did finally +lose consciousness, it was only to dream of streets of gold, and great +buildings reaching to the skies. + +Sunday passed slowly by. At Sunday school, Archie told the boys that +he was going to New York on the morrow, and from that moment he was the +hero of the class. The boys looked at him with wondering admiration, and +seemed scarcely able to realise that one of their number was to go so +far from home. The city was in reality little more than a hundred miles, +but to their boyish minds this distance seemed wonderfully great. + +Early on Monday morning Archie was at the depot waiting for the train. +His mother was there to see him off, and there were tears in her eyes +at the thought of parting with her only child, if only for a day or two. +And Archie was radiant with delight at the glorious prospect ahead of +him. He walked nervously up and down the platform, and wished frequently +that it were not so early in the morning, so that some of the boys might +be there to see him off. Finally, the great hissing locomotive drew up, +with its long train of coaches, and Archie was soon aboard, hurrying off +to Heddens Corner and the city. In a few minutes Uncle Henry was with +him, a tall, fine-looking man, with an air of business. Uncle Henry +kept the general store at the Corner, and was an important person in the +neighbourhood. He was of some importance in the city, too, for his +name was known in politics, and his custom was always desired at +the wholesale stores. So Archie was going to see the city under good +auspices, if his uncle would only have time to take him about with him. + +After a couple of hours, during which Archie kept his face glued to +the window-pane, watching the flying landscape, the great train pulled +through a long, dark tunnel, and finally entered an immense shed, +covered with glass where it came to a final stop. Crowds left the +coaches, and passed out of the station, where they were swallowed up in +the great rush of traffic. Some drove away in cabs and carriages. Some +entered the street-cars, and some went up a stairway and entered what +seemed to Archie a railway train in the air. + +Uncle Henry told Archie to follow him carefully, and they, too, were +soon flying away from the neighbourhood of the terminal, past hotels, +stores, and dwellings, until they finally left the trolley-car, and +passed through a cross street into a long, quiet thoroughfare which +looked old enough to have been there for a hundred years. The houses +were built far back from the street, with pillars in front, and into one +of these quaint old dwellings went Archie and his uncle. + +"I always stop down-town," explained Uncle Henry, "because I am near to +the great wholesale establishments. It is central to the retail stores, +too, and to many of the places of interest." + +When they were settled in their room, Uncle Henry explained that he +would have to be away most of this first day, but that to-morrow he +would take Archie out and show him the sights. So Archie expected to +remain indoors all day; but when his uncle had left the house he +decided that he couldn't possibly remain in this close room when so many +wonderful things were taking place outside. So he decided to walk up and +down the street, anyhow, and when he went out he felt like a prisoner +just escaped from a cell. But the noise was terrible, and there were a +great many wagons and trucks passing through the street. The greatest +crowd seemed to be on that cross street about two blocks away, so Archie +decided to go there, and see if there was anything new on that street. + +He saw many wonderful things. There were cars running along without any +apparent motive power, there were thousands and thousands of people in +the streets, and the stores looked so handsome and interesting that he +simply couldn't resist going into one or two of them, just to see what +they were like. And when he had finished with one or two he could think +of no reason why he shouldn't go on up the street, where he was sure he +would find a great many more interesting things to see. So on and on +he went, until at last he was tired and hungry, and then, for the first +time, he was a little frightened, because he thought of all he had read +about people losing their way in the city, and not being able to find +their relatives again. But he was a brave boy, so he determined to make +an effort to find his way back without appealing to a policeman. And +after a time he was successful, and entered the queer old house in the +ancient street at just three o'clock in the afternoon. His uncle was +there waiting for him, and was nearly beside himself with apprehension. + +"I was about to send out a general alarm for you, at the police +station," he said. "How did you happen to go away?" + +"Oh, I was so very tired of staying in the house," said Archie, "and I +felt sure that I could find my way back without getting lost at all. +And to-morrow I'm sure I can get along all right, Uncle Henry, so you +needn't bother with me at all, unless you want to." + +And it so happened that Mr. Kirk was very busy the next day, and would +have found it quite impossible to show Archie about. So it was fortunate +that he was able to go everywhere alone, or he would have had to return +home without seeing anything at all of the city. + +As it was, he went here, there, and everywhere, and saw a great deal of +the city, the people, and the way in which they lived. The entire place +had a strange fascination for him, and all the time he was thinking how +glad he would be to live where he could see all this rush of business, +this varied life, every day. And he fully determined to return some day +and get something to do, so that he might work himself up, and come +to own one of the handsome houses on the avenues, or drive one of the +elegant carriages on the boulevard. And he observed every boy who +passed him, and talked with several of them, trying to find out whether +positions were easy to secure, and whether they paid much when they were +secured. + +So when they took the four o'clock train for home, and arrived at +Archie's house in time for supper, he told more about the city boys and +their work than about the tall buildings, the Brooklyn Bridge, or the +Central Park. He talked so much, in fact, about the delights of the city +boy, and the money he earned, that after he had gone to bed Mrs. Dunn +took her brother aside and talked with him concerning Archie's future. +And between them they definitely decided that Archie must not go to the +city to work. + + + +CHAPTER III. + + ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK--LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT. + +ARCHIE DUNN was not more ambitious than many other boys of his age, +but he possessed one quality which is not developed in every boy, +determination. Once Archie decided upon doing a thing, once he had made +up his mind that it was truly a good thing to do, nothing could keep him +from putting his plans into action, and making an effort, at least, to +accomplish his ends. Most boys of seventeen have not decided what they +want to become when they are men, and, until his visit to the city, +Archie was equally at sea concerning his future. He knew, of course, +that he wanted to be rich and famous, but when he tried to think up +some suitable profession which would bring him these possessions, he was +never able to decide. + +The two days in the city with Uncle Henry had opened to his boyish +mind a new world, and when he returned to the humble home surrounded by +gardens, he felt that he would never be satisfied to live and work in +this small town. There was now no question in his mind but what the city +was the place for any one who wished to become either rich or famous. It +would certainly be impossible for him to make a name for himself in this +village, while in the city he would have every opportunity for improving +himself, and advancing himself in every way. He wondered, indeed, that +he had never thought of going to New York before, and was disgusted with +himself when he thought of the time he had wasted here at home. + +But there was no use in thinking of the past. The thing to do now was to +get to the city as quickly as possible, for to Archie every day seemed +precious, and each delay kept him further from the consummation of +his hopes. It never occurred to the boy that his mother might have +objections to his leaving home. She had always been very ambitious for +his future, and he supposed that she would be delighted at the idea +of having her boy in the great city, where he would have innumerable +chances for improving himself. So when they sat on the front porch, +one evening, and he told her of his plan, he was surprised to hear his +mother pleading with him to remain at home. "Archie," she said, "I am +almost sure you will come to some bad end in the city. You really must +not go, for my sake, if for no other reason." + +"But, mother, I can't remain here in town always. I must go out into +the world some time to earn a living and make a place for myself, and I +think the sooner I go the better, don't you?" + +"Yes, Archie, but you're so young, and you've had no experience. You +have no idea of the things there are in great cities to drag young men +down. I don't think I could stand it to have you so far away from home +and in such danger." + +"Well, mother," said Archie, "there isn't much use in arguing about it. +I have reached a point where I don't think I can be any longer satisfied +at home. I have been here seventeen years, and I think I can remain here +that much longer without improving myself. In the city I am sure I can +make rapid progress, and in a year or two you can come there and live +with me." + +Archie got up from the porch and went down the street, while poor Mrs. +Dunn ran over next door to see her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan. When she +had entered the disorderly kitchen, and seated herself on one of the +home-made chairs, the anxious mother burst into tears. "I don't know +what to think of Archie, Mrs. Sullivan," she said. "He is determined, +now, to go to New York, and I know that if he goes I will never be able +to see him again. I am nigh distracted with worrying over it. I have +talked with him, but he seems determined, and I know I can never hold +out against his entreaties and arguments." + +"Sure, now, Mrs. Dunn," said the Widow Sullivan, "don't yez be a +worryin' about 'im at all. That Archie is a smart boy, he is, and if he +goes to New York he'll come out all right, never fear, I only wish my +Dannie had as much get-up about him as your boy." + +"Yes, yes, Archie is very ambitious for his age," said Mrs. Dunn, "but +I sometimes wish he were less so. I know I could keep him at home longer +if he wasn't so anxious to be at work. I don't believe I can let him go, +Mrs. Sullivan, not yet. I want him to stay in school another year, and +then I'll think about it." + +"Well, ye're wise, Mrs. Dunn, ye're a wise woman," said the Widow +Sullivan. "Since yer husband died ye've been a good mother to the lad, +and have brought 'im up well. And now, how is yer chickens, Mrs. Dunn? +Have ye got that cochin hen a 'settin'' yit?" + +And the two women began to discuss their various fowls, and the +conversation was so interesting that Mrs. Dunn remained late, and found +Archie in bed when she went home. "Ah, well, poor boy, I'll have to tell +him of my decision in the morning. He'll be terribly disappointed, and I +hate to do it I'm afraid it's selfishness that makes me want to keep +him with me. I almost wish he would take things into his own hands, and +start for the city himself. I would be rid then of the responsibility +of sending him, and the question would be settled for me. Boys sometimes +know best how to settle their own difficulties, anyhow." + +Mrs. Dunn kneaded the bread before retiring, for to-morrow was Saturday, +and, therefore, baking-day, and then she went into her little room +off the kitchen, and prayed earnestly for her boy before sleeping. +She prayed that she might be helped in advising him, and that he might +always do what was best for himself and for his mother. + +The next day was Saturday, and in the morning the Hut Club met, as +usual, and prepared to have an open-air dinner for this day. The +furnace, which had been knocked down during the week by the East Siders, +was rebuilt, and the skillet and other utensils were brought from the +nearest kitchens. Archie went to the grocery around the corner and +bought five cents' worth of cakes, and then the six boys sat down in +a circle and prepared to devour their home-made feast. But before they +began Archie stood up. "I want to say that this will probably be my +farewell dinner with the club," he said, in a low tone, "and I hope that +you will appoint another president in my place." + +The boys were horror-struck, but Archie refused to explain where and +when he was going. Finally, they refused to appoint another president, +all agreeing that Archie should hold that office for ever, wherever he +was. And the meal was eaten in silence, for the announcement had thrown +a sort of chill over the proceedings. When they had finished, Archie +silently shook hands with each of the boys, who were dumb with +amazement, gathered up his skillet and coffee-pot, and went home through +the gate to the chicken-lot. + +"I wonder what he's goin' to do," they all said, as in one breath, and +as there was seldom much fun in the club when Archie was absent, they +all went home in a few minutes, or down-town to watch the farmers, who +were in town to do their weekly buying. + +When Archie reached home he went up-stairs to his little room, and began +to lay out a few things which he wanted to take with him, for he had +determined to start for New York this very night. Then he tied the +things up in a small bundle, and sat down to write a note to his mother. +When he had finished it, he pinned it up at the head of his cot, and +this is what it said: + + "MY DARLING MOTHER:--Please don't worry about me, I'm bound to + come through all right, and if anything happens to me, I promise + that I will write to you immediately and let you know. I have the + ten dollars which I have saved, and if I don't get work at once I + will write to you for some more. Now, I am not doing this thing for + the sake of adventure, but because I am sure it is the best thing + for me, and I don't want you to worry at all. I shall write to you + often and let you know just what I'm doing, so don't worry, but be + a brave mother. I'm not going off this way as a sneak, but because + I want to avoid a 'scene.' + + "Your loving + + "ARCHIE." + +And at three o'clock the next morning Archie Dunn got out of bed, +shouldered his bundle, and started off for the great city, which seemed +to be drawing him like a magnet. + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY--CRUEL TREATMENT. + +WHEN daylight came, Archie was far out of the town walking quickly along +the southern road. He figured that he had walked nearly six miles in the +two hours since he had let himself out of the back door at home, and, +as he looked ahead, he planned that he would walk at least thirty miles +every day. Of course, he had never done much walking before, or he would +have known better than to have expected to accomplish so much in twelve +hours, but he felt fresh and full of strength this morning, and nothing +seemed too hard to accomplish. As yet he had not regretted his departure +from home. The excitement of it all, and the adventurous side of his +exploit, had kept him interested, and made him feel that he was a real +hero. But he was not so foolish as to imagine that there would not be +times when he would regret having set out for New York. He was too old +and too sensible for his age to allow his ambition to run away with him +entirely, and he fully expected to meet with many great discouragements. +"But I'm sure of one thing," he said to himself, as he walked along, "I +never will return home until I have something to show for the trip. I +won't have the club boys and the neighbours saying that Archie Dunn had +to come home discouraged. If I return without accomplishing anything, I +will be held up to the whole town as a boy who made a fool of himself by +not taking his friends' advice, and I never will be made an example +of if I can help it." And Archie walked faster as he thought of the +possibility of failure. + +When seven o'clock came he was passing through the county-seat, but +though there were many interesting things to look at in the town, Archie +determined not to stop. He was afraid he might meet some one he knew, +who would be sure to ask him where he was going with his bundle, and +what he was doing out so early. And anyhow he was very hungry, and +decided to get out of the town and to the farmhouses as soon as +possible. "I can work for my meal at a farmhouse," he said to himself, +"but in the town they'll take me for a regular tramp." + +So poor Archie walked quickly through the town, still keeping to the +southern road, and saying to himself, as he passed every milestone, +"So much nearer New York." About a mile out in the country he came to a +large farmhouse, and he determined to enter and ask for a meal. He had +hard work to muster up enough courage to go in and ask for anything, but +finally he knocked timidly at the kitchen door, and was frightened by +a large dog which came barking around the corner. It seemed to him that +the animal would surely bite, but a large fat woman opened the door +just in time to let him in. "Hurry in, boy," she said, "fer there's +no tellin' what Tige might do ef he once gets a hold of ye." So Archie +stepped into the large kitchen, with its rafters overhead, and its +dining-table in the corner. "Sit down, boy," said the woman. "I reckon +you's thet new lad thet's come ter work over at Mullins's, ain't ye?" + +"No'm," said Archie, "I don't work anywhere. I'm on my way to New York, +where I expect to find a position, and I thought perhaps you'd allow me +to do a little work here this morning to earn my breakfast." + +Good Mrs. Lane, for that was the woman's name, was horrified to think +that any one was alive and without breakfast at eight o'clock in the +morning. "Goodness me!" said she. "Why, you must be half-famished fer +want of food, ain't ye?" And she bustled about the kitchen, putting the +kettle on to boil, and stirring up the fire. "You'll have some nice ham +and eggs, my boy, and then I have somethin' in mind fer you. I reckon +yer ain't in no hurry ter get ter the city, be ye? Well, even if ye +do be in a hurry, I reckon you'll be glad of the chance to earn four +dollars. I ain't goin' to ask ye no questions about how ye come to be +walkin' to New York, because I never wuz no hand ter meddle in other +folkses affairs, but ye look to be a likely lad, and a strong un, and ez +my sister's husband, what lives two miles down the pike, needs a boy to +drive a plough fer a week, I b'lieve ye'll suit 'im first-rate. So ez +soon ez ye have finished yer vittles, I'll walk down there with ye, and +we'll see the old man." + +Archie hardly knew whether to be delighted with the prospect or not. Of +course four dollars would be nice to have, but he was anxious to get +to the city as soon as possible, and every day counted. But perhaps it +would be wrong, he thought, to throw away such a good chance to earn +some money, and he had decided to accept any offer the farmer made +him, long before he finished his breakfast. When he got up from the +straight-backed chair, he felt that he had never eaten a better meal +in his life, and when Mrs. Lane started off down the road, he gladly +followed her. A week on such a farm as this would be no unpleasant +experience. Such food was not to be had every day, he knew, and he of +course would have precious little that was good to eat when he reached +the city. + +They soon covered the two miles, Mrs. Lane getting along very fast for +such a large woman, and at last they stood before Hiram Tinch, who owned +the farm. Archie was made to describe his intentions, and was thoroughly +examined by Mr. Tinch. He told the farmer that he knew nothing about +farm work, but Mr. Tinch said he would soon teach him, and it was +settled that Archie was to remain on the farm a week. Mrs. Lane went +inside the house to see her sister, who looked sick with too much work, +and the farmer told Archie that he might as well start in, as there was +no object in waiting. So the boy donned a pair of "blue jean" trousers, +and was taken into a field, where a one-horse plough was standing. +Archie knew how to hitch a horse, so he went to the stable and secured +his steed, and then harnessed him to the plough. The farmer didn't +see fit to give him any instructions about ploughing, and the poor boy +hardly knew what to do, but rather than ask he started off, and tried to +guide the animal in the right direction, as far as he knew it. Of course +the horse went wrong, and the plough refused to stay in the earth, +and altogether the attempt was a miserable failure. The farmer leaned +against the fence, picking his teeth with a pin, but when he saw the +horse going crooked, and the plough bounding along over the earth, his +face grew livid with anger. For a minute he seemed unable to speak, but +strode toward Archie with a fierce look in his eyes. Then he found his +tongue, and opened such a tirade of vile words that the poor boy shrank +from him in terror. He was in mortal fear lest the man should lay hands +on him and commit some crime, so intense was his rage, but Hiram Tinch +seemed to know how far to go, and after five minutes of cursing and +swearing he took the plough in his own hands, and guided it through the +earth. "Now take it," he growled at Archie, when he had gone a furrow's +length, "and see ef ye can do better this time. Remember, not a bite of +dinner do ye get until this field is ploughed." + +Poor Archie was weak from fright, but there was nothing to do but to +obey. He looked at the vast field before him, and made up his mind that +he would get nothing to eat until night, anyhow, for it was already +nearly noon. He felt very much like bursting into tears, but he was too +proud to give way to his feelings. But he couldn't help wishing that he +were at home, playing with the members of the Hut Club. "Those boys are +much better off than I am," he said, over and over, "though they have +made no effort to improve themselves." After a time, however, his +ambition returned, and as he looked ahead into the future, and +remembered the wonderful things he was going to accomplish, he felt more +like working. + +He finished the field at five o'clock in the afternoon, and was almost +fainting from hunger and from the hard work. The ploughing was fairly +well done, but Hiram Tinch could see no merit in the work. He swore at +Archie again, and gave him a supper of mush and milk. Mrs. Tinch sat by, +and Archie could see that she did not approve of his treatment. The poor +woman seemed afraid to speak, almost, but it was plain that she had a +good heart. So when Archie heard a noise in his garret room that night, +he was not surprised to see Mrs. Tinch at the window, placing some +doughnuts and sandwiches there for him to eat. + + + +CHAPTER V. + + THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS--THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS. + +IT seemed to Archie that he had just fallen asleep when old Hiram Tinch +was shaking him awake. "Git up out o' here now, ye lazy beggar, and +git to the field and finish that there ploughin'," he growled, and the +frightened lad awakened from a horrible nightmare, only to find a worse +experience awaiting him in the light of day. He hastily drew on his +trousers, and didn't wait to don either shoes or stockings, for if he +was to spend the day ploughing in a field, he knew he would be more +comfortable in his bare feet. When he reached the kitchen, he found +that Farmer Tinch had already eaten his breakfast, though it was not +daylight. Archie was glad that he was out of the way, and good Mrs. +Tinch was glad of it, too, for she was able to give the boy a good +breakfast, and some good advice with it. "Don't you pay no attention to +what my man says, laddie. He's a powerful man to swear and carry on, but +I don't think he'll have the meanness to strike you. Ef he does, ye must +come to me, and I'll see thet he doesn't do it no more." + +Archie was grateful for this spirit of friendliness, but in his heart +he thought that cruel words were often more painful than lashes, and he +heartily wished that his week was over. + +All this day he spent on the farm, without once going into the road. +Farmer Tinch had warned him that if he saw him making for the road at +any time, he could go and never come back, and he would forfeit what +money he had already earned. So Archie ploughed the field from daylight +till dark, with a half hour at noon for a hurried dinner. He was glad +when darkness came, and after another supper of mush and milk he was +thankful to have a corn-husk bed to sleep on, and was soon in a stupor +which was so sound as to be almost like death. + +Again the next morning he was awakened at daylight, and he was made +to work even harder than on the second day. He had by this time become +somewhat used to the labour, however, and stood it better. He was more +successful in his work, too, and Farmer Tinch had less opportunity for +cursing him. But at night he seemed more tired, even, than before, and +he longed for his home again. He thought of the cosy bed he would now +be enjoying if he had only taken his mother's advice, and he felt almost +like getting up in the night and stealing away on the road to the north. +But, always a sensible lad, Archie realised that this discouragement +could not last, and he lost himself in sleep, looking forward three +days, when his week should be up, and he would be on his way to the +city, with four dollars more to add to his slender store. + +The three days passed slowly, but at length the Saturday night came, and +he prepared to be off. But good Mrs. Tinch entreated him to remain with +them over Sunday, and, as Archie wasn't sure that it would be quite +right for him to travel on Sunday, he decided to do so. So the next day +he brushed his only suit of clothes, and drove with his late employer to +church, where Farmer Tinch sat in a front seat and passed the bread +and wine at communion. Archie's heart rose to his throat as he saw +this paragon so devout in church. He felt like rising in his seat and +denouncing him before all the people as a tyrant and a hard-hearted +wretch. But he kept quiet, though he found it impossible to partake of +the communion under such circumstances. + +The Tinches had brought their dinner with them, and at noon they all sat +on one of the grassy mounds in the churchyard, to take some refreshment +before the afternoon service began. When they had finished, Archie +wandered off, and came to a crowd of boys who were romping behind the +church. When they saw him approach, they all stopped their noise, +and looked at him wonderingly. Evidently they were not used to seeing +strange boys. The silence was soon broken, however, by one of the boys +calling out, "Why, fellers, thet's the chap what's been workin' fer +Hiram Tinch." This announcement was enough to make Archie an even +greater object of interest than before, for the boys seemed to think +that any person who could work for Farmer Tinch, and come out of the +ordeal none the worse for wear, must be something wonderful. Archie was +soon on good terms with them all, however, and told them of his plan of +going to New York. The boys were all attention, and soon he was the hero +of the occasion. When the bell rung for the afternoon service he was +still telling them of the things he was going to do, and none of them +wanted to go into the church. Archie persuaded them to enter, however, +but he was not surprised to meet them all along the road when he left +Tinch's early Monday morning. + +It was almost time to go to bed when they reached the farmhouse that +night, so Archie went at once to his attic, being anxious to start fresh +on his journey the next day. He was now determined to push on as rapidly +as possible, hoping to reach the city within three or four days. He was +somewhat afraid that he wouldn't be able to do this, but he was going to +try, anyhow. + +At daylight Monday morning he was on the way, and when the various boys +he met the day before said good-bye to him and wished him good luck, +he felt that his stay at Tinch's had not been without benefits of some +sort. He had made some boy friends, and he was four dollars richer, +Archie was sensible enough, too, to realise that his experience would be +a valuable one to him in the future. He knew now what hard work was, at +any rate. + +The morning walk was delightful. The September weather was perfect, and +all along the road were fruit-trees laden with every sort of good +thing to eat a boy could wish for. And as the trees were on the public +thoroughfare, Archie did net hesitate to help himself freely as he went +along, so that he didn't require any meal at noon. + +As night drew near, however, he began to wonder what he would do for a +bed, and the question became more important with every hour. He had come +to no towns since morning, and knew that he couldn't expect to reach +one of any size until the next day, anyhow. There were farmhouses, of +course, but after his experience of the past week the lad felt that he +would rather remain outdoors all night than risk being thrown in with +another Hiram Tinch. He didn't know enough of farmers to know that few +of them resemble Mr. Tinch in nature, and he did what he thought was +best in keeping away from farmhouses after this. + +It was five o'clock in the evening, and Archie was beginning to feel +very tired and hungry, when he came to the ruins of an old colonial +mansion, which lay far back from the road, surrounded by trees, and +almost hid with shrubbery. "How interesting," he thought to himself. "It +looks just like the pictures of old ruins we see in geographies. I think +I must go up and see what they look like at close range." And, fired +with a spirit of adventure, and making believe that he was an explorer +in an ancient country, the boy made his way through the trees and +shrubbery. The ruins looked more and more interesting as he advanced. +This had evidently been a magnificent estate at one time. There were +massive pillars which had once supported a stately portico at the front +of the house, and above all there rose a massive chimney, which +seemed to be exceedingly well preserved. As Archie came nearer, he was +surprised to notice a thin column of smoke rising from the top of the +chimney, and for a moment he stood still with fright. What could this +mean? Who could be building a fire in the midst of these ruins. It was +almost like what one reads about in books, he thought. + +For some time he could not decide what to do, whether he had better keep +on, or whether the wisest policy would be to get back to the road as +quickly as possible. Finally, his curiosity and thirst for adventure +persuaded him to go on, and he continued to push his way through the +shrubbery until he stood before the ruins. He then climbed a flight of +steps, and stood in what had once been the main entrance to this +massive palace. Before him he saw a scene which was almost weird in its +unusualness. A fire of pine-knots was blazing in the ruins of the great +fireplace, and seated in a semicircle around the fire were several men +of picturesque appearance, whose faces looked up angrily when they were +disturbed. + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + STEALING A RIDE--KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN. + +ARCHIE was dumbfounded. Never before had he been among such a motley +crowd, and his first impulse was to turn and run. But on second thought +he decided that it would be best to put on a bold face and walk up to +the men. This he did, and when he reached the fire the men jumped up and +asked him who he was. In a few words he told them his simple story, and +they all laughed and sat down again about the fire, making a place for +him. "You're one of us, then, laddie," said the leader of the gang. +"We're all soldiers of fortune, all dependent upon the generous public +for our livelihood. But we're not goin' to the city. There's nothin' +there for us, and our advice to you is for you to steer clear of the +place, too. Them police takes ye and throws ye into jail as quick as +a wink, and there's no chance of gettin' anythink to eat at basement +doors, neither. They're all on to us, there, laddie, and ye'd better +stick to the country." + +This bit of advice was endorsed by the entire company, and it was in +vain that Archie tried to make them understand that he was no ordinary +tramp, walking about the country in search of an easy time. He tried +to tell them that he was going to the city to work, not to beg; but the +leader, a big, dirty fellow, weighing two hundred pounds or over, said, +"Never mind, laddie, we knows you've run away from home to get away from +the folks, and we appreciates yer position. If yer a mind to stand by +us, we'll stand by you, and see thet ye comes to no harm." + +On thinking things over, Archie decided that it was perhaps the wisest +thing for him to appear to sympathise with the tramps, and make himself +agreeable while with them. He had undoubtedly run into a gang of the +worst sort of vagabonds, and there was no way of getting away from there +without arousing their suspicions. So he partook of their slender meal, +and joined in the general laughter when the leader, "Fattie Foy," made +some crude attempt at punning. The meal was one to be remembered. The +coffee had been heated in an empty tomato can over the fire, and from +its taste was evidently a combination of various collections made from +the farmhouses round about. Besides the coffee there was a various +collection of sandwiches and bread and butter, and two pieces of cake. +One man had succeeded in striking a good house, and came back laden with +pickles and crackers and cheese, which were probably the remains of some +picnic basket. Another fellow had brought some pieces of cold bacon, +and these were warmed on sticks over the fire until they looked really +appetising. From some barn had come a half-dozen fresh eggs, and these +were quickly boiled in a can of hot water, and made a very fair showing +on the slab of granite which served as a table. + +When everything was ready the provisions were equally divided among the +crowd, and every one shared alike. It made no difference how much more +one man collected than another, it was always shared with the entire +crowd. Poor Archie found it almost impossible to eat, but the men +insisted that he take something, so he did manage to swallow a few sips +of coffee and eat a slice of bread and butter. But as he looked about +him at the dirty hands and faces, and the filthy garments of the tramps, +he determined not to eat again while with them. + +When the meal was over the two tin cans were washed at a spring of +water, and as it was now quite dark, they all sat close to the fire, in +order to see. Some one produced a pack of dirty cards, and they began a +game of some kind. Archie was asked to join, but he told them he didn't +know anything about card-playing. The poor lad was beginning to wish he +had never left home, and felt more miserable than at any other period +of the journey. He walked over to a corner of the ruins where the light +from the fire did not penetrate, and, once there, he sat down and sobbed +bitterly for a time. When he had finished crying it seemed impossible +for him to sleep. The scene about the fire fascinated him. The men were +seated in every sort of picturesque attitude, and as the flickering +light fell upon their dark faces it wasn't hard for the poor lad to +imagine that he had fallen among a crowd of brigands. He watched them as +they played until he could see no longer, and then he fell into a sound +sleep. + +When Archie woke it was still dark, but the moon was shining brightly +overhead, making everything as light as day. He rubbed his eyes and sat +up, and it was some time before he could realise where he was. Then, as +he saw the tramps lying about the ground, he remembered his adventures +of the night before, and, horrified that he had allowed himself to +sleep, he hastily jumped up, and determined to get away from the ruins +as quickly as possible. The tramps were all sleeping soundly, and +the only noises to be heard were the sound of their breathing and +the blood-curdling hoot of some owl perched on the pillars of the old +portico. The boy picked his way carefully between the bodies of the +sleeping men, and in a minute stood once more on the grand flight of +steps outside. He was trembling for fear some tramp would awake and +prevent his going, and when a bat brushed him in its flight he almost +screamed with terror. Far out beyond the trees and the shrubby he could +see the road glistening in the moonlight, and he made his way as rapidly +as possible out of the grounds, and was once more on his way to the +city. + +It was lonesome work, walking along a country road at night, and +Archie remembered with longing his cosy bed at home. The feeling of +homesickness kept growing within him, despite his efforts to down it, +and when at last the glorious autumn sun rose over the eastern horizon +he was miserable with longing for mother and for home. But he was too +proud to even think of turning back. He must reach the city at all +hazards, homesick or not. + +Archie did not think of breakfast this morning. His experience of the +night before seemed to have taken away his appetite entirely, and his +only thought was to walk as fast as possible, so that he could reach the +city soon. About nine o'clock he entered the outskirts of a busy town, +and while there he observed that the railroad going to the city passed +through the place. All at once a new idea occurred to him. He had so +often heard men and boys tell of how they had stolen a ride from one +town to another. Why shouldn't he be able to get a ride on a freight +train to the city. Would it be wrong? Archie thought not, since so +many men did it. And anyhow it didn't seem a wicked thing to cheat the +railroad. He had heard people say that the company ought to be cheated +whenever possible, since it cheated so many others. So, from being so +tired and so anxious to reach New York, Archie decided to try and steal +a ride. He entered the yards, where a train was being made up for the +south, and there he saw a cattle-car with an open door. He immediately +jumped inside and shut the door, squeezing himself into the farthest +corner, hoping that he wouldn't be discovered. He soon found that he +wasn't alone, for a couple of tramps were in the opposite corner, and +they whispered to him not to make any noise. "The brakie," they said, +"will soon be 'round, and if he finds ye he'll put us all in jail." + +Poor Archie grew pale at the thought of being put in jail, and huddled +himself closer in the corner. After a time the train started, and the +tramps, he noticed, climbed up into some sort of compartment under the +roof of the car, where they wouldn't be observed, leaving Archie alone +down-stairs. Things went smoothly for a time. The train went flying +along, and Archie counted every mile which brought him nearer to the +city. Finally the train pulled up at a crossing, and a brakeman came +along and threw open the door of the car. He was not long in discovering +the cowering figure in the corner, and his wrath was dreadful to look +upon. "So, ye cussed vagabond," he growled, "ye thought ye'd steal a +ride, did ye? Get out o' this now. Quick, out with ye." Archie could +have fainted, and, as it was, he almost fell out of the car, propelled +by the brakeman's boot. For awhile he stood dazed beside the track, and +finally moved on. "I'll keep a 'stiff upper lip,'" he said, "whatever +happens." But this was by far the most discouraging adventure yet. + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK--A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE. + +ON and on for the rest of the day walked Archie. His feet were sore, +he was weak from hunger, and he was made miserable with being homesick. +People who met him on the road turned around to look at the slender lad +with the pale face and the weary step, but he kept walking on, stopping +for nothing, and noticing no one. At noon he picked some apples in an +orchard, and these appeased his hunger. When evening drew near, however, +he felt that he could go without food no longer, so he didn't hesitate +to stop at a house and ask for food. "I know mother would give a boy +food if one should come to our door," he said to himself, "so I do not +think it wrong for me to ask for food here." He was fortunate enough to +strike a pleasant housewife, who took him in and made him sit down at +the kitchen table, which she covered with good things to eat. There was +cold roast beef, some fried potatoes and a glass of good fresh milk. And +then she gave him some apple pie, so that when he had finished Archie +felt better than for many a day. While he ate he told the good woman why +he was going to New York, and her sympathy was enlisted at once. "Why, +you poor lad," she exclaimed, "just to think of your being in the city +all alone. And what will your mother think?" + +Archie couldn't imagine what his mother did think. He had remembered her +every minute during the last few days, and was anxious to write her, +so he decided to ask the woman for some paper and a pencil. These were +gladly given him, and he sat down and told his mother that he was almost +to New York and that he had been having a splendid time. He was careful +not to say anything about his experience with Farmer Tinch, or the +night he spent with the tramps. He knew these things would only make her +unhappy, and it was just as well that she should think everything was +smooth sailing for him. His letter was filled with his enthusiasm and +his hope for the morrow, so that when good Mrs. Dunn received it she +was overjoyed, and hurried over to show it to the Widow Sullivan, who +enjoyed it thoroughly and said "I told you so." Poor Mrs. Dunn had +been having a very miserable time of it. She was hardly surprised that +morning when she awoke and found Archie gone, but she was naturally much +worried for fear some accident would happen to him before he reached New +York. Once there, she felt that she needn't worry much about him, for, +strange to say, Mrs. Dunn had a firm belief in the ability of city +policemen to take care of every one, and she knew that Archie would not +be allowed to suffer for want of food and a place to sleep. And when she +received this letter, saying that Archie was nearly to New York, and had +even been so successful as to earn some money, she felt more comfortable +than for some time, Of course she supposed that he would be home before +long. She was positive that he wouldn't be able to get any work in the +city, and knew that as soon as his money gave out he would return. "It's +all for the best," she said to Mrs. Sullivan. "The habit of running away +from home was born in the boy. His father left home when he was no older +than Archie, and no harm ever came to him. So I'm not going to worry, +Mrs. Sullivan." And then Mrs. Dunn would go back to her home, and at +sight of Archie's old hat or some of his football paraphernalia, would +burst into tears. + +The good woman who gave Archie his supper refused to let him start out +again on the road that night. She told him that he must remain with +them, for they had an extra bed up over the kitchen which was never +needed, and that he might just as well sleep there as not. So for the +first time in nearly a week Archie slept comfortably, and, as he heard +the familiar sounds in the kitchen below him in the morning, it was hard +for him to make up his mind that he was not at home, and that it was not +his mother who was grinding the coffee in the kitchen below. He heard +the ham frying in the skillet, and the rattle of the dishes as his +hostess set the table, and then he dressed himself and hastened +downstairs, feeling ready for a good day's walking. + +When he had eaten his breakfast he started out again. The woman told him +that it was only about fifteen miles to New York, and that after he +had walked about six of them he could take a trolley-car and ride the +remainder of the distance for five cents. So he thanked her for her +kindness, and promised to let her know how he succeeded in the city, +for the woman was much interested in his future. He felt almost sorry +to leave the home-like place, but the prospect of reaching the city this +very day was enough to make him anxious to be off. He covered the six +miles to the trolley-car before eleven o'clock in the morning, and then +in an hour and a quarter more the trolley landed him in lower New York. + +His sensations as he was whirled along the smooth pavements, past +beautiful buildings and handsome residences, may be better imagined than +described. After looking forward to this day for so long, he was almost +overcome at the realisation of his hopes, and took the utmost delight in +everything about him. When the car stopped at the terminus of the line, +he got out and walked up the busiest street in the neighbourhood. He +hardly knew what to do first, but continued walking until he came to the +New York end of the great Brooklyn Bridge. Then he couldn't resist the +desire to walk across the bridge, and he started out upon the journey. +Up the steps he walked, and soon he had climbed as far as the middle +of the magnificent structure. There he stood for some time, looking +out over Governor's Island, nestled like a green egg in a nest of red +buildings, and past Staten Island to the open sea beyond It was all +grander, more beautiful than anything he had ever seen before, and +he felt glad that he had come. Then in another direction he saw the +never-ending succession of buildings, some tall, some low ones, but all +inhabited with swarms of people. "There are three million people in this +great city," he said to himself, "and over them in New Jersey, in those +cities I see, there are a million more, and I am one of four million." +The thought was too much for the boy, and he continued his walk across +the bridge. Once across, he came back again, for Brooklyn was a strange +place to him. In New York City he felt more at home, for he had at least +spent two days within its limits. + +Once back in the busy streets, he decided to look about for a cheap +place to stay for the night. It was the middle of the afternoon now, and +he felt that he ought to make some preparation. He knew better than to +apply at the police station for lodging, for he knew they would probably +turn him over to the famous Gerry Society, which would send him back +home before a day had passed, and then where would his ambitions be? + +He remembered the place where he had stayed with Uncle Henry, but +he knew that this would be too high-priced for his pocketbook, so he +started up the Bowery, where he expected to find some very cheap places. +He didn't like the looks of the people he met in the street, but +his experiences on the way to New York had taught him not to be too +particular about a little dirt. So when he came to a rickety building +with a sign up, "Beds, ten and fifteen cents," he immediately went up +the dark, filthy stairway, and found himself in a large room at the top +which served as the "hotel" office. There were rows of chairs in +front of the windows and along the walls, and in the chairs were +the queerest-looking lot of men he had ever seen. He didn't pay any +attention to them, though, but went up to the seedy individual behind +the desk, and asked him if he could get a bed for the night. "Sure, +Mike," the man replied, and Archie signed his name in a dirty book with +torn pages. He paid the man ten cents, and asked if he could leave his +bundle while he went outside. "Sure, Mike," was again his answer, and +the man took his little bundle of necessities and threw them on the +floor behind the counter. When Archie had gone out, a fat man with a +baby face came up and whispered to the clerk. "Anything in the bloke?" +he inquired. "Nit," said the clerk, "don't yer see his baggage? Does +it look like there's anything in it?" And the mysterious conversation +closed, to be continued later in the evening. + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + LOOKING FOR WORK--WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT. + +AFTER a couple of hours spent in going about the streets, Archie went +into a place where he bought some coffee and rolls for his supper. He +paid only five cents for three sweet rolls and a large cup of coffee +which was not at all bad to taste, and he returned to the lodging-house +on the Bowery feeling better than he had expected to feel when he +started out from the homestead where he spent the previous night, If +he could get a good meal for five or ten cents, and could sleep for ten +cents more, he would have enough to keep him going for some time. + +The Bowery at night presented a wonderful appearance to Archie's mind. +The brilliantly lighted shops, the cheap theatres with their bands of +musicians on the sidewalk in front of the entrance, were all attractive +to his boyish eyes, but he was wise enough to pass them all by, and +to make his way as quickly as possible to the cheap lodging-house. The +street was jammed with persons of every description. He was surprised +particularly at the number of Chinamen he met, for he didn't know that a +block or two away was the centre of the Chinese population of New York, +where the Celestials have their theatre, their hotels, their great +stores, and their joss-house. There were many Italians in the street, +too, and Polish Jews, to say nothing of Frenchmen and Germans. Then +there was the typical Bowery "tough," who swaggered up and down, looking +for trouble, which he usually finds before an evening passes. Archie was +not afraid in this cosmopolitan crowd. No one seemed to notice him, and, +anyhow, there were a great many policemen about, who seemed to keep a +sharp lookout all the time. And as Archie shared his mother's faith in +the city policeman, he felt no fear. + +In the lodging-house everything looked very much as before. The chairs +were still occupied with filthy-looking men, who smoked and spat and +talked in undertones among themselves. The boy paid no attention to any +of them, but, walking up to the seedy individual behind the counter, +asked him if he could go to bed now. The man answered, "Certainly," and +sent a fellow with Archie to show him his bed. It was in a long, narrow +room, which was poorly lighted with a few gas-jets here and there, and +which was filled with about thirty beds, all narrow, and all dirty. One +of these was pointed out to Archie, and then the man left him. The poor +lad felt more homesick than ever, and had it not been that he had a +glorious to-morrow to look forward to, he would have been very miserable +indeed. As it was, he undressed and got between the chilly sheets, when +he remembered that he hadn't looked after his little roll of bills for a +long time, and that some of them might be missing. He crawled out of +bed again, and felt inside the lining of his coat for the purse. He had +sewed it there for safe-keeping until he reached the city, for he had +some little change in his pocket, which he knew would last him for +several days. + +The poor boy's hand felt nothing but a cut in the lining, where the roll +of bills had been, and all at once he realised that the money must have +been stolen from him. And he at once thought of the night in the ruins, +when he fell asleep among the tramps, and there was no doubt in his mind +but that they had taken his money from him. This was a terrible blow. +Here he was, with just a few cents in his pocket, and no one to whom he +could appeal for aid. It was the worst predicament Archie had ever +been in, and he hardly knew what to do. He sat on the side of his dirty +little bed for awhile, and then he snuggled under the covers and was +soon asleep again. For a boy who has been walking all day seldom stays +awake from worry. + +But when he awoke in the morning, it was to realise the fact that he +must get some money this very day or go to the police station. The few +cents he had remaining were only enough to buy some coffee and bread for +breakfast, and the poor lad didn't know where his next meal would +come from. As he went out, the clerk in the filthy office of the +lodging-house told him that he needn't come back any more. + +"Why did you tell him that?" asked the fat man with a sly face. + +"Because I went through his clothes last night when he was asleep, and +he had only six cents in his pocket. We don't want no starvin' brats +around here, to bring the Gerry Society down upon us." + +It was well that Archie didn't know his pockets had been searched while +he was asleep, or his faith in human nature would have been more +shaken than ever before. He had not suspected that the men in this +lodging-house might be dishonest. + +"They are poor," he said to himself when he saw them first, "but they +may be good men for all that." + +After a slender meal, Archie found a library where he looked over the +advertising columns of the morning papers, trying to find some position +open which he thought he might fill. There were several advertisements +calling for office boys, and all these he made note of, and then as he +looked down the page he noticed that a boy was wanted in a restaurant to +wash dishes. He decided that if he didn't succeed in getting a place +as office boy, he might get the restaurant place. He knew that in a +restaurant he would be likely at least to get enough to eat. + +For two hours he called at addresses of men who wanted office boys, but +at every place he was turned away. "We have already hired one," some +of them said, and others told him that they never took any boys in +the office who were living away from home. Some asked him for +recommendations, and when he had none, they looked at him and told him +"good morning." It was all terribly discouraging, and with every minute +Archie was wishing more and more that he were back home again. Somehow +the city seemed different now from what it had been when Uncle Henry +was with him. Everything was less bright, and the things he had been +delighted with before were less interesting now. + +Finally, he entered a large, handsome suite of rooms, in one of the +great sky-scrapers, and was shown into a very elegant private office. +There he found an old gentleman seated in a great easy chair, looking +over papers, and keeping one eye upon a buzzing instrument at his side +which seemed to be spitting out long strips of paper, like a magician +in a side-show. The man looked up as he entered, and cleared his throat. +"Ahem," he said, "you look as if you were from the country. I wonder, +now, if you have came to the city to seek your fortune." + +Archie was embarrassed. "Yes, sir, I suppose you might put it that way," +he replied. + +"Well," continued the old gentleman, "my advice to you is to go back +where you came from as quickly as you can. Not one boy in a thousand +will gain either fame or fortune in New York, and you stand a wonderful +chance of sinking lower every year. And even if you do succeed, you will +miss many beautiful things in your life which may come to you in the +country. You can have a pleasant home there, and live an easy, natural +life, while here it will be years before you can expect to accomplish +much, and you will spend your life in a nervous strain. Think well, +young man, before choosing the great city as your sphere of usefulness." + +"I've made up my mind, sir," said Archie. "I have quite decided to +remain in the city." + +"Very well," said the old gentleman, "I hope you may never regret it. +But we have already hired an office boy. Good morning." + +Archie walked out, more discouraged than ever. Perhaps, after all, a +country life was not to be so much despised. This man ought to know what +he was talking about. But once outside, in the Broadway crowd, Archie +forgot everything about the country, and was lost in the delight of +being one of four million. + +He now decided to accept the place in the restaurant, if it were +not taken, and, fortunately for him, it was not. So he rolled up his +sleeves, and began to wash dishes as if he had done nothing else in all +his life before. + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + IN THE STREET AGAIN--THE POLICE STATION--VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, + AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR. + +ALL day long Archie washed dishes, and before night came he decided that +he had never before had such discouraging work. The restaurant was +a popular one, and there were very many dishes to be washed, to say +nothing of the pots and pans which were always dirty. Archie no sooner +finished one sink full of dishes than another large pile was waiting +to be put through the same operation, and there was no time at all for +looking about him. There was hardly time for eating, even, and at +noon he was only able to snatch a few mouthfuls. The work was not +interesting, and it was a new sort of labour to Archie, so that +altogether he did not get on as well as he might have wished. The cook +was constantly nagging him, and telling him to hurry up, and the poor +lad tried his best to please him. But somehow everything went wrong, and +he was hardly surprised when the proprietor came in at six o'clock +with a new man for the place. "Come around in the morning," he said to +Archie, "and I'll pay your day's wages." + +So the boy was in the street once more, with no money, and no place to +sleep. He wasn't hungry, that was one thing, for he had been allowed +to eat a good meal before leaving the restaurant. But where was he to +sleep, and what was he to do on the morrow, when he would surely be +hungry? His experience at looking for work had not been encouraging, and +he began to have serious doubts as to whether he would ever get a place. +Certainly he would starve if he waited around New York long without +anything to do. + +It was quite dark at seven o'clock, and Archie walked over to the +brilliantly lighted street which ran north and south through the city. +He had never failed to find something interesting to look at there, and +he felt now that he would like to see the bright side of city life, even +if he couldn't enjoy it himself. So all the evening he walked up and +down the street, watching the well-dressed crowds hurrying into the +theatres and the other almost innumerable places of amusement. He stared +in open-mouthed amazement at some of the costumes of the women he saw +alighting from carriages. Never before had he seen anything half so +beautiful, and if any one had told him that there were such dresses he +would have told them he didn't believe it. Some of them, he thought, +must cost hundreds of dollars, and the jewels worn with them many +hundreds more. How interesting, how new, it all was to him! Once he +thought of the little home in the village, and at first wished that his +mother might be there to enjoy the sights with him. "But I wouldn't want +her to see me," he thought, "not while I am so miserable, and feeling +so discouraged." For Archie was beginning to wonder if he hadn't made +a mistake in leaving home, whether he had not been overconfident and +hot-headed. But he decided to try it a few days more, that is, if he +could manage to live for that length of time in the city. + +At twelve o'clock he was walking up and down the street, which was still +bright with millions of lights, though the crowds had gone home from the +theatres, and the restaurants were beginning to be less popular. He was +still wondering how he was going to find a place to sleep, when he was +accosted by a policeman, and taken into a doorway. "I've been watching +you," said the officer, "and I want to know why you are walking up and +down the street at this time of night." + +Archie could have cried from fright, but he remembered that he was under +suspicion, so decided to tell the policeman his whole story, and perhaps +he could help him out in some way. So he described his experiences +during the day, and was surprised at the interest shown by the officer +in the recital. When he had finished he was told that he would be +taken to the police station. "You needn't be afraid, my lad," said the +policeman. "I'll see that the Gerry Society doesn't get you and send you +home, that is, if you think you want to try it here a few days longer. +You can sleep at the station to-night, and the next morning you can try +it again." So to the station they went, and Archie was, naturally, a +little frightened when he saw, for the first time, the cells, and the +terribly severe appearance of all his surroundings. But he was given a +good bed in which to sleep, and he passed a delightful night, dreaming +of the wonderful adventures which befell him in the city. + +He was not awakened until eight o'clock, and then he found the good +policeman waiting to take him out to breakfast, He expressed surprise +that he should be so kind to him. + +"I always thought that officers were cross and unpleasant," he said, +"but you're not that kind, anyhow." + +"Well," laughed the officer, "we have to be cross very often, though +we're sometimes sorry to be so. But I've taken a fancy to you, my lad. I +like to see a boy who does things. When a boy of seventeen is willing +to come to New York alone, and make his own way, without friends +or influence of any kind, it shows a proper spirit, and he ought to +succeed. I know you'll get along if you only persevere. I'd advise you +to keep on trying." + +"Oh, I'm going to, now," said Archie. "I was very homesick and +discouraged last night, but since I've met you I seem to have received a +new impetus, and I'm ready to make a new beginning." + +So Archie and the policeman parted friends. + +"Come around to the station to-night if you want a bed, and you shall +be cared for," said the officer, as he turned around the corner into the +busy street, where he was lost in the crowd. + +Archie walked down the street, hardly knowing what to do first. He +didn't feel like answering any more advertisements in the newspapers, +and he decided to go into a few stores and ask for work. He was about to +do this when he saw before him the magnificent building of the New York +Enterprise. It was a truly beautiful structure, rising fifteen stories +above the ground, and surmounted with an artistic tower, which could be +seen from almost any part of the city. The home of the city's greatest +daily, it looked as if it were always welcoming strangers to the +metropolis, and Archie felt an irresistible impulse to enter. Everything +connected with a newspaper had for him the greatest fascination, and he +knew he would enjoy seeing through this wonderful building, which was +almost wholly occupied by the departments of the Enterprise. So he +entered the door, and passed from one floor to another, finally arriving +at the highest floor of all, where were located the editorial rooms of +the Evening Enterprise. All at once a new plan entered Archie's fertile +brain. Why shouldn't he be able to get something to do on a newspaper? +It had always been his greatest ambition to become a reporter, and here, +although he didn't think the editor would take him in that capacity, he +thought he might get some sort of work in which he could work himself +up. + +There upon the door were the magic words: "Editor of the Evening +enterprise. No Admittance." Archie opened the door and entered. He knew +it would be useless to send in his name. It was best to see the editor +at once, and without ceremony. He was seated before a large desk, +which was littered with papers of every description, and he was a very +pleasant person in appearance. Archie stood hesitating near the door, +and remained there a minute or two before the editor looked up. + +"Well, my boy, what is it?" + +Archie took courage. + +"I--I want to be a reporter, sir, and I thought it would do no harm to +ask you for such a position, anyhow." + +The distinguished journalist wheeled about in his chair. + +"What!" he exclaimed, "you want to be a reporter. Why, my dear boy, how +old are you?" + +"I'll be eighteen my next birthday," said Archie, "and, sir, I've had +some experiences in the last two weeks, which make me feel as if I were +about five years older than I really am. I've been through some very +trying experiences, sir." + +The editor was interested at once. "Tell me what your experiences have +been," he said, and Archie began, and told him his whole story; how he +had left home to win fame and fortune, and how he had worked on the farm +for a week with Farmer Tinch; how he had been robbed the night he stayed +with the tramps in the ancient ruins, and how he had finally reached +the city. Then he told him of the night in the lodging-house, of his +dish-washing experience in the restaurant, and how he had been taken +from the street by a policeman the night before, and allowed to sleep in +the station-house. When he had finished the editor had a broad grin upon +his face. + +"By Jove!" he exclaimed, "this is certainly rich stuff. There's a good +story in it, I'll be bound." + +Then, speaking to Archie, he said: + +"Just wait here a minute, my boy, and I'll see if we can't put some +money in your way." + +He pressed a button at the side of his desk, and when a boy appeared, he +told him to bring "Mr. Jones, please, or one of the other reporters. And +tell Jones to bring an artist with him." + +The reporter and the artist soon stood before the editor, who told them, +with great glee, that he had a leading feature for the next evening +edition of the Enterprise. "Just talk to this boy, Jones, and see if +you can't make two good columns on the front page and two for the inside +from his story. I think it's great, myself. And you Cash," he said, +turning to the artist, "you make a good sketch of the boy." + +Archie could hardly believe his eyes and ears. Just to think that he +was being interviewed, and that his picture was to be in the paper. It +seemed almost too good to be true. + +When the reporter had finished with him, he was taken down-stairs to the +cashier's office and given thirty dollars in bills. "This will pay you +for the interview," said the editor, "and give you enough to fix up +with. Now, to-morrow, you come in again, and I think I can give you +steady employment." + +Oh, how happy Archie was! He went out into the street, and seemed to +fairly walk on air. Then he heard the newsboys crying, "Extra paper, +read about the Enterprise's Boy Reporter." And when Archie saw the +paper, there on the front page was his picture, together with the story +of his "startling adventures." + + + +CHAPTER X. + + LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN--FEATURED AS "THE BOY REPORTER." + +ARCHIE often speaks of the day when he visited the newspaper office +for the first time as the happiest day in all his life. The change from +despair and homesickness to the joy of being appreciated by some one +was so rapid that it made his head fairly swim with the exhilaration of +success. With thirty dollars in his pocket, and the knowledge that he +would have steady employment of the kind he desired on the morrow, he +walked up the Bowery feeling like a prince. He entered the lodging-house +where he had left his bundle of clothing, and so surprised the clerk +by his new appearance that he was invited to remain there for another +night. The shrewd man guessed that some good fortune must have befallen +Archie, or he wouldn't be so happy. But the one night of misery which +he had spent in the squalid hotel was enough for Archie, and he walked +hastily up-town with his bundle, keeping a sharp lookout for a pleasant +place where he might get a room. In his previous wanderings he had seen +several nice houses with rooms to rent, but now that he wanted a room he +found it difficult to find any of these neighbourhoods. He was anxious +to get settled as quickly as possible, for he wanted to get everything +done to-day, so that to-morrow he could have time to do anything +required of him by the editor of the Enterprise. He must get a new suit +of clothes, he must get his hair cut, and last, but not least, he must +write home to mother and tell her of his great good fortune. + +Finally, in his wanderings, Archie came to a beautiful square which +was surrounded on every side by business houses and tenements. But the +square itself and the houses on it were very quaint and very handsome, +so that it seemed to be a very oasis in the desert. The green trees, +just a little tinged with the brown and gold of autumn, reminded Archie +of the front yard at home, and he decided to get a room in one of the +houses here if he could possibly do so. + +It so happened that there was a hall bedroom empty in one of the +best-looking places, and Archie at once engaged it. The price was more +reasonable than he had hoped for, even, and this made him happy, for as +yet he had no idea how much his earnings would be, and he was anxious to +be able to save something to send home, if he possibly could. The room +was nicely furnished, and looked out upon the fountain, with the green +trees, so that it was highly satisfactory in every respect. It didn't +take Archie long to undo his bundle, and it was a pitiful display that +greeted him when it was opened. The little comb and brush, a piece of +soap, a Testament given him last Christmas by the teacher at Sunday +school, a suit of underwear, and a couple of handkerchiefs. The whole +lot of things hardly filled a corner in one of the bureau drawers, and +Archie realised that he must buy a great many things within a week or +two. + +But before going out to do any shopping, he sat down and wrote a long +letter home, describing his success of the morning, and telling his +mother of the editor's promise to give him regular employment. He +enclosed a copy of the paper with his picture and the story of his +adventures, and it made him very happy to think of his mother's feelings +when she read it all. Then, when he had finished, he went out to a +post-office, and bought a money-order for ten dollars, which he also +enclosed. "I know I can spare it," he said to himself, "and it will +gratify her so much." Then, when the letter with its contents was safely +mailed, he bought himself a new suit of clothing, and renovated himself +in many ways, so that when he returned to his room in the square it was +nearly dark, and he looked a different boy entirely. + +Before going to bed, he determined to see his policeman friend, and tell +him of his good fortune. "He is probably expecting me to sleep in the +station," Archie thought, "and it will be a great surprise to him." +But when he met the good man, he found that he had already heard of his +success. + +"I bought the Enterprise, and could hardly believe my eyes," said he, +"but I always thought you would find some one to appreciate your pluck. +I'm mighty glad for you, my lad, and you must always let me know how +you are getting along." This Archie promised to do, and returned to his +lodging to sleep. + +The next morning he was on hand at the Enterprise office before the +editor himself was down. The place was quite as fascinating as it had +been on the preceding day, and he found something new to look at +every minute. The reporters at their desks, several of whom introduced +themselves and congratulated Archie on his perseverance, were a source +of great interest to him, and the copy-boys, running here and there with +special copy for the first edition, gave an air of hustling activity to +the place that was very attractive to this new reporter. + +When the editor came he had already thought of something for Archie to +do. "Now you've been introduced to the public," he said, "and we want to +feature you for a few days. Every one will be interested in knowing what +you are doing, and what is going to become of you. You must write us +an article for the paper to-day, telling about your experiences since +yesterday, about getting a new suit, and about hunting for a room. And +you can tell about your policeman friend, too." + +This was surprising. Archie couldn't imagine why any one should +be interested in knowing about his daily life, but he sat down and +succeeded in writing a very interesting two columns about it. He was +much surprised that he should be able to write so easily and so well. Of +course he knew that composition and rhetoric had been his two strongest +studies at school, but he had never realised before that he had any +great talent for writing. When he had finished this article, the editor +looked it over, and said, "That's great. You're all right, my boy. We'll +make a great journalist of you yet," and of course this made Archie very +happy. "Wait until this story is set up," said Mr. Jennings, the editor, +"and I'll see what you can do in the way of correcting proofs." + +When the proofs came, in a very short time, he hardly knew what to do +with them. But in reading them he discovered several mistakes, which he +lost no time in correcting, and Mr. Jennings said that he had done very +well indeed. "Now you can spend the day in doing what you please. +I would suggest that you go about New York and have as many strange +experiences as possible, so that to-morrow you can write them up for us. +And it will pay you, by the way, to go out to Coney Island, which is a +different place from any you have seen before. You are sure to see some +unusual things, and in the morning you can bring me in two columns about +it." + +Before leaving, Archie was asked if he needed any money. "You mustn't +hesitate to ask for it, because you can have it as well to-day as on +Saturday." But as he had left several dollars of the thirty he had +received the day before, Archie didn't draw any more, and he thought it +most remarkable that the editor should have so much money to pay out. + +He had no difficulty in getting a trolley-car to Coney Island, and, +after an hour's riding through Brooklyn streets, he found himself in the +most unique and most delightful place imaginable, It was a queer-looking +town, with great wheels in the air, high towers, with elevators and +innumerable merry-go-rounds, and other sources of amusement. The noise +was something terrific. Hand-organs, street-pianos, and German bands +were all playing at the same time, while people hurried about from one +place to another, enjoying the hundreds of games and riding the various +scenic railways and carrousels. Archie stood mute with delight at it +all, but before five minutes had passed he had shot the chutes, and had +ridden over a steeplechase which took him through dark caverns, where +dragons glared at him and where electrical sparks were constantly flying +through the air. It was all so new, so different from anything he had +seen before, that he was simply lost in admiration. He was standing +near a theatre, when a short, dark man touched him on the arm, and said, +"Come this way, young man, and I'll teach you the best game of all." + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND--RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN. + +ARCHIE was at first too much surprised to answer the man at all, but in +a few moments he remembered that he was now a reporter, and that it +was his duty to see all that he could, and have all the new experiences +possible. So he decided to follow the man, and find out what "the best +thing of all" in Coney Island was like. He was taken through several +narrow alleyways, and finally he found himself in front of a tumble-down +structure, built out directly over the water. It was very modest in +appearance, and everything seemed quiet about the place. The shades were +carefully drawn, and the dark man had to knock three times before the +door was opened and they were permitted to enter. Inside, Archie found +himself in a handsomely furnished apartment which differed greatly in +appearance from the exterior of the building. There was a rich velvet +carpet, mahogany furniture, and a great many small tables standing about +the room. The place was filled with men, mostly well-dressed, who were +playing various games. Some were dealing cards, others were twirling +wheels with numbers on them, and some were playing games with chips. +It didn't take Archie long to realise that he had been steered into a +gambling den of the worst kind, and he was immediately on the alert for +future developments. He watched every movement of his new friend, and +noticed that he found it necessary to speak to several of those present +in a low undertone. This didn't worry Archie, because he knew that +he was in no danger except of losing money, and he felt that he could +afford to lose some money, since he was sure to earn more by writing +about the experience for the newspaper. + +So he carefully observed all that was going on, making mental notes of +the peculiarities of the place and the people. When at last the dark +man came up and inquired if he wouldn't like a chance to earn some money +easily, he very readily answered yes, and the man was overjoyed to +find so willing a victim. Then, of course, Archie was introduced to the +mysteries of the famous roulette wheel, of which he had read so much. +Archie was interested in everything, and didn't mind losing four dollars +in learning so much that was new. He succeeded in getting away when +he had lost this sum, though the man assured him that he couldn't help +winning back all he had lost, and much more, too, if he would but remain +awhile longer. Archie was firm, however, and passed out into the narrow +alleyways again, feeling that he had learned a great deal through a very +small expenditure of money. He gradually found his way back into the +crowded Surf Avenue, where there were hundreds of things, evidently, +which he had not yet seen. The crowds, too, seemed greater even than +before, and there seemed to be thousands of people arriving every hour +from New York and Brooklyn, over the various street-car and railway +lines, and by the excursion boats landing at the great iron pier. The +noise was still deafening, and every one seemed to be having a splendid +time in every way. "Surely," said Archie to himself, "no one can feel +blue or despondent in such a place as this, where every one is full of +fun, and apparently determined to have a good time while here." And he +felt that he would like to remain longer, but he knew he should go +back again to the city, so that he might see the editor, and tell him +something about what he had seen and done. + +So again he rode over the great Brooklyn bridge, and stopped on the +other side at the handsome building of the Enterprise. It made Archie +very happy to feel that he was now a reporter on such a great paper, and +he found it hard to realise that so much good fortune had come to him in +such a short time. He met reporters in the various hallways, and all of +them spoke to him pleasantly, so that he began to feel that he had never +been thrown with such pleasant men before. + +He had no difficulty in seeing the editor this time, and found him a +ready listener to the story of his Coney Island experiences. He insisted +on Archie's describing all the men he had seen in the gambling den, and +then asked him if he could identify them, if necessary, and also if he +would be able to find the place again. Archie gave good descriptions of +most of the men, and said that he could take any one to the place at any +time. The editor lost himself in thought for a few minutes, and at the +end of that time he rang for a copy-boy. "Ring for a messenger boy," he +said, "and when he arrives come for a note which I want him to take to +Mr. Pultzer's house." Archie stared with amazement at Mr. Jennings, and +waited for further information. He wondered what was going to be done. +He knew that Mr. Pultzer owned the newspaper, and he knew that it must +be something important that Mr. Jennings wanted to write him about. He +wasn't long left in the dark, and he felt very proud that Mr. Jennings +should have confidence enough in him to tell him about his plans. "I +think you have discovered something which will prove very important to +the paper and the public," he said to Archie. "We have suspected for a +long time that gambling dens have been flourishing in Coney Island, but +up to now we have not been able to locate any of them. Now that you have +found one, we hope to arouse public opinion to the danger there is in +such places, and we hope to inspire a reform movement which will be +strong enough to wipe them out entirely. I will hear from Mr. Pultzer +in a short time, and then I want you to go down to the Island with +some plain-clothes detectives and two other reporters. And I don't +mind telling you now that there will be a good sum in it for you if you +succeed in arresting any of the leaders of this gang. You can be excused +for an hour now, if there's anything you want to do." + +Full of enthusiasm over the coming adventure and his part in it, Archie +hurried out to a quick-lunch counter and bought himself a light meal, +for he feared that he would have to remain at Coney Island through +the evening. Then, when he had finished, he returned to the newspaper +office, where he spent some time in getting acquainted with some of the +reporters who were working on the Morning Enterprise. He found them all +very pleasant to meet, and he learned a great many helpful things from +their conversation. The older men were able to give him many pointers +concerning things that he should, and should not, do. While he was in +the office of the Morning Enterprise Mr. Jennings came in, and, taking +him along into the private room of the managing editor, introduced him +to Mr. Van Bunting, who was the editorial head of the morning edition. +Then Mr. Jennings told of the new scheme, and Mr. Van Bunting entered +into it so thoroughly that before an hour three detectives, two +reporters, and Archie were on their way to the Island. + +Once arrived in the resort, which was as noisy and bright as in the +afternoon, they all made a bee-line for the gambling den, headed by +Archie, who surprised the others with his certainty and confidence as to +which was the right direction. In a very few minutes they all stood in +front of the dilapidated structure built out over tide-water, and Archie +heard one of the detectives say that the place looked "mighty suspicious +like." He gave three knocks just as the dark man had done in the +afternoon, and in a few minutes the door was cautiously opened and a +head made its appearance. The detectives lost no time in pushing their +way in, amid great confusion and cries of fear, and it seemed only a +few seconds until all the inmates were huddled in a corner, covered with +pistols, and wailing in fear, when they weren't cursing through anger. +Then they were all arrested and taken to the police station, where they +were all refused bail, and placed in cells overnight. Then the reporters +returned to the office of the Enterprise, where Archie was told by Mr. +Van Bunting to write the story of his experience for the morning paper. +This was his first work for the morning edition, and he took great pains +to make his descriptions as complete as possible, and the details as +accurate as he knew how to make them. And his hard work was rewarded by +words of praise from the managing editor when he turned the copy in for +editing. + +Tired from his hard day's work, Archie then went up-town to the quiet +square in which he had his home, and he was glad to get to bed. He had +been nervous and excited all day, and found it difficult to sleep, but +finally the tired eyelids lay quietly over the tired eyes, and Archie +was dreaming of the cool and pleasant arbour of grapes at home, and of +how the Hut Club was holding a special meeting there to devise ways and +means of welcoming home their distinguished fellow member, Mr. Archie +Dunn, who had achieved such great success in the city. + +Notwithstanding his tired feeling, Archie was up early the next morning, +and out at the corner to buy an Enterprise. He hastily turned the pages, +trying to find the story of his Coney Island adventures, but he looked +in vain. It wasn't visible anywhere. He was about to think that it had +not been thought worth while printing when he noticed on the front +page, in large letters, "The Boy Reporter's Great Discovery," and then +followed the complete account, just as he had written it. This was +the best thing yet. Just to think that his story had been considered +important enough to print upon the front page! He could hardly believe +it. Surely he had made great strides, and Archie began to realise that +it is not experience that is most needed in journalism, but something to +write about. "I have simply been fortunate in finding some interesting +things," he said, to himself, and then, after a light breakfast in a +quaint Italian restaurant around the corner, he hurried down-town to the +office of the newspaper. + +Archie was beginning to feel, by now, that he had worked for a long time +upon the paper, and as he had become acquainted with almost every one +connected with it, this wasn't a strange feeling for him to have. And +it was evident, too, that the editors intended to keep him busy for some +time to come, and Archie realised that he was in newspaper work to stay, +for a time, at least. And he was overjoyed at the prospect, for he found +the whole business as fascinating and as interesting as he had expected +it would be. + +Mr. Jennings, of the evening edition, was at the office when Archie +arrived, and sent for him to come in. "Here is fifty dollars," he said, +"for your work of yesterday, and you will have more coming to you if +these men are convicted. I want to congratulate you on what you have +done so far. Come in this afternoon, and I think Mr. Van Bunting will +have a new plan for you." + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER--THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT + TO THE PHILIPPINES--LEAVING NEW YORK--IN CHICAGO. + +AT three o'clock in the afternoon Archie was seated in Mr. Van Bunting's +office, together with Mr. Jennings and several of the chief members +of the editorial staffs of both editions of the paper. The editors had +spread out before them, on the large table, several maps, and most of +them were busily engaged in making notes on little paper pads. All the +time, however, an excited conversation was being carried on, for some +editors wanted Archie to proceed to the Philippines one way, and some +thought that the better plan would be for him to go by some other route. +But the important fact with Archie was that he was really going to be +sent to the Philippines as a war correspondent, and that he was going +to start very shortly. He had called on Mr. Van Bunting early in the +afternoon, and had then learned for the first time what the new plan was +to be. When the managing editor asked him how he would like to go to the +Philippines, Archie could scarcely reply, so delighted was he with the +brilliant prospect before him. He managed to stammer out a few words, +though, in spite of his surprise. "I always thought war correspondents +were selected from the most experienced men in journalism," he said, +but Mr. Van Bunting only laughed. "That's what we have already done, my +boy," he said, "and so far none of our distinguished correspondents have +sent us a thing worth printing that we didn't already know. You see they +can't send any more to us in the way of news than we can get from the +War Department in Washington, and most of these men are too old fogy to +send us anything out of the ordinary line of war correspondence. Now, +what we want is for you to go over there and have some adventures, and +write us something which will be different from what we have had before +from the Philippines. We are sending you, because you have had no +experience at such work, and will be sure to send us something unusual, +and that is what we want. If you can only do as well in the tropics as +you have done here in New York, we shall be more than satisfied with +your work. I am sorry that I won't have time to give you very complete +instructions, but perhaps it will be as well. And now some of the men +are waiting outside to come in and talk this matter over, so we'll have +them in now." + +And Archie found himself in the midst of an editorial conference, during +which many things were discussed. The meeting lasted more than two +hours, and finally it was decided that Archie should travel from New +York to San Francisco, and go from there to Manila on the army transport +which was to sail on the twenty-fifth of the month. This meant that he +would have to leave the city in two days' time, and Archie announced +himself as quite willing to do this, as he had few preparations to make. +The editors gave him many instructions about how he was to address his +correspondence, and how he should proceed in the event of finding it +necessary to send despatches by cable. And at the end of the conference +he felt that he knew all that he would need to know, so that he could +start off without fear of not being able to fulfil his mission. As far +as Archie could understand it, his chief instructions as to duty were to +the effect that he must have as many experiences as possible of as +many different kinds, and that he must write about them in a perfectly +natural way, just as if he were writing a letter to the folks at home. +And he thought, of course, that this would be very easy to do. + +Mr. Van Bunting gave him a letter of credit for six hundred dollars, +which amount, he said, would probably be sufficient to pay his expenses +while he was in the Philippines, and he also gave him a cheque for three +hundred dollars, which was intended to pay the expense of getting to +Manila. "Of course," said Mr. Van Bunting, "you can spend as much or as +little of this as you please, and if you need more, and we find that +the venture is paying us, why, we will send it on demand." Archie was so +overcome with the knowledge that he possessed nine hundred dollars, that +he could hardly thank the editor enough, and he made up his mind that he +would spend as little as possible of the sum, and bring back part of it +to Mr. Van Bunting upon his return. He couldn't imagine how it would be +possible for him to spend so much money, and he felt that, after some of +his experiences since he left home, he ought to be able to economise in +many ways where other reporters wouldn't know how to save at all. + +When the two days were up Archie had made all his preparation, and was +ready to leave New York for Manila. He had sent a long letter home +to his mother, telling her of his great good fortune, and enclosing a +cheque for a hundred dollars, which she was to spend while he was gone. +He told her that he would send her more money from time to time, and +felt very proud as he mailed the letter. He told her, too, that if at +any time she didn't hear from him on time, she could write to Mr. +Van Bunting, and he would let her know of his whereabouts. This was +something which Mr. Van Bunting had very thoughtfully advised him to do. +"Your mother is sure to worry if the mails are overdue," he had said, +"and if she writes to me, I will always be able to tell her of your +whereabouts, for we can hear of you through our other correspondents, if +not from your own despatches." So Archie felt that his mother shouldn't +worry, since he was such a fortunate boy in so many ways. + +The night before leaving he took a long farewell walk up Broadway. +Everything was bright with light, and there was, as usual, a great crowd +of pleasure-seekers on the sidewalks. It was all as fascinating as ever +to Archie, and he felt sorry that he was to leave it so soon. New York +had begun to grow on him, as it grows on any one living there for +any length of time, who is in a position to appreciate the city's +attractions. He felt that he would almost rather be on Broadway than in +the Philippines, but of course he forgot this feeling when he remembered +the confidence which Mr. Van Bunting had reposed in him by sending him +upon such an important mission. So, after he had passed all the bright +theatres and restaurants, he turned down a quiet side street and +returned to his lodging, so that he might have a good night's rest +before starting on his long journey. + +At seven in the morning he was up again, and at nine o'clock he was +bidding farewell to his many friends in the editorial rooms of the +Evening Enterprise. Every one congratulated him upon his great good luck +in getting such a chance to distinguish himself, and when they had done +telling him that he had a great future before him, Archie felt happier +than ever before in all his life. + +The train left the Grand Central Station at one o'clock, and Mr. +Jennings went with him to the station to see him well started upon the +journey. "You may be sure we are all much interested in you, Archie," he +said, as the train was leaving, "and we shall look forward anxiously to +your safe return." These words made Archie very glad, for it cheered him +to know that at least one of the editors liked him for himself as well +as for what he could do. + +The Southwestern Limited seemed to fairly fly along the banks of the +beautiful Hudson, and everything was so delightful that Archie could +scarcely believe that only a week or two before he had been walking +along country roads, anxious to reach New York, that he might become an +office boy. Every thing in this train was as perfect as modern ingenuity +could make it, and there was no lack of interesting things to be +examined, when Archie tired of the landscape. Then, when the train had +been two hours out of New York, he discovered that the famous president +of this great railway system was aboard, and, mustering up his courage, +he determined to introduce himself. He had long been anxious to see this +famous after-dinner orator and statesman, and here was a chance which +might not come soon again. So he went back to the drawing-room, and +found the great man to be quite as pleasant as he was interesting, +and Archie was asked to seat himself and tell something about his +experiences since leaving home. Everything he said was listened to with +great interest, and this distinguished wit seemed to find many of the +adventures very funny indeed. "You have certainly had some wonderful +experiences," he said, when Archie had finished, "and I can appreciate +your anxiety to leave school. I had that desire myself when I was a boy +of about fifteen, but my father succeeded in making me change my opinion +on the subject, and without much argument, unless you can call an +ox-team and a stony pasture an argument. I had been asking to stay +at home from school for a long time. I said that I was too old to be +sitting there with a lot of girls and some younger boys, and that I +wanted to work. Finally, my father said that I could stay at home if I +cared to, and that he would let me work on the farm for a time. I was +overjoyed, of course, at the prospect of staying out of school. + +"The next morning I was awakened at four o'clock, and had to swallow my +breakfast in a hurry, because I was late, my father said. Then he took +me out to the barn and ordered me to hitch up the ox-team, and when this +was done he took me out to a pasture lot and told me to pick up all the +boulders there. Well, I picked up boulders all day long, and by evening +my back and arms were so sore I could hardly move them. I was too tired +to eat supper, and was soon asleep in bed. When my father awoke me at +four the next morning, I told him to let me alone and that I was going +back to school. After that I was content to stay in school, and said +nothing more about leaving until I had finished the course and was ready +to go to college." + +And Archie thought it very queer that such a famous man should have had +such experiences when a boy. He remained in the drawing-room for more +than an hour, and when he left he felt perfectly sure that he had been +talking with the most charming man in the world. + +The train sped on and on, and when daylight came the next morning they +were passing through Northern Ohio. Early in the afternoon they reached +a great smoky metropolis, spread out for miles over the plains. Archie +knew that this must be Chicago, and he decided, as this was Saturday, +and the steamer wouldn't leave San Francisco until the next Friday, that +he would have time to remain here over Sunday. So he left the train at +the station in Pacific Avenue, and, Finding a hotel near the station, he +started out to see something of the city famous for its dirt and for the +World's Fair, two widely different things. + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + SAN FRANCISCO--THE TRANSPORT GONE--WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY + PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER--THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII. + +ARCHIE found Chicago to be so widely different from New York that +everything he saw was new and interesting to him. In the afternoon he +managed to see something of the congested business section of the city, +the tall office buildings, the great stores, and the famous Board of +Trade. It was all very fine, he thought, but still it wasn't nearly so +fascinating to him as New York had been on the first day he visited it. +"Chicago seems so very much like some great town," he explained to the +hotel clerk in the evening. "I feel as if I were not in a great city +at all, because there are not the evidences of a large and wealthy +population that we have everywhere in New York." Archie spoke of New +York as if he had lived there always, and found much to criticise in +Chicago. But toward evening he went up to Lincoln Park and the beautiful +North Shore, and he felt that there was nothing more beautiful in New +York than this magnificent park, and this handsome Lake Shore Drive, +with its great houses whose lawns reached down almost to the lake +itself. On the South Side of the city, too, he found some handsome +streets and residences, but there was always that feeling of being in +some rapidly growing town. It wasn't hard for Archie to realise that +there were older houses in his native town than could be found anywhere +in the great city of Chicago. + +The greatest difference between Chicago and New York was to be noticed +in the evening. Instead of the brilliantly lighted thoroughfares of +upper Broadway and Twenty-third and Thirty-fourth Streets, he found +but one street in Chicago which was at all illuminated, and the +illuminations there were chiefly signs in front of dime museums. The +streets, too, were not so crowded, and Archie almost longed that he +could be back on Broadway, if only for a little while. + +On Sunday he found Chicago to be a more noisy city than he had ever been +in before on that day, and he found that the people made good use +of their one weekly holiday. All places of amusement were open, and +everything was running in "full blast." + +The parks seemed to be very popular, indeed, and there were numerous +water excursions upon Lake Michigan, to Milwaukee, St. Joe, and various +other neighbouring cities. The street-cars were crowded all day long, +many of them taking people to a Sunday game of baseball at the Athletic +Park. All of this was very interesting and very new to Archie, but it +didn't make him anxious to remain in Chicago any longer than Monday +morning, so on that day he took the limited train for the Pacific Coast, +for he had determined not to stop off again until he reached Denver. + +Days of weary travel over a level, uninteresting stretch of ground +followed the departure of the train from Chicago, and had not Archie +found some interesting persons to talk with he would have been very +weary long before reaching Denver. As it was, he managed to pass the +time very pleasantly until the train entered Colorado, and after that +he found much that was new to look at until he reached Denver. Here he +remained for half a day, just long enough to see something of the city +and a little of the neighbouring country. Then, taking a train for San +Francisco, he reached that city on Thursday afternoon, and immediately +began to make arrangements for sailing. He found, to his great +disappointment, that the army transport had sailed the previous day, +contrary to the expectations of the editors, and of the War Department +itself, until the arrival of important despatches from Manila, which +made it necessary to start the transport at once with supplies of +ammunition. Archie hardly knew what to do. He had not anticipated +anything like this, and could scarcely think of any plan for a time, +but, finally, he proved himself equal to the emergency. He went to the +naval agent and asked him when the transport would be due at Honolulu, +and then he ascertained that a passenger steamer sailing for that port +on Saturday would reach the destination three days sooner than the +transport, so that by taking the liner he would have three extra days in +Honolulu, and would be able to reach Manila on schedule time, after all. +He at once decided that this was the thing for him to do, and as soon +as he thought of taking the steamer it occurred to him that he might +possibly be able to work his way to Honolulu, instead of paying the +regular passenger fare, which he knew was high. So he went down to the +great docks, and, after interviewing the second steward, he approached +the chief steward himself, and asked if there wasn't something that +he could do aboard the ship to earn his passage. The chief steward was +thoughtful for a time, and finally said, "Well, yes, I believe there is. +We haven't any one to peel vegetables yet, and if you think you care to +do that work I guess we can fix you up all right." Archie didn't wait +to consider whether peeling vegetables was hard work or not. He was too +glad to have a position of any kind aboard ship to be particular about +what his work was like, so he told the steward that he was willing to +take the place. "Well, be on hand at about eight in the morning, and +we'll see that you get to Honolulu." + +Archie was overjoyed at his good management. "I am going to save about +a hundred dollars," he said to himself, "and I will have this money to +send home to mother." The rest of the afternoon and the evening he spent +in going about San Francisco, and he found it to be more like New York +than any city he had yet seen. There was the same cosmopolitan crowd on +the main thoroughfares, and the same foreign districts here and there +throughout the city. He found a great deal to interest him, especially +at the Presidio, where everything connected with the army monopolised +his attention. He made friends with many of the soldiers who were +waiting to be sent to the Philippines, and hoped, on leaving, that he +would meet some of them there, but he hardly expected that he would meet +some of them in such a strange manner as it was his fate to do in Luzon. + +After a good night's rest he was on hand early at the great steamer, +where there was such a scene of bustle and confusion as he had never +seen before, not even in New York. There was a throng of men with trucks +who were loading the late freight, and there was a constant din of noisy +voices, which, combined with the shrieks of escaping steam, made it +impossible to carry on a conversation. Archie hurried aboard to find the +steward, who immediately took him into the galley and introduced him to +the cook, a large, fat Frenchman, with small, blue eyes set far back +in his head. He seemed to be a pleasant man, and Archie thought that he +would like him very much. + +"Well, does ze youngster vant to vork, eh! Eef he do, I say you pare zis +potate for dinee as quick you can." And the fellow pointed to a great +bag of potatoes and a paring-knife. "Now you sit zere in da corner," +continued the cook, "and keep out uf my vay." Archie found a stool and +sat down, and, having brought an apron with him, he put it on and began +work. The cook watched him closely, so that Archie soon learned to pare +the potatoes very nicely, and of course he was able to get along faster +and faster as he became more and more experienced. He managed, through +great effort, to get the bag finished in time for dinner, or luncheon, +as it was called on the bill of fare, and then he soon had to begin on +other vegetables, which were to be served at the more complete evening +meal. There were more potatoes, and some turnips and apples as well, +to be prepared, and it kept the boy busy all the afternoon, cleaning +as hard as he could, and never seeming to get done. The cook urged him +always to hurry, and seemed determined to have everything ready on time. +And Archie began to realise that he was working under a rather severe +master. + +He was again successful in getting the vegetables finished in time for +the evening meal, and then he had an idea that he might be allowed to +rest for awhile, but he soon realised his mistake. He was advised to +begin work on the potatoes for breakfast if he didn't want to get up at +two o'clock in the morning and pare them, so once more he took up the +knife and began to clean and scrape. It was ten o'clock before he +had finished, and he found himself too tired to spend any time on the +after-deck with the crew, but went at once down into the small, stuffy +room where he was to sleep with some of the stewards. His back ached +from bending over, and his hands were all sore from being scraped. + +Things were not very pleasant in this bedroom, but poor Archie was glad +enough to be able to lie down on the hard straw tick and go to sleep. +He slept soundly until he was awakened at four o'clock in the morning by +the second cook, who ordered him up-stairs to work. There was no time to +wash, and no place where he could wash, so the boy was obliged to go up +just as he was, much as he disliked doing so. And once up-stairs there +were various chores which were waiting for him in the galley, so that +he was kept running until breakfast was served. And then it was time +to begin paring vegetables again. This turned out to be the invariable +daily programme, and Archie became rather discouraged. Had it not been +for the thought that by doing this he was saving money to send home, he +would have been miserable indeed, but this idea kept him hopeful. He was +seasick, too, for a time, and was obliged to keep cleaning vegetables +in the galley during the whole period of his suffering. The days when he +was ill in this way were the most disagreeable ones of the voyage, and +Archie often described afterward his feelings as he sat peeling potatoes +with a bucket standing beside him. Each night he slept like a log, and +each morning he was obliged to get up at four o'clock and start work +again. It was the same thing day after day, tiresome and monotonous, so +that Archie wasn't sorry when the beautiful island hove in sight, and +they anchored in the picturesque bay of Honolulu. + +Once at Honolulu, Archie's term of service on board the liner was +over, and he was glad, indeed, to get ashore, where he learned that the +transport had not yet arrived, but was expected in two or three days' +time. These two or three days Archie determined to spend in sightseeing, +and he spent his time to excellent advantage in visiting every quarter +of Honolulu and seeing every side of life in the Hawaiian capital. He +found it a delightful place. There was much that was interesting to see, +the people were pleasant to meet, and the climate was perfect. He was +almost sorry when he learned that the transport had anchored in the bay! + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT--A STORM AT SEA--ARRIVAL IN MANILA. + +THE transport did not remain long at Honolulu, and before leaving Archie +had several things which he wanted to do. In the first place, he felt +that he ought to write the story of his experiences so far, and send +it to Mr. Van Bunting; so he did sit down and describe in detail his +experiences at cleaning vegetables on board the Pacific liner. He wasn't +sure whether this was anything that Mr. Van Bunting would care to print, +but he decided to send it on, anyhow. He would have been surprised +had he observed the enthusiasm with which this letter was read in the +Enterprise office a month later. He would have been no longer in any +doubt as to whether it was anything worth printing had he read the +Enterprise of the following day, when the letter appeared on the second +page as one of the chief features of the paper. + +Before leaving, too, Archie sent a long, cheerful letter home, saying +nothing of his being seasick on board the liner, or of his having had to +work so hard. He devoted his letter to telling of the many interesting +things he had seen, and of his bright prospects for becoming a +successful newspaper man. He wrote a shorter letter to Jack Sullivan, +which was intended to be read to all the members of the Hut Club, +for Archie felt that it was no more than right that they should know +something of his success. He found it very hard to realise, away off +here in Honolulu, that he had ever been a member of the club, and that +he had ever lived in tents behind the barn. He felt very manly now, and +his boyhood seemed far away behind him, so far away that he now felt +like a man of twenty-five rather than like a boy of eighteen. He was +beginning to realise that age is not always governed by years alone, but +that experience does much to make one old. + +As soon as the transport had anchored in the bay, Archie went aboard to +present his credentials to the commanding officer. He found the general +very pleasant to meet, and a very appreciative listener as he told of +his scheme for overtaking the transport. The officer was surprised, +of course, that such a young fellow should be going to the islands as +correspondent, but the things he said were very encouraging to Archie, +"I tell you what," the general remarked, at one time during the +conversation, "I believe that a young fellow like Dunn, here, can find +out a great many more interesting things than an older man could ever +discover. You see the youngster has ambition and energy on his side, +and ambition and energy are two mighty powerful things when they're +combined. I'd hate to buck up against 'em myself." The other officers +agreed with the general in this remark, and Archie began to feel that, +after all, he might not have such a hard time finding interesting things +to write about as he had expected. + +The transport remained in port but one day, and in thirty hours after +her arrival Archie found himself sailing again over the blue Pacific. +The weather, for a few days, was almost perfect. A cloudless sky +overhead, a warm breeze from the west, and a smooth sea made things very +pleasant aboard ship, and Archie began to realise that there are times +when it is delightful to be at sea. The vessel was very much overcrowded +with troops, and the sleeping quarters were but little more pleasant +than aboard the liner. Archie shared a stateroom with three sergeants, +and they managed to have a lively time during the voyage. They played +games, told stories, and slept in the afternoons, but all this, of +course, grew rather tiresome after a time, and the voyage was becoming +monotonous, when there came a severe storm which kept things moving for +three days. + +None of the navigating officers had expected a gale, so that when it +came every one was taken wholly by surprise, and it came so suddenly +that there was no time at all for preparation. The sky became quickly +dark one afternoon about three o'clock, and soon the whole horizon was a +mass of great black clouds, which every moment seemed to come lower and +lower until they directly overhung the ship. There was great excitement +aboard the ship. Officers hurried here and there shouting orders to +their men, and the cavalrymen rushed about in a frenzy of haste, trying +to devise means to save their horses, most of which were stabled upon +the deck. Archie looked on in breathless interest, and was surprised +to find that he wasn't at all frightened. He even found himself making +mental notes of the scene, so that he could send the story of it all to +Mr. Van Bunting when he reached Manila. + +There was but little time for rushing about, and it was soon evident +that the horses would many of them be lost, because there seemed to be +absolutely no way of saving them if the waves were high enough to break +over the bulwarks. The storm soon broke in great fury, beginning with a +fierce wind which swept the waves before it. There was but little rain, +and the waves rose higher and higher with every minute, until the heavy +ship began to roll and pitch in a frightful way, so that the soldiers +began to think, some of them, that she would certainly sink. Finally the +waves were so high they dashed themselves over the decks, and no one was +allowed above the gangways. The cries of the poor horses, as they felt +themselves being washed overboard, were frightful to hear, and many +a trooper cried himself as he thought of his horse foundering in the +raging sea without. Before many minutes all was as dark as night, though +the watch pointed to but four o'clock, and all lights were burning below +deck. It was impossible to keep a light above, for no lantern could burn +in such a storm. + +The waves began gradually to subside at ten o'clock at night, and a slow +steady rain came, which soon calmed the sea to a great extent. As soon +as it was safe to go above deck, it was found that more than a hundred +horses had been lost overboard, and that one mast had been carried away. +Down below nearly every man was in his bunk, for there was scarcely a +person who was not seasick, and most of them wouldn't have cared if +the ship had gone down with all aboard, such was their feeling of +despondency. Archie was as sick as any of the others, but was able to +make notes of occurrences just the same. And when he grew better the +next day, he wrote an excellent account of the storm to send to the +Enterprise on his arrival in Manila. + +After this rough weather experience, every man aboard was anxious +to reach port, and when, after many more days, the Bay of Cavit was +reached, a great cheer went up from a thousand throats, for everyone was +overjoyed at the sight of land. + +The transport came to anchor off the forts which had once been Spain's, +and it was announced that no one would be allowed to land for two days, +until advices could be had from Manila and the interior of the island. +This was very trying for Archie, being obliged to sit on deck for two +whole days, looking at a shore which seemed very inviting, in spite of +the general dilapidated appearance of the various buildings and docks. +Everything looked different from anything he had seen before, and the +boy felt that he could hardly wait to be allowed to explore some of +those streets which were so narrow, and those houses which were built in +such a peculiar fashion. + +Finally, the permission came for the troops to land, and Archie received +the permission of the general to remain with them as long as he wanted +to do so. And as he had no other plans, the young correspondent decided +that it would be a good plan for him to stay right with one of these +regiments, for the time being at any rate. He knew that they would be +likely to be sent to the front immediately, and the front seemed the +place for him to be. + +And then he was already acquainted with many of the men, and with the +colonel, and he realised that this would be an advantage to him in his +work. So he made his plans to keep with them. + +First they went to Manila, where they remained for a week. The quaint +old city was a veritable fairy-land of wonders to Archie, who had never +before been in a city so ancient, and here there were so many unusual +things to be seen. There seemed to be absolutely no end to the winding +streets, delightful old houses, and interesting churches, and the boy +spent many days in exploring every corner of the island capital. The +colonel warned him several times that he must look out for robbers and +other suspicious characters, but Archie laughed at his fears. But the +colonel was right, as he found later on. + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES + AMONG THE NATIVES--SEIZED BY THE REBELS. + +THE days passed very quickly in Manila, the regiment was quartered in +an old palace which had once been used as a residence by the Spanish +governors of the islands, and Archie remained in the palace with them. +There was very little to do while they were there. Each morning there +were anxious inquiries for news from the front, but there was always the +same discouraging reply that no trace had yet been found of the fleeing +Aguinaldo. The men were gradually becoming disheartened at the long +wait, and there were frequent statements by the officers that +Aguinaldo would soon be caught if they were sent out after him. The +dissatisfaction with the general in command grew stronger every day, and +at last things reached a point where there was very little loyalty and +patriotism displayed among the troops. + +The drilling was continued, however, by order of the colonel, and every +morning the troops marched out to a public square near the palace, and +went through the same old manoeuvres which they had practised for months +past. And it was harder for them to drill each week. At first they were +willing enough to work, for there was then some prospect of their being +able to use their knowledge in a fight, but now it was beginning to +seem that they would simply remain in this old palace for a few months +longer, and then go back again to San Francisco. With this opinion in +their hearts, it is not to be wondered at that most of the men became +slouchy and careless in their manners and dress, or that even the +officers themselves became disgusted at the long wait for marching +orders. + +Things had been going on in this way for a long time, when Archie made +up his mind that it was time he was hustling about and finding something +to write about which would be interesting to readers of the Enterprise. +He had sent two articles describing his life with the soldiers in the +old palace, but he knew that he ought to find something more exciting, +and more like his first articles. So, after much thought, he decided +that a good plan would be for him to take a little trip into the +interior of the island, to see whether he could find any traces of the +insurgents. The colonel had held all along for a month, now, that the +Filipinos were probably all about Manila, and still he couldn't get +the permission of the general in command to go out and investigate +the matter. The colonel figured that it would be an easy thing for the +insurgents to come as near to the city as they cared to now, for Lawton +and Wheeler were far away in the interior after Aguinaldo, and the +troops in Manila were quietly drilling, and eating, and sleeping, with +no thought of doing anything else. This line of argument seemed very +reasonable to Archie, and he volunteered to go out and see if he could +make any discoveries. The colonel assured him that he would be in no +danger, even if he were caught by the rebels, for they would never +suspect a boy of Archie's age and size of being a spy. So the lad felt +no fear at all, and made what few preparations there were to be made +before starting. He secured a knapsack from the commissary officer, +and in this he placed what few belongings he wanted to take with him, +together with his note-books and some provisions for the trip. Then he +secured a small pistol, which he carried in his hip pocket, and he was +disappointed because the colonel would not allow him to carry a rifle. +And when he had everything ready he said good-bye to his friends in the +regiment, and departed from the palace amid a multitude of cheers. At +the last moment the colonel tried to dissuade him from starting, for +fear he might meet with some accident, but Archie was determined to make +the attempt. + +It was his plan not to go farther than fifty miles in the interior, for +he thought that if he found no traces of the rebels in that distance +there would be little use in going farther into the forest, for, it +would be almost impossible to find them there. So he set out gaily upon +his trip of exploration, and Archie couldn't remember when he had been +so happy before, save on that day when he first visited the office of +the Enterprise. This adventure was exciting enough to please the wildest +boy in America, and Archie could imagine how envious the other boys +would be if they could but know the trip he was having. It had an +official air to it, too, for had not the colonel been most anxious, +in the beginning, that he should go, and did he not say that he would +reward him handsomely if he were successful in locating any of the +insurgents, or in proving that he had been right when he said they were +near Manila? It was all as perfect an adventure as Archie could have +imagined. He could not have planned a better one if he had been able to +select any trip he could think of. + +He planned that it would take him at least three days to walk fifty +miles, and perhaps longer, for the roads were not very good in some +places. He knew that he would find many villages and towns along the +way, too, for the island was thinly settled in this neighbourhood. So if +he were obliged to rest, he would never be at a loss for a place to +get a bed. Archie couldn't help thinking, as he walked along the road +outside Manila, this first morning, that he might find a body of the +insurgents in possession of one of these towns. They were very bold, +he had heard, and they probably knew that there were no American troops +anywhere in the neighbourhood, outside the city of Manila itself. And, +knowing this, he knew they wouldn't hesitate to camp at the very gates +of the city, for they were marvellously successful in getting away into +the interior whenever an American force made its appearance. + +As he thought of this possibility, Archie couldn't help being a little +fearful of what might happen to him should he fall into the hands of +the insurgents, and he began to wonder if he had not been a little +foolhardy, after all, in starting off on such a wild-goose chase. "But +I will have something new to send Mr. Van Bunting about the interior +towns," he said to himself, "and if I am captured, why, I will have a +great deal to write about when I am released." This thought made the lad +happy again, and he trudged along the road with as much vim and energy +as he had displayed during those weary days when he was walking to New +York to make his fortune. And it was a much more interesting country in +which to walk than the New York State counties had been. The vegetation +was rich and luxuriant everywhere, palm-trees, vines, and flowers +growing in profusion all along the road. In every dooryard, in front of +every hut, there grew what seemed to Archie a veritable fairy bower of +the most richly coloured flowers in existence. And they were growing, +apparently, without cultivation. He had seen nothing like them before, +even in California, and he longed to pluck some of them to send home, if +they had only been wax instead of nature's blossoms. As it was, he kept +his arms filled with them for awhile, but after a time he grew tired +carrying them, and was obliged to drop them by the roadside. + +The country looked as if it might have been very prosperous at one +time. There were plantations laid out in excellent fashion, and the soil +seemed rich and fertile. But instead of growing crops, and storehouses +filled with spices and coffee, there was desolation everywhere, and it +was easy to see that the Spaniards had determined to leave but little +behind them for the Yankees. Every other farmhouse and wayside hut was +deserted, their occupants having gone, apparently, to join Aguinaldo, +and the whole country, outside the towns, seemed to be wholly deserted +and left to grow up in weeds and tangled vines. + +The sun was warm, the sky was a perfect blue, and it seemed a delightful +day in every way. But it made Archie sad to walk through a district +which had been made so desolate, and he hadn't walked many hours before +he wished that he might soon reach a town, where he could find some +life, and where he could remain overnight. For by the middle of the +afternoon he was tired walking, and made up his mind that fifteen miles +was enough for any one to do in one day. But he was obliged to keep on +walking for two hours longer before he reached a village, and the great +sun was just sinking behind the blue hills in the distance when he +entered the one main village street, which was long and narrow, winding +in and out among the cabins and huts, as if it had been laid out after +the houses were built, for the convenience of the people. It was a poor +excuse for a public thoroughfare. There had probably been a pavement of +some sort at one time, but now the street was a mass of rubbish of every +sort, straw, dust, old bricks, and bits of stone being thrown together +in every rut, so that it was exceedingly difficult to walk along with +any comfort. + +There was no life visible in the settlement. Almost every hut had its +shades drawn at the windows, and there was absolutely no one to be seen +in the street. As he passed down the road, Archie could catch occasional +glimpses of black eyes staring at him through a lattice, or he could +hear some muttered word as he walked close to a window. From these signs +he knew that he was observed, and he felt very much embarrassed as he +continued his walk down this deserted lane, for he felt instinctively +now that hundreds of eyes were watching his every movement. + +Finally, he came to the public square, and he sat down here to look +about him. From general appearances, he judged this to be a town of +some two thousand inhabitants, for there was a very respectable +administration building, and a good-sized church. There were but two +streets of any consequence, the one by which he had entered the town, +and another running at right angles in the opposite direction. In this +latter street, as he stood in the square, he noticed a three-story +structure with a sign outside, and he decided to go there and make +inquiries as to where he might be able to secure a lodging for the +night. It looked as if it might be an inn of some sort, or at least a +store, so he walked rapidly up to the entrance and knocked twice upon +the door. This place, in spite of its sign, looked more deserted and +shut-up than any other building he had yet seen in the town, and he +wondered whether he would receive any answer to his knocks. It was +indeed a long time before he heard a sound within, but at last there was +some muttering inside, the door flew open, and Archie found himself in +the arms of three Filipinos, who threw him upon the floor and bound him, +hands and feet. It was all so sudden that he had no time to cry out, and +before he could say anything at all he was thrown into a dark room, and +the door shut behind him. + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + A PLEASANT CAPTOR--BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE--FIRST + GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO. + +FOR a long time Archie lay still upon the floor, being unable to move a +muscle from the shock of his encounter with the men, and because he was +tightly bound with ropes. And then he at last went off to sleep, feeling +frightened because he was in the hands of strange men, and a little +satisfied, too, because he was the victim of some adventure which might +turn out in a very interesting way. + +When he awoke, it was morning, and the light came into the room through +two small square windows, set high up in the wall. Archie looked about +the room with great curiosity, but found little there to interest him. +There was nothing to be seen but an old bed without spring or mattress, +and a rickety chair with but three legs, which stood in one corner. +The walls, he was surprised to observe, were handsomely decorated with +tapestries, and Archie at once made up his mind that this had at one +time been a private dwelling-house, and had probably been owned by some +rich Spaniard who kept a store on the ground floor, and lived in these +rooms. The insurgents had probably driven the family out of the country +and had taken possession of the house, which they had stripped of +everything useful, leaving the tapestries and works of art behind them. + +These suppositions were cut short by the entrance of a man who appeared +to be a half-breed, and who immediately began to speak to Archie in +broken English. The fellow had a pleasant face, and presented a fairly +good appearance, and Archie wondered how he could have come to this +place. "I suppose you have been wondering," said the man, "why you have +been thrown into this room, and it won't take me long to explain things. +You see this town belongs to us just now, and we don't propose to have +any Yankee spies around here to tell Otis of our whereabouts. There +ain't no troops in this town now, but there's likely to be any minute, +and we patriots was sent here to take possession of things and arrange +quarters for our army. Let me tell you that the Filipino army will be +in this town to-day, and if you don't look sharp you'll be the first +prisoner to be shot. Aguinaldo isn't a man to deal easily with spies, +and if he thought you was out here for that purpose he'd have you +riddled with bullets in a minute." The man came up to Archie and began +to undo the ropes. "I reckon I can trust you free for awhile, for +there's no use in your trying to get away, with the Filipino army all +around the town. Sit down there now, and I'll see that you get some +breakfast. You can tell, perhaps, that I ain't no Filipino, nor never +was one. I'm from Arizona, U. S. A., and I'm fightin' with these rebels +for what there is in it just now. I'm mighty curious to find out how you +come to be out in these diggin's, youngster." + +Archie was willing enough to tell all about himself. He liked this man, +in spite of his being with the rebels, and he felt that he would be able +to make friends with him if he were careful to do so. And the best plan +seemed to be for him to tell all about himself, how he happened to go to +New York, and how he had been sent out here as a boy correspondent for +the Enterprise. The man from Arizona listened to the recital with +open mouth and eyes, and he frequently laughed outright at some of the +experiences Archie described. When the narrative was finished, he seized +Archie's hand, and said, "My name's Bill Hickson, and you can count on +me after this fer a friend, youngster. I'll swan if I ever heard tell +of sich nerve in my life. I'll see that you get out of this scrape all +right, but you must be careful to keep up appearances of being under +guard. I'm a big-bug in this Filipino shack, but I wouldn't dare to let +you out openly. So you jist kind of lay around and look despondent, +and depend on me to make things as easy for you as I can. You kin come +down-stairs now, if you like, and I'll present you to my friends. +There don't none of 'em speak no English but me, and all I can do is to +interduce you, and tell 'em that you ain't no spy, and that you are +very sorry you ever ran up agin this here town. And I guess I'll be +expressin' your sentiments exactly, won't I?" Archie nodded, but in his +heart he felt that he wasn't sorry he had run up against the town. This +Bill Hickson, in himself, was a character worth going miles to meet, +and if what he said was true, Archie stood a good chance of seeing the +notorious Aguinaldo, with his army of Filipinos, before the day was +over. + +When he reached the lower floor, he found several men lounging about in +another poorly furnished room, and they were all similar in appearance +to the men he had seen at the door the night before. They looked at +him in an indifferent way, and didn't seem surprised that he should +be walking about without restraint. Bill Hickson stepped up to some of +them, and, after a few words in some language Archie didn't understand, +motioned for the boy to step up. He was told to shake hands with "all +the gents," and after he had done so he was offered a cigar, and Archie +began to realise that it was a very good thing that he had a friend at +the Filipino court. He thought, too, that if these men were samples, +Aguinaldo had a very poor lot of retainers, and later on he perceived +the real cause for the failure of the rebels to do anything more than +keep up a constant retreat. It was plain to see that the followers +of the rebel leader were "in it for what it was worth." They had no +difficulty, any of them, in getting enough to eat, and often they had +opportunities to enjoy themselves in great fashion by taking possession +of some Filipino village and ejecting the inmates of some particularly +fine house, with a well-stocked wine-cellar. + +In looking out of the window Archie perceived that the town looked very +different this morning than when he saw it the evening before. Instead +of drawn blinds and shuttered windows, there was everywhere an evident +attempt at decoration in honour of the coming army. The streets were +crowded with a throng in holiday garb, and some of the soldiers of the +rebel army had already arrived, as they could be easily distinguished by +their ragged dress and ridiculous airs, walking up and down the street. +It was all such a scene as Archie had never seen before, and would have +made a great success as the scenario for a comic opera. But as a welcome +to an army, supposedly victorious, it was a dismal failure, and Archie +wondered what General Aguinaldo would think when he entered the town and +saw such shoddy patriotism everywhere. He hadn't long to wait, +however, before seeing the famous rebel and the effect upon him of the +celebration in his honour. It was about ten o'clock in the morning when +he rode into the public square, followed by about two hundred ragged +Filipinos, armed with all sorts of guns and pistols. Archie saw the +arrival from the roof of the building which was his mock prison, and he +could scarcely refrain from laughing outright when he saw the boasted +Filipino "army." It was the poorest excuse for a body of troops that he +could imagine. + +Aguinaldo rode a fine bay horse, as did several of his followers, but by +far the majority of the regiment, if such it could be called, was afoot, +and most of them were barefooted, too. The rebel leader looked very much +like most of his pictures, with the exception that he had an older look, +and some gray hairs about the temples. He was attired in a gaudy uniform +of some sort, with epaulets and a Spanish general's hat, and he carried +himself with great dignity of manner. Dismounting from his horse, he +entered the administration building, where he held a conference with the +town officials, and probably made them pay over whatever money was in +the treasury "for the cause." He remained within for two hours or more, +and all this time Archie stood upon the roof and watched the remarkable +scene in the streets below. The troops had scattered, and were engaged +in robbing the housewives of whatever they had in their houses to eat. +And the women seemed willing to provide them with whatever they could +afford, and there was much enthusiasm evident everywhere. But the +celebration was very quiet, in spite of the friendly reception, There +were no bands of music, no cheering, and no singing of battle-hymns. +The whole affair reminded Archie of some camp of a section of the famous +Coxey army, when he had seen it long ago. The soldiers were no better +dressed than tramps, and there was but little more discipline among +them. + +And the celebration and occupation of the town came to a sudden end. +While Archie stood upon the roof at noontime, he saw a runner enter the +administration building in great haste, and in a minute Aguinaldo +came hurrying down the steps. Then there was a great commotion in the +streets, and the two hundred followers of the chief were seen assembled +in the square, and before they were all there the general was riding out +of the town toward the interior of the island. There was no noise, and +the inhabitants stood about apparently speechless, and wondering what +had happened. Their reception had come to an untimely end, and their +hero had left them unceremoniously. Soon the last of the straggling +troops were out of the town, and just as Archie was beginning to think +of going down from the roof Bill Hickson stuck his head up and gave him +some astonishing news. "Stay where you're at, young feller, till these +fool Filipinos gits away from here. You saw how they skedaddled, didn't +ye? Well, Uncle Sam is comin' after 'em with shot-guns, and old Aggy +heard the news just in time. He is bound for the jungle, about forty +miles southeast, and he won't reach it until to-morrow night, anyhow, +and if the officers are quick they may be able to catch him. Now you +stay here, lad, and give 'em the news when they git here. They'll +thank you for it, and you may be the means of gittin' this fool of an +Aguinaldo captured. If you does, why, your future's all right. And ye +can tell the colonel, or whoever's in command, that Bill Hickson is +still with 'em, and that he's doin' his best fer Uncle Sam, and tell 'em +that Aggy has got about three thousand troops altogether, but only about +a thousand with him. Now, good-bye, lad, and I hope I'll see ye again." + +And Archie saw brave Bill Hickson get down from the roof. He brushed +some tears from his eyes as he realised that here was a brave soldier +doing good work for his country. A moment later he saw him running +across the square with four of the Filipinos, and waving his hat to +the "youngster" as he went. He followed him with his eyes as long as +he could, and then he sat down and made a solemn vow that Bill Hickson +should be named among the heroes of the war. + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS--ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT. + +ARCHIE descended from the roof, and found everything below in a state of +wild disorder. The fleeing rebels had taken with them all they had time +to get together, but in their haste they had left behind many of their +most useful belongings. In a cupboard of the dining-room Archie found a +supply of food and wines sufficient to feed several people for a week, +so he supposed that it had been the intention of the occupants of the +house to remain for some days. The news that the Americans were coming +upset all their plans, however, and now, as often before, they were +obliged to flee before them, leaving behind most of their creature +comforts in the way of food and furniture. + +"What a life they must be leading," thought Archie to himself, "going +from one place to another, constantly endeavouring to hide from the +Americans. Now in some town, now in the wilderness, and again venturing +as near as possible to the boundaries of Manila." And he could scarcely +help admiring their courage, or recklessness, rather, in camping so +near the head of the American government, where they might expect to be +caught in a trap at any moment. But Archie realised, too, that such an +army can get away in a very short time, and he began to have serious +doubts as to whether the Americans would ever be able to capture +Aguinaldo and his men. For knowing the islands perfectly, and being able +to get from one point to another in the easiest and quickest way, the +rebels have a great deal in their favour. + +Selecting some canned beef and some native bread and cheese, Archie +managed to make a very good meal for himself, though he ate hurriedly +for fear some of the rebels might return. As soon as he had finished he +returned to his position on the roof, for there he knew that he would be +safe in case the building was entered by the townspeople. From his high +perch he looked down into the streets, and was surprised to find them as +quiet and as much deserted as they had been the night before. The +news of the coming of the Americans had been effective in quieting the +enthusiasm of the morning, and all the townsfolk had again entered their +homes and put the shutters up before their windows. One would have taken +the place for a deserted village, judging from appearances. But Archie +knew that within the shuttered windows and barred doors there were +hundreds of people waiting anxiously for the arrival of the American +troops, and making ready to come out, when required to do so, and again +declare their allegiance to the stars and stripes. The cowardly wretches +were diplomatic enough to be always on the side of the victorious. +When the rebels occupied the town they were loyal to them, and when the +Americans came, as they often did, they came out into the square and +cheered loudly for Uncle Sam. But of course the Americans knew very well +that their sympathies were with the rebels, and the rebels knew it, too, +or they would never have dared to venture so near Manila. + +About five in the afternoon, there was a sound of many men marching +along the road, and in a little while Archie was able to see the +Americans coming down the street. It was a sight to cheer his heart +after all his experiences of the last day and night. The column was +marching at double-quick, and the handsome colonel rode a great gray +horse at the head of the regiment. Archie saw that they would reach the +square in two or three minutes, and, throwing discretion to the winds, +he descended from the roof, almost fell down the stairways in his haste, +and was soon running toward the administration building. He mounted the +great steps leading up to the portico, just as the colonel rode into the +square, and the expression of surprise on the faces of all the men was +funny to see. In a minute every hat was off, and the regiment was +giving "three cheers for the boy reporter," while the colonel, rapidly +dismounting, hurried up to speak with Archie. + +"Why, how did you come here?" he demanded. "Haven't the rebels been +here, and how did you escape them? Which way did they go, and was +Aguinaldo with them? For pity's sake, say something." + +Archie wasn't long explaining things, and his news was so explicit and +so valuable that the colonel grasped his hand and said, almost with +tears in his eyes, "God bless you, lad. You may have aided us to catch +the gang, and anyhow you've proved your bravery." + +By this time the regiment was standing at ease, and all the men were +watching Archie and the colonel with great interest. Knowing that they +were all curious to learn how the lad happened to have escaped the +rebels, the good colonel made a short speech in which he explained +everything. He dwelt particularly upon the bravery of Bill Hickson, and +held him up as a model for all the men to follow. "And now three cheers +for Bill Hickson and our boy reporter again," he cried, when he had +finished, and they were given with a will by all the men. + +The regimental officers held a short consultation, and it was decided, +on the strength of the news brought by Archie, to push on after the +rebels as fast as was possible. But it was now sunset, and there was no +use trying to go farther to-night, so it was agreed that the best plan +would be to give the men a good rest overnight, as they had made the +entire march from Manila since five o'clock in the morning. "They will +do all the better to-morrow for the rest," said the colonel. Archie was +valuable in being able to guide the officers to the building where he +had been confined, assuring them that they would find everything needful +there in the way of food, and a place to sleep. Some of the soldiers +were quartered in various houses of the town, for the people had soon +turned out into the street again, and had expressed their friendship for +their "masters," as they called them. Archie could hardly refrain from +laughing as he saw some of those who in the morning had bowed down to +Aguinaldo vowing everlasting allegiance to our flag, and he assured +the colonel that he couldn't be too careful while in the town to guard +against surprises. "No one knows the beasts better than I do," was the +answer. "I know they can't be trusted." + +Archie was invited to remain in the building with the officers, and +while they prepared and ate a lunch he busied himself in writing a +description of his last two days' experiences. He knew that a messenger +would soon start for Manila, and that a boat would leave that city on +the next day for Hong Kong, so he wanted to get his narrative written +in order to send it to Mr. Van Bunting at once. He felt that he had +some very interesting things to write about, for it wasn't every +correspondent who had seen Aguinaldo, and had been captured by the rebel +army. He knew that most of them were content to remain in Manila, and +send only what they could get from the general in command, and that this +description of the rebels would be something new, at any rate. So he +wrote it very carefully, and succeeded in getting it ready in time to +send, so that it would be in the office of the Enterprise in less than +a month. As he sat at the table writing, Archie thought of the great +changes which can take place in one's surroundings in a few weeks. It +seemed ages to him since the day when he left home for the first time, +and the experiences he had on his way to New York seemed now to belong +to the far-away period of his boyhood. He was beginning to feel very old +now, because he had been through so much of late, and he could hardly +realise that he was still eighteen. + +He wrote a short note to his mother at home, telling her not to worry, +and assuring her that he was in good health and in no danger whatever +of being captured by the rebels, for Archie felt quite safe after his +experience with the insurgent leaders. He knew that no one of their +prisoners was ever likely to come to a very bad end. They were far too +slipshod in their methods of holding prisoners. He was sorry not to be +able to send a longer letter home, but he knew that this note was much +better than sending nothing at all, and that it would make his mother +very happy to hear from him at all. + +The officers, when Archie returned to the dining-room, if such it could +be called, were engaged in making a very good meal from the provisions +in the cupboard, and they thanked Archie warmly for leading them to such +a good place. "By Jove," said one of the captains, "we sha'n't want to +return to Manila at all, when we can get such grub as this is outside." +But the colonel assured them all that they needn't expect to find such +accommodations everywhere in the interior of the country. "No doubt +we'll all be living on plantains in a day or two, if we don't catch that +fox of an Aguinaldo. And I'm willin' to bet now that we won't find him. +That feller's too slick for us. He's proved it many a time before." + +"And to think that he was here only this morning! The nerve of him, to +come within twenty-five miles of Manila!" said another. + +"I'll be mighty well satisfied if we can catch a few of his ragged men," +continued the colonel. "That will be something to have accomplished, +anyhow, and more than some other regiments have done, when they were +sent after him. He's the cutest feller I've heard of in a long while. If +it wasn't for Bill Hickson we'd never hear tell of him, even. He could +enter Manila, I believe, and go out again without us ever knowin' it at +all." + +Archie was now called on to tell something of the rebel leader's +appearance, and how he had acted while in the town. + +"I didn't see very much of him," said Archie, "because he spent most of +the morning with the big-bugs of the town, over in the administration +building. But when he rode into town on his horse he looked mighty +dignified, though he fell some in my estimation when I saw him standing +up. He looked rather dumpy then. He carried himself with a lot of +dignity, a little more than was becoming, I thought, and he received the +cheers of the people as a matter of course, and hardly took the trouble +to acknowledge them, even by a bow. The officers of the town treated +him with great deference, and I guess there's no doubt but what the +Filipinos look upon him as their leader." + +"Oh, there's no doubt of that," said the colonel. "We've learned that +long ago. They stand up for him whenever he needs them, and they give +him all they've got to help carry on the war." + +The meal finished, the officers smoked awhile, and then went to bed, for +they were to be up at four in the morning. + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS--THE FIRST BATTLE--ARCHIE WOUNDED. + +ARCHIE was awakened at four the next morning by the sound of the bugle, +and, hastily dressing, he hurried down-stairs to learn the plans of the +officers. He found that they were going to start on the march as soon +as the men had drunk their morning coffee, and Archie immediately made +preparations to go with them. The colonel looked on in amazement. "Why +are you packing your knapsack!" he asked. "You surely don't think you're +going with us? You never in the world can stand this hard march in the +hot sun." + +"Oh, yes, I think I can," said Archie. "You see I have walked a great +deal in these last two months, and I don't think I will have any +difficulty in keeping up with the troops. And I do so want to see some +fighting, and to learn whether you capture Aguinaldo. You don't object +to my going, now, do you?" + +"No," said the colonel. "If you think you can stand the marching, and +are so anxious to come, why, I suppose you can do so. But you mustn't +blame me if anything should happen to you." + +Archie was ready enough to promise this, for he had no idea that he +would meet with an accident of any kind, and so he continued to pack his +things in the knapsack. The rebels had emptied everything in a corner, +and had evidently intended taking the knapsack with them when they went; +but they left so hurriedly they couldn't possibly think of everything, +and so had left it behind, much to Archie's relief, for he would have +been unable to secure another one anywhere outside Manila. In a very +short time the regiment gathered in the streets immediately about the +square, and soon the men were marching out of the town, much to the +gratification of the residents, who watched them from their roofs +and windows. Archie fell in at the head of the column, and found no +difficulty in keeping up with the soldiers near him, though they were +marching at a rapid rate. + +The town limits were soon passed, and they swung into the white country +road, which presented the same scene of desolation which had been +everywhere visible to Archie on his way from Manila. The farm-houses +were nearly all deserted, and there was but little attempt at +cultivating the soil, which would have been productive enough had it not +been overgrown with tangled vines and weeds. And as they went farther +into the country the wilderness increased, until at last the road itself +was filled with growing vines, and the men had difficulty in walking. +Every little while some trooper would fall headlong, tripped by some +vine, and the others would laughingly help him up before passing on. +These little incidents did much to enliven the march, which became +monotonous after the first six or seven hours, and Archie appreciated +the mishaps very much until he took a few tumbles himself. He was +usually, much to the amusement of the officers, marching at the very +head of the regiment, and "setting the pace," he said, so that he was +more likely to trip than any of the others. He was always the first to +discover a snake in the road, too, and kept a great stick with which to +kill them. He seemed to have no fear of them, but walked up to lay them +out, and on one occasion the colonel warned him just in time or he would +certainly have been bitten by a snake whose bite is certain death. This +experience made him more careful, but he still kept his place at the +head of the regiment, and came to be called the mascot by the men. + +At noon the regiment halted at a grassy spot, where there were trees, +and made their dinners from their knapsacks. The officers warned them +to go carefully, or they would find themselves without provisions before +returning to Manila, for they had been so sure of catching the rebels +at the town behind that they had neglected to bring along many supplies. +Now, of course, they didn't know how long it would take them to find +them,--two days at least, and probably longer. + +Archie had stocked his knapsack with some food from the old headquarters +in the town, so that he felt safe for a few days, at any rate. He +ate carefully, however, and was careful not to waste anything, for he +realised that he might be called upon to aid some of the soldiers before +long. + +Dinner over, the regiment marched on again, for the officers now began +to think that they had made a mistake in not pursuing the fleeing +rebels the night before. They met several Spaniards, who told them that +Aguinaldo had marched all night long without stopping, so that he was +now at least thirty-six hours ahead of them, and some of the men began +to be discouraged, saying that it was no use following him up with such +a small force. "Other regiments have tried to find him in this way, and +none of them have succeeded," said one of the privates to Archie. "They +keep us marching for three or four days, and finally they decide to +return to Manila, without having found any trace of the rascal beyond +hearing that he had passed this way or that." + +The officers couldn't depend upon what the natives told them of +Aguinaldo's movements, for, almost without exception, they were in his +favour, and always lied to the Americans to try to throw them off the +track. It was due to this that they proceeded very cautiously, and +still, notwithstanding their extreme care, they found themselves, when +night came on this first day, in a small village where no one had seen +anything of the rebel army. There was no denying the fact that they were +off the trail, and the colonel stormed about in a terrible way when he +learned of their mistake. There was no use going back in the dark to +hunt for a trail they had mistaken in the daylight, so the regiment +remained in the village overnight. They were a lot of very discouraged +men, and the officers were enraged at the mistake, for which there was +no one but themselves to blame. + +Early in the morning they retraced their way, and started off in an +opposite direction to the one taken yesterday. It seemed that this must +certainly be the path taken by the rebels, but the regiment marched +until nearly noon without seeing any signs of them. Then, when they had +halted for dinner, the colonel decided to let the men rest while two +companies were sent ahead to reconnoitre, and report as to whether there +were any signs of men having passed this way. He was beginning to think +that the whole affair would be a wild-goose chase, and he decided that, +if these companies found nothing, the whole regiment would return to +Manila forthwith, probably to be the laughing-stock of the army there. + +The remaining companies had nothing to do now but lay about on the soft +grass, and rest. They were encamped in a stretch of grassy loam in +the midst of what appeared to be a dense forest, and all about were +evidences of the great fertility of the soil. The vegetation was so +dense that one could scarcely see through it, and the glade was cool and +pleasant, though overhead the sun was shining as warm as ever. It was a +lovely oasis in a wilderness of undergrowth, and the men enjoyed it to +the utmost. + +About three in the afternoon the sound of firing was heard in the +distance. First there was one shot, then another, and several more at +rapid intervals. Archie was one of the first to jump to his feet, but in +a second every man was at attention, with his musket in his hands. The +colonel listened closely for two minutes, and then the firing began once +more, and this time it seemed nearer. He hesitated no longer, but gave +the order to march ahead. "They've evidently found the cowards at last," +he muttered to Archie. "You stay here, where you will be out of danger." +But Archie was determined to do nothing of the kind. He felt his pistol +safe in his hip pocket, and when the companies swung out of the forest +and into the road he was marching in his old place at the head of the +column. Again the colonel ordered him to remain behind, but Archie +insisted that he would not, "Then go to the rear," cried the colonel, +angry for the moment. "I will not have you shot down by a rebel +sharpshooter the very first one." And Archie knew that he would have to +obey. + +The column went ahead at double-quick, and finally broke into a steady +run. Every minute the noise of rifle-shots sounded nearer, and it seemed +probable that the two companies were retreating before the insurgents. +The men were wild to reach the scene of the firing, and the officers had +all they could do to keep them in line. All the time they were running +hardly a sound was heard save the noise of their boots upon the soft +earth, and they all knew that they could probably take the insurgents by +surprise. + +Archie's heart was beating very hard as they drew nearer and nearer to +the scene. He felt that he was about to see his first fighting, and he +determined not to miss any part of it. So he gradually ran ahead until +finally he was almost at the head of the column again. + +The troops made so little noise that the two companies, retreating +slowly, were upon them without knowing it. But when they discovered +that their comrades had come to their aid they set up such a cheering +as Archie had never heard before, and immediately faced about and went +ahead again. The rebels were about a quarter of a mile behind, marching +rapidly forward, and firing as they came. Some of them were running +among the trees at the roadside, firing incessantly, and hitting +some poor soldier almost every time they fired. They were the famous +sharpshooters, of whom the soldiers in Manila had heard so much. + +When the rebels observed that the Americans had received reinforcements, +they halted suddenly, and before they could turn about the Yankees were +almost upon them, firing volleys into them as they came. Many of the +insurgents fell in the roadway, and the others fled wildly in every +direction. Most of them entered the dense forest, where the Americans +captured nearly a hundred of them after the others had surrendered, +and some were such good runners that they escaped down the roadway. The +whole rebel army presented a scene of wild confusion. Some of the men +knelt and begged for mercy, and some cried out in a horrible way as they +saw the dreaded Yankees advancing. But it was all over very soon. The +prisoners were placed in line, and marched back along the road, and the +dead, of which there were about fifty, were soon buried. Aguinaldo had +escaped in the forest, and no one suggested that he should be followed. +All the officers knew that such a course would be useless, and most of +them were very well satisfied with what had already been accomplished. +The prisoners numbered more than six hundred, and the dead a hundred +more, while there were about seventy-five wounded. So if what Bill +Hickson said were true, not more than two hundred insurgents could have +escaped. + +Among the seriously wounded was a man whom Archie recognised immediately +as one of his captors of two days previous, and while he was looking +over the bodies for the other men, he came suddenly to brave Bill +Hickson, lying face downward in the road. He almost screamed with fear +that he might be dead, and when one of the men hurried up to him he told +him who the man was. The colonel was soon on hand, and it was found that +the brave spy was not seriously wounded, and would recover soon under +proper treatment. + +When the insurgent wounded were cared for, it was discovered that the +two companies sent out to reconnoitre had also suffered losses, and when +they marched back along the line of their retreat no less than five dead +and about twenty wounded were found. This sad news threw a gloom over +the entire regiment, and when they started back to Manila they marched +in quiet, and without rejoicing over their victory, which had proved so +costly. + +Poor Archie, when they started to march, found, to his great disgust, +that he was so weak he couldn't walk far, and he thought this must be +due to the fright he had received. He was very angry with himself, until +the surgeon examined him and announced that he had a bullet in his arm. +And then Archie confessed that he had felt a stinging sensation at one +time during the firing, but had thought nothing of it. Now his disgust +was turned to great delight, for the idea of being wounded in battle was +glorious to his mind. "I'll bet I wounded more than one insurgent," he +told the surgeon, "for I discharged every barrel of my revolver." The +wound was not at all serious, but he was told to be quiet for a few +days. He was given one of the rebel horses to ride back to Manila, and +he felt like a real hero in many ways. + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + RETURN TO MANILA--IN THE HOSPITAL--CONGRATULATED BY ALL--WRITING TO + THE PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES. + +IT took the regiment much longer to march back to Manila than it had +taken it to follow the rebels, for the wounded of both sides had to be +carried, and the arrangements for carrying them were very imperfect. +Fortunately, most of them were able to ride horses, and the officers +were successful in securing wagons enough to carry most of the others, +but there were about a dozen who could neither ride horses or lie in +wagons, but had to be carried on stretchers all the time. Of course this +was slow work, and the officers were glad enough when they reached the +town with the three-story building. Here they found things very much as +they had left them, two days before, save that the inhabitants were more +abject than ever to them, now that they had captured most of the rebel +force. + +It wasn't an easy matter to find quarters for so many men, and some of +the Filipinos were obliged to camp in the public square overnight, while +the wounded and ill were given beds in the various houses of the town. +The inhabitants were required to furnish food, too, for the Americans +were entirely out of almost everything. They still had some hardtack, +but of meat and coffee there was none. The people of the town pretended +to be very glad to serve their "masters," but every one knew that the +natives would be only too glad of a chance to cut the throat of every +Yankee soldier. + +The officers again occupied the old building which they had used during +their former stay, and Archie was invited to share it with them, for +they expected to rest in this town over the next day, before proceeding +to Manila. The men's uniforms and equipment generally needed cleaning +and repairing, and the colonel was anxious for them all to appear as +well as possible when they returned victorious to the island capital. So +the next day was spent in cleaning and washing, and by evening most +of the soldiers looked as if they had never left Manila. Then came a +surprise for every one, for into the town marched a regiment of +militia from Manila, sent out to see whether the first regiment needed +reinforcements. They set up a great cheer when they learned that most +of the rebel force had been captured, and the night was spent in a +celebration of the great event. A band was scraped up in the town, the +great hall of the administration building was thrown open, and there was +dancing and music until an early hour in the morning. All the belles of +the town turned out to welcome the soldiers, hypocrites that they were, +and they danced with their enemies as readily as they would waltz with +their own dear Filipinos. Every one seemed to have a good time, and +the soldiers went to bed just in time to get three hours' sleep before +starting for Manila in the morning. + +It was a great sight to see the two regiments, with the prisoners, march +out of the town at five the next morning. They made a fine appearance in +their well-brushed uniforms and bright equipment. The townsfolk watched +them out of sight, and then most likely cursed them for a lot of +vagabonds, but the soldiers didn't mind their curses. They were all very +happy at the prospect of getting back to Manila again, and no one was +more glad than Archie. He had somewhat recovered from his wound now, and +rode in his old place at the head of the column, where he was the centre +of interest to every one. The men congratulated him on having proved +such an excellent mascot, and he laughed and talked with them until he +was tired. + +The outskirts of the city were reached about five in the afternoon, +and as they marched through the streets to headquarters a band of music +preceded them, playing popular and patriotic airs. The sidewalks were +crowded with people, and Archie felt happier than for a long time, +because every one was curious to know who that boy could be riding at +the head of the troops, alongside the colonel. He was known to most of +the other troops in Manila, and received many a cheer from them as they +saw his arm in a sling, and when they finally reached the general's +headquarters, he was honoured with a handshake and the congratulations +of the commander himself. This was the climax to a very happy day, and +Archie went to bed in his little old bunk feeling that he was a very +lucky boy for having been wounded in battle. + +Of course the next few days were very busy ones for all the men, and +for Archie, too. He was obliged to tell, over and over, the story of his +experiences, and how he had managed to escape from the rebels when +they had him. This story always made the men roar with laughter, and +increased their already strong contempt for the Filipino army. He told, +too, about brave Bill Hickson, and that gentleman's cot was always the +centre of an admiring throng of visitors, who shook his hand and told +him how proud they were of what he had accomplished. And all the poor +hero could do was to smile feebly, for he was still too ill to talk +much. + +Archie felt that he had almost volumes to write about his experiences in +battle, and he did send a very long account of this encounter to Mr. Van +Bunting. It was written in his boyish way, but one of the officers who +read it said that it was the best thing of its kind he had ever read, +so he wasn't at all backward about mailing it. All the other newspaper +correspondents in Manila were wishing they had gone with the regiment +and witnessed the battle, but they had stayed in Manila, thinking that +this would be like the other expeditions of the kind, a mere wild-goose +chase, which wouldn't amount to anything at all. They were all very +anxious to get the details of the affair from Archie, but he was shrewd +enough not to tell them anything of value. And the other correspondent +of the Enterprise in Manila insisted that Archie should send a cable +message describing the affair, as well as a written account, and this +he finally consented to do. The correspondent added a long account +of Archie's personal bravery, how he had been wounded, and how he had +ridden back to Manila at the head of the column. Archie would have been +very much embarrassed had he known this, for he was still modest, but +the first thing he knew of it was from a letter he received a few +weeks later from Mr. Van Bunting, congratulating him on what he had +accomplished, and telling him that he had long since more than earned +his six hundred dollars. But for weeks he was ignorant that any one in +New York knew of his being wounded. + +The days now began to pass as before in the camp at Manila. The wound +in Archie's arm was healing slowly, but he was hardly able to use that +member for a month or six weeks. Bill Hickson did not fare so well. He +lay for weeks on his cot in the hospital building, and was hardly strong +enough, for awhile, to talk. He was improving slowly, but the doctors +said it might be two months before he was able to walk about and take +his former active part in the campaign against the insurgents. This +enforced quiet was very trying to the brave man, and Archie spent many +hours reading to him, and telling of various things he had learned at +school and elsewhere. This constant companionship served to strengthen +their already close friendship, and it was soon known among all the +troops that Bill Hickson and the boy reporter were inseparable. And +every one who knew the story of their experiences looked upon them as +the two chief heroes of the war so far, because as yet there had been +few feats of bravery in the desultory campaigning against the rebels. +General Funston had swum the river, of course, but many held that not +even that feat compared with the bravery of Bill Hickson in serving as +a spy under Aguinaldo's very nose. The more people heard about his +experiences, the more remarkable they thought him to be, until at last +he was by far the most popular man in the army at Manila. + +Archie sent many interesting letters to Mr. Van Bunting, telling of the +adventures of the brave spy, and one day he received a cablegram telling +him to send at least one of these letters by every steamer, for people +had become interested in hearing about him. So for some time Archie +wrote about Bill Hickson rather than about himself, and was glad of the +opportunity to do so. He knew that if a letter were published every week +or two in the Enterprise Bill Hickson would soon be famous, and this was +something he was very anxious to accomplish. He felt that no fame could +be too great for such a man, and no praise too strong. + +The commanding general decided, about this time, to begin a more active +campaign against the insurgents. It was now the month of December, and +with the beginning of the new year he wanted to inaugurate a series of +attacks against them in every part of the islands. He was beginning to +feel the criticisms of the papers at home, and of the newspaper men at +Manila, and he felt that something must be done immediately to retrieve +his lost reputation for active fighting. Every one, as soon as this +announcement was made, wondered what plan would be pursued to worry +the rebels into submission, for it was now generally agreed that the +Americans would hardly be able to capture the whole rebel army. It was +too evident that they were familiar with numerous hiding-places in the +islands. The only thing to do seemed to be to prevent their getting +supplies, and to drive them from one point to another, hoping that they +would become discouraged in the end and submit to the inevitable. + +So far the campaigning had consisted chiefly of such expeditions as that +accompanied by Archie, and most of these had returned to Manila without +having even seen a rebel soldier. It was not surprising, then, that the +general was becoming discouraged, and that he was anxious to try a new +policy. + +No one knew what the new plan would be until one day several cruisers +and gunboats made their appearance in the harbour. There had been no +war-ships at Manila for several weeks, and every one was surprised that +so many should arrive at once. There were rumours of a German onslaught, +and also gossip saying that Japan had decided to interfere, but all +these were set at naught when the general announced that the war-ships +were to be sent around the islands to bombard the rebel villages, and to +drive the rebel troops to the interior of the islands, where it would be +hard for them to receive supplies. + +This news made Archie very happy, and a plan at once occurred to him. +Why shouldn't he and Bill Hickson be allowed aboard a cruiser? It would +be the best thing possible for their health, and he set about getting +the necessary permit from the admiral. + +Bill Hickson was able to be about now, and he was overjoyed when Archie +said he thought they could arrange to go. "I'd like nothing better than +a voyage in the good salt air. I believe it will do me more good than +a month in the hospital," he said. Archie secured a very strong letter +from the general, and one day he stepped aboard the flag-ship in the +harbour. He had no difficulty in seeing the admiral, and found him to be +a very pleasant man to talk with. He read the letter carefully, and then +shook Archie cordially by the hand. "Yes," he said, "I've heard of +you, and of your friend, too. Every one in Hong Kong knows how you two +together bearded old Aguinaldo in his den, and robbed him of most of his +troops. It did me good to read about it in the New York papers, too, and +to know that you are both getting your just measure of credit for the +achievement." + +Archie blushed, and assured the admiral that he didn't do very much, +that it was all owing to Bill Hickson's bravery. "Oh, yes, I know," +laughed the admiral, "you lay it to him, and he will most likely give +you the credit. I've seen your kind before. But I like you all the +better for your modesty, lad. Of course you and your friend can have a +berth aboard ship, and aboard the flag-ship, too, where I can see you +both very often. You can come aboard whenever you wish, and stay as long +as you like." + +Archie could hardly thank the good officer for his kindness, and hurried +back to Manila. He found Bill Hickson waiting for him at the wharf, and +they rejoiced together over the good news. + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP--BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN. + +IT was early one morning that Bill Hickson and Archie went aboard the +flag-ship, but all hands were on duty there, and the gallant cruiser was +raising anchor preparatory to sailing off on her errand of pacification +by means of shell and shot, The two newcomers were assigned a pleasant +stateroom where they would not be far from the cabin of the admiral +himself, and where they could step out of their door upon the +quarter-deck, and get all the fresh air they needed. It was a very +comfortable place, with two soft bunks, and every convenience usually +found aboard the fastest ocean liner. When the fellows saw it first, +they could hardly believe it could all be for them, but the officer +assured them that it had been given them by the admiral's own orders. So +there was nothing for them to do but accept the kindness, and to settle +themselves down to having just as pleasant a time as possible during the +coming weeks at sea. + +It was generally understood that the cruiser was to make a complete tour +around the island of Luzon, investigating every suspicious port, and +shelling towns when such action proved necessary to convince the rebels +of Uncle Sam's superiority. The voyage was expected to occupy nearly a +month, for there was no reason for them to hurry, and the admiral said +he would like to take things easy. + +Neither Hickson nor Archie had ever before been aboard a war-ship, and +they both found much to interest them during the first few days at +sea. Every movement of the crew, every action of the ship, was of great +moment to them, and they found no lack of entertainment in examining the +great guns and the equipment of the vessel in the way of firearms +and ammunition. Archie became much interested, too, in the science of +navigation, and spent much time with the captain on the bridge, or with +the pilot in the lookout, learning as much as possible about how the +movement of the vessel is controlled. Before long he had mastered the +rudiments of the art, and the captain told him that he might some day +make an excellent navigator if he continued to take as much interest in +the charts as he did now. And Archie told him that he was determined to +master as much as possible of the business during the voyage. Before he +returned to Manila he knew more about it all than even the captain would +believe he knew, and the knowledge was very valuable to him in days to +come. + +The two visitors aboard took their meals at the officers' table, and +they kept the whole party interested for many days, with their stories +of the war in Luzon and of their very unusual adventures both at home +and in the Philippines. For it turned out that Bill Hickson had visited +almost every part of the United States, and had lived in all sorts of +places. He had been a cowboy in Texas, and a miner in the Klondike, and +he had also been a policeman in Chicago. He knew more stories to tell +than any other man at the table could think of, and he told them in a +way that was wholly charming. + +Archie found that every one was very much interested in hearing about +his leaving home, and how he had happened to become a reporter on the +New York Enterprise. No one seemed to tire of listening to his stories +of his adventures in the great American city, and many of the officers +told him that they would give a good deal to have had his experiences in +life. + +And so it wasn't long until the two chums were friendly with all on +board, and after awhile things went along as though Archie and Bill had +never lived elsewhere than aboard ship. There was nothing exciting for +nearly a week. The cruiser steamed slowly along the shore, sometimes +stopping entirely, while the officers levelled their glasses upon the +beach, to see whether there were any signs of the rebels being there. +Sometimes, if things looked suspicious, parties were sent ashore to +reconnoitre, but they seldom returned with news that would encourage +the admiral to investigate further. The days passed quietly, and the +two convalescents enjoyed themselves well enough. They were both much +improved already by the trip, and felt almost as well as ever. They +each had a steamer chair, and hour after hour they sat upon the deck and +watched the ever-changing panorama of the tropical shore. Now the beach +would descend slowly to the sea, and there would be numerous palm-trees +and luxuriant vegetation growing close within view, but again there +would be steep clips, which looked menacing to a ship in the dark. But +it was all beautiful, cliffs or sandy beach, and Archie thought he had +seldom passed such a wholly delightful week. + +But, of course, it all became monotonous in time, and every one, even +the officers, longed for a change. The reconnoitring parties were sent +out more frequently now, and every one hoped each time that they would +return with news of the rebels, but they were always disappointed. The +admiral now determined to steam ahead more rapidly, so that they might +get around the western end of the island. It was evident that there were +no insurgents along this shore, and as there were no villages of any +consequence, either, he was anxious to reach the southern shore, where +it was known the rebels had recently been gathering. The towns, too, +were very numerous here on account of the excellent fishing, and it was +hoped that some good work might be accomplished for Uncle Sam before +another week passed. + +Subsequent events soon proved the wisdom of the admiral's plan. The +cruiser, it seemed, had no sooner rounded the western point than signs +were visible of rebel activity ashore. It was one Tuesday morning that +a village was sighted, built around a narrow inlet of the sea. When the +binoculars were levelled upon this harmless-appearing settlement, it was +soon perceived by the admiral that there were soldiers in the streets +with the rebel uniform, and that the insurgent flag was flying from the +administration building in the village square. All this was just what +had been expected, and there was great rejoicing aboard the cruiser. +Every man, without exception, almost, was anxious to be one of a party +to be sent ashore to attack the rebels, but the admiral hesitated before +sending any one at all. "It is impossible to tell from here," he said, +"how numerous the rebels are, and it is quite possible that they may +have a large force of men in the village. If the appearance of the +streets is any sign, there must be quite a force of them in the place." +But every one laughed at the very idea of there being a rebel company of +any consequence in the place, and the admiral was finally prevailed upon +to send a boat ashore, armed with thirty men. + +"Remember," he said, "if you come to grief, that I advised against this +venture. Don't be too bold, or risk too much, for though I can shell the +place, that won't help you any, once you are captives." + +But every one was anxious to be one of the party in the boat, and the +officers had a hard time making selections. "You can go, Archie, because +you're a correspondent," said the captain, "and you can go, Mr. Hickson, +because you're a brave man," and then he continued to pick out men until +the required number was secured. Of course there were many disappointed +ones left aboard the cruiser, but the captain assured them that they +might have their chance yet. + +The boat was soon off, and it was noticed that there was great +excitement ashore as soon as the departure was observed. All the +inhabitants, it seemed, were gathered upon the beach, anxiously awaiting +developments. They seemed to be absolutely ignorant of what the presence +of a war-ship in their harbour meant, and were apparently not at all +anxious as to the outcome of this visit. One of the men told Archie that +they had probably never seen a war-ship before, and that they wouldn't +know a cannon at all. "But we'll let them know the meaning of our +presence," declared the sailor, "if they shoot at us." The boat drew +every minute nearer the shore, and it was soon perceived that there +were many soldiers among the crowd on the beach. Every one thought it +remarkable that they should be so quiet, but not one of the natives made +a move until the boat was within two hundred feet of the shore. Then one +of the rebel soldiers suddenly raised his rifle and fired at the boat. +The lieutenant in command stood up in the boat and gave the order to +return the fire, and a perfect volley of shot was poured into the crowd, +which immediately scattered in every direction. The rebel soldiers, +however, seemed determined to stand their ground, and they were so +numerous, and kept up such a steady fire, that it was deemed best to +return to the cruiser, which was signalling for this action on their +part. So the boat was turned about as quickly as possible, and +the sailors pulled for the cruiser, amid the derisive yells of the +Filipinos, who had gathered again upon the beach. The rebel soldiers +continued their firing, but were such poor marksmen that but three of +their shots took effect. One sailor was shot in the arm, another in the +side, and still another was shot in the leg as he stood up to take aim +at the rebels. None of these wounds, it was afterward discovered, were +at all serious, though they were enough to arouse the anger of the +entire crew. + +When the boat reached the cruiser again, preparations were at once begun +for bombarding the town. The natives still stood upon the shore, and it +could be seen that they were immensely proud of their present victory. +It was amusing, then, to see the change in their behaviour when the +great six-inch gun of the cruiser belched forth a cloud of fire and +smoke, and a burning shell landed in the village street, apparently just +in front of the administration building, which was soon afire. The poor +natives fled in every direction, and the rebel soldiers followed their +noble example, and took to their heels, too. Another shell followed +the first, and soon several buildings were burning in the village. The +admiral watched developments carefully, and finally he decided that they +would be glad to surrender the village if another boat was sent ashore. + +Accordingly, the same boat started out again, with three new men in +place of those who were wounded, and for sake of effect the cruiser +steamed farther in toward shore. This time there were no crowds upon the +beach, and the thirty men marched to the burning buildings, where the +natives fell before them, begging for mercy. The soldiers were nowhere +to be seen, so the crew took possession of the town and slept there, in +company with thirty more sailors, that night. + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + CONTINUING THE CRUISE--ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED--THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE'S + FRIEND--A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY--LONGING TO BE HOME + AGAIN. + +IT may go without saying that the sixty men from the cruiser had a very +interesting time before the night was over. The entire village was in a +constant uproar; the poor natives, horrified by what they had witnessed +during the afternoon, ran hither and thither, some even leaving the +place entirely and starting for the interior with their goods and +families. The rebel soldiers had evidently gone for good, and a small +party sent out to look for traces of them returned without learning +anything of their whereabouts. The bombardment of the village had +certainly had great effect. + +It was only a tiny place, with possibly not more than a thousand +inhabitants, but there were evidences that it had been formerly a +flourishing town. There were fine residences in some of the streets, +which were now quite deserted, and there were some very respectable +business houses in the village square. All these had once been occupied +by Spanish traders, who had been driven away when the rebels came, and +if the insurgents had never come the town might now have been a booming +place. But the rebels were lazy, as usual, and did no work, so that now +the fine residences were vacant, and the business blocks stood empty. + +Some of the sailors looked about for a casino, where they might be able +to find entertainment of some kind for the evening, but every place +of amusement was closed, and the streets were deserted. Since the +occurrences of the afternoon all the people had locked themselves into +their houses, to await the departure of the Americans. But, even though +the casino was closed, the Yankees managed to have a good time. They +sang and danced and played the banjo until an early hour in the morning, +when they finally went to sleep, leaving only two for a night watch, +for there was no danger that the insurgents would return, after their +engagement, in which they had lost six men. + +When morning came, some officers landed from the cruiser, and all +the villagers were summoned to the public square and made to swear +allegiance to the American flag. + +In the afternoon the cruiser steamed away again on her errand of +forcible pacification, and more days of quiet watchfulness followed, as +the vessel steamed along near the shore. There were many small +villages along this coast, but all of them seemed peaceful and free +of insurgents. The captain even said that some of the people in them +probably didn't know that there had ever been a war between Spain and +the United States. Archie, who had enjoyed his experiences during the +occupation of the last village, now began to be impatient again at +the long quiet. The day when the cruiser bombarded the administration +building would be a memorable one to him, and the succeeding events were +just such as he had been longing to see for months. And then to think +that he had taken part in the occupation of the village. It was all very +wonderful, but very real, too, and for several days he took much pains +in writing an article for the paper describing the events leading up +to and including the capture of the village. And in the narration Bill +Hickson was an important character. He had again proved himself a hero +of the first water by insisting that the boat proceed when the first +attempt was made to land, and by being the first man ashore when a +landing was finally effected. He was a leader in everything that was +done. He marched at the head of the squad when they marched through the +streets of the village, calling all the people to assemble in the public +square, and he stood beside the officers with his rifle handy when the +ceremony of swearing allegiance was gone through with. When it was +all over he was called to the admiral's cabin aboard the cruiser and +congratulated for being so brave and so ever-ready to lead in any +dangerous undertaking; but Bill Hickson simply blushed and said +he hadn't done "anything worth mentionin'." The men aboard thought +differently, however, and he was even a greater hero after this +adventure than he had been before. + +Archie, too, received the congratulations of the admiral. "You have been +a brave boy," he said, "and deserve much credit for showing so little +fear in the face of danger. I hope you will be rewarded upon your return +to New York for your bravery while with us here." Archie, too, blushed, +and said that he had no doubt that Mr. Van Bunting would treat him +fairly when he reached New York again. + +And Archie was now beginning to wish that the time for his return would +soon arrive. It was the month of February, and he had been away from +America an age, it seemed to him. He felt that he had seen most of what +there was to be seen in the Philippines, and when this naval tour was +over with, the active campaigning would no doubt cease until the rainy +season was over. So for many reasons the boy wished he might be able to +start home soon, and as the days passed he became more and more anxious +to receive word from the Enterprise that he might return. He had sent +many interesting articles to the paper, and would be able to write many +more just as interesting upon his return, so he felt that the editors +wouldn't object to his early return. + +For an entire week the cruiser found no signs of the rebels, but at last +there came a day when they were steaming slowly along near the shore, +and saw, back among the trees, some specks of white resembling tents +in shape. Immediately the whole vessel was excited, and there was much +gossip and wonder as to what the tents could be doing there. The admiral +at last decided to send two boats ashore to investigate, and gave strict +orders that the men should be cautious and not allow themselves to be +ambushed or caught in a trap of any kind. Of course Archie and Bill +Hickson were among the crew of the first boat, and each was as fully +armed as any of the sailors. + +The two boats pulled quietly for the shore, keeping close together, and +they were beached at the same time. The natives, or whoever occupied the +tents, had evidently not yet discovered them, and the men halted upon +landing to decide what they had better do. The tents could be plainly +seen through the trees, and there was smoke rising from a fire somewhere +in the neighbourhood, but there were no noises which could be heard +so far away. It was decided to march up to the tents and find out who +occupied them, and the column kept close together as they advanced, for +things were so quiet it was feared the rebels, if such they were, might +be in ambush. + +The men got within a hundred feet of the camp, when they heard several +terrible yells in succession, and several natives ran out from behind +one of the tents, screaming at the top of their voices, and not pausing +to look around at all. The officer in command of the company of men was +much disturbed by this demonstration, and, without pausing a moment, +gave the order to fire. Five of the natives fell immediately, but the +other six kept running, and soon disappeared among the trees on the +other side of the clearing. The men stood still awaiting developments, +but though they waited several minutes nothing more was heard, and it +was decided that the camp must be deserted. So they marched up to the +tents, and then the officer almost fainted, for inside the first one +he entered was standing an American flag, and scattered about were the +accoutrements and camp equipment belonging to an American force in the +field. There was now no doubt but what the tents belonged to an +American regiment, and that the fleeing natives were either servants or +prisoners, more likely the former. The men were all much excited at this +discovery, and the officer ordered the natives to be looked after at +once. It was found, however, that all but one were dead, and he expired +within an hour, so that the men felt that they had killed five innocent +men, a thought which made some of them weep, hardened though they were. + +It was now decided to await the return of the regiment, which was out, +the officer thought, on a practice march, and could not possibly be +gone much longer. So the men lounged about on the grass for more than an +hour. Then, about three in the afternoon, a rifle-shot was heard in the +near distance, and instantly every man was on his feet, rifle in hand. +"They must have found the rebels," said the officer; "so be ready, +men, to help them out, should they be retreating to the camp." This +supposition turned out to be correct, for a few minutes later some +members of the regiment came running into camp and announced that a +large body of insurgents was after them. Later the remainder of the +regiment followed, and the joy of the colonel when he found these +unexpected reinforcements was very great. "There must be more than +fifteen hundred rebels," he said, "and they will all be on us here in +less than an hour, for their sharpshooters have been following us up for +a long time. I was beginning to think that we would be unable to fight +them, for they seem to be well equipped, but with the cruiser to kelp +us we can whip them at once. The thing to do will be to let them come +on without suspecting that we have received any help, and then, when the +fight is getting a little warm, or they are about to charge us, let the +cruiser fire a few shells into the air, and it will all be over. Most of +them are country troops, and have never seen a cruiser, so they will be +too much frightened to speak when they hear the thunder of the guns, and +see the shells explode in the air. And then they have a village about +three miles back from the coast, and if you can send a few shells into +that village it will simply ruin the insurgents. + +"I had no idea of meeting these rebels," the colonel then explained. "I +took the men out for a little practice marching, but before we had gone +far we encountered these sharpshooters, and later discovered that they +had all these men about a mile and a half away. Then we decided to +return to camp as quickly as possible, to get more ammunition, and we +felt, too, that we would stand a better chance of resisting them here +among the trees. But now we will soon finish them up, if you will just +send a man out to tell the admiral of our plans." Archie immediately +volunteered to carry the information, and as he could be spared better +than one of the soldiers or sailors, he was permitted to undertake the +mission. So he started out, and was on board the cruiser in a very short +time. The admiral was dumbfounded to learn that American troops were +encamped on the shore, and in imminent danger of being defeated, and he +at once set about giving orders with great vigour. "We will show them +how they can attack a small regiment of Americans with their ridiculous +army," he declared, and at once gave orders for the vessel to move +inshore. "But wait," he cried, a minute later, "I see by my chart +that there is a deep stream about a mile up the coast, and if I am +not mistaken we can enter this stream and perhaps get very near the +advancing rebels. We may even be able to destroy them before they have +a chance at our soldiers," and the old admiral almost danced in the +enthusiasm of this idea. So the cruiser steamed rapidly up the coast, +and was soon at the mouth of the stream, which seemed to be the estuary +of some great river. Then she steamed up-stream, and, sure enough, the +admiral soon discovered the rebels marching rapidly along the road, +about half a mile away. They had evidently not perceived the cruiser, on +account of the high reeds growing along the banks, and the admiral gave +orders to begin firing. + +The first shell rose high in the air and exploded with a deafening +thunder, and when the smoke cleared away it was seen that the insurgents +were almost paralysed with fright, and had just discovered the cruiser +in the river. But this first shell had not hurt any one, and another +was immediately ignited. This one exploded over the very heads of the +troops, and many of them must have been killed. Those who were not +either killed or wounded turned about and began to run, and their +leaders were powerless to make them stand their ground. One shell +followed another from the cruiser, and hundreds must have been killed +outright among the insurgents. Finally they were all running, and it was +soon perceived that the Americans had advanced, and were now pursuing +them with great energy. So the cruiser could fire no more shells, and +the admiral ordered her about and back to the anchorage onshore. + +It would take many pages to describe in detail the events of the +remainder of that afternoon, as Archie witnessed them from the deck of +the cruiser, and learned of them later from Bill Hickson. The insurgents +were nearly all killed or taken prisoners, and it was found that they +numbered nearly two thousand. So it was a great achievement to have +vanquished them all. The affair turned out to have been the greatest +victory of the war, so far. + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS--A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO + RETURN TO NEW YORK--BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO. + +ARCHIE left the cruiser when she was once more at anchor, and, going +ashore to the American camp, he found things in a very lively condition +at the close of the afternoon's battle. Every man was very jubilant over +the retreat which had been turned into a great victory, and Archie was +congratulated on having been the lucky man to carry the news of the +coming of the rebels to the admiral. The officers were all in the best +of humour, except the colonel, who felt somewhat sad on account of the +death of his five faithful servants, as the men first shot turned out to +have been. + +"There were never any better men than they," said the colonel, "and I +would almost as soon my own men had been shot." But he bore the ship's +company no malice for their mistake, which he said was a very natural +one. + +After the capture of so many rebels, and the killing of so many others, +it was felt that the rebel army in this part of the island was pretty +well disbanded, and that it would soon disappear altogether. It had been +known, from the very beginning of hostilities, that there was a large +force of insurgents somewhere in this neighbourhood, but not until +to-day had the colonel seen anything of them. But it was impossible, all +the officers said, that there could be any more troops about, for these +two thousand represented a very considerable portion of the entire rebel +army. And now that these were done away with, the colonel said there +was no need of his remaining any longer in this place, and that he would +like to get back to Manila as quickly as possible. Hearing this, the +admiral said he thought room could be made for all the men aboard the +cruiser, and that they could all return at once if they so desired. This +generous offer was at once accepted by the colonel, and the next day the +work of embarkation began. By night every man was aboard, and a place +of some kind had been found where he could sleep, but of course, every +portion of the vessel was much overcrowded. This only made things all +the more lively, however, and Archie, as well as all the others, thought +he had never enjoyed any trip so much as these three days spent in +getting back again to Manila. There was always fun of some sort going +on. If some one wasn't dancing, there was sure to be singing. And then +there were several ingenious games which were invented for the occasion, +so that time never passed slowly. Indeed, there were many who were sorry +when the capital was finally reached, but Archie was not among these, +for he expected some mail to be awaiting him from the editor of the +Enterprise. And he hoped that in this mail he would find permission to +return to New York. + +All officials were very much surprised when the cruiser anchored off +Cavit, but the admiral explained that he thought it no use to spend +more time in touring the island, even though the month which it was +supposed to take him had not yet expired. He said that he felt sure +there were no more insurgent villages along the coast, because it was +perfectly evident, from all signs, that the rebels were all in one +division. And this division, of course, had been vanquished four days +previously. + +When the report of the engagement went the rounds there was much +enthusiasm, for it was felt that at last some progress was being made +against the insurgents. The admiral was a popular hero at once, and +Archie, with Bill Hickson, was again the centre of admiration and +interest in the old palace, where they both returned. + +Archie was surprised to find no mail awaiting him, but he was not +discouraged, and wrote two long articles to send to the Enterprise. One +described the great engagement, and the other was descriptive of the +daily life aboard ship upon the return to Manila. These articles, with +the others he had written during the latter part of the cruise, were +sent off at once, and Archie felt confident that they would be read +with great interest by Mr. Van Bunting. And now the days passed very +pleasantly in Manila. He had a great deal to tell his comrades in the +old regiment, for none of them had been out of Manila since he left, +and were very anxious indeed to hear about the events of the +round-the-island tour. And Archie was very willing to tell them all he +could, for he had been much interested in the entire voyage, and never +tired of talking about it. + +Still, while things were very pleasant, and he was having a good time in +many ways, Archie was very anxious to see New York again and to get back +to America. And then, what was even more important with him, was the +knowledge that he would certainly be allowed to visit his mother upon +his return. Therefore he was a very happy boy when he one day received +two letters from the Enterprise office, one from Mr. Van Bunting, +and one from Mr. Jennings. They were both very encouraging and very +friendly. Mr. Van Bunting wrote to tell Archie how delighted they all +had been with his success in finding interesting things to write about, +and he enclosed a check for three hundred dollars, which he thought +"would come in handy now." The letter from Mr. Jennings was of later +date, and stated that he had prevailed upon Mr. Van Bunting to allow +Archie to return to New York, to work upon the Evening Enterprise. It +was a very delightful letter, Archie thought. "We believe," wrote Mr. +Jennings, "that we can use you here to very good advantage, and we will +be glad to have you return as soon as possible. I enclose two hundred +dollars to pay your expenses home again." + +So now it was all settled that Archie was to leave Manila for New York, +and, now that it was sure he was going, he felt somewhat reluctant to +leave the soldiers with whom he had become friendly, and to get away +from all this life of adventure which had been so interesting and so +delightful in many ways. It was hard, too, to leave the dear old palace +in Manila, through which he had wandered so often, and every room +of which had for him some story of a Spanish prince or a great +governor-general, wealthy and wise. There would be none of all this at +home or in New York, but then there would be something better; there +would be mother, and the old grape arbour, and the Hut Club. + +On investigation, Archie found that the quickest way to get home would +be to travel by way of Hong Kong and Yokohama, taking the steamer from +there to San Francisco. It would take him more than a month to make +the trip, and, as it was now the second week in March, he could hardly +expect to reach New York before the first of May. He at once cabled +Mr. Jennings that he would leave at once for Hong Kong, and received +an answer telling him to do so by all means, and to continue to write +letters describing his trip. Archie knew that these letters would +probably not reach New York any sooner than he would, but he did write +them, anyhow, and he did see some of them appear in the paper after his +arrival. + +Archie was overjoyed to learn one day that Bill Hickson had received +permission from the commanding general to return to the United States, +and he at once hunted up the bashful hero, and insisted that he leave at +once, and make the trip with him. This was finally agreed to, and when +it was settled that the two old chums were to travel homeward together +the whole camp in Manila was interested in the news. They were both +very popular, and almost every night before their departure there was a +pleasure party of some kind arranged for them. One night they would give +a regular "stag," as they called them, and then again they would arrange +a sort of musicale, at which there would be clog-dancing, banjo music, +and various games to increase the fun. + +The four days passed very quickly indeed, and at last the day for +sailing arrived. There was a great throng at the pier to see them off, +and there was no end of good wishes and stories of the good times now +gone by. When the steamer finally moved out into the open, there were +three cheers each for Archie and "brave Bill Hickson," in which every +man appeared to join with all his heart and voice. And there were tears +in Archie's eyes at having to part from such true friends. It was hard +to tell, too, when he would ever see any of them again. He realised +that hereafter his path and theirs would probably lie in different +directions. He was going to New York to work as a reporter, and they, if +they were not killed in battle, would be scattered in all parts of the +great United States, at the mustering out of the troops. It was all very +sad, and even Bill Hickson seemed to feel the solemnity of the occasion, +for he had nothing to say for many hours after the vessel had started on +its journey. + +Archie, too, felt homesick at having to leave, and they went to bed very +early, apparently feeling that the best thing under such circumstances +was to be asleep. And when morning came they both felt somewhat better, +for Archie arose filled with hope for the future, and more anxious than +ever to reach home. Bill Hickson, too, was not loath to return to the +United States, even though he had no relatives waiting there to +welcome him. The poor fellow had been through a great deal while in the +Philippines, and his constitution was almost wrecked by the constant +strain to which he was subjected. He had never fully recovered from his +accident of several weeks before, and he felt that he needed a rest from +the constant excitement and worry of life in the army. He was tired, +too, of being a spy. He had never relished the work, but he had realised +how necessary it was for the Americans to have some one to follow up +Aguinaldo and let the general know of his movements. "They'll be a long +time catching him now," he said, time and again, to Archie. "He's a much +shrewder man than they think, and he knows his Philippine Islands like +a book. He can go from one place to another without the Americans ever +knowing where he disappeared to, and without some one to follow him they +will never be able to learn anything of his movements." + +Bill had received nearly two hundred dollars in back pay, so he felt +quite rich, and Archie told him that if he should happen to run out, and +need more money, he would be very glad to furnish it to him, For Archie +was now determined to take Bill Hickson to New York, and introduce him +to Mr. Van Bunting, feeling sure that the wise editor would thank him +for bringing to his attention a man at once so interesting and so worthy +as this hero of the war had proved himself to be. But for the present +Bill would discuss nothing of the kind. He was thoroughly content to +sit beside Archie on the warm steamer deck, and watch the ever varied +surface of the Indian Ocean. + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + HONG KONG--A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO--HONOLULU AGAIN--ARRIVAL IN SAN + FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS--ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN + NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR. + +AFTER a short and pleasant voyage they reached Hong Kong, and Archie +found this city to be much more interesting than he had expected to find +it. It was charming, he thought, to run across a place which combined +the conveniences of England and America with the picturesque oddities +of China and Japan, and he enjoyed himself to the utmost during the two +days they spent there. Bill Hickson enjoyed the place, too, and they +would both have liked to remain longer had it been possible for them to +do so, but they were anxious to see something of Japan before sailing +for San Francisco, and their steamer was due to leave Yokohama in eleven +days. + +But they did enjoy Hong Kong to the utmost while they were there. They +called first, of course, upon the American consul, whom they found to be +an exceedingly pleasant man. They learned, to their great surprise, that +he had read of Archie Dunn, and of Bill Hickson, too, in the Enterprise, +and Archie began to think that his paper had a much wider circulation +than even the editors claimed for it. He thought it very remarkable, +at first, that a man living in Hong Kong should have read about his +Philippine experiences in a New York paper, but of course, after he +thought of it awhile, it didn't seem such a very remarkable thing, after +all. And after this, when they heard of people having read of them, +they weren't so much surprised, having come to realise the tremendous +circulation of this paper. + +The consul did all in his power to make their stay in Hong Kong +pleasant. He was anxious to have a formal dinner for them, but Bill +Hickson said that he would much prefer not having to dress up, and +Archie was willing for Bill's sake to forego the honour. So they spent +their two days in going about the city, visiting the quaint Chinese +shops, and seeing everything of particular interest. They found many +wonderful things to look at, and Archie said that he couldn't imagine +any more delightful place; but Bill told him to wait until they reached +Japan, for he'd find that much more charming than Hong Kong. "I've been +there before," said Bill, "and I know what I'm talkin' about, and I say +there ain't no such place on earth as Japan for interestin' things to +look at, and pleasant things to do." And when, a few days later, +Archie was initiated into some of the mysteries of Japanese life by +his experienced friend, he was willing to admit the truth of all he +had heard concerning the land of the chrysanthemum. He found everything +quite beyond his expectations. The people themselves were more quaint +in their dress and manners than he had expected to find them, and the +houses and the pagodas were much more picturesque than he had imagined +they would be. And the whole atmosphere of the country seemed filled +with romance and history, and it wasn't at all hard to believe that the +Japanese have longer family trees than any other nation on earth. + +They spent a few days travelling through the provincial districts of the +little kingdom, and then they reached Tokio, where Bill was anxious to +spend several days. "I know some folks here who can take us around and +show us everything that's worth seeing," he said, "and we can spend our +time to better advantage here than anywhere else I know of." And sure +enough, Bill did know some people in the capital city, some pleasant +English people, who had met the open-hearted Westerner when he was in +the city years before, and who had at once appreciated the true nobility +of his character. They were very kind to Archie,--so kind that the lad +thought he had never before met such pleasant people. And they were +thoroughly interested in all his adventures, from the time he left home +late in the preceding summer until now. He had to tell them all about +his New York adventures, and also about their experiences together in +the Philippines, and his new friends showed the greatest interest in all +he had to say, and seemed to find it all vastly entertaining. They were +anxious, Archie thought, to make him have a very good time in Tokio, to +make up for some of his hard experiences, and if this were indeed their +object, they succeeded admirably in accomplishing it. Every day was +filled with surprises, and every night Archie thought he had enjoyed +himself more this day than the day before. They travelled about the city +so persistently, on foot and in the quaint jinrikishas, that he felt +that he knew almost every part of Tokio, and he witnessed every side of +native existence, as well as the life in the foreign quarter. It was +all charmingly new and interesting, and, as in Hong Kong, they were +both sorry when the day for their sailing came around. And always since +Archie has declared that no one can be more kindly hospitable than the +English. + +The voyage from Yokohama to San Francisco was slow and monotonous, +Archie thought, for he was now very impatient to reach the United +States, and he had also grown very tired of travel by water. There were +some very pleasant passengers, but Archie couldn't see that he had a +much better time than when he was peeling potatoes corning over. That +was interesting enough, anyhow. The only break in the monotony was the +day they were enabled to spend in Honolulu, and on that day Archie went +again to some of the places he had seen during his first visit to the +attractive city. And he called again upon some of the friends of his +first visit, and found that most of them had read of his great success +as a war correspondent, and of his many exciting experiences in the +Philippines. They were all profuse in congratulating him upon what +he had accomplished, and every one seemed to think he had been very +successful indeed. + +While they were in Honolulu a vessel arrived, bound for Japan, and +Archie was delighted to find it was the same vessel upon which he had +worked his passage from San Francisco on his way to Manila. He went +aboard and met some of the friends he had made there, and found that +they all knew now who it was they had carried as chore-boy in the +galley. They all seemed glad to hear of his success, and to know that +he was coming home as a first-class passenger. The cook treated him with +much deference, and started to apologise for his treatment of Archie on +the way over; but the boy stopped him, and told him that no apology +was necessary. "I think I may have been an unwilling worker," he said, +"because of course I didn't like the work at all, and it was hard for +me to take an interest in peeling potatoes when I was looking forward to +accomplishing such great things in the Philippines." + +"Oh," said the cook, "you was a fine worker. Sure, I ain't had so good +a boy since." And Archie laughed to see the change in opinion which is +sometimes brought about by a change in circumstances. + +Archie enjoyed the city quite as much as before, but he was glad, +nevertheless, when the steamer continued her voyage east. And then he +began to count the days until they should arrive in San Francisco, and +of course these last days seemed the longest ones of the voyage. But +they gradually passed away, and as they steamed ahead, coming nearer +every hour to that dear land called "home," both Archie and Bill began +to wonder how they would like it all, after their adventurous life in +the Philippines. Bill, in particular, was doubtful whether he would +again be able to settle down to a quiet existence in some small place, +and Archie assured him that he must live in New York, where he would be +sure to find things lively enough to suit him. + +At last came the eventful day when the great steamer threaded her way +through the beautiful Golden Gate, and discharged her passengers at the +pier. As Archie and Bill had but little baggage, they were almost the +first ones to leave the vessel, and were hurrying away to find a hotel +where they could remain overnight when Archie felt some one touch him on +the shoulder, and, turning about and seeing no one he knew, was about +to go on, when a man introduced himself as being the San Francisco +correspondent of the Enterprise. "And these gentlemen here," said he, +"are reporters from the newspapers here. They would be glad to have +you say a few words about your experiences during the last few months." +Archie was quite dumbfounded. It had never occurred to him that he was a +person so important as to be interviewed, but he was willing and glad to +accommodate the reporters, and told them to accompany him to his hotel. +Once there, he answered all their questions, and didn't find it hard at +all to give them his opinion of the situation in the Philippines, and +what he thought should be done by the government to stop the rebellion. +"The President will soon put an end to it," he said, "if he can only +have the support of Congress. But as long as there are members of +Congress fighting his policy, the insurgents are going to continue their +insane efforts to establish an independent government." And some of the +reporters smiled to hear so young a fellow talking about the policy in +the Philippines. They felt that he was well-informed, however, and put +down every word he said. + +The interviews over, Archie and Bill went early to bed. The Enterprise +correspondent had telegraphed the news of their arrival to New York, and +had received word from Mr. Van Bunting to send them on to New York at +once. So, early in the morning, the two started for the East, and the +train seemed to travel quite as slowly as the steamer. "It does seem +good to be in our own country again," they said a hundred times during +the days that followed, and when they reached the Empire State and began +their journey down the Hudson River, Archie could hardly restrain his +enthusiasm at being again in his native commonwealth. + +There was quite a delegation at the Grand Central Station to meet them. +Mr. Jennings was there in person, and he explained that Mr. Van +Bunting was waiting anxiously at the office to see him. Then there were +reporters from the various other city papers, who wanted interviews, +but Archie was told to say whatever he had to say in the columns of the +Enterprise, so he had to deny the reporters for the first time. Bill +Hickson was introduced at once, and became the lion of the hour. Every +one had read of him, and was glad to shake his hand, and poor Bill was +quite bewildered by so much attention. They didn't linger long at the +station, however, but hurried down to the Enterprise office, where Mr. +Van Bunting was awaiting them. He grasped Archie's hand in his as they +entered, and cried, "Well done, my boy, well done." And Archie felt as +if he had grown three feet that instant. + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + DOING "SPECIAL" WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER--INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS + MEN--CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS. + +THERE was so much to tell Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting, that Archie +didn't get away from the Enterprise office until seven o'clock in the +evening. And what a lot they did say to each other during the afternoon! +Archie told of all his experiences, and found them all anxious to hear +about them. He learned, to his joy, that everything he had sent had been +printed, and that the articles had made a great hit with the public. "We +would have liked to keep you there longer, but we knew you must be worn +out, and then we want you to stay right here, now, and see if you +cannot get us some good interviews and articles of various kinds for the +Evening Enterprise. The paper has been losing ground somewhat, of late, +and we need some new life for its pages. Of course the morning paper +profited greatly by your articles, but the evening edition seemed very +weak in comparison, and we think it only fair to Mr. Jennings to let +him have you on his staff for awhile now. So if you are willing, you can +start in to-morrow as a member of the staff. We will see that you are +well paid for what you write, or we will put you on salary, whichever +you like. You can think it over, and in the morning you can tell us +which plan you like best." + +Archie wanted to ask for a few days' absence to return home, but he +felt, somehow, that he ought not to ask it just now. So he contented +himself with writing a long letter to his mother, in which he enclosed a +very large check, money which he had not used on his return to New York. +He told her that he would be home just as soon as he could get off for +any length of time, and he knew that she would now be looking forward to +the visit every day. She had written him about the enthusiasm displayed +by every one over his achievements, and how proud she was of what he +had accomplished. "I think I am the proudest mother in the country," she +wrote one day, and this sentence made Archie very happy, of course, and +more anxious than ever to return home. He received a letter, too, from +Jack Sullivan, telling him how much the boys all thought of his success, +and how every member of the Hut Club had longed time and again to be +with him. "It all reads just like some book," Jack wrote, "and we are +dying to have you come home and tell us all about it." Then his mother +sent him clippings from the town papers, eulogising his efforts, and +calling him the "coming man of the State." All this was very pleasant +and very encouraging, and Archie couldn't help having a kindly feeling +for the townsfolk who thought so much of him. + +New York was as delightful as ever. It was now the last of April, and +the trees were all green with fresh leaves, and the numerous little +parks scattered over the city were looking their very best. The asphalt +pavements looked clean and elegant when Archie thought of some other +streets he had seen, and the tall office buildings lifted their ornate +domes and cupolas into a sky of clear blue. "Surely," he thought to +himself, "this is the most charming city in all the world." Fifth +Avenue, with its crowds of fashionable folk, and its throng of vehicles, +was a delight of which he never tired, and when he went into the +Bowery, just to see how things were looking now, he found it quite as +interesting and as dirty as in the fall. + +But the first place he visited was the dear little square away +down-town, where he had lived during those few happy days spent in New +York. It, too, looked the same, only the flowers and grass were fresher +now, and the fountain seemed to flow more joyously, now that spring was +here. The house where he had lodged was as clean as ever, and Archie +at once decided to engage a room here, where he could have his New York +home. So he called upon the motherly landlady, and was glad to learn +that the room he had first was still vacant, and that he could take +possession at once. + +As before, when he came to this house, Archie was almost out of +clothing, so he went out and fitted himself with everything he needed. +And this time he felt able to buy the best to be had, for he thought he +had now earned the privilege to dress well if he liked. And then, when +he had everything he needed to wear, he went out and bought many pretty +things for his room, for he felt that he would like to have it just as +cosy and home-like as possible. He wasn't able to do much at it this +first night, but in the succeeding days he furnished the place in a +charming way, so that the landlady said it was the "handsomest room in +the house, sir." The dear old lady could hardly understand this great +change in her lodger's circumstances. She worried about it very often, +and discussed the question with many of the neighbours. "He come here +last fall looking mighty poor-like, but, lawsy me, he's as fine now as +any man on the avenue." And she never did understand it until one day +she learned that her lodger was the "very young man who had been to the +war in the Philippines, and writ about his battles in the Enterprise." + +There was no ceremony when Archie began work on the evening paper. Mr. +Jennings told him that he thought they understood each other pretty +well, and that he could use his own discretion, very often, about +getting articles. "You can be as independent as you like, Archie," he +said, "and use your own ideas as much as you like." This pleased the boy +very much indeed. He was beginning to feel now that he had really won +his spurs, and that he was a full-fledged journalist. It seemed scarcely +possible that it had taken him little more than six months to make +this great advance in circumstances, and yet he could see himself a few +months previous, sleeping in the station-house. Now his days of poverty +were surely over, and he would have a clear path ahead of him to +accomplish his great ambition to be a successful author and writer of +books. For the present, it was good experience for him to be working +upon the Enterprise, and he felt that he ought to be very much +contented, since there were men old enough to be his father who were not +earning as much money. + +He liked the work upon the evening paper very much. He didn't have to +get down early in the morning, and at three o'clock in the afternoon +he was always through. He was very glad indeed that there was no night +work, for he now spent his evenings in studying shorthand, which he +thought might be helpful to him in many ways. He didn't have much +routine work to do upon the paper in the beginning, but he told Mr. +Jennings that he would like to get as much experience as possible, so +the good editor gave him a lot of regular reporting to do, as well as +the special work which was daily featured in the paper. This special +work consisted of interviews with various successful men. Archie had +always felt a great admiration for men who had "done something," and +as New York was simply filled with wealthy and successful men, who had +started as poor boys, he found a wide field for work. He found it very +interesting to meet these men of affairs, and have them tell him of +their early struggles, how they had begun on the farm or in the factory, +and had worked themselves up through industry and perseverance to the +high places they now occupied. He found it very easy to get access +to most of them, for they had all read of his experiences in the +Enterprise, and Archie found that his fame as the "Boy Reporter" was +quite general and widespread. Some of the great men were quite as much +determined to interview him as he was anxious to interview them, so +that he usually got along very well by telling them first of his own +experiences, and then asking them about their own boyhood days. It +was work that never became monotonous, for each day he saw a man quite +different in most respects from the man he had interviewed the day +before, and of course every one had something different to say. + +These interviews proved very successful when published in the Evening +Enterprise, and Mr. Jennings had him continue them during all the weeks +Archie was connected with the paper. And of course he did other things, +too, work which took him into every part of the great city, looking +up this event, or investigating this reported disappearance or murder. +Archie was quite successful in this line, too, and, as he was being paid +by the column, his weekly income was something larger than he had ever +dared to hope for in all his life. He was now enabled to study his +stenography at the best school, and to indulge himself in many things +which had been denied him before. He could, for instance, attend the +performances of grand opera, and hear the great musical artists of the +world. He was able, too, to read the best literature, and he gradually +learned to appreciate all the many good things in life. He was very glad +to find himself broadening in such a way, for he realised that he +would not always want to be a "Boy Reporter," and that he had better be +developing his mind in every possible way. + +He had not been back long in New York before he met all his old friends. +One of the first upon whom he called was the good policeman who had been +so very kind to him when he had no place to sleep. The large-hearted man +was as enthusiastic over his success as if he had been his own son, +and Archie felt that here was one true friend upon whom he could always +depend. The policeman never tired of telling about that first night when +he found Archie walking up and down Broadway, and he always spoke of him +to the other officers as "that boy of mine." So the boy, who was now a +full-fledged reporter, spent as much time with this friend as possible, +and many a time he sat at the station-house telling them all of his +adventures in the Orient. + +Another friend whom he met was the great railway president with whom he +had travelled to Chicago on his way to San Francisco. Archie had liked +this man from the very first, and he felt that in him he would +always find a friend, because he had shown such interest in his first +undertaking. And when he called upon him in his elegant office, he +received a very cordial greeting. + +"No, indeed," said the great man of affairs, "I have never forgotten our +trip West together, and I have followed you with much interest through +the columns of the Enterprise. And I am glad that you are back again in +New York, for I hope to see a great deal of you. You must come up to my +house some evening and tell us all about yourself." + +Archie was naturally much surprised to receive an invitation of this +kind, but he resolved to accept it, nevertheless. + +Bill Hickson was now employed in the Brooklyn navy yard. He had been +featured for several days in the Enterprise, and had enjoyed the +excitement of New York for awhile, but he decided he would like to be at +work. So one day Archie learned that he was working at the navy yard. + +"I've got to be with Uncle Sam," was all the reason Bill would give for +his action. + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE--STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL--LIVING + AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS. + +IT was now September. Archie had been in New York the whole summer +through, attending carefully to his work on the Evening Enterprise, and +continuing his study of stenography. He had taken occasional trips to +Long Branch and Asbury Park on Saturday afternoons, but every other day +he spent in working up ideas for the paper, and each evening he devoted +to the shorthand school. By this time, though, he felt that he knew all +that was necessary of shorthand, and found himself more free to go about +in the evenings. He visited his friends more frequently, and sometimes +spent whole evenings in studying works on English literature, for he was +ambitious to know more of the great work he had decided to make his own. +This study was not really work to him, for his interest in everything +connected with literature was so great that he found a pleasure in +reading even the most classical books on the subject, and of course so +much reading of this sort did a great deal to educate his mind along +this line of work. + +One evening in the early fall, Archie decided to accept the invitation +of Mr. Depaw, the railway president, to call. So he carefully dressed +himself in the best he had, and walked up Fifth Avenue and into the side +street where the great man had his home. He rang the bell and presented +his card, and waited in the drawing-room for an answer. The footman was +gone but a moment, and returning, announced that the family would be +down directly. Archie was very much pleased that he was to meet the +entire family, and looked about him with great interest at the elegant +furnishings of the room in which he sat. He couldn't help thinking how +lovely it must be to have so many books, so many pictures, and so many +works of art of every kind. The boy thought then that he would like to +be a wealthy man, just to be able to gratify his desires for beautiful +things. + +He had to wait only a short time before the genial Mr. Depaw entered the +room, accompanied by several members of the family. Archie was greeted +very warmly, and introduced to every one, and then they immediately +began an animated conversation, in which Archie soon found himself +taking an active part, much to his surprise. He felt that he had +never before realised what a great gift it is to be able to talk +entertainingly, and this evening was a revelation to him in the ways of +good society. He found that every one was much interested in the story +of his adventures, and he talked more about them than for a long time +past. He was now beginning to feel that his Philippine experiences were +an old story, but he learned that they were quite as entertaining as +ever to these people. But they did not talk entirely about Archie. They +realised that this would be embarrassing to him, and they were careful +to guide the conversation into a discussion of music and literature, and +whatever else they imagined him to like. And so it was that the evening +passed very quickly, and it was time to leave before he knew it. Then he +was asked to be sure to call again, and Mr. Depaw, as he accompanied +him to the door, requested him to call at his office on the following +Wednesday, if possible. Archie promised, and walked home down the +avenue, wondering what it could be that Mr. Depaw wanted to talk to him +about. He didn't worry long about it, however, but went home and to +bed as quickly as possible, for he had formed a habit of rising at six +o'clock in the morning to study. + +The days passed quickly until Wednesday, and the afternoon of that day +found Archie in the waiting-room of Mr. Depaw's office. He had not long +to sit there after sending in his card, for the busy man received him as +soon as he could get rid of his present visitor. He shook Archie warmly +by the hand as he entered, and then, pulling two chairs together, they +sat down. "I have been thinking for some time," said Mr. Depaw, "that +I need a sort of private secretary. Of course I have men here at the +office who take dictation from me, and who fulfil the duties of a +secretary to a certain extent, but I want a young man who can attend +somewhat to my personal affairs; I want one whom I can trust, and one +who is likely to grow as he works along, so that eventually he may +be able to fill any place I may have open for him." Then he stopped a +moment, and Archie felt his heart beating very fast beneath his coat. He +waited almost breathlessly to hear what Mr. Depaw would say next. + +"Ever since I met you first," he at last went on, "I have somehow +thought that you are the kind of a young fellow I would like. You are +ambitious, you are persevering, and you are willing to learn. You say, +too, that you know shorthand, and I know that you are a good penman. You +have seen quite a little of the world, I am sure, and I think you +can prove yourself equal to almost any occasion. The only question is +whether you will care to give up reporting for a position of this kind. +I can assure you that I will pay you as much as you are earning now, and +I shall be glad to offer you a home at my house, because I shall want +you at my right hand all the time. Do you think you will care to take +the place?" + +Archie could hardly speak, it was all so wonderful, but finally he +recovered himself sufficiently to explain his hesitancy in accepting +the position. "I would like just one day," he said, "to consult with my +friends on the newspaper. You see Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting have +been very good to me, and I shouldn't care to leave them now if they +object very strongly." + +"That's quite right, quite right," said Mr. Depaw. "I can appreciate +your feelings, and you can tell the editor that you will have some time +for writing, and that you will contribute occasional articles to his +paper." Archie was now delighted. "Oh, thank you," he cried. "I am sure +I can come now." + +"Well, come in at this time to-morrow," said Mr. Depaw, "and let me know +what you have decided to do." + +Archie hurried at once to Mr. Jennings's office to tell him the good +news. He wondered how his friend would take it, but all his fears +were soon put at rest. "Archie," said Mr. Jennings, "this is the best +opportunity you can ever have to improve yourself in every way. Mr. +Depaw is a man highly respected all over the country, and a man who is +known to be extraordinary in many ways. Association with such a man will +do more for you than four years in college, and you will make a mistake +if you do not accept his offer. Of course we shall all be sorry to lose +you here, but, as Mr. Depaw says, you will have some time for writing, +and we hope you will always continue to do some work for us." + +Archie could almost have thrown his arms about Mr. Jennings's neck to +hug him for his splendid feeling, and when, a little later, Mr. Van +Bunting said practically the same thing, he felt that he had never known +two such men. He assured them both that he would never forget them, but +would try and spend as much time as possible in the Enterprise office. + +The next day he called again on Mr. Depaw, and told him of his decision +to accept the place, and the good man seemed overjoyed. "I will see that +you never forget it, Archie," he said. It was arranged for him to begin +work the very next day. "You can transfer your things to my house as +soon as you like, for your room is waiting for you, and I will begin +to-morrow to teach you how to do things." + +And now Archie found it hard to leave the dear little room in the quaint +old square, which was looking now just as when he saw it first. The +leaves in the trees were turning brown and gold, and Archie realised +that he had been away from home more than a year. "Oh, I must go back +soon," he said to himself, "or I shall simply die of homesickness." + +In a couple of days he was installed as a member of the Depaw household, +and he soon felt at home there. Every one was very kind to him, he was +given a handsome room, and everything seemed almost perfect. One of the +best things about it all was that he had access to the fine library, +and he longed for the long winter evenings when he could devour the many +interesting books he saw there. He was soon initiated into his work, and +it was much easier than he had expected. Mr. Depaw, of course, started +him very gradually, so that he learned as he went along. Every morning +at eight o'clock he was in the library with Mr. Depaw, taking dictation, +and receiving instructions for the day. They remained together here +until ten o'clock, when Mr. Depaw either walked or drove to his office. +Archie always accompanied him, and took charge of some of the mail +there, attending to it during the morning. Then at noon he returned to +the house, where he spent the afternoon in writing the letters which had +been dictated in the morning, and in doing various things for Mr. Depaw. +The evenings he always had to himself, and he had no difficulty in +finding enough to do at home without going out. He almost invariably +passed the evenings in reading, but occasionally he was asked to +accompany the family to some musical event at the opera house, for they +had soon learned of his love for music. + +In work and study the winter passed quickly and happily for Archie, who +now felt quite at ease amid his elegant surroundings. His only wish was +that he might go home, and as spring approached Mr. Depaw promised him +that he should have a short vacation. The suggestion of Mr. Depaw that +Archie's mother come to New York for a week was heartily accepted by +Archie, but when he wrote home Mrs. Dunn replied that she would rather +wait for Archie at home. She had never visited New York, and felt that +she wouldn't like it. + +Bill Hickson came over very often from the navy yard, and was always a +welcome visitor at Mr. Depaw's office. He didn't seem to care for his +work in Brooklyn, however, and Archie finally requested a place for him +about the elegant new station which the road had just constructed in the +city. Mr. Depaw very readily gave him an excellent position, one which +he could keep always if he so desired. And Bill was highly pleased +with his new work, so much so that he surprised them all one day in the +spring by leading into the once a young lady whom he introduced as his +wife. Of course Archie was very much pleased at this new development, +for he had often thought that his friend must be very lonely, living in +a boarding-house. + +The days were all busy ones for Archie now. He had learned the work +so thoroughly that he was given more than ever to do, and he still +continued to write, too, for the Enterprise. He worked too hard, +however, and in April he looked so thin that Mr. Depaw sent him home for +a week's rest. + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + DECIDES TO VISIT HOME--A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN--A PUBLIC + CHARACTER NOW--DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB--DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL-- + A TELEGRAM FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE. + +IT was a beautiful April day. There had been a light shower in the +morning, and now everything looked as fresh and green as possible all +along the railway. Archie lay back in his comfortable Wagner seat, +admiring the beauties of spring, and thinking, too, of the days he spent +in walking along this very road. It seemed hard to believe that he +was now secretary to the president of this railroad, and that he was +returning home, after a year and a half, a very successful young man. He +had much to think of in the hours it would take him to reach the little +town. He tried to remember everything about the place, and his mother as +he saw her last, and it wasn't at all difficult for him to do so. But, +oh, how he hoped that things had not changed! He almost dreaded going +home for fear he would find things different. + +He had changed, that much was sure. He knew that he had grown to +look much older than his years, and he knew that he was not looking +particularly strong. He used to be so sturdy, and he had such a splendid +colour in his cheeks. Mother would be sorry to see him now, but of +course he would be sure to improve very much during the week he was to +remain among old friends. + +He was very anxious to see his boy friends, the members of the Hut +Club, and the boys and girls who were in his class at school. He had +telegraphed his mother that he was coming, so she would probably tell +the boys about it. He was sure they would be there. + +Now the stations looked more familiar. This one just passed was near +the Tinch farm, and Archie remembered the days he spent working for old +Hiram, and how he had suffered. He wondered if the farmer had ever seen +any copies of the Enterprise. It would be very interesting to him to +know that his chore-boy was now a secretary to a millionaire. This next +station he remembered very well indeed, because he used to come here +every fall to visit the county fair, where he marvelled at the wonderful +things he saw in the side-shows. + +And now the train was entering the limits of his own town. Here was +the old elevator, and the machine shop near the railway track. And, oh, +there was his own home, looking green and pleasant as the train sped by. +It almost brought tears to Archie's eyes to think that he was so soon to +see his mother. Now they had reached the station, and he stood upon the +car platform ready to alight. My, what a crowd there was! and why did +they cheer as he made his appearance? All at once it dawned upon him +that all these people were here to meet him, and to bid him welcome +home. He could hardly speak as he found himself in his mother's arms, +and then he began to shake the hands of the big crowd. They were all +old friends, and then there was the mayor, and the superintendent of +schools, and quite a delegation of leading citizens. How nice it was of +them to welcome him in this way! + +After awhile the handshaking was over, and the mayor was able to get +a few minutes with Archie. "We are all very proud of what you have +accomplished," he said, "and we want to give you a public reception +to-morrow night in the town hall, if you don't object." Archie stared +blankly at the mayor, and it was several moments before he realised the +meaning of the words. Then he was almost overcome. It was almost too +good to be true, it seemed, but he warmly thanked the mayor, and told +him how he appreciated the honour which they had done him. He said that +he would be glad to attend the reception. + +The crowd was scattering now, and Archie, wild to reach home, took his +mother to a carriage, in which they drove rapidly out to the little +house among the trees and arbours. The old town looked beautiful in +every way. The great maple and oak trees along the road were green with +new leaves, and every dooryard was bright with snowballs and yellow +roses. "This is the very best time of the year," he said to his mother, +"and I am the very happiest boy in all the world." + +"And I am the happiest mother," was the answer. Then they sat in silence +until they reached the old home. They entered by the kitchen door, and, +once inside, and seated in the old cane rocking-chair, Archie bowed his +head in tears of joy at being home with mother once again. + +The hours which followed were sweet with joy. Mrs. Dunn busied herself +in preparing the supper, and Archie hung around the kitchen, telling +some of the many things he had planned to tell. Mrs. Dunn was smiling, +and Archie thought her the sweetest mother any boy could have. She was +changed somewhat, but she looked very young to-day. + +Supper over, Archie went over the fence to see the Sullivan boys, and +he found them looking much the same. He was truly glad to see them, and +they, of course, were glad to see him, too, though at first they were +just a little bashful, remembering, no doubt, all the things which had +happened to Archie since they saw him last. The boys were soon telling +all about the Hut Club, though, and Archie learned to his joy that it +was still a flourishing organisation. "We spoke of you every time we +were together," said Jack, "and we always wished you were back again." +Archie was delighted to hear that he had been missed, and all at once +an idea came to him which he put into execution three days later. He +determined to give an elegant dinner to this club of boys, and the very +next day he sent to New York for a caterer to arrange it. He wanted +it to be something finer than any of the boys had ever seen, and it +certainly turned out to be so. The caterer did his best, and when, three +days later, the Hut Club sat down together for the first time in more +than eighteen months, they partook of a dinner which would have done +credit to Mr. Depaw's table. It was a memorable night for them all, and +every boy enjoyed himself. + +Archie enjoyed this Hut Club dinner more than anything else while he +was at home, though of course the great event of his stay was the public +reception at the Town Hall on the second evening after his arrival. This +was a truly grand affair. The town authorities hired a brass band, which +played inside the hall and out, and there was such a crowd in attendance +that many were turned away from the doors. It was a night that Archie +will never be able to forget. He sat on the platform, in company with +the mayor and other town officials, and he listened to several speeches +congratulating him on what he had accomplished since leaving the town. +Then he had to get up and tell them all of his experiences, from the +time he left until now. He told it in a simple manner, but from the +close attention he received it was evident his audience was deeply +interested. When he had finished, there were calls for "three cheers for +Archie Dunn," and they were given with a will. Then Archie, rising +from his seat, called for "three cheers for the President of the United +States," and they, too, were given, for Archie had told them all his +feelings on the subject of the President's policy in the war. After this +there were three cheers for Mr. Depaw, whom one man said would be the +next United States Senator from the State. The meeting closed with some +cheers for the New York Enterprise, and then followed a long siege of +handshaking for Archie, who stood beside his mother on the floor in +front of the platform. It was a happy night for them both, and Mrs. Dunn +said afterward that she could never wish for anything more the rest of +her life. + +The fourth day of his visit was a Sunday, and, to Archie's joy, brave +Bill Hickson and his wife came up from the city to spend the day. What +a jolly time they had, all day long! They went to church in the morning, +where they saw all the people, it seemed, whom they hadn't seen before, +and in the afternoon there were many callers at the little house. The +evening was spent quietly by the happy four, talking of old times and +plans for the future. The town authorities were anxious to give Bill +Hickson a reception while he was in town, but the bashful hero declined +the honour, and returned with his wife to New York by the midnight +train. + +During the two succeeding days Archie talked a great deal with his +mother, and finally gained her consent to come to New York to live in +a year's time. Mrs. Dunn had never really understood that Archie had so +good a position, but now that she realised what a splendid beginning +he had made, she was very willing to come and keep house for him. This +question settled, everything seemed wholly delightful in the cosy home, +and Archie settled down to enjoy the two remaining days of his visit in +quiet rest. He had already much improved during his stay, and was sure +of going back to the city feeling much better than for a long time past, +and this made Mrs. Dunn very happy. + +But Archie didn't stay his week out at home. On the fifth night he +attended a reception in his honour at one of the neighbours' houses, and +he was just in the midst of a description of Tokio when a messenger boy +entered with a telegram for him. He opened it at once, and read it aloud +to the company: + +"Dear Archie," it said, "return as soon as possible. I sail for Europe +on Saturday's steamer to remain six months, and wish you to accompany +me." It was signed by Mr. Depaw, and there was great applause from the +crowd when he finished reading it. But Archie's face was a study. He +wasn't sure whether he wanted to go to Europe or not, but of course +there was no question about what he should do. He at once telegraphed +a reply, saying that he would reach the city to-morrow at noon, leaving +home on the early morning train. + +Of course the reception soon broke up, and Archie walked quietly home +with his mother, who was saddened at the prospect of losing him so soon +again. She soon brightened, however, and began to plan things for him to +do abroad, and soon she entered into the preparation for his departure +with all her heart. But Archie was not so soon made glad, and he didn't +rest until he made his mother promise to accompany him to the city on +the morrow to spend the two days previous to his departure in helping +him get ready. Mrs. Dunn wasn't anxious to make the trip, but for +Archie's sake she consented. + +And early the next morning they left for the city, where the time passed +rapidly until the hour of the steamer's sailing. At the pier they said +good-bye. Archie could hardly speak, but Mrs. Dunn was brave. "Archie," +she said, "God has been with you so far and he will keep you yet. And +remember that a boy with honest ambition will always get along. You +are sure to have friends about you always, for you have proved that +you possess energy, perseverance and a good heart." She said good-bye +without a tear, but as the steamer left the pier Archie saw, on looking +back, a sweet mother seated on a coil of rope, with her handkerchief to +her eyes. + + THE END. + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + +***** This file should be named 4990-8.txt or 4990-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/9/4990/ + +Produced by Jim Weiler + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/4990-8.zip b/4990-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b9452d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/4990-8.zip diff --git a/4990-h.zip b/4990-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c8609d --- /dev/null +++ b/4990-h.zip diff --git a/4990-h/4990-h.htm b/4990-h/4990-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e539ea6 --- /dev/null +++ b/4990-h/4990-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,5644 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<!DOCTYPE html + PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd" > + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="en"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=UTF-8" /> + <title> + The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by Harry Steele Morrison + </title> + <style type="text/css" xml:space="preserve"> + + body { margin:5%; background:#faebd0; text-align:justify} + P { text-indent: 1em; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: .25em; } + H1,H2,H3,H4,H5,H6 { text-align: center; margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 15%; } + hr { width: 50%; text-align: center;} + .foot { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; text-indent: -3em; font-size: 90%; } + blockquote {font-size: 97%; font-style: italic; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + .mynote {background-color: #DDE; color: #000; padding: .5em; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 95%;} + .toc { margin-left: 10%; margin-bottom: .75em;} + .toc2 { margin-left: 20%;} + div.fig { display:block; margin:0 auto; text-align:center; } + div.middle { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; } + .figleft {float: left; margin-left: 0%; margin-right: 1%;} + .figright {float: right; margin-right: 0%; margin-left: 1%;} + .pagenum {display:inline; font-size: 70%; font-style:normal; + margin: 0; padding: 0; position: absolute; right: 1%; + text-align: right;} + pre { font-style: italic; font-size: 90%; margin-left: 10%;} + +</style> + </head> + <body> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Adventures of a Boy Reporter + +Author: Harry Steele Morrison + +Release Date: March 23, 2009 [EBook #4990] +Last Updated: November 16, 2016 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + + + + +Produced by Jim Weiler, and David Widger + + + + + + +</pre> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <h1> + THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER + </h1> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <h2> + by Harry Steele Morrison + </h2> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <h3> + 1900 + </h3> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <blockquote> + <p class="toc"> + <big><b>CONTENTS</b></big> + </p> + <p> + <br /> <a href="#link2H_TOC"> (DETAILED)CONTENTS. </a><br /><br /> <a + href="#link2H_4_0001"> <b>THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER.</b> </a><br /><br /><br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0001"> CHAPTER I. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0002"> CHAPTER II. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0003"> CHAPTER III. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0004"> CHAPTER IV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0005"> CHAPTER V. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0006"> CHAPTER VI. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0007"> CHAPTER VII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0008"> CHAPTER VIII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0009"> CHAPTER IX. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0010"> CHAPTER X. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0011"> CHAPTER XI. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0012"> CHAPTER XII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0013"> CHAPTER XIII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0014"> CHAPTER XIV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0015"> CHAPTER XV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0016"> CHAPTER XVI. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0017"> CHAPTER XVII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0018"> CHAPTER XVIII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0019"> CHAPTER XIX. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0020"> CHAPTER XX. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0021"> CHAPTER XXI. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0022"> CHAPTER XXII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0023"> CHAPTER XXIII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0024"> CHAPTER XXIV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0025"> CHAPTER XXV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0026"> CHAPTER XXVI. </a> + </p> + </blockquote> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> <br /> <a name="link2H_TOC" id="link2H_TOC"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <h2> + (DETAILED) CONTENTS. + </h2> + <blockquote> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0001"> CHAPTER I. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER I. <br /> LIVING IN THE COUNTRY—LIFE AT SCHOOL—THE + HUT CLUB IS FORMED—THE <br /> COMING OF THE CIRCUS <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0002"> CHAPTER II. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER II. <br /> ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS—A TRIP + TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE <br /> HENRY <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0003"> CHAPTER III. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER III. <br /> ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK—LEAVING + HOME AT NIGHT <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0004"> CHAPTER IV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER IV. <br /> WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY—CRUEL + TREATMENT <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0005"> CHAPTER V. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER V. <br /> THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS—THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE + TRAMPS <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0006"> CHAPTER VI. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER VI. <br /> STEALING A RIDE—KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0007"> CHAPTER VII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER VII. <br /> ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK—A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE + <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0008"> CHAPTER VIII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER VIII. <br /> LOOKING FOR WORK—WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY + RESTAURANT <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0009"> CHAPTER IX. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER IX. <br /> IN THE STREET AGAIN—THE POLICE STATION—VISITS + THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, <br /> AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0010"> CHAPTER X. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER X. <br /> LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN—FEATURED AS “THE BOY + REPORTER” <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0011"> CHAPTER XI. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XI. <br /> A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND—RAIDING A + GAMBLING DEN <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0012"> CHAPTER XII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XII. <br /> A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER—THE EDITOR DECIDES TO + SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT <br /> TO THE PHILIPPINES—LEAVING NEW + YORK—IN CHICAGO <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0013"> CHAPTER XIII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XIII. <br /> SAN FRANCISCO—THE TRANSPORT GONE—WORKING + HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY <br /> PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER—THE + CAPITAL OF HAWAII <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0014"> CHAPTER XIV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XIV. <br /> THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT—A STORM AT SEA—ARRIVAL + IN MANILA <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0015"> CHAPTER XV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XV. <br /> ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR, AND HAS SOME + STRANGE ADVENTURES <br /> AMONG THE NATIVES—SEIZED BY THE REBELS + <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0016"> CHAPTER XVI. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XVI. <br /> A PLEASANT CAPTOR—BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS + ARCHIE TO ESCAPE—FIRST <br /> GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0017"> CHAPTER XVII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XVII. <br /> ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS—ARCHIE THE HERO + OF THE REGIMENT <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0018"> CHAPTER XVIII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XVIII. <br /> THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS—THE FIRST BATTLE—ARCHIE + WOUNDED <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0019"> CHAPTER XIX. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XIX. <br /> RETURN TO MANILA—IN THE HOSPITAL—CONGRATULATED + BY ALL—WRITING TO THE <br /> PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0020"> CHAPTER XX. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XX. <br /> AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP—BOMBARDING A + FILIPINO TOWN <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0021"> CHAPTER XXI. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXI. <br /> CONTINUING THE CRUISE—ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED—THE + ADMIRAL ARCHIE’S <br /> FRIEND—A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED + VICTORY—LONGING TO BE HOME <br /> AGAIN <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0022"> CHAPTER XXII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXII. <br /> RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS—A LETTER FROM THE + EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO <br /> RETURN TO NEW YORK—BILL HICKSON + GOES, TOO <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0023"> CHAPTER XXIII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXIII. <br /> HONG KONG—A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO—HONOLULU + AGAIN—ARRIVAL IN SAN <br /> FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE + PRESS—ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN <br /> NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES + OF THE HOUR <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0024"> CHAPTER XXIV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXIV. <br /> DOING “SPECIAL” WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER—INTERVIEWS + WITH FAMOUS <br /> MEN—CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0025"> CHAPTER XXV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXV. <br /> PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE—STUDYING AT + EVENING SCHOOL—LIVING <br /> AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0026"> CHAPTER XXVI. </a> + </p> + <p> + DECIDES TO VISIT HOME—A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN—A PUBLIC + CHARACTER <br /> NOW—DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB—DEMONSTRATION AT + THE TOWN HALL—A TELEGRAM <br /> FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR + EUROPE <br /> + </p> + </blockquote> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> <br /> <a name="link2H_4_0001" id="link2H_4_0001"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h1> + THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER. + </h1> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0001" id="link2HCH0001"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER I. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + LIVING IN THE COUNTRY—LIFE AT SCHOOL—THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED—THE + COMING OF THE CIRCUS. +</pre> + <p> + “YES,” said Mrs. Dunn to her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan, “we are expecting + great things of Archie, and yet we sometimes hardly know what to think of + the boy. He has the most remarkable ideas of things, and there seems to be + absolutely no limit to his ambition. He has long since determined that he + will some day be President, and he expects to enter politics the day he is + twenty-one.” + </p> + <p> + “Is that so, indeed,” said Mrs. Sullivan. “Well, we can never tell what is + going to come of our boys. As I says to Dannie to-day, says I, ‘Dannie, + you must do your best to be somebody and make something of yourself, for + you and Jack bees all that I has to depend upon now.’ But Dannie pays no + attention to my entreaties, and somehow it seems to me that since Mr. + Sullivan died the boys are gettin’ worse and worse. It’s beyond me to + control them, anyhow.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, take heart, Mrs. Sullivan,” said Mrs. Dunn, “our boys will all turn + out well in the end, and all we can do is to bring them up in the best way + we know, and trust to them to take care of themselves after they leave + home. Now Dannie is certainly an industrious lad. I hear him pounding + nails all day long in the back yard, and he made a good job of shingling + the woodshed the other day. He seems made to be a carpenter.” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, I think so myself,” said the Widow Sullivan. “The whole lot of them + is out by the railroad now, building a hut. They’ve organised a ‘Hut Club’ + to-day, and never a lick of work have I had out of them boys since + mornin’. They’ve always got something going on, and when I want a bit of + water from the well, or a little wood from the shed, they’re never + around.” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, but boys will be boys, Mrs. Sullivan, and we’d better keep them + contented at home as long as we can. They’ll be leaving us soon enough. It + seems that no boys are content to stay in town any longer; they’re all + anxious to be off to the city.” + </p> + <p> + “That’s true, that’s true, Mrs. Dunn,” said Mrs. Sullivan. “I must be + going now. I’m much obliged for the rain-water, and whenever you want a + bit of milk call over the fence, and I’ll bring it to you with pleasure. + It’s a good neighbour you are, Mrs. Dunn.” + </p> + <p> + And Mrs. Sullivan went slowly around the house and out at the front gate, + while good Mrs. Dunn returned to her ironing, a few clothes having to be + ready for Sunday. + </p> + <p> + While these mothers were discussing their boys, the youngsters themselves + were busy behind the barn, building a hut down near the railway track. + There were six of them altogether, the three extra ones, besides Archie + Dunn and the Sullivan boys, having come from across the railway to play + for the day. Two hours before they had solemnly organised themselves into + the “Hut Club,” each boy walking three times around the block blindfolded, + and swearing upon his return to be true to all the rules and regulations + of the organisation, which had been written with chalk on the side of the + barn. The regulations were numerous, but the most important one was that + no East Side boys were to be allowed within the club-room when it was + built, and that the club’s policy should be one of warfare against the + East Siders on every occasion when they met. This fight against the East + Side was, indeed, responsible for the organisation of the club. It was + felt necessary to have some head to their forces, and some means of + holding together. So the club was organised, and now the next thing on the + programme was the erection of a hut to serve as a club-house. Archie Dunn, + who had been elected president, volunteered to get three boards and a + hammer if the other boys would each get two boards and some nails. This + proposition was agreed to, and when the boys returned from their foraging + expeditions it was found that there were more than enough boards to build + the hut, so the work began at once. Holes were dug in the ground, and some + posts planted as supports for the structure, and then the boards were + hastily nailed together from post to post. In three hours the hut was + practically completed, and it remained only to lay a floor until they + could hold their first meeting in the new club-house. The floor itself was + down by noon, and the club then served a memorable dinner to mark the + completion of the structure. + </p> + <p> + A hole was dug in the ground outside the door, and a furnace made. A + skillet was brought from Archie’s house, together with some dishes and a + coffee-pot, and Dan Sullivan brought some more dishes, and six eggs from + his nests under the barn. The boys were obliged to make several trips to + and from the houses, but finally nearly everything was ready, and the eggs + were carefully cooked by Archie, who was really a good housekeeper, from + long experience in the kitchen with his mother. Some potatoes were fried + in the grease remaining in the skillet after the eggs were cooked, and + then the feast began. The eggs may have been rather black with grease, and + the potatoes were certainly not done, but the boys all pronounced it the + finest meal of their lives, notwithstanding the bitter coffee, and the + dirty bread, which had been allowed to fall into the gutter beside the + railway track. They were eating in their own house, and they had cooked in + the open air, “just like tramps,” Harry Rafe said, and it was little + wonder that they enjoyed the novel experience. + </p> + <p> + The only trouble came when the meal was finished. No one wanted to wash + the dishes, and, finally, it was decided to return them to their + respective kitchens just as they were, and to let them be washed with the + rest of the dinner dishes at home. And this decision came near putting an + end to Hut Club dinners, for both Mrs. Dunn and the Widow Sullivan were + determined not to wash any more dirty dishes from the hut. + </p> + <p> + When the meal was over, the boys lounged about the hut, and Dan Sullivan + brought a lot of things from his sister’s playhouse with which to furnish + it more suitably. Archie Dunn brought a lot of hay from the loft in his + mother’s barn, and when a piece of old carpet was spread upon it it made + an acceptable couch. A piece of old carpet was laid in front of the hut, + too, where the boys could sit and watch the trains switching back and + forth on the railway, and the tramps who were heating coffee in cans over + by the cattle-pen. + </p> + <p> + Finally, some cattle arrived in the pen to be loaded into cars for the + city, and the boys had just decided to go and watch the men loading them, + when an engine came up the side-track with the most beautiful car they had + ever seen, behind it. The car was painted in all colours of the rainbow, + and in giant letters was printed the magic name of “The World’s Greatest + Show.” + </p> + <p> + The boys lost no time in getting down from the cattle-pen fence, and the + car had barely stopped when they were aboard. “Hooray,” shouted Charlie + Huffman, “we’ll all get jobs of passin’ bills.” And it was with this end + in view that they sought the advertising manager in the car, who promised + to give them all jobs when the circus came in two weeks. The boys deluged + him with questions of every sort. “Will there be any elephants?” “Is there + goin’ to be a parade?” and “Will there be any trapeze performances?” The + poor man was finally obliged to lock the door to keep them out, and the + boys stood about the car until nearly six o’clock, admiring the paintings, + and speculating as to whether they would be able to work their way into + the circus or not, when it finally came. Their speculations were + interrupted by the appearance on the scene of the Widow Sullivan with a + good-sized maple switch, which she used to good effect in getting the two + Sullivans and Archie Dunn home for supper. For Mrs. Dunn had given Mrs. + Sullivan instructions before she started, so that when Archie complained + that he had been whipped by “that woman next door,” he received no + sympathy whatever. + </p> + <p> + And when he went to bed at nine o’clock, he could hardly sleep for + thinking of the wonderful things which had happened this day. The coming + circus and the great Hut Club kept him awake until far after ten, so that + he got up too late for Sunday school the next morning, and was punished + accordingly. + </p> + <p> + The next week was a hard one at school, and the boys had but little time + to devote to the club. But after four o’clock in the afternoon they + sometimes got together and did various things which improved their + club-house. Some very fair chairs were constructed from empty soap boxes, + and various contrivances were put together to guard against the intrusion + of any East Siders or tramps while they were away at school. There was no + padlock used, and any one coming up to the hut would imagine it a simple + thing to enter—until he tried. But the boys had fixed a secret cord + which, when pulled, shifted the bar inside, and every boy was sworn not to + betray the existence of the cord. + </p> + <p> + The day set for the circus came nearer and nearer, and the boys began to + be anxious for fear the schools would not close, so that they could + attend. But the superintendent finally announced that they would; so early + on the eventful day the entire club was on the grounds, waiting to get + some work to do. Archie Dunn got the first job, being selected to carry + water for the elephant because he was stronger than any of the others. But + the rest were given something to do, and when the day was over they had + all seen the circus, and went to bed happy, to dream of the great trip to + be taken by the Hut Club on the next Saturday. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0002" id="link2HCH0002"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER II. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS—A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE + HENRY. +</pre> + <p> + THE Hut Club went out on a picnic the next Saturday, and had a jolly time. + They camped upon an island in the middle of a shallow stream, and while + there made coffee and cooked their dinner, having brought most of the + necessary apparatus from the Hut. They fished a little, and hunted for + turtles in the water, and altogether had a good time, if nothing exciting + did occur. It was after nine o’clock at night when they reached town + again, footsore and weary, and Archie Dunn had hardly entered the house + before he was on the dining-room lounge, half-asleep. His mother seemed to + be out, and as he lay there he wondered how long it would be before she + came back. Archie truly loved his mother, but of late he had often thought + that he would like to leave home and go to the famous city, where he felt + sure he could get something to do. But he disliked the idea of leaving his + mother. + </p> + <p> + “I’m getting to be a big boy, now,” he often said to himself, “and it’s + time that I began to look out for myself. I’m nearly seventeen, and I + think I ought to be earning some money. This thing of belonging to Hut + Clubs and spending my time in going to picnics and to circuses ought to + stop. It’s all right for boys, but I’m getting to be a man, now.” + </p> + <p> + All these thoughts were flying through his mind when his mother came in. + “Oh, Archie,” she exclaimed, “I’ve been so worried about you. I’ve just + been over to Mrs. Sullivan’s to see if Dannie had come home, and whether + he had seen you. Wherever have you been?” + </p> + <p> + “We didn’t think it would take so long to walk home,” said Archie, jumping + up from the sofa, “but we were awfully tired, and we didn’t come very + fast. I’m so sorry you were worried. + </p> + <p> + “And I’m as hungry as a bear, mother. Can’t you find me something to eat?” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, dear,” said Mrs. Dunn, softly, “and when you’ve finished your supper + I have something for you. I won’t give it to you now for fear you won’t be + able to eat, but as soon as you have finished your meal, you shall have + it.” + </p> + <p> + So Archie was obliged to eat his baked beans and brown bread and drink his + milk without knowing what was in store for him, and he hurried as fast as + he could, so that he could learn. When he had finished he went into the + sitting-room, and found his mother sitting with a letter spread open upon + her lap. “Uncle Henry has written me asking if you cannot go with him to + New York on Monday, for a couple of days. He is obliged to go down there + on business, and says he will be glad to take you along and show you + something of the wonderful city, for he knows you won’t be any trouble to + him. Now I hardly know what to say, Archie. If I can feel that you are + behaving yourself properly, and are doing your best to be as little + trouble as possible, I am willing that you shall go.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, mother,” cried Archie, “I’ll promise anything. Only let me go this + once, and I’ll promise to stay at home all the rest of the summer.” + </p> + <p> + “All right, then,” said Mrs. Dunn. “You shall go on the first train Monday + morning, and Uncle Henry will join you at Heddens Corner. Run along to bed + now.” + </p> + <p> + Archie went up-stairs almost dumb with delight Was it really true that he + was to see the great city at last? He had heard some of the boys at school + telling what their fathers saw there, but he had never even hoped that he + would see it for himself so soon. Of course he had determined to see it + all some day, but that was to be far in the future. The lad could hardly + sleep for the joy of it all, and when he did finally lose consciousness, + it was only to dream of streets of gold, and great buildings reaching to + the skies. + </p> + <p> + Sunday passed slowly by. At Sunday school, Archie told the boys that he + was going to New York on the morrow, and from that moment he was the hero + of the class. The boys looked at him with wondering admiration, and seemed + scarcely able to realise that one of their number was to go so far from + home. The city was in reality little more than a hundred miles, but to + their boyish minds this distance seemed wonderfully great. + </p> + <p> + Early on Monday morning Archie was at the depot waiting for the train. His + mother was there to see him off, and there were tears in her eyes at the + thought of parting with her only child, if only for a day or two. And + Archie was radiant with delight at the glorious prospect ahead of him. He + walked nervously up and down the platform, and wished frequently that it + were not so early in the morning, so that some of the boys might be there + to see him off. Finally, the great hissing locomotive drew up, with its + long train of coaches, and Archie was soon aboard, hurrying off to Heddens + Corner and the city. In a few minutes Uncle Henry was with him, a tall, + fine-looking man, with an air of business. Uncle Henry kept the general + store at the Corner, and was an important person in the neighbourhood. He + was of some importance in the city, too, for his name was known in + politics, and his custom was always desired at the wholesale stores. So + Archie was going to see the city under good auspices, if his uncle would + only have time to take him about with him. + </p> + <p> + After a couple of hours, during which Archie kept his face glued to the + window-pane, watching the flying landscape, the great train pulled through + a long, dark tunnel, and finally entered an immense shed, covered with + glass where it came to a final stop. Crowds left the coaches, and passed + out of the station, where they were swallowed up in the great rush of + traffic. Some drove away in cabs and carriages. Some entered the + street-cars, and some went up a stairway and entered what seemed to Archie + a railway train in the air. + </p> + <p> + Uncle Henry told Archie to follow him carefully, and they, too, were soon + flying away from the neighbourhood of the terminal, past hotels, stores, + and dwellings, until they finally left the trolley-car, and passed through + a cross street into a long, quiet thoroughfare which looked old enough to + have been there for a hundred years. The houses were built far back from + the street, with pillars in front, and into one of these quaint old + dwellings went Archie and his uncle. + </p> + <p> + “I always stop down-town,” explained Uncle Henry, “because I am near to + the great wholesale establishments. It is central to the retail stores, + too, and to many of the places of interest.” + </p> + <p> + When they were settled in their room, Uncle Henry explained that he would + have to be away most of this first day, but that to-morrow he would take + Archie out and show him the sights. So Archie expected to remain indoors + all day; but when his uncle had left the house he decided that he couldn’t + possibly remain in this close room when so many wonderful things were + taking place outside. So he decided to walk up and down the street, + anyhow, and when he went out he felt like a prisoner just escaped from a + cell. But the noise was terrible, and there were a great many wagons and + trucks passing through the street. The greatest crowd seemed to be on that + cross street about two blocks away, so Archie decided to go there, and see + if there was anything new on that street. + </p> + <p> + He saw many wonderful things. There were cars running along without any + apparent motive power, there were thousands and thousands of people in the + streets, and the stores looked so handsome and interesting that he simply + couldn’t resist going into one or two of them, just to see what they were + like. And when he had finished with one or two he could think of no reason + why he shouldn’t go on up the street, where he was sure he would find a + great many more interesting things to see. So on and on he went, until at + last he was tired and hungry, and then, for the first time, he was a + little frightened, because he thought of all he had read about people + losing their way in the city, and not being able to find their relatives + again. But he was a brave boy, so he determined to make an effort to find + his way back without appealing to a policeman. And after a time he was + successful, and entered the queer old house in the ancient street at just + three o’clock in the afternoon. His uncle was there waiting for him, and + was nearly beside himself with apprehension. + </p> + <p> + “I was about to send out a general alarm for you, at the police station,” + he said. “How did you happen to go away?” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, I was so very tired of staying in the house,” said Archie, “and I + felt sure that I could find my way back without getting lost at all. And + to-morrow I’m sure I can get along all right, Uncle Henry, so you needn’t + bother with me at all, unless you want to.” + </p> + <p> + And it so happened that Mr. Kirk was very busy the next day, and would + have found it quite impossible to show Archie about. So it was fortunate + that he was able to go everywhere alone, or he would have had to return + home without seeing anything at all of the city. + </p> + <p> + As it was, he went here, there, and everywhere, and saw a great deal of + the city, the people, and the way in which they lived. The entire place + had a strange fascination for him, and all the time he was thinking how + glad he would be to live where he could see all this rush of business, + this varied life, every day. And he fully determined to return some day + and get something to do, so that he might work himself up, and come to own + one of the handsome houses on the avenues, or drive one of the elegant + carriages on the boulevard. And he observed every boy who passed him, and + talked with several of them, trying to find out whether positions were + easy to secure, and whether they paid much when they were secured. + </p> + <p> + So when they took the four o’clock train for home, and arrived at Archie’s + house in time for supper, he told more about the city boys and their work + than about the tall buildings, the Brooklyn Bridge, or the Central Park. + He talked so much, in fact, about the delights of the city boy, and the + money he earned, that after he had gone to bed Mrs. Dunn took her brother + aside and talked with him concerning Archie’s future. And between them + they definitely decided that Archie must not go to the city to work. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0003" id="link2HCH0003"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER III. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK—LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE DUNN was not more ambitious than many other boys of his age, but he + possessed one quality which is not developed in every boy, determination. + Once Archie decided upon doing a thing, once he had made up his mind that + it was truly a good thing to do, nothing could keep him from putting his + plans into action, and making an effort, at least, to accomplish his ends. + Most boys of seventeen have not decided what they want to become when they + are men, and, until his visit to the city, Archie was equally at sea + concerning his future. He knew, of course, that he wanted to be rich and + famous, but when he tried to think up some suitable profession which would + bring him these possessions, he was never able to decide. + </p> + <p> + The two days in the city with Uncle Henry had opened to his boyish mind a + new world, and when he returned to the humble home surrounded by gardens, + he felt that he would never be satisfied to live and work in this small + town. There was now no question in his mind but what the city was the + place for any one who wished to become either rich or famous. It would + certainly be impossible for him to make a name for himself in this + village, while in the city he would have every opportunity for improving + himself, and advancing himself in every way. He wondered, indeed, that he + had never thought of going to New York before, and was disgusted with + himself when he thought of the time he had wasted here at home. + </p> + <p> + But there was no use in thinking of the past. The thing to do now was to + get to the city as quickly as possible, for to Archie every day seemed + precious, and each delay kept him further from the consummation of his + hopes. It never occurred to the boy that his mother might have objections + to his leaving home. She had always been very ambitious for his future, + and he supposed that she would be delighted at the idea of having her boy + in the great city, where he would have innumerable chances for improving + himself. So when they sat on the front porch, one evening, and he told her + of his plan, he was surprised to hear his mother pleading with him to + remain at home. “Archie,” she said, “I am almost sure you will come to + some bad end in the city. You really must not go, for my sake, if for no + other reason.” + </p> + <p> + “But, mother, I can’t remain here in town always. I must go out into the + world some time to earn a living and make a place for myself, and I think + the sooner I go the better, don’t you?” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, Archie, but you’re so young, and you’ve had no experience. You have + no idea of the things there are in great cities to drag young men down. I + don’t think I could stand it to have you so far away from home and in such + danger.” + </p> + <p> + “Well, mother,” said Archie, “there isn’t much use in arguing about it. I + have reached a point where I don’t think I can be any longer satisfied at + home. I have been here seventeen years, and I think I can remain here that + much longer without improving myself. In the city I am sure I can make + rapid progress, and in a year or two you can come there and live with me.” + </p> + <p> + Archie got up from the porch and went down the street, while poor Mrs. + Dunn ran over next door to see her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan. When she had + entered the disorderly kitchen, and seated herself on one of the home-made + chairs, the anxious mother burst into tears. “I don’t know what to think + of Archie, Mrs. Sullivan,” she said. “He is determined, now, to go to New + York, and I know that if he goes I will never be able to see him again. I + am nigh distracted with worrying over it. I have talked with him, but he + seems determined, and I know I can never hold out against his entreaties + and arguments.” + </p> + <p> + “Sure, now, Mrs. Dunn,” said the Widow Sullivan, “don’t yez be a worryin’ + about ‘im at all. That Archie is a smart boy, he is, and if he goes to New + York he’ll come out all right, never fear, I only wish my Dannie had as + much get-up about him as your boy.” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, yes, Archie is very ambitious for his age,” said Mrs. Dunn, “but I + sometimes wish he were less so. I know I could keep him at home longer if + he wasn’t so anxious to be at work. I don’t believe I can let him go, Mrs. + Sullivan, not yet. I want him to stay in school another year, and then + I’ll think about it.” + </p> + <p> + “Well, ye’re wise, Mrs. Dunn, ye’re a wise woman,” said the Widow + Sullivan. “Since yer husband died ye’ve been a good mother to the lad, and + have brought ‘im up well. And now, how is yer chickens, Mrs. Dunn? Have ye + got that cochin hen a ‘settin’’ yit?” + </p> + <p> + And the two women began to discuss their various fowls, and the + conversation was so interesting that Mrs. Dunn remained late, and found + Archie in bed when she went home. “Ah, well, poor boy, I’ll have to tell + him of my decision in the morning. He’ll be terribly disappointed, and I + hate to do it I’m afraid it’s selfishness that makes me want to keep him + with me. I almost wish he would take things into his own hands, and start + for the city himself. I would be rid then of the responsibility of sending + him, and the question would be settled for me. Boys sometimes know best + how to settle their own difficulties, anyhow.” + </p> + <p> + Mrs. Dunn kneaded the bread before retiring, for to-morrow was Saturday, + and, therefore, baking-day, and then she went into her little room off the + kitchen, and prayed earnestly for her boy before sleeping. She prayed that + she might be helped in advising him, and that he might always do what was + best for himself and for his mother. + </p> + <p> + The next day was Saturday, and in the morning the Hut Club met, as usual, + and prepared to have an open-air dinner for this day. The furnace, which + had been knocked down during the week by the East Siders, was rebuilt, and + the skillet and other utensils were brought from the nearest kitchens. + Archie went to the grocery around the corner and bought five cents’ worth + of cakes, and then the six boys sat down in a circle and prepared to + devour their home-made feast. But before they began Archie stood up. “I + want to say that this will probably be my farewell dinner with the club,” + he said, in a low tone, “and I hope that you will appoint another + president in my place.” + </p> + <p> + The boys were horror-struck, but Archie refused to explain where and when + he was going. Finally, they refused to appoint another president, all + agreeing that Archie should hold that office for ever, wherever he was. + And the meal was eaten in silence, for the announcement had thrown a sort + of chill over the proceedings. When they had finished, Archie silently + shook hands with each of the boys, who were dumb with amazement, gathered + up his skillet and coffee-pot, and went home through the gate to the + chicken-lot. + </p> + <p> + “I wonder what he’s goin’ to do,” they all said, as in one breath, and as + there was seldom much fun in the club when Archie was absent, they all + went home in a few minutes, or down-town to watch the farmers, who were in + town to do their weekly buying. + </p> + <p> + When Archie reached home he went up-stairs to his little room, and began + to lay out a few things which he wanted to take with him, for he had + determined to start for New York this very night. Then he tied the things + up in a small bundle, and sat down to write a note to his mother. When he + had finished it, he pinned it up at the head of his cot, and this is what + it said: + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + “MY DARLING MOTHER:—Please don’t worry about me, I’m bound to + come through all right, and if anything happens to me, I promise + that I will write to you immediately and let you know. I have the + ten dollars which I have saved, and if I don’t get work at once I + will write to you for some more. Now, I am not doing this thing for + the sake of adventure, but because I am sure it is the best thing + for me, and I don’t want you to worry at all. I shall write to you + often and let you know just what I’m doing, so don’t worry, but be + a brave mother. I’m not going off this way as a sneak, but because + I want to avoid a ‘scene.’ + + “Your loving + + “ARCHIE.” + </pre> + <p> + And at three o’clock the next morning Archie Dunn got out of bed, + shouldered his bundle, and started off for the great city, which seemed to + be drawing him like a magnet. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0004" id="link2HCH0004"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY—CRUEL TREATMENT. +</pre> + <p> + WHEN daylight came, Archie was far out of the town walking quickly along + the southern road. He figured that he had walked nearly six miles in the + two hours since he had let himself out of the back door at home, and, as + he looked ahead, he planned that he would walk at least thirty miles every + day. Of course, he had never done much walking before, or he would have + known better than to have expected to accomplish so much in twelve hours, + but he felt fresh and full of strength this morning, and nothing seemed + too hard to accomplish. As yet he had not regretted his departure from + home. The excitement of it all, and the adventurous side of his exploit, + had kept him interested, and made him feel that he was a real hero. But he + was not so foolish as to imagine that there would not be times when he + would regret having set out for New York. He was too old and too sensible + for his age to allow his ambition to run away with him entirely, and he + fully expected to meet with many great discouragements. “But I’m sure of + one thing,” he said to himself, as he walked along, “I never will return + home until I have something to show for the trip. I won’t have the club + boys and the neighbours saying that Archie Dunn had to come home + discouraged. If I return without accomplishing anything, I will be held up + to the whole town as a boy who made a fool of himself by not taking his + friends’ advice, and I never will be made an example of if I can help it.” + And Archie walked faster as he thought of the possibility of failure. + </p> + <p> + When seven o’clock came he was passing through the county-seat, but though + there were many interesting things to look at in the town, Archie + determined not to stop. He was afraid he might meet some one he knew, who + would be sure to ask him where he was going with his bundle, and what he + was doing out so early. And anyhow he was very hungry, and decided to get + out of the town and to the farmhouses as soon as possible. “I can work for + my meal at a farmhouse,” he said to himself, “but in the town they’ll take + me for a regular tramp.” + </p> + <p> + So poor Archie walked quickly through the town, still keeping to the + southern road, and saying to himself, as he passed every milestone, “So + much nearer New York.” About a mile out in the country he came to a large + farmhouse, and he determined to enter and ask for a meal. He had hard work + to muster up enough courage to go in and ask for anything, but finally he + knocked timidly at the kitchen door, and was frightened by a large dog + which came barking around the corner. It seemed to him that the animal + would surely bite, but a large fat woman opened the door just in time to + let him in. “Hurry in, boy,” she said, “fer there’s no tellin’ what Tige + might do ef he once gets a hold of ye.” So Archie stepped into the large + kitchen, with its rafters overhead, and its dining-table in the corner. + “Sit down, boy,” said the woman. “I reckon you’s thet new lad thet’s come + ter work over at Mullins’s, ain’t ye?” + </p> + <p> + “No’m,” said Archie, “I don’t work anywhere. I’m on my way to New York, + where I expect to find a position, and I thought perhaps you’d allow me to + do a little work here this morning to earn my breakfast.” + </p> + <p> + Good Mrs. Lane, for that was the woman’s name, was horrified to think that + any one was alive and without breakfast at eight o’clock in the morning. + “Goodness me!” said she. “Why, you must be half-famished fer want of food, + ain’t ye?” And she bustled about the kitchen, putting the kettle on to + boil, and stirring up the fire. “You’ll have some nice ham and eggs, my + boy, and then I have somethin’ in mind fer you. I reckon yer ain’t in no + hurry ter get ter the city, be ye? Well, even if ye do be in a hurry, I + reckon you’ll be glad of the chance to earn four dollars. I ain’t goin’ to + ask ye no questions about how ye come to be walkin’ to New York, because I + never wuz no hand ter meddle in other folkses affairs, but ye look to be a + likely lad, and a strong un, and ez my sister’s husband, what lives two + miles down the pike, needs a boy to drive a plough fer a week, I b’lieve + ye’ll suit ‘im first-rate. So ez soon ez ye have finished yer vittles, + I’ll walk down there with ye, and we’ll see the old man.” + </p> + <p> + Archie hardly knew whether to be delighted with the prospect or not. Of + course four dollars would be nice to have, but he was anxious to get to + the city as soon as possible, and every day counted. But perhaps it would + be wrong, he thought, to throw away such a good chance to earn some money, + and he had decided to accept any offer the farmer made him, long before he + finished his breakfast. When he got up from the straight-backed chair, he + felt that he had never eaten a better meal in his life, and when Mrs. Lane + started off down the road, he gladly followed her. A week on such a farm + as this would be no unpleasant experience. Such food was not to be had + every day, he knew, and he of course would have precious little that was + good to eat when he reached the city. + </p> + <p> + They soon covered the two miles, Mrs. Lane getting along very fast for + such a large woman, and at last they stood before Hiram Tinch, who owned + the farm. Archie was made to describe his intentions, and was thoroughly + examined by Mr. Tinch. He told the farmer that he knew nothing about farm + work, but Mr. Tinch said he would soon teach him, and it was settled that + Archie was to remain on the farm a week. Mrs. Lane went inside the house + to see her sister, who looked sick with too much work, and the farmer told + Archie that he might as well start in, as there was no object in waiting. + So the boy donned a pair of “blue jean” trousers, and was taken into a + field, where a one-horse plough was standing. Archie knew how to hitch a + horse, so he went to the stable and secured his steed, and then harnessed + him to the plough. The farmer didn’t see fit to give him any instructions + about ploughing, and the poor boy hardly knew what to do, but rather than + ask he started off, and tried to guide the animal in the right direction, + as far as he knew it. Of course the horse went wrong, and the plough + refused to stay in the earth, and altogether the attempt was a miserable + failure. The farmer leaned against the fence, picking his teeth with a + pin, but when he saw the horse going crooked, and the plough bounding + along over the earth, his face grew livid with anger. For a minute he + seemed unable to speak, but strode toward Archie with a fierce look in his + eyes. Then he found his tongue, and opened such a tirade of vile words + that the poor boy shrank from him in terror. He was in mortal fear lest + the man should lay hands on him and commit some crime, so intense was his + rage, but Hiram Tinch seemed to know how far to go, and after five minutes + of cursing and swearing he took the plough in his own hands, and guided it + through the earth. “Now take it,” he growled at Archie, when he had gone a + furrow’s length, “and see ef ye can do better this time. Remember, not a + bite of dinner do ye get until this field is ploughed.” + </p> + <p> + Poor Archie was weak from fright, but there was nothing to do but to obey. + He looked at the vast field before him, and made up his mind that he would + get nothing to eat until night, anyhow, for it was already nearly noon. He + felt very much like bursting into tears, but he was too proud to give way + to his feelings. But he couldn’t help wishing that he were at home, + playing with the members of the Hut Club. “Those boys are much better off + than I am,” he said, over and over, “though they have made no effort to + improve themselves.” After a time, however, his ambition returned, and as + he looked ahead into the future, and remembered the wonderful things he + was going to accomplish, he felt more like working. + </p> + <p> + He finished the field at five o’clock in the afternoon, and was almost + fainting from hunger and from the hard work. The ploughing was fairly well + done, but Hiram Tinch could see no merit in the work. He swore at Archie + again, and gave him a supper of mush and milk. Mrs. Tinch sat by, and + Archie could see that she did not approve of his treatment. The poor woman + seemed afraid to speak, almost, but it was plain that she had a good + heart. So when Archie heard a noise in his garret room that night, he was + not surprised to see Mrs. Tinch at the window, placing some doughnuts and + sandwiches there for him to eat. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0005" id="link2HCH0005"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER V. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS—THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS. +</pre> + <p> + IT seemed to Archie that he had just fallen asleep when old Hiram Tinch + was shaking him awake. “Git up out o’ here now, ye lazy beggar, and git to + the field and finish that there ploughin’,” he growled, and the frightened + lad awakened from a horrible nightmare, only to find a worse experience + awaiting him in the light of day. He hastily drew on his trousers, and + didn’t wait to don either shoes or stockings, for if he was to spend the + day ploughing in a field, he knew he would be more comfortable in his bare + feet. When he reached the kitchen, he found that Farmer Tinch had already + eaten his breakfast, though it was not daylight. Archie was glad that he + was out of the way, and good Mrs. Tinch was glad of it, too, for she was + able to give the boy a good breakfast, and some good advice with it. + “Don’t you pay no attention to what my man says, laddie. He’s a powerful + man to swear and carry on, but I don’t think he’ll have the meanness to + strike you. Ef he does, ye must come to me, and I’ll see thet he doesn’t + do it no more.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was grateful for this spirit of friendliness, but in his heart he + thought that cruel words were often more painful than lashes, and he + heartily wished that his week was over. + </p> + <p> + All this day he spent on the farm, without once going into the road. + Farmer Tinch had warned him that if he saw him making for the road at any + time, he could go and never come back, and he would forfeit what money he + had already earned. So Archie ploughed the field from daylight till dark, + with a half hour at noon for a hurried dinner. He was glad when darkness + came, and after another supper of mush and milk he was thankful to have a + corn-husk bed to sleep on, and was soon in a stupor which was so sound as + to be almost like death. + </p> + <p> + Again the next morning he was awakened at daylight, and he was made to + work even harder than on the second day. He had by this time become + somewhat used to the labour, however, and stood it better. He was more + successful in his work, too, and Farmer Tinch had less opportunity for + cursing him. But at night he seemed more tired, even, than before, and he + longed for his home again. He thought of the cosy bed he would now be + enjoying if he had only taken his mother’s advice, and he felt almost like + getting up in the night and stealing away on the road to the north. But, + always a sensible lad, Archie realised that this discouragement could not + last, and he lost himself in sleep, looking forward three days, when his + week should be up, and he would be on his way to the city, with four + dollars more to add to his slender store. + </p> + <p> + The three days passed slowly, but at length the Saturday night came, and + he prepared to be off. But good Mrs. Tinch entreated him to remain with + them over Sunday, and, as Archie wasn’t sure that it would be quite right + for him to travel on Sunday, he decided to do so. So the next day he + brushed his only suit of clothes, and drove with his late employer to + church, where Farmer Tinch sat in a front seat and passed the bread and + wine at communion. Archie’s heart rose to his throat as he saw this + paragon so devout in church. He felt like rising in his seat and + denouncing him before all the people as a tyrant and a hard-hearted + wretch. But he kept quiet, though he found it impossible to partake of the + communion under such circumstances. + </p> + <p> + The Tinches had brought their dinner with them, and at noon they all sat + on one of the grassy mounds in the churchyard, to take some refreshment + before the afternoon service began. When they had finished, Archie + wandered off, and came to a crowd of boys who were romping behind the + church. When they saw him approach, they all stopped their noise, and + looked at him wonderingly. Evidently they were not used to seeing strange + boys. The silence was soon broken, however, by one of the boys calling + out, “Why, fellers, thet’s the chap what’s been workin’ fer Hiram Tinch.” + This announcement was enough to make Archie an even greater object of + interest than before, for the boys seemed to think that any person who + could work for Farmer Tinch, and come out of the ordeal none the worse for + wear, must be something wonderful. Archie was soon on good terms with them + all, however, and told them of his plan of going to New York. The boys + were all attention, and soon he was the hero of the occasion. When the + bell rung for the afternoon service he was still telling them of the + things he was going to do, and none of them wanted to go into the church. + Archie persuaded them to enter, however, but he was not surprised to meet + them all along the road when he left Tinch’s early Monday morning. + </p> + <p> + It was almost time to go to bed when they reached the farmhouse that + night, so Archie went at once to his attic, being anxious to start fresh + on his journey the next day. He was now determined to push on as rapidly + as possible, hoping to reach the city within three or four days. He was + somewhat afraid that he wouldn’t be able to do this, but he was going to + try, anyhow. + </p> + <p> + At daylight Monday morning he was on the way, and when the various boys he + met the day before said good-bye to him and wished him good luck, he felt + that his stay at Tinch’s had not been without benefits of some sort. He + had made some boy friends, and he was four dollars richer, Archie was + sensible enough, too, to realise that his experience would be a valuable + one to him in the future. He knew now what hard work was, at any rate. + </p> + <p> + The morning walk was delightful. The September weather was perfect, and + all along the road were fruit-trees laden with every sort of good thing to + eat a boy could wish for. And as the trees were on the public + thoroughfare, Archie did net hesitate to help himself freely as he went + along, so that he didn’t require any meal at noon. + </p> + <p> + As night drew near, however, he began to wonder what he would do for a + bed, and the question became more important with every hour. He had come + to no towns since morning, and knew that he couldn’t expect to reach one + of any size until the next day, anyhow. There were farmhouses, of course, + but after his experience of the past week the lad felt that he would + rather remain outdoors all night than risk being thrown in with another + Hiram Tinch. He didn’t know enough of farmers to know that few of them + resemble Mr. Tinch in nature, and he did what he thought was best in + keeping away from farmhouses after this. + </p> + <p> + It was five o’clock in the evening, and Archie was beginning to feel very + tired and hungry, when he came to the ruins of an old colonial mansion, + which lay far back from the road, surrounded by trees, and almost hid with + shrubbery. “How interesting,” he thought to himself. “It looks just like + the pictures of old ruins we see in geographies. I think I must go up and + see what they look like at close range.” And, fired with a spirit of + adventure, and making believe that he was an explorer in an ancient + country, the boy made his way through the trees and shrubbery. The ruins + looked more and more interesting as he advanced. This had evidently been a + magnificent estate at one time. There were massive pillars which had once + supported a stately portico at the front of the house, and above all there + rose a massive chimney, which seemed to be exceedingly well preserved. As + Archie came nearer, he was surprised to notice a thin column of smoke + rising from the top of the chimney, and for a moment he stood still with + fright. What could this mean? Who could be building a fire in the midst of + these ruins. It was almost like what one reads about in books, he thought. + </p> + <p> + For some time he could not decide what to do, whether he had better keep + on, or whether the wisest policy would be to get back to the road as + quickly as possible. Finally, his curiosity and thirst for adventure + persuaded him to go on, and he continued to push his way through the + shrubbery until he stood before the ruins. He then climbed a flight of + steps, and stood in what had once been the main entrance to this massive + palace. Before him he saw a scene which was almost weird in its + unusualness. A fire of pine-knots was blazing in the ruins of the great + fireplace, and seated in a semicircle around the fire were several men of + picturesque appearance, whose faces looked up angrily when they were + disturbed. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0006" id="link2HCH0006"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + STEALING A RIDE—KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE was dumbfounded. Never before had he been among such a motley + crowd, and his first impulse was to turn and run. But on second thought he + decided that it would be best to put on a bold face and walk up to the + men. This he did, and when he reached the fire the men jumped up and asked + him who he was. In a few words he told them his simple story, and they all + laughed and sat down again about the fire, making a place for him. “You’re + one of us, then, laddie,” said the leader of the gang. “We’re all soldiers + of fortune, all dependent upon the generous public for our livelihood. But + we’re not goin’ to the city. There’s nothin’ there for us, and our advice + to you is for you to steer clear of the place, too. Them police takes ye + and throws ye into jail as quick as a wink, and there’s no chance of + gettin’ anythink to eat at basement doors, neither. They’re all on to us, + there, laddie, and ye’d better stick to the country.” + </p> + <p> + This bit of advice was endorsed by the entire company, and it was in vain + that Archie tried to make them understand that he was no ordinary tramp, + walking about the country in search of an easy time. He tried to tell them + that he was going to the city to work, not to beg; but the leader, a big, + dirty fellow, weighing two hundred pounds or over, said, “Never mind, + laddie, we knows you’ve run away from home to get away from the folks, and + we appreciates yer position. If yer a mind to stand by us, we’ll stand by + you, and see thet ye comes to no harm.” + </p> + <p> + On thinking things over, Archie decided that it was perhaps the wisest + thing for him to appear to sympathise with the tramps, and make himself + agreeable while with them. He had undoubtedly run into a gang of the worst + sort of vagabonds, and there was no way of getting away from there without + arousing their suspicions. So he partook of their slender meal, and joined + in the general laughter when the leader, “Fattie Foy,” made some crude + attempt at punning. The meal was one to be remembered. The coffee had been + heated in an empty tomato can over the fire, and from its taste was + evidently a combination of various collections made from the farmhouses + round about. Besides the coffee there was a various collection of + sandwiches and bread and butter, and two pieces of cake. One man had + succeeded in striking a good house, and came back laden with pickles and + crackers and cheese, which were probably the remains of some picnic + basket. Another fellow had brought some pieces of cold bacon, and these + were warmed on sticks over the fire until they looked really appetising. + From some barn had come a half-dozen fresh eggs, and these were quickly + boiled in a can of hot water, and made a very fair showing on the slab of + granite which served as a table. + </p> + <p> + When everything was ready the provisions were equally divided among the + crowd, and every one shared alike. It made no difference how much more one + man collected than another, it was always shared with the entire crowd. + Poor Archie found it almost impossible to eat, but the men insisted that + he take something, so he did manage to swallow a few sips of coffee and + eat a slice of bread and butter. But as he looked about him at the dirty + hands and faces, and the filthy garments of the tramps, he determined not + to eat again while with them. + </p> + <p> + When the meal was over the two tin cans were washed at a spring of water, + and as it was now quite dark, they all sat close to the fire, in order to + see. Some one produced a pack of dirty cards, and they began a game of + some kind. Archie was asked to join, but he told them he didn’t know + anything about card-playing. The poor lad was beginning to wish he had + never left home, and felt more miserable than at any other period of the + journey. He walked over to a corner of the ruins where the light from the + fire did not penetrate, and, once there, he sat down and sobbed bitterly + for a time. When he had finished crying it seemed impossible for him to + sleep. The scene about the fire fascinated him. The men were seated in + every sort of picturesque attitude, and as the flickering light fell upon + their dark faces it wasn’t hard for the poor lad to imagine that he had + fallen among a crowd of brigands. He watched them as they played until he + could see no longer, and then he fell into a sound sleep. + </p> + <p> + When Archie woke it was still dark, but the moon was shining brightly + overhead, making everything as light as day. He rubbed his eyes and sat + up, and it was some time before he could realise where he was. Then, as he + saw the tramps lying about the ground, he remembered his adventures of the + night before, and, horrified that he had allowed himself to sleep, he + hastily jumped up, and determined to get away from the ruins as quickly as + possible. The tramps were all sleeping soundly, and the only noises to be + heard were the sound of their breathing and the blood-curdling hoot of + some owl perched on the pillars of the old portico. The boy picked his way + carefully between the bodies of the sleeping men, and in a minute stood + once more on the grand flight of steps outside. He was trembling for fear + some tramp would awake and prevent his going, and when a bat brushed him + in its flight he almost screamed with terror. Far out beyond the trees and + the shrubby he could see the road glistening in the moonlight, and he made + his way as rapidly as possible out of the grounds, and was once more on + his way to the city. + </p> + <p> + It was lonesome work, walking along a country road at night, and Archie + remembered with longing his cosy bed at home. The feeling of homesickness + kept growing within him, despite his efforts to down it, and when at last + the glorious autumn sun rose over the eastern horizon he was miserable + with longing for mother and for home. But he was too proud to even think + of turning back. He must reach the city at all hazards, homesick or not. + </p> + <p> + Archie did not think of breakfast this morning. His experience of the + night before seemed to have taken away his appetite entirely, and his only + thought was to walk as fast as possible, so that he could reach the city + soon. About nine o’clock he entered the outskirts of a busy town, and + while there he observed that the railroad going to the city passed through + the place. All at once a new idea occurred to him. He had so often heard + men and boys tell of how they had stolen a ride from one town to another. + Why shouldn’t he be able to get a ride on a freight train to the city. + Would it be wrong? Archie thought not, since so many men did it. And + anyhow it didn’t seem a wicked thing to cheat the railroad. He had heard + people say that the company ought to be cheated whenever possible, since + it cheated so many others. So, from being so tired and so anxious to reach + New York, Archie decided to try and steal a ride. He entered the yards, + where a train was being made up for the south, and there he saw a + cattle-car with an open door. He immediately jumped inside and shut the + door, squeezing himself into the farthest corner, hoping that he wouldn’t + be discovered. He soon found that he wasn’t alone, for a couple of tramps + were in the opposite corner, and they whispered to him not to make any + noise. “The brakie,” they said, “will soon be ‘round, and if he finds ye + he’ll put us all in jail.” + </p> + <p> + Poor Archie grew pale at the thought of being put in jail, and huddled + himself closer in the corner. After a time the train started, and the + tramps, he noticed, climbed up into some sort of compartment under the + roof of the car, where they wouldn’t be observed, leaving Archie alone + down-stairs. Things went smoothly for a time. The train went flying along, + and Archie counted every mile which brought him nearer to the city. + Finally the train pulled up at a crossing, and a brakeman came along and + threw open the door of the car. He was not long in discovering the + cowering figure in the corner, and his wrath was dreadful to look upon. + “So, ye cussed vagabond,” he growled, “ye thought ye’d steal a ride, did + ye? Get out o’ this now. Quick, out with ye.” Archie could have fainted, + and, as it was, he almost fell out of the car, propelled by the brakeman’s + boot. For awhile he stood dazed beside the track, and finally moved on. + “I’ll keep a ‘stiff upper lip,’” he said, “whatever happens.” But this was + by far the most discouraging adventure yet. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0007" id="link2HCH0007"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK—A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE. +</pre> + <p> + ON and on for the rest of the day walked Archie. His feet were sore, he + was weak from hunger, and he was made miserable with being homesick. + People who met him on the road turned around to look at the slender lad + with the pale face and the weary step, but he kept walking on, stopping + for nothing, and noticing no one. At noon he picked some apples in an + orchard, and these appeased his hunger. When evening drew near, however, + he felt that he could go without food no longer, so he didn’t hesitate to + stop at a house and ask for food. “I know mother would give a boy food if + one should come to our door,” he said to himself, “so I do not think it + wrong for me to ask for food here.” He was fortunate enough to strike a + pleasant housewife, who took him in and made him sit down at the kitchen + table, which she covered with good things to eat. There was cold roast + beef, some fried potatoes and a glass of good fresh milk. And then she + gave him some apple pie, so that when he had finished Archie felt better + than for many a day. While he ate he told the good woman why he was going + to New York, and her sympathy was enlisted at once. “Why, you poor lad,” + she exclaimed, “just to think of your being in the city all alone. And + what will your mother think?” + </p> + <p> + Archie couldn’t imagine what his mother did think. He had remembered her + every minute during the last few days, and was anxious to write her, so he + decided to ask the woman for some paper and a pencil. These were gladly + given him, and he sat down and told his mother that he was almost to New + York and that he had been having a splendid time. He was careful not to + say anything about his experience with Farmer Tinch, or the night he spent + with the tramps. He knew these things would only make her unhappy, and it + was just as well that she should think everything was smooth sailing for + him. His letter was filled with his enthusiasm and his hope for the + morrow, so that when good Mrs. Dunn received it she was overjoyed, and + hurried over to show it to the Widow Sullivan, who enjoyed it thoroughly + and said “I told you so.” Poor Mrs. Dunn had been having a very miserable + time of it. She was hardly surprised that morning when she awoke and found + Archie gone, but she was naturally much worried for fear some accident + would happen to him before he reached New York. Once there, she felt that + she needn’t worry much about him, for, strange to say, Mrs. Dunn had a + firm belief in the ability of city policemen to take care of every one, + and she knew that Archie would not be allowed to suffer for want of food + and a place to sleep. And when she received this letter, saying that + Archie was nearly to New York, and had even been so successful as to earn + some money, she felt more comfortable than for some time, Of course she + supposed that he would be home before long. She was positive that he + wouldn’t be able to get any work in the city, and knew that as soon as his + money gave out he would return. “It’s all for the best,” she said to Mrs. + Sullivan. “The habit of running away from home was born in the boy. His + father left home when he was no older than Archie, and no harm ever came + to him. So I’m not going to worry, Mrs. Sullivan.” And then Mrs. Dunn + would go back to her home, and at sight of Archie’s old hat or some of his + football paraphernalia, would burst into tears. + </p> + <p> + The good woman who gave Archie his supper refused to let him start out + again on the road that night. She told him that he must remain with them, + for they had an extra bed up over the kitchen which was never needed, and + that he might just as well sleep there as not. So for the first time in + nearly a week Archie slept comfortably, and, as he heard the familiar + sounds in the kitchen below him in the morning, it was hard for him to + make up his mind that he was not at home, and that it was not his mother + who was grinding the coffee in the kitchen below. He heard the ham frying + in the skillet, and the rattle of the dishes as his hostess set the table, + and then he dressed himself and hastened downstairs, feeling ready for a + good day’s walking. + </p> + <p> + When he had eaten his breakfast he started out again. The woman told him + that it was only about fifteen miles to New York, and that after he had + walked about six of them he could take a trolley-car and ride the + remainder of the distance for five cents. So he thanked her for her + kindness, and promised to let her know how he succeeded in the city, for + the woman was much interested in his future. He felt almost sorry to leave + the home-like place, but the prospect of reaching the city this very day + was enough to make him anxious to be off. He covered the six miles to the + trolley-car before eleven o’clock in the morning, and then in an hour and + a quarter more the trolley landed him in lower New York. + </p> + <p> + His sensations as he was whirled along the smooth pavements, past + beautiful buildings and handsome residences, may be better imagined than + described. After looking forward to this day for so long, he was almost + overcome at the realisation of his hopes, and took the utmost delight in + everything about him. When the car stopped at the terminus of the line, he + got out and walked up the busiest street in the neighbourhood. He hardly + knew what to do first, but continued walking until he came to the New York + end of the great Brooklyn Bridge. Then he couldn’t resist the desire to + walk across the bridge, and he started out upon the journey. Up the steps + he walked, and soon he had climbed as far as the middle of the magnificent + structure. There he stood for some time, looking out over Governor’s + Island, nestled like a green egg in a nest of red buildings, and past + Staten Island to the open sea beyond It was all grander, more beautiful + than anything he had ever seen before, and he felt glad that he had come. + Then in another direction he saw the never-ending succession of buildings, + some tall, some low ones, but all inhabited with swarms of people. “There + are three million people in this great city,” he said to himself, “and + over them in New Jersey, in those cities I see, there are a million more, + and I am one of four million.” The thought was too much for the boy, and + he continued his walk across the bridge. Once across, he came back again, + for Brooklyn was a strange place to him. In New York City he felt more at + home, for he had at least spent two days within its limits. + </p> + <p> + Once back in the busy streets, he decided to look about for a cheap place + to stay for the night. It was the middle of the afternoon now, and he felt + that he ought to make some preparation. He knew better than to apply at + the police station for lodging, for he knew they would probably turn him + over to the famous Gerry Society, which would send him back home before a + day had passed, and then where would his ambitions be? + </p> + <p> + He remembered the place where he had stayed with Uncle Henry, but he knew + that this would be too high-priced for his pocketbook, so he started up + the Bowery, where he expected to find some very cheap places. He didn’t + like the looks of the people he met in the street, but his experiences on + the way to New York had taught him not to be too particular about a little + dirt. So when he came to a rickety building with a sign up, “Beds, ten and + fifteen cents,” he immediately went up the dark, filthy stairway, and + found himself in a large room at the top which served as the “hotel” + office. There were rows of chairs in front of the windows and along the + walls, and in the chairs were the queerest-looking lot of men he had ever + seen. He didn’t pay any attention to them, though, but went up to the + seedy individual behind the desk, and asked him if he could get a bed for + the night. “Sure, Mike,” the man replied, and Archie signed his name in a + dirty book with torn pages. He paid the man ten cents, and asked if he + could leave his bundle while he went outside. “Sure, Mike,” was again his + answer, and the man took his little bundle of necessities and threw them + on the floor behind the counter. When Archie had gone out, a fat man with + a baby face came up and whispered to the clerk. “Anything in the bloke?” + he inquired. “Nit,” said the clerk, “don’t yer see his baggage? Does it + look like there’s anything in it?” And the mysterious conversation closed, + to be continued later in the evening. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0008" id="link2HCH0008"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VIII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + LOOKING FOR WORK—WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT. +</pre> + <p> + AFTER a couple of hours spent in going about the streets, Archie went into + a place where he bought some coffee and rolls for his supper. He paid only + five cents for three sweet rolls and a large cup of coffee which was not + at all bad to taste, and he returned to the lodging-house on the Bowery + feeling better than he had expected to feel when he started out from the + homestead where he spent the previous night, If he could get a good meal + for five or ten cents, and could sleep for ten cents more, he would have + enough to keep him going for some time. + </p> + <p> + The Bowery at night presented a wonderful appearance to Archie’s mind. The + brilliantly lighted shops, the cheap theatres with their bands of + musicians on the sidewalk in front of the entrance, were all attractive to + his boyish eyes, but he was wise enough to pass them all by, and to make + his way as quickly as possible to the cheap lodging-house. The street was + jammed with persons of every description. He was surprised particularly at + the number of Chinamen he met, for he didn’t know that a block or two away + was the centre of the Chinese population of New York, where the Celestials + have their theatre, their hotels, their great stores, and their + joss-house. There were many Italians in the street, too, and Polish Jews, + to say nothing of Frenchmen and Germans. Then there was the typical Bowery + “tough,” who swaggered up and down, looking for trouble, which he usually + finds before an evening passes. Archie was not afraid in this cosmopolitan + crowd. No one seemed to notice him, and, anyhow, there were a great many + policemen about, who seemed to keep a sharp lookout all the time. And as + Archie shared his mother’s faith in the city policeman, he felt no fear. + </p> + <p> + In the lodging-house everything looked very much as before. The chairs + were still occupied with filthy-looking men, who smoked and spat and + talked in undertones among themselves. The boy paid no attention to any of + them, but, walking up to the seedy individual behind the counter, asked + him if he could go to bed now. The man answered, “Certainly,” and sent a + fellow with Archie to show him his bed. It was in a long, narrow room, + which was poorly lighted with a few gas-jets here and there, and which was + filled with about thirty beds, all narrow, and all dirty. One of these was + pointed out to Archie, and then the man left him. The poor lad felt more + homesick than ever, and had it not been that he had a glorious to-morrow + to look forward to, he would have been very miserable indeed. As it was, + he undressed and got between the chilly sheets, when he remembered that he + hadn’t looked after his little roll of bills for a long time, and that + some of them might be missing. He crawled out of bed again, and felt + inside the lining of his coat for the purse. He had sewed it there for + safe-keeping until he reached the city, for he had some little change in + his pocket, which he knew would last him for several days. + </p> + <p> + The poor boy’s hand felt nothing but a cut in the lining, where the roll + of bills had been, and all at once he realised that the money must have + been stolen from him. And he at once thought of the night in the ruins, + when he fell asleep among the tramps, and there was no doubt in his mind + but that they had taken his money from him. This was a terrible blow. Here + he was, with just a few cents in his pocket, and no one to whom he could + appeal for aid. It was the worst predicament Archie had ever been in, and + he hardly knew what to do. He sat on the side of his dirty little bed for + awhile, and then he snuggled under the covers and was soon asleep again. + For a boy who has been walking all day seldom stays awake from worry. + </p> + <p> + But when he awoke in the morning, it was to realise the fact that he must + get some money this very day or go to the police station. The few cents he + had remaining were only enough to buy some coffee and bread for breakfast, + and the poor lad didn’t know where his next meal would come from. As he + went out, the clerk in the filthy office of the lodging-house told him + that he needn’t come back any more. + </p> + <p> + “Why did you tell him that?” asked the fat man with a sly face. + </p> + <p> + “Because I went through his clothes last night when he was asleep, and he + had only six cents in his pocket. We don’t want no starvin’ brats around + here, to bring the Gerry Society down upon us.” + </p> + <p> + It was well that Archie didn’t know his pockets had been searched while he + was asleep, or his faith in human nature would have been more shaken than + ever before. He had not suspected that the men in this lodging-house might + be dishonest. + </p> + <p> + “They are poor,” he said to himself when he saw them first, “but they may + be good men for all that.” + </p> + <p> + After a slender meal, Archie found a library where he looked over the + advertising columns of the morning papers, trying to find some position + open which he thought he might fill. There were several advertisements + calling for office boys, and all these he made note of, and then as he + looked down the page he noticed that a boy was wanted in a restaurant to + wash dishes. He decided that if he didn’t succeed in getting a place as + office boy, he might get the restaurant place. He knew that in a + restaurant he would be likely at least to get enough to eat. + </p> + <p> + For two hours he called at addresses of men who wanted office boys, but at + every place he was turned away. “We have already hired one,” some of them + said, and others told him that they never took any boys in the office who + were living away from home. Some asked him for recommendations, and when + he had none, they looked at him and told him “good morning.” It was all + terribly discouraging, and with every minute Archie was wishing more and + more that he were back home again. Somehow the city seemed different now + from what it had been when Uncle Henry was with him. Everything was less + bright, and the things he had been delighted with before were less + interesting now. + </p> + <p> + Finally, he entered a large, handsome suite of rooms, in one of the great + sky-scrapers, and was shown into a very elegant private office. There he + found an old gentleman seated in a great easy chair, looking over papers, + and keeping one eye upon a buzzing instrument at his side which seemed to + be spitting out long strips of paper, like a magician in a side-show. The + man looked up as he entered, and cleared his throat. “Ahem,” he said, “you + look as if you were from the country. I wonder, now, if you have came to + the city to seek your fortune.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was embarrassed. “Yes, sir, I suppose you might put it that way,” + he replied. + </p> + <p> + “Well,” continued the old gentleman, “my advice to you is to go back where + you came from as quickly as you can. Not one boy in a thousand will gain + either fame or fortune in New York, and you stand a wonderful chance of + sinking lower every year. And even if you do succeed, you will miss many + beautiful things in your life which may come to you in the country. You + can have a pleasant home there, and live an easy, natural life, while here + it will be years before you can expect to accomplish much, and you will + spend your life in a nervous strain. Think well, young man, before + choosing the great city as your sphere of usefulness.” + </p> + <p> + “I’ve made up my mind, sir,” said Archie. “I have quite decided to remain + in the city.” + </p> + <p> + “Very well,” said the old gentleman, “I hope you may never regret it. But + we have already hired an office boy. Good morning.” + </p> + <p> + Archie walked out, more discouraged than ever. Perhaps, after all, a + country life was not to be so much despised. This man ought to know what + he was talking about. But once outside, in the Broadway crowd, Archie + forgot everything about the country, and was lost in the delight of being + one of four million. + </p> + <p> + He now decided to accept the place in the restaurant, if it were not + taken, and, fortunately for him, it was not. So he rolled up his sleeves, + and began to wash dishes as if he had done nothing else in all his life + before. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0009" id="link2HCH0009"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IX. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + IN THE STREET AGAIN—THE POLICE STATION—VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, + AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR. +</pre> + <p> + ALL day long Archie washed dishes, and before night came he decided that + he had never before had such discouraging work. The restaurant was a + popular one, and there were very many dishes to be washed, to say nothing + of the pots and pans which were always dirty. Archie no sooner finished + one sink full of dishes than another large pile was waiting to be put + through the same operation, and there was no time at all for looking about + him. There was hardly time for eating, even, and at noon he was only able + to snatch a few mouthfuls. The work was not interesting, and it was a new + sort of labour to Archie, so that altogether he did not get on as well as + he might have wished. The cook was constantly nagging him, and telling him + to hurry up, and the poor lad tried his best to please him. But somehow + everything went wrong, and he was hardly surprised when the proprietor + came in at six o’clock with a new man for the place. “Come around in the + morning,” he said to Archie, “and I’ll pay your day’s wages.” + </p> + <p> + So the boy was in the street once more, with no money, and no place to + sleep. He wasn’t hungry, that was one thing, for he had been allowed to + eat a good meal before leaving the restaurant. But where was he to sleep, + and what was he to do on the morrow, when he would surely be hungry? His + experience at looking for work had not been encouraging, and he began to + have serious doubts as to whether he would ever get a place. Certainly he + would starve if he waited around New York long without anything to do. + </p> + <p> + It was quite dark at seven o’clock, and Archie walked over to the + brilliantly lighted street which ran north and south through the city. He + had never failed to find something interesting to look at there, and he + felt now that he would like to see the bright side of city life, even if + he couldn’t enjoy it himself. So all the evening he walked up and down the + street, watching the well-dressed crowds hurrying into the theatres and + the other almost innumerable places of amusement. He stared in + open-mouthed amazement at some of the costumes of the women he saw + alighting from carriages. Never before had he seen anything half so + beautiful, and if any one had told him that there were such dresses he + would have told them he didn’t believe it. Some of them, he thought, must + cost hundreds of dollars, and the jewels worn with them many hundreds + more. How interesting, how new, it all was to him! Once he thought of the + little home in the village, and at first wished that his mother might be + there to enjoy the sights with him. “But I wouldn’t want her to see me,” + he thought, “not while I am so miserable, and feeling so discouraged.” For + Archie was beginning to wonder if he hadn’t made a mistake in leaving + home, whether he had not been overconfident and hot-headed. But he decided + to try it a few days more, that is, if he could manage to live for that + length of time in the city. + </p> + <p> + At twelve o’clock he was walking up and down the street, which was still + bright with millions of lights, though the crowds had gone home from the + theatres, and the restaurants were beginning to be less popular. He was + still wondering how he was going to find a place to sleep, when he was + accosted by a policeman, and taken into a doorway. “I’ve been watching + you,” said the officer, “and I want to know why you are walking up and + down the street at this time of night.” + </p> + <p> + Archie could have cried from fright, but he remembered that he was under + suspicion, so decided to tell the policeman his whole story, and perhaps + he could help him out in some way. So he described his experiences during + the day, and was surprised at the interest shown by the officer in the + recital. When he had finished he was told that he would be taken to the + police station. “You needn’t be afraid, my lad,” said the policeman. “I’ll + see that the Gerry Society doesn’t get you and send you home, that is, if + you think you want to try it here a few days longer. You can sleep at the + station to-night, and the next morning you can try it again.” So to the + station they went, and Archie was, naturally, a little frightened when he + saw, for the first time, the cells, and the terribly severe appearance of + all his surroundings. But he was given a good bed in which to sleep, and + he passed a delightful night, dreaming of the wonderful adventures which + befell him in the city. + </p> + <p> + He was not awakened until eight o’clock, and then he found the good + policeman waiting to take him out to breakfast, He expressed surprise that + he should be so kind to him. + </p> + <p> + “I always thought that officers were cross and unpleasant,” he said, “but + you’re not that kind, anyhow.” + </p> + <p> + “Well,” laughed the officer, “we have to be cross very often, though we’re + sometimes sorry to be so. But I’ve taken a fancy to you, my lad. I like to + see a boy who does things. When a boy of seventeen is willing to come to + New York alone, and make his own way, without friends or influence of any + kind, it shows a proper spirit, and he ought to succeed. I know you’ll get + along if you only persevere. I’d advise you to keep on trying.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, I’m going to, now,” said Archie. “I was very homesick and discouraged + last night, but since I’ve met you I seem to have received a new impetus, + and I’m ready to make a new beginning.” + </p> + <p> + So Archie and the policeman parted friends. + </p> + <p> + “Come around to the station to-night if you want a bed, and you shall be + cared for,” said the officer, as he turned around the corner into the busy + street, where he was lost in the crowd. + </p> + <p> + Archie walked down the street, hardly knowing what to do first. He didn’t + feel like answering any more advertisements in the newspapers, and he + decided to go into a few stores and ask for work. He was about to do this + when he saw before him the magnificent building of the New York + Enterprise. It was a truly beautiful structure, rising fifteen stories + above the ground, and surmounted with an artistic tower, which could be + seen from almost any part of the city. The home of the city’s greatest + daily, it looked as if it were always welcoming strangers to the + metropolis, and Archie felt an irresistible impulse to enter. Everything + connected with a newspaper had for him the greatest fascination, and he + knew he would enjoy seeing through this wonderful building, which was + almost wholly occupied by the departments of the Enterprise. So he entered + the door, and passed from one floor to another, finally arriving at the + highest floor of all, where were located the editorial rooms of the + Evening Enterprise. All at once a new plan entered Archie’s fertile brain. + Why shouldn’t he be able to get something to do on a newspaper? It had + always been his greatest ambition to become a reporter, and here, although + he didn’t think the editor would take him in that capacity, he thought he + might get some sort of work in which he could work himself up. + </p> + <p> + There upon the door were the magic words: “Editor of the Evening + enterprise. No Admittance.” Archie opened the door and entered. He knew it + would be useless to send in his name. It was best to see the editor at + once, and without ceremony. He was seated before a large desk, which was + littered with papers of every description, and he was a very pleasant + person in appearance. Archie stood hesitating near the door, and remained + there a minute or two before the editor looked up. + </p> + <p> + “Well, my boy, what is it?” + </p> + <p> + Archie took courage. + </p> + <p> + “I—I want to be a reporter, sir, and I thought it would do no harm + to ask you for such a position, anyhow.” + </p> + <p> + The distinguished journalist wheeled about in his chair. + </p> + <p> + “What!” he exclaimed, “you want to be a reporter. Why, my dear boy, how + old are you?” + </p> + <p> + “I’ll be eighteen my next birthday,” said Archie, “and, sir, I’ve had some + experiences in the last two weeks, which make me feel as if I were about + five years older than I really am. I’ve been through some very trying + experiences, sir.” + </p> + <p> + The editor was interested at once. “Tell me what your experiences have + been,” he said, and Archie began, and told him his whole story; how he had + left home to win fame and fortune, and how he had worked on the farm for a + week with Farmer Tinch; how he had been robbed the night he stayed with + the tramps in the ancient ruins, and how he had finally reached the city. + Then he told him of the night in the lodging-house, of his dish-washing + experience in the restaurant, and how he had been taken from the street by + a policeman the night before, and allowed to sleep in the station-house. + When he had finished the editor had a broad grin upon his face. + </p> + <p> + “By Jove!” he exclaimed, “this is certainly rich stuff. There’s a good + story in it, I’ll be bound.” + </p> + <p> + Then, speaking to Archie, he said: + </p> + <p> + “Just wait here a minute, my boy, and I’ll see if we can’t put some money + in your way.” + </p> + <p> + He pressed a button at the side of his desk, and when a boy appeared, he + told him to bring “Mr. Jones, please, or one of the other reporters. And + tell Jones to bring an artist with him.” + </p> + <p> + The reporter and the artist soon stood before the editor, who told them, + with great glee, that he had a leading feature for the next evening + edition of the Enterprise. “Just talk to this boy, Jones, and see if you + can’t make two good columns on the front page and two for the inside from + his story. I think it’s great, myself. And you Cash,” he said, turning to + the artist, “you make a good sketch of the boy.” + </p> + <p> + Archie could hardly believe his eyes and ears. Just to think that he was + being interviewed, and that his picture was to be in the paper. It seemed + almost too good to be true. + </p> + <p> + When the reporter had finished with him, he was taken down-stairs to the + cashier’s office and given thirty dollars in bills. “This will pay you for + the interview,” said the editor, “and give you enough to fix up with. Now, + to-morrow, you come in again, and I think I can give you steady + employment.” + </p> + <p> + Oh, how happy Archie was! He went out into the street, and seemed to + fairly walk on air. Then he heard the newsboys crying, “Extra paper, read + about the Enterprise’s Boy Reporter.” And when Archie saw the paper, there + on the front page was his picture, together with the story of his + “startling adventures.” + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0010" id="link2HCH0010"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER X. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN—FEATURED AS “THE BOY REPORTER.” + </pre> + <p> + ARCHIE often speaks of the day when he visited the newspaper office for + the first time as the happiest day in all his life. The change from + despair and homesickness to the joy of being appreciated by some one was + so rapid that it made his head fairly swim with the exhilaration of + success. With thirty dollars in his pocket, and the knowledge that he + would have steady employment of the kind he desired on the morrow, he + walked up the Bowery feeling like a prince. He entered the lodging-house + where he had left his bundle of clothing, and so surprised the clerk by + his new appearance that he was invited to remain there for another night. + The shrewd man guessed that some good fortune must have befallen Archie, + or he wouldn’t be so happy. But the one night of misery which he had spent + in the squalid hotel was enough for Archie, and he walked hastily up-town + with his bundle, keeping a sharp lookout for a pleasant place where he + might get a room. In his previous wanderings he had seen several nice + houses with rooms to rent, but now that he wanted a room he found it + difficult to find any of these neighbourhoods. He was anxious to get + settled as quickly as possible, for he wanted to get everything done + to-day, so that to-morrow he could have time to do anything required of + him by the editor of the Enterprise. He must get a new suit of clothes, he + must get his hair cut, and last, but not least, he must write home to + mother and tell her of his great good fortune. + </p> + <p> + Finally, in his wanderings, Archie came to a beautiful square which was + surrounded on every side by business houses and tenements. But the square + itself and the houses on it were very quaint and very handsome, so that it + seemed to be a very oasis in the desert. The green trees, just a little + tinged with the brown and gold of autumn, reminded Archie of the front + yard at home, and he decided to get a room in one of the houses here if he + could possibly do so. + </p> + <p> + It so happened that there was a hall bedroom empty in one of the + best-looking places, and Archie at once engaged it. The price was more + reasonable than he had hoped for, even, and this made him happy, for as + yet he had no idea how much his earnings would be, and he was anxious to + be able to save something to send home, if he possibly could. The room was + nicely furnished, and looked out upon the fountain, with the green trees, + so that it was highly satisfactory in every respect. It didn’t take Archie + long to undo his bundle, and it was a pitiful display that greeted him + when it was opened. The little comb and brush, a piece of soap, a + Testament given him last Christmas by the teacher at Sunday school, a suit + of underwear, and a couple of handkerchiefs. The whole lot of things + hardly filled a corner in one of the bureau drawers, and Archie realised + that he must buy a great many things within a week or two. + </p> + <p> + But before going out to do any shopping, he sat down and wrote a long + letter home, describing his success of the morning, and telling his mother + of the editor’s promise to give him regular employment. He enclosed a copy + of the paper with his picture and the story of his adventures, and it made + him very happy to think of his mother’s feelings when she read it all. + Then, when he had finished, he went out to a post-office, and bought a + money-order for ten dollars, which he also enclosed. “I know I can spare + it,” he said to himself, “and it will gratify her so much.” Then, when the + letter with its contents was safely mailed, he bought himself a new suit + of clothing, and renovated himself in many ways, so that when he returned + to his room in the square it was nearly dark, and he looked a different + boy entirely. + </p> + <p> + Before going to bed, he determined to see his policeman friend, and tell + him of his good fortune. “He is probably expecting me to sleep in the + station,” Archie thought, “and it will be a great surprise to him.” But + when he met the good man, he found that he had already heard of his + success. + </p> + <p> + “I bought the Enterprise, and could hardly believe my eyes,” said he, “but + I always thought you would find some one to appreciate your pluck. I’m + mighty glad for you, my lad, and you must always let me know how you are + getting along.” This Archie promised to do, and returned to his lodging to + sleep. + </p> + <p> + The next morning he was on hand at the Enterprise office before the editor + himself was down. The place was quite as fascinating as it had been on the + preceding day, and he found something new to look at every minute. The + reporters at their desks, several of whom introduced themselves and + congratulated Archie on his perseverance, were a source of great interest + to him, and the copy-boys, running here and there with special copy for + the first edition, gave an air of hustling activity to the place that was + very attractive to this new reporter. + </p> + <p> + When the editor came he had already thought of something for Archie to do. + “Now you’ve been introduced to the public,” he said, “and we want to + feature you for a few days. Every one will be interested in knowing what + you are doing, and what is going to become of you. You must write us an + article for the paper to-day, telling about your experiences since + yesterday, about getting a new suit, and about hunting for a room. And you + can tell about your policeman friend, too.” + </p> + <p> + This was surprising. Archie couldn’t imagine why any one should be + interested in knowing about his daily life, but he sat down and succeeded + in writing a very interesting two columns about it. He was much surprised + that he should be able to write so easily and so well. Of course he knew + that composition and rhetoric had been his two strongest studies at + school, but he had never realised before that he had any great talent for + writing. When he had finished this article, the editor looked it over, and + said, “That’s great. You’re all right, my boy. We’ll make a great + journalist of you yet,” and of course this made Archie very happy. “Wait + until this story is set up,” said Mr. Jennings, the editor, “and I’ll see + what you can do in the way of correcting proofs.” + </p> + <p> + When the proofs came, in a very short time, he hardly knew what to do with + them. But in reading them he discovered several mistakes, which he lost no + time in correcting, and Mr. Jennings said that he had done very well + indeed. “Now you can spend the day in doing what you please. I would + suggest that you go about New York and have as many strange experiences as + possible, so that to-morrow you can write them up for us. And it will pay + you, by the way, to go out to Coney Island, which is a different place + from any you have seen before. You are sure to see some unusual things, + and in the morning you can bring me in two columns about it.” + </p> + <p> + Before leaving, Archie was asked if he needed any money. “You mustn’t + hesitate to ask for it, because you can have it as well to-day as on + Saturday.” But as he had left several dollars of the thirty he had + received the day before, Archie didn’t draw any more, and he thought it + most remarkable that the editor should have so much money to pay out. + </p> + <p> + He had no difficulty in getting a trolley-car to Coney Island, and, after + an hour’s riding through Brooklyn streets, he found himself in the most + unique and most delightful place imaginable, It was a queer-looking town, + with great wheels in the air, high towers, with elevators and innumerable + merry-go-rounds, and other sources of amusement. The noise was something + terrific. Hand-organs, street-pianos, and German bands were all playing at + the same time, while people hurried about from one place to another, + enjoying the hundreds of games and riding the various scenic railways and + carrousels. Archie stood mute with delight at it all, but before five + minutes had passed he had shot the chutes, and had ridden over a + steeplechase which took him through dark caverns, where dragons glared at + him and where electrical sparks were constantly flying through the air. It + was all so new, so different from anything he had seen before, that he was + simply lost in admiration. He was standing near a theatre, when a short, + dark man touched him on the arm, and said, “Come this way, young man, and + I’ll teach you the best game of all.” + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0011" id="link2HCH0011"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND—RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE was at first too much surprised to answer the man at all, but in a + few moments he remembered that he was now a reporter, and that it was his + duty to see all that he could, and have all the new experiences possible. + So he decided to follow the man, and find out what “the best thing of all” + in Coney Island was like. He was taken through several narrow alleyways, + and finally he found himself in front of a tumble-down structure, built + out directly over the water. It was very modest in appearance, and + everything seemed quiet about the place. The shades were carefully drawn, + and the dark man had to knock three times before the door was opened and + they were permitted to enter. Inside, Archie found himself in a handsomely + furnished apartment which differed greatly in appearance from the exterior + of the building. There was a rich velvet carpet, mahogany furniture, and a + great many small tables standing about the room. The place was filled with + men, mostly well-dressed, who were playing various games. Some were + dealing cards, others were twirling wheels with numbers on them, and some + were playing games with chips. It didn’t take Archie long to realise that + he had been steered into a gambling den of the worst kind, and he was + immediately on the alert for future developments. He watched every + movement of his new friend, and noticed that he found it necessary to + speak to several of those present in a low undertone. This didn’t worry + Archie, because he knew that he was in no danger except of losing money, + and he felt that he could afford to lose some money, since he was sure to + earn more by writing about the experience for the newspaper. + </p> + <p> + So he carefully observed all that was going on, making mental notes of the + peculiarities of the place and the people. When at last the dark man came + up and inquired if he wouldn’t like a chance to earn some money easily, he + very readily answered yes, and the man was overjoyed to find so willing a + victim. Then, of course, Archie was introduced to the mysteries of the + famous roulette wheel, of which he had read so much. Archie was interested + in everything, and didn’t mind losing four dollars in learning so much + that was new. He succeeded in getting away when he had lost this sum, + though the man assured him that he couldn’t help winning back all he had + lost, and much more, too, if he would but remain awhile longer. Archie was + firm, however, and passed out into the narrow alleyways again, feeling + that he had learned a great deal through a very small expenditure of + money. He gradually found his way back into the crowded Surf Avenue, where + there were hundreds of things, evidently, which he had not yet seen. The + crowds, too, seemed greater even than before, and there seemed to be + thousands of people arriving every hour from New York and Brooklyn, over + the various street-car and railway lines, and by the excursion boats + landing at the great iron pier. The noise was still deafening, and every + one seemed to be having a splendid time in every way. “Surely,” said + Archie to himself, “no one can feel blue or despondent in such a place as + this, where every one is full of fun, and apparently determined to have a + good time while here.” And he felt that he would like to remain longer, + but he knew he should go back again to the city, so that he might see the + editor, and tell him something about what he had seen and done. + </p> + <p> + So again he rode over the great Brooklyn bridge, and stopped on the other + side at the handsome building of the Enterprise. It made Archie very happy + to feel that he was now a reporter on such a great paper, and he found it + hard to realise that so much good fortune had come to him in such a short + time. He met reporters in the various hallways, and all of them spoke to + him pleasantly, so that he began to feel that he had never been thrown + with such pleasant men before. + </p> + <p> + He had no difficulty in seeing the editor this time, and found him a ready + listener to the story of his Coney Island experiences. He insisted on + Archie’s describing all the men he had seen in the gambling den, and then + asked him if he could identify them, if necessary, and also if he would be + able to find the place again. Archie gave good descriptions of most of the + men, and said that he could take any one to the place at any time. The + editor lost himself in thought for a few minutes, and at the end of that + time he rang for a copy-boy. “Ring for a messenger boy,” he said, “and + when he arrives come for a note which I want him to take to Mr. Pultzer’s + house.” Archie stared with amazement at Mr. Jennings, and waited for + further information. He wondered what was going to be done. He knew that + Mr. Pultzer owned the newspaper, and he knew that it must be something + important that Mr. Jennings wanted to write him about. He wasn’t long left + in the dark, and he felt very proud that Mr. Jennings should have + confidence enough in him to tell him about his plans. “I think you have + discovered something which will prove very important to the paper and the + public,” he said to Archie. “We have suspected for a long time that + gambling dens have been flourishing in Coney Island, but up to now we have + not been able to locate any of them. Now that you have found one, we hope + to arouse public opinion to the danger there is in such places, and we + hope to inspire a reform movement which will be strong enough to wipe them + out entirely. I will hear from Mr. Pultzer in a short time, and then I + want you to go down to the Island with some plain-clothes detectives and + two other reporters. And I don’t mind telling you now that there will be a + good sum in it for you if you succeed in arresting any of the leaders of + this gang. You can be excused for an hour now, if there’s anything you + want to do.” + </p> + <p> + Full of enthusiasm over the coming adventure and his part in it, Archie + hurried out to a quick-lunch counter and bought himself a light meal, for + he feared that he would have to remain at Coney Island through the + evening. Then, when he had finished, he returned to the newspaper office, + where he spent some time in getting acquainted with some of the reporters + who were working on the Morning Enterprise. He found them all very + pleasant to meet, and he learned a great many helpful things from their + conversation. The older men were able to give him many pointers concerning + things that he should, and should not, do. While he was in the office of + the Morning Enterprise Mr. Jennings came in, and, taking him along into + the private room of the managing editor, introduced him to Mr. Van + Bunting, who was the editorial head of the morning edition. Then Mr. + Jennings told of the new scheme, and Mr. Van Bunting entered into it so + thoroughly that before an hour three detectives, two reporters, and Archie + were on their way to the Island. + </p> + <p> + Once arrived in the resort, which was as noisy and bright as in the + afternoon, they all made a bee-line for the gambling den, headed by + Archie, who surprised the others with his certainty and confidence as to + which was the right direction. In a very few minutes they all stood in + front of the dilapidated structure built out over tide-water, and Archie + heard one of the detectives say that the place looked “mighty suspicious + like.” He gave three knocks just as the dark man had done in the + afternoon, and in a few minutes the door was cautiously opened and a head + made its appearance. The detectives lost no time in pushing their way in, + amid great confusion and cries of fear, and it seemed only a few seconds + until all the inmates were huddled in a corner, covered with pistols, and + wailing in fear, when they weren’t cursing through anger. Then they were + all arrested and taken to the police station, where they were all refused + bail, and placed in cells overnight. Then the reporters returned to the + office of the Enterprise, where Archie was told by Mr. Van Bunting to + write the story of his experience for the morning paper. This was his + first work for the morning edition, and he took great pains to make his + descriptions as complete as possible, and the details as accurate as he + knew how to make them. And his hard work was rewarded by words of praise + from the managing editor when he turned the copy in for editing. + </p> + <p> + Tired from his hard day’s work, Archie then went up-town to the quiet + square in which he had his home, and he was glad to get to bed. He had + been nervous and excited all day, and found it difficult to sleep, but + finally the tired eyelids lay quietly over the tired eyes, and Archie was + dreaming of the cool and pleasant arbour of grapes at home, and of how the + Hut Club was holding a special meeting there to devise ways and means of + welcoming home their distinguished fellow member, Mr. Archie Dunn, who had + achieved such great success in the city. + </p> + <p> + Notwithstanding his tired feeling, Archie was up early the next morning, + and out at the corner to buy an Enterprise. He hastily turned the pages, + trying to find the story of his Coney Island adventures, but he looked in + vain. It wasn’t visible anywhere. He was about to think that it had not + been thought worth while printing when he noticed on the front page, in + large letters, “The Boy Reporter’s Great Discovery,” and then followed the + complete account, just as he had written it. This was the best thing yet. + Just to think that his story had been considered important enough to print + upon the front page! He could hardly believe it. Surely he had made great + strides, and Archie began to realise that it is not experience that is + most needed in journalism, but something to write about. “I have simply + been fortunate in finding some interesting things,” he said, to himself, + and then, after a light breakfast in a quaint Italian restaurant around + the corner, he hurried down-town to the office of the newspaper. + </p> + <p> + Archie was beginning to feel, by now, that he had worked for a long time + upon the paper, and as he had become acquainted with almost every one + connected with it, this wasn’t a strange feeling for him to have. And it + was evident, too, that the editors intended to keep him busy for some time + to come, and Archie realised that he was in newspaper work to stay, for a + time, at least. And he was overjoyed at the prospect, for he found the + whole business as fascinating and as interesting as he had expected it + would be. + </p> + <p> + Mr. Jennings, of the evening edition, was at the office when Archie + arrived, and sent for him to come in. “Here is fifty dollars,” he said, + “for your work of yesterday, and you will have more coming to you if these + men are convicted. I want to congratulate you on what you have done so + far. Come in this afternoon, and I think Mr. Van Bunting will have a new + plan for you.” + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0012" id="link2HCH0012"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER—THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT + TO THE PHILIPPINES—LEAVING NEW YORK—IN CHICAGO. +</pre> + <p> + AT three o’clock in the afternoon Archie was seated in Mr. Van Bunting’s + office, together with Mr. Jennings and several of the chief members of the + editorial staffs of both editions of the paper. The editors had spread out + before them, on the large table, several maps, and most of them were + busily engaged in making notes on little paper pads. All the time, + however, an excited conversation was being carried on, for some editors + wanted Archie to proceed to the Philippines one way, and some thought that + the better plan would be for him to go by some other route. But the + important fact with Archie was that he was really going to be sent to the + Philippines as a war correspondent, and that he was going to start very + shortly. He had called on Mr. Van Bunting early in the afternoon, and had + then learned for the first time what the new plan was to be. When the + managing editor asked him how he would like to go to the Philippines, + Archie could scarcely reply, so delighted was he with the brilliant + prospect before him. He managed to stammer out a few words, though, in + spite of his surprise. “I always thought war correspondents were selected + from the most experienced men in journalism,” he said, but Mr. Van Bunting + only laughed. “That’s what we have already done, my boy,” he said, “and so + far none of our distinguished correspondents have sent us a thing worth + printing that we didn’t already know. You see they can’t send any more to + us in the way of news than we can get from the War Department in + Washington, and most of these men are too old fogy to send us anything out + of the ordinary line of war correspondence. Now, what we want is for you + to go over there and have some adventures, and write us something which + will be different from what we have had before from the Philippines. We + are sending you, because you have had no experience at such work, and will + be sure to send us something unusual, and that is what we want. If you can + only do as well in the tropics as you have done here in New York, we shall + be more than satisfied with your work. I am sorry that I won’t have time + to give you very complete instructions, but perhaps it will be as well. + And now some of the men are waiting outside to come in and talk this + matter over, so we’ll have them in now.” + </p> + <p> + And Archie found himself in the midst of an editorial conference, during + which many things were discussed. The meeting lasted more than two hours, + and finally it was decided that Archie should travel from New York to San + Francisco, and go from there to Manila on the army transport which was to + sail on the twenty-fifth of the month. This meant that he would have to + leave the city in two days’ time, and Archie announced himself as quite + willing to do this, as he had few preparations to make. The editors gave + him many instructions about how he was to address his correspondence, and + how he should proceed in the event of finding it necessary to send + despatches by cable. And at the end of the conference he felt that he knew + all that he would need to know, so that he could start off without fear of + not being able to fulfil his mission. As far as Archie could understand + it, his chief instructions as to duty were to the effect that he must have + as many experiences as possible of as many different kinds, and that he + must write about them in a perfectly natural way, just as if he were + writing a letter to the folks at home. And he thought, of course, that + this would be very easy to do. + </p> + <p> + Mr. Van Bunting gave him a letter of credit for six hundred dollars, which + amount, he said, would probably be sufficient to pay his expenses while he + was in the Philippines, and he also gave him a cheque for three hundred + dollars, which was intended to pay the expense of getting to Manila. “Of + course,” said Mr. Van Bunting, “you can spend as much or as little of this + as you please, and if you need more, and we find that the venture is + paying us, why, we will send it on demand.” Archie was so overcome with + the knowledge that he possessed nine hundred dollars, that he could hardly + thank the editor enough, and he made up his mind that he would spend as + little as possible of the sum, and bring back part of it to Mr. Van + Bunting upon his return. He couldn’t imagine how it would be possible for + him to spend so much money, and he felt that, after some of his + experiences since he left home, he ought to be able to economise in many + ways where other reporters wouldn’t know how to save at all. + </p> + <p> + When the two days were up Archie had made all his preparation, and was + ready to leave New York for Manila. He had sent a long letter home to his + mother, telling her of his great good fortune, and enclosing a cheque for + a hundred dollars, which she was to spend while he was gone. He told her + that he would send her more money from time to time, and felt very proud + as he mailed the letter. He told her, too, that if at any time she didn’t + hear from him on time, she could write to Mr. Van Bunting, and he would + let her know of his whereabouts. This was something which Mr. Van Bunting + had very thoughtfully advised him to do. “Your mother is sure to worry if + the mails are overdue,” he had said, “and if she writes to me, I will + always be able to tell her of your whereabouts, for we can hear of you + through our other correspondents, if not from your own despatches.” So + Archie felt that his mother shouldn’t worry, since he was such a fortunate + boy in so many ways. + </p> + <p> + The night before leaving he took a long farewell walk up Broadway. + Everything was bright with light, and there was, as usual, a great crowd + of pleasure-seekers on the sidewalks. It was all as fascinating as ever to + Archie, and he felt sorry that he was to leave it so soon. New York had + begun to grow on him, as it grows on any one living there for any length + of time, who is in a position to appreciate the city’s attractions. He + felt that he would almost rather be on Broadway than in the Philippines, + but of course he forgot this feeling when he remembered the confidence + which Mr. Van Bunting had reposed in him by sending him upon such an + important mission. So, after he had passed all the bright theatres and + restaurants, he turned down a quiet side street and returned to his + lodging, so that he might have a good night’s rest before starting on his + long journey. + </p> + <p> + At seven in the morning he was up again, and at nine o’clock he was + bidding farewell to his many friends in the editorial rooms of the Evening + Enterprise. Every one congratulated him upon his great good luck in + getting such a chance to distinguish himself, and when they had done + telling him that he had a great future before him, Archie felt happier + than ever before in all his life. + </p> + <p> + The train left the Grand Central Station at one o’clock, and Mr. Jennings + went with him to the station to see him well started upon the journey. + “You may be sure we are all much interested in you, Archie,” he said, as + the train was leaving, “and we shall look forward anxiously to your safe + return.” These words made Archie very glad, for it cheered him to know + that at least one of the editors liked him for himself as well as for what + he could do. + </p> + <p> + The Southwestern Limited seemed to fairly fly along the banks of the + beautiful Hudson, and everything was so delightful that Archie could + scarcely believe that only a week or two before he had been walking along + country roads, anxious to reach New York, that he might become an office + boy. Every thing in this train was as perfect as modern ingenuity could + make it, and there was no lack of interesting things to be examined, when + Archie tired of the landscape. Then, when the train had been two hours out + of New York, he discovered that the famous president of this great railway + system was aboard, and, mustering up his courage, he determined to + introduce himself. He had long been anxious to see this famous + after-dinner orator and statesman, and here was a chance which might not + come soon again. So he went back to the drawing-room, and found the great + man to be quite as pleasant as he was interesting, and Archie was asked to + seat himself and tell something about his experiences since leaving home. + Everything he said was listened to with great interest, and this + distinguished wit seemed to find many of the adventures very funny indeed. + “You have certainly had some wonderful experiences,” he said, when Archie + had finished, “and I can appreciate your anxiety to leave school. I had + that desire myself when I was a boy of about fifteen, but my father + succeeded in making me change my opinion on the subject, and without much + argument, unless you can call an ox-team and a stony pasture an argument. + I had been asking to stay at home from school for a long time. I said that + I was too old to be sitting there with a lot of girls and some younger + boys, and that I wanted to work. Finally, my father said that I could stay + at home if I cared to, and that he would let me work on the farm for a + time. I was overjoyed, of course, at the prospect of staying out of + school. + </p> + <p> + “The next morning I was awakened at four o’clock, and had to swallow my + breakfast in a hurry, because I was late, my father said. Then he took me + out to the barn and ordered me to hitch up the ox-team, and when this was + done he took me out to a pasture lot and told me to pick up all the + boulders there. Well, I picked up boulders all day long, and by evening my + back and arms were so sore I could hardly move them. I was too tired to + eat supper, and was soon asleep in bed. When my father awoke me at four + the next morning, I told him to let me alone and that I was going back to + school. After that I was content to stay in school, and said nothing more + about leaving until I had finished the course and was ready to go to + college.” + </p> + <p> + And Archie thought it very queer that such a famous man should have had + such experiences when a boy. He remained in the drawing-room for more than + an hour, and when he left he felt perfectly sure that he had been talking + with the most charming man in the world. + </p> + <p> + The train sped on and on, and when daylight came the next morning they + were passing through Northern Ohio. Early in the afternoon they reached a + great smoky metropolis, spread out for miles over the plains. Archie knew + that this must be Chicago, and he decided, as this was Saturday, and the + steamer wouldn’t leave San Francisco until the next Friday, that he would + have time to remain here over Sunday. So he left the train at the station + in Pacific Avenue, and, Finding a hotel near the station, he started out + to see something of the city famous for its dirt and for the World’s Fair, + two widely different things. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0013" id="link2HCH0013"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + SAN FRANCISCO—THE TRANSPORT GONE—WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY + PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER—THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE found Chicago to be so widely different from New York that + everything he saw was new and interesting to him. In the afternoon he + managed to see something of the congested business section of the city, + the tall office buildings, the great stores, and the famous Board of + Trade. It was all very fine, he thought, but still it wasn’t nearly so + fascinating to him as New York had been on the first day he visited it. + “Chicago seems so very much like some great town,” he explained to the + hotel clerk in the evening. “I feel as if I were not in a great city at + all, because there are not the evidences of a large and wealthy population + that we have everywhere in New York.” Archie spoke of New York as if he + had lived there always, and found much to criticise in Chicago. But toward + evening he went up to Lincoln Park and the beautiful North Shore, and he + felt that there was nothing more beautiful in New York than this + magnificent park, and this handsome Lake Shore Drive, with its great + houses whose lawns reached down almost to the lake itself. On the South + Side of the city, too, he found some handsome streets and residences, but + there was always that feeling of being in some rapidly growing town. It + wasn’t hard for Archie to realise that there were older houses in his + native town than could be found anywhere in the great city of Chicago. + </p> + <p> + The greatest difference between Chicago and New York was to be noticed in + the evening. Instead of the brilliantly lighted thoroughfares of upper + Broadway and Twenty-third and Thirty-fourth Streets, he found but one + street in Chicago which was at all illuminated, and the illuminations + there were chiefly signs in front of dime museums. The streets, too, were + not so crowded, and Archie almost longed that he could be back on + Broadway, if only for a little while. + </p> + <p> + On Sunday he found Chicago to be a more noisy city than he had ever been + in before on that day, and he found that the people made good use of their + one weekly holiday. All places of amusement were open, and everything was + running in “full blast.” + </p> + <p> + The parks seemed to be very popular, indeed, and there were numerous water + excursions upon Lake Michigan, to Milwaukee, St. Joe, and various other + neighbouring cities. The street-cars were crowded all day long, many of + them taking people to a Sunday game of baseball at the Athletic Park. All + of this was very interesting and very new to Archie, but it didn’t make + him anxious to remain in Chicago any longer than Monday morning, so on + that day he took the limited train for the Pacific Coast, for he had + determined not to stop off again until he reached Denver. + </p> + <p> + Days of weary travel over a level, uninteresting stretch of ground + followed the departure of the train from Chicago, and had not Archie found + some interesting persons to talk with he would have been very weary long + before reaching Denver. As it was, he managed to pass the time very + pleasantly until the train entered Colorado, and after that he found much + that was new to look at until he reached Denver. Here he remained for half + a day, just long enough to see something of the city and a little of the + neighbouring country. Then, taking a train for San Francisco, he reached + that city on Thursday afternoon, and immediately began to make + arrangements for sailing. He found, to his great disappointment, that the + army transport had sailed the previous day, contrary to the expectations + of the editors, and of the War Department itself, until the arrival of + important despatches from Manila, which made it necessary to start the + transport at once with supplies of ammunition. Archie hardly knew what to + do. He had not anticipated anything like this, and could scarcely think of + any plan for a time, but, finally, he proved himself equal to the + emergency. He went to the naval agent and asked him when the transport + would be due at Honolulu, and then he ascertained that a passenger steamer + sailing for that port on Saturday would reach the destination three days + sooner than the transport, so that by taking the liner he would have three + extra days in Honolulu, and would be able to reach Manila on schedule + time, after all. He at once decided that this was the thing for him to do, + and as soon as he thought of taking the steamer it occurred to him that he + might possibly be able to work his way to Honolulu, instead of paying the + regular passenger fare, which he knew was high. So he went down to the + great docks, and, after interviewing the second steward, he approached the + chief steward himself, and asked if there wasn’t something that he could + do aboard the ship to earn his passage. The chief steward was thoughtful + for a time, and finally said, “Well, yes, I believe there is. We haven’t + any one to peel vegetables yet, and if you think you care to do that work + I guess we can fix you up all right.” Archie didn’t wait to consider + whether peeling vegetables was hard work or not. He was too glad to have a + position of any kind aboard ship to be particular about what his work was + like, so he told the steward that he was willing to take the place. “Well, + be on hand at about eight in the morning, and we’ll see that you get to + Honolulu.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was overjoyed at his good management. “I am going to save about a + hundred dollars,” he said to himself, “and I will have this money to send + home to mother.” The rest of the afternoon and the evening he spent in + going about San Francisco, and he found it to be more like New York than + any city he had yet seen. There was the same cosmopolitan crowd on the + main thoroughfares, and the same foreign districts here and there + throughout the city. He found a great deal to interest him, especially at + the Presidio, where everything connected with the army monopolised his + attention. He made friends with many of the soldiers who were waiting to + be sent to the Philippines, and hoped, on leaving, that he would meet some + of them there, but he hardly expected that he would meet some of them in + such a strange manner as it was his fate to do in Luzon. + </p> + <p> + After a good night’s rest he was on hand early at the great steamer, where + there was such a scene of bustle and confusion as he had never seen + before, not even in New York. There was a throng of men with trucks who + were loading the late freight, and there was a constant din of noisy + voices, which, combined with the shrieks of escaping steam, made it + impossible to carry on a conversation. Archie hurried aboard to find the + steward, who immediately took him into the galley and introduced him to + the cook, a large, fat Frenchman, with small, blue eyes set far back in + his head. He seemed to be a pleasant man, and Archie thought that he would + like him very much. + </p> + <p> + “Well, does ze youngster vant to vork, eh! Eef he do, I say you pare zis + potate for dinee as quick you can.” And the fellow pointed to a great bag + of potatoes and a paring-knife. “Now you sit zere in da corner,” continued + the cook, “and keep out uf my vay.” Archie found a stool and sat down, + and, having brought an apron with him, he put it on and began work. The + cook watched him closely, so that Archie soon learned to pare the potatoes + very nicely, and of course he was able to get along faster and faster as + he became more and more experienced. He managed, through great effort, to + get the bag finished in time for dinner, or luncheon, as it was called on + the bill of fare, and then he soon had to begin on other vegetables, which + were to be served at the more complete evening meal. There were more + potatoes, and some turnips and apples as well, to be prepared, and it kept + the boy busy all the afternoon, cleaning as hard as he could, and never + seeming to get done. The cook urged him always to hurry, and seemed + determined to have everything ready on time. And Archie began to realise + that he was working under a rather severe master. + </p> + <p> + He was again successful in getting the vegetables finished in time for the + evening meal, and then he had an idea that he might be allowed to rest for + awhile, but he soon realised his mistake. He was advised to begin work on + the potatoes for breakfast if he didn’t want to get up at two o’clock in + the morning and pare them, so once more he took up the knife and began to + clean and scrape. It was ten o’clock before he had finished, and he found + himself too tired to spend any time on the after-deck with the crew, but + went at once down into the small, stuffy room where he was to sleep with + some of the stewards. His back ached from bending over, and his hands were + all sore from being scraped. + </p> + <p> + Things were not very pleasant in this bedroom, but poor Archie was glad + enough to be able to lie down on the hard straw tick and go to sleep. He + slept soundly until he was awakened at four o’clock in the morning by the + second cook, who ordered him up-stairs to work. There was no time to wash, + and no place where he could wash, so the boy was obliged to go up just as + he was, much as he disliked doing so. And once up-stairs there were + various chores which were waiting for him in the galley, so that he was + kept running until breakfast was served. And then it was time to begin + paring vegetables again. This turned out to be the invariable daily + programme, and Archie became rather discouraged. Had it not been for the + thought that by doing this he was saving money to send home, he would have + been miserable indeed, but this idea kept him hopeful. He was seasick, + too, for a time, and was obliged to keep cleaning vegetables in the galley + during the whole period of his suffering. The days when he was ill in this + way were the most disagreeable ones of the voyage, and Archie often + described afterward his feelings as he sat peeling potatoes with a bucket + standing beside him. Each night he slept like a log, and each morning he + was obliged to get up at four o’clock and start work again. It was the + same thing day after day, tiresome and monotonous, so that Archie wasn’t + sorry when the beautiful island hove in sight, and they anchored in the + picturesque bay of Honolulu. + </p> + <p> + Once at Honolulu, Archie’s term of service on board the liner was over, + and he was glad, indeed, to get ashore, where he learned that the + transport had not yet arrived, but was expected in two or three days’ + time. These two or three days Archie determined to spend in sightseeing, + and he spent his time to excellent advantage in visiting every quarter of + Honolulu and seeing every side of life in the Hawaiian capital. He found + it a delightful place. There was much that was interesting to see, the + people were pleasant to meet, and the climate was perfect. He was almost + sorry when he learned that the transport had anchored in the bay! + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0014" id="link2HCH0014"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT—A STORM AT SEA—ARRIVAL IN MANILA. +</pre> + <p> + THE transport did not remain long at Honolulu, and before leaving Archie + had several things which he wanted to do. In the first place, he felt that + he ought to write the story of his experiences so far, and send it to Mr. + Van Bunting; so he did sit down and describe in detail his experiences at + cleaning vegetables on board the Pacific liner. He wasn’t sure whether + this was anything that Mr. Van Bunting would care to print, but he decided + to send it on, anyhow. He would have been surprised had he observed the + enthusiasm with which this letter was read in the Enterprise office a + month later. He would have been no longer in any doubt as to whether it + was anything worth printing had he read the Enterprise of the following + day, when the letter appeared on the second page as one of the chief + features of the paper. + </p> + <p> + Before leaving, too, Archie sent a long, cheerful letter home, saying + nothing of his being seasick on board the liner, or of his having had to + work so hard. He devoted his letter to telling of the many interesting + things he had seen, and of his bright prospects for becoming a successful + newspaper man. He wrote a shorter letter to Jack Sullivan, which was + intended to be read to all the members of the Hut Club, for Archie felt + that it was no more than right that they should know something of his + success. He found it very hard to realise, away off here in Honolulu, that + he had ever been a member of the club, and that he had ever lived in tents + behind the barn. He felt very manly now, and his boyhood seemed far away + behind him, so far away that he now felt like a man of twenty-five rather + than like a boy of eighteen. He was beginning to realise that age is not + always governed by years alone, but that experience does much to make one + old. + </p> + <p> + As soon as the transport had anchored in the bay, Archie went aboard to + present his credentials to the commanding officer. He found the general + very pleasant to meet, and a very appreciative listener as he told of his + scheme for overtaking the transport. The officer was surprised, of course, + that such a young fellow should be going to the islands as correspondent, + but the things he said were very encouraging to Archie, “I tell you what,” + the general remarked, at one time during the conversation, “I believe that + a young fellow like Dunn, here, can find out a great many more interesting + things than an older man could ever discover. You see the youngster has + ambition and energy on his side, and ambition and energy are two mighty + powerful things when they’re combined. I’d hate to buck up against ‘em + myself.” The other officers agreed with the general in this remark, and + Archie began to feel that, after all, he might not have such a hard time + finding interesting things to write about as he had expected. + </p> + <p> + The transport remained in port but one day, and in thirty hours after her + arrival Archie found himself sailing again over the blue Pacific. The + weather, for a few days, was almost perfect. A cloudless sky overhead, a + warm breeze from the west, and a smooth sea made things very pleasant + aboard ship, and Archie began to realise that there are times when it is + delightful to be at sea. The vessel was very much overcrowded with troops, + and the sleeping quarters were but little more pleasant than aboard the + liner. Archie shared a stateroom with three sergeants, and they managed to + have a lively time during the voyage. They played games, told stories, and + slept in the afternoons, but all this, of course, grew rather tiresome + after a time, and the voyage was becoming monotonous, when there came a + severe storm which kept things moving for three days. + </p> + <p> + None of the navigating officers had expected a gale, so that when it came + every one was taken wholly by surprise, and it came so suddenly that there + was no time at all for preparation. The sky became quickly dark one + afternoon about three o’clock, and soon the whole horizon was a mass of + great black clouds, which every moment seemed to come lower and lower + until they directly overhung the ship. There was great excitement aboard + the ship. Officers hurried here and there shouting orders to their men, + and the cavalrymen rushed about in a frenzy of haste, trying to devise + means to save their horses, most of which were stabled upon the deck. + Archie looked on in breathless interest, and was surprised to find that he + wasn’t at all frightened. He even found himself making mental notes of the + scene, so that he could send the story of it all to Mr. Van Bunting when + he reached Manila. + </p> + <p> + There was but little time for rushing about, and it was soon evident that + the horses would many of them be lost, because there seemed to be + absolutely no way of saving them if the waves were high enough to break + over the bulwarks. The storm soon broke in great fury, beginning with a + fierce wind which swept the waves before it. There was but little rain, + and the waves rose higher and higher with every minute, until the heavy + ship began to roll and pitch in a frightful way, so that the soldiers + began to think, some of them, that she would certainly sink. Finally the + waves were so high they dashed themselves over the decks, and no one was + allowed above the gangways. The cries of the poor horses, as they felt + themselves being washed overboard, were frightful to hear, and many a + trooper cried himself as he thought of his horse foundering in the raging + sea without. Before many minutes all was as dark as night, though the + watch pointed to but four o’clock, and all lights were burning below deck. + It was impossible to keep a light above, for no lantern could burn in such + a storm. + </p> + <p> + The waves began gradually to subside at ten o’clock at night, and a slow + steady rain came, which soon calmed the sea to a great extent. As soon as + it was safe to go above deck, it was found that more than a hundred horses + had been lost overboard, and that one mast had been carried away. Down + below nearly every man was in his bunk, for there was scarcely a person + who was not seasick, and most of them wouldn’t have cared if the ship had + gone down with all aboard, such was their feeling of despondency. Archie + was as sick as any of the others, but was able to make notes of + occurrences just the same. And when he grew better the next day, he wrote + an excellent account of the storm to send to the Enterprise on his arrival + in Manila. + </p> + <p> + After this rough weather experience, every man aboard was anxious to reach + port, and when, after many more days, the Bay of Cavité was reached, a + great cheer went up from a thousand throats, for everyone was overjoyed at + the sight of land. + </p> + <p> + The transport came to anchor off the forts which had once been Spain’s, + and it was announced that no one would be allowed to land for two days, + until advices could be had from Manila and the interior of the island. + This was very trying for Archie, being obliged to sit on deck for two + whole days, looking at a shore which seemed very inviting, in spite of the + general dilapidated appearance of the various buildings and docks. + Everything looked different from anything he had seen before, and the boy + felt that he could hardly wait to be allowed to explore some of those + streets which were so narrow, and those houses which were built in such a + peculiar fashion. + </p> + <p> + Finally, the permission came for the troops to land, and Archie received + the permission of the general to remain with them as long as he wanted to + do so. And as he had no other plans, the young correspondent decided that + it would be a good plan for him to stay right with one of these regiments, + for the time being at any rate. He knew that they would be likely to be + sent to the front immediately, and the front seemed the place for him to + be. + </p> + <p> + And then he was already acquainted with many of the men, and with the + colonel, and he realised that this would be an advantage to him in his + work. So he made his plans to keep with them. + </p> + <p> + First they went to Manila, where they remained for a week. The quaint old + city was a veritable fairy-land of wonders to Archie, who had never before + been in a city so ancient, and here there were so many unusual things to + be seen. There seemed to be absolutely no end to the winding streets, + delightful old houses, and interesting churches, and the boy spent many + days in exploring every corner of the island capital. The colonel warned + him several times that he must look out for robbers and other suspicious + characters, but Archie laughed at his fears. But the colonel was right, as + he found later on. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0015" id="link2HCH0015"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES + AMONG THE NATIVES—SEIZED BY THE REBELS. +</pre> + <p> + THE days passed very quickly in Manila, the regiment was quartered in an + old palace which had once been used as a residence by the Spanish + governors of the islands, and Archie remained in the palace with them. + There was very little to do while they were there. Each morning there were + anxious inquiries for news from the front, but there was always the same + discouraging reply that no trace had yet been found of the fleeing + Aguinaldo. The men were gradually becoming disheartened at the long wait, + and there were frequent statements by the officers that Aguinaldo would + soon be caught if they were sent out after him. The dissatisfaction with + the general in command grew stronger every day, and at last things reached + a point where there was very little loyalty and patriotism displayed among + the troops. + </p> + <p> + The drilling was continued, however, by order of the colonel, and every + morning the troops marched out to a public square near the palace, and + went through the same old manoeuvres which they had practised for months + past. And it was harder for them to drill each week. At first they were + willing enough to work, for there was then some prospect of their being + able to use their knowledge in a fight, but now it was beginning to seem + that they would simply remain in this old palace for a few months longer, + and then go back again to San Francisco. With this opinion in their + hearts, it is not to be wondered at that most of the men became slouchy + and careless in their manners and dress, or that even the officers + themselves became disgusted at the long wait for marching orders. + </p> + <p> + Things had been going on in this way for a long time, when Archie made up + his mind that it was time he was hustling about and finding something to + write about which would be interesting to readers of the Enterprise. He + had sent two articles describing his life with the soldiers in the old + palace, but he knew that he ought to find something more exciting, and + more like his first articles. So, after much thought, he decided that a + good plan would be for him to take a little trip into the interior of the + island, to see whether he could find any traces of the insurgents. The + colonel had held all along for a month, now, that the Filipinos were + probably all about Manila, and still he couldn’t get the permission of the + general in command to go out and investigate the matter. The colonel + figured that it would be an easy thing for the insurgents to come as near + to the city as they cared to now, for Lawton and Wheeler were far away in + the interior after Aguinaldo, and the troops in Manila were quietly + drilling, and eating, and sleeping, with no thought of doing anything + else. This line of argument seemed very reasonable to Archie, and he + volunteered to go out and see if he could make any discoveries. The + colonel assured him that he would be in no danger, even if he were caught + by the rebels, for they would never suspect a boy of Archie’s age and size + of being a spy. So the lad felt no fear at all, and made what few + preparations there were to be made before starting. He secured a knapsack + from the commissary officer, and in this he placed what few belongings he + wanted to take with him, together with his note-books and some provisions + for the trip. Then he secured a small pistol, which he carried in his hip + pocket, and he was disappointed because the colonel would not allow him to + carry a rifle. And when he had everything ready he said good-bye to his + friends in the regiment, and departed from the palace amid a multitude of + cheers. At the last moment the colonel tried to dissuade him from + starting, for fear he might meet with some accident, but Archie was + determined to make the attempt. + </p> + <p> + It was his plan not to go farther than fifty miles in the interior, for he + thought that if he found no traces of the rebels in that distance there + would be little use in going farther into the forest, for, it would be + almost impossible to find them there. So he set out gaily upon his trip of + exploration, and Archie couldn’t remember when he had been so happy + before, save on that day when he first visited the office of the + Enterprise. This adventure was exciting enough to please the wildest boy + in America, and Archie could imagine how envious the other boys would be + if they could but know the trip he was having. It had an official air to + it, too, for had not the colonel been most anxious, in the beginning, that + he should go, and did he not say that he would reward him handsomely if he + were successful in locating any of the insurgents, or in proving that he + had been right when he said they were near Manila? It was all as perfect + an adventure as Archie could have imagined. He could not have planned a + better one if he had been able to select any trip he could think of. + </p> + <p> + He planned that it would take him at least three days to walk fifty miles, + and perhaps longer, for the roads were not very good in some places. He + knew that he would find many villages and towns along the way, too, for + the island was thinly settled in this neighbourhood. So if he were obliged + to rest, he would never be at a loss for a place to get a bed. Archie + couldn’t help thinking, as he walked along the road outside Manila, this + first morning, that he might find a body of the insurgents in possession + of one of these towns. They were very bold, he had heard, and they + probably knew that there were no American troops anywhere in the + neighbourhood, outside the city of Manila itself. And, knowing this, he + knew they wouldn’t hesitate to camp at the very gates of the city, for + they were marvellously successful in getting away into the interior + whenever an American force made its appearance. + </p> + <p> + As he thought of this possibility, Archie couldn’t help being a little + fearful of what might happen to him should he fall into the hands of the + insurgents, and he began to wonder if he had not been a little foolhardy, + after all, in starting off on such a wild-goose chase. “But I will have + something new to send Mr. Van Bunting about the interior towns,” he said + to himself, “and if I am captured, why, I will have a great deal to write + about when I am released.” This thought made the lad happy again, and he + trudged along the road with as much vim and energy as he had displayed + during those weary days when he was walking to New York to make his + fortune. And it was a much more interesting country in which to walk than + the New York State counties had been. The vegetation was rich and + luxuriant everywhere, palm-trees, vines, and flowers growing in profusion + all along the road. In every dooryard, in front of every hut, there grew + what seemed to Archie a veritable fairy bower of the most richly coloured + flowers in existence. And they were growing, apparently, without + cultivation. He had seen nothing like them before, even in California, and + he longed to pluck some of them to send home, if they had only been wax + instead of nature’s blossoms. As it was, he kept his arms filled with them + for awhile, but after a time he grew tired carrying them, and was obliged + to drop them by the roadside. + </p> + <p> + The country looked as if it might have been very prosperous at one time. + There were plantations laid out in excellent fashion, and the soil seemed + rich and fertile. But instead of growing crops, and storehouses filled + with spices and coffee, there was desolation everywhere, and it was easy + to see that the Spaniards had determined to leave but little behind them + for the Yankees. Every other farmhouse and wayside hut was deserted, their + occupants having gone, apparently, to join Aguinaldo, and the whole + country, outside the towns, seemed to be wholly deserted and left to grow + up in weeds and tangled vines. + </p> + <p> + The sun was warm, the sky was a perfect blue, and it seemed a delightful + day in every way. But it made Archie sad to walk through a district which + had been made so desolate, and he hadn’t walked many hours before he + wished that he might soon reach a town, where he could find some life, and + where he could remain overnight. For by the middle of the afternoon he was + tired walking, and made up his mind that fifteen miles was enough for any + one to do in one day. But he was obliged to keep on walking for two hours + longer before he reached a village, and the great sun was just sinking + behind the blue hills in the distance when he entered the one main village + street, which was long and narrow, winding in and out among the cabins and + huts, as if it had been laid out after the houses were built, for the + convenience of the people. It was a poor excuse for a public thoroughfare. + There had probably been a pavement of some sort at one time, but now the + street was a mass of rubbish of every sort, straw, dust, old bricks, and + bits of stone being thrown together in every rut, so that it was + exceedingly difficult to walk along with any comfort. + </p> + <p> + There was no life visible in the settlement. Almost every hut had its + shades drawn at the windows, and there was absolutely no one to be seen in + the street. As he passed down the road, Archie could catch occasional + glimpses of black eyes staring at him through a lattice, or he could hear + some muttered word as he walked close to a window. From these signs he + knew that he was observed, and he felt very much embarrassed as he + continued his walk down this deserted lane, for he felt instinctively now + that hundreds of eyes were watching his every movement. + </p> + <p> + Finally, he came to the public square, and he sat down here to look about + him. From general appearances, he judged this to be a town of some two + thousand inhabitants, for there was a very respectable administration + building, and a good-sized church. There were but two streets of any + consequence, the one by which he had entered the town, and another running + at right angles in the opposite direction. In this latter street, as he + stood in the square, he noticed a three-story structure with a sign + outside, and he decided to go there and make inquiries as to where he + might be able to secure a lodging for the night. It looked as if it might + be an inn of some sort, or at least a store, so he walked rapidly up to + the entrance and knocked twice upon the door. This place, in spite of its + sign, looked more deserted and shut-up than any other building he had yet + seen in the town, and he wondered whether he would receive any answer to + his knocks. It was indeed a long time before he heard a sound within, but + at last there was some muttering inside, the door flew open, and Archie + found himself in the arms of three Filipinos, who threw him upon the floor + and bound him, hands and feet. It was all so sudden that he had no time to + cry out, and before he could say anything at all he was thrown into a dark + room, and the door shut behind him. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0016" id="link2HCH0016"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + A PLEASANT CAPTOR—BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE—FIRST + GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO. +</pre> + <p> + FOR a long time Archie lay still upon the floor, being unable to move a + muscle from the shock of his encounter with the men, and because he was + tightly bound with ropes. And then he at last went off to sleep, feeling + frightened because he was in the hands of strange men, and a little + satisfied, too, because he was the victim of some adventure which might + turn out in a very interesting way. + </p> + <p> + When he awoke, it was morning, and the light came into the room through + two small square windows, set high up in the wall. Archie looked about the + room with great curiosity, but found little there to interest him. There + was nothing to be seen but an old bed without spring or mattress, and a + rickety chair with but three legs, which stood in one corner. The walls, + he was surprised to observe, were handsomely decorated with tapestries, + and Archie at once made up his mind that this had at one time been a + private dwelling-house, and had probably been owned by some rich Spaniard + who kept a store on the ground floor, and lived in these rooms. The + insurgents had probably driven the family out of the country and had taken + possession of the house, which they had stripped of everything useful, + leaving the tapestries and works of art behind them. + </p> + <p> + These suppositions were cut short by the entrance of a man who appeared to + be a half-breed, and who immediately began to speak to Archie in broken + English. The fellow had a pleasant face, and presented a fairly good + appearance, and Archie wondered how he could have come to this place. “I + suppose you have been wondering,” said the man, “why you have been thrown + into this room, and it won’t take me long to explain things. You see this + town belongs to us just now, and we don’t propose to have any Yankee spies + around here to tell Otis of our whereabouts. There ain’t no troops in this + town now, but there’s likely to be any minute, and we patriots was sent + here to take possession of things and arrange quarters for our army. Let + me tell you that the Filipino army will be in this town to-day, and if you + don’t look sharp you’ll be the first prisoner to be shot. Aguinaldo isn’t + a man to deal easily with spies, and if he thought you was out here for + that purpose he’d have you riddled with bullets in a minute.” The man came + up to Archie and began to undo the ropes. “I reckon I can trust you free + for awhile, for there’s no use in your trying to get away, with the + Filipino army all around the town. Sit down there now, and I’ll see that + you get some breakfast. You can tell, perhaps, that I ain’t no Filipino, + nor never was one. I’m from Arizona, U. S. A., and I’m fightin’ with these + rebels for what there is in it just now. I’m mighty curious to find out + how you come to be out in these diggin’s, youngster.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was willing enough to tell all about himself. He liked this man, in + spite of his being with the rebels, and he felt that he would be able to + make friends with him if he were careful to do so. And the best plan + seemed to be for him to tell all about himself, how he happened to go to + New York, and how he had been sent out here as a boy correspondent for the + Enterprise. The man from Arizona listened to the recital with open mouth + and eyes, and he frequently laughed outright at some of the experiences + Archie described. When the narrative was finished, he seized Archie’s + hand, and said, “My name’s Bill Hickson, and you can count on me after + this fer a friend, youngster. I’ll swan if I ever heard tell of sich nerve + in my life. I’ll see that you get out of this scrape all right, but you + must be careful to keep up appearances of being under guard. I’m a big-bug + in this Filipino shack, but I wouldn’t dare to let you out openly. So you + jist kind of lay around and look despondent, and depend on me to make + things as easy for you as I can. You kin come down-stairs now, if you + like, and I’ll present you to my friends. There don’t none of ‘em speak no + English but me, and all I can do is to interduce you, and tell ‘em that + you ain’t no spy, and that you are very sorry you ever ran up agin this + here town. And I guess I’ll be expressin’ your sentiments exactly, won’t + I?” Archie nodded, but in his heart he felt that he wasn’t sorry he had + run up against the town. This Bill Hickson, in himself, was a character + worth going miles to meet, and if what he said was true, Archie stood a + good chance of seeing the notorious Aguinaldo, with his army of Filipinos, + before the day was over. + </p> + <p> + When he reached the lower floor, he found several men lounging about in + another poorly furnished room, and they were all similar in appearance to + the men he had seen at the door the night before. They looked at him in an + indifferent way, and didn’t seem surprised that he should be walking about + without restraint. Bill Hickson stepped up to some of them, and, after a + few words in some language Archie didn’t understand, motioned for the boy + to step up. He was told to shake hands with “all the gents,” and after he + had done so he was offered a cigar, and Archie began to realise that it + was a very good thing that he had a friend at the Filipino court. He + thought, too, that if these men were samples, Aguinaldo had a very poor + lot of retainers, and later on he perceived the real cause for the failure + of the rebels to do anything more than keep up a constant retreat. It was + plain to see that the followers of the rebel leader were “in it for what + it was worth.” They had no difficulty, any of them, in getting enough to + eat, and often they had opportunities to enjoy themselves in great fashion + by taking possession of some Filipino village and ejecting the inmates of + some particularly fine house, with a well-stocked wine-cellar. + </p> + <p> + In looking out of the window Archie perceived that the town looked very + different this morning than when he saw it the evening before. Instead of + drawn blinds and shuttered windows, there was everywhere an evident + attempt at decoration in honour of the coming army. The streets were + crowded with a throng in holiday garb, and some of the soldiers of the + rebel army had already arrived, as they could be easily distinguished by + their ragged dress and ridiculous airs, walking up and down the street. It + was all such a scene as Archie had never seen before, and would have made + a great success as the scenario for a comic opera. But as a welcome to an + army, supposedly victorious, it was a dismal failure, and Archie wondered + what General Aguinaldo would think when he entered the town and saw such + shoddy patriotism everywhere. He hadn’t long to wait, however, before + seeing the famous rebel and the effect upon him of the celebration in his + honour. It was about ten o’clock in the morning when he rode into the + public square, followed by about two hundred ragged Filipinos, armed with + all sorts of guns and pistols. Archie saw the arrival from the roof of the + building which was his mock prison, and he could scarcely refrain from + laughing outright when he saw the boasted Filipino “army.” It was the + poorest excuse for a body of troops that he could imagine. + </p> + <p> + Aguinaldo rode a fine bay horse, as did several of his followers, but by + far the majority of the regiment, if such it could be called, was afoot, + and most of them were barefooted, too. The rebel leader looked very much + like most of his pictures, with the exception that he had an older look, + and some gray hairs about the temples. He was attired in a gaudy uniform + of some sort, with epaulets and a Spanish general’s hat, and he carried + himself with great dignity of manner. Dismounting from his horse, he + entered the administration building, where he held a conference with the + town officials, and probably made them pay over whatever money was in the + treasury “for the cause.” He remained within for two hours or more, and + all this time Archie stood upon the roof and watched the remarkable scene + in the streets below. The troops had scattered, and were engaged in + robbing the housewives of whatever they had in their houses to eat. And + the women seemed willing to provide them with whatever they could afford, + and there was much enthusiasm evident everywhere. But the celebration was + very quiet, in spite of the friendly reception, There were no bands of + music, no cheering, and no singing of battle-hymns. The whole affair + reminded Archie of some camp of a section of the famous Coxey army, when + he had seen it long ago. The soldiers were no better dressed than tramps, + and there was but little more discipline among them. + </p> + <p> + And the celebration and occupation of the town came to a sudden end. While + Archie stood upon the roof at noontime, he saw a runner enter the + administration building in great haste, and in a minute Aguinaldo came + hurrying down the steps. Then there was a great commotion in the streets, + and the two hundred followers of the chief were seen assembled in the + square, and before they were all there the general was riding out of the + town toward the interior of the island. There was no noise, and the + inhabitants stood about apparently speechless, and wondering what had + happened. Their reception had come to an untimely end, and their hero had + left them unceremoniously. Soon the last of the straggling troops were out + of the town, and just as Archie was beginning to think of going down from + the roof Bill Hickson stuck his head up and gave him some astonishing + news. “Stay where you’re at, young feller, till these fool Filipinos gits + away from here. You saw how they skedaddled, didn’t ye? Well, Uncle Sam is + comin’ after ‘em with shot-guns, and old Aggy heard the news just in time. + He is bound for the jungle, about forty miles southeast, and he won’t + reach it until to-morrow night, anyhow, and if the officers are quick they + may be able to catch him. Now you stay here, lad, and give ‘em the news + when they git here. They’ll thank you for it, and you may be the means of + gittin’ this fool of an Aguinaldo captured. If you does, why, your + future’s all right. And ye can tell the colonel, or whoever’s in command, + that Bill Hickson is still with ‘em, and that he’s doin’ his best fer + Uncle Sam, and tell ‘em that Aggy has got about three thousand troops + altogether, but only about a thousand with him. Now, good-bye, lad, and I + hope I’ll see ye again.” + </p> + <p> + And Archie saw brave Bill Hickson get down from the roof. He brushed some + tears from his eyes as he realised that here was a brave soldier doing + good work for his country. A moment later he saw him running across the + square with four of the Filipinos, and waving his hat to the “youngster” + as he went. He followed him with his eyes as long as he could, and then he + sat down and made a solemn vow that Bill Hickson should be named among the + heroes of the war. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0017" id="link2HCH0017"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS—ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE descended from the roof, and found everything below in a state of + wild disorder. The fleeing rebels had taken with them all they had time to + get together, but in their haste they had left behind many of their most + useful belongings. In a cupboard of the dining-room Archie found a supply + of food and wines sufficient to feed several people for a week, so he + supposed that it had been the intention of the occupants of the house to + remain for some days. The news that the Americans were coming upset all + their plans, however, and now, as often before, they were obliged to flee + before them, leaving behind most of their creature comforts in the way of + food and furniture. + </p> + <p> + “What a life they must be leading,” thought Archie to himself, “going from + one place to another, constantly endeavouring to hide from the Americans. + Now in some town, now in the wilderness, and again venturing as near as + possible to the boundaries of Manila.” And he could scarcely help admiring + their courage, or recklessness, rather, in camping so near the head of the + American government, where they might expect to be caught in a trap at any + moment. But Archie realised, too, that such an army can get away in a very + short time, and he began to have serious doubts as to whether the + Americans would ever be able to capture Aguinaldo and his men. For knowing + the islands perfectly, and being able to get from one point to another in + the easiest and quickest way, the rebels have a great deal in their + favour. + </p> + <p> + Selecting some canned beef and some native bread and cheese, Archie + managed to make a very good meal for himself, though he ate hurriedly for + fear some of the rebels might return. As soon as he had finished he + returned to his position on the roof, for there he knew that he would be + safe in case the building was entered by the townspeople. From his high + perch he looked down into the streets, and was surprised to find them as + quiet and as much deserted as they had been the night before. The news of + the coming of the Americans had been effective in quieting the enthusiasm + of the morning, and all the townsfolk had again entered their homes and + put the shutters up before their windows. One would have taken the place + for a deserted village, judging from appearances. But Archie knew that + within the shuttered windows and barred doors there were hundreds of + people waiting anxiously for the arrival of the American troops, and + making ready to come out, when required to do so, and again declare their + allegiance to the stars and stripes. The cowardly wretches were diplomatic + enough to be always on the side of the victorious. When the rebels + occupied the town they were loyal to them, and when the Americans came, as + they often did, they came out into the square and cheered loudly for Uncle + Sam. But of course the Americans knew very well that their sympathies were + with the rebels, and the rebels knew it, too, or they would never have + dared to venture so near Manila. + </p> + <p> + About five in the afternoon, there was a sound of many men marching along + the road, and in a little while Archie was able to see the Americans + coming down the street. It was a sight to cheer his heart after all his + experiences of the last day and night. The column was marching at + double-quick, and the handsome colonel rode a great gray horse at the head + of the regiment. Archie saw that they would reach the square in two or + three minutes, and, throwing discretion to the winds, he descended from + the roof, almost fell down the stairways in his haste, and was soon + running toward the administration building. He mounted the great steps + leading up to the portico, just as the colonel rode into the square, and + the expression of surprise on the faces of all the men was funny to see. + In a minute every hat was off, and the regiment was giving “three cheers + for the boy reporter,” while the colonel, rapidly dismounting, hurried up + to speak with Archie. + </p> + <p> + “Why, how did you come here?” he demanded. “Haven’t the rebels been here, + and how did you escape them? Which way did they go, and was Aguinaldo with + them? For pity’s sake, say something.” + </p> + <p> + Archie wasn’t long explaining things, and his news was so explicit and so + valuable that the colonel grasped his hand and said, almost with tears in + his eyes, “God bless you, lad. You may have aided us to catch the gang, + and anyhow you’ve proved your bravery.” + </p> + <p> + By this time the regiment was standing at ease, and all the men were + watching Archie and the colonel with great interest. Knowing that they + were all curious to learn how the lad happened to have escaped the rebels, + the good colonel made a short speech in which he explained everything. He + dwelt particularly upon the bravery of Bill Hickson, and held him up as a + model for all the men to follow. “And now three cheers for Bill Hickson + and our boy reporter again,” he cried, when he had finished, and they were + given with a will by all the men. + </p> + <p> + The regimental officers held a short consultation, and it was decided, on + the strength of the news brought by Archie, to push on after the rebels as + fast as was possible. But it was now sunset, and there was no use trying + to go farther to-night, so it was agreed that the best plan would be to + give the men a good rest overnight, as they had made the entire march from + Manila since five o’clock in the morning. “They will do all the better + to-morrow for the rest,” said the colonel. Archie was valuable in being + able to guide the officers to the building where he had been confined, + assuring them that they would find everything needful there in the way of + food, and a place to sleep. Some of the soldiers were quartered in various + houses of the town, for the people had soon turned out into the street + again, and had expressed their friendship for their “masters,” as they + called them. Archie could hardly refrain from laughing as he saw some of + those who in the morning had bowed down to Aguinaldo vowing everlasting + allegiance to our flag, and he assured the colonel that he couldn’t be too + careful while in the town to guard against surprises. “No one knows the + beasts better than I do,” was the answer. “I know they can’t be trusted.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was invited to remain in the building with the officers, and while + they prepared and ate a lunch he busied himself in writing a description + of his last two days’ experiences. He knew that a messenger would soon + start for Manila, and that a boat would leave that city on the next day + for Hong Kong, so he wanted to get his narrative written in order to send + it to Mr. Van Bunting at once. He felt that he had some very interesting + things to write about, for it wasn’t every correspondent who had seen + Aguinaldo, and had been captured by the rebel army. He knew that most of + them were content to remain in Manila, and send only what they could get + from the general in command, and that this description of the rebels would + be something new, at any rate. So he wrote it very carefully, and + succeeded in getting it ready in time to send, so that it would be in the + office of the Enterprise in less than a month. As he sat at the table + writing, Archie thought of the great changes which can take place in one’s + surroundings in a few weeks. It seemed ages to him since the day when he + left home for the first time, and the experiences he had on his way to New + York seemed now to belong to the far-away period of his boyhood. He was + beginning to feel very old now, because he had been through so much of + late, and he could hardly realise that he was still eighteen. + </p> + <p> + He wrote a short note to his mother at home, telling her not to worry, and + assuring her that he was in good health and in no danger whatever of being + captured by the rebels, for Archie felt quite safe after his experience + with the insurgent leaders. He knew that no one of their prisoners was + ever likely to come to a very bad end. They were far too slipshod in their + methods of holding prisoners. He was sorry not to be able to send a longer + letter home, but he knew that this note was much better than sending + nothing at all, and that it would make his mother very happy to hear from + him at all. + </p> + <p> + The officers, when Archie returned to the dining-room, if such it could be + called, were engaged in making a very good meal from the provisions in the + cupboard, and they thanked Archie warmly for leading them to such a good + place. “By Jove,” said one of the captains, “we sha’n’t want to return to + Manila at all, when we can get such grub as this is outside.” But the + colonel assured them all that they needn’t expect to find such + accommodations everywhere in the interior of the country. “No doubt we’ll + all be living on plantains in a day or two, if we don’t catch that fox of + an Aguinaldo. And I’m willin’ to bet now that we won’t find him. That + feller’s too slick for us. He’s proved it many a time before.” + </p> + <p> + “And to think that he was here only this morning! The nerve of him, to + come within twenty-five miles of Manila!” said another. + </p> + <p> + “I’ll be mighty well satisfied if we can catch a few of his ragged men,” + continued the colonel. “That will be something to have accomplished, + anyhow, and more than some other regiments have done, when they were sent + after him. He’s the cutest feller I’ve heard of in a long while. If it + wasn’t for Bill Hickson we’d never hear tell of him, even. He could enter + Manila, I believe, and go out again without us ever knowin’ it at all.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was now called on to tell something of the rebel leader’s + appearance, and how he had acted while in the town. + </p> + <p> + “I didn’t see very much of him,” said Archie, “because he spent most of + the morning with the big-bugs of the town, over in the administration + building. But when he rode into town on his horse he looked mighty + dignified, though he fell some in my estimation when I saw him standing + up. He looked rather dumpy then. He carried himself with a lot of dignity, + a little more than was becoming, I thought, and he received the cheers of + the people as a matter of course, and hardly took the trouble to + acknowledge them, even by a bow. The officers of the town treated him with + great deference, and I guess there’s no doubt but what the Filipinos look + upon him as their leader.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, there’s no doubt of that,” said the colonel. “We’ve learned that long + ago. They stand up for him whenever he needs them, and they give him all + they’ve got to help carry on the war.” + </p> + <p> + The meal finished, the officers smoked awhile, and then went to bed, for + they were to be up at four in the morning. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0018" id="link2HCH0018"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVIII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS—THE FIRST BATTLE—ARCHIE WOUNDED. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE was awakened at four the next morning by the sound of the bugle, + and, hastily dressing, he hurried down-stairs to learn the plans of the + officers. He found that they were going to start on the march as soon as + the men had drunk their morning coffee, and Archie immediately made + preparations to go with them. The colonel looked on in amazement. “Why are + you packing your knapsack!” he asked. “You surely don’t think you’re going + with us? You never in the world can stand this hard march in the hot sun.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, yes, I think I can,” said Archie. “You see I have walked a great deal + in these last two months, and I don’t think I will have any difficulty in + keeping up with the troops. And I do so want to see some fighting, and to + learn whether you capture Aguinaldo. You don’t object to my going, now, do + you?” + </p> + <p> + “No,” said the colonel. “If you think you can stand the marching, and are + so anxious to come, why, I suppose you can do so. But you mustn’t blame me + if anything should happen to you.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was ready enough to promise this, for he had no idea that he would + meet with an accident of any kind, and so he continued to pack his things + in the knapsack. The rebels had emptied everything in a corner, and had + evidently intended taking the knapsack with them when they went; but they + left so hurriedly they couldn’t possibly think of everything, and so had + left it behind, much to Archie’s relief, for he would have been unable to + secure another one anywhere outside Manila. In a very short time the + regiment gathered in the streets immediately about the square, and soon + the men were marching out of the town, much to the gratification of the + residents, who watched them from their roofs and windows. Archie fell in + at the head of the column, and found no difficulty in keeping up with the + soldiers near him, though they were marching at a rapid rate. + </p> + <p> + The town limits were soon passed, and they swung into the white country + road, which presented the same scene of desolation which had been + everywhere visible to Archie on his way from Manila. The farm-houses were + nearly all deserted, and there was but little attempt at cultivating the + soil, which would have been productive enough had it not been overgrown + with tangled vines and weeds. And as they went farther into the country + the wilderness increased, until at last the road itself was filled with + growing vines, and the men had difficulty in walking. Every little while + some trooper would fall headlong, tripped by some vine, and the others + would laughingly help him up before passing on. These little incidents did + much to enliven the march, which became monotonous after the first six or + seven hours, and Archie appreciated the mishaps very much until he took a + few tumbles himself. He was usually, much to the amusement of the + officers, marching at the very head of the regiment, and “setting the + pace,” he said, so that he was more likely to trip than any of the others. + He was always the first to discover a snake in the road, too, and kept a + great stick with which to kill them. He seemed to have no fear of them, + but walked up to lay them out, and on one occasion the colonel warned him + just in time or he would certainly have been bitten by a snake whose bite + is certain death. This experience made him more careful, but he still kept + his place at the head of the regiment, and came to be called the mascot by + the men. + </p> + <p> + At noon the regiment halted at a grassy spot, where there were trees, and + made their dinners from their knapsacks. The officers warned them to go + carefully, or they would find themselves without provisions before + returning to Manila, for they had been so sure of catching the rebels at + the town behind that they had neglected to bring along many supplies. Now, + of course, they didn’t know how long it would take them to find them,—two + days at least, and probably longer. + </p> + <p> + Archie had stocked his knapsack with some food from the old headquarters + in the town, so that he felt safe for a few days, at any rate. He ate + carefully, however, and was careful not to waste anything, for he realised + that he might be called upon to aid some of the soldiers before long. + </p> + <p> + Dinner over, the regiment marched on again, for the officers now began to + think that they had made a mistake in not pursuing the fleeing rebels the + night before. They met several Spaniards, who told them that Aguinaldo had + marched all night long without stopping, so that he was now at least + thirty-six hours ahead of them, and some of the men began to be + discouraged, saying that it was no use following him up with such a small + force. “Other regiments have tried to find him in this way, and none of + them have succeeded,” said one of the privates to Archie. “They keep us + marching for three or four days, and finally they decide to return to + Manila, without having found any trace of the rascal beyond hearing that + he had passed this way or that.” + </p> + <p> + The officers couldn’t depend upon what the natives told them of + Aguinaldo’s movements, for, almost without exception, they were in his + favour, and always lied to the Americans to try to throw them off the + track. It was due to this that they proceeded very cautiously, and still, + notwithstanding their extreme care, they found themselves, when night came + on this first day, in a small village where no one had seen anything of + the rebel army. There was no denying the fact that they were off the + trail, and the colonel stormed about in a terrible way when he learned of + their mistake. There was no use going back in the dark to hunt for a trail + they had mistaken in the daylight, so the regiment remained in the village + overnight. They were a lot of very discouraged men, and the officers were + enraged at the mistake, for which there was no one but themselves to + blame. + </p> + <p> + Early in the morning they retraced their way, and started off in an + opposite direction to the one taken yesterday. It seemed that this must + certainly be the path taken by the rebels, but the regiment marched until + nearly noon without seeing any signs of them. Then, when they had halted + for dinner, the colonel decided to let the men rest while two companies + were sent ahead to reconnoitre, and report as to whether there were any + signs of men having passed this way. He was beginning to think that the + whole affair would be a wild-goose chase, and he decided that, if these + companies found nothing, the whole regiment would return to Manila + forthwith, probably to be the laughing-stock of the army there. + </p> + <p> + The remaining companies had nothing to do now but lay about on the soft + grass, and rest. They were encamped in a stretch of grassy loam in the + midst of what appeared to be a dense forest, and all about were evidences + of the great fertility of the soil. The vegetation was so dense that one + could scarcely see through it, and the glade was cool and pleasant, though + overhead the sun was shining as warm as ever. It was a lovely oasis in a + wilderness of undergrowth, and the men enjoyed it to the utmost. + </p> + <p> + About three in the afternoon the sound of firing was heard in the + distance. First there was one shot, then another, and several more at + rapid intervals. Archie was one of the first to jump to his feet, but in a + second every man was at attention, with his musket in his hands. The + colonel listened closely for two minutes, and then the firing began once + more, and this time it seemed nearer. He hesitated no longer, but gave the + order to march ahead. “They’ve evidently found the cowards at last,” he + muttered to Archie. “You stay here, where you will be out of danger.” But + Archie was determined to do nothing of the kind. He felt his pistol safe + in his hip pocket, and when the companies swung out of the forest and into + the road he was marching in his old place at the head of the column. Again + the colonel ordered him to remain behind, but Archie insisted that he + would not, “Then go to the rear,” cried the colonel, angry for the moment. + “I will not have you shot down by a rebel sharpshooter the very first + one.” And Archie knew that he would have to obey. + </p> + <p> + The column went ahead at double-quick, and finally broke into a steady + run. Every minute the noise of rifle-shots sounded nearer, and it seemed + probable that the two companies were retreating before the insurgents. The + men were wild to reach the scene of the firing, and the officers had all + they could do to keep them in line. All the time they were running hardly + a sound was heard save the noise of their boots upon the soft earth, and + they all knew that they could probably take the insurgents by surprise. + </p> + <p> + Archie’s heart was beating very hard as they drew nearer and nearer to the + scene. He felt that he was about to see his first fighting, and he + determined not to miss any part of it. So he gradually ran ahead until + finally he was almost at the head of the column again. + </p> + <p> + The troops made so little noise that the two companies, retreating slowly, + were upon them without knowing it. But when they discovered that their + comrades had come to their aid they set up such a cheering as Archie had + never heard before, and immediately faced about and went ahead again. The + rebels were about a quarter of a mile behind, marching rapidly forward, + and firing as they came. Some of them were running among the trees at the + roadside, firing incessantly, and hitting some poor soldier almost every + time they fired. They were the famous sharpshooters, of whom the soldiers + in Manila had heard so much. + </p> + <p> + When the rebels observed that the Americans had received reinforcements, + they halted suddenly, and before they could turn about the Yankees were + almost upon them, firing volleys into them as they came. Many of the + insurgents fell in the roadway, and the others fled wildly in every + direction. Most of them entered the dense forest, where the Americans + captured nearly a hundred of them after the others had surrendered, and + some were such good runners that they escaped down the roadway. The whole + rebel army presented a scene of wild confusion. Some of the men knelt and + begged for mercy, and some cried out in a horrible way as they saw the + dreaded Yankees advancing. But it was all over very soon. The prisoners + were placed in line, and marched back along the road, and the dead, of + which there were about fifty, were soon buried. Aguinaldo had escaped in + the forest, and no one suggested that he should be followed. All the + officers knew that such a course would be useless, and most of them were + very well satisfied with what had already been accomplished. The prisoners + numbered more than six hundred, and the dead a hundred more, while there + were about seventy-five wounded. So if what Bill Hickson said were true, + not more than two hundred insurgents could have escaped. + </p> + <p> + Among the seriously wounded was a man whom Archie recognised immediately + as one of his captors of two days previous, and while he was looking over + the bodies for the other men, he came suddenly to brave Bill Hickson, + lying face downward in the road. He almost screamed with fear that he + might be dead, and when one of the men hurried up to him he told him who + the man was. The colonel was soon on hand, and it was found that the brave + spy was not seriously wounded, and would recover soon under proper + treatment. + </p> + <p> + When the insurgent wounded were cared for, it was discovered that the two + companies sent out to reconnoitre had also suffered losses, and when they + marched back along the line of their retreat no less than five dead and + about twenty wounded were found. This sad news threw a gloom over the + entire regiment, and when they started back to Manila they marched in + quiet, and without rejoicing over their victory, which had proved so + costly. + </p> + <p> + Poor Archie, when they started to march, found, to his great disgust, that + he was so weak he couldn’t walk far, and he thought this must be due to + the fright he had received. He was very angry with himself, until the + surgeon examined him and announced that he had a bullet in his arm. And + then Archie confessed that he had felt a stinging sensation at one time + during the firing, but had thought nothing of it. Now his disgust was + turned to great delight, for the idea of being wounded in battle was + glorious to his mind. “I’ll bet I wounded more than one insurgent,” he + told the surgeon, “for I discharged every barrel of my revolver.” The + wound was not at all serious, but he was told to be quiet for a few days. + He was given one of the rebel horses to ride back to Manila, and he felt + like a real hero in many ways. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0019" id="link2HCH0019"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIX. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + RETURN TO MANILA—IN THE HOSPITAL—CONGRATULATED BY ALL—WRITING TO + THE PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES. +</pre> + <p> + IT took the regiment much longer to march back to Manila than it had taken + it to follow the rebels, for the wounded of both sides had to be carried, + and the arrangements for carrying them were very imperfect. Fortunately, + most of them were able to ride horses, and the officers were successful in + securing wagons enough to carry most of the others, but there were about a + dozen who could neither ride horses or lie in wagons, but had to be + carried on stretchers all the time. Of course this was slow work, and the + officers were glad enough when they reached the town with the three-story + building. Here they found things very much as they had left them, two days + before, save that the inhabitants were more abject than ever to them, now + that they had captured most of the rebel force. + </p> + <p> + It wasn’t an easy matter to find quarters for so many men, and some of the + Filipinos were obliged to camp in the public square overnight, while the + wounded and ill were given beds in the various houses of the town. The + inhabitants were required to furnish food, too, for the Americans were + entirely out of almost everything. They still had some hardtack, but of + meat and coffee there was none. The people of the town pretended to be + very glad to serve their “masters,” but every one knew that the natives + would be only too glad of a chance to cut the throat of every Yankee + soldier. + </p> + <p> + The officers again occupied the old building which they had used during + their former stay, and Archie was invited to share it with them, for they + expected to rest in this town over the next day, before proceeding to + Manila. The men’s uniforms and equipment generally needed cleaning and + repairing, and the colonel was anxious for them all to appear as well as + possible when they returned victorious to the island capital. So the next + day was spent in cleaning and washing, and by evening most of the soldiers + looked as if they had never left Manila. Then came a surprise for every + one, for into the town marched a regiment of militia from Manila, sent out + to see whether the first regiment needed reinforcements. They set up a + great cheer when they learned that most of the rebel force had been + captured, and the night was spent in a celebration of the great event. A + band was scraped up in the town, the great hall of the administration + building was thrown open, and there was dancing and music until an early + hour in the morning. All the belles of the town turned out to welcome the + soldiers, hypocrites that they were, and they danced with their enemies as + readily as they would waltz with their own dear Filipinos. Every one + seemed to have a good time, and the soldiers went to bed just in time to + get three hours’ sleep before starting for Manila in the morning. + </p> + <p> + It was a great sight to see the two regiments, with the prisoners, march + out of the town at five the next morning. They made a fine appearance in + their well-brushed uniforms and bright equipment. The townsfolk watched + them out of sight, and then most likely cursed them for a lot of + vagabonds, but the soldiers didn’t mind their curses. They were all very + happy at the prospect of getting back to Manila again, and no one was more + glad than Archie. He had somewhat recovered from his wound now, and rode + in his old place at the head of the column, where he was the centre of + interest to every one. The men congratulated him on having proved such an + excellent mascot, and he laughed and talked with them until he was tired. + </p> + <p> + The outskirts of the city were reached about five in the afternoon, and as + they marched through the streets to headquarters a band of music preceded + them, playing popular and patriotic airs. The sidewalks were crowded with + people, and Archie felt happier than for a long time, because every one + was curious to know who that boy could be riding at the head of the + troops, alongside the colonel. He was known to most of the other troops in + Manila, and received many a cheer from them as they saw his arm in a + sling, and when they finally reached the general’s headquarters, he was + honoured with a handshake and the congratulations of the commander + himself. This was the climax to a very happy day, and Archie went to bed + in his little old bunk feeling that he was a very lucky boy for having + been wounded in battle. + </p> + <p> + Of course the next few days were very busy ones for all the men, and for + Archie, too. He was obliged to tell, over and over, the story of his + experiences, and how he had managed to escape from the rebels when they + had him. This story always made the men roar with laughter, and increased + their already strong contempt for the Filipino army. He told, too, about + brave Bill Hickson, and that gentleman’s cot was always the centre of an + admiring throng of visitors, who shook his hand and told him how proud + they were of what he had accomplished. And all the poor hero could do was + to smile feebly, for he was still too ill to talk much. + </p> + <p> + Archie felt that he had almost volumes to write about his experiences in + battle, and he did send a very long account of this encounter to Mr. Van + Bunting. It was written in his boyish way, but one of the officers who + read it said that it was the best thing of its kind he had ever read, so + he wasn’t at all backward about mailing it. All the other newspaper + correspondents in Manila were wishing they had gone with the regiment and + witnessed the battle, but they had stayed in Manila, thinking that this + would be like the other expeditions of the kind, a mere wild-goose chase, + which wouldn’t amount to anything at all. They were all very anxious to + get the details of the affair from Archie, but he was shrewd enough not to + tell them anything of value. And the other correspondent of the Enterprise + in Manila insisted that Archie should send a cable message describing the + affair, as well as a written account, and this he finally consented to do. + The correspondent added a long account of Archie’s personal bravery, how + he had been wounded, and how he had ridden back to Manila at the head of + the column. Archie would have been very much embarrassed had he known + this, for he was still modest, but the first thing he knew of it was from + a letter he received a few weeks later from Mr. Van Bunting, + congratulating him on what he had accomplished, and telling him that he + had long since more than earned his six hundred dollars. But for weeks he + was ignorant that any one in New York knew of his being wounded. + </p> + <p> + The days now began to pass as before in the camp at Manila. The wound in + Archie’s arm was healing slowly, but he was hardly able to use that member + for a month or six weeks. Bill Hickson did not fare so well. He lay for + weeks on his cot in the hospital building, and was hardly strong enough, + for awhile, to talk. He was improving slowly, but the doctors said it + might be two months before he was able to walk about and take his former + active part in the campaign against the insurgents. This enforced quiet + was very trying to the brave man, and Archie spent many hours reading to + him, and telling of various things he had learned at school and elsewhere. + This constant companionship served to strengthen their already close + friendship, and it was soon known among all the troops that Bill Hickson + and the boy reporter were inseparable. And every one who knew the story of + their experiences looked upon them as the two chief heroes of the war so + far, because as yet there had been few feats of bravery in the desultory + campaigning against the rebels. General Funston had swum the river, of + course, but many held that not even that feat compared with the bravery of + Bill Hickson in serving as a spy under Aguinaldo’s very nose. The more + people heard about his experiences, the more remarkable they thought him + to be, until at last he was by far the most popular man in the army at + Manila. + </p> + <p> + Archie sent many interesting letters to Mr. Van Bunting, telling of the + adventures of the brave spy, and one day he received a cablegram telling + him to send at least one of these letters by every steamer, for people had + become interested in hearing about him. So for some time Archie wrote + about Bill Hickson rather than about himself, and was glad of the + opportunity to do so. He knew that if a letter were published every week + or two in the Enterprise Bill Hickson would soon be famous, and this was + something he was very anxious to accomplish. He felt that no fame could be + too great for such a man, and no praise too strong. + </p> + <p> + The commanding general decided, about this time, to begin a more active + campaign against the insurgents. It was now the month of December, and + with the beginning of the new year he wanted to inaugurate a series of + attacks against them in every part of the islands. He was beginning to + feel the criticisms of the papers at home, and of the newspaper men at + Manila, and he felt that something must be done immediately to retrieve + his lost reputation for active fighting. Every one, as soon as this + announcement was made, wondered what plan would be pursued to worry the + rebels into submission, for it was now generally agreed that the Americans + would hardly be able to capture the whole rebel army. It was too evident + that they were familiar with numerous hiding-places in the islands. The + only thing to do seemed to be to prevent their getting supplies, and to + drive them from one point to another, hoping that they would become + discouraged in the end and submit to the inevitable. + </p> + <p> + So far the campaigning had consisted chiefly of such expeditions as that + accompanied by Archie, and most of these had returned to Manila without + having even seen a rebel soldier. It was not surprising, then, that the + general was becoming discouraged, and that he was anxious to try a new + policy. + </p> + <p> + No one knew what the new plan would be until one day several cruisers and + gunboats made their appearance in the harbour. There had been no war-ships + at Manila for several weeks, and every one was surprised that so many + should arrive at once. There were rumours of a German onslaught, and also + gossip saying that Japan had decided to interfere, but all these were set + at naught when the general announced that the war-ships were to be sent + around the islands to bombard the rebel villages, and to drive the rebel + troops to the interior of the islands, where it would be hard for them to + receive supplies. + </p> + <p> + This news made Archie very happy, and a plan at once occurred to him. Why + shouldn’t he and Bill Hickson be allowed aboard a cruiser? It would be the + best thing possible for their health, and he set about getting the + necessary permit from the admiral. + </p> + <p> + Bill Hickson was able to be about now, and he was overjoyed when Archie + said he thought they could arrange to go. “I’d like nothing better than a + voyage in the good salt air. I believe it will do me more good than a + month in the hospital,” he said. Archie secured a very strong letter from + the general, and one day he stepped aboard the flag-ship in the harbour. + He had no difficulty in seeing the admiral, and found him to be a very + pleasant man to talk with. He read the letter carefully, and then shook + Archie cordially by the hand. “Yes,” he said, “I’ve heard of you, and of + your friend, too. Every one in Hong Kong knows how you two together + bearded old Aguinaldo in his den, and robbed him of most of his troops. It + did me good to read about it in the New York papers, too, and to know that + you are both getting your just measure of credit for the achievement.” + </p> + <p> + Archie blushed, and assured the admiral that he didn’t do very much, that + it was all owing to Bill Hickson’s bravery. “Oh, yes, I know,” laughed the + admiral, “you lay it to him, and he will most likely give you the credit. + I’ve seen your kind before. But I like you all the better for your + modesty, lad. Of course you and your friend can have a berth aboard ship, + and aboard the flag-ship, too, where I can see you both very often. You + can come aboard whenever you wish, and stay as long as you like.” + </p> + <p> + Archie could hardly thank the good officer for his kindness, and hurried + back to Manila. He found Bill Hickson waiting for him at the wharf, and + they rejoiced together over the good news. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0020" id="link2HCH0020"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XX. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP—BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN. +</pre> + <p> + IT was early one morning that Bill Hickson and Archie went aboard the + flag-ship, but all hands were on duty there, and the gallant cruiser was + raising anchor preparatory to sailing off on her errand of pacification by + means of shell and shot, The two newcomers were assigned a pleasant + stateroom where they would not be far from the cabin of the admiral + himself, and where they could step out of their door upon the + quarter-deck, and get all the fresh air they needed. It was a very + comfortable place, with two soft bunks, and every convenience usually + found aboard the fastest ocean liner. When the fellows saw it first, they + could hardly believe it could all be for them, but the officer assured + them that it had been given them by the admiral’s own orders. So there was + nothing for them to do but accept the kindness, and to settle themselves + down to having just as pleasant a time as possible during the coming weeks + at sea. + </p> + <p> + It was generally understood that the cruiser was to make a complete tour + around the island of Luzon, investigating every suspicious port, and + shelling towns when such action proved necessary to convince the rebels of + Uncle Sam’s superiority. The voyage was expected to occupy nearly a month, + for there was no reason for them to hurry, and the admiral said he would + like to take things easy. + </p> + <p> + Neither Hickson nor Archie had ever before been aboard a war-ship, and + they both found much to interest them during the first few days at sea. + Every movement of the crew, every action of the ship, was of great moment + to them, and they found no lack of entertainment in examining the great + guns and the equipment of the vessel in the way of firearms and + ammunition. Archie became much interested, too, in the science of + navigation, and spent much time with the captain on the bridge, or with + the pilot in the lookout, learning as much as possible about how the + movement of the vessel is controlled. Before long he had mastered the + rudiments of the art, and the captain told him that he might some day make + an excellent navigator if he continued to take as much interest in the + charts as he did now. And Archie told him that he was determined to master + as much as possible of the business during the voyage. Before he returned + to Manila he knew more about it all than even the captain would believe he + knew, and the knowledge was very valuable to him in days to come. + </p> + <p> + The two visitors aboard took their meals at the officers’ table, and they + kept the whole party interested for many days, with their stories of the + war in Luzon and of their very unusual adventures both at home and in the + Philippines. For it turned out that Bill Hickson had visited almost every + part of the United States, and had lived in all sorts of places. He had + been a cowboy in Texas, and a miner in the Klondike, and he had also been + a policeman in Chicago. He knew more stories to tell than any other man at + the table could think of, and he told them in a way that was wholly + charming. + </p> + <p> + Archie found that every one was very much interested in hearing about his + leaving home, and how he had happened to become a reporter on the New York + Enterprise. No one seemed to tire of listening to his stories of his + adventures in the great American city, and many of the officers told him + that they would give a good deal to have had his experiences in life. + </p> + <p> + And so it wasn’t long until the two chums were friendly with all on board, + and after awhile things went along as though Archie and Bill had never + lived elsewhere than aboard ship. There was nothing exciting for nearly a + week. The cruiser steamed slowly along the shore, sometimes stopping + entirely, while the officers levelled their glasses upon the beach, to see + whether there were any signs of the rebels being there. Sometimes, if + things looked suspicious, parties were sent ashore to reconnoitre, but + they seldom returned with news that would encourage the admiral to + investigate further. The days passed quietly, and the two convalescents + enjoyed themselves well enough. They were both much improved already by + the trip, and felt almost as well as ever. They each had a steamer chair, + and hour after hour they sat upon the deck and watched the ever-changing + panorama of the tropical shore. Now the beach would descend slowly to the + sea, and there would be numerous palm-trees and luxuriant vegetation + growing close within view, but again there would be steep clips, which + looked menacing to a ship in the dark. But it was all beautiful, cliffs or + sandy beach, and Archie thought he had seldom passed such a wholly + delightful week. + </p> + <p> + But, of course, it all became monotonous in time, and every one, even the + officers, longed for a change. The reconnoitring parties were sent out + more frequently now, and every one hoped each time that they would return + with news of the rebels, but they were always disappointed. The admiral + now determined to steam ahead more rapidly, so that they might get around + the western end of the island. It was evident that there were no + insurgents along this shore, and as there were no villages of any + consequence, either, he was anxious to reach the southern shore, where it + was known the rebels had recently been gathering. The towns, too, were + very numerous here on account of the excellent fishing, and it was hoped + that some good work might be accomplished for Uncle Sam before another + week passed. + </p> + <p> + Subsequent events soon proved the wisdom of the admiral’s plan. The + cruiser, it seemed, had no sooner rounded the western point than signs + were visible of rebel activity ashore. It was one Tuesday morning that a + village was sighted, built around a narrow inlet of the sea. When the + binoculars were levelled upon this harmless-appearing settlement, it was + soon perceived by the admiral that there were soldiers in the streets with + the rebel uniform, and that the insurgent flag was flying from the + administration building in the village square. All this was just what had + been expected, and there was great rejoicing aboard the cruiser. Every + man, without exception, almost, was anxious to be one of a party to be + sent ashore to attack the rebels, but the admiral hesitated before sending + any one at all. “It is impossible to tell from here,” he said, “how + numerous the rebels are, and it is quite possible that they may have a + large force of men in the village. If the appearance of the streets is any + sign, there must be quite a force of them in the place.” But every one + laughed at the very idea of there being a rebel company of any consequence + in the place, and the admiral was finally prevailed upon to send a boat + ashore, armed with thirty men. + </p> + <p> + “Remember,” he said, “if you come to grief, that I advised against this + venture. Don’t be too bold, or risk too much, for though I can shell the + place, that won’t help you any, once you are captives.” + </p> + <p> + But every one was anxious to be one of the party in the boat, and the + officers had a hard time making selections. “You can go, Archie, because + you’re a correspondent,” said the captain, “and you can go, Mr. Hickson, + because you’re a brave man,” and then he continued to pick out men until + the required number was secured. Of course there were many disappointed + ones left aboard the cruiser, but the captain assured them that they might + have their chance yet. + </p> + <p> + The boat was soon off, and it was noticed that there was great excitement + ashore as soon as the departure was observed. All the inhabitants, it + seemed, were gathered upon the beach, anxiously awaiting developments. + They seemed to be absolutely ignorant of what the presence of a war-ship + in their harbour meant, and were apparently not at all anxious as to the + outcome of this visit. One of the men told Archie that they had probably + never seen a war-ship before, and that they wouldn’t know a cannon at all. + “But we’ll let them know the meaning of our presence,” declared the + sailor, “if they shoot at us.” The boat drew every minute nearer the + shore, and it was soon perceived that there were many soldiers among the + crowd on the beach. Every one thought it remarkable that they should be so + quiet, but not one of the natives made a move until the boat was within + two hundred feet of the shore. Then one of the rebel soldiers suddenly + raised his rifle and fired at the boat. The lieutenant in command stood up + in the boat and gave the order to return the fire, and a perfect volley of + shot was poured into the crowd, which immediately scattered in every + direction. The rebel soldiers, however, seemed determined to stand their + ground, and they were so numerous, and kept up such a steady fire, that it + was deemed best to return to the cruiser, which was signalling for this + action on their part. So the boat was turned about as quickly as possible, + and the sailors pulled for the cruiser, amid the derisive yells of the + Filipinos, who had gathered again upon the beach. The rebel soldiers + continued their firing, but were such poor marksmen that but three of + their shots took effect. One sailor was shot in the arm, another in the + side, and still another was shot in the leg as he stood up to take aim at + the rebels. None of these wounds, it was afterward discovered, were at all + serious, though they were enough to arouse the anger of the entire crew. + </p> + <p> + When the boat reached the cruiser again, preparations were at once begun + for bombarding the town. The natives still stood upon the shore, and it + could be seen that they were immensely proud of their present victory. It + was amusing, then, to see the change in their behaviour when the great + six-inch gun of the cruiser belched forth a cloud of fire and smoke, and a + burning shell landed in the village street, apparently just in front of + the administration building, which was soon afire. The poor natives fled + in every direction, and the rebel soldiers followed their noble example, + and took to their heels, too. Another shell followed the first, and soon + several buildings were burning in the village. The admiral watched + developments carefully, and finally he decided that they would be glad to + surrender the village if another boat was sent ashore. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, the same boat started out again, with three new men in place + of those who were wounded, and for sake of effect the cruiser steamed + farther in toward shore. This time there were no crowds upon the beach, + and the thirty men marched to the burning buildings, where the natives + fell before them, begging for mercy. The soldiers were nowhere to be seen, + so the crew took possession of the town and slept there, in company with + thirty more sailors, that night. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0021" id="link2HCH0021"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + CONTINUING THE CRUISE—ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED—THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE’S + FRIEND—A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY—LONGING TO BE HOME + AGAIN. +</pre> + <p> + IT may go without saying that the sixty men from the cruiser had a very + interesting time before the night was over. The entire village was in a + constant uproar; the poor natives, horrified by what they had witnessed + during the afternoon, ran hither and thither, some even leaving the place + entirely and starting for the interior with their goods and families. The + rebel soldiers had evidently gone for good, and a small party sent out to + look for traces of them returned without learning anything of their + whereabouts. The bombardment of the village had certainly had great + effect. + </p> + <p> + It was only a tiny place, with possibly not more than a thousand + inhabitants, but there were evidences that it had been formerly a + flourishing town. There were fine residences in some of the streets, which + were now quite deserted, and there were some very respectable business + houses in the village square. All these had once been occupied by Spanish + traders, who had been driven away when the rebels came, and if the + insurgents had never come the town might now have been a booming place. + But the rebels were lazy, as usual, and did no work, so that now the fine + residences were vacant, and the business blocks stood empty. + </p> + <p> + Some of the sailors looked about for a casino, where they might be able to + find entertainment of some kind for the evening, but every place of + amusement was closed, and the streets were deserted. Since the occurrences + of the afternoon all the people had locked themselves into their houses, + to await the departure of the Americans. But, even though the casino was + closed, the Yankees managed to have a good time. They sang and danced and + played the banjo until an early hour in the morning, when they finally + went to sleep, leaving only two for a night watch, for there was no danger + that the insurgents would return, after their engagement, in which they + had lost six men. + </p> + <p> + When morning came, some officers landed from the cruiser, and all the + villagers were summoned to the public square and made to swear allegiance + to the American flag. + </p> + <p> + In the afternoon the cruiser steamed away again on her errand of forcible + pacification, and more days of quiet watchfulness followed, as the vessel + steamed along near the shore. There were many small villages along this + coast, but all of them seemed peaceful and free of insurgents. The captain + even said that some of the people in them probably didn’t know that there + had ever been a war between Spain and the United States. Archie, who had + enjoyed his experiences during the occupation of the last village, now + began to be impatient again at the long quiet. The day when the cruiser + bombarded the administration building would be a memorable one to him, and + the succeeding events were just such as he had been longing to see for + months. And then to think that he had taken part in the occupation of the + village. It was all very wonderful, but very real, too, and for several + days he took much pains in writing an article for the paper describing the + events leading up to and including the capture of the village. And in the + narration Bill Hickson was an important character. He had again proved + himself a hero of the first water by insisting that the boat proceed when + the first attempt was made to land, and by being the first man ashore when + a landing was finally effected. He was a leader in everything that was + done. He marched at the head of the squad when they marched through the + streets of the village, calling all the people to assemble in the public + square, and he stood beside the officers with his rifle handy when the + ceremony of swearing allegiance was gone through with. When it was all + over he was called to the admiral’s cabin aboard the cruiser and + congratulated for being so brave and so ever-ready to lead in any + dangerous undertaking; but Bill Hickson simply blushed and said he hadn’t + done “anything worth mentionin’.” The men aboard thought differently, + however, and he was even a greater hero after this adventure than he had + been before. + </p> + <p> + Archie, too, received the congratulations of the admiral. “You have been a + brave boy,” he said, “and deserve much credit for showing so little fear + in the face of danger. I hope you will be rewarded upon your return to New + York for your bravery while with us here.” Archie, too, blushed, and said + that he had no doubt that Mr. Van Bunting would treat him fairly when he + reached New York again. + </p> + <p> + And Archie was now beginning to wish that the time for his return would + soon arrive. It was the month of February, and he had been away from + America an age, it seemed to him. He felt that he had seen most of what + there was to be seen in the Philippines, and when this naval tour was over + with, the active campaigning would no doubt cease until the rainy season + was over. So for many reasons the boy wished he might be able to start + home soon, and as the days passed he became more and more anxious to + receive word from the Enterprise that he might return. He had sent many + interesting articles to the paper, and would be able to write many more + just as interesting upon his return, so he felt that the editors wouldn’t + object to his early return. + </p> + <p> + For an entire week the cruiser found no signs of the rebels, but at last + there came a day when they were steaming slowly along near the shore, and + saw, back among the trees, some specks of white resembling tents in shape. + Immediately the whole vessel was excited, and there was much gossip and + wonder as to what the tents could be doing there. The admiral at last + decided to send two boats ashore to investigate, and gave strict orders + that the men should be cautious and not allow themselves to be ambushed or + caught in a trap of any kind. Of course Archie and Bill Hickson were among + the crew of the first boat, and each was as fully armed as any of the + sailors. + </p> + <p> + The two boats pulled quietly for the shore, keeping close together, and + they were beached at the same time. The natives, or whoever occupied the + tents, had evidently not yet discovered them, and the men halted upon + landing to decide what they had better do. The tents could be plainly seen + through the trees, and there was smoke rising from a fire somewhere in the + neighbourhood, but there were no noises which could be heard so far away. + It was decided to march up to the tents and find out who occupied them, + and the column kept close together as they advanced, for things were so + quiet it was feared the rebels, if such they were, might be in ambush. + </p> + <p> + The men got within a hundred feet of the camp, when they heard several + terrible yells in succession, and several natives ran out from behind one + of the tents, screaming at the top of their voices, and not pausing to + look around at all. The officer in command of the company of men was much + disturbed by this demonstration, and, without pausing a moment, gave the + order to fire. Five of the natives fell immediately, but the other six + kept running, and soon disappeared among the trees on the other side of + the clearing. The men stood still awaiting developments, but though they + waited several minutes nothing more was heard, and it was decided that the + camp must be deserted. So they marched up to the tents, and then the + officer almost fainted, for inside the first one he entered was standing + an American flag, and scattered about were the accoutrements and camp + equipment belonging to an American force in the field. There was now no + doubt but what the tents belonged to an American regiment, and that the + fleeing natives were either servants or prisoners, more likely the former. + The men were all much excited at this discovery, and the officer ordered + the natives to be looked after at once. It was found, however, that all + but one were dead, and he expired within an hour, so that the men felt + that they had killed five innocent men, a thought which made some of them + weep, hardened though they were. + </p> + <p> + It was now decided to await the return of the regiment, which was out, the + officer thought, on a practice march, and could not possibly be gone much + longer. So the men lounged about on the grass for more than an hour. Then, + about three in the afternoon, a rifle-shot was heard in the near distance, + and instantly every man was on his feet, rifle in hand. “They must have + found the rebels,” said the officer; “so be ready, men, to help them out, + should they be retreating to the camp.” This supposition turned out to be + correct, for a few minutes later some members of the regiment came running + into camp and announced that a large body of insurgents was after them. + Later the remainder of the regiment followed, and the joy of the colonel + when he found these unexpected reinforcements was very great. “There must + be more than fifteen hundred rebels,” he said, “and they will all be on us + here in less than an hour, for their sharpshooters have been following us + up for a long time. I was beginning to think that we would be unable to + fight them, for they seem to be well equipped, but with the cruiser to + kelp us we can whip them at once. The thing to do will be to let them come + on without suspecting that we have received any help, and then, when the + fight is getting a little warm, or they are about to charge us, let the + cruiser fire a few shells into the air, and it will all be over. Most of + them are country troops, and have never seen a cruiser, so they will be + too much frightened to speak when they hear the thunder of the guns, and + see the shells explode in the air. And then they have a village about + three miles back from the coast, and if you can send a few shells into + that village it will simply ruin the insurgents. + </p> + <p> + “I had no idea of meeting these rebels,” the colonel then explained. “I + took the men out for a little practice marching, but before we had gone + far we encountered these sharpshooters, and later discovered that they had + all these men about a mile and a half away. Then we decided to return to + camp as quickly as possible, to get more ammunition, and we felt, too, + that we would stand a better chance of resisting them here among the + trees. But now we will soon finish them up, if you will just send a man + out to tell the admiral of our plans.” Archie immediately volunteered to + carry the information, and as he could be spared better than one of the + soldiers or sailors, he was permitted to undertake the mission. So he + started out, and was on board the cruiser in a very short time. The + admiral was dumbfounded to learn that American troops were encamped on the + shore, and in imminent danger of being defeated, and he at once set about + giving orders with great vigour. “We will show them how they can attack a + small regiment of Americans with their ridiculous army,” he declared, and + at once gave orders for the vessel to move inshore. “But wait,” he cried, + a minute later, “I see by my chart that there is a deep stream about a + mile up the coast, and if I am not mistaken we can enter this stream and + perhaps get very near the advancing rebels. We may even be able to destroy + them before they have a chance at our soldiers,” and the old admiral + almost danced in the enthusiasm of this idea. So the cruiser steamed + rapidly up the coast, and was soon at the mouth of the stream, which + seemed to be the estuary of some great river. Then she steamed up-stream, + and, sure enough, the admiral soon discovered the rebels marching rapidly + along the road, about half a mile away. They had evidently not perceived + the cruiser, on account of the high reeds growing along the banks, and the + admiral gave orders to begin firing. + </p> + <p> + The first shell rose high in the air and exploded with a deafening + thunder, and when the smoke cleared away it was seen that the insurgents + were almost paralysed with fright, and had just discovered the cruiser in + the river. But this first shell had not hurt any one, and another was + immediately ignited. This one exploded over the very heads of the troops, + and many of them must have been killed. Those who were not either killed + or wounded turned about and began to run, and their leaders were powerless + to make them stand their ground. One shell followed another from the + cruiser, and hundreds must have been killed outright among the insurgents. + Finally they were all running, and it was soon perceived that the + Americans had advanced, and were now pursuing them with great energy. So + the cruiser could fire no more shells, and the admiral ordered her about + and back to the anchorage onshore. + </p> + <p> + It would take many pages to describe in detail the events of the remainder + of that afternoon, as Archie witnessed them from the deck of the cruiser, + and learned of them later from Bill Hickson. The insurgents were nearly + all killed or taken prisoners, and it was found that they numbered nearly + two thousand. So it was a great achievement to have vanquished them all. + The affair turned out to have been the greatest victory of the war, so + far. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0022" id="link2HCH0022"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS—A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO + RETURN TO NEW YORK—BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE left the cruiser when she was once more at anchor, and, going + ashore to the American camp, he found things in a very lively condition at + the close of the afternoon’s battle. Every man was very jubilant over the + retreat which had been turned into a great victory, and Archie was + congratulated on having been the lucky man to carry the news of the coming + of the rebels to the admiral. The officers were all in the best of humour, + except the colonel, who felt somewhat sad on account of the death of his + five faithful servants, as the men first shot turned out to have been. + </p> + <p> + “There were never any better men than they,” said the colonel, “and I + would almost as soon my own men had been shot.” But he bore the ship’s + company no malice for their mistake, which he said was a very natural one. + </p> + <p> + After the capture of so many rebels, and the killing of so many others, it + was felt that the rebel army in this part of the island was pretty well + disbanded, and that it would soon disappear altogether. It had been known, + from the very beginning of hostilities, that there was a large force of + insurgents somewhere in this neighbourhood, but not until to-day had the + colonel seen anything of them. But it was impossible, all the officers + said, that there could be any more troops about, for these two thousand + represented a very considerable portion of the entire rebel army. And now + that these were done away with, the colonel said there was no need of his + remaining any longer in this place, and that he would like to get back to + Manila as quickly as possible. Hearing this, the admiral said he thought + room could be made for all the men aboard the cruiser, and that they could + all return at once if they so desired. This generous offer was at once + accepted by the colonel, and the next day the work of embarkation began. + By night every man was aboard, and a place of some kind had been found + where he could sleep, but of course, every portion of the vessel was much + overcrowded. This only made things all the more lively, however, and + Archie, as well as all the others, thought he had never enjoyed any trip + so much as these three days spent in getting back again to Manila. There + was always fun of some sort going on. If some one wasn’t dancing, there + was sure to be singing. And then there were several ingenious games which + were invented for the occasion, so that time never passed slowly. Indeed, + there were many who were sorry when the capital was finally reached, but + Archie was not among these, for he expected some mail to be awaiting him + from the editor of the Enterprise. And he hoped that in this mail he would + find permission to return to New York. + </p> + <p> + All officials were very much surprised when the cruiser anchored off + Cavité, but the admiral explained that he thought it no use to spend more + time in touring the island, even though the month which it was supposed to + take him had not yet expired. He said that he felt sure there were no more + insurgent villages along the coast, because it was perfectly evident, from + all signs, that the rebels were all in one division. And this division, of + course, had been vanquished four days previously. + </p> + <p> + When the report of the engagement went the rounds there was much + enthusiasm, for it was felt that at last some progress was being made + against the insurgents. The admiral was a popular hero at once, and + Archie, with Bill Hickson, was again the centre of admiration and interest + in the old palace, where they both returned. + </p> + <p> + Archie was surprised to find no mail awaiting him, but he was not + discouraged, and wrote two long articles to send to the Enterprise. One + described the great engagement, and the other was descriptive of the daily + life aboard ship upon the return to Manila. These articles, with the + others he had written during the latter part of the cruise, were sent off + at once, and Archie felt confident that they would be read with great + interest by Mr. Van Bunting. And now the days passed very pleasantly in + Manila. He had a great deal to tell his comrades in the old regiment, for + none of them had been out of Manila since he left, and were very anxious + indeed to hear about the events of the round-the-island tour. And Archie + was very willing to tell them all he could, for he had been much + interested in the entire voyage, and never tired of talking about it. + </p> + <p> + Still, while things were very pleasant, and he was having a good time in + many ways, Archie was very anxious to see New York again and to get back + to America. And then, what was even more important with him, was the + knowledge that he would certainly be allowed to visit his mother upon his + return. Therefore he was a very happy boy when he one day received two + letters from the Enterprise office, one from Mr. Van Bunting, and one from + Mr. Jennings. They were both very encouraging and very friendly. Mr. Van + Bunting wrote to tell Archie how delighted they all had been with his + success in finding interesting things to write about, and he enclosed a + check for three hundred dollars, which he thought “would come in handy + now.” The letter from Mr. Jennings was of later date, and stated that he + had prevailed upon Mr. Van Bunting to allow Archie to return to New York, + to work upon the Evening Enterprise. It was a very delightful letter, + Archie thought. “We believe,” wrote Mr. Jennings, “that we can use you + here to very good advantage, and we will be glad to have you return as + soon as possible. I enclose two hundred dollars to pay your expenses home + again.” + </p> + <p> + So now it was all settled that Archie was to leave Manila for New York, + and, now that it was sure he was going, he felt somewhat reluctant to + leave the soldiers with whom he had become friendly, and to get away from + all this life of adventure which had been so interesting and so delightful + in many ways. It was hard, too, to leave the dear old palace in Manila, + through which he had wandered so often, and every room of which had for + him some story of a Spanish prince or a great governor-general, wealthy + and wise. There would be none of all this at home or in New York, but then + there would be something better; there would be mother, and the old grape + arbour, and the Hut Club. + </p> + <p> + On investigation, Archie found that the quickest way to get home would be + to travel by way of Hong Kong and Yokohama, taking the steamer from there + to San Francisco. It would take him more than a month to make the trip, + and, as it was now the second week in March, he could hardly expect to + reach New York before the first of May. He at once cabled Mr. Jennings + that he would leave at once for Hong Kong, and received an answer telling + him to do so by all means, and to continue to write letters describing his + trip. Archie knew that these letters would probably not reach New York any + sooner than he would, but he did write them, anyhow, and he did see some + of them appear in the paper after his arrival. + </p> + <p> + Archie was overjoyed to learn one day that Bill Hickson had received + permission from the commanding general to return to the United States, and + he at once hunted up the bashful hero, and insisted that he leave at once, + and make the trip with him. This was finally agreed to, and when it was + settled that the two old chums were to travel homeward together the whole + camp in Manila was interested in the news. They were both very popular, + and almost every night before their departure there was a pleasure party + of some kind arranged for them. One night they would give a regular + “stag,” as they called them, and then again they would arrange a sort of + musicale, at which there would be clog-dancing, banjo music, and various + games to increase the fun. + </p> + <p> + The four days passed very quickly indeed, and at last the day for sailing + arrived. There was a great throng at the pier to see them off, and there + was no end of good wishes and stories of the good times now gone by. When + the steamer finally moved out into the open, there were three cheers each + for Archie and “brave Bill Hickson,” in which every man appeared to join + with all his heart and voice. And there were tears in Archie’s eyes at + having to part from such true friends. It was hard to tell, too, when he + would ever see any of them again. He realised that hereafter his path and + theirs would probably lie in different directions. He was going to New + York to work as a reporter, and they, if they were not killed in battle, + would be scattered in all parts of the great United States, at the + mustering out of the troops. It was all very sad, and even Bill Hickson + seemed to feel the solemnity of the occasion, for he had nothing to say + for many hours after the vessel had started on its journey. + </p> + <p> + Archie, too, felt homesick at having to leave, and they went to bed very + early, apparently feeling that the best thing under such circumstances was + to be asleep. And when morning came they both felt somewhat better, for + Archie arose filled with hope for the future, and more anxious than ever + to reach home. Bill Hickson, too, was not loath to return to the United + States, even though he had no relatives waiting there to welcome him. The + poor fellow had been through a great deal while in the Philippines, and + his constitution was almost wrecked by the constant strain to which he was + subjected. He had never fully recovered from his accident of several weeks + before, and he felt that he needed a rest from the constant excitement and + worry of life in the army. He was tired, too, of being a spy. He had never + relished the work, but he had realised how necessary it was for the + Americans to have some one to follow up Aguinaldo and let the general know + of his movements. “They’ll be a long time catching him now,” he said, time + and again, to Archie. “He’s a much shrewder man than they think, and he + knows his Philippine Islands like a book. He can go from one place to + another without the Americans ever knowing where he disappeared to, and + without some one to follow him they will never be able to learn anything + of his movements.” + </p> + <p> + Bill had received nearly two hundred dollars in back pay, so he felt quite + rich, and Archie told him that if he should happen to run out, and need + more money, he would be very glad to furnish it to him, For Archie was now + determined to take Bill Hickson to New York, and introduce him to Mr. Van + Bunting, feeling sure that the wise editor would thank him for bringing to + his attention a man at once so interesting and so worthy as this hero of + the war had proved himself to be. But for the present Bill would discuss + nothing of the kind. He was thoroughly content to sit beside Archie on the + warm steamer deck, and watch the ever varied surface of the Indian Ocean. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0023" id="link2HCH0023"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXIII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + HONG KONG—A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO—HONOLULU AGAIN—ARRIVAL IN SAN + FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS—ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN + NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR. +</pre> + <p> + AFTER a short and pleasant voyage they reached Hong Kong, and Archie found + this city to be much more interesting than he had expected to find it. It + was charming, he thought, to run across a place which combined the + conveniences of England and America with the picturesque oddities of China + and Japan, and he enjoyed himself to the utmost during the two days they + spent there. Bill Hickson enjoyed the place, too, and they would both have + liked to remain longer had it been possible for them to do so, but they + were anxious to see something of Japan before sailing for San Francisco, + and their steamer was due to leave Yokohama in eleven days. + </p> + <p> + But they did enjoy Hong Kong to the utmost while they were there. They + called first, of course, upon the American consul, whom they found to be + an exceedingly pleasant man. They learned, to their great surprise, that + he had read of Archie Dunn, and of Bill Hickson, too, in the Enterprise, + and Archie began to think that his paper had a much wider circulation than + even the editors claimed for it. He thought it very remarkable, at first, + that a man living in Hong Kong should have read about his Philippine + experiences in a New York paper, but of course, after he thought of it + awhile, it didn’t seem such a very remarkable thing, after all. And after + this, when they heard of people having read of them, they weren’t so much + surprised, having come to realise the tremendous circulation of this + paper. + </p> + <p> + The consul did all in his power to make their stay in Hong Kong pleasant. + He was anxious to have a formal dinner for them, but Bill Hickson said + that he would much prefer not having to dress up, and Archie was willing + for Bill’s sake to forego the honour. So they spent their two days in + going about the city, visiting the quaint Chinese shops, and seeing + everything of particular interest. They found many wonderful things to + look at, and Archie said that he couldn’t imagine any more delightful + place; but Bill told him to wait until they reached Japan, for he’d find + that much more charming than Hong Kong. “I’ve been there before,” said + Bill, “and I know what I’m talkin’ about, and I say there ain’t no such + place on earth as Japan for interestin’ things to look at, and pleasant + things to do.” And when, a few days later, Archie was initiated into some + of the mysteries of Japanese life by his experienced friend, he was + willing to admit the truth of all he had heard concerning the land of the + chrysanthemum. He found everything quite beyond his expectations. The + people themselves were more quaint in their dress and manners than he had + expected to find them, and the houses and the pagodas were much more + picturesque than he had imagined they would be. And the whole atmosphere + of the country seemed filled with romance and history, and it wasn’t at + all hard to believe that the Japanese have longer family trees than any + other nation on earth. + </p> + <p> + They spent a few days travelling through the provincial districts of the + little kingdom, and then they reached Tokio, where Bill was anxious to + spend several days. “I know some folks here who can take us around and + show us everything that’s worth seeing,” he said, “and we can spend our + time to better advantage here than anywhere else I know of.” And sure + enough, Bill did know some people in the capital city, some pleasant + English people, who had met the open-hearted Westerner when he was in the + city years before, and who had at once appreciated the true nobility of + his character. They were very kind to Archie,—so kind that the lad + thought he had never before met such pleasant people. And they were + thoroughly interested in all his adventures, from the time he left home + late in the preceding summer until now. He had to tell them all about his + New York adventures, and also about their experiences together in the + Philippines, and his new friends showed the greatest interest in all he + had to say, and seemed to find it all vastly entertaining. They were + anxious, Archie thought, to make him have a very good time in Tokio, to + make up for some of his hard experiences, and if this were indeed their + object, they succeeded admirably in accomplishing it. Every day was filled + with surprises, and every night Archie thought he had enjoyed himself more + this day than the day before. They travelled about the city so + persistently, on foot and in the quaint jinrikishas, that he felt that he + knew almost every part of Tokio, and he witnessed every side of native + existence, as well as the life in the foreign quarter. It was all + charmingly new and interesting, and, as in Hong Kong, they were both sorry + when the day for their sailing came around. And always since Archie has + declared that no one can be more kindly hospitable than the English. + </p> + <p> + The voyage from Yokohama to San Francisco was slow and monotonous, Archie + thought, for he was now very impatient to reach the United States, and he + had also grown very tired of travel by water. There were some very + pleasant passengers, but Archie couldn’t see that he had a much better + time than when he was peeling potatoes corning over. That was interesting + enough, anyhow. The only break in the monotony was the day they were + enabled to spend in Honolulu, and on that day Archie went again to some of + the places he had seen during his first visit to the attractive city. And + he called again upon some of the friends of his first visit, and found + that most of them had read of his great success as a war correspondent, + and of his many exciting experiences in the Philippines. They were all + profuse in congratulating him upon what he had accomplished, and every one + seemed to think he had been very successful indeed. + </p> + <p> + While they were in Honolulu a vessel arrived, bound for Japan, and Archie + was delighted to find it was the same vessel upon which he had worked his + passage from San Francisco on his way to Manila. He went aboard and met + some of the friends he had made there, and found that they all knew now + who it was they had carried as chore-boy in the galley. They all seemed + glad to hear of his success, and to know that he was coming home as a + first-class passenger. The cook treated him with much deference, and + started to apologise for his treatment of Archie on the way over; but the + boy stopped him, and told him that no apology was necessary. “I think I + may have been an unwilling worker,” he said, “because of course I didn’t + like the work at all, and it was hard for me to take an interest in + peeling potatoes when I was looking forward to accomplishing such great + things in the Philippines.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh,” said the cook, “you was a fine worker. Sure, I ain’t had so good a + boy since.” And Archie laughed to see the change in opinion which is + sometimes brought about by a change in circumstances. + </p> + <p> + Archie enjoyed the city quite as much as before, but he was glad, + nevertheless, when the steamer continued her voyage east. And then he + began to count the days until they should arrive in San Francisco, and of + course these last days seemed the longest ones of the voyage. But they + gradually passed away, and as they steamed ahead, coming nearer every hour + to that dear land called “home,” both Archie and Bill began to wonder how + they would like it all, after their adventurous life in the Philippines. + Bill, in particular, was doubtful whether he would again be able to settle + down to a quiet existence in some small place, and Archie assured him that + he must live in New York, where he would be sure to find things lively + enough to suit him. + </p> + <p> + At last came the eventful day when the great steamer threaded her way + through the beautiful Golden Gate, and discharged her passengers at the + pier. As Archie and Bill had but little baggage, they were almost the + first ones to leave the vessel, and were hurrying away to find a hotel + where they could remain overnight when Archie felt some one touch him on + the shoulder, and, turning about and seeing no one he knew, was about to + go on, when a man introduced himself as being the San Francisco + correspondent of the Enterprise. “And these gentlemen here,” said he, “are + reporters from the newspapers here. They would be glad to have you say a + few words about your experiences during the last few months.” Archie was + quite dumbfounded. It had never occurred to him that he was a person so + important as to be interviewed, but he was willing and glad to accommodate + the reporters, and told them to accompany him to his hotel. Once there, he + answered all their questions, and didn’t find it hard at all to give them + his opinion of the situation in the Philippines, and what he thought + should be done by the government to stop the rebellion. “The President + will soon put an end to it,” he said, “if he can only have the support of + Congress. But as long as there are members of Congress fighting his + policy, the insurgents are going to continue their insane efforts to + establish an independent government.” And some of the reporters smiled to + hear so young a fellow talking about the policy in the Philippines. They + felt that he was well-informed, however, and put down every word he said. + </p> + <p> + The interviews over, Archie and Bill went early to bed. The Enterprise + correspondent had telegraphed the news of their arrival to New York, and + had received word from Mr. Van Bunting to send them on to New York at + once. So, early in the morning, the two started for the East, and the + train seemed to travel quite as slowly as the steamer. “It does seem good + to be in our own country again,” they said a hundred times during the days + that followed, and when they reached the Empire State and began their + journey down the Hudson River, Archie could hardly restrain his enthusiasm + at being again in his native commonwealth. + </p> + <p> + There was quite a delegation at the Grand Central Station to meet them. + Mr. Jennings was there in person, and he explained that Mr. Van Bunting + was waiting anxiously at the office to see him. Then there were reporters + from the various other city papers, who wanted interviews, but Archie was + told to say whatever he had to say in the columns of the Enterprise, so he + had to deny the reporters for the first time. Bill Hickson was introduced + at once, and became the lion of the hour. Every one had read of him, and + was glad to shake his hand, and poor Bill was quite bewildered by so much + attention. They didn’t linger long at the station, however, but hurried + down to the Enterprise office, where Mr. Van Bunting was awaiting them. He + grasped Archie’s hand in his as they entered, and cried, “Well done, my + boy, well done.” And Archie felt as if he had grown three feet that + instant. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0024" id="link2HCH0024"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXIV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + DOING “SPECIAL” WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER—INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS + MEN—CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS. +</pre> + <p> + THERE was so much to tell Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting, that Archie + didn’t get away from the Enterprise office until seven o’clock in the + evening. And what a lot they did say to each other during the afternoon! + Archie told of all his experiences, and found them all anxious to hear + about them. He learned, to his joy, that everything he had sent had been + printed, and that the articles had made a great hit with the public. “We + would have liked to keep you there longer, but we knew you must be worn + out, and then we want you to stay right here, now, and see if you cannot + get us some good interviews and articles of various kinds for the Evening + Enterprise. The paper has been losing ground somewhat, of late, and we + need some new life for its pages. Of course the morning paper profited + greatly by your articles, but the evening edition seemed very weak in + comparison, and we think it only fair to Mr. Jennings to let him have you + on his staff for awhile now. So if you are willing, you can start in + to-morrow as a member of the staff. We will see that you are well paid for + what you write, or we will put you on salary, whichever you like. You can + think it over, and in the morning you can tell us which plan you like + best.” + </p> + <p> + Archie wanted to ask for a few days’ absence to return home, but he felt, + somehow, that he ought not to ask it just now. So he contented himself + with writing a long letter to his mother, in which he enclosed a very + large check, money which he had not used on his return to New York. He + told her that he would be home just as soon as he could get off for any + length of time, and he knew that she would now be looking forward to the + visit every day. She had written him about the enthusiasm displayed by + every one over his achievements, and how proud she was of what he had + accomplished. “I think I am the proudest mother in the country,” she wrote + one day, and this sentence made Archie very happy, of course, and more + anxious than ever to return home. He received a letter, too, from Jack + Sullivan, telling him how much the boys all thought of his success, and + how every member of the Hut Club had longed time and again to be with him. + “It all reads just like some book,” Jack wrote, “and we are dying to have + you come home and tell us all about it.” Then his mother sent him + clippings from the town papers, eulogising his efforts, and calling him + the “coming man of the State.” All this was very pleasant and very + encouraging, and Archie couldn’t help having a kindly feeling for the + townsfolk who thought so much of him. + </p> + <p> + New York was as delightful as ever. It was now the last of April, and the + trees were all green with fresh leaves, and the numerous little parks + scattered over the city were looking their very best. The asphalt + pavements looked clean and elegant when Archie thought of some other + streets he had seen, and the tall office buildings lifted their ornate + domes and cupolas into a sky of clear blue. “Surely,” he thought to + himself, “this is the most charming city in all the world.” Fifth Avenue, + with its crowds of fashionable folk, and its throng of vehicles, was a + delight of which he never tired, and when he went into the Bowery, just to + see how things were looking now, he found it quite as interesting and as + dirty as in the fall. + </p> + <p> + But the first place he visited was the dear little square away down-town, + where he had lived during those few happy days spent in New York. It, too, + looked the same, only the flowers and grass were fresher now, and the + fountain seemed to flow more joyously, now that spring was here. The house + where he had lodged was as clean as ever, and Archie at once decided to + engage a room here, where he could have his New York home. So he called + upon the motherly landlady, and was glad to learn that the room he had + first was still vacant, and that he could take possession at once. + </p> + <p> + As before, when he came to this house, Archie was almost out of clothing, + so he went out and fitted himself with everything he needed. And this time + he felt able to buy the best to be had, for he thought he had now earned + the privilege to dress well if he liked. And then, when he had everything + he needed to wear, he went out and bought many pretty things for his room, + for he felt that he would like to have it just as cosy and home-like as + possible. He wasn’t able to do much at it this first night, but in the + succeeding days he furnished the place in a charming way, so that the + landlady said it was the “handsomest room in the house, sir.” The dear old + lady could hardly understand this great change in her lodger’s + circumstances. She worried about it very often, and discussed the question + with many of the neighbours. “He come here last fall looking mighty + poor-like, but, lawsy me, he’s as fine now as any man on the avenue.” And + she never did understand it until one day she learned that her lodger was + the “very young man who had been to the war in the Philippines, and writ + about his battles in the Enterprise.” + </p> + <p> + There was no ceremony when Archie began work on the evening paper. Mr. + Jennings told him that he thought they understood each other pretty well, + and that he could use his own discretion, very often, about getting + articles. “You can be as independent as you like, Archie,” he said, “and + use your own ideas as much as you like.” This pleased the boy very much + indeed. He was beginning to feel now that he had really won his spurs, and + that he was a full-fledged journalist. It seemed scarcely possible that it + had taken him little more than six months to make this great advance in + circumstances, and yet he could see himself a few months previous, + sleeping in the station-house. Now his days of poverty were surely over, + and he would have a clear path ahead of him to accomplish his great + ambition to be a successful author and writer of books. For the present, + it was good experience for him to be working upon the Enterprise, and he + felt that he ought to be very much contented, since there were men old + enough to be his father who were not earning as much money. + </p> + <p> + He liked the work upon the evening paper very much. He didn’t have to get + down early in the morning, and at three o’clock in the afternoon he was + always through. He was very glad indeed that there was no night work, for + he now spent his evenings in studying shorthand, which he thought might be + helpful to him in many ways. He didn’t have much routine work to do upon + the paper in the beginning, but he told Mr. Jennings that he would like to + get as much experience as possible, so the good editor gave him a lot of + regular reporting to do, as well as the special work which was daily + featured in the paper. This special work consisted of interviews with + various successful men. Archie had always felt a great admiration for men + who had “done something,” and as New York was simply filled with wealthy + and successful men, who had started as poor boys, he found a wide field + for work. He found it very interesting to meet these men of affairs, and + have them tell him of their early struggles, how they had begun on the + farm or in the factory, and had worked themselves up through industry and + perseverance to the high places they now occupied. He found it very easy + to get access to most of them, for they had all read of his experiences in + the Enterprise, and Archie found that his fame as the “Boy Reporter” was + quite general and widespread. Some of the great men were quite as much + determined to interview him as he was anxious to interview them, so that + he usually got along very well by telling them first of his own + experiences, and then asking them about their own boyhood days. It was + work that never became monotonous, for each day he saw a man quite + different in most respects from the man he had interviewed the day before, + and of course every one had something different to say. + </p> + <p> + These interviews proved very successful when published in the Evening + Enterprise, and Mr. Jennings had him continue them during all the weeks + Archie was connected with the paper. And of course he did other things, + too, work which took him into every part of the great city, looking up + this event, or investigating this reported disappearance or murder. Archie + was quite successful in this line, too, and, as he was being paid by the + column, his weekly income was something larger than he had ever dared to + hope for in all his life. He was now enabled to study his stenography at + the best school, and to indulge himself in many things which had been + denied him before. He could, for instance, attend the performances of + grand opera, and hear the great musical artists of the world. He was able, + too, to read the best literature, and he gradually learned to appreciate + all the many good things in life. He was very glad to find himself + broadening in such a way, for he realised that he would not always want to + be a “Boy Reporter,” and that he had better be developing his mind in + every possible way. + </p> + <p> + He had not been back long in New York before he met all his old friends. + One of the first upon whom he called was the good policeman who had been + so very kind to him when he had no place to sleep. The large-hearted man + was as enthusiastic over his success as if he had been his own son, and + Archie felt that here was one true friend upon whom he could always + depend. The policeman never tired of telling about that first night when + he found Archie walking up and down Broadway, and he always spoke of him + to the other officers as “that boy of mine.” So the boy, who was now a + full-fledged reporter, spent as much time with this friend as possible, + and many a time he sat at the station-house telling them all of his + adventures in the Orient. + </p> + <p> + Another friend whom he met was the great railway president with whom he + had travelled to Chicago on his way to San Francisco. Archie had liked + this man from the very first, and he felt that in him he would always find + a friend, because he had shown such interest in his first undertaking. And + when he called upon him in his elegant office, he received a very cordial + greeting. + </p> + <p> + “No, indeed,” said the great man of affairs, “I have never forgotten our + trip West together, and I have followed you with much interest through the + columns of the Enterprise. And I am glad that you are back again in New + York, for I hope to see a great deal of you. You must come up to my house + some evening and tell us all about yourself.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was naturally much surprised to receive an invitation of this kind, + but he resolved to accept it, nevertheless. + </p> + <p> + Bill Hickson was now employed in the Brooklyn navy yard. He had been + featured for several days in the Enterprise, and had enjoyed the + excitement of New York for awhile, but he decided he would like to be at + work. So one day Archie learned that he was working at the navy yard. + </p> + <p> + “I’ve got to be with Uncle Sam,” was all the reason Bill would give for + his action. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0025" id="link2HCH0025"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE—STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL—LIVING + AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS. +</pre> + <p> + IT was now September. Archie had been in New York the whole summer + through, attending carefully to his work on the Evening Enterprise, and + continuing his study of stenography. He had taken occasional trips to Long + Branch and Asbury Park on Saturday afternoons, but every other day he + spent in working up ideas for the paper, and each evening he devoted to + the shorthand school. By this time, though, he felt that he knew all that + was necessary of shorthand, and found himself more free to go about in the + evenings. He visited his friends more frequently, and sometimes spent + whole evenings in studying works on English literature, for he was + ambitious to know more of the great work he had decided to make his own. + This study was not really work to him, for his interest in everything + connected with literature was so great that he found a pleasure in reading + even the most classical books on the subject, and of course so much + reading of this sort did a great deal to educate his mind along this line + of work. + </p> + <p> + One evening in the early fall, Archie decided to accept the invitation of + Mr. Depaw, the railway president, to call. So he carefully dressed himself + in the best he had, and walked up Fifth Avenue and into the side street + where the great man had his home. He rang the bell and presented his card, + and waited in the drawing-room for an answer. The footman was gone but a + moment, and returning, announced that the family would be down directly. + Archie was very much pleased that he was to meet the entire family, and + looked about him with great interest at the elegant furnishings of the + room in which he sat. He couldn’t help thinking how lovely it must be to + have so many books, so many pictures, and so many works of art of every + kind. The boy thought then that he would like to be a wealthy man, just to + be able to gratify his desires for beautiful things. + </p> + <p> + He had to wait only a short time before the genial Mr. Depaw entered the + room, accompanied by several members of the family. Archie was greeted + very warmly, and introduced to every one, and then they immediately began + an animated conversation, in which Archie soon found himself taking an + active part, much to his surprise. He felt that he had never before + realised what a great gift it is to be able to talk entertainingly, and + this evening was a revelation to him in the ways of good society. He found + that every one was much interested in the story of his adventures, and he + talked more about them than for a long time past. He was now beginning to + feel that his Philippine experiences were an old story, but he learned + that they were quite as entertaining as ever to these people. But they did + not talk entirely about Archie. They realised that this would be + embarrassing to him, and they were careful to guide the conversation into + a discussion of music and literature, and whatever else they imagined him + to like. And so it was that the evening passed very quickly, and it was + time to leave before he knew it. Then he was asked to be sure to call + again, and Mr. Depaw, as he accompanied him to the door, requested him to + call at his office on the following Wednesday, if possible. Archie + promised, and walked home down the avenue, wondering what it could be that + Mr. Depaw wanted to talk to him about. He didn’t worry long about it, + however, but went home and to bed as quickly as possible, for he had + formed a habit of rising at six o’clock in the morning to study. + </p> + <p> + The days passed quickly until Wednesday, and the afternoon of that day + found Archie in the waiting-room of Mr. Depaw’s office. He had not long to + sit there after sending in his card, for the busy man received him as soon + as he could get rid of his present visitor. He shook Archie warmly by the + hand as he entered, and then, pulling two chairs together, they sat down. + “I have been thinking for some time,” said Mr. Depaw, “that I need a sort + of private secretary. Of course I have men here at the office who take + dictation from me, and who fulfil the duties of a secretary to a certain + extent, but I want a young man who can attend somewhat to my personal + affairs; I want one whom I can trust, and one who is likely to grow as he + works along, so that eventually he may be able to fill any place I may + have open for him.” Then he stopped a moment, and Archie felt his heart + beating very fast beneath his coat. He waited almost breathlessly to hear + what Mr. Depaw would say next. + </p> + <p> + “Ever since I met you first,” he at last went on, “I have somehow thought + that you are the kind of a young fellow I would like. You are ambitious, + you are persevering, and you are willing to learn. You say, too, that you + know shorthand, and I know that you are a good penman. You have seen quite + a little of the world, I am sure, and I think you can prove yourself equal + to almost any occasion. The only question is whether you will care to give + up reporting for a position of this kind. I can assure you that I will pay + you as much as you are earning now, and I shall be glad to offer you a + home at my house, because I shall want you at my right hand all the time. + Do you think you will care to take the place?” + </p> + <p> + Archie could hardly speak, it was all so wonderful, but finally he + recovered himself sufficiently to explain his hesitancy in accepting the + position. “I would like just one day,” he said, “to consult with my + friends on the newspaper. You see Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting have + been very good to me, and I shouldn’t care to leave them now if they + object very strongly.” + </p> + <p> + “That’s quite right, quite right,” said Mr. Depaw. “I can appreciate your + feelings, and you can tell the editor that you will have some time for + writing, and that you will contribute occasional articles to his paper.” + Archie was now delighted. “Oh, thank you,” he cried. “I am sure I can come + now.” + </p> + <p> + “Well, come in at this time to-morrow,” said Mr. Depaw, “and let me know + what you have decided to do.” + </p> + <p> + Archie hurried at once to Mr. Jennings’s office to tell him the good news. + He wondered how his friend would take it, but all his fears were soon put + at rest. “Archie,” said Mr. Jennings, “this is the best opportunity you + can ever have to improve yourself in every way. Mr. Depaw is a man highly + respected all over the country, and a man who is known to be extraordinary + in many ways. Association with such a man will do more for you than four + years in college, and you will make a mistake if you do not accept his + offer. Of course we shall all be sorry to lose you here, but, as Mr. Depaw + says, you will have some time for writing, and we hope you will always + continue to do some work for us.” + </p> + <p> + Archie could almost have thrown his arms about Mr. Jennings’s neck to hug + him for his splendid feeling, and when, a little later, Mr. Van Bunting + said practically the same thing, he felt that he had never known two such + men. He assured them both that he would never forget them, but would try + and spend as much time as possible in the Enterprise office. + </p> + <p> + The next day he called again on Mr. Depaw, and told him of his decision to + accept the place, and the good man seemed overjoyed. “I will see that you + never forget it, Archie,” he said. It was arranged for him to begin work + the very next day. “You can transfer your things to my house as soon as + you like, for your room is waiting for you, and I will begin to-morrow to + teach you how to do things.” + </p> + <p> + And now Archie found it hard to leave the dear little room in the quaint + old square, which was looking now just as when he saw it first. The leaves + in the trees were turning brown and gold, and Archie realised that he had + been away from home more than a year. “Oh, I must go back soon,” he said + to himself, “or I shall simply die of homesickness.” + </p> + <p> + In a couple of days he was installed as a member of the Depaw household, + and he soon felt at home there. Every one was very kind to him, he was + given a handsome room, and everything seemed almost perfect. One of the + best things about it all was that he had access to the fine library, and + he longed for the long winter evenings when he could devour the many + interesting books he saw there. He was soon initiated into his work, and + it was much easier than he had expected. Mr. Depaw, of course, started him + very gradually, so that he learned as he went along. Every morning at + eight o’clock he was in the library with Mr. Depaw, taking dictation, and + receiving instructions for the day. They remained together here until ten + o’clock, when Mr. Depaw either walked or drove to his office. Archie + always accompanied him, and took charge of some of the mail there, + attending to it during the morning. Then at noon he returned to the house, + where he spent the afternoon in writing the letters which had been + dictated in the morning, and in doing various things for Mr. Depaw. The + evenings he always had to himself, and he had no difficulty in finding + enough to do at home without going out. He almost invariably passed the + evenings in reading, but occasionally he was asked to accompany the family + to some musical event at the opera house, for they had soon learned of his + love for music. + </p> + <p> + In work and study the winter passed quickly and happily for Archie, who + now felt quite at ease amid his elegant surroundings. His only wish was + that he might go home, and as spring approached Mr. Depaw promised him + that he should have a short vacation. The suggestion of Mr. Depaw that + Archie’s mother come to New York for a week was heartily accepted by + Archie, but when he wrote home Mrs. Dunn replied that she would rather + wait for Archie at home. She had never visited New York, and felt that she + wouldn’t like it. + </p> + <p> + Bill Hickson came over very often from the navy yard, and was always a + welcome visitor at Mr. Depaw’s office. He didn’t seem to care for his work + in Brooklyn, however, and Archie finally requested a place for him about + the elegant new station which the road had just constructed in the city. + Mr. Depaw very readily gave him an excellent position, one which he could + keep always if he so desired. And Bill was highly pleased with his new + work, so much so that he surprised them all one day in the spring by + leading into the once a young lady whom he introduced as his wife. Of + course Archie was very much pleased at this new development, for he had + often thought that his friend must be very lonely, living in a + boarding-house. + </p> + <p> + The days were all busy ones for Archie now. He had learned the work so + thoroughly that he was given more than ever to do, and he still continued + to write, too, for the Enterprise. He worked too hard, however, and in + April he looked so thin that Mr. Depaw sent him home for a week’s rest. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0026" id="link2HCH0026"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXVI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + DECIDES TO VISIT HOME—A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN—A PUBLIC + CHARACTER NOW—DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB—DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL— + A TELEGRAM FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE. +</pre> + <p> + IT was a beautiful April day. There had been a light shower in the + morning, and now everything looked as fresh and green as possible all + along the railway. Archie lay back in his comfortable Wagner seat, + admiring the beauties of spring, and thinking, too, of the days he spent + in walking along this very road. It seemed hard to believe that he was now + secretary to the president of this railroad, and that he was returning + home, after a year and a half, a very successful young man. He had much to + think of in the hours it would take him to reach the little town. He tried + to remember everything about the place, and his mother as he saw her last, + and it wasn’t at all difficult for him to do so. But, oh, how he hoped + that things had not changed! He almost dreaded going home for fear he + would find things different. + </p> + <p> + He had changed, that much was sure. He knew that he had grown to look much + older than his years, and he knew that he was not looking particularly + strong. He used to be so sturdy, and he had such a splendid colour in his + cheeks. Mother would be sorry to see him now, but of course he would be + sure to improve very much during the week he was to remain among old + friends. + </p> + <p> + He was very anxious to see his boy friends, the members of the Hut Club, + and the boys and girls who were in his class at school. He had telegraphed + his mother that he was coming, so she would probably tell the boys about + it. He was sure they would be there. + </p> + <p> + Now the stations looked more familiar. This one just passed was near the + Tinch farm, and Archie remembered the days he spent working for old Hiram, + and how he had suffered. He wondered if the farmer had ever seen any + copies of the Enterprise. It would be very interesting to him to know that + his chore-boy was now a secretary to a millionaire. This next station he + remembered very well indeed, because he used to come here every fall to + visit the county fair, where he marvelled at the wonderful things he saw + in the side-shows. + </p> + <p> + And now the train was entering the limits of his own town. Here was the + old elevator, and the machine shop near the railway track. And, oh, there + was his own home, looking green and pleasant as the train sped by. It + almost brought tears to Archie’s eyes to think that he was so soon to see + his mother. Now they had reached the station, and he stood upon the car + platform ready to alight. My, what a crowd there was! and why did they + cheer as he made his appearance? All at once it dawned upon him that all + these people were here to meet him, and to bid him welcome home. He could + hardly speak as he found himself in his mother’s arms, and then he began + to shake the hands of the big crowd. They were all old friends, and then + there was the mayor, and the superintendent of schools, and quite a + delegation of leading citizens. How nice it was of them to welcome him in + this way! + </p> + <p> + After awhile the handshaking was over, and the mayor was able to get a few + minutes with Archie. “We are all very proud of what you have + accomplished,” he said, “and we want to give you a public reception + to-morrow night in the town hall, if you don’t object.” Archie stared + blankly at the mayor, and it was several moments before he realised the + meaning of the words. Then he was almost overcome. It was almost too good + to be true, it seemed, but he warmly thanked the mayor, and told him how + he appreciated the honour which they had done him. He said that he would + be glad to attend the reception. + </p> + <p> + The crowd was scattering now, and Archie, wild to reach home, took his + mother to a carriage, in which they drove rapidly out to the little house + among the trees and arbours. The old town looked beautiful in every way. + The great maple and oak trees along the road were green with new leaves, + and every dooryard was bright with snowballs and yellow roses. “This is + the very best time of the year,” he said to his mother, “and I am the very + happiest boy in all the world.” + </p> + <p> + “And I am the happiest mother,” was the answer. Then they sat in silence + until they reached the old home. They entered by the kitchen door, and, + once inside, and seated in the old cane rocking-chair, Archie bowed his + head in tears of joy at being home with mother once again. + </p> + <p> + The hours which followed were sweet with joy. Mrs. Dunn busied herself in + preparing the supper, and Archie hung around the kitchen, telling some of + the many things he had planned to tell. Mrs. Dunn was smiling, and Archie + thought her the sweetest mother any boy could have. She was changed + somewhat, but she looked very young to-day. + </p> + <p> + Supper over, Archie went over the fence to see the Sullivan boys, and he + found them looking much the same. He was truly glad to see them, and they, + of course, were glad to see him, too, though at first they were just a + little bashful, remembering, no doubt, all the things which had happened + to Archie since they saw him last. The boys were soon telling all about + the Hut Club, though, and Archie learned to his joy that it was still a + flourishing organisation. “We spoke of you every time we were together,” + said Jack, “and we always wished you were back again.” Archie was + delighted to hear that he had been missed, and all at once an idea came to + him which he put into execution three days later. He determined to give an + elegant dinner to this club of boys, and the very next day he sent to New + York for a caterer to arrange it. He wanted it to be something finer than + any of the boys had ever seen, and it certainly turned out to be so. The + caterer did his best, and when, three days later, the Hut Club sat down + together for the first time in more than eighteen months, they partook of + a dinner which would have done credit to Mr. Depaw’s table. It was a + memorable night for them all, and every boy enjoyed himself. + </p> + <p> + Archie enjoyed this Hut Club dinner more than anything else while he was + at home, though of course the great event of his stay was the public + reception at the Town Hall on the second evening after his arrival. This + was a truly grand affair. The town authorities hired a brass band, which + played inside the hall and out, and there was such a crowd in attendance + that many were turned away from the doors. It was a night that Archie will + never be able to forget. He sat on the platform, in company with the mayor + and other town officials, and he listened to several speeches + congratulating him on what he had accomplished since leaving the town. + Then he had to get up and tell them all of his experiences, from the time + he left until now. He told it in a simple manner, but from the close + attention he received it was evident his audience was deeply interested. + When he had finished, there were calls for “three cheers for Archie Dunn,” + and they were given with a will. Then Archie, rising from his seat, called + for “three cheers for the President of the United States,” and they, too, + were given, for Archie had told them all his feelings on the subject of + the President’s policy in the war. After this there were three cheers for + Mr. Depaw, whom one man said would be the next United States Senator from + the State. The meeting closed with some cheers for the New York + Enterprise, and then followed a long siege of handshaking for Archie, who + stood beside his mother on the floor in front of the platform. It was a + happy night for them both, and Mrs. Dunn said afterward that she could + never wish for anything more the rest of her life. + </p> + <p> + The fourth day of his visit was a Sunday, and, to Archie’s joy, brave Bill + Hickson and his wife came up from the city to spend the day. What a jolly + time they had, all day long! They went to church in the morning, where + they saw all the people, it seemed, whom they hadn’t seen before, and in + the afternoon there were many callers at the little house. The evening was + spent quietly by the happy four, talking of old times and plans for the + future. The town authorities were anxious to give Bill Hickson a reception + while he was in town, but the bashful hero declined the honour, and + returned with his wife to New York by the midnight train. + </p> + <p> + During the two succeeding days Archie talked a great deal with his mother, + and finally gained her consent to come to New York to live in a year’s + time. Mrs. Dunn had never really understood that Archie had so good a + position, but now that she realised what a splendid beginning he had made, + she was very willing to come and keep house for him. This question + settled, everything seemed wholly delightful in the cosy home, and Archie + settled down to enjoy the two remaining days of his visit in quiet rest. + He had already much improved during his stay, and was sure of going back + to the city feeling much better than for a long time past, and this made + Mrs. Dunn very happy. + </p> + <p> + But Archie didn’t stay his week out at home. On the fifth night he + attended a reception in his honour at one of the neighbours’ houses, and + he was just in the midst of a description of Tokio when a messenger boy + entered with a telegram for him. He opened it at once, and read it aloud + to the company: + </p> + <p> + “Dear Archie,” it said, “return as soon as possible. I sail for Europe on + Saturday’s steamer to remain six months, and wish you to accompany me.” It + was signed by Mr. Depaw, and there was great applause from the crowd when + he finished reading it. But Archie’s face was a study. He wasn’t sure + whether he wanted to go to Europe or not, but of course there was no + question about what he should do. He at once telegraphed a reply, saying + that he would reach the city to-morrow at noon, leaving home on the early + morning train. + </p> + <p> + Of course the reception soon broke up, and Archie walked quietly home with + his mother, who was saddened at the prospect of losing him so soon again. + She soon brightened, however, and began to plan things for him to do + abroad, and soon she entered into the preparation for his departure with + all her heart. But Archie was not so soon made glad, and he didn’t rest + until he made his mother promise to accompany him to the city on the + morrow to spend the two days previous to his departure in helping him get + ready. Mrs. Dunn wasn’t anxious to make the trip, but for Archie’s sake + she consented. + </p> + <p> + And early the next morning they left for the city, where the time passed + rapidly until the hour of the steamer’s sailing. At the pier they said + good-bye. Archie could hardly speak, but Mrs. Dunn was brave. “Archie,” + she said, “God has been with you so far and he will keep you yet. And + remember that a boy with honest ambition will always get along. You are + sure to have friends about you always, for you have proved that you + possess energy, perseverance and a good heart.” She said good-bye without + a tear, but as the steamer left the pier Archie saw, on looking back, a + sweet mother seated on a coil of rope, with her handkerchief to her eyes. + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + THE END. +</pre> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> <br /> <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + +***** This file should be named 4990-h.htm or 4990-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/9/4990/ + +Produced by Jim Weiler, and David Widger + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” + or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project +Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +“Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.” + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +“Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right +of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’ WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm’s +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. + +The Foundation’s principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation’s web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + </body> +</html> diff --git a/4990.txt b/4990.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..70575c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/4990.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4956 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Adventures of a Boy Reporter + +Author: Harry Steele Morrison + +Posting Date: March 23, 2009 +Release Date: January, 2004 [EBook #4990] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + + + + +Produced by Jim Weiler + + + + + + + + +THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER + +by Harry Steele Morrison + +1900 + + +CONTENTS. + +CHAPTER I. + +LIVING IN THE COUNTRY--LIFE AT SCHOOL--THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED--THE +COMING OF THE CIRCUS + +CHAPTER II. + +ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS--A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE +HENRY + +CHAPTER III. + +ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK--LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT + +CHAPTER IV. + +WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY--CRUEL TREATMENT + +CHAPTER V. + +THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS--THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS + +CHAPTER VI. + +STEALING A RIDE--KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN + +CHAPTER VII. + +ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK--A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE + +CHAPTER VIII. + +LOOKING FOR WORK--WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT + +CHAPTER IX. + +IN THE STREET AGAIN--THE POLICE STATION--VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, +AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR + +CHAPTER X. + +LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN--FEATURED AS "THE BOY REPORTER" + +CHAPTER XI. + +A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND--RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN + +CHAPTER XII. + +A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER--THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT +TO THE PHILIPPINES--LEAVING NEW YORK--IN CHICAGO + +CHAPTER XIII. + +SAN FRANCISCO--THE TRANSPORT GONE--WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY +PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER--THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT--A STORM AT SEA--ARRIVAL IN MANILA + +CHAPTER XV. + +ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR, AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES +AMONG THE NATIVES--SEIZED BY THE REBELS + +CHAPTER XVI. + +A PLEASANT CAPTOR--BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE--FIRST +GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO + +CHAPTER XVII. + +ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS--ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS--THE FIRST BATTLE--ARCHIE WOUNDED + +CHAPTER XIX. + +RETURN TO MANILA--IN THE HOSPITAL--CONGRATULATED BY ALL--WRITING TO THE +PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES + +CHAPTER XX. + +AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP--BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN + +CHAPTER XXI. + +CONTINUING THE CRUISE--ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED--THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE'S +FRIEND--A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY--LONGING TO BE HOME +AGAIN + +CHAPTER XXII. + +RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS--A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO +RETURN TO NEW YORK--BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +HONG KONG--A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO--HONOLULU AGAIN--ARRIVAL IN SAN +FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS--ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN +NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +DOING "SPECIAL" WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER--INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS +MEN--CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS + +CHAPTER XXV. + +PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE--STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL--LIVING +AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +DECIDES TO VISIT HOME--A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN--A PUBLIC CHARACTER +NOW--DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB--DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL--A TELEGRAM +FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE + + + + + + +THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER. + + + +CHAPTER I. + + LIVING IN THE COUNTRY--LIFE AT SCHOOL--THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED--THE + COMING OF THE CIRCUS. + +"YES," said Mrs. Dunn to her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan, "we are expecting +great things of Archie, and yet we sometimes hardly know what to think +of the boy. He has the most remarkable ideas of things, and there seems +to be absolutely no limit to his ambition. He has long since determined +that he will some day be President, and he expects to enter politics the +day he is twenty-one." + +"Is that so, indeed," said Mrs. Sullivan. "Well, we can never tell +what is going to come of our boys. As I says to Dannie to-day, says +I, 'Dannie, you must do your best to be somebody and make something of +yourself, for you and Jack bees all that I has to depend upon now.' But +Dannie pays no attention to my entreaties, and somehow it seems to me +that since Mr. Sullivan died the boys are gettin' worse and worse. It's +beyond me to control them, anyhow." + +"Oh, take heart, Mrs. Sullivan," said Mrs. Dunn, "our boys will all turn +out well in the end, and all we can do is to bring them up in the best +way we know, and trust to them to take care of themselves after they +leave home. Now Dannie is certainly an industrious lad. I hear him +pounding nails all day long in the back yard, and he made a good job of +shingling the woodshed the other day. He seems made to be a carpenter." + +"Yes, I think so myself," said the Widow Sullivan. "The whole lot of +them is out by the railroad now, building a hut. They've organised a +'Hut Club' to-day, and never a lick of work have I had out of them boys +since mornin'. They've always got something going on, and when I want +a bit of water from the well, or a little wood from the shed, they're +never around." + +"Yes, but boys will be boys, Mrs. Sullivan, and we'd better keep them +contented at home as long as we can. They'll be leaving us soon enough. +It seems that no boys are content to stay in town any longer; they're +all anxious to be off to the city." + +"That's true, that's true, Mrs. Dunn," said Mrs. Sullivan. "I must be +going now. I'm much obliged for the rain-water, and whenever you want a +bit of milk call over the fence, and I'll bring it to you with pleasure. +It's a good neighbour you are, Mrs. Dunn." + +And Mrs. Sullivan went slowly around the house and out at the front +gate, while good Mrs. Dunn returned to her ironing, a few clothes having +to be ready for Sunday. + +While these mothers were discussing their boys, the youngsters +themselves were busy behind the barn, building a hut down near the +railway track. There were six of them altogether, the three extra ones, +besides Archie Dunn and the Sullivan boys, having come from across +the railway to play for the day. Two hours before they had solemnly +organised themselves into the "Hut Club," each boy walking three times +around the block blindfolded, and swearing upon his return to be true +to all the rules and regulations of the organisation, which had been +written with chalk on the side of the barn. The regulations were +numerous, but the most important one was that no East Side boys were to +be allowed within the club-room when it was built, and that the club's +policy should be one of warfare against the East Siders on every +occasion when they met. This fight against the East Side was, indeed, +responsible for the organisation of the club. It was felt necessary to +have some head to their forces, and some means of holding together. So +the club was organised, and now the next thing on the programme was the +erection of a hut to serve as a club-house. Archie Dunn, who had been +elected president, volunteered to get three boards and a hammer if the +other boys would each get two boards and some nails. This proposition +was agreed to, and when the boys returned from their foraging +expeditions it was found that there were more than enough boards to +build the hut, so the work began at once. Holes were dug in the ground, +and some posts planted as supports for the structure, and then the +boards were hastily nailed together from post to post. In three hours +the hut was practically completed, and it remained only to lay a floor +until they could hold their first meeting in the new club-house. The +floor itself was down by noon, and the club then served a memorable +dinner to mark the completion of the structure. + +A hole was dug in the ground outside the door, and a furnace made. A +skillet was brought from Archie's house, together with some dishes and a +coffee-pot, and Dan Sullivan brought some more dishes, and six eggs from +his nests under the barn. The boys were obliged to make several trips +to and from the houses, but finally nearly everything was ready, and the +eggs were carefully cooked by Archie, who was really a good housekeeper, +from long experience in the kitchen with his mother. Some potatoes were +fried in the grease remaining in the skillet after the eggs were cooked, +and then the feast began. The eggs may have been rather black with +grease, and the potatoes were certainly not done, but the boys all +pronounced it the finest meal of their lives, notwithstanding the bitter +coffee, and the dirty bread, which had been allowed to fall into the +gutter beside the railway track. They were eating in their own house, +and they had cooked in the open air, "just like tramps," Harry Rafe +said, and it was little wonder that they enjoyed the novel experience. + +The only trouble came when the meal was finished. No one wanted to +wash the dishes, and, finally, it was decided to return them to their +respective kitchens just as they were, and to let them be washed with +the rest of the dinner dishes at home. And this decision came near +putting an end to Hut Club dinners, for both Mrs. Dunn and the Widow +Sullivan were determined not to wash any more dirty dishes from the hut. + +When the meal was over, the boys lounged about the hut, and Dan Sullivan +brought a lot of things from his sister's playhouse with which to +furnish it more suitably. Archie Dunn brought a lot of hay from the loft +in his mother's barn, and when a piece of old carpet was spread upon it +it made an acceptable couch. A piece of old carpet was laid in front of +the hut, too, where the boys could sit and watch the trains switching +back and forth on the railway, and the tramps who were heating coffee in +cans over by the cattle-pen. + +Finally, some cattle arrived in the pen to be loaded into cars for the +city, and the boys had just decided to go and watch the men loading +them, when an engine came up the side-track with the most beautiful car +they had ever seen, behind it. The car was painted in all colours of the +rainbow, and in giant letters was printed the magic name of "The World's +Greatest Show." + +The boys lost no time in getting down from the cattle-pen fence, and the +car had barely stopped when they were aboard. "Hooray," shouted Charlie +Huffman, "we'll all get jobs of passin' bills." And it was with this +end in view that they sought the advertising manager in the car, who +promised to give them all jobs when the circus came in two weeks. +The boys deluged him with questions of every sort. "Will there be any +elephants?" "Is there goin' to be a parade?" and "Will there be any +trapeze performances?" The poor man was finally obliged to lock the +door to keep them out, and the boys stood about the car until nearly +six o'clock, admiring the paintings, and speculating as to whether they +would be able to work their way into the circus or not, when it finally +came. Their speculations were interrupted by the appearance on the scene +of the Widow Sullivan with a good-sized maple switch, which she used +to good effect in getting the two Sullivans and Archie Dunn home for +supper. For Mrs. Dunn had given Mrs. Sullivan instructions before she +started, so that when Archie complained that he had been whipped by +"that woman next door," he received no sympathy whatever. + +And when he went to bed at nine o'clock, he could hardly sleep for +thinking of the wonderful things which had happened this day. The coming +circus and the great Hut Club kept him awake until far after ten, so +that he got up too late for Sunday school the next morning, and was +punished accordingly. + +The next week was a hard one at school, and the boys had but little +time to devote to the club. But after four o'clock in the afternoon +they sometimes got together and did various things which improved their +club-house. Some very fair chairs were constructed from empty soap +boxes, and various contrivances were put together to guard against the +intrusion of any East Siders or tramps while they were away at school. +There was no padlock used, and any one coming up to the hut would +imagine it a simple thing to enter--until he tried. But the boys had +fixed a secret cord which, when pulled, shifted the bar inside, and +every boy was sworn not to betray the existence of the cord. + +The day set for the circus came nearer and nearer, and the boys began +to be anxious for fear the schools would not close, so that they could +attend. But the superintendent finally announced that they would; so +early on the eventful day the entire club was on the grounds, waiting +to get some work to do. Archie Dunn got the first job, being selected +to carry water for the elephant because he was stronger than any of the +others. But the rest were given something to do, and when the day was +over they had all seen the circus, and went to bed happy, to dream of +the great trip to be taken by the Hut Club on the next Saturday. + + + +CHAPTER II. + + ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS--A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE + HENRY. + +THE Hut Club went out on a picnic the next Saturday, and had a jolly +time. They camped upon an island in the middle of a shallow stream, and +while there made coffee and cooked their dinner, having brought most of +the necessary apparatus from the Hut. They fished a little, and hunted +for turtles in the water, and altogether had a good time, if nothing +exciting did occur. It was after nine o'clock at night when they reached +town again, footsore and weary, and Archie Dunn had hardly entered the +house before he was on the dining-room lounge, half-asleep. His mother +seemed to be out, and as he lay there he wondered how long it would be +before she came back. Archie truly loved his mother, but of late he +had often thought that he would like to leave home and go to the famous +city, where he felt sure he could get something to do. But he disliked +the idea of leaving his mother. + +"I'm getting to be a big boy, now," he often said to himself, "and it's +time that I began to look out for myself. I'm nearly seventeen, and I +think I ought to be earning some money. This thing of belonging to Hut +Clubs and spending my time in going to picnics and to circuses ought to +stop. It's all right for boys, but I'm getting to be a man, now." + +All these thoughts were flying through his mind when his mother came in. +"Oh, Archie," she exclaimed, "I've been so worried about you. I've just +been over to Mrs. Sullivan's to see if Dannie had come home, and whether +he had seen you. Wherever have you been?" + +"We didn't think it would take so long to walk home," said Archie, +jumping up from the sofa, "but we were awfully tired, and we didn't come +very fast. I'm so sorry you were worried. + +"And I'm as hungry as a bear, mother. Can't you find me something to +eat?" + +"Yes, dear," said Mrs. Dunn, softly, "and when you've finished your +supper I have something for you. I won't give it to you now for fear you +won't be able to eat, but as soon as you have finished your meal, you +shall have it." + +So Archie was obliged to eat his baked beans and brown bread and drink +his milk without knowing what was in store for him, and he hurried as +fast as he could, so that he could learn. When he had finished he went +into the sitting-room, and found his mother sitting with a letter spread +open upon her lap. "Uncle Henry has written me asking if you cannot go +with him to New York on Monday, for a couple of days. He is obliged to +go down there on business, and says he will be glad to take you along +and show you something of the wonderful city, for he knows you won't be +any trouble to him. Now I hardly know what to say, Archie. If I can feel +that you are behaving yourself properly, and are doing your best to be +as little trouble as possible, I am willing that you shall go." + +"Oh, mother," cried Archie, "I'll promise anything. Only let me go this +once, and I'll promise to stay at home all the rest of the summer." + +"All right, then," said Mrs. Dunn. "You shall go on the first train +Monday morning, and Uncle Henry will join you at Heddens Corner. Run +along to bed now." + +Archie went up-stairs almost dumb with delight Was it really true that +he was to see the great city at last? He had heard some of the boys at +school telling what their fathers saw there, but he had never even hoped +that he would see it for himself so soon. Of course he had determined to +see it all some day, but that was to be far in the future. The lad +could hardly sleep for the joy of it all, and when he did finally +lose consciousness, it was only to dream of streets of gold, and great +buildings reaching to the skies. + +Sunday passed slowly by. At Sunday school, Archie told the boys that +he was going to New York on the morrow, and from that moment he was the +hero of the class. The boys looked at him with wondering admiration, and +seemed scarcely able to realise that one of their number was to go so +far from home. The city was in reality little more than a hundred miles, +but to their boyish minds this distance seemed wonderfully great. + +Early on Monday morning Archie was at the depot waiting for the train. +His mother was there to see him off, and there were tears in her eyes +at the thought of parting with her only child, if only for a day or two. +And Archie was radiant with delight at the glorious prospect ahead of +him. He walked nervously up and down the platform, and wished frequently +that it were not so early in the morning, so that some of the boys might +be there to see him off. Finally, the great hissing locomotive drew up, +with its long train of coaches, and Archie was soon aboard, hurrying off +to Heddens Corner and the city. In a few minutes Uncle Henry was with +him, a tall, fine-looking man, with an air of business. Uncle Henry +kept the general store at the Corner, and was an important person in the +neighbourhood. He was of some importance in the city, too, for his +name was known in politics, and his custom was always desired at +the wholesale stores. So Archie was going to see the city under good +auspices, if his uncle would only have time to take him about with him. + +After a couple of hours, during which Archie kept his face glued to +the window-pane, watching the flying landscape, the great train pulled +through a long, dark tunnel, and finally entered an immense shed, +covered with glass where it came to a final stop. Crowds left the +coaches, and passed out of the station, where they were swallowed up in +the great rush of traffic. Some drove away in cabs and carriages. Some +entered the street-cars, and some went up a stairway and entered what +seemed to Archie a railway train in the air. + +Uncle Henry told Archie to follow him carefully, and they, too, were +soon flying away from the neighbourhood of the terminal, past hotels, +stores, and dwellings, until they finally left the trolley-car, and +passed through a cross street into a long, quiet thoroughfare which +looked old enough to have been there for a hundred years. The houses +were built far back from the street, with pillars in front, and into one +of these quaint old dwellings went Archie and his uncle. + +"I always stop down-town," explained Uncle Henry, "because I am near to +the great wholesale establishments. It is central to the retail stores, +too, and to many of the places of interest." + +When they were settled in their room, Uncle Henry explained that he +would have to be away most of this first day, but that to-morrow he +would take Archie out and show him the sights. So Archie expected to +remain indoors all day; but when his uncle had left the house he +decided that he couldn't possibly remain in this close room when so many +wonderful things were taking place outside. So he decided to walk up and +down the street, anyhow, and when he went out he felt like a prisoner +just escaped from a cell. But the noise was terrible, and there were a +great many wagons and trucks passing through the street. The greatest +crowd seemed to be on that cross street about two blocks away, so Archie +decided to go there, and see if there was anything new on that street. + +He saw many wonderful things. There were cars running along without any +apparent motive power, there were thousands and thousands of people in +the streets, and the stores looked so handsome and interesting that he +simply couldn't resist going into one or two of them, just to see what +they were like. And when he had finished with one or two he could think +of no reason why he shouldn't go on up the street, where he was sure he +would find a great many more interesting things to see. So on and on +he went, until at last he was tired and hungry, and then, for the first +time, he was a little frightened, because he thought of all he had read +about people losing their way in the city, and not being able to find +their relatives again. But he was a brave boy, so he determined to make +an effort to find his way back without appealing to a policeman. And +after a time he was successful, and entered the queer old house in the +ancient street at just three o'clock in the afternoon. His uncle was +there waiting for him, and was nearly beside himself with apprehension. + +"I was about to send out a general alarm for you, at the police +station," he said. "How did you happen to go away?" + +"Oh, I was so very tired of staying in the house," said Archie, "and I +felt sure that I could find my way back without getting lost at all. +And to-morrow I'm sure I can get along all right, Uncle Henry, so you +needn't bother with me at all, unless you want to." + +And it so happened that Mr. Kirk was very busy the next day, and would +have found it quite impossible to show Archie about. So it was fortunate +that he was able to go everywhere alone, or he would have had to return +home without seeing anything at all of the city. + +As it was, he went here, there, and everywhere, and saw a great deal of +the city, the people, and the way in which they lived. The entire place +had a strange fascination for him, and all the time he was thinking how +glad he would be to live where he could see all this rush of business, +this varied life, every day. And he fully determined to return some day +and get something to do, so that he might work himself up, and come +to own one of the handsome houses on the avenues, or drive one of the +elegant carriages on the boulevard. And he observed every boy who +passed him, and talked with several of them, trying to find out whether +positions were easy to secure, and whether they paid much when they were +secured. + +So when they took the four o'clock train for home, and arrived at +Archie's house in time for supper, he told more about the city boys and +their work than about the tall buildings, the Brooklyn Bridge, or the +Central Park. He talked so much, in fact, about the delights of the city +boy, and the money he earned, that after he had gone to bed Mrs. Dunn +took her brother aside and talked with him concerning Archie's future. +And between them they definitely decided that Archie must not go to the +city to work. + + + +CHAPTER III. + + ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK--LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT. + +ARCHIE DUNN was not more ambitious than many other boys of his age, +but he possessed one quality which is not developed in every boy, +determination. Once Archie decided upon doing a thing, once he had made +up his mind that it was truly a good thing to do, nothing could keep him +from putting his plans into action, and making an effort, at least, to +accomplish his ends. Most boys of seventeen have not decided what they +want to become when they are men, and, until his visit to the city, +Archie was equally at sea concerning his future. He knew, of course, +that he wanted to be rich and famous, but when he tried to think up +some suitable profession which would bring him these possessions, he was +never able to decide. + +The two days in the city with Uncle Henry had opened to his boyish +mind a new world, and when he returned to the humble home surrounded by +gardens, he felt that he would never be satisfied to live and work in +this small town. There was now no question in his mind but what the city +was the place for any one who wished to become either rich or famous. It +would certainly be impossible for him to make a name for himself in this +village, while in the city he would have every opportunity for improving +himself, and advancing himself in every way. He wondered, indeed, that +he had never thought of going to New York before, and was disgusted with +himself when he thought of the time he had wasted here at home. + +But there was no use in thinking of the past. The thing to do now was to +get to the city as quickly as possible, for to Archie every day seemed +precious, and each delay kept him further from the consummation of +his hopes. It never occurred to the boy that his mother might have +objections to his leaving home. She had always been very ambitious for +his future, and he supposed that she would be delighted at the idea +of having her boy in the great city, where he would have innumerable +chances for improving himself. So when they sat on the front porch, +one evening, and he told her of his plan, he was surprised to hear his +mother pleading with him to remain at home. "Archie," she said, "I am +almost sure you will come to some bad end in the city. You really must +not go, for my sake, if for no other reason." + +"But, mother, I can't remain here in town always. I must go out into +the world some time to earn a living and make a place for myself, and I +think the sooner I go the better, don't you?" + +"Yes, Archie, but you're so young, and you've had no experience. You +have no idea of the things there are in great cities to drag young men +down. I don't think I could stand it to have you so far away from home +and in such danger." + +"Well, mother," said Archie, "there isn't much use in arguing about it. +I have reached a point where I don't think I can be any longer satisfied +at home. I have been here seventeen years, and I think I can remain here +that much longer without improving myself. In the city I am sure I can +make rapid progress, and in a year or two you can come there and live +with me." + +Archie got up from the porch and went down the street, while poor Mrs. +Dunn ran over next door to see her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan. When she +had entered the disorderly kitchen, and seated herself on one of the +home-made chairs, the anxious mother burst into tears. "I don't know +what to think of Archie, Mrs. Sullivan," she said. "He is determined, +now, to go to New York, and I know that if he goes I will never be able +to see him again. I am nigh distracted with worrying over it. I have +talked with him, but he seems determined, and I know I can never hold +out against his entreaties and arguments." + +"Sure, now, Mrs. Dunn," said the Widow Sullivan, "don't yez be a +worryin' about 'im at all. That Archie is a smart boy, he is, and if he +goes to New York he'll come out all right, never fear, I only wish my +Dannie had as much get-up about him as your boy." + +"Yes, yes, Archie is very ambitious for his age," said Mrs. Dunn, "but +I sometimes wish he were less so. I know I could keep him at home longer +if he wasn't so anxious to be at work. I don't believe I can let him go, +Mrs. Sullivan, not yet. I want him to stay in school another year, and +then I'll think about it." + +"Well, ye're wise, Mrs. Dunn, ye're a wise woman," said the Widow +Sullivan. "Since yer husband died ye've been a good mother to the lad, +and have brought 'im up well. And now, how is yer chickens, Mrs. Dunn? +Have ye got that cochin hen a 'settin'' yit?" + +And the two women began to discuss their various fowls, and the +conversation was so interesting that Mrs. Dunn remained late, and found +Archie in bed when she went home. "Ah, well, poor boy, I'll have to tell +him of my decision in the morning. He'll be terribly disappointed, and I +hate to do it I'm afraid it's selfishness that makes me want to keep +him with me. I almost wish he would take things into his own hands, and +start for the city himself. I would be rid then of the responsibility +of sending him, and the question would be settled for me. Boys sometimes +know best how to settle their own difficulties, anyhow." + +Mrs. Dunn kneaded the bread before retiring, for to-morrow was Saturday, +and, therefore, baking-day, and then she went into her little room +off the kitchen, and prayed earnestly for her boy before sleeping. +She prayed that she might be helped in advising him, and that he might +always do what was best for himself and for his mother. + +The next day was Saturday, and in the morning the Hut Club met, as +usual, and prepared to have an open-air dinner for this day. The +furnace, which had been knocked down during the week by the East Siders, +was rebuilt, and the skillet and other utensils were brought from the +nearest kitchens. Archie went to the grocery around the corner and +bought five cents' worth of cakes, and then the six boys sat down in +a circle and prepared to devour their home-made feast. But before they +began Archie stood up. "I want to say that this will probably be my +farewell dinner with the club," he said, in a low tone, "and I hope that +you will appoint another president in my place." + +The boys were horror-struck, but Archie refused to explain where and +when he was going. Finally, they refused to appoint another president, +all agreeing that Archie should hold that office for ever, wherever he +was. And the meal was eaten in silence, for the announcement had thrown +a sort of chill over the proceedings. When they had finished, Archie +silently shook hands with each of the boys, who were dumb with +amazement, gathered up his skillet and coffee-pot, and went home through +the gate to the chicken-lot. + +"I wonder what he's goin' to do," they all said, as in one breath, and +as there was seldom much fun in the club when Archie was absent, they +all went home in a few minutes, or down-town to watch the farmers, who +were in town to do their weekly buying. + +When Archie reached home he went up-stairs to his little room, and began +to lay out a few things which he wanted to take with him, for he had +determined to start for New York this very night. Then he tied the +things up in a small bundle, and sat down to write a note to his mother. +When he had finished it, he pinned it up at the head of his cot, and +this is what it said: + + "MY DARLING MOTHER:--Please don't worry about me, I'm bound to + come through all right, and if anything happens to me, I promise + that I will write to you immediately and let you know. I have the + ten dollars which I have saved, and if I don't get work at once I + will write to you for some more. Now, I am not doing this thing for + the sake of adventure, but because I am sure it is the best thing + for me, and I don't want you to worry at all. I shall write to you + often and let you know just what I'm doing, so don't worry, but be + a brave mother. I'm not going off this way as a sneak, but because + I want to avoid a 'scene.' + + "Your loving + + "ARCHIE." + +And at three o'clock the next morning Archie Dunn got out of bed, +shouldered his bundle, and started off for the great city, which seemed +to be drawing him like a magnet. + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY--CRUEL TREATMENT. + +WHEN daylight came, Archie was far out of the town walking quickly along +the southern road. He figured that he had walked nearly six miles in the +two hours since he had let himself out of the back door at home, and, +as he looked ahead, he planned that he would walk at least thirty miles +every day. Of course, he had never done much walking before, or he would +have known better than to have expected to accomplish so much in twelve +hours, but he felt fresh and full of strength this morning, and nothing +seemed too hard to accomplish. As yet he had not regretted his departure +from home. The excitement of it all, and the adventurous side of his +exploit, had kept him interested, and made him feel that he was a real +hero. But he was not so foolish as to imagine that there would not be +times when he would regret having set out for New York. He was too old +and too sensible for his age to allow his ambition to run away with him +entirely, and he fully expected to meet with many great discouragements. +"But I'm sure of one thing," he said to himself, as he walked along, "I +never will return home until I have something to show for the trip. I +won't have the club boys and the neighbours saying that Archie Dunn had +to come home discouraged. If I return without accomplishing anything, I +will be held up to the whole town as a boy who made a fool of himself by +not taking his friends' advice, and I never will be made an example +of if I can help it." And Archie walked faster as he thought of the +possibility of failure. + +When seven o'clock came he was passing through the county-seat, but +though there were many interesting things to look at in the town, Archie +determined not to stop. He was afraid he might meet some one he knew, +who would be sure to ask him where he was going with his bundle, and +what he was doing out so early. And anyhow he was very hungry, and +decided to get out of the town and to the farmhouses as soon as +possible. "I can work for my meal at a farmhouse," he said to himself, +"but in the town they'll take me for a regular tramp." + +So poor Archie walked quickly through the town, still keeping to the +southern road, and saying to himself, as he passed every milestone, +"So much nearer New York." About a mile out in the country he came to a +large farmhouse, and he determined to enter and ask for a meal. He had +hard work to muster up enough courage to go in and ask for anything, but +finally he knocked timidly at the kitchen door, and was frightened by +a large dog which came barking around the corner. It seemed to him that +the animal would surely bite, but a large fat woman opened the door +just in time to let him in. "Hurry in, boy," she said, "fer there's +no tellin' what Tige might do ef he once gets a hold of ye." So Archie +stepped into the large kitchen, with its rafters overhead, and its +dining-table in the corner. "Sit down, boy," said the woman. "I reckon +you's thet new lad thet's come ter work over at Mullins's, ain't ye?" + +"No'm," said Archie, "I don't work anywhere. I'm on my way to New York, +where I expect to find a position, and I thought perhaps you'd allow me +to do a little work here this morning to earn my breakfast." + +Good Mrs. Lane, for that was the woman's name, was horrified to think +that any one was alive and without breakfast at eight o'clock in the +morning. "Goodness me!" said she. "Why, you must be half-famished fer +want of food, ain't ye?" And she bustled about the kitchen, putting the +kettle on to boil, and stirring up the fire. "You'll have some nice ham +and eggs, my boy, and then I have somethin' in mind fer you. I reckon +yer ain't in no hurry ter get ter the city, be ye? Well, even if ye +do be in a hurry, I reckon you'll be glad of the chance to earn four +dollars. I ain't goin' to ask ye no questions about how ye come to be +walkin' to New York, because I never wuz no hand ter meddle in other +folkses affairs, but ye look to be a likely lad, and a strong un, and ez +my sister's husband, what lives two miles down the pike, needs a boy to +drive a plough fer a week, I b'lieve ye'll suit 'im first-rate. So ez +soon ez ye have finished yer vittles, I'll walk down there with ye, and +we'll see the old man." + +Archie hardly knew whether to be delighted with the prospect or not. Of +course four dollars would be nice to have, but he was anxious to get +to the city as soon as possible, and every day counted. But perhaps it +would be wrong, he thought, to throw away such a good chance to earn +some money, and he had decided to accept any offer the farmer made +him, long before he finished his breakfast. When he got up from the +straight-backed chair, he felt that he had never eaten a better meal +in his life, and when Mrs. Lane started off down the road, he gladly +followed her. A week on such a farm as this would be no unpleasant +experience. Such food was not to be had every day, he knew, and he of +course would have precious little that was good to eat when he reached +the city. + +They soon covered the two miles, Mrs. Lane getting along very fast for +such a large woman, and at last they stood before Hiram Tinch, who owned +the farm. Archie was made to describe his intentions, and was thoroughly +examined by Mr. Tinch. He told the farmer that he knew nothing about +farm work, but Mr. Tinch said he would soon teach him, and it was +settled that Archie was to remain on the farm a week. Mrs. Lane went +inside the house to see her sister, who looked sick with too much work, +and the farmer told Archie that he might as well start in, as there was +no object in waiting. So the boy donned a pair of "blue jean" trousers, +and was taken into a field, where a one-horse plough was standing. +Archie knew how to hitch a horse, so he went to the stable and secured +his steed, and then harnessed him to the plough. The farmer didn't +see fit to give him any instructions about ploughing, and the poor boy +hardly knew what to do, but rather than ask he started off, and tried to +guide the animal in the right direction, as far as he knew it. Of course +the horse went wrong, and the plough refused to stay in the earth, +and altogether the attempt was a miserable failure. The farmer leaned +against the fence, picking his teeth with a pin, but when he saw the +horse going crooked, and the plough bounding along over the earth, his +face grew livid with anger. For a minute he seemed unable to speak, but +strode toward Archie with a fierce look in his eyes. Then he found his +tongue, and opened such a tirade of vile words that the poor boy shrank +from him in terror. He was in mortal fear lest the man should lay hands +on him and commit some crime, so intense was his rage, but Hiram Tinch +seemed to know how far to go, and after five minutes of cursing and +swearing he took the plough in his own hands, and guided it through the +earth. "Now take it," he growled at Archie, when he had gone a furrow's +length, "and see ef ye can do better this time. Remember, not a bite of +dinner do ye get until this field is ploughed." + +Poor Archie was weak from fright, but there was nothing to do but to +obey. He looked at the vast field before him, and made up his mind that +he would get nothing to eat until night, anyhow, for it was already +nearly noon. He felt very much like bursting into tears, but he was too +proud to give way to his feelings. But he couldn't help wishing that he +were at home, playing with the members of the Hut Club. "Those boys are +much better off than I am," he said, over and over, "though they have +made no effort to improve themselves." After a time, however, his +ambition returned, and as he looked ahead into the future, and +remembered the wonderful things he was going to accomplish, he felt more +like working. + +He finished the field at five o'clock in the afternoon, and was almost +fainting from hunger and from the hard work. The ploughing was fairly +well done, but Hiram Tinch could see no merit in the work. He swore at +Archie again, and gave him a supper of mush and milk. Mrs. Tinch sat by, +and Archie could see that she did not approve of his treatment. The poor +woman seemed afraid to speak, almost, but it was plain that she had a +good heart. So when Archie heard a noise in his garret room that night, +he was not surprised to see Mrs. Tinch at the window, placing some +doughnuts and sandwiches there for him to eat. + + + +CHAPTER V. + + THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS--THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS. + +IT seemed to Archie that he had just fallen asleep when old Hiram Tinch +was shaking him awake. "Git up out o' here now, ye lazy beggar, and +git to the field and finish that there ploughin'," he growled, and the +frightened lad awakened from a horrible nightmare, only to find a worse +experience awaiting him in the light of day. He hastily drew on his +trousers, and didn't wait to don either shoes or stockings, for if he +was to spend the day ploughing in a field, he knew he would be more +comfortable in his bare feet. When he reached the kitchen, he found +that Farmer Tinch had already eaten his breakfast, though it was not +daylight. Archie was glad that he was out of the way, and good Mrs. +Tinch was glad of it, too, for she was able to give the boy a good +breakfast, and some good advice with it. "Don't you pay no attention to +what my man says, laddie. He's a powerful man to swear and carry on, but +I don't think he'll have the meanness to strike you. Ef he does, ye must +come to me, and I'll see thet he doesn't do it no more." + +Archie was grateful for this spirit of friendliness, but in his heart +he thought that cruel words were often more painful than lashes, and he +heartily wished that his week was over. + +All this day he spent on the farm, without once going into the road. +Farmer Tinch had warned him that if he saw him making for the road at +any time, he could go and never come back, and he would forfeit what +money he had already earned. So Archie ploughed the field from daylight +till dark, with a half hour at noon for a hurried dinner. He was glad +when darkness came, and after another supper of mush and milk he was +thankful to have a corn-husk bed to sleep on, and was soon in a stupor +which was so sound as to be almost like death. + +Again the next morning he was awakened at daylight, and he was made +to work even harder than on the second day. He had by this time become +somewhat used to the labour, however, and stood it better. He was more +successful in his work, too, and Farmer Tinch had less opportunity for +cursing him. But at night he seemed more tired, even, than before, and +he longed for his home again. He thought of the cosy bed he would now +be enjoying if he had only taken his mother's advice, and he felt almost +like getting up in the night and stealing away on the road to the north. +But, always a sensible lad, Archie realised that this discouragement +could not last, and he lost himself in sleep, looking forward three +days, when his week should be up, and he would be on his way to the +city, with four dollars more to add to his slender store. + +The three days passed slowly, but at length the Saturday night came, and +he prepared to be off. But good Mrs. Tinch entreated him to remain with +them over Sunday, and, as Archie wasn't sure that it would be quite +right for him to travel on Sunday, he decided to do so. So the next day +he brushed his only suit of clothes, and drove with his late employer to +church, where Farmer Tinch sat in a front seat and passed the bread +and wine at communion. Archie's heart rose to his throat as he saw +this paragon so devout in church. He felt like rising in his seat and +denouncing him before all the people as a tyrant and a hard-hearted +wretch. But he kept quiet, though he found it impossible to partake of +the communion under such circumstances. + +The Tinches had brought their dinner with them, and at noon they all sat +on one of the grassy mounds in the churchyard, to take some refreshment +before the afternoon service began. When they had finished, Archie +wandered off, and came to a crowd of boys who were romping behind the +church. When they saw him approach, they all stopped their noise, +and looked at him wonderingly. Evidently they were not used to seeing +strange boys. The silence was soon broken, however, by one of the boys +calling out, "Why, fellers, thet's the chap what's been workin' fer +Hiram Tinch." This announcement was enough to make Archie an even +greater object of interest than before, for the boys seemed to think +that any person who could work for Farmer Tinch, and come out of the +ordeal none the worse for wear, must be something wonderful. Archie was +soon on good terms with them all, however, and told them of his plan of +going to New York. The boys were all attention, and soon he was the hero +of the occasion. When the bell rung for the afternoon service he was +still telling them of the things he was going to do, and none of them +wanted to go into the church. Archie persuaded them to enter, however, +but he was not surprised to meet them all along the road when he left +Tinch's early Monday morning. + +It was almost time to go to bed when they reached the farmhouse that +night, so Archie went at once to his attic, being anxious to start fresh +on his journey the next day. He was now determined to push on as rapidly +as possible, hoping to reach the city within three or four days. He was +somewhat afraid that he wouldn't be able to do this, but he was going to +try, anyhow. + +At daylight Monday morning he was on the way, and when the various boys +he met the day before said good-bye to him and wished him good luck, +he felt that his stay at Tinch's had not been without benefits of some +sort. He had made some boy friends, and he was four dollars richer, +Archie was sensible enough, too, to realise that his experience would be +a valuable one to him in the future. He knew now what hard work was, at +any rate. + +The morning walk was delightful. The September weather was perfect, and +all along the road were fruit-trees laden with every sort of good +thing to eat a boy could wish for. And as the trees were on the public +thoroughfare, Archie did net hesitate to help himself freely as he went +along, so that he didn't require any meal at noon. + +As night drew near, however, he began to wonder what he would do for a +bed, and the question became more important with every hour. He had come +to no towns since morning, and knew that he couldn't expect to reach +one of any size until the next day, anyhow. There were farmhouses, of +course, but after his experience of the past week the lad felt that he +would rather remain outdoors all night than risk being thrown in with +another Hiram Tinch. He didn't know enough of farmers to know that few +of them resemble Mr. Tinch in nature, and he did what he thought was +best in keeping away from farmhouses after this. + +It was five o'clock in the evening, and Archie was beginning to feel +very tired and hungry, when he came to the ruins of an old colonial +mansion, which lay far back from the road, surrounded by trees, and +almost hid with shrubbery. "How interesting," he thought to himself. "It +looks just like the pictures of old ruins we see in geographies. I think +I must go up and see what they look like at close range." And, fired +with a spirit of adventure, and making believe that he was an explorer +in an ancient country, the boy made his way through the trees and +shrubbery. The ruins looked more and more interesting as he advanced. +This had evidently been a magnificent estate at one time. There were +massive pillars which had once supported a stately portico at the front +of the house, and above all there rose a massive chimney, which +seemed to be exceedingly well preserved. As Archie came nearer, he was +surprised to notice a thin column of smoke rising from the top of the +chimney, and for a moment he stood still with fright. What could this +mean? Who could be building a fire in the midst of these ruins. It was +almost like what one reads about in books, he thought. + +For some time he could not decide what to do, whether he had better keep +on, or whether the wisest policy would be to get back to the road as +quickly as possible. Finally, his curiosity and thirst for adventure +persuaded him to go on, and he continued to push his way through the +shrubbery until he stood before the ruins. He then climbed a flight of +steps, and stood in what had once been the main entrance to this +massive palace. Before him he saw a scene which was almost weird in its +unusualness. A fire of pine-knots was blazing in the ruins of the great +fireplace, and seated in a semicircle around the fire were several men +of picturesque appearance, whose faces looked up angrily when they were +disturbed. + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + STEALING A RIDE--KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN. + +ARCHIE was dumbfounded. Never before had he been among such a motley +crowd, and his first impulse was to turn and run. But on second thought +he decided that it would be best to put on a bold face and walk up to +the men. This he did, and when he reached the fire the men jumped up and +asked him who he was. In a few words he told them his simple story, and +they all laughed and sat down again about the fire, making a place for +him. "You're one of us, then, laddie," said the leader of the gang. +"We're all soldiers of fortune, all dependent upon the generous public +for our livelihood. But we're not goin' to the city. There's nothin' +there for us, and our advice to you is for you to steer clear of the +place, too. Them police takes ye and throws ye into jail as quick as +a wink, and there's no chance of gettin' anythink to eat at basement +doors, neither. They're all on to us, there, laddie, and ye'd better +stick to the country." + +This bit of advice was endorsed by the entire company, and it was in +vain that Archie tried to make them understand that he was no ordinary +tramp, walking about the country in search of an easy time. He tried +to tell them that he was going to the city to work, not to beg; but the +leader, a big, dirty fellow, weighing two hundred pounds or over, said, +"Never mind, laddie, we knows you've run away from home to get away from +the folks, and we appreciates yer position. If yer a mind to stand by +us, we'll stand by you, and see thet ye comes to no harm." + +On thinking things over, Archie decided that it was perhaps the wisest +thing for him to appear to sympathise with the tramps, and make himself +agreeable while with them. He had undoubtedly run into a gang of the +worst sort of vagabonds, and there was no way of getting away from there +without arousing their suspicions. So he partook of their slender meal, +and joined in the general laughter when the leader, "Fattie Foy," made +some crude attempt at punning. The meal was one to be remembered. The +coffee had been heated in an empty tomato can over the fire, and from +its taste was evidently a combination of various collections made from +the farmhouses round about. Besides the coffee there was a various +collection of sandwiches and bread and butter, and two pieces of cake. +One man had succeeded in striking a good house, and came back laden with +pickles and crackers and cheese, which were probably the remains of some +picnic basket. Another fellow had brought some pieces of cold bacon, +and these were warmed on sticks over the fire until they looked really +appetising. From some barn had come a half-dozen fresh eggs, and these +were quickly boiled in a can of hot water, and made a very fair showing +on the slab of granite which served as a table. + +When everything was ready the provisions were equally divided among the +crowd, and every one shared alike. It made no difference how much more +one man collected than another, it was always shared with the entire +crowd. Poor Archie found it almost impossible to eat, but the men +insisted that he take something, so he did manage to swallow a few sips +of coffee and eat a slice of bread and butter. But as he looked about +him at the dirty hands and faces, and the filthy garments of the tramps, +he determined not to eat again while with them. + +When the meal was over the two tin cans were washed at a spring of +water, and as it was now quite dark, they all sat close to the fire, in +order to see. Some one produced a pack of dirty cards, and they began a +game of some kind. Archie was asked to join, but he told them he didn't +know anything about card-playing. The poor lad was beginning to wish he +had never left home, and felt more miserable than at any other period +of the journey. He walked over to a corner of the ruins where the light +from the fire did not penetrate, and, once there, he sat down and sobbed +bitterly for a time. When he had finished crying it seemed impossible +for him to sleep. The scene about the fire fascinated him. The men were +seated in every sort of picturesque attitude, and as the flickering +light fell upon their dark faces it wasn't hard for the poor lad to +imagine that he had fallen among a crowd of brigands. He watched them as +they played until he could see no longer, and then he fell into a sound +sleep. + +When Archie woke it was still dark, but the moon was shining brightly +overhead, making everything as light as day. He rubbed his eyes and sat +up, and it was some time before he could realise where he was. Then, as +he saw the tramps lying about the ground, he remembered his adventures +of the night before, and, horrified that he had allowed himself to +sleep, he hastily jumped up, and determined to get away from the ruins +as quickly as possible. The tramps were all sleeping soundly, and +the only noises to be heard were the sound of their breathing and +the blood-curdling hoot of some owl perched on the pillars of the old +portico. The boy picked his way carefully between the bodies of the +sleeping men, and in a minute stood once more on the grand flight of +steps outside. He was trembling for fear some tramp would awake and +prevent his going, and when a bat brushed him in its flight he almost +screamed with terror. Far out beyond the trees and the shrubby he could +see the road glistening in the moonlight, and he made his way as rapidly +as possible out of the grounds, and was once more on his way to the +city. + +It was lonesome work, walking along a country road at night, and +Archie remembered with longing his cosy bed at home. The feeling of +homesickness kept growing within him, despite his efforts to down it, +and when at last the glorious autumn sun rose over the eastern horizon +he was miserable with longing for mother and for home. But he was too +proud to even think of turning back. He must reach the city at all +hazards, homesick or not. + +Archie did not think of breakfast this morning. His experience of the +night before seemed to have taken away his appetite entirely, and his +only thought was to walk as fast as possible, so that he could reach the +city soon. About nine o'clock he entered the outskirts of a busy town, +and while there he observed that the railroad going to the city passed +through the place. All at once a new idea occurred to him. He had so +often heard men and boys tell of how they had stolen a ride from one +town to another. Why shouldn't he be able to get a ride on a freight +train to the city. Would it be wrong? Archie thought not, since so +many men did it. And anyhow it didn't seem a wicked thing to cheat the +railroad. He had heard people say that the company ought to be cheated +whenever possible, since it cheated so many others. So, from being so +tired and so anxious to reach New York, Archie decided to try and steal +a ride. He entered the yards, where a train was being made up for the +south, and there he saw a cattle-car with an open door. He immediately +jumped inside and shut the door, squeezing himself into the farthest +corner, hoping that he wouldn't be discovered. He soon found that he +wasn't alone, for a couple of tramps were in the opposite corner, and +they whispered to him not to make any noise. "The brakie," they said, +"will soon be 'round, and if he finds ye he'll put us all in jail." + +Poor Archie grew pale at the thought of being put in jail, and huddled +himself closer in the corner. After a time the train started, and the +tramps, he noticed, climbed up into some sort of compartment under the +roof of the car, where they wouldn't be observed, leaving Archie alone +down-stairs. Things went smoothly for a time. The train went flying +along, and Archie counted every mile which brought him nearer to the +city. Finally the train pulled up at a crossing, and a brakeman came +along and threw open the door of the car. He was not long in discovering +the cowering figure in the corner, and his wrath was dreadful to look +upon. "So, ye cussed vagabond," he growled, "ye thought ye'd steal a +ride, did ye? Get out o' this now. Quick, out with ye." Archie could +have fainted, and, as it was, he almost fell out of the car, propelled +by the brakeman's boot. For awhile he stood dazed beside the track, and +finally moved on. "I'll keep a 'stiff upper lip,'" he said, "whatever +happens." But this was by far the most discouraging adventure yet. + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK--A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE. + +ON and on for the rest of the day walked Archie. His feet were sore, +he was weak from hunger, and he was made miserable with being homesick. +People who met him on the road turned around to look at the slender lad +with the pale face and the weary step, but he kept walking on, stopping +for nothing, and noticing no one. At noon he picked some apples in an +orchard, and these appeased his hunger. When evening drew near, however, +he felt that he could go without food no longer, so he didn't hesitate +to stop at a house and ask for food. "I know mother would give a boy +food if one should come to our door," he said to himself, "so I do not +think it wrong for me to ask for food here." He was fortunate enough to +strike a pleasant housewife, who took him in and made him sit down at +the kitchen table, which she covered with good things to eat. There was +cold roast beef, some fried potatoes and a glass of good fresh milk. And +then she gave him some apple pie, so that when he had finished Archie +felt better than for many a day. While he ate he told the good woman why +he was going to New York, and her sympathy was enlisted at once. "Why, +you poor lad," she exclaimed, "just to think of your being in the city +all alone. And what will your mother think?" + +Archie couldn't imagine what his mother did think. He had remembered her +every minute during the last few days, and was anxious to write her, +so he decided to ask the woman for some paper and a pencil. These were +gladly given him, and he sat down and told his mother that he was almost +to New York and that he had been having a splendid time. He was careful +not to say anything about his experience with Farmer Tinch, or the +night he spent with the tramps. He knew these things would only make her +unhappy, and it was just as well that she should think everything was +smooth sailing for him. His letter was filled with his enthusiasm and +his hope for the morrow, so that when good Mrs. Dunn received it she +was overjoyed, and hurried over to show it to the Widow Sullivan, who +enjoyed it thoroughly and said "I told you so." Poor Mrs. Dunn had +been having a very miserable time of it. She was hardly surprised that +morning when she awoke and found Archie gone, but she was naturally much +worried for fear some accident would happen to him before he reached New +York. Once there, she felt that she needn't worry much about him, for, +strange to say, Mrs. Dunn had a firm belief in the ability of city +policemen to take care of every one, and she knew that Archie would not +be allowed to suffer for want of food and a place to sleep. And when she +received this letter, saying that Archie was nearly to New York, and had +even been so successful as to earn some money, she felt more comfortable +than for some time, Of course she supposed that he would be home before +long. She was positive that he wouldn't be able to get any work in the +city, and knew that as soon as his money gave out he would return. "It's +all for the best," she said to Mrs. Sullivan. "The habit of running away +from home was born in the boy. His father left home when he was no older +than Archie, and no harm ever came to him. So I'm not going to worry, +Mrs. Sullivan." And then Mrs. Dunn would go back to her home, and at +sight of Archie's old hat or some of his football paraphernalia, would +burst into tears. + +The good woman who gave Archie his supper refused to let him start out +again on the road that night. She told him that he must remain with +them, for they had an extra bed up over the kitchen which was never +needed, and that he might just as well sleep there as not. So for the +first time in nearly a week Archie slept comfortably, and, as he heard +the familiar sounds in the kitchen below him in the morning, it was hard +for him to make up his mind that he was not at home, and that it was not +his mother who was grinding the coffee in the kitchen below. He heard +the ham frying in the skillet, and the rattle of the dishes as his +hostess set the table, and then he dressed himself and hastened +downstairs, feeling ready for a good day's walking. + +When he had eaten his breakfast he started out again. The woman told him +that it was only about fifteen miles to New York, and that after he +had walked about six of them he could take a trolley-car and ride the +remainder of the distance for five cents. So he thanked her for her +kindness, and promised to let her know how he succeeded in the city, +for the woman was much interested in his future. He felt almost sorry +to leave the home-like place, but the prospect of reaching the city this +very day was enough to make him anxious to be off. He covered the six +miles to the trolley-car before eleven o'clock in the morning, and then +in an hour and a quarter more the trolley landed him in lower New York. + +His sensations as he was whirled along the smooth pavements, past +beautiful buildings and handsome residences, may be better imagined than +described. After looking forward to this day for so long, he was almost +overcome at the realisation of his hopes, and took the utmost delight in +everything about him. When the car stopped at the terminus of the line, +he got out and walked up the busiest street in the neighbourhood. He +hardly knew what to do first, but continued walking until he came to the +New York end of the great Brooklyn Bridge. Then he couldn't resist the +desire to walk across the bridge, and he started out upon the journey. +Up the steps he walked, and soon he had climbed as far as the middle +of the magnificent structure. There he stood for some time, looking +out over Governor's Island, nestled like a green egg in a nest of red +buildings, and past Staten Island to the open sea beyond It was all +grander, more beautiful than anything he had ever seen before, and +he felt glad that he had come. Then in another direction he saw the +never-ending succession of buildings, some tall, some low ones, but all +inhabited with swarms of people. "There are three million people in this +great city," he said to himself, "and over them in New Jersey, in those +cities I see, there are a million more, and I am one of four million." +The thought was too much for the boy, and he continued his walk across +the bridge. Once across, he came back again, for Brooklyn was a strange +place to him. In New York City he felt more at home, for he had at least +spent two days within its limits. + +Once back in the busy streets, he decided to look about for a cheap +place to stay for the night. It was the middle of the afternoon now, and +he felt that he ought to make some preparation. He knew better than to +apply at the police station for lodging, for he knew they would probably +turn him over to the famous Gerry Society, which would send him back +home before a day had passed, and then where would his ambitions be? + +He remembered the place where he had stayed with Uncle Henry, but +he knew that this would be too high-priced for his pocketbook, so he +started up the Bowery, where he expected to find some very cheap places. +He didn't like the looks of the people he met in the street, but +his experiences on the way to New York had taught him not to be too +particular about a little dirt. So when he came to a rickety building +with a sign up, "Beds, ten and fifteen cents," he immediately went up +the dark, filthy stairway, and found himself in a large room at the top +which served as the "hotel" office. There were rows of chairs in +front of the windows and along the walls, and in the chairs were +the queerest-looking lot of men he had ever seen. He didn't pay any +attention to them, though, but went up to the seedy individual behind +the desk, and asked him if he could get a bed for the night. "Sure, +Mike," the man replied, and Archie signed his name in a dirty book with +torn pages. He paid the man ten cents, and asked if he could leave his +bundle while he went outside. "Sure, Mike," was again his answer, and +the man took his little bundle of necessities and threw them on the +floor behind the counter. When Archie had gone out, a fat man with a +baby face came up and whispered to the clerk. "Anything in the bloke?" +he inquired. "Nit," said the clerk, "don't yer see his baggage? Does +it look like there's anything in it?" And the mysterious conversation +closed, to be continued later in the evening. + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + LOOKING FOR WORK--WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT. + +AFTER a couple of hours spent in going about the streets, Archie went +into a place where he bought some coffee and rolls for his supper. He +paid only five cents for three sweet rolls and a large cup of coffee +which was not at all bad to taste, and he returned to the lodging-house +on the Bowery feeling better than he had expected to feel when he +started out from the homestead where he spent the previous night, If +he could get a good meal for five or ten cents, and could sleep for ten +cents more, he would have enough to keep him going for some time. + +The Bowery at night presented a wonderful appearance to Archie's mind. +The brilliantly lighted shops, the cheap theatres with their bands of +musicians on the sidewalk in front of the entrance, were all attractive +to his boyish eyes, but he was wise enough to pass them all by, and +to make his way as quickly as possible to the cheap lodging-house. The +street was jammed with persons of every description. He was surprised +particularly at the number of Chinamen he met, for he didn't know that a +block or two away was the centre of the Chinese population of New York, +where the Celestials have their theatre, their hotels, their great +stores, and their joss-house. There were many Italians in the street, +too, and Polish Jews, to say nothing of Frenchmen and Germans. Then +there was the typical Bowery "tough," who swaggered up and down, looking +for trouble, which he usually finds before an evening passes. Archie was +not afraid in this cosmopolitan crowd. No one seemed to notice him, and, +anyhow, there were a great many policemen about, who seemed to keep a +sharp lookout all the time. And as Archie shared his mother's faith in +the city policeman, he felt no fear. + +In the lodging-house everything looked very much as before. The chairs +were still occupied with filthy-looking men, who smoked and spat and +talked in undertones among themselves. The boy paid no attention to any +of them, but, walking up to the seedy individual behind the counter, +asked him if he could go to bed now. The man answered, "Certainly," and +sent a fellow with Archie to show him his bed. It was in a long, narrow +room, which was poorly lighted with a few gas-jets here and there, and +which was filled with about thirty beds, all narrow, and all dirty. One +of these was pointed out to Archie, and then the man left him. The poor +lad felt more homesick than ever, and had it not been that he had a +glorious to-morrow to look forward to, he would have been very miserable +indeed. As it was, he undressed and got between the chilly sheets, when +he remembered that he hadn't looked after his little roll of bills for a +long time, and that some of them might be missing. He crawled out of +bed again, and felt inside the lining of his coat for the purse. He had +sewed it there for safe-keeping until he reached the city, for he had +some little change in his pocket, which he knew would last him for +several days. + +The poor boy's hand felt nothing but a cut in the lining, where the roll +of bills had been, and all at once he realised that the money must have +been stolen from him. And he at once thought of the night in the ruins, +when he fell asleep among the tramps, and there was no doubt in his mind +but that they had taken his money from him. This was a terrible blow. +Here he was, with just a few cents in his pocket, and no one to whom he +could appeal for aid. It was the worst predicament Archie had ever +been in, and he hardly knew what to do. He sat on the side of his dirty +little bed for awhile, and then he snuggled under the covers and was +soon asleep again. For a boy who has been walking all day seldom stays +awake from worry. + +But when he awoke in the morning, it was to realise the fact that he +must get some money this very day or go to the police station. The few +cents he had remaining were only enough to buy some coffee and bread for +breakfast, and the poor lad didn't know where his next meal would +come from. As he went out, the clerk in the filthy office of the +lodging-house told him that he needn't come back any more. + +"Why did you tell him that?" asked the fat man with a sly face. + +"Because I went through his clothes last night when he was asleep, and +he had only six cents in his pocket. We don't want no starvin' brats +around here, to bring the Gerry Society down upon us." + +It was well that Archie didn't know his pockets had been searched while +he was asleep, or his faith in human nature would have been more +shaken than ever before. He had not suspected that the men in this +lodging-house might be dishonest. + +"They are poor," he said to himself when he saw them first, "but they +may be good men for all that." + +After a slender meal, Archie found a library where he looked over the +advertising columns of the morning papers, trying to find some position +open which he thought he might fill. There were several advertisements +calling for office boys, and all these he made note of, and then as he +looked down the page he noticed that a boy was wanted in a restaurant to +wash dishes. He decided that if he didn't succeed in getting a place +as office boy, he might get the restaurant place. He knew that in a +restaurant he would be likely at least to get enough to eat. + +For two hours he called at addresses of men who wanted office boys, but +at every place he was turned away. "We have already hired one," some +of them said, and others told him that they never took any boys in +the office who were living away from home. Some asked him for +recommendations, and when he had none, they looked at him and told him +"good morning." It was all terribly discouraging, and with every minute +Archie was wishing more and more that he were back home again. Somehow +the city seemed different now from what it had been when Uncle Henry +was with him. Everything was less bright, and the things he had been +delighted with before were less interesting now. + +Finally, he entered a large, handsome suite of rooms, in one of the +great sky-scrapers, and was shown into a very elegant private office. +There he found an old gentleman seated in a great easy chair, looking +over papers, and keeping one eye upon a buzzing instrument at his side +which seemed to be spitting out long strips of paper, like a magician +in a side-show. The man looked up as he entered, and cleared his throat. +"Ahem," he said, "you look as if you were from the country. I wonder, +now, if you have came to the city to seek your fortune." + +Archie was embarrassed. "Yes, sir, I suppose you might put it that way," +he replied. + +"Well," continued the old gentleman, "my advice to you is to go back +where you came from as quickly as you can. Not one boy in a thousand +will gain either fame or fortune in New York, and you stand a wonderful +chance of sinking lower every year. And even if you do succeed, you will +miss many beautiful things in your life which may come to you in the +country. You can have a pleasant home there, and live an easy, natural +life, while here it will be years before you can expect to accomplish +much, and you will spend your life in a nervous strain. Think well, +young man, before choosing the great city as your sphere of usefulness." + +"I've made up my mind, sir," said Archie. "I have quite decided to +remain in the city." + +"Very well," said the old gentleman, "I hope you may never regret it. +But we have already hired an office boy. Good morning." + +Archie walked out, more discouraged than ever. Perhaps, after all, a +country life was not to be so much despised. This man ought to know what +he was talking about. But once outside, in the Broadway crowd, Archie +forgot everything about the country, and was lost in the delight of +being one of four million. + +He now decided to accept the place in the restaurant, if it were +not taken, and, fortunately for him, it was not. So he rolled up his +sleeves, and began to wash dishes as if he had done nothing else in all +his life before. + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + IN THE STREET AGAIN--THE POLICE STATION--VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, + AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR. + +ALL day long Archie washed dishes, and before night came he decided that +he had never before had such discouraging work. The restaurant was +a popular one, and there were very many dishes to be washed, to say +nothing of the pots and pans which were always dirty. Archie no sooner +finished one sink full of dishes than another large pile was waiting +to be put through the same operation, and there was no time at all for +looking about him. There was hardly time for eating, even, and at +noon he was only able to snatch a few mouthfuls. The work was not +interesting, and it was a new sort of labour to Archie, so that +altogether he did not get on as well as he might have wished. The cook +was constantly nagging him, and telling him to hurry up, and the poor +lad tried his best to please him. But somehow everything went wrong, and +he was hardly surprised when the proprietor came in at six o'clock +with a new man for the place. "Come around in the morning," he said to +Archie, "and I'll pay your day's wages." + +So the boy was in the street once more, with no money, and no place to +sleep. He wasn't hungry, that was one thing, for he had been allowed +to eat a good meal before leaving the restaurant. But where was he to +sleep, and what was he to do on the morrow, when he would surely be +hungry? His experience at looking for work had not been encouraging, and +he began to have serious doubts as to whether he would ever get a place. +Certainly he would starve if he waited around New York long without +anything to do. + +It was quite dark at seven o'clock, and Archie walked over to the +brilliantly lighted street which ran north and south through the city. +He had never failed to find something interesting to look at there, and +he felt now that he would like to see the bright side of city life, even +if he couldn't enjoy it himself. So all the evening he walked up and +down the street, watching the well-dressed crowds hurrying into the +theatres and the other almost innumerable places of amusement. He stared +in open-mouthed amazement at some of the costumes of the women he saw +alighting from carriages. Never before had he seen anything half so +beautiful, and if any one had told him that there were such dresses he +would have told them he didn't believe it. Some of them, he thought, +must cost hundreds of dollars, and the jewels worn with them many +hundreds more. How interesting, how new, it all was to him! Once he +thought of the little home in the village, and at first wished that his +mother might be there to enjoy the sights with him. "But I wouldn't want +her to see me," he thought, "not while I am so miserable, and feeling +so discouraged." For Archie was beginning to wonder if he hadn't made +a mistake in leaving home, whether he had not been overconfident and +hot-headed. But he decided to try it a few days more, that is, if he +could manage to live for that length of time in the city. + +At twelve o'clock he was walking up and down the street, which was still +bright with millions of lights, though the crowds had gone home from the +theatres, and the restaurants were beginning to be less popular. He was +still wondering how he was going to find a place to sleep, when he was +accosted by a policeman, and taken into a doorway. "I've been watching +you," said the officer, "and I want to know why you are walking up and +down the street at this time of night." + +Archie could have cried from fright, but he remembered that he was under +suspicion, so decided to tell the policeman his whole story, and perhaps +he could help him out in some way. So he described his experiences +during the day, and was surprised at the interest shown by the officer +in the recital. When he had finished he was told that he would be +taken to the police station. "You needn't be afraid, my lad," said the +policeman. "I'll see that the Gerry Society doesn't get you and send you +home, that is, if you think you want to try it here a few days longer. +You can sleep at the station to-night, and the next morning you can try +it again." So to the station they went, and Archie was, naturally, a +little frightened when he saw, for the first time, the cells, and the +terribly severe appearance of all his surroundings. But he was given a +good bed in which to sleep, and he passed a delightful night, dreaming +of the wonderful adventures which befell him in the city. + +He was not awakened until eight o'clock, and then he found the good +policeman waiting to take him out to breakfast, He expressed surprise +that he should be so kind to him. + +"I always thought that officers were cross and unpleasant," he said, +"but you're not that kind, anyhow." + +"Well," laughed the officer, "we have to be cross very often, though +we're sometimes sorry to be so. But I've taken a fancy to you, my lad. I +like to see a boy who does things. When a boy of seventeen is willing +to come to New York alone, and make his own way, without friends +or influence of any kind, it shows a proper spirit, and he ought to +succeed. I know you'll get along if you only persevere. I'd advise you +to keep on trying." + +"Oh, I'm going to, now," said Archie. "I was very homesick and +discouraged last night, but since I've met you I seem to have received a +new impetus, and I'm ready to make a new beginning." + +So Archie and the policeman parted friends. + +"Come around to the station to-night if you want a bed, and you shall +be cared for," said the officer, as he turned around the corner into the +busy street, where he was lost in the crowd. + +Archie walked down the street, hardly knowing what to do first. He +didn't feel like answering any more advertisements in the newspapers, +and he decided to go into a few stores and ask for work. He was about to +do this when he saw before him the magnificent building of the New York +Enterprise. It was a truly beautiful structure, rising fifteen stories +above the ground, and surmounted with an artistic tower, which could be +seen from almost any part of the city. The home of the city's greatest +daily, it looked as if it were always welcoming strangers to the +metropolis, and Archie felt an irresistible impulse to enter. Everything +connected with a newspaper had for him the greatest fascination, and he +knew he would enjoy seeing through this wonderful building, which was +almost wholly occupied by the departments of the Enterprise. So he +entered the door, and passed from one floor to another, finally arriving +at the highest floor of all, where were located the editorial rooms of +the Evening Enterprise. All at once a new plan entered Archie's fertile +brain. Why shouldn't he be able to get something to do on a newspaper? +It had always been his greatest ambition to become a reporter, and here, +although he didn't think the editor would take him in that capacity, he +thought he might get some sort of work in which he could work himself +up. + +There upon the door were the magic words: "Editor of the Evening +enterprise. No Admittance." Archie opened the door and entered. He knew +it would be useless to send in his name. It was best to see the editor +at once, and without ceremony. He was seated before a large desk, +which was littered with papers of every description, and he was a very +pleasant person in appearance. Archie stood hesitating near the door, +and remained there a minute or two before the editor looked up. + +"Well, my boy, what is it?" + +Archie took courage. + +"I--I want to be a reporter, sir, and I thought it would do no harm to +ask you for such a position, anyhow." + +The distinguished journalist wheeled about in his chair. + +"What!" he exclaimed, "you want to be a reporter. Why, my dear boy, how +old are you?" + +"I'll be eighteen my next birthday," said Archie, "and, sir, I've had +some experiences in the last two weeks, which make me feel as if I were +about five years older than I really am. I've been through some very +trying experiences, sir." + +The editor was interested at once. "Tell me what your experiences have +been," he said, and Archie began, and told him his whole story; how he +had left home to win fame and fortune, and how he had worked on the farm +for a week with Farmer Tinch; how he had been robbed the night he stayed +with the tramps in the ancient ruins, and how he had finally reached +the city. Then he told him of the night in the lodging-house, of his +dish-washing experience in the restaurant, and how he had been taken +from the street by a policeman the night before, and allowed to sleep in +the station-house. When he had finished the editor had a broad grin upon +his face. + +"By Jove!" he exclaimed, "this is certainly rich stuff. There's a good +story in it, I'll be bound." + +Then, speaking to Archie, he said: + +"Just wait here a minute, my boy, and I'll see if we can't put some +money in your way." + +He pressed a button at the side of his desk, and when a boy appeared, he +told him to bring "Mr. Jones, please, or one of the other reporters. And +tell Jones to bring an artist with him." + +The reporter and the artist soon stood before the editor, who told them, +with great glee, that he had a leading feature for the next evening +edition of the Enterprise. "Just talk to this boy, Jones, and see if +you can't make two good columns on the front page and two for the inside +from his story. I think it's great, myself. And you Cash," he said, +turning to the artist, "you make a good sketch of the boy." + +Archie could hardly believe his eyes and ears. Just to think that he +was being interviewed, and that his picture was to be in the paper. It +seemed almost too good to be true. + +When the reporter had finished with him, he was taken down-stairs to the +cashier's office and given thirty dollars in bills. "This will pay you +for the interview," said the editor, "and give you enough to fix up +with. Now, to-morrow, you come in again, and I think I can give you +steady employment." + +Oh, how happy Archie was! He went out into the street, and seemed to +fairly walk on air. Then he heard the newsboys crying, "Extra paper, +read about the Enterprise's Boy Reporter." And when Archie saw the +paper, there on the front page was his picture, together with the story +of his "startling adventures." + + + +CHAPTER X. + + LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN--FEATURED AS "THE BOY REPORTER." + +ARCHIE often speaks of the day when he visited the newspaper office +for the first time as the happiest day in all his life. The change from +despair and homesickness to the joy of being appreciated by some one +was so rapid that it made his head fairly swim with the exhilaration of +success. With thirty dollars in his pocket, and the knowledge that he +would have steady employment of the kind he desired on the morrow, he +walked up the Bowery feeling like a prince. He entered the lodging-house +where he had left his bundle of clothing, and so surprised the clerk +by his new appearance that he was invited to remain there for another +night. The shrewd man guessed that some good fortune must have befallen +Archie, or he wouldn't be so happy. But the one night of misery which +he had spent in the squalid hotel was enough for Archie, and he walked +hastily up-town with his bundle, keeping a sharp lookout for a pleasant +place where he might get a room. In his previous wanderings he had seen +several nice houses with rooms to rent, but now that he wanted a room he +found it difficult to find any of these neighbourhoods. He was anxious +to get settled as quickly as possible, for he wanted to get everything +done to-day, so that to-morrow he could have time to do anything +required of him by the editor of the Enterprise. He must get a new suit +of clothes, he must get his hair cut, and last, but not least, he must +write home to mother and tell her of his great good fortune. + +Finally, in his wanderings, Archie came to a beautiful square which +was surrounded on every side by business houses and tenements. But the +square itself and the houses on it were very quaint and very handsome, +so that it seemed to be a very oasis in the desert. The green trees, +just a little tinged with the brown and gold of autumn, reminded Archie +of the front yard at home, and he decided to get a room in one of the +houses here if he could possibly do so. + +It so happened that there was a hall bedroom empty in one of the +best-looking places, and Archie at once engaged it. The price was more +reasonable than he had hoped for, even, and this made him happy, for as +yet he had no idea how much his earnings would be, and he was anxious to +be able to save something to send home, if he possibly could. The room +was nicely furnished, and looked out upon the fountain, with the green +trees, so that it was highly satisfactory in every respect. It didn't +take Archie long to undo his bundle, and it was a pitiful display that +greeted him when it was opened. The little comb and brush, a piece of +soap, a Testament given him last Christmas by the teacher at Sunday +school, a suit of underwear, and a couple of handkerchiefs. The whole +lot of things hardly filled a corner in one of the bureau drawers, and +Archie realised that he must buy a great many things within a week or +two. + +But before going out to do any shopping, he sat down and wrote a long +letter home, describing his success of the morning, and telling his +mother of the editor's promise to give him regular employment. He +enclosed a copy of the paper with his picture and the story of his +adventures, and it made him very happy to think of his mother's feelings +when she read it all. Then, when he had finished, he went out to a +post-office, and bought a money-order for ten dollars, which he also +enclosed. "I know I can spare it," he said to himself, "and it will +gratify her so much." Then, when the letter with its contents was safely +mailed, he bought himself a new suit of clothing, and renovated himself +in many ways, so that when he returned to his room in the square it was +nearly dark, and he looked a different boy entirely. + +Before going to bed, he determined to see his policeman friend, and tell +him of his good fortune. "He is probably expecting me to sleep in the +station," Archie thought, "and it will be a great surprise to him." +But when he met the good man, he found that he had already heard of his +success. + +"I bought the Enterprise, and could hardly believe my eyes," said he, +"but I always thought you would find some one to appreciate your pluck. +I'm mighty glad for you, my lad, and you must always let me know how +you are getting along." This Archie promised to do, and returned to his +lodging to sleep. + +The next morning he was on hand at the Enterprise office before the +editor himself was down. The place was quite as fascinating as it had +been on the preceding day, and he found something new to look at +every minute. The reporters at their desks, several of whom introduced +themselves and congratulated Archie on his perseverance, were a source +of great interest to him, and the copy-boys, running here and there with +special copy for the first edition, gave an air of hustling activity to +the place that was very attractive to this new reporter. + +When the editor came he had already thought of something for Archie to +do. "Now you've been introduced to the public," he said, "and we want to +feature you for a few days. Every one will be interested in knowing what +you are doing, and what is going to become of you. You must write us +an article for the paper to-day, telling about your experiences since +yesterday, about getting a new suit, and about hunting for a room. And +you can tell about your policeman friend, too." + +This was surprising. Archie couldn't imagine why any one should +be interested in knowing about his daily life, but he sat down and +succeeded in writing a very interesting two columns about it. He was +much surprised that he should be able to write so easily and so well. Of +course he knew that composition and rhetoric had been his two strongest +studies at school, but he had never realised before that he had any +great talent for writing. When he had finished this article, the editor +looked it over, and said, "That's great. You're all right, my boy. We'll +make a great journalist of you yet," and of course this made Archie very +happy. "Wait until this story is set up," said Mr. Jennings, the editor, +"and I'll see what you can do in the way of correcting proofs." + +When the proofs came, in a very short time, he hardly knew what to do +with them. But in reading them he discovered several mistakes, which he +lost no time in correcting, and Mr. Jennings said that he had done very +well indeed. "Now you can spend the day in doing what you please. +I would suggest that you go about New York and have as many strange +experiences as possible, so that to-morrow you can write them up for us. +And it will pay you, by the way, to go out to Coney Island, which is a +different place from any you have seen before. You are sure to see some +unusual things, and in the morning you can bring me in two columns about +it." + +Before leaving, Archie was asked if he needed any money. "You mustn't +hesitate to ask for it, because you can have it as well to-day as on +Saturday." But as he had left several dollars of the thirty he had +received the day before, Archie didn't draw any more, and he thought it +most remarkable that the editor should have so much money to pay out. + +He had no difficulty in getting a trolley-car to Coney Island, and, +after an hour's riding through Brooklyn streets, he found himself in the +most unique and most delightful place imaginable, It was a queer-looking +town, with great wheels in the air, high towers, with elevators and +innumerable merry-go-rounds, and other sources of amusement. The noise +was something terrific. Hand-organs, street-pianos, and German bands +were all playing at the same time, while people hurried about from one +place to another, enjoying the hundreds of games and riding the various +scenic railways and carrousels. Archie stood mute with delight at it +all, but before five minutes had passed he had shot the chutes, and had +ridden over a steeplechase which took him through dark caverns, where +dragons glared at him and where electrical sparks were constantly flying +through the air. It was all so new, so different from anything he had +seen before, that he was simply lost in admiration. He was standing +near a theatre, when a short, dark man touched him on the arm, and said, +"Come this way, young man, and I'll teach you the best game of all." + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND--RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN. + +ARCHIE was at first too much surprised to answer the man at all, but in +a few moments he remembered that he was now a reporter, and that it +was his duty to see all that he could, and have all the new experiences +possible. So he decided to follow the man, and find out what "the best +thing of all" in Coney Island was like. He was taken through several +narrow alleyways, and finally he found himself in front of a tumble-down +structure, built out directly over the water. It was very modest in +appearance, and everything seemed quiet about the place. The shades were +carefully drawn, and the dark man had to knock three times before the +door was opened and they were permitted to enter. Inside, Archie found +himself in a handsomely furnished apartment which differed greatly in +appearance from the exterior of the building. There was a rich velvet +carpet, mahogany furniture, and a great many small tables standing about +the room. The place was filled with men, mostly well-dressed, who were +playing various games. Some were dealing cards, others were twirling +wheels with numbers on them, and some were playing games with chips. +It didn't take Archie long to realise that he had been steered into a +gambling den of the worst kind, and he was immediately on the alert for +future developments. He watched every movement of his new friend, and +noticed that he found it necessary to speak to several of those present +in a low undertone. This didn't worry Archie, because he knew that +he was in no danger except of losing money, and he felt that he could +afford to lose some money, since he was sure to earn more by writing +about the experience for the newspaper. + +So he carefully observed all that was going on, making mental notes of +the peculiarities of the place and the people. When at last the dark +man came up and inquired if he wouldn't like a chance to earn some money +easily, he very readily answered yes, and the man was overjoyed to +find so willing a victim. Then, of course, Archie was introduced to the +mysteries of the famous roulette wheel, of which he had read so much. +Archie was interested in everything, and didn't mind losing four dollars +in learning so much that was new. He succeeded in getting away when +he had lost this sum, though the man assured him that he couldn't help +winning back all he had lost, and much more, too, if he would but remain +awhile longer. Archie was firm, however, and passed out into the narrow +alleyways again, feeling that he had learned a great deal through a very +small expenditure of money. He gradually found his way back into the +crowded Surf Avenue, where there were hundreds of things, evidently, +which he had not yet seen. The crowds, too, seemed greater even than +before, and there seemed to be thousands of people arriving every hour +from New York and Brooklyn, over the various street-car and railway +lines, and by the excursion boats landing at the great iron pier. The +noise was still deafening, and every one seemed to be having a splendid +time in every way. "Surely," said Archie to himself, "no one can feel +blue or despondent in such a place as this, where every one is full of +fun, and apparently determined to have a good time while here." And he +felt that he would like to remain longer, but he knew he should go +back again to the city, so that he might see the editor, and tell him +something about what he had seen and done. + +So again he rode over the great Brooklyn bridge, and stopped on the +other side at the handsome building of the Enterprise. It made Archie +very happy to feel that he was now a reporter on such a great paper, and +he found it hard to realise that so much good fortune had come to him in +such a short time. He met reporters in the various hallways, and all of +them spoke to him pleasantly, so that he began to feel that he had never +been thrown with such pleasant men before. + +He had no difficulty in seeing the editor this time, and found him a +ready listener to the story of his Coney Island experiences. He insisted +on Archie's describing all the men he had seen in the gambling den, and +then asked him if he could identify them, if necessary, and also if he +would be able to find the place again. Archie gave good descriptions of +most of the men, and said that he could take any one to the place at any +time. The editor lost himself in thought for a few minutes, and at the +end of that time he rang for a copy-boy. "Ring for a messenger boy," he +said, "and when he arrives come for a note which I want him to take to +Mr. Pultzer's house." Archie stared with amazement at Mr. Jennings, and +waited for further information. He wondered what was going to be done. +He knew that Mr. Pultzer owned the newspaper, and he knew that it must +be something important that Mr. Jennings wanted to write him about. He +wasn't long left in the dark, and he felt very proud that Mr. Jennings +should have confidence enough in him to tell him about his plans. "I +think you have discovered something which will prove very important to +the paper and the public," he said to Archie. "We have suspected for a +long time that gambling dens have been flourishing in Coney Island, but +up to now we have not been able to locate any of them. Now that you have +found one, we hope to arouse public opinion to the danger there is in +such places, and we hope to inspire a reform movement which will be +strong enough to wipe them out entirely. I will hear from Mr. Pultzer +in a short time, and then I want you to go down to the Island with +some plain-clothes detectives and two other reporters. And I don't +mind telling you now that there will be a good sum in it for you if you +succeed in arresting any of the leaders of this gang. You can be excused +for an hour now, if there's anything you want to do." + +Full of enthusiasm over the coming adventure and his part in it, Archie +hurried out to a quick-lunch counter and bought himself a light meal, +for he feared that he would have to remain at Coney Island through +the evening. Then, when he had finished, he returned to the newspaper +office, where he spent some time in getting acquainted with some of the +reporters who were working on the Morning Enterprise. He found them all +very pleasant to meet, and he learned a great many helpful things from +their conversation. The older men were able to give him many pointers +concerning things that he should, and should not, do. While he was in +the office of the Morning Enterprise Mr. Jennings came in, and, taking +him along into the private room of the managing editor, introduced him +to Mr. Van Bunting, who was the editorial head of the morning edition. +Then Mr. Jennings told of the new scheme, and Mr. Van Bunting entered +into it so thoroughly that before an hour three detectives, two +reporters, and Archie were on their way to the Island. + +Once arrived in the resort, which was as noisy and bright as in the +afternoon, they all made a bee-line for the gambling den, headed by +Archie, who surprised the others with his certainty and confidence as to +which was the right direction. In a very few minutes they all stood in +front of the dilapidated structure built out over tide-water, and Archie +heard one of the detectives say that the place looked "mighty suspicious +like." He gave three knocks just as the dark man had done in the +afternoon, and in a few minutes the door was cautiously opened and a +head made its appearance. The detectives lost no time in pushing their +way in, amid great confusion and cries of fear, and it seemed only a +few seconds until all the inmates were huddled in a corner, covered with +pistols, and wailing in fear, when they weren't cursing through anger. +Then they were all arrested and taken to the police station, where they +were all refused bail, and placed in cells overnight. Then the reporters +returned to the office of the Enterprise, where Archie was told by Mr. +Van Bunting to write the story of his experience for the morning paper. +This was his first work for the morning edition, and he took great pains +to make his descriptions as complete as possible, and the details as +accurate as he knew how to make them. And his hard work was rewarded by +words of praise from the managing editor when he turned the copy in for +editing. + +Tired from his hard day's work, Archie then went up-town to the quiet +square in which he had his home, and he was glad to get to bed. He had +been nervous and excited all day, and found it difficult to sleep, but +finally the tired eyelids lay quietly over the tired eyes, and Archie +was dreaming of the cool and pleasant arbour of grapes at home, and of +how the Hut Club was holding a special meeting there to devise ways and +means of welcoming home their distinguished fellow member, Mr. Archie +Dunn, who had achieved such great success in the city. + +Notwithstanding his tired feeling, Archie was up early the next morning, +and out at the corner to buy an Enterprise. He hastily turned the pages, +trying to find the story of his Coney Island adventures, but he looked +in vain. It wasn't visible anywhere. He was about to think that it had +not been thought worth while printing when he noticed on the front +page, in large letters, "The Boy Reporter's Great Discovery," and then +followed the complete account, just as he had written it. This was +the best thing yet. Just to think that his story had been considered +important enough to print upon the front page! He could hardly believe +it. Surely he had made great strides, and Archie began to realise that +it is not experience that is most needed in journalism, but something to +write about. "I have simply been fortunate in finding some interesting +things," he said, to himself, and then, after a light breakfast in a +quaint Italian restaurant around the corner, he hurried down-town to the +office of the newspaper. + +Archie was beginning to feel, by now, that he had worked for a long time +upon the paper, and as he had become acquainted with almost every one +connected with it, this wasn't a strange feeling for him to have. And +it was evident, too, that the editors intended to keep him busy for some +time to come, and Archie realised that he was in newspaper work to stay, +for a time, at least. And he was overjoyed at the prospect, for he found +the whole business as fascinating and as interesting as he had expected +it would be. + +Mr. Jennings, of the evening edition, was at the office when Archie +arrived, and sent for him to come in. "Here is fifty dollars," he said, +"for your work of yesterday, and you will have more coming to you if +these men are convicted. I want to congratulate you on what you have +done so far. Come in this afternoon, and I think Mr. Van Bunting will +have a new plan for you." + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER--THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT + TO THE PHILIPPINES--LEAVING NEW YORK--IN CHICAGO. + +AT three o'clock in the afternoon Archie was seated in Mr. Van Bunting's +office, together with Mr. Jennings and several of the chief members +of the editorial staffs of both editions of the paper. The editors had +spread out before them, on the large table, several maps, and most of +them were busily engaged in making notes on little paper pads. All the +time, however, an excited conversation was being carried on, for some +editors wanted Archie to proceed to the Philippines one way, and some +thought that the better plan would be for him to go by some other route. +But the important fact with Archie was that he was really going to be +sent to the Philippines as a war correspondent, and that he was going +to start very shortly. He had called on Mr. Van Bunting early in the +afternoon, and had then learned for the first time what the new plan was +to be. When the managing editor asked him how he would like to go to the +Philippines, Archie could scarcely reply, so delighted was he with the +brilliant prospect before him. He managed to stammer out a few words, +though, in spite of his surprise. "I always thought war correspondents +were selected from the most experienced men in journalism," he said, +but Mr. Van Bunting only laughed. "That's what we have already done, my +boy," he said, "and so far none of our distinguished correspondents have +sent us a thing worth printing that we didn't already know. You see they +can't send any more to us in the way of news than we can get from the +War Department in Washington, and most of these men are too old fogy to +send us anything out of the ordinary line of war correspondence. Now, +what we want is for you to go over there and have some adventures, and +write us something which will be different from what we have had before +from the Philippines. We are sending you, because you have had no +experience at such work, and will be sure to send us something unusual, +and that is what we want. If you can only do as well in the tropics as +you have done here in New York, we shall be more than satisfied with +your work. I am sorry that I won't have time to give you very complete +instructions, but perhaps it will be as well. And now some of the men +are waiting outside to come in and talk this matter over, so we'll have +them in now." + +And Archie found himself in the midst of an editorial conference, during +which many things were discussed. The meeting lasted more than two +hours, and finally it was decided that Archie should travel from New +York to San Francisco, and go from there to Manila on the army transport +which was to sail on the twenty-fifth of the month. This meant that he +would have to leave the city in two days' time, and Archie announced +himself as quite willing to do this, as he had few preparations to make. +The editors gave him many instructions about how he was to address his +correspondence, and how he should proceed in the event of finding it +necessary to send despatches by cable. And at the end of the conference +he felt that he knew all that he would need to know, so that he could +start off without fear of not being able to fulfil his mission. As far +as Archie could understand it, his chief instructions as to duty were to +the effect that he must have as many experiences as possible of as +many different kinds, and that he must write about them in a perfectly +natural way, just as if he were writing a letter to the folks at home. +And he thought, of course, that this would be very easy to do. + +Mr. Van Bunting gave him a letter of credit for six hundred dollars, +which amount, he said, would probably be sufficient to pay his expenses +while he was in the Philippines, and he also gave him a cheque for three +hundred dollars, which was intended to pay the expense of getting to +Manila. "Of course," said Mr. Van Bunting, "you can spend as much or as +little of this as you please, and if you need more, and we find that +the venture is paying us, why, we will send it on demand." Archie was so +overcome with the knowledge that he possessed nine hundred dollars, that +he could hardly thank the editor enough, and he made up his mind that he +would spend as little as possible of the sum, and bring back part of it +to Mr. Van Bunting upon his return. He couldn't imagine how it would be +possible for him to spend so much money, and he felt that, after some of +his experiences since he left home, he ought to be able to economise in +many ways where other reporters wouldn't know how to save at all. + +When the two days were up Archie had made all his preparation, and was +ready to leave New York for Manila. He had sent a long letter home +to his mother, telling her of his great good fortune, and enclosing a +cheque for a hundred dollars, which she was to spend while he was gone. +He told her that he would send her more money from time to time, and +felt very proud as he mailed the letter. He told her, too, that if at +any time she didn't hear from him on time, she could write to Mr. +Van Bunting, and he would let her know of his whereabouts. This was +something which Mr. Van Bunting had very thoughtfully advised him to do. +"Your mother is sure to worry if the mails are overdue," he had said, +"and if she writes to me, I will always be able to tell her of your +whereabouts, for we can hear of you through our other correspondents, if +not from your own despatches." So Archie felt that his mother shouldn't +worry, since he was such a fortunate boy in so many ways. + +The night before leaving he took a long farewell walk up Broadway. +Everything was bright with light, and there was, as usual, a great crowd +of pleasure-seekers on the sidewalks. It was all as fascinating as ever +to Archie, and he felt sorry that he was to leave it so soon. New York +had begun to grow on him, as it grows on any one living there for +any length of time, who is in a position to appreciate the city's +attractions. He felt that he would almost rather be on Broadway than in +the Philippines, but of course he forgot this feeling when he remembered +the confidence which Mr. Van Bunting had reposed in him by sending him +upon such an important mission. So, after he had passed all the bright +theatres and restaurants, he turned down a quiet side street and +returned to his lodging, so that he might have a good night's rest +before starting on his long journey. + +At seven in the morning he was up again, and at nine o'clock he was +bidding farewell to his many friends in the editorial rooms of the +Evening Enterprise. Every one congratulated him upon his great good luck +in getting such a chance to distinguish himself, and when they had done +telling him that he had a great future before him, Archie felt happier +than ever before in all his life. + +The train left the Grand Central Station at one o'clock, and Mr. +Jennings went with him to the station to see him well started upon the +journey. "You may be sure we are all much interested in you, Archie," he +said, as the train was leaving, "and we shall look forward anxiously to +your safe return." These words made Archie very glad, for it cheered him +to know that at least one of the editors liked him for himself as well +as for what he could do. + +The Southwestern Limited seemed to fairly fly along the banks of the +beautiful Hudson, and everything was so delightful that Archie could +scarcely believe that only a week or two before he had been walking +along country roads, anxious to reach New York, that he might become an +office boy. Every thing in this train was as perfect as modern ingenuity +could make it, and there was no lack of interesting things to be +examined, when Archie tired of the landscape. Then, when the train had +been two hours out of New York, he discovered that the famous president +of this great railway system was aboard, and, mustering up his courage, +he determined to introduce himself. He had long been anxious to see this +famous after-dinner orator and statesman, and here was a chance which +might not come soon again. So he went back to the drawing-room, and +found the great man to be quite as pleasant as he was interesting, +and Archie was asked to seat himself and tell something about his +experiences since leaving home. Everything he said was listened to with +great interest, and this distinguished wit seemed to find many of the +adventures very funny indeed. "You have certainly had some wonderful +experiences," he said, when Archie had finished, "and I can appreciate +your anxiety to leave school. I had that desire myself when I was a boy +of about fifteen, but my father succeeded in making me change my opinion +on the subject, and without much argument, unless you can call an +ox-team and a stony pasture an argument. I had been asking to stay +at home from school for a long time. I said that I was too old to be +sitting there with a lot of girls and some younger boys, and that I +wanted to work. Finally, my father said that I could stay at home if I +cared to, and that he would let me work on the farm for a time. I was +overjoyed, of course, at the prospect of staying out of school. + +"The next morning I was awakened at four o'clock, and had to swallow my +breakfast in a hurry, because I was late, my father said. Then he took +me out to the barn and ordered me to hitch up the ox-team, and when this +was done he took me out to a pasture lot and told me to pick up all the +boulders there. Well, I picked up boulders all day long, and by evening +my back and arms were so sore I could hardly move them. I was too tired +to eat supper, and was soon asleep in bed. When my father awoke me at +four the next morning, I told him to let me alone and that I was going +back to school. After that I was content to stay in school, and said +nothing more about leaving until I had finished the course and was ready +to go to college." + +And Archie thought it very queer that such a famous man should have had +such experiences when a boy. He remained in the drawing-room for more +than an hour, and when he left he felt perfectly sure that he had been +talking with the most charming man in the world. + +The train sped on and on, and when daylight came the next morning they +were passing through Northern Ohio. Early in the afternoon they reached +a great smoky metropolis, spread out for miles over the plains. Archie +knew that this must be Chicago, and he decided, as this was Saturday, +and the steamer wouldn't leave San Francisco until the next Friday, that +he would have time to remain here over Sunday. So he left the train at +the station in Pacific Avenue, and, Finding a hotel near the station, he +started out to see something of the city famous for its dirt and for the +World's Fair, two widely different things. + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + SAN FRANCISCO--THE TRANSPORT GONE--WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY + PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER--THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII. + +ARCHIE found Chicago to be so widely different from New York that +everything he saw was new and interesting to him. In the afternoon he +managed to see something of the congested business section of the city, +the tall office buildings, the great stores, and the famous Board of +Trade. It was all very fine, he thought, but still it wasn't nearly so +fascinating to him as New York had been on the first day he visited it. +"Chicago seems so very much like some great town," he explained to the +hotel clerk in the evening. "I feel as if I were not in a great city +at all, because there are not the evidences of a large and wealthy +population that we have everywhere in New York." Archie spoke of New +York as if he had lived there always, and found much to criticise in +Chicago. But toward evening he went up to Lincoln Park and the beautiful +North Shore, and he felt that there was nothing more beautiful in New +York than this magnificent park, and this handsome Lake Shore Drive, +with its great houses whose lawns reached down almost to the lake +itself. On the South Side of the city, too, he found some handsome +streets and residences, but there was always that feeling of being in +some rapidly growing town. It wasn't hard for Archie to realise that +there were older houses in his native town than could be found anywhere +in the great city of Chicago. + +The greatest difference between Chicago and New York was to be noticed +in the evening. Instead of the brilliantly lighted thoroughfares of +upper Broadway and Twenty-third and Thirty-fourth Streets, he found +but one street in Chicago which was at all illuminated, and the +illuminations there were chiefly signs in front of dime museums. The +streets, too, were not so crowded, and Archie almost longed that he +could be back on Broadway, if only for a little while. + +On Sunday he found Chicago to be a more noisy city than he had ever been +in before on that day, and he found that the people made good use +of their one weekly holiday. All places of amusement were open, and +everything was running in "full blast." + +The parks seemed to be very popular, indeed, and there were numerous +water excursions upon Lake Michigan, to Milwaukee, St. Joe, and various +other neighbouring cities. The street-cars were crowded all day long, +many of them taking people to a Sunday game of baseball at the Athletic +Park. All of this was very interesting and very new to Archie, but it +didn't make him anxious to remain in Chicago any longer than Monday +morning, so on that day he took the limited train for the Pacific Coast, +for he had determined not to stop off again until he reached Denver. + +Days of weary travel over a level, uninteresting stretch of ground +followed the departure of the train from Chicago, and had not Archie +found some interesting persons to talk with he would have been very +weary long before reaching Denver. As it was, he managed to pass the +time very pleasantly until the train entered Colorado, and after that +he found much that was new to look at until he reached Denver. Here he +remained for half a day, just long enough to see something of the city +and a little of the neighbouring country. Then, taking a train for San +Francisco, he reached that city on Thursday afternoon, and immediately +began to make arrangements for sailing. He found, to his great +disappointment, that the army transport had sailed the previous day, +contrary to the expectations of the editors, and of the War Department +itself, until the arrival of important despatches from Manila, which +made it necessary to start the transport at once with supplies of +ammunition. Archie hardly knew what to do. He had not anticipated +anything like this, and could scarcely think of any plan for a time, +but, finally, he proved himself equal to the emergency. He went to the +naval agent and asked him when the transport would be due at Honolulu, +and then he ascertained that a passenger steamer sailing for that port +on Saturday would reach the destination three days sooner than the +transport, so that by taking the liner he would have three extra days in +Honolulu, and would be able to reach Manila on schedule time, after all. +He at once decided that this was the thing for him to do, and as soon +as he thought of taking the steamer it occurred to him that he might +possibly be able to work his way to Honolulu, instead of paying the +regular passenger fare, which he knew was high. So he went down to the +great docks, and, after interviewing the second steward, he approached +the chief steward himself, and asked if there wasn't something that +he could do aboard the ship to earn his passage. The chief steward was +thoughtful for a time, and finally said, "Well, yes, I believe there is. +We haven't any one to peel vegetables yet, and if you think you care to +do that work I guess we can fix you up all right." Archie didn't wait +to consider whether peeling vegetables was hard work or not. He was too +glad to have a position of any kind aboard ship to be particular about +what his work was like, so he told the steward that he was willing to +take the place. "Well, be on hand at about eight in the morning, and +we'll see that you get to Honolulu." + +Archie was overjoyed at his good management. "I am going to save about +a hundred dollars," he said to himself, "and I will have this money to +send home to mother." The rest of the afternoon and the evening he spent +in going about San Francisco, and he found it to be more like New York +than any city he had yet seen. There was the same cosmopolitan crowd on +the main thoroughfares, and the same foreign districts here and there +throughout the city. He found a great deal to interest him, especially +at the Presidio, where everything connected with the army monopolised +his attention. He made friends with many of the soldiers who were +waiting to be sent to the Philippines, and hoped, on leaving, that he +would meet some of them there, but he hardly expected that he would meet +some of them in such a strange manner as it was his fate to do in Luzon. + +After a good night's rest he was on hand early at the great steamer, +where there was such a scene of bustle and confusion as he had never +seen before, not even in New York. There was a throng of men with trucks +who were loading the late freight, and there was a constant din of noisy +voices, which, combined with the shrieks of escaping steam, made it +impossible to carry on a conversation. Archie hurried aboard to find the +steward, who immediately took him into the galley and introduced him to +the cook, a large, fat Frenchman, with small, blue eyes set far back +in his head. He seemed to be a pleasant man, and Archie thought that he +would like him very much. + +"Well, does ze youngster vant to vork, eh! Eef he do, I say you pare zis +potate for dinee as quick you can." And the fellow pointed to a great +bag of potatoes and a paring-knife. "Now you sit zere in da corner," +continued the cook, "and keep out uf my vay." Archie found a stool and +sat down, and, having brought an apron with him, he put it on and began +work. The cook watched him closely, so that Archie soon learned to pare +the potatoes very nicely, and of course he was able to get along faster +and faster as he became more and more experienced. He managed, through +great effort, to get the bag finished in time for dinner, or luncheon, +as it was called on the bill of fare, and then he soon had to begin on +other vegetables, which were to be served at the more complete evening +meal. There were more potatoes, and some turnips and apples as well, +to be prepared, and it kept the boy busy all the afternoon, cleaning +as hard as he could, and never seeming to get done. The cook urged him +always to hurry, and seemed determined to have everything ready on time. +And Archie began to realise that he was working under a rather severe +master. + +He was again successful in getting the vegetables finished in time for +the evening meal, and then he had an idea that he might be allowed to +rest for awhile, but he soon realised his mistake. He was advised to +begin work on the potatoes for breakfast if he didn't want to get up at +two o'clock in the morning and pare them, so once more he took up the +knife and began to clean and scrape. It was ten o'clock before he +had finished, and he found himself too tired to spend any time on the +after-deck with the crew, but went at once down into the small, stuffy +room where he was to sleep with some of the stewards. His back ached +from bending over, and his hands were all sore from being scraped. + +Things were not very pleasant in this bedroom, but poor Archie was glad +enough to be able to lie down on the hard straw tick and go to sleep. +He slept soundly until he was awakened at four o'clock in the morning by +the second cook, who ordered him up-stairs to work. There was no time to +wash, and no place where he could wash, so the boy was obliged to go up +just as he was, much as he disliked doing so. And once up-stairs there +were various chores which were waiting for him in the galley, so that +he was kept running until breakfast was served. And then it was time +to begin paring vegetables again. This turned out to be the invariable +daily programme, and Archie became rather discouraged. Had it not been +for the thought that by doing this he was saving money to send home, he +would have been miserable indeed, but this idea kept him hopeful. He was +seasick, too, for a time, and was obliged to keep cleaning vegetables +in the galley during the whole period of his suffering. The days when he +was ill in this way were the most disagreeable ones of the voyage, and +Archie often described afterward his feelings as he sat peeling potatoes +with a bucket standing beside him. Each night he slept like a log, and +each morning he was obliged to get up at four o'clock and start work +again. It was the same thing day after day, tiresome and monotonous, so +that Archie wasn't sorry when the beautiful island hove in sight, and +they anchored in the picturesque bay of Honolulu. + +Once at Honolulu, Archie's term of service on board the liner was +over, and he was glad, indeed, to get ashore, where he learned that the +transport had not yet arrived, but was expected in two or three days' +time. These two or three days Archie determined to spend in sightseeing, +and he spent his time to excellent advantage in visiting every quarter +of Honolulu and seeing every side of life in the Hawaiian capital. He +found it a delightful place. There was much that was interesting to see, +the people were pleasant to meet, and the climate was perfect. He was +almost sorry when he learned that the transport had anchored in the bay! + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT--A STORM AT SEA--ARRIVAL IN MANILA. + +THE transport did not remain long at Honolulu, and before leaving Archie +had several things which he wanted to do. In the first place, he felt +that he ought to write the story of his experiences so far, and send +it to Mr. Van Bunting; so he did sit down and describe in detail his +experiences at cleaning vegetables on board the Pacific liner. He wasn't +sure whether this was anything that Mr. Van Bunting would care to print, +but he decided to send it on, anyhow. He would have been surprised +had he observed the enthusiasm with which this letter was read in the +Enterprise office a month later. He would have been no longer in any +doubt as to whether it was anything worth printing had he read the +Enterprise of the following day, when the letter appeared on the second +page as one of the chief features of the paper. + +Before leaving, too, Archie sent a long, cheerful letter home, saying +nothing of his being seasick on board the liner, or of his having had to +work so hard. He devoted his letter to telling of the many interesting +things he had seen, and of his bright prospects for becoming a +successful newspaper man. He wrote a shorter letter to Jack Sullivan, +which was intended to be read to all the members of the Hut Club, +for Archie felt that it was no more than right that they should know +something of his success. He found it very hard to realise, away off +here in Honolulu, that he had ever been a member of the club, and that +he had ever lived in tents behind the barn. He felt very manly now, and +his boyhood seemed far away behind him, so far away that he now felt +like a man of twenty-five rather than like a boy of eighteen. He was +beginning to realise that age is not always governed by years alone, but +that experience does much to make one old. + +As soon as the transport had anchored in the bay, Archie went aboard to +present his credentials to the commanding officer. He found the general +very pleasant to meet, and a very appreciative listener as he told of +his scheme for overtaking the transport. The officer was surprised, +of course, that such a young fellow should be going to the islands as +correspondent, but the things he said were very encouraging to Archie, +"I tell you what," the general remarked, at one time during the +conversation, "I believe that a young fellow like Dunn, here, can find +out a great many more interesting things than an older man could ever +discover. You see the youngster has ambition and energy on his side, +and ambition and energy are two mighty powerful things when they're +combined. I'd hate to buck up against 'em myself." The other officers +agreed with the general in this remark, and Archie began to feel that, +after all, he might not have such a hard time finding interesting things +to write about as he had expected. + +The transport remained in port but one day, and in thirty hours after +her arrival Archie found himself sailing again over the blue Pacific. +The weather, for a few days, was almost perfect. A cloudless sky +overhead, a warm breeze from the west, and a smooth sea made things very +pleasant aboard ship, and Archie began to realise that there are times +when it is delightful to be at sea. The vessel was very much overcrowded +with troops, and the sleeping quarters were but little more pleasant +than aboard the liner. Archie shared a stateroom with three sergeants, +and they managed to have a lively time during the voyage. They played +games, told stories, and slept in the afternoons, but all this, of +course, grew rather tiresome after a time, and the voyage was becoming +monotonous, when there came a severe storm which kept things moving for +three days. + +None of the navigating officers had expected a gale, so that when it +came every one was taken wholly by surprise, and it came so suddenly +that there was no time at all for preparation. The sky became quickly +dark one afternoon about three o'clock, and soon the whole horizon was a +mass of great black clouds, which every moment seemed to come lower and +lower until they directly overhung the ship. There was great excitement +aboard the ship. Officers hurried here and there shouting orders to +their men, and the cavalrymen rushed about in a frenzy of haste, trying +to devise means to save their horses, most of which were stabled upon +the deck. Archie looked on in breathless interest, and was surprised +to find that he wasn't at all frightened. He even found himself making +mental notes of the scene, so that he could send the story of it all to +Mr. Van Bunting when he reached Manila. + +There was but little time for rushing about, and it was soon evident +that the horses would many of them be lost, because there seemed to be +absolutely no way of saving them if the waves were high enough to break +over the bulwarks. The storm soon broke in great fury, beginning with a +fierce wind which swept the waves before it. There was but little rain, +and the waves rose higher and higher with every minute, until the heavy +ship began to roll and pitch in a frightful way, so that the soldiers +began to think, some of them, that she would certainly sink. Finally the +waves were so high they dashed themselves over the decks, and no one was +allowed above the gangways. The cries of the poor horses, as they felt +themselves being washed overboard, were frightful to hear, and many +a trooper cried himself as he thought of his horse foundering in the +raging sea without. Before many minutes all was as dark as night, though +the watch pointed to but four o'clock, and all lights were burning below +deck. It was impossible to keep a light above, for no lantern could burn +in such a storm. + +The waves began gradually to subside at ten o'clock at night, and a slow +steady rain came, which soon calmed the sea to a great extent. As soon +as it was safe to go above deck, it was found that more than a hundred +horses had been lost overboard, and that one mast had been carried away. +Down below nearly every man was in his bunk, for there was scarcely a +person who was not seasick, and most of them wouldn't have cared if +the ship had gone down with all aboard, such was their feeling of +despondency. Archie was as sick as any of the others, but was able to +make notes of occurrences just the same. And when he grew better the +next day, he wrote an excellent account of the storm to send to the +Enterprise on his arrival in Manila. + +After this rough weather experience, every man aboard was anxious +to reach port, and when, after many more days, the Bay of Cavite was +reached, a great cheer went up from a thousand throats, for everyone was +overjoyed at the sight of land. + +The transport came to anchor off the forts which had once been Spain's, +and it was announced that no one would be allowed to land for two days, +until advices could be had from Manila and the interior of the island. +This was very trying for Archie, being obliged to sit on deck for two +whole days, looking at a shore which seemed very inviting, in spite of +the general dilapidated appearance of the various buildings and docks. +Everything looked different from anything he had seen before, and the +boy felt that he could hardly wait to be allowed to explore some of +those streets which were so narrow, and those houses which were built in +such a peculiar fashion. + +Finally, the permission came for the troops to land, and Archie received +the permission of the general to remain with them as long as he wanted +to do so. And as he had no other plans, the young correspondent decided +that it would be a good plan for him to stay right with one of these +regiments, for the time being at any rate. He knew that they would be +likely to be sent to the front immediately, and the front seemed the +place for him to be. + +And then he was already acquainted with many of the men, and with the +colonel, and he realised that this would be an advantage to him in his +work. So he made his plans to keep with them. + +First they went to Manila, where they remained for a week. The quaint +old city was a veritable fairy-land of wonders to Archie, who had never +before been in a city so ancient, and here there were so many unusual +things to be seen. There seemed to be absolutely no end to the winding +streets, delightful old houses, and interesting churches, and the boy +spent many days in exploring every corner of the island capital. The +colonel warned him several times that he must look out for robbers and +other suspicious characters, but Archie laughed at his fears. But the +colonel was right, as he found later on. + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES + AMONG THE NATIVES--SEIZED BY THE REBELS. + +THE days passed very quickly in Manila, the regiment was quartered in +an old palace which had once been used as a residence by the Spanish +governors of the islands, and Archie remained in the palace with them. +There was very little to do while they were there. Each morning there +were anxious inquiries for news from the front, but there was always the +same discouraging reply that no trace had yet been found of the fleeing +Aguinaldo. The men were gradually becoming disheartened at the long +wait, and there were frequent statements by the officers that +Aguinaldo would soon be caught if they were sent out after him. The +dissatisfaction with the general in command grew stronger every day, and +at last things reached a point where there was very little loyalty and +patriotism displayed among the troops. + +The drilling was continued, however, by order of the colonel, and every +morning the troops marched out to a public square near the palace, and +went through the same old manoeuvres which they had practised for months +past. And it was harder for them to drill each week. At first they were +willing enough to work, for there was then some prospect of their being +able to use their knowledge in a fight, but now it was beginning to +seem that they would simply remain in this old palace for a few months +longer, and then go back again to San Francisco. With this opinion in +their hearts, it is not to be wondered at that most of the men became +slouchy and careless in their manners and dress, or that even the +officers themselves became disgusted at the long wait for marching +orders. + +Things had been going on in this way for a long time, when Archie made +up his mind that it was time he was hustling about and finding something +to write about which would be interesting to readers of the Enterprise. +He had sent two articles describing his life with the soldiers in the +old palace, but he knew that he ought to find something more exciting, +and more like his first articles. So, after much thought, he decided +that a good plan would be for him to take a little trip into the +interior of the island, to see whether he could find any traces of the +insurgents. The colonel had held all along for a month, now, that the +Filipinos were probably all about Manila, and still he couldn't get +the permission of the general in command to go out and investigate +the matter. The colonel figured that it would be an easy thing for the +insurgents to come as near to the city as they cared to now, for Lawton +and Wheeler were far away in the interior after Aguinaldo, and the +troops in Manila were quietly drilling, and eating, and sleeping, with +no thought of doing anything else. This line of argument seemed very +reasonable to Archie, and he volunteered to go out and see if he could +make any discoveries. The colonel assured him that he would be in no +danger, even if he were caught by the rebels, for they would never +suspect a boy of Archie's age and size of being a spy. So the lad felt +no fear at all, and made what few preparations there were to be made +before starting. He secured a knapsack from the commissary officer, +and in this he placed what few belongings he wanted to take with him, +together with his note-books and some provisions for the trip. Then he +secured a small pistol, which he carried in his hip pocket, and he was +disappointed because the colonel would not allow him to carry a rifle. +And when he had everything ready he said good-bye to his friends in the +regiment, and departed from the palace amid a multitude of cheers. At +the last moment the colonel tried to dissuade him from starting, for +fear he might meet with some accident, but Archie was determined to make +the attempt. + +It was his plan not to go farther than fifty miles in the interior, for +he thought that if he found no traces of the rebels in that distance +there would be little use in going farther into the forest, for, it +would be almost impossible to find them there. So he set out gaily upon +his trip of exploration, and Archie couldn't remember when he had been +so happy before, save on that day when he first visited the office of +the Enterprise. This adventure was exciting enough to please the wildest +boy in America, and Archie could imagine how envious the other boys +would be if they could but know the trip he was having. It had an +official air to it, too, for had not the colonel been most anxious, +in the beginning, that he should go, and did he not say that he would +reward him handsomely if he were successful in locating any of the +insurgents, or in proving that he had been right when he said they were +near Manila? It was all as perfect an adventure as Archie could have +imagined. He could not have planned a better one if he had been able to +select any trip he could think of. + +He planned that it would take him at least three days to walk fifty +miles, and perhaps longer, for the roads were not very good in some +places. He knew that he would find many villages and towns along the +way, too, for the island was thinly settled in this neighbourhood. So if +he were obliged to rest, he would never be at a loss for a place to +get a bed. Archie couldn't help thinking, as he walked along the road +outside Manila, this first morning, that he might find a body of the +insurgents in possession of one of these towns. They were very bold, +he had heard, and they probably knew that there were no American troops +anywhere in the neighbourhood, outside the city of Manila itself. And, +knowing this, he knew they wouldn't hesitate to camp at the very gates +of the city, for they were marvellously successful in getting away into +the interior whenever an American force made its appearance. + +As he thought of this possibility, Archie couldn't help being a little +fearful of what might happen to him should he fall into the hands of +the insurgents, and he began to wonder if he had not been a little +foolhardy, after all, in starting off on such a wild-goose chase. "But +I will have something new to send Mr. Van Bunting about the interior +towns," he said to himself, "and if I am captured, why, I will have a +great deal to write about when I am released." This thought made the lad +happy again, and he trudged along the road with as much vim and energy +as he had displayed during those weary days when he was walking to New +York to make his fortune. And it was a much more interesting country in +which to walk than the New York State counties had been. The vegetation +was rich and luxuriant everywhere, palm-trees, vines, and flowers +growing in profusion all along the road. In every dooryard, in front of +every hut, there grew what seemed to Archie a veritable fairy bower of +the most richly coloured flowers in existence. And they were growing, +apparently, without cultivation. He had seen nothing like them before, +even in California, and he longed to pluck some of them to send home, if +they had only been wax instead of nature's blossoms. As it was, he kept +his arms filled with them for awhile, but after a time he grew tired +carrying them, and was obliged to drop them by the roadside. + +The country looked as if it might have been very prosperous at one +time. There were plantations laid out in excellent fashion, and the soil +seemed rich and fertile. But instead of growing crops, and storehouses +filled with spices and coffee, there was desolation everywhere, and it +was easy to see that the Spaniards had determined to leave but little +behind them for the Yankees. Every other farmhouse and wayside hut was +deserted, their occupants having gone, apparently, to join Aguinaldo, +and the whole country, outside the towns, seemed to be wholly deserted +and left to grow up in weeds and tangled vines. + +The sun was warm, the sky was a perfect blue, and it seemed a delightful +day in every way. But it made Archie sad to walk through a district +which had been made so desolate, and he hadn't walked many hours before +he wished that he might soon reach a town, where he could find some +life, and where he could remain overnight. For by the middle of the +afternoon he was tired walking, and made up his mind that fifteen miles +was enough for any one to do in one day. But he was obliged to keep on +walking for two hours longer before he reached a village, and the great +sun was just sinking behind the blue hills in the distance when he +entered the one main village street, which was long and narrow, winding +in and out among the cabins and huts, as if it had been laid out after +the houses were built, for the convenience of the people. It was a poor +excuse for a public thoroughfare. There had probably been a pavement of +some sort at one time, but now the street was a mass of rubbish of every +sort, straw, dust, old bricks, and bits of stone being thrown together +in every rut, so that it was exceedingly difficult to walk along with +any comfort. + +There was no life visible in the settlement. Almost every hut had its +shades drawn at the windows, and there was absolutely no one to be seen +in the street. As he passed down the road, Archie could catch occasional +glimpses of black eyes staring at him through a lattice, or he could +hear some muttered word as he walked close to a window. From these signs +he knew that he was observed, and he felt very much embarrassed as he +continued his walk down this deserted lane, for he felt instinctively +now that hundreds of eyes were watching his every movement. + +Finally, he came to the public square, and he sat down here to look +about him. From general appearances, he judged this to be a town of +some two thousand inhabitants, for there was a very respectable +administration building, and a good-sized church. There were but two +streets of any consequence, the one by which he had entered the town, +and another running at right angles in the opposite direction. In this +latter street, as he stood in the square, he noticed a three-story +structure with a sign outside, and he decided to go there and make +inquiries as to where he might be able to secure a lodging for the +night. It looked as if it might be an inn of some sort, or at least a +store, so he walked rapidly up to the entrance and knocked twice upon +the door. This place, in spite of its sign, looked more deserted and +shut-up than any other building he had yet seen in the town, and he +wondered whether he would receive any answer to his knocks. It was +indeed a long time before he heard a sound within, but at last there was +some muttering inside, the door flew open, and Archie found himself in +the arms of three Filipinos, who threw him upon the floor and bound him, +hands and feet. It was all so sudden that he had no time to cry out, and +before he could say anything at all he was thrown into a dark room, and +the door shut behind him. + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + A PLEASANT CAPTOR--BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE--FIRST + GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO. + +FOR a long time Archie lay still upon the floor, being unable to move a +muscle from the shock of his encounter with the men, and because he was +tightly bound with ropes. And then he at last went off to sleep, feeling +frightened because he was in the hands of strange men, and a little +satisfied, too, because he was the victim of some adventure which might +turn out in a very interesting way. + +When he awoke, it was morning, and the light came into the room through +two small square windows, set high up in the wall. Archie looked about +the room with great curiosity, but found little there to interest him. +There was nothing to be seen but an old bed without spring or mattress, +and a rickety chair with but three legs, which stood in one corner. +The walls, he was surprised to observe, were handsomely decorated with +tapestries, and Archie at once made up his mind that this had at one +time been a private dwelling-house, and had probably been owned by some +rich Spaniard who kept a store on the ground floor, and lived in these +rooms. The insurgents had probably driven the family out of the country +and had taken possession of the house, which they had stripped of +everything useful, leaving the tapestries and works of art behind them. + +These suppositions were cut short by the entrance of a man who appeared +to be a half-breed, and who immediately began to speak to Archie in +broken English. The fellow had a pleasant face, and presented a fairly +good appearance, and Archie wondered how he could have come to this +place. "I suppose you have been wondering," said the man, "why you have +been thrown into this room, and it won't take me long to explain things. +You see this town belongs to us just now, and we don't propose to have +any Yankee spies around here to tell Otis of our whereabouts. There +ain't no troops in this town now, but there's likely to be any minute, +and we patriots was sent here to take possession of things and arrange +quarters for our army. Let me tell you that the Filipino army will be +in this town to-day, and if you don't look sharp you'll be the first +prisoner to be shot. Aguinaldo isn't a man to deal easily with spies, +and if he thought you was out here for that purpose he'd have you +riddled with bullets in a minute." The man came up to Archie and began +to undo the ropes. "I reckon I can trust you free for awhile, for +there's no use in your trying to get away, with the Filipino army all +around the town. Sit down there now, and I'll see that you get some +breakfast. You can tell, perhaps, that I ain't no Filipino, nor never +was one. I'm from Arizona, U. S. A., and I'm fightin' with these rebels +for what there is in it just now. I'm mighty curious to find out how you +come to be out in these diggin's, youngster." + +Archie was willing enough to tell all about himself. He liked this man, +in spite of his being with the rebels, and he felt that he would be able +to make friends with him if he were careful to do so. And the best plan +seemed to be for him to tell all about himself, how he happened to go to +New York, and how he had been sent out here as a boy correspondent for +the Enterprise. The man from Arizona listened to the recital with +open mouth and eyes, and he frequently laughed outright at some of the +experiences Archie described. When the narrative was finished, he seized +Archie's hand, and said, "My name's Bill Hickson, and you can count on +me after this fer a friend, youngster. I'll swan if I ever heard tell +of sich nerve in my life. I'll see that you get out of this scrape all +right, but you must be careful to keep up appearances of being under +guard. I'm a big-bug in this Filipino shack, but I wouldn't dare to let +you out openly. So you jist kind of lay around and look despondent, +and depend on me to make things as easy for you as I can. You kin come +down-stairs now, if you like, and I'll present you to my friends. +There don't none of 'em speak no English but me, and all I can do is to +interduce you, and tell 'em that you ain't no spy, and that you are +very sorry you ever ran up agin this here town. And I guess I'll be +expressin' your sentiments exactly, won't I?" Archie nodded, but in his +heart he felt that he wasn't sorry he had run up against the town. This +Bill Hickson, in himself, was a character worth going miles to meet, +and if what he said was true, Archie stood a good chance of seeing the +notorious Aguinaldo, with his army of Filipinos, before the day was +over. + +When he reached the lower floor, he found several men lounging about in +another poorly furnished room, and they were all similar in appearance +to the men he had seen at the door the night before. They looked at +him in an indifferent way, and didn't seem surprised that he should +be walking about without restraint. Bill Hickson stepped up to some of +them, and, after a few words in some language Archie didn't understand, +motioned for the boy to step up. He was told to shake hands with "all +the gents," and after he had done so he was offered a cigar, and Archie +began to realise that it was a very good thing that he had a friend at +the Filipino court. He thought, too, that if these men were samples, +Aguinaldo had a very poor lot of retainers, and later on he perceived +the real cause for the failure of the rebels to do anything more than +keep up a constant retreat. It was plain to see that the followers +of the rebel leader were "in it for what it was worth." They had no +difficulty, any of them, in getting enough to eat, and often they had +opportunities to enjoy themselves in great fashion by taking possession +of some Filipino village and ejecting the inmates of some particularly +fine house, with a well-stocked wine-cellar. + +In looking out of the window Archie perceived that the town looked very +different this morning than when he saw it the evening before. Instead +of drawn blinds and shuttered windows, there was everywhere an evident +attempt at decoration in honour of the coming army. The streets were +crowded with a throng in holiday garb, and some of the soldiers of the +rebel army had already arrived, as they could be easily distinguished by +their ragged dress and ridiculous airs, walking up and down the street. +It was all such a scene as Archie had never seen before, and would have +made a great success as the scenario for a comic opera. But as a welcome +to an army, supposedly victorious, it was a dismal failure, and Archie +wondered what General Aguinaldo would think when he entered the town and +saw such shoddy patriotism everywhere. He hadn't long to wait, +however, before seeing the famous rebel and the effect upon him of the +celebration in his honour. It was about ten o'clock in the morning when +he rode into the public square, followed by about two hundred ragged +Filipinos, armed with all sorts of guns and pistols. Archie saw the +arrival from the roof of the building which was his mock prison, and he +could scarcely refrain from laughing outright when he saw the boasted +Filipino "army." It was the poorest excuse for a body of troops that he +could imagine. + +Aguinaldo rode a fine bay horse, as did several of his followers, but by +far the majority of the regiment, if such it could be called, was afoot, +and most of them were barefooted, too. The rebel leader looked very much +like most of his pictures, with the exception that he had an older look, +and some gray hairs about the temples. He was attired in a gaudy uniform +of some sort, with epaulets and a Spanish general's hat, and he carried +himself with great dignity of manner. Dismounting from his horse, he +entered the administration building, where he held a conference with the +town officials, and probably made them pay over whatever money was in +the treasury "for the cause." He remained within for two hours or more, +and all this time Archie stood upon the roof and watched the remarkable +scene in the streets below. The troops had scattered, and were engaged +in robbing the housewives of whatever they had in their houses to eat. +And the women seemed willing to provide them with whatever they could +afford, and there was much enthusiasm evident everywhere. But the +celebration was very quiet, in spite of the friendly reception, There +were no bands of music, no cheering, and no singing of battle-hymns. +The whole affair reminded Archie of some camp of a section of the famous +Coxey army, when he had seen it long ago. The soldiers were no better +dressed than tramps, and there was but little more discipline among +them. + +And the celebration and occupation of the town came to a sudden end. +While Archie stood upon the roof at noontime, he saw a runner enter the +administration building in great haste, and in a minute Aguinaldo +came hurrying down the steps. Then there was a great commotion in the +streets, and the two hundred followers of the chief were seen assembled +in the square, and before they were all there the general was riding out +of the town toward the interior of the island. There was no noise, and +the inhabitants stood about apparently speechless, and wondering what +had happened. Their reception had come to an untimely end, and their +hero had left them unceremoniously. Soon the last of the straggling +troops were out of the town, and just as Archie was beginning to think +of going down from the roof Bill Hickson stuck his head up and gave him +some astonishing news. "Stay where you're at, young feller, till these +fool Filipinos gits away from here. You saw how they skedaddled, didn't +ye? Well, Uncle Sam is comin' after 'em with shot-guns, and old Aggy +heard the news just in time. He is bound for the jungle, about forty +miles southeast, and he won't reach it until to-morrow night, anyhow, +and if the officers are quick they may be able to catch him. Now you +stay here, lad, and give 'em the news when they git here. They'll +thank you for it, and you may be the means of gittin' this fool of an +Aguinaldo captured. If you does, why, your future's all right. And ye +can tell the colonel, or whoever's in command, that Bill Hickson is +still with 'em, and that he's doin' his best fer Uncle Sam, and tell 'em +that Aggy has got about three thousand troops altogether, but only about +a thousand with him. Now, good-bye, lad, and I hope I'll see ye again." + +And Archie saw brave Bill Hickson get down from the roof. He brushed +some tears from his eyes as he realised that here was a brave soldier +doing good work for his country. A moment later he saw him running +across the square with four of the Filipinos, and waving his hat to +the "youngster" as he went. He followed him with his eyes as long as +he could, and then he sat down and made a solemn vow that Bill Hickson +should be named among the heroes of the war. + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS--ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT. + +ARCHIE descended from the roof, and found everything below in a state of +wild disorder. The fleeing rebels had taken with them all they had time +to get together, but in their haste they had left behind many of their +most useful belongings. In a cupboard of the dining-room Archie found a +supply of food and wines sufficient to feed several people for a week, +so he supposed that it had been the intention of the occupants of the +house to remain for some days. The news that the Americans were coming +upset all their plans, however, and now, as often before, they were +obliged to flee before them, leaving behind most of their creature +comforts in the way of food and furniture. + +"What a life they must be leading," thought Archie to himself, "going +from one place to another, constantly endeavouring to hide from the +Americans. Now in some town, now in the wilderness, and again venturing +as near as possible to the boundaries of Manila." And he could scarcely +help admiring their courage, or recklessness, rather, in camping so +near the head of the American government, where they might expect to be +caught in a trap at any moment. But Archie realised, too, that such an +army can get away in a very short time, and he began to have serious +doubts as to whether the Americans would ever be able to capture +Aguinaldo and his men. For knowing the islands perfectly, and being able +to get from one point to another in the easiest and quickest way, the +rebels have a great deal in their favour. + +Selecting some canned beef and some native bread and cheese, Archie +managed to make a very good meal for himself, though he ate hurriedly +for fear some of the rebels might return. As soon as he had finished he +returned to his position on the roof, for there he knew that he would be +safe in case the building was entered by the townspeople. From his high +perch he looked down into the streets, and was surprised to find them as +quiet and as much deserted as they had been the night before. The +news of the coming of the Americans had been effective in quieting the +enthusiasm of the morning, and all the townsfolk had again entered their +homes and put the shutters up before their windows. One would have taken +the place for a deserted village, judging from appearances. But Archie +knew that within the shuttered windows and barred doors there were +hundreds of people waiting anxiously for the arrival of the American +troops, and making ready to come out, when required to do so, and again +declare their allegiance to the stars and stripes. The cowardly wretches +were diplomatic enough to be always on the side of the victorious. +When the rebels occupied the town they were loyal to them, and when the +Americans came, as they often did, they came out into the square and +cheered loudly for Uncle Sam. But of course the Americans knew very well +that their sympathies were with the rebels, and the rebels knew it, too, +or they would never have dared to venture so near Manila. + +About five in the afternoon, there was a sound of many men marching +along the road, and in a little while Archie was able to see the +Americans coming down the street. It was a sight to cheer his heart +after all his experiences of the last day and night. The column was +marching at double-quick, and the handsome colonel rode a great gray +horse at the head of the regiment. Archie saw that they would reach the +square in two or three minutes, and, throwing discretion to the winds, +he descended from the roof, almost fell down the stairways in his haste, +and was soon running toward the administration building. He mounted the +great steps leading up to the portico, just as the colonel rode into the +square, and the expression of surprise on the faces of all the men was +funny to see. In a minute every hat was off, and the regiment was +giving "three cheers for the boy reporter," while the colonel, rapidly +dismounting, hurried up to speak with Archie. + +"Why, how did you come here?" he demanded. "Haven't the rebels been +here, and how did you escape them? Which way did they go, and was +Aguinaldo with them? For pity's sake, say something." + +Archie wasn't long explaining things, and his news was so explicit and +so valuable that the colonel grasped his hand and said, almost with +tears in his eyes, "God bless you, lad. You may have aided us to catch +the gang, and anyhow you've proved your bravery." + +By this time the regiment was standing at ease, and all the men were +watching Archie and the colonel with great interest. Knowing that they +were all curious to learn how the lad happened to have escaped the +rebels, the good colonel made a short speech in which he explained +everything. He dwelt particularly upon the bravery of Bill Hickson, and +held him up as a model for all the men to follow. "And now three cheers +for Bill Hickson and our boy reporter again," he cried, when he had +finished, and they were given with a will by all the men. + +The regimental officers held a short consultation, and it was decided, +on the strength of the news brought by Archie, to push on after the +rebels as fast as was possible. But it was now sunset, and there was no +use trying to go farther to-night, so it was agreed that the best plan +would be to give the men a good rest overnight, as they had made the +entire march from Manila since five o'clock in the morning. "They will +do all the better to-morrow for the rest," said the colonel. Archie was +valuable in being able to guide the officers to the building where he +had been confined, assuring them that they would find everything needful +there in the way of food, and a place to sleep. Some of the soldiers +were quartered in various houses of the town, for the people had soon +turned out into the street again, and had expressed their friendship for +their "masters," as they called them. Archie could hardly refrain from +laughing as he saw some of those who in the morning had bowed down to +Aguinaldo vowing everlasting allegiance to our flag, and he assured +the colonel that he couldn't be too careful while in the town to guard +against surprises. "No one knows the beasts better than I do," was the +answer. "I know they can't be trusted." + +Archie was invited to remain in the building with the officers, and +while they prepared and ate a lunch he busied himself in writing a +description of his last two days' experiences. He knew that a messenger +would soon start for Manila, and that a boat would leave that city on +the next day for Hong Kong, so he wanted to get his narrative written +in order to send it to Mr. Van Bunting at once. He felt that he had +some very interesting things to write about, for it wasn't every +correspondent who had seen Aguinaldo, and had been captured by the rebel +army. He knew that most of them were content to remain in Manila, and +send only what they could get from the general in command, and that this +description of the rebels would be something new, at any rate. So he +wrote it very carefully, and succeeded in getting it ready in time to +send, so that it would be in the office of the Enterprise in less than +a month. As he sat at the table writing, Archie thought of the great +changes which can take place in one's surroundings in a few weeks. It +seemed ages to him since the day when he left home for the first time, +and the experiences he had on his way to New York seemed now to belong +to the far-away period of his boyhood. He was beginning to feel very old +now, because he had been through so much of late, and he could hardly +realise that he was still eighteen. + +He wrote a short note to his mother at home, telling her not to worry, +and assuring her that he was in good health and in no danger whatever +of being captured by the rebels, for Archie felt quite safe after his +experience with the insurgent leaders. He knew that no one of their +prisoners was ever likely to come to a very bad end. They were far too +slipshod in their methods of holding prisoners. He was sorry not to be +able to send a longer letter home, but he knew that this note was much +better than sending nothing at all, and that it would make his mother +very happy to hear from him at all. + +The officers, when Archie returned to the dining-room, if such it could +be called, were engaged in making a very good meal from the provisions +in the cupboard, and they thanked Archie warmly for leading them to such +a good place. "By Jove," said one of the captains, "we sha'n't want to +return to Manila at all, when we can get such grub as this is outside." +But the colonel assured them all that they needn't expect to find such +accommodations everywhere in the interior of the country. "No doubt +we'll all be living on plantains in a day or two, if we don't catch that +fox of an Aguinaldo. And I'm willin' to bet now that we won't find him. +That feller's too slick for us. He's proved it many a time before." + +"And to think that he was here only this morning! The nerve of him, to +come within twenty-five miles of Manila!" said another. + +"I'll be mighty well satisfied if we can catch a few of his ragged men," +continued the colonel. "That will be something to have accomplished, +anyhow, and more than some other regiments have done, when they were +sent after him. He's the cutest feller I've heard of in a long while. If +it wasn't for Bill Hickson we'd never hear tell of him, even. He could +enter Manila, I believe, and go out again without us ever knowin' it at +all." + +Archie was now called on to tell something of the rebel leader's +appearance, and how he had acted while in the town. + +"I didn't see very much of him," said Archie, "because he spent most of +the morning with the big-bugs of the town, over in the administration +building. But when he rode into town on his horse he looked mighty +dignified, though he fell some in my estimation when I saw him standing +up. He looked rather dumpy then. He carried himself with a lot of +dignity, a little more than was becoming, I thought, and he received the +cheers of the people as a matter of course, and hardly took the trouble +to acknowledge them, even by a bow. The officers of the town treated +him with great deference, and I guess there's no doubt but what the +Filipinos look upon him as their leader." + +"Oh, there's no doubt of that," said the colonel. "We've learned that +long ago. They stand up for him whenever he needs them, and they give +him all they've got to help carry on the war." + +The meal finished, the officers smoked awhile, and then went to bed, for +they were to be up at four in the morning. + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS--THE FIRST BATTLE--ARCHIE WOUNDED. + +ARCHIE was awakened at four the next morning by the sound of the bugle, +and, hastily dressing, he hurried down-stairs to learn the plans of the +officers. He found that they were going to start on the march as soon +as the men had drunk their morning coffee, and Archie immediately made +preparations to go with them. The colonel looked on in amazement. "Why +are you packing your knapsack!" he asked. "You surely don't think you're +going with us? You never in the world can stand this hard march in the +hot sun." + +"Oh, yes, I think I can," said Archie. "You see I have walked a great +deal in these last two months, and I don't think I will have any +difficulty in keeping up with the troops. And I do so want to see some +fighting, and to learn whether you capture Aguinaldo. You don't object +to my going, now, do you?" + +"No," said the colonel. "If you think you can stand the marching, and +are so anxious to come, why, I suppose you can do so. But you mustn't +blame me if anything should happen to you." + +Archie was ready enough to promise this, for he had no idea that he +would meet with an accident of any kind, and so he continued to pack his +things in the knapsack. The rebels had emptied everything in a corner, +and had evidently intended taking the knapsack with them when they went; +but they left so hurriedly they couldn't possibly think of everything, +and so had left it behind, much to Archie's relief, for he would have +been unable to secure another one anywhere outside Manila. In a very +short time the regiment gathered in the streets immediately about the +square, and soon the men were marching out of the town, much to the +gratification of the residents, who watched them from their roofs +and windows. Archie fell in at the head of the column, and found no +difficulty in keeping up with the soldiers near him, though they were +marching at a rapid rate. + +The town limits were soon passed, and they swung into the white country +road, which presented the same scene of desolation which had been +everywhere visible to Archie on his way from Manila. The farm-houses +were nearly all deserted, and there was but little attempt at +cultivating the soil, which would have been productive enough had it not +been overgrown with tangled vines and weeds. And as they went farther +into the country the wilderness increased, until at last the road itself +was filled with growing vines, and the men had difficulty in walking. +Every little while some trooper would fall headlong, tripped by some +vine, and the others would laughingly help him up before passing on. +These little incidents did much to enliven the march, which became +monotonous after the first six or seven hours, and Archie appreciated +the mishaps very much until he took a few tumbles himself. He was +usually, much to the amusement of the officers, marching at the very +head of the regiment, and "setting the pace," he said, so that he was +more likely to trip than any of the others. He was always the first to +discover a snake in the road, too, and kept a great stick with which to +kill them. He seemed to have no fear of them, but walked up to lay them +out, and on one occasion the colonel warned him just in time or he would +certainly have been bitten by a snake whose bite is certain death. This +experience made him more careful, but he still kept his place at the +head of the regiment, and came to be called the mascot by the men. + +At noon the regiment halted at a grassy spot, where there were trees, +and made their dinners from their knapsacks. The officers warned them +to go carefully, or they would find themselves without provisions before +returning to Manila, for they had been so sure of catching the rebels +at the town behind that they had neglected to bring along many supplies. +Now, of course, they didn't know how long it would take them to find +them,--two days at least, and probably longer. + +Archie had stocked his knapsack with some food from the old headquarters +in the town, so that he felt safe for a few days, at any rate. He +ate carefully, however, and was careful not to waste anything, for he +realised that he might be called upon to aid some of the soldiers before +long. + +Dinner over, the regiment marched on again, for the officers now began +to think that they had made a mistake in not pursuing the fleeing +rebels the night before. They met several Spaniards, who told them that +Aguinaldo had marched all night long without stopping, so that he was +now at least thirty-six hours ahead of them, and some of the men began +to be discouraged, saying that it was no use following him up with such +a small force. "Other regiments have tried to find him in this way, and +none of them have succeeded," said one of the privates to Archie. "They +keep us marching for three or four days, and finally they decide to +return to Manila, without having found any trace of the rascal beyond +hearing that he had passed this way or that." + +The officers couldn't depend upon what the natives told them of +Aguinaldo's movements, for, almost without exception, they were in his +favour, and always lied to the Americans to try to throw them off the +track. It was due to this that they proceeded very cautiously, and +still, notwithstanding their extreme care, they found themselves, when +night came on this first day, in a small village where no one had seen +anything of the rebel army. There was no denying the fact that they were +off the trail, and the colonel stormed about in a terrible way when he +learned of their mistake. There was no use going back in the dark to +hunt for a trail they had mistaken in the daylight, so the regiment +remained in the village overnight. They were a lot of very discouraged +men, and the officers were enraged at the mistake, for which there was +no one but themselves to blame. + +Early in the morning they retraced their way, and started off in an +opposite direction to the one taken yesterday. It seemed that this must +certainly be the path taken by the rebels, but the regiment marched +until nearly noon without seeing any signs of them. Then, when they had +halted for dinner, the colonel decided to let the men rest while two +companies were sent ahead to reconnoitre, and report as to whether there +were any signs of men having passed this way. He was beginning to think +that the whole affair would be a wild-goose chase, and he decided that, +if these companies found nothing, the whole regiment would return to +Manila forthwith, probably to be the laughing-stock of the army there. + +The remaining companies had nothing to do now but lay about on the soft +grass, and rest. They were encamped in a stretch of grassy loam in +the midst of what appeared to be a dense forest, and all about were +evidences of the great fertility of the soil. The vegetation was so +dense that one could scarcely see through it, and the glade was cool and +pleasant, though overhead the sun was shining as warm as ever. It was a +lovely oasis in a wilderness of undergrowth, and the men enjoyed it to +the utmost. + +About three in the afternoon the sound of firing was heard in the +distance. First there was one shot, then another, and several more at +rapid intervals. Archie was one of the first to jump to his feet, but in +a second every man was at attention, with his musket in his hands. The +colonel listened closely for two minutes, and then the firing began once +more, and this time it seemed nearer. He hesitated no longer, but gave +the order to march ahead. "They've evidently found the cowards at last," +he muttered to Archie. "You stay here, where you will be out of danger." +But Archie was determined to do nothing of the kind. He felt his pistol +safe in his hip pocket, and when the companies swung out of the forest +and into the road he was marching in his old place at the head of the +column. Again the colonel ordered him to remain behind, but Archie +insisted that he would not, "Then go to the rear," cried the colonel, +angry for the moment. "I will not have you shot down by a rebel +sharpshooter the very first one." And Archie knew that he would have to +obey. + +The column went ahead at double-quick, and finally broke into a steady +run. Every minute the noise of rifle-shots sounded nearer, and it seemed +probable that the two companies were retreating before the insurgents. +The men were wild to reach the scene of the firing, and the officers had +all they could do to keep them in line. All the time they were running +hardly a sound was heard save the noise of their boots upon the soft +earth, and they all knew that they could probably take the insurgents by +surprise. + +Archie's heart was beating very hard as they drew nearer and nearer to +the scene. He felt that he was about to see his first fighting, and he +determined not to miss any part of it. So he gradually ran ahead until +finally he was almost at the head of the column again. + +The troops made so little noise that the two companies, retreating +slowly, were upon them without knowing it. But when they discovered +that their comrades had come to their aid they set up such a cheering +as Archie had never heard before, and immediately faced about and went +ahead again. The rebels were about a quarter of a mile behind, marching +rapidly forward, and firing as they came. Some of them were running +among the trees at the roadside, firing incessantly, and hitting +some poor soldier almost every time they fired. They were the famous +sharpshooters, of whom the soldiers in Manila had heard so much. + +When the rebels observed that the Americans had received reinforcements, +they halted suddenly, and before they could turn about the Yankees were +almost upon them, firing volleys into them as they came. Many of the +insurgents fell in the roadway, and the others fled wildly in every +direction. Most of them entered the dense forest, where the Americans +captured nearly a hundred of them after the others had surrendered, +and some were such good runners that they escaped down the roadway. The +whole rebel army presented a scene of wild confusion. Some of the men +knelt and begged for mercy, and some cried out in a horrible way as they +saw the dreaded Yankees advancing. But it was all over very soon. The +prisoners were placed in line, and marched back along the road, and the +dead, of which there were about fifty, were soon buried. Aguinaldo had +escaped in the forest, and no one suggested that he should be followed. +All the officers knew that such a course would be useless, and most of +them were very well satisfied with what had already been accomplished. +The prisoners numbered more than six hundred, and the dead a hundred +more, while there were about seventy-five wounded. So if what Bill +Hickson said were true, not more than two hundred insurgents could have +escaped. + +Among the seriously wounded was a man whom Archie recognised immediately +as one of his captors of two days previous, and while he was looking +over the bodies for the other men, he came suddenly to brave Bill +Hickson, lying face downward in the road. He almost screamed with fear +that he might be dead, and when one of the men hurried up to him he told +him who the man was. The colonel was soon on hand, and it was found that +the brave spy was not seriously wounded, and would recover soon under +proper treatment. + +When the insurgent wounded were cared for, it was discovered that the +two companies sent out to reconnoitre had also suffered losses, and when +they marched back along the line of their retreat no less than five dead +and about twenty wounded were found. This sad news threw a gloom over +the entire regiment, and when they started back to Manila they marched +in quiet, and without rejoicing over their victory, which had proved so +costly. + +Poor Archie, when they started to march, found, to his great disgust, +that he was so weak he couldn't walk far, and he thought this must be +due to the fright he had received. He was very angry with himself, until +the surgeon examined him and announced that he had a bullet in his arm. +And then Archie confessed that he had felt a stinging sensation at one +time during the firing, but had thought nothing of it. Now his disgust +was turned to great delight, for the idea of being wounded in battle was +glorious to his mind. "I'll bet I wounded more than one insurgent," he +told the surgeon, "for I discharged every barrel of my revolver." The +wound was not at all serious, but he was told to be quiet for a few +days. He was given one of the rebel horses to ride back to Manila, and +he felt like a real hero in many ways. + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + RETURN TO MANILA--IN THE HOSPITAL--CONGRATULATED BY ALL--WRITING TO + THE PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES. + +IT took the regiment much longer to march back to Manila than it had +taken it to follow the rebels, for the wounded of both sides had to be +carried, and the arrangements for carrying them were very imperfect. +Fortunately, most of them were able to ride horses, and the officers +were successful in securing wagons enough to carry most of the others, +but there were about a dozen who could neither ride horses or lie in +wagons, but had to be carried on stretchers all the time. Of course this +was slow work, and the officers were glad enough when they reached the +town with the three-story building. Here they found things very much as +they had left them, two days before, save that the inhabitants were more +abject than ever to them, now that they had captured most of the rebel +force. + +It wasn't an easy matter to find quarters for so many men, and some of +the Filipinos were obliged to camp in the public square overnight, while +the wounded and ill were given beds in the various houses of the town. +The inhabitants were required to furnish food, too, for the Americans +were entirely out of almost everything. They still had some hardtack, +but of meat and coffee there was none. The people of the town pretended +to be very glad to serve their "masters," but every one knew that the +natives would be only too glad of a chance to cut the throat of every +Yankee soldier. + +The officers again occupied the old building which they had used during +their former stay, and Archie was invited to share it with them, for +they expected to rest in this town over the next day, before proceeding +to Manila. The men's uniforms and equipment generally needed cleaning +and repairing, and the colonel was anxious for them all to appear as +well as possible when they returned victorious to the island capital. So +the next day was spent in cleaning and washing, and by evening most +of the soldiers looked as if they had never left Manila. Then came a +surprise for every one, for into the town marched a regiment of +militia from Manila, sent out to see whether the first regiment needed +reinforcements. They set up a great cheer when they learned that most +of the rebel force had been captured, and the night was spent in a +celebration of the great event. A band was scraped up in the town, the +great hall of the administration building was thrown open, and there was +dancing and music until an early hour in the morning. All the belles of +the town turned out to welcome the soldiers, hypocrites that they were, +and they danced with their enemies as readily as they would waltz with +their own dear Filipinos. Every one seemed to have a good time, and +the soldiers went to bed just in time to get three hours' sleep before +starting for Manila in the morning. + +It was a great sight to see the two regiments, with the prisoners, march +out of the town at five the next morning. They made a fine appearance in +their well-brushed uniforms and bright equipment. The townsfolk watched +them out of sight, and then most likely cursed them for a lot of +vagabonds, but the soldiers didn't mind their curses. They were all very +happy at the prospect of getting back to Manila again, and no one was +more glad than Archie. He had somewhat recovered from his wound now, and +rode in his old place at the head of the column, where he was the centre +of interest to every one. The men congratulated him on having proved +such an excellent mascot, and he laughed and talked with them until he +was tired. + +The outskirts of the city were reached about five in the afternoon, +and as they marched through the streets to headquarters a band of music +preceded them, playing popular and patriotic airs. The sidewalks were +crowded with people, and Archie felt happier than for a long time, +because every one was curious to know who that boy could be riding at +the head of the troops, alongside the colonel. He was known to most of +the other troops in Manila, and received many a cheer from them as they +saw his arm in a sling, and when they finally reached the general's +headquarters, he was honoured with a handshake and the congratulations +of the commander himself. This was the climax to a very happy day, and +Archie went to bed in his little old bunk feeling that he was a very +lucky boy for having been wounded in battle. + +Of course the next few days were very busy ones for all the men, and +for Archie, too. He was obliged to tell, over and over, the story of his +experiences, and how he had managed to escape from the rebels when +they had him. This story always made the men roar with laughter, and +increased their already strong contempt for the Filipino army. He told, +too, about brave Bill Hickson, and that gentleman's cot was always the +centre of an admiring throng of visitors, who shook his hand and told +him how proud they were of what he had accomplished. And all the poor +hero could do was to smile feebly, for he was still too ill to talk +much. + +Archie felt that he had almost volumes to write about his experiences in +battle, and he did send a very long account of this encounter to Mr. Van +Bunting. It was written in his boyish way, but one of the officers who +read it said that it was the best thing of its kind he had ever read, +so he wasn't at all backward about mailing it. All the other newspaper +correspondents in Manila were wishing they had gone with the regiment +and witnessed the battle, but they had stayed in Manila, thinking that +this would be like the other expeditions of the kind, a mere wild-goose +chase, which wouldn't amount to anything at all. They were all very +anxious to get the details of the affair from Archie, but he was shrewd +enough not to tell them anything of value. And the other correspondent +of the Enterprise in Manila insisted that Archie should send a cable +message describing the affair, as well as a written account, and this +he finally consented to do. The correspondent added a long account +of Archie's personal bravery, how he had been wounded, and how he had +ridden back to Manila at the head of the column. Archie would have been +very much embarrassed had he known this, for he was still modest, but +the first thing he knew of it was from a letter he received a few +weeks later from Mr. Van Bunting, congratulating him on what he had +accomplished, and telling him that he had long since more than earned +his six hundred dollars. But for weeks he was ignorant that any one in +New York knew of his being wounded. + +The days now began to pass as before in the camp at Manila. The wound +in Archie's arm was healing slowly, but he was hardly able to use that +member for a month or six weeks. Bill Hickson did not fare so well. He +lay for weeks on his cot in the hospital building, and was hardly strong +enough, for awhile, to talk. He was improving slowly, but the doctors +said it might be two months before he was able to walk about and take +his former active part in the campaign against the insurgents. This +enforced quiet was very trying to the brave man, and Archie spent many +hours reading to him, and telling of various things he had learned at +school and elsewhere. This constant companionship served to strengthen +their already close friendship, and it was soon known among all the +troops that Bill Hickson and the boy reporter were inseparable. And +every one who knew the story of their experiences looked upon them as +the two chief heroes of the war so far, because as yet there had been +few feats of bravery in the desultory campaigning against the rebels. +General Funston had swum the river, of course, but many held that not +even that feat compared with the bravery of Bill Hickson in serving as +a spy under Aguinaldo's very nose. The more people heard about his +experiences, the more remarkable they thought him to be, until at last +he was by far the most popular man in the army at Manila. + +Archie sent many interesting letters to Mr. Van Bunting, telling of the +adventures of the brave spy, and one day he received a cablegram telling +him to send at least one of these letters by every steamer, for people +had become interested in hearing about him. So for some time Archie +wrote about Bill Hickson rather than about himself, and was glad of the +opportunity to do so. He knew that if a letter were published every week +or two in the Enterprise Bill Hickson would soon be famous, and this was +something he was very anxious to accomplish. He felt that no fame could +be too great for such a man, and no praise too strong. + +The commanding general decided, about this time, to begin a more active +campaign against the insurgents. It was now the month of December, and +with the beginning of the new year he wanted to inaugurate a series of +attacks against them in every part of the islands. He was beginning to +feel the criticisms of the papers at home, and of the newspaper men at +Manila, and he felt that something must be done immediately to retrieve +his lost reputation for active fighting. Every one, as soon as this +announcement was made, wondered what plan would be pursued to worry +the rebels into submission, for it was now generally agreed that the +Americans would hardly be able to capture the whole rebel army. It was +too evident that they were familiar with numerous hiding-places in the +islands. The only thing to do seemed to be to prevent their getting +supplies, and to drive them from one point to another, hoping that they +would become discouraged in the end and submit to the inevitable. + +So far the campaigning had consisted chiefly of such expeditions as that +accompanied by Archie, and most of these had returned to Manila without +having even seen a rebel soldier. It was not surprising, then, that the +general was becoming discouraged, and that he was anxious to try a new +policy. + +No one knew what the new plan would be until one day several cruisers +and gunboats made their appearance in the harbour. There had been no +war-ships at Manila for several weeks, and every one was surprised that +so many should arrive at once. There were rumours of a German onslaught, +and also gossip saying that Japan had decided to interfere, but all +these were set at naught when the general announced that the war-ships +were to be sent around the islands to bombard the rebel villages, and to +drive the rebel troops to the interior of the islands, where it would be +hard for them to receive supplies. + +This news made Archie very happy, and a plan at once occurred to him. +Why shouldn't he and Bill Hickson be allowed aboard a cruiser? It would +be the best thing possible for their health, and he set about getting +the necessary permit from the admiral. + +Bill Hickson was able to be about now, and he was overjoyed when Archie +said he thought they could arrange to go. "I'd like nothing better than +a voyage in the good salt air. I believe it will do me more good than +a month in the hospital," he said. Archie secured a very strong letter +from the general, and one day he stepped aboard the flag-ship in the +harbour. He had no difficulty in seeing the admiral, and found him to be +a very pleasant man to talk with. He read the letter carefully, and then +shook Archie cordially by the hand. "Yes," he said, "I've heard of +you, and of your friend, too. Every one in Hong Kong knows how you two +together bearded old Aguinaldo in his den, and robbed him of most of his +troops. It did me good to read about it in the New York papers, too, and +to know that you are both getting your just measure of credit for the +achievement." + +Archie blushed, and assured the admiral that he didn't do very much, +that it was all owing to Bill Hickson's bravery. "Oh, yes, I know," +laughed the admiral, "you lay it to him, and he will most likely give +you the credit. I've seen your kind before. But I like you all the +better for your modesty, lad. Of course you and your friend can have a +berth aboard ship, and aboard the flag-ship, too, where I can see you +both very often. You can come aboard whenever you wish, and stay as long +as you like." + +Archie could hardly thank the good officer for his kindness, and hurried +back to Manila. He found Bill Hickson waiting for him at the wharf, and +they rejoiced together over the good news. + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP--BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN. + +IT was early one morning that Bill Hickson and Archie went aboard the +flag-ship, but all hands were on duty there, and the gallant cruiser was +raising anchor preparatory to sailing off on her errand of pacification +by means of shell and shot, The two newcomers were assigned a pleasant +stateroom where they would not be far from the cabin of the admiral +himself, and where they could step out of their door upon the +quarter-deck, and get all the fresh air they needed. It was a very +comfortable place, with two soft bunks, and every convenience usually +found aboard the fastest ocean liner. When the fellows saw it first, +they could hardly believe it could all be for them, but the officer +assured them that it had been given them by the admiral's own orders. So +there was nothing for them to do but accept the kindness, and to settle +themselves down to having just as pleasant a time as possible during the +coming weeks at sea. + +It was generally understood that the cruiser was to make a complete tour +around the island of Luzon, investigating every suspicious port, and +shelling towns when such action proved necessary to convince the rebels +of Uncle Sam's superiority. The voyage was expected to occupy nearly a +month, for there was no reason for them to hurry, and the admiral said +he would like to take things easy. + +Neither Hickson nor Archie had ever before been aboard a war-ship, and +they both found much to interest them during the first few days at +sea. Every movement of the crew, every action of the ship, was of great +moment to them, and they found no lack of entertainment in examining the +great guns and the equipment of the vessel in the way of firearms +and ammunition. Archie became much interested, too, in the science of +navigation, and spent much time with the captain on the bridge, or with +the pilot in the lookout, learning as much as possible about how the +movement of the vessel is controlled. Before long he had mastered the +rudiments of the art, and the captain told him that he might some day +make an excellent navigator if he continued to take as much interest in +the charts as he did now. And Archie told him that he was determined to +master as much as possible of the business during the voyage. Before he +returned to Manila he knew more about it all than even the captain would +believe he knew, and the knowledge was very valuable to him in days to +come. + +The two visitors aboard took their meals at the officers' table, and +they kept the whole party interested for many days, with their stories +of the war in Luzon and of their very unusual adventures both at home +and in the Philippines. For it turned out that Bill Hickson had visited +almost every part of the United States, and had lived in all sorts of +places. He had been a cowboy in Texas, and a miner in the Klondike, and +he had also been a policeman in Chicago. He knew more stories to tell +than any other man at the table could think of, and he told them in a +way that was wholly charming. + +Archie found that every one was very much interested in hearing about +his leaving home, and how he had happened to become a reporter on the +New York Enterprise. No one seemed to tire of listening to his stories +of his adventures in the great American city, and many of the officers +told him that they would give a good deal to have had his experiences in +life. + +And so it wasn't long until the two chums were friendly with all on +board, and after awhile things went along as though Archie and Bill had +never lived elsewhere than aboard ship. There was nothing exciting for +nearly a week. The cruiser steamed slowly along the shore, sometimes +stopping entirely, while the officers levelled their glasses upon the +beach, to see whether there were any signs of the rebels being there. +Sometimes, if things looked suspicious, parties were sent ashore to +reconnoitre, but they seldom returned with news that would encourage +the admiral to investigate further. The days passed quietly, and the +two convalescents enjoyed themselves well enough. They were both much +improved already by the trip, and felt almost as well as ever. They +each had a steamer chair, and hour after hour they sat upon the deck and +watched the ever-changing panorama of the tropical shore. Now the beach +would descend slowly to the sea, and there would be numerous palm-trees +and luxuriant vegetation growing close within view, but again there +would be steep clips, which looked menacing to a ship in the dark. But +it was all beautiful, cliffs or sandy beach, and Archie thought he had +seldom passed such a wholly delightful week. + +But, of course, it all became monotonous in time, and every one, even +the officers, longed for a change. The reconnoitring parties were sent +out more frequently now, and every one hoped each time that they would +return with news of the rebels, but they were always disappointed. The +admiral now determined to steam ahead more rapidly, so that they might +get around the western end of the island. It was evident that there were +no insurgents along this shore, and as there were no villages of any +consequence, either, he was anxious to reach the southern shore, where +it was known the rebels had recently been gathering. The towns, too, +were very numerous here on account of the excellent fishing, and it was +hoped that some good work might be accomplished for Uncle Sam before +another week passed. + +Subsequent events soon proved the wisdom of the admiral's plan. The +cruiser, it seemed, had no sooner rounded the western point than signs +were visible of rebel activity ashore. It was one Tuesday morning that +a village was sighted, built around a narrow inlet of the sea. When the +binoculars were levelled upon this harmless-appearing settlement, it was +soon perceived by the admiral that there were soldiers in the streets +with the rebel uniform, and that the insurgent flag was flying from the +administration building in the village square. All this was just what +had been expected, and there was great rejoicing aboard the cruiser. +Every man, without exception, almost, was anxious to be one of a party +to be sent ashore to attack the rebels, but the admiral hesitated before +sending any one at all. "It is impossible to tell from here," he said, +"how numerous the rebels are, and it is quite possible that they may +have a large force of men in the village. If the appearance of the +streets is any sign, there must be quite a force of them in the place." +But every one laughed at the very idea of there being a rebel company of +any consequence in the place, and the admiral was finally prevailed upon +to send a boat ashore, armed with thirty men. + +"Remember," he said, "if you come to grief, that I advised against this +venture. Don't be too bold, or risk too much, for though I can shell the +place, that won't help you any, once you are captives." + +But every one was anxious to be one of the party in the boat, and the +officers had a hard time making selections. "You can go, Archie, because +you're a correspondent," said the captain, "and you can go, Mr. Hickson, +because you're a brave man," and then he continued to pick out men until +the required number was secured. Of course there were many disappointed +ones left aboard the cruiser, but the captain assured them that they +might have their chance yet. + +The boat was soon off, and it was noticed that there was great +excitement ashore as soon as the departure was observed. All the +inhabitants, it seemed, were gathered upon the beach, anxiously awaiting +developments. They seemed to be absolutely ignorant of what the presence +of a war-ship in their harbour meant, and were apparently not at all +anxious as to the outcome of this visit. One of the men told Archie that +they had probably never seen a war-ship before, and that they wouldn't +know a cannon at all. "But we'll let them know the meaning of our +presence," declared the sailor, "if they shoot at us." The boat drew +every minute nearer the shore, and it was soon perceived that there +were many soldiers among the crowd on the beach. Every one thought it +remarkable that they should be so quiet, but not one of the natives made +a move until the boat was within two hundred feet of the shore. Then one +of the rebel soldiers suddenly raised his rifle and fired at the boat. +The lieutenant in command stood up in the boat and gave the order to +return the fire, and a perfect volley of shot was poured into the crowd, +which immediately scattered in every direction. The rebel soldiers, +however, seemed determined to stand their ground, and they were so +numerous, and kept up such a steady fire, that it was deemed best to +return to the cruiser, which was signalling for this action on their +part. So the boat was turned about as quickly as possible, and +the sailors pulled for the cruiser, amid the derisive yells of the +Filipinos, who had gathered again upon the beach. The rebel soldiers +continued their firing, but were such poor marksmen that but three of +their shots took effect. One sailor was shot in the arm, another in the +side, and still another was shot in the leg as he stood up to take aim +at the rebels. None of these wounds, it was afterward discovered, were +at all serious, though they were enough to arouse the anger of the +entire crew. + +When the boat reached the cruiser again, preparations were at once begun +for bombarding the town. The natives still stood upon the shore, and it +could be seen that they were immensely proud of their present victory. +It was amusing, then, to see the change in their behaviour when the +great six-inch gun of the cruiser belched forth a cloud of fire and +smoke, and a burning shell landed in the village street, apparently just +in front of the administration building, which was soon afire. The poor +natives fled in every direction, and the rebel soldiers followed their +noble example, and took to their heels, too. Another shell followed +the first, and soon several buildings were burning in the village. The +admiral watched developments carefully, and finally he decided that they +would be glad to surrender the village if another boat was sent ashore. + +Accordingly, the same boat started out again, with three new men in +place of those who were wounded, and for sake of effect the cruiser +steamed farther in toward shore. This time there were no crowds upon the +beach, and the thirty men marched to the burning buildings, where the +natives fell before them, begging for mercy. The soldiers were nowhere +to be seen, so the crew took possession of the town and slept there, in +company with thirty more sailors, that night. + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + CONTINUING THE CRUISE--ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED--THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE'S + FRIEND--A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY--LONGING TO BE HOME + AGAIN. + +IT may go without saying that the sixty men from the cruiser had a very +interesting time before the night was over. The entire village was in a +constant uproar; the poor natives, horrified by what they had witnessed +during the afternoon, ran hither and thither, some even leaving the +place entirely and starting for the interior with their goods and +families. The rebel soldiers had evidently gone for good, and a small +party sent out to look for traces of them returned without learning +anything of their whereabouts. The bombardment of the village had +certainly had great effect. + +It was only a tiny place, with possibly not more than a thousand +inhabitants, but there were evidences that it had been formerly a +flourishing town. There were fine residences in some of the streets, +which were now quite deserted, and there were some very respectable +business houses in the village square. All these had once been occupied +by Spanish traders, who had been driven away when the rebels came, and +if the insurgents had never come the town might now have been a booming +place. But the rebels were lazy, as usual, and did no work, so that now +the fine residences were vacant, and the business blocks stood empty. + +Some of the sailors looked about for a casino, where they might be able +to find entertainment of some kind for the evening, but every place +of amusement was closed, and the streets were deserted. Since the +occurrences of the afternoon all the people had locked themselves into +their houses, to await the departure of the Americans. But, even though +the casino was closed, the Yankees managed to have a good time. They +sang and danced and played the banjo until an early hour in the morning, +when they finally went to sleep, leaving only two for a night watch, +for there was no danger that the insurgents would return, after their +engagement, in which they had lost six men. + +When morning came, some officers landed from the cruiser, and all +the villagers were summoned to the public square and made to swear +allegiance to the American flag. + +In the afternoon the cruiser steamed away again on her errand of +forcible pacification, and more days of quiet watchfulness followed, as +the vessel steamed along near the shore. There were many small +villages along this coast, but all of them seemed peaceful and free +of insurgents. The captain even said that some of the people in them +probably didn't know that there had ever been a war between Spain and +the United States. Archie, who had enjoyed his experiences during the +occupation of the last village, now began to be impatient again at +the long quiet. The day when the cruiser bombarded the administration +building would be a memorable one to him, and the succeeding events were +just such as he had been longing to see for months. And then to think +that he had taken part in the occupation of the village. It was all very +wonderful, but very real, too, and for several days he took much pains +in writing an article for the paper describing the events leading up +to and including the capture of the village. And in the narration Bill +Hickson was an important character. He had again proved himself a hero +of the first water by insisting that the boat proceed when the first +attempt was made to land, and by being the first man ashore when a +landing was finally effected. He was a leader in everything that was +done. He marched at the head of the squad when they marched through the +streets of the village, calling all the people to assemble in the public +square, and he stood beside the officers with his rifle handy when the +ceremony of swearing allegiance was gone through with. When it was +all over he was called to the admiral's cabin aboard the cruiser and +congratulated for being so brave and so ever-ready to lead in any +dangerous undertaking; but Bill Hickson simply blushed and said +he hadn't done "anything worth mentionin'." The men aboard thought +differently, however, and he was even a greater hero after this +adventure than he had been before. + +Archie, too, received the congratulations of the admiral. "You have been +a brave boy," he said, "and deserve much credit for showing so little +fear in the face of danger. I hope you will be rewarded upon your return +to New York for your bravery while with us here." Archie, too, blushed, +and said that he had no doubt that Mr. Van Bunting would treat him +fairly when he reached New York again. + +And Archie was now beginning to wish that the time for his return would +soon arrive. It was the month of February, and he had been away from +America an age, it seemed to him. He felt that he had seen most of what +there was to be seen in the Philippines, and when this naval tour was +over with, the active campaigning would no doubt cease until the rainy +season was over. So for many reasons the boy wished he might be able to +start home soon, and as the days passed he became more and more anxious +to receive word from the Enterprise that he might return. He had sent +many interesting articles to the paper, and would be able to write many +more just as interesting upon his return, so he felt that the editors +wouldn't object to his early return. + +For an entire week the cruiser found no signs of the rebels, but at last +there came a day when they were steaming slowly along near the shore, +and saw, back among the trees, some specks of white resembling tents +in shape. Immediately the whole vessel was excited, and there was much +gossip and wonder as to what the tents could be doing there. The admiral +at last decided to send two boats ashore to investigate, and gave strict +orders that the men should be cautious and not allow themselves to be +ambushed or caught in a trap of any kind. Of course Archie and Bill +Hickson were among the crew of the first boat, and each was as fully +armed as any of the sailors. + +The two boats pulled quietly for the shore, keeping close together, and +they were beached at the same time. The natives, or whoever occupied the +tents, had evidently not yet discovered them, and the men halted upon +landing to decide what they had better do. The tents could be plainly +seen through the trees, and there was smoke rising from a fire somewhere +in the neighbourhood, but there were no noises which could be heard +so far away. It was decided to march up to the tents and find out who +occupied them, and the column kept close together as they advanced, for +things were so quiet it was feared the rebels, if such they were, might +be in ambush. + +The men got within a hundred feet of the camp, when they heard several +terrible yells in succession, and several natives ran out from behind +one of the tents, screaming at the top of their voices, and not pausing +to look around at all. The officer in command of the company of men was +much disturbed by this demonstration, and, without pausing a moment, +gave the order to fire. Five of the natives fell immediately, but the +other six kept running, and soon disappeared among the trees on the +other side of the clearing. The men stood still awaiting developments, +but though they waited several minutes nothing more was heard, and it +was decided that the camp must be deserted. So they marched up to the +tents, and then the officer almost fainted, for inside the first one +he entered was standing an American flag, and scattered about were the +accoutrements and camp equipment belonging to an American force in the +field. There was now no doubt but what the tents belonged to an +American regiment, and that the fleeing natives were either servants or +prisoners, more likely the former. The men were all much excited at this +discovery, and the officer ordered the natives to be looked after at +once. It was found, however, that all but one were dead, and he expired +within an hour, so that the men felt that they had killed five innocent +men, a thought which made some of them weep, hardened though they were. + +It was now decided to await the return of the regiment, which was out, +the officer thought, on a practice march, and could not possibly be +gone much longer. So the men lounged about on the grass for more than an +hour. Then, about three in the afternoon, a rifle-shot was heard in the +near distance, and instantly every man was on his feet, rifle in hand. +"They must have found the rebels," said the officer; "so be ready, +men, to help them out, should they be retreating to the camp." This +supposition turned out to be correct, for a few minutes later some +members of the regiment came running into camp and announced that a +large body of insurgents was after them. Later the remainder of the +regiment followed, and the joy of the colonel when he found these +unexpected reinforcements was very great. "There must be more than +fifteen hundred rebels," he said, "and they will all be on us here in +less than an hour, for their sharpshooters have been following us up for +a long time. I was beginning to think that we would be unable to fight +them, for they seem to be well equipped, but with the cruiser to kelp +us we can whip them at once. The thing to do will be to let them come +on without suspecting that we have received any help, and then, when the +fight is getting a little warm, or they are about to charge us, let the +cruiser fire a few shells into the air, and it will all be over. Most of +them are country troops, and have never seen a cruiser, so they will be +too much frightened to speak when they hear the thunder of the guns, and +see the shells explode in the air. And then they have a village about +three miles back from the coast, and if you can send a few shells into +that village it will simply ruin the insurgents. + +"I had no idea of meeting these rebels," the colonel then explained. "I +took the men out for a little practice marching, but before we had gone +far we encountered these sharpshooters, and later discovered that they +had all these men about a mile and a half away. Then we decided to +return to camp as quickly as possible, to get more ammunition, and we +felt, too, that we would stand a better chance of resisting them here +among the trees. But now we will soon finish them up, if you will just +send a man out to tell the admiral of our plans." Archie immediately +volunteered to carry the information, and as he could be spared better +than one of the soldiers or sailors, he was permitted to undertake the +mission. So he started out, and was on board the cruiser in a very short +time. The admiral was dumbfounded to learn that American troops were +encamped on the shore, and in imminent danger of being defeated, and he +at once set about giving orders with great vigour. "We will show them +how they can attack a small regiment of Americans with their ridiculous +army," he declared, and at once gave orders for the vessel to move +inshore. "But wait," he cried, a minute later, "I see by my chart +that there is a deep stream about a mile up the coast, and if I am +not mistaken we can enter this stream and perhaps get very near the +advancing rebels. We may even be able to destroy them before they have +a chance at our soldiers," and the old admiral almost danced in the +enthusiasm of this idea. So the cruiser steamed rapidly up the coast, +and was soon at the mouth of the stream, which seemed to be the estuary +of some great river. Then she steamed up-stream, and, sure enough, the +admiral soon discovered the rebels marching rapidly along the road, +about half a mile away. They had evidently not perceived the cruiser, on +account of the high reeds growing along the banks, and the admiral gave +orders to begin firing. + +The first shell rose high in the air and exploded with a deafening +thunder, and when the smoke cleared away it was seen that the insurgents +were almost paralysed with fright, and had just discovered the cruiser +in the river. But this first shell had not hurt any one, and another +was immediately ignited. This one exploded over the very heads of the +troops, and many of them must have been killed. Those who were not +either killed or wounded turned about and began to run, and their +leaders were powerless to make them stand their ground. One shell +followed another from the cruiser, and hundreds must have been killed +outright among the insurgents. Finally they were all running, and it was +soon perceived that the Americans had advanced, and were now pursuing +them with great energy. So the cruiser could fire no more shells, and +the admiral ordered her about and back to the anchorage onshore. + +It would take many pages to describe in detail the events of the +remainder of that afternoon, as Archie witnessed them from the deck of +the cruiser, and learned of them later from Bill Hickson. The insurgents +were nearly all killed or taken prisoners, and it was found that they +numbered nearly two thousand. So it was a great achievement to have +vanquished them all. The affair turned out to have been the greatest +victory of the war, so far. + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS--A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO + RETURN TO NEW YORK--BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO. + +ARCHIE left the cruiser when she was once more at anchor, and, going +ashore to the American camp, he found things in a very lively condition +at the close of the afternoon's battle. Every man was very jubilant over +the retreat which had been turned into a great victory, and Archie was +congratulated on having been the lucky man to carry the news of the +coming of the rebels to the admiral. The officers were all in the best +of humour, except the colonel, who felt somewhat sad on account of the +death of his five faithful servants, as the men first shot turned out to +have been. + +"There were never any better men than they," said the colonel, "and I +would almost as soon my own men had been shot." But he bore the ship's +company no malice for their mistake, which he said was a very natural +one. + +After the capture of so many rebels, and the killing of so many others, +it was felt that the rebel army in this part of the island was pretty +well disbanded, and that it would soon disappear altogether. It had been +known, from the very beginning of hostilities, that there was a large +force of insurgents somewhere in this neighbourhood, but not until +to-day had the colonel seen anything of them. But it was impossible, all +the officers said, that there could be any more troops about, for these +two thousand represented a very considerable portion of the entire rebel +army. And now that these were done away with, the colonel said there +was no need of his remaining any longer in this place, and that he would +like to get back to Manila as quickly as possible. Hearing this, the +admiral said he thought room could be made for all the men aboard the +cruiser, and that they could all return at once if they so desired. This +generous offer was at once accepted by the colonel, and the next day the +work of embarkation began. By night every man was aboard, and a place +of some kind had been found where he could sleep, but of course, every +portion of the vessel was much overcrowded. This only made things all +the more lively, however, and Archie, as well as all the others, thought +he had never enjoyed any trip so much as these three days spent in +getting back again to Manila. There was always fun of some sort going +on. If some one wasn't dancing, there was sure to be singing. And then +there were several ingenious games which were invented for the occasion, +so that time never passed slowly. Indeed, there were many who were sorry +when the capital was finally reached, but Archie was not among these, +for he expected some mail to be awaiting him from the editor of the +Enterprise. And he hoped that in this mail he would find permission to +return to New York. + +All officials were very much surprised when the cruiser anchored off +Cavite, but the admiral explained that he thought it no use to spend +more time in touring the island, even though the month which it was +supposed to take him had not yet expired. He said that he felt sure +there were no more insurgent villages along the coast, because it was +perfectly evident, from all signs, that the rebels were all in one +division. And this division, of course, had been vanquished four days +previously. + +When the report of the engagement went the rounds there was much +enthusiasm, for it was felt that at last some progress was being made +against the insurgents. The admiral was a popular hero at once, and +Archie, with Bill Hickson, was again the centre of admiration and +interest in the old palace, where they both returned. + +Archie was surprised to find no mail awaiting him, but he was not +discouraged, and wrote two long articles to send to the Enterprise. One +described the great engagement, and the other was descriptive of the +daily life aboard ship upon the return to Manila. These articles, with +the others he had written during the latter part of the cruise, were +sent off at once, and Archie felt confident that they would be read +with great interest by Mr. Van Bunting. And now the days passed very +pleasantly in Manila. He had a great deal to tell his comrades in the +old regiment, for none of them had been out of Manila since he left, +and were very anxious indeed to hear about the events of the +round-the-island tour. And Archie was very willing to tell them all he +could, for he had been much interested in the entire voyage, and never +tired of talking about it. + +Still, while things were very pleasant, and he was having a good time in +many ways, Archie was very anxious to see New York again and to get back +to America. And then, what was even more important with him, was the +knowledge that he would certainly be allowed to visit his mother upon +his return. Therefore he was a very happy boy when he one day received +two letters from the Enterprise office, one from Mr. Van Bunting, +and one from Mr. Jennings. They were both very encouraging and very +friendly. Mr. Van Bunting wrote to tell Archie how delighted they all +had been with his success in finding interesting things to write about, +and he enclosed a check for three hundred dollars, which he thought +"would come in handy now." The letter from Mr. Jennings was of later +date, and stated that he had prevailed upon Mr. Van Bunting to allow +Archie to return to New York, to work upon the Evening Enterprise. It +was a very delightful letter, Archie thought. "We believe," wrote Mr. +Jennings, "that we can use you here to very good advantage, and we will +be glad to have you return as soon as possible. I enclose two hundred +dollars to pay your expenses home again." + +So now it was all settled that Archie was to leave Manila for New York, +and, now that it was sure he was going, he felt somewhat reluctant to +leave the soldiers with whom he had become friendly, and to get away +from all this life of adventure which had been so interesting and so +delightful in many ways. It was hard, too, to leave the dear old palace +in Manila, through which he had wandered so often, and every room +of which had for him some story of a Spanish prince or a great +governor-general, wealthy and wise. There would be none of all this at +home or in New York, but then there would be something better; there +would be mother, and the old grape arbour, and the Hut Club. + +On investigation, Archie found that the quickest way to get home would +be to travel by way of Hong Kong and Yokohama, taking the steamer from +there to San Francisco. It would take him more than a month to make +the trip, and, as it was now the second week in March, he could hardly +expect to reach New York before the first of May. He at once cabled +Mr. Jennings that he would leave at once for Hong Kong, and received +an answer telling him to do so by all means, and to continue to write +letters describing his trip. Archie knew that these letters would +probably not reach New York any sooner than he would, but he did write +them, anyhow, and he did see some of them appear in the paper after his +arrival. + +Archie was overjoyed to learn one day that Bill Hickson had received +permission from the commanding general to return to the United States, +and he at once hunted up the bashful hero, and insisted that he leave at +once, and make the trip with him. This was finally agreed to, and when +it was settled that the two old chums were to travel homeward together +the whole camp in Manila was interested in the news. They were both +very popular, and almost every night before their departure there was a +pleasure party of some kind arranged for them. One night they would give +a regular "stag," as they called them, and then again they would arrange +a sort of musicale, at which there would be clog-dancing, banjo music, +and various games to increase the fun. + +The four days passed very quickly indeed, and at last the day for +sailing arrived. There was a great throng at the pier to see them off, +and there was no end of good wishes and stories of the good times now +gone by. When the steamer finally moved out into the open, there were +three cheers each for Archie and "brave Bill Hickson," in which every +man appeared to join with all his heart and voice. And there were tears +in Archie's eyes at having to part from such true friends. It was hard +to tell, too, when he would ever see any of them again. He realised +that hereafter his path and theirs would probably lie in different +directions. He was going to New York to work as a reporter, and they, if +they were not killed in battle, would be scattered in all parts of the +great United States, at the mustering out of the troops. It was all very +sad, and even Bill Hickson seemed to feel the solemnity of the occasion, +for he had nothing to say for many hours after the vessel had started on +its journey. + +Archie, too, felt homesick at having to leave, and they went to bed very +early, apparently feeling that the best thing under such circumstances +was to be asleep. And when morning came they both felt somewhat better, +for Archie arose filled with hope for the future, and more anxious than +ever to reach home. Bill Hickson, too, was not loath to return to the +United States, even though he had no relatives waiting there to +welcome him. The poor fellow had been through a great deal while in the +Philippines, and his constitution was almost wrecked by the constant +strain to which he was subjected. He had never fully recovered from his +accident of several weeks before, and he felt that he needed a rest from +the constant excitement and worry of life in the army. He was tired, +too, of being a spy. He had never relished the work, but he had realised +how necessary it was for the Americans to have some one to follow up +Aguinaldo and let the general know of his movements. "They'll be a long +time catching him now," he said, time and again, to Archie. "He's a much +shrewder man than they think, and he knows his Philippine Islands like +a book. He can go from one place to another without the Americans ever +knowing where he disappeared to, and without some one to follow him they +will never be able to learn anything of his movements." + +Bill had received nearly two hundred dollars in back pay, so he felt +quite rich, and Archie told him that if he should happen to run out, and +need more money, he would be very glad to furnish it to him, For Archie +was now determined to take Bill Hickson to New York, and introduce him +to Mr. Van Bunting, feeling sure that the wise editor would thank him +for bringing to his attention a man at once so interesting and so worthy +as this hero of the war had proved himself to be. But for the present +Bill would discuss nothing of the kind. He was thoroughly content to +sit beside Archie on the warm steamer deck, and watch the ever varied +surface of the Indian Ocean. + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + HONG KONG--A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO--HONOLULU AGAIN--ARRIVAL IN SAN + FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS--ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN + NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR. + +AFTER a short and pleasant voyage they reached Hong Kong, and Archie +found this city to be much more interesting than he had expected to find +it. It was charming, he thought, to run across a place which combined +the conveniences of England and America with the picturesque oddities +of China and Japan, and he enjoyed himself to the utmost during the two +days they spent there. Bill Hickson enjoyed the place, too, and they +would both have liked to remain longer had it been possible for them to +do so, but they were anxious to see something of Japan before sailing +for San Francisco, and their steamer was due to leave Yokohama in eleven +days. + +But they did enjoy Hong Kong to the utmost while they were there. They +called first, of course, upon the American consul, whom they found to be +an exceedingly pleasant man. They learned, to their great surprise, that +he had read of Archie Dunn, and of Bill Hickson, too, in the Enterprise, +and Archie began to think that his paper had a much wider circulation +than even the editors claimed for it. He thought it very remarkable, +at first, that a man living in Hong Kong should have read about his +Philippine experiences in a New York paper, but of course, after he +thought of it awhile, it didn't seem such a very remarkable thing, after +all. And after this, when they heard of people having read of them, +they weren't so much surprised, having come to realise the tremendous +circulation of this paper. + +The consul did all in his power to make their stay in Hong Kong +pleasant. He was anxious to have a formal dinner for them, but Bill +Hickson said that he would much prefer not having to dress up, and +Archie was willing for Bill's sake to forego the honour. So they spent +their two days in going about the city, visiting the quaint Chinese +shops, and seeing everything of particular interest. They found many +wonderful things to look at, and Archie said that he couldn't imagine +any more delightful place; but Bill told him to wait until they reached +Japan, for he'd find that much more charming than Hong Kong. "I've been +there before," said Bill, "and I know what I'm talkin' about, and I say +there ain't no such place on earth as Japan for interestin' things to +look at, and pleasant things to do." And when, a few days later, +Archie was initiated into some of the mysteries of Japanese life by +his experienced friend, he was willing to admit the truth of all he +had heard concerning the land of the chrysanthemum. He found everything +quite beyond his expectations. The people themselves were more quaint +in their dress and manners than he had expected to find them, and the +houses and the pagodas were much more picturesque than he had imagined +they would be. And the whole atmosphere of the country seemed filled +with romance and history, and it wasn't at all hard to believe that the +Japanese have longer family trees than any other nation on earth. + +They spent a few days travelling through the provincial districts of the +little kingdom, and then they reached Tokio, where Bill was anxious to +spend several days. "I know some folks here who can take us around and +show us everything that's worth seeing," he said, "and we can spend our +time to better advantage here than anywhere else I know of." And sure +enough, Bill did know some people in the capital city, some pleasant +English people, who had met the open-hearted Westerner when he was in +the city years before, and who had at once appreciated the true nobility +of his character. They were very kind to Archie,--so kind that the lad +thought he had never before met such pleasant people. And they were +thoroughly interested in all his adventures, from the time he left home +late in the preceding summer until now. He had to tell them all about +his New York adventures, and also about their experiences together in +the Philippines, and his new friends showed the greatest interest in all +he had to say, and seemed to find it all vastly entertaining. They were +anxious, Archie thought, to make him have a very good time in Tokio, to +make up for some of his hard experiences, and if this were indeed their +object, they succeeded admirably in accomplishing it. Every day was +filled with surprises, and every night Archie thought he had enjoyed +himself more this day than the day before. They travelled about the city +so persistently, on foot and in the quaint jinrikishas, that he felt +that he knew almost every part of Tokio, and he witnessed every side of +native existence, as well as the life in the foreign quarter. It was +all charmingly new and interesting, and, as in Hong Kong, they were +both sorry when the day for their sailing came around. And always since +Archie has declared that no one can be more kindly hospitable than the +English. + +The voyage from Yokohama to San Francisco was slow and monotonous, +Archie thought, for he was now very impatient to reach the United +States, and he had also grown very tired of travel by water. There were +some very pleasant passengers, but Archie couldn't see that he had a +much better time than when he was peeling potatoes corning over. That +was interesting enough, anyhow. The only break in the monotony was the +day they were enabled to spend in Honolulu, and on that day Archie went +again to some of the places he had seen during his first visit to the +attractive city. And he called again upon some of the friends of his +first visit, and found that most of them had read of his great success +as a war correspondent, and of his many exciting experiences in the +Philippines. They were all profuse in congratulating him upon what +he had accomplished, and every one seemed to think he had been very +successful indeed. + +While they were in Honolulu a vessel arrived, bound for Japan, and +Archie was delighted to find it was the same vessel upon which he had +worked his passage from San Francisco on his way to Manila. He went +aboard and met some of the friends he had made there, and found that +they all knew now who it was they had carried as chore-boy in the +galley. They all seemed glad to hear of his success, and to know that +he was coming home as a first-class passenger. The cook treated him with +much deference, and started to apologise for his treatment of Archie on +the way over; but the boy stopped him, and told him that no apology +was necessary. "I think I may have been an unwilling worker," he said, +"because of course I didn't like the work at all, and it was hard for +me to take an interest in peeling potatoes when I was looking forward to +accomplishing such great things in the Philippines." + +"Oh," said the cook, "you was a fine worker. Sure, I ain't had so good +a boy since." And Archie laughed to see the change in opinion which is +sometimes brought about by a change in circumstances. + +Archie enjoyed the city quite as much as before, but he was glad, +nevertheless, when the steamer continued her voyage east. And then he +began to count the days until they should arrive in San Francisco, and +of course these last days seemed the longest ones of the voyage. But +they gradually passed away, and as they steamed ahead, coming nearer +every hour to that dear land called "home," both Archie and Bill began +to wonder how they would like it all, after their adventurous life in +the Philippines. Bill, in particular, was doubtful whether he would +again be able to settle down to a quiet existence in some small place, +and Archie assured him that he must live in New York, where he would be +sure to find things lively enough to suit him. + +At last came the eventful day when the great steamer threaded her way +through the beautiful Golden Gate, and discharged her passengers at the +pier. As Archie and Bill had but little baggage, they were almost the +first ones to leave the vessel, and were hurrying away to find a hotel +where they could remain overnight when Archie felt some one touch him on +the shoulder, and, turning about and seeing no one he knew, was about +to go on, when a man introduced himself as being the San Francisco +correspondent of the Enterprise. "And these gentlemen here," said he, +"are reporters from the newspapers here. They would be glad to have +you say a few words about your experiences during the last few months." +Archie was quite dumbfounded. It had never occurred to him that he was a +person so important as to be interviewed, but he was willing and glad to +accommodate the reporters, and told them to accompany him to his hotel. +Once there, he answered all their questions, and didn't find it hard at +all to give them his opinion of the situation in the Philippines, and +what he thought should be done by the government to stop the rebellion. +"The President will soon put an end to it," he said, "if he can only +have the support of Congress. But as long as there are members of +Congress fighting his policy, the insurgents are going to continue their +insane efforts to establish an independent government." And some of the +reporters smiled to hear so young a fellow talking about the policy in +the Philippines. They felt that he was well-informed, however, and put +down every word he said. + +The interviews over, Archie and Bill went early to bed. The Enterprise +correspondent had telegraphed the news of their arrival to New York, and +had received word from Mr. Van Bunting to send them on to New York at +once. So, early in the morning, the two started for the East, and the +train seemed to travel quite as slowly as the steamer. "It does seem +good to be in our own country again," they said a hundred times during +the days that followed, and when they reached the Empire State and began +their journey down the Hudson River, Archie could hardly restrain his +enthusiasm at being again in his native commonwealth. + +There was quite a delegation at the Grand Central Station to meet them. +Mr. Jennings was there in person, and he explained that Mr. Van +Bunting was waiting anxiously at the office to see him. Then there were +reporters from the various other city papers, who wanted interviews, +but Archie was told to say whatever he had to say in the columns of the +Enterprise, so he had to deny the reporters for the first time. Bill +Hickson was introduced at once, and became the lion of the hour. Every +one had read of him, and was glad to shake his hand, and poor Bill was +quite bewildered by so much attention. They didn't linger long at the +station, however, but hurried down to the Enterprise office, where Mr. +Van Bunting was awaiting them. He grasped Archie's hand in his as they +entered, and cried, "Well done, my boy, well done." And Archie felt as +if he had grown three feet that instant. + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + DOING "SPECIAL" WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER--INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS + MEN--CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS. + +THERE was so much to tell Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting, that Archie +didn't get away from the Enterprise office until seven o'clock in the +evening. And what a lot they did say to each other during the afternoon! +Archie told of all his experiences, and found them all anxious to hear +about them. He learned, to his joy, that everything he had sent had been +printed, and that the articles had made a great hit with the public. "We +would have liked to keep you there longer, but we knew you must be worn +out, and then we want you to stay right here, now, and see if you +cannot get us some good interviews and articles of various kinds for the +Evening Enterprise. The paper has been losing ground somewhat, of late, +and we need some new life for its pages. Of course the morning paper +profited greatly by your articles, but the evening edition seemed very +weak in comparison, and we think it only fair to Mr. Jennings to let +him have you on his staff for awhile now. So if you are willing, you can +start in to-morrow as a member of the staff. We will see that you are +well paid for what you write, or we will put you on salary, whichever +you like. You can think it over, and in the morning you can tell us +which plan you like best." + +Archie wanted to ask for a few days' absence to return home, but he +felt, somehow, that he ought not to ask it just now. So he contented +himself with writing a long letter to his mother, in which he enclosed a +very large check, money which he had not used on his return to New York. +He told her that he would be home just as soon as he could get off for +any length of time, and he knew that she would now be looking forward to +the visit every day. She had written him about the enthusiasm displayed +by every one over his achievements, and how proud she was of what he +had accomplished. "I think I am the proudest mother in the country," she +wrote one day, and this sentence made Archie very happy, of course, and +more anxious than ever to return home. He received a letter, too, from +Jack Sullivan, telling him how much the boys all thought of his success, +and how every member of the Hut Club had longed time and again to be +with him. "It all reads just like some book," Jack wrote, "and we are +dying to have you come home and tell us all about it." Then his mother +sent him clippings from the town papers, eulogising his efforts, and +calling him the "coming man of the State." All this was very pleasant +and very encouraging, and Archie couldn't help having a kindly feeling +for the townsfolk who thought so much of him. + +New York was as delightful as ever. It was now the last of April, and +the trees were all green with fresh leaves, and the numerous little +parks scattered over the city were looking their very best. The asphalt +pavements looked clean and elegant when Archie thought of some other +streets he had seen, and the tall office buildings lifted their ornate +domes and cupolas into a sky of clear blue. "Surely," he thought to +himself, "this is the most charming city in all the world." Fifth +Avenue, with its crowds of fashionable folk, and its throng of vehicles, +was a delight of which he never tired, and when he went into the +Bowery, just to see how things were looking now, he found it quite as +interesting and as dirty as in the fall. + +But the first place he visited was the dear little square away +down-town, where he had lived during those few happy days spent in New +York. It, too, looked the same, only the flowers and grass were fresher +now, and the fountain seemed to flow more joyously, now that spring was +here. The house where he had lodged was as clean as ever, and Archie +at once decided to engage a room here, where he could have his New York +home. So he called upon the motherly landlady, and was glad to learn +that the room he had first was still vacant, and that he could take +possession at once. + +As before, when he came to this house, Archie was almost out of +clothing, so he went out and fitted himself with everything he needed. +And this time he felt able to buy the best to be had, for he thought he +had now earned the privilege to dress well if he liked. And then, when +he had everything he needed to wear, he went out and bought many pretty +things for his room, for he felt that he would like to have it just as +cosy and home-like as possible. He wasn't able to do much at it this +first night, but in the succeeding days he furnished the place in a +charming way, so that the landlady said it was the "handsomest room in +the house, sir." The dear old lady could hardly understand this great +change in her lodger's circumstances. She worried about it very often, +and discussed the question with many of the neighbours. "He come here +last fall looking mighty poor-like, but, lawsy me, he's as fine now as +any man on the avenue." And she never did understand it until one day +she learned that her lodger was the "very young man who had been to the +war in the Philippines, and writ about his battles in the Enterprise." + +There was no ceremony when Archie began work on the evening paper. Mr. +Jennings told him that he thought they understood each other pretty +well, and that he could use his own discretion, very often, about +getting articles. "You can be as independent as you like, Archie," he +said, "and use your own ideas as much as you like." This pleased the boy +very much indeed. He was beginning to feel now that he had really won +his spurs, and that he was a full-fledged journalist. It seemed scarcely +possible that it had taken him little more than six months to make +this great advance in circumstances, and yet he could see himself a few +months previous, sleeping in the station-house. Now his days of poverty +were surely over, and he would have a clear path ahead of him to +accomplish his great ambition to be a successful author and writer of +books. For the present, it was good experience for him to be working +upon the Enterprise, and he felt that he ought to be very much +contented, since there were men old enough to be his father who were not +earning as much money. + +He liked the work upon the evening paper very much. He didn't have to +get down early in the morning, and at three o'clock in the afternoon +he was always through. He was very glad indeed that there was no night +work, for he now spent his evenings in studying shorthand, which he +thought might be helpful to him in many ways. He didn't have much +routine work to do upon the paper in the beginning, but he told Mr. +Jennings that he would like to get as much experience as possible, so +the good editor gave him a lot of regular reporting to do, as well as +the special work which was daily featured in the paper. This special +work consisted of interviews with various successful men. Archie had +always felt a great admiration for men who had "done something," and +as New York was simply filled with wealthy and successful men, who had +started as poor boys, he found a wide field for work. He found it very +interesting to meet these men of affairs, and have them tell him of +their early struggles, how they had begun on the farm or in the factory, +and had worked themselves up through industry and perseverance to the +high places they now occupied. He found it very easy to get access +to most of them, for they had all read of his experiences in the +Enterprise, and Archie found that his fame as the "Boy Reporter" was +quite general and widespread. Some of the great men were quite as much +determined to interview him as he was anxious to interview them, so +that he usually got along very well by telling them first of his own +experiences, and then asking them about their own boyhood days. It +was work that never became monotonous, for each day he saw a man quite +different in most respects from the man he had interviewed the day +before, and of course every one had something different to say. + +These interviews proved very successful when published in the Evening +Enterprise, and Mr. Jennings had him continue them during all the weeks +Archie was connected with the paper. And of course he did other things, +too, work which took him into every part of the great city, looking +up this event, or investigating this reported disappearance or murder. +Archie was quite successful in this line, too, and, as he was being paid +by the column, his weekly income was something larger than he had ever +dared to hope for in all his life. He was now enabled to study his +stenography at the best school, and to indulge himself in many things +which had been denied him before. He could, for instance, attend the +performances of grand opera, and hear the great musical artists of the +world. He was able, too, to read the best literature, and he gradually +learned to appreciate all the many good things in life. He was very glad +to find himself broadening in such a way, for he realised that he +would not always want to be a "Boy Reporter," and that he had better be +developing his mind in every possible way. + +He had not been back long in New York before he met all his old friends. +One of the first upon whom he called was the good policeman who had been +so very kind to him when he had no place to sleep. The large-hearted man +was as enthusiastic over his success as if he had been his own son, +and Archie felt that here was one true friend upon whom he could always +depend. The policeman never tired of telling about that first night when +he found Archie walking up and down Broadway, and he always spoke of him +to the other officers as "that boy of mine." So the boy, who was now a +full-fledged reporter, spent as much time with this friend as possible, +and many a time he sat at the station-house telling them all of his +adventures in the Orient. + +Another friend whom he met was the great railway president with whom he +had travelled to Chicago on his way to San Francisco. Archie had liked +this man from the very first, and he felt that in him he would +always find a friend, because he had shown such interest in his first +undertaking. And when he called upon him in his elegant office, he +received a very cordial greeting. + +"No, indeed," said the great man of affairs, "I have never forgotten our +trip West together, and I have followed you with much interest through +the columns of the Enterprise. And I am glad that you are back again in +New York, for I hope to see a great deal of you. You must come up to my +house some evening and tell us all about yourself." + +Archie was naturally much surprised to receive an invitation of this +kind, but he resolved to accept it, nevertheless. + +Bill Hickson was now employed in the Brooklyn navy yard. He had been +featured for several days in the Enterprise, and had enjoyed the +excitement of New York for awhile, but he decided he would like to be at +work. So one day Archie learned that he was working at the navy yard. + +"I've got to be with Uncle Sam," was all the reason Bill would give for +his action. + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE--STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL--LIVING + AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS. + +IT was now September. Archie had been in New York the whole summer +through, attending carefully to his work on the Evening Enterprise, and +continuing his study of stenography. He had taken occasional trips to +Long Branch and Asbury Park on Saturday afternoons, but every other day +he spent in working up ideas for the paper, and each evening he devoted +to the shorthand school. By this time, though, he felt that he knew all +that was necessary of shorthand, and found himself more free to go about +in the evenings. He visited his friends more frequently, and sometimes +spent whole evenings in studying works on English literature, for he was +ambitious to know more of the great work he had decided to make his own. +This study was not really work to him, for his interest in everything +connected with literature was so great that he found a pleasure in +reading even the most classical books on the subject, and of course so +much reading of this sort did a great deal to educate his mind along +this line of work. + +One evening in the early fall, Archie decided to accept the invitation +of Mr. Depaw, the railway president, to call. So he carefully dressed +himself in the best he had, and walked up Fifth Avenue and into the side +street where the great man had his home. He rang the bell and presented +his card, and waited in the drawing-room for an answer. The footman was +gone but a moment, and returning, announced that the family would be +down directly. Archie was very much pleased that he was to meet the +entire family, and looked about him with great interest at the elegant +furnishings of the room in which he sat. He couldn't help thinking how +lovely it must be to have so many books, so many pictures, and so many +works of art of every kind. The boy thought then that he would like to +be a wealthy man, just to be able to gratify his desires for beautiful +things. + +He had to wait only a short time before the genial Mr. Depaw entered the +room, accompanied by several members of the family. Archie was greeted +very warmly, and introduced to every one, and then they immediately +began an animated conversation, in which Archie soon found himself +taking an active part, much to his surprise. He felt that he had +never before realised what a great gift it is to be able to talk +entertainingly, and this evening was a revelation to him in the ways of +good society. He found that every one was much interested in the story +of his adventures, and he talked more about them than for a long time +past. He was now beginning to feel that his Philippine experiences were +an old story, but he learned that they were quite as entertaining as +ever to these people. But they did not talk entirely about Archie. They +realised that this would be embarrassing to him, and they were careful +to guide the conversation into a discussion of music and literature, and +whatever else they imagined him to like. And so it was that the evening +passed very quickly, and it was time to leave before he knew it. Then he +was asked to be sure to call again, and Mr. Depaw, as he accompanied +him to the door, requested him to call at his office on the following +Wednesday, if possible. Archie promised, and walked home down the +avenue, wondering what it could be that Mr. Depaw wanted to talk to him +about. He didn't worry long about it, however, but went home and to +bed as quickly as possible, for he had formed a habit of rising at six +o'clock in the morning to study. + +The days passed quickly until Wednesday, and the afternoon of that day +found Archie in the waiting-room of Mr. Depaw's office. He had not long +to sit there after sending in his card, for the busy man received him as +soon as he could get rid of his present visitor. He shook Archie warmly +by the hand as he entered, and then, pulling two chairs together, they +sat down. "I have been thinking for some time," said Mr. Depaw, "that +I need a sort of private secretary. Of course I have men here at the +office who take dictation from me, and who fulfil the duties of a +secretary to a certain extent, but I want a young man who can attend +somewhat to my personal affairs; I want one whom I can trust, and one +who is likely to grow as he works along, so that eventually he may +be able to fill any place I may have open for him." Then he stopped a +moment, and Archie felt his heart beating very fast beneath his coat. He +waited almost breathlessly to hear what Mr. Depaw would say next. + +"Ever since I met you first," he at last went on, "I have somehow +thought that you are the kind of a young fellow I would like. You are +ambitious, you are persevering, and you are willing to learn. You say, +too, that you know shorthand, and I know that you are a good penman. You +have seen quite a little of the world, I am sure, and I think you +can prove yourself equal to almost any occasion. The only question is +whether you will care to give up reporting for a position of this kind. +I can assure you that I will pay you as much as you are earning now, and +I shall be glad to offer you a home at my house, because I shall want +you at my right hand all the time. Do you think you will care to take +the place?" + +Archie could hardly speak, it was all so wonderful, but finally he +recovered himself sufficiently to explain his hesitancy in accepting +the position. "I would like just one day," he said, "to consult with my +friends on the newspaper. You see Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting have +been very good to me, and I shouldn't care to leave them now if they +object very strongly." + +"That's quite right, quite right," said Mr. Depaw. "I can appreciate +your feelings, and you can tell the editor that you will have some time +for writing, and that you will contribute occasional articles to his +paper." Archie was now delighted. "Oh, thank you," he cried. "I am sure +I can come now." + +"Well, come in at this time to-morrow," said Mr. Depaw, "and let me know +what you have decided to do." + +Archie hurried at once to Mr. Jennings's office to tell him the good +news. He wondered how his friend would take it, but all his fears +were soon put at rest. "Archie," said Mr. Jennings, "this is the best +opportunity you can ever have to improve yourself in every way. Mr. +Depaw is a man highly respected all over the country, and a man who is +known to be extraordinary in many ways. Association with such a man will +do more for you than four years in college, and you will make a mistake +if you do not accept his offer. Of course we shall all be sorry to lose +you here, but, as Mr. Depaw says, you will have some time for writing, +and we hope you will always continue to do some work for us." + +Archie could almost have thrown his arms about Mr. Jennings's neck to +hug him for his splendid feeling, and when, a little later, Mr. Van +Bunting said practically the same thing, he felt that he had never known +two such men. He assured them both that he would never forget them, but +would try and spend as much time as possible in the Enterprise office. + +The next day he called again on Mr. Depaw, and told him of his decision +to accept the place, and the good man seemed overjoyed. "I will see that +you never forget it, Archie," he said. It was arranged for him to begin +work the very next day. "You can transfer your things to my house as +soon as you like, for your room is waiting for you, and I will begin +to-morrow to teach you how to do things." + +And now Archie found it hard to leave the dear little room in the quaint +old square, which was looking now just as when he saw it first. The +leaves in the trees were turning brown and gold, and Archie realised +that he had been away from home more than a year. "Oh, I must go back +soon," he said to himself, "or I shall simply die of homesickness." + +In a couple of days he was installed as a member of the Depaw household, +and he soon felt at home there. Every one was very kind to him, he was +given a handsome room, and everything seemed almost perfect. One of the +best things about it all was that he had access to the fine library, +and he longed for the long winter evenings when he could devour the many +interesting books he saw there. He was soon initiated into his work, and +it was much easier than he had expected. Mr. Depaw, of course, started +him very gradually, so that he learned as he went along. Every morning +at eight o'clock he was in the library with Mr. Depaw, taking dictation, +and receiving instructions for the day. They remained together here +until ten o'clock, when Mr. Depaw either walked or drove to his office. +Archie always accompanied him, and took charge of some of the mail +there, attending to it during the morning. Then at noon he returned to +the house, where he spent the afternoon in writing the letters which had +been dictated in the morning, and in doing various things for Mr. Depaw. +The evenings he always had to himself, and he had no difficulty in +finding enough to do at home without going out. He almost invariably +passed the evenings in reading, but occasionally he was asked to +accompany the family to some musical event at the opera house, for they +had soon learned of his love for music. + +In work and study the winter passed quickly and happily for Archie, who +now felt quite at ease amid his elegant surroundings. His only wish was +that he might go home, and as spring approached Mr. Depaw promised him +that he should have a short vacation. The suggestion of Mr. Depaw that +Archie's mother come to New York for a week was heartily accepted by +Archie, but when he wrote home Mrs. Dunn replied that she would rather +wait for Archie at home. She had never visited New York, and felt that +she wouldn't like it. + +Bill Hickson came over very often from the navy yard, and was always a +welcome visitor at Mr. Depaw's office. He didn't seem to care for his +work in Brooklyn, however, and Archie finally requested a place for him +about the elegant new station which the road had just constructed in the +city. Mr. Depaw very readily gave him an excellent position, one which +he could keep always if he so desired. And Bill was highly pleased +with his new work, so much so that he surprised them all one day in the +spring by leading into the once a young lady whom he introduced as his +wife. Of course Archie was very much pleased at this new development, +for he had often thought that his friend must be very lonely, living in +a boarding-house. + +The days were all busy ones for Archie now. He had learned the work +so thoroughly that he was given more than ever to do, and he still +continued to write, too, for the Enterprise. He worked too hard, +however, and in April he looked so thin that Mr. Depaw sent him home for +a week's rest. + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + DECIDES TO VISIT HOME--A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN--A PUBLIC + CHARACTER NOW--DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB--DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL-- + A TELEGRAM FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE. + +IT was a beautiful April day. There had been a light shower in the +morning, and now everything looked as fresh and green as possible all +along the railway. Archie lay back in his comfortable Wagner seat, +admiring the beauties of spring, and thinking, too, of the days he spent +in walking along this very road. It seemed hard to believe that he +was now secretary to the president of this railroad, and that he was +returning home, after a year and a half, a very successful young man. He +had much to think of in the hours it would take him to reach the little +town. He tried to remember everything about the place, and his mother as +he saw her last, and it wasn't at all difficult for him to do so. But, +oh, how he hoped that things had not changed! He almost dreaded going +home for fear he would find things different. + +He had changed, that much was sure. He knew that he had grown to +look much older than his years, and he knew that he was not looking +particularly strong. He used to be so sturdy, and he had such a splendid +colour in his cheeks. Mother would be sorry to see him now, but of +course he would be sure to improve very much during the week he was to +remain among old friends. + +He was very anxious to see his boy friends, the members of the Hut +Club, and the boys and girls who were in his class at school. He had +telegraphed his mother that he was coming, so she would probably tell +the boys about it. He was sure they would be there. + +Now the stations looked more familiar. This one just passed was near +the Tinch farm, and Archie remembered the days he spent working for old +Hiram, and how he had suffered. He wondered if the farmer had ever seen +any copies of the Enterprise. It would be very interesting to him to +know that his chore-boy was now a secretary to a millionaire. This next +station he remembered very well indeed, because he used to come here +every fall to visit the county fair, where he marvelled at the wonderful +things he saw in the side-shows. + +And now the train was entering the limits of his own town. Here was +the old elevator, and the machine shop near the railway track. And, oh, +there was his own home, looking green and pleasant as the train sped by. +It almost brought tears to Archie's eyes to think that he was so soon to +see his mother. Now they had reached the station, and he stood upon the +car platform ready to alight. My, what a crowd there was! and why did +they cheer as he made his appearance? All at once it dawned upon him +that all these people were here to meet him, and to bid him welcome +home. He could hardly speak as he found himself in his mother's arms, +and then he began to shake the hands of the big crowd. They were all +old friends, and then there was the mayor, and the superintendent of +schools, and quite a delegation of leading citizens. How nice it was of +them to welcome him in this way! + +After awhile the handshaking was over, and the mayor was able to get +a few minutes with Archie. "We are all very proud of what you have +accomplished," he said, "and we want to give you a public reception +to-morrow night in the town hall, if you don't object." Archie stared +blankly at the mayor, and it was several moments before he realised the +meaning of the words. Then he was almost overcome. It was almost too +good to be true, it seemed, but he warmly thanked the mayor, and told +him how he appreciated the honour which they had done him. He said that +he would be glad to attend the reception. + +The crowd was scattering now, and Archie, wild to reach home, took his +mother to a carriage, in which they drove rapidly out to the little +house among the trees and arbours. The old town looked beautiful in +every way. The great maple and oak trees along the road were green with +new leaves, and every dooryard was bright with snowballs and yellow +roses. "This is the very best time of the year," he said to his mother, +"and I am the very happiest boy in all the world." + +"And I am the happiest mother," was the answer. Then they sat in silence +until they reached the old home. They entered by the kitchen door, and, +once inside, and seated in the old cane rocking-chair, Archie bowed his +head in tears of joy at being home with mother once again. + +The hours which followed were sweet with joy. Mrs. Dunn busied herself +in preparing the supper, and Archie hung around the kitchen, telling +some of the many things he had planned to tell. Mrs. Dunn was smiling, +and Archie thought her the sweetest mother any boy could have. She was +changed somewhat, but she looked very young to-day. + +Supper over, Archie went over the fence to see the Sullivan boys, and +he found them looking much the same. He was truly glad to see them, and +they, of course, were glad to see him, too, though at first they were +just a little bashful, remembering, no doubt, all the things which had +happened to Archie since they saw him last. The boys were soon telling +all about the Hut Club, though, and Archie learned to his joy that it +was still a flourishing organisation. "We spoke of you every time we +were together," said Jack, "and we always wished you were back again." +Archie was delighted to hear that he had been missed, and all at once +an idea came to him which he put into execution three days later. He +determined to give an elegant dinner to this club of boys, and the very +next day he sent to New York for a caterer to arrange it. He wanted +it to be something finer than any of the boys had ever seen, and it +certainly turned out to be so. The caterer did his best, and when, three +days later, the Hut Club sat down together for the first time in more +than eighteen months, they partook of a dinner which would have done +credit to Mr. Depaw's table. It was a memorable night for them all, and +every boy enjoyed himself. + +Archie enjoyed this Hut Club dinner more than anything else while he +was at home, though of course the great event of his stay was the public +reception at the Town Hall on the second evening after his arrival. This +was a truly grand affair. The town authorities hired a brass band, which +played inside the hall and out, and there was such a crowd in attendance +that many were turned away from the doors. It was a night that Archie +will never be able to forget. He sat on the platform, in company with +the mayor and other town officials, and he listened to several speeches +congratulating him on what he had accomplished since leaving the town. +Then he had to get up and tell them all of his experiences, from the +time he left until now. He told it in a simple manner, but from the +close attention he received it was evident his audience was deeply +interested. When he had finished, there were calls for "three cheers for +Archie Dunn," and they were given with a will. Then Archie, rising +from his seat, called for "three cheers for the President of the United +States," and they, too, were given, for Archie had told them all his +feelings on the subject of the President's policy in the war. After this +there were three cheers for Mr. Depaw, whom one man said would be the +next United States Senator from the State. The meeting closed with some +cheers for the New York Enterprise, and then followed a long siege of +handshaking for Archie, who stood beside his mother on the floor in +front of the platform. It was a happy night for them both, and Mrs. Dunn +said afterward that she could never wish for anything more the rest of +her life. + +The fourth day of his visit was a Sunday, and, to Archie's joy, brave +Bill Hickson and his wife came up from the city to spend the day. What +a jolly time they had, all day long! They went to church in the morning, +where they saw all the people, it seemed, whom they hadn't seen before, +and in the afternoon there were many callers at the little house. The +evening was spent quietly by the happy four, talking of old times and +plans for the future. The town authorities were anxious to give Bill +Hickson a reception while he was in town, but the bashful hero declined +the honour, and returned with his wife to New York by the midnight +train. + +During the two succeeding days Archie talked a great deal with his +mother, and finally gained her consent to come to New York to live in +a year's time. Mrs. Dunn had never really understood that Archie had so +good a position, but now that she realised what a splendid beginning +he had made, she was very willing to come and keep house for him. This +question settled, everything seemed wholly delightful in the cosy home, +and Archie settled down to enjoy the two remaining days of his visit in +quiet rest. He had already much improved during his stay, and was sure +of going back to the city feeling much better than for a long time past, +and this made Mrs. Dunn very happy. + +But Archie didn't stay his week out at home. On the fifth night he +attended a reception in his honour at one of the neighbours' houses, and +he was just in the midst of a description of Tokio when a messenger boy +entered with a telegram for him. He opened it at once, and read it aloud +to the company: + +"Dear Archie," it said, "return as soon as possible. I sail for Europe +on Saturday's steamer to remain six months, and wish you to accompany +me." It was signed by Mr. Depaw, and there was great applause from the +crowd when he finished reading it. But Archie's face was a study. He +wasn't sure whether he wanted to go to Europe or not, but of course +there was no question about what he should do. He at once telegraphed +a reply, saying that he would reach the city to-morrow at noon, leaving +home on the early morning train. + +Of course the reception soon broke up, and Archie walked quietly home +with his mother, who was saddened at the prospect of losing him so soon +again. She soon brightened, however, and began to plan things for him to +do abroad, and soon she entered into the preparation for his departure +with all her heart. But Archie was not so soon made glad, and he didn't +rest until he made his mother promise to accompany him to the city on +the morrow to spend the two days previous to his departure in helping +him get ready. Mrs. Dunn wasn't anxious to make the trip, but for +Archie's sake she consented. + +And early the next morning they left for the city, where the time passed +rapidly until the hour of the steamer's sailing. At the pier they said +good-bye. Archie could hardly speak, but Mrs. Dunn was brave. "Archie," +she said, "God has been with you so far and he will keep you yet. And +remember that a boy with honest ambition will always get along. You +are sure to have friends about you always, for you have proved that +you possess energy, perseverance and a good heart." She said good-bye +without a tear, but as the steamer left the pier Archie saw, on looking +back, a sweet mother seated on a coil of rope, with her handkerchief to +her eyes. + + THE END. + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + +***** This file should be named 4990.txt or 4990.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/9/4990/ + +Produced by Jim Weiler + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/4990.zip b/4990.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4550077 --- /dev/null +++ b/4990.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..abe6197 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #4990 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/4990) diff --git a/old/4990-h.htm.2021-01-27 b/old/4990-h.htm.2021-01-27 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..258b0ab --- /dev/null +++ b/old/4990-h.htm.2021-01-27 @@ -0,0 +1,5643 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<!DOCTYPE html + PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd" > + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="en"> + <head> + <title> + The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by Harry Steele Morrison + </title> + <style type="text/css" xml:space="preserve"> + + body { margin:5%; background:#faebd0; text-align:justify} + P { text-indent: 1em; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: .25em; } + H1,H2,H3,H4,H5,H6 { text-align: center; margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 15%; } + hr { width: 50%; text-align: center;} + .foot { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; text-indent: -3em; font-size: 90%; } + blockquote {font-size: 97%; font-style: italic; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + .mynote {background-color: #DDE; color: #000; padding: .5em; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 95%;} + .toc { margin-left: 10%; margin-bottom: .75em;} + .toc2 { margin-left: 20%;} + div.fig { display:block; margin:0 auto; text-align:center; } + div.middle { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; } + .figleft {float: left; margin-left: 0%; margin-right: 1%;} + .figright {float: right; margin-right: 0%; margin-left: 1%;} + .pagenum {display:inline; font-size: 70%; font-style:normal; + margin: 0; padding: 0; position: absolute; right: 1%; + text-align: right;} + pre { font-style: italic; font-size: 90%; margin-left: 10%;} + +</style> + </head> + <body> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Adventures of a Boy Reporter + +Author: Harry Steele Morrison + +Release Date: March 23, 2009 [EBook #4990] +Last Updated: November 16, 2016 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + + + + +Produced by Jim Weiler, and David Widger + + + + + + +</pre> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <h1> + THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER + </h1> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <h2> + by Harry Steele Morrison + </h2> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <h3> + 1900 + </h3> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <blockquote> + <p class="toc"> + <big><b>CONTENTS</b></big> + </p> + <p> + <br /> <a href="#link2H_TOC"> (DETAILED)CONTENTS. </a><br /><br /> <a + href="#link2H_4_0001"> <b>THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER.</b> </a><br /><br /><br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0001"> CHAPTER I. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0002"> CHAPTER II. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0003"> CHAPTER III. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0004"> CHAPTER IV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0005"> CHAPTER V. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0006"> CHAPTER VI. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0007"> CHAPTER VII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0008"> CHAPTER VIII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0009"> CHAPTER IX. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0010"> CHAPTER X. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0011"> CHAPTER XI. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0012"> CHAPTER XII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0013"> CHAPTER XIII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0014"> CHAPTER XIV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0015"> CHAPTER XV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0016"> CHAPTER XVI. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0017"> CHAPTER XVII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0018"> CHAPTER XVIII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0019"> CHAPTER XIX. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0020"> CHAPTER XX. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0021"> CHAPTER XXI. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0022"> CHAPTER XXII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0023"> CHAPTER XXIII. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0024"> CHAPTER XXIV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0025"> CHAPTER XXV. </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0026"> CHAPTER XXVI. </a> + </p> + </blockquote> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> <br /> <a name="link2H_TOC" id="link2H_TOC"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <h2> + (DETAILED) CONTENTS. + </h2> + <blockquote> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0001"> CHAPTER I. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER I. <br /> LIVING IN THE COUNTRY—LIFE AT SCHOOL—THE + HUT CLUB IS FORMED—THE <br /> COMING OF THE CIRCUS <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0002"> CHAPTER II. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER II. <br /> ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS—A TRIP + TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE <br /> HENRY <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0003"> CHAPTER III. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER III. <br /> ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK—LEAVING + HOME AT NIGHT <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0004"> CHAPTER IV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER IV. <br /> WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY—CRUEL + TREATMENT <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0005"> CHAPTER V. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER V. <br /> THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS—THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE + TRAMPS <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0006"> CHAPTER VI. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER VI. <br /> STEALING A RIDE—KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0007"> CHAPTER VII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER VII. <br /> ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK—A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE + <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0008"> CHAPTER VIII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER VIII. <br /> LOOKING FOR WORK—WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY + RESTAURANT <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0009"> CHAPTER IX. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER IX. <br /> IN THE STREET AGAIN—THE POLICE STATION—VISITS + THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, <br /> AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0010"> CHAPTER X. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER X. <br /> LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN—FEATURED AS “THE BOY + REPORTER” <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0011"> CHAPTER XI. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XI. <br /> A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND—RAIDING A + GAMBLING DEN <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0012"> CHAPTER XII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XII. <br /> A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER—THE EDITOR DECIDES TO + SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT <br /> TO THE PHILIPPINES—LEAVING NEW + YORK—IN CHICAGO <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0013"> CHAPTER XIII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XIII. <br /> SAN FRANCISCO—THE TRANSPORT GONE—WORKING + HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY <br /> PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER—THE + CAPITAL OF HAWAII <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0014"> CHAPTER XIV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XIV. <br /> THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT—A STORM AT SEA—ARRIVAL + IN MANILA <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0015"> CHAPTER XV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XV. <br /> ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR, AND HAS SOME + STRANGE ADVENTURES <br /> AMONG THE NATIVES—SEIZED BY THE REBELS + <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0016"> CHAPTER XVI. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XVI. <br /> A PLEASANT CAPTOR—BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS + ARCHIE TO ESCAPE—FIRST <br /> GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0017"> CHAPTER XVII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XVII. <br /> ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS—ARCHIE THE HERO + OF THE REGIMENT <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0018"> CHAPTER XVIII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XVIII. <br /> THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS—THE FIRST BATTLE—ARCHIE + WOUNDED <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0019"> CHAPTER XIX. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XIX. <br /> RETURN TO MANILA—IN THE HOSPITAL—CONGRATULATED + BY ALL—WRITING TO THE <br /> PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0020"> CHAPTER XX. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XX. <br /> AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP—BOMBARDING A + FILIPINO TOWN <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0021"> CHAPTER XXI. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXI. <br /> CONTINUING THE CRUISE—ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED—THE + ADMIRAL ARCHIE’S <br /> FRIEND—A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED + VICTORY—LONGING TO BE HOME <br /> AGAIN <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0022"> CHAPTER XXII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXII. <br /> RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS—A LETTER FROM THE + EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO <br /> RETURN TO NEW YORK—BILL HICKSON + GOES, TOO <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0023"> CHAPTER XXIII. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXIII. <br /> HONG KONG—A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO—HONOLULU + AGAIN—ARRIVAL IN SAN <br /> FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE + PRESS—ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN <br /> NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES + OF THE HOUR <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0024"> CHAPTER XXIV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXIV. <br /> DOING “SPECIAL” WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER—INTERVIEWS + WITH FAMOUS <br /> MEN—CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0025"> CHAPTER XXV. </a> + </p> + <p> + CHAPTER XXV. <br /> PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE—STUDYING AT + EVENING SCHOOL—LIVING <br /> AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS <br /> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0026"> CHAPTER XXVI. </a> + </p> + <p> + DECIDES TO VISIT HOME—A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN—A PUBLIC + CHARACTER <br /> NOW—DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB—DEMONSTRATION AT + THE TOWN HALL—A TELEGRAM <br /> FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR + EUROPE <br /> + </p> + </blockquote> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> <br /> <a name="link2H_4_0001" id="link2H_4_0001"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h1> + THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER. + </h1> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0001" id="link2HCH0001"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER I. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + LIVING IN THE COUNTRY—LIFE AT SCHOOL—THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED—THE + COMING OF THE CIRCUS. +</pre> + <p> + “YES,” said Mrs. Dunn to her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan, “we are expecting + great things of Archie, and yet we sometimes hardly know what to think of + the boy. He has the most remarkable ideas of things, and there seems to be + absolutely no limit to his ambition. He has long since determined that he + will some day be President, and he expects to enter politics the day he is + twenty-one.” + </p> + <p> + “Is that so, indeed,” said Mrs. Sullivan. “Well, we can never tell what is + going to come of our boys. As I says to Dannie to-day, says I, ‘Dannie, + you must do your best to be somebody and make something of yourself, for + you and Jack bees all that I has to depend upon now.’ But Dannie pays no + attention to my entreaties, and somehow it seems to me that since Mr. + Sullivan died the boys are gettin’ worse and worse. It’s beyond me to + control them, anyhow.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, take heart, Mrs. Sullivan,” said Mrs. Dunn, “our boys will all turn + out well in the end, and all we can do is to bring them up in the best way + we know, and trust to them to take care of themselves after they leave + home. Now Dannie is certainly an industrious lad. I hear him pounding + nails all day long in the back yard, and he made a good job of shingling + the woodshed the other day. He seems made to be a carpenter.” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, I think so myself,” said the Widow Sullivan. “The whole lot of them + is out by the railroad now, building a hut. They’ve organised a ‘Hut Club’ + to-day, and never a lick of work have I had out of them boys since + mornin’. They’ve always got something going on, and when I want a bit of + water from the well, or a little wood from the shed, they’re never + around.” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, but boys will be boys, Mrs. Sullivan, and we’d better keep them + contented at home as long as we can. They’ll be leaving us soon enough. It + seems that no boys are content to stay in town any longer; they’re all + anxious to be off to the city.” + </p> + <p> + “That’s true, that’s true, Mrs. Dunn,” said Mrs. Sullivan. “I must be + going now. I’m much obliged for the rain-water, and whenever you want a + bit of milk call over the fence, and I’ll bring it to you with pleasure. + It’s a good neighbour you are, Mrs. Dunn.” + </p> + <p> + And Mrs. Sullivan went slowly around the house and out at the front gate, + while good Mrs. Dunn returned to her ironing, a few clothes having to be + ready for Sunday. + </p> + <p> + While these mothers were discussing their boys, the youngsters themselves + were busy behind the barn, building a hut down near the railway track. + There were six of them altogether, the three extra ones, besides Archie + Dunn and the Sullivan boys, having come from across the railway to play + for the day. Two hours before they had solemnly organised themselves into + the “Hut Club,” each boy walking three times around the block blindfolded, + and swearing upon his return to be true to all the rules and regulations + of the organisation, which had been written with chalk on the side of the + barn. The regulations were numerous, but the most important one was that + no East Side boys were to be allowed within the club-room when it was + built, and that the club’s policy should be one of warfare against the + East Siders on every occasion when they met. This fight against the East + Side was, indeed, responsible for the organisation of the club. It was + felt necessary to have some head to their forces, and some means of + holding together. So the club was organised, and now the next thing on the + programme was the erection of a hut to serve as a club-house. Archie Dunn, + who had been elected president, volunteered to get three boards and a + hammer if the other boys would each get two boards and some nails. This + proposition was agreed to, and when the boys returned from their foraging + expeditions it was found that there were more than enough boards to build + the hut, so the work began at once. Holes were dug in the ground, and some + posts planted as supports for the structure, and then the boards were + hastily nailed together from post to post. In three hours the hut was + practically completed, and it remained only to lay a floor until they + could hold their first meeting in the new club-house. The floor itself was + down by noon, and the club then served a memorable dinner to mark the + completion of the structure. + </p> + <p> + A hole was dug in the ground outside the door, and a furnace made. A + skillet was brought from Archie’s house, together with some dishes and a + coffee-pot, and Dan Sullivan brought some more dishes, and six eggs from + his nests under the barn. The boys were obliged to make several trips to + and from the houses, but finally nearly everything was ready, and the eggs + were carefully cooked by Archie, who was really a good housekeeper, from + long experience in the kitchen with his mother. Some potatoes were fried + in the grease remaining in the skillet after the eggs were cooked, and + then the feast began. The eggs may have been rather black with grease, and + the potatoes were certainly not done, but the boys all pronounced it the + finest meal of their lives, notwithstanding the bitter coffee, and the + dirty bread, which had been allowed to fall into the gutter beside the + railway track. They were eating in their own house, and they had cooked in + the open air, “just like tramps,” Harry Rafe said, and it was little + wonder that they enjoyed the novel experience. + </p> + <p> + The only trouble came when the meal was finished. No one wanted to wash + the dishes, and, finally, it was decided to return them to their + respective kitchens just as they were, and to let them be washed with the + rest of the dinner dishes at home. And this decision came near putting an + end to Hut Club dinners, for both Mrs. Dunn and the Widow Sullivan were + determined not to wash any more dirty dishes from the hut. + </p> + <p> + When the meal was over, the boys lounged about the hut, and Dan Sullivan + brought a lot of things from his sister’s playhouse with which to furnish + it more suitably. Archie Dunn brought a lot of hay from the loft in his + mother’s barn, and when a piece of old carpet was spread upon it it made + an acceptable couch. A piece of old carpet was laid in front of the hut, + too, where the boys could sit and watch the trains switching back and + forth on the railway, and the tramps who were heating coffee in cans over + by the cattle-pen. + </p> + <p> + Finally, some cattle arrived in the pen to be loaded into cars for the + city, and the boys had just decided to go and watch the men loading them, + when an engine came up the side-track with the most beautiful car they had + ever seen, behind it. The car was painted in all colours of the rainbow, + and in giant letters was printed the magic name of “The World’s Greatest + Show.” + </p> + <p> + The boys lost no time in getting down from the cattle-pen fence, and the + car had barely stopped when they were aboard. “Hooray,” shouted Charlie + Huffman, “we’ll all get jobs of passin’ bills.” And it was with this end + in view that they sought the advertising manager in the car, who promised + to give them all jobs when the circus came in two weeks. The boys deluged + him with questions of every sort. “Will there be any elephants?” “Is there + goin’ to be a parade?” and “Will there be any trapeze performances?” The + poor man was finally obliged to lock the door to keep them out, and the + boys stood about the car until nearly six o’clock, admiring the paintings, + and speculating as to whether they would be able to work their way into + the circus or not, when it finally came. Their speculations were + interrupted by the appearance on the scene of the Widow Sullivan with a + good-sized maple switch, which she used to good effect in getting the two + Sullivans and Archie Dunn home for supper. For Mrs. Dunn had given Mrs. + Sullivan instructions before she started, so that when Archie complained + that he had been whipped by “that woman next door,” he received no + sympathy whatever. + </p> + <p> + And when he went to bed at nine o’clock, he could hardly sleep for + thinking of the wonderful things which had happened this day. The coming + circus and the great Hut Club kept him awake until far after ten, so that + he got up too late for Sunday school the next morning, and was punished + accordingly. + </p> + <p> + The next week was a hard one at school, and the boys had but little time + to devote to the club. But after four o’clock in the afternoon they + sometimes got together and did various things which improved their + club-house. Some very fair chairs were constructed from empty soap boxes, + and various contrivances were put together to guard against the intrusion + of any East Siders or tramps while they were away at school. There was no + padlock used, and any one coming up to the hut would imagine it a simple + thing to enter—until he tried. But the boys had fixed a secret cord + which, when pulled, shifted the bar inside, and every boy was sworn not to + betray the existence of the cord. + </p> + <p> + The day set for the circus came nearer and nearer, and the boys began to + be anxious for fear the schools would not close, so that they could + attend. But the superintendent finally announced that they would; so early + on the eventful day the entire club was on the grounds, waiting to get + some work to do. Archie Dunn got the first job, being selected to carry + water for the elephant because he was stronger than any of the others. But + the rest were given something to do, and when the day was over they had + all seen the circus, and went to bed happy, to dream of the great trip to + be taken by the Hut Club on the next Saturday. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0002" id="link2HCH0002"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER II. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS—A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE + HENRY. +</pre> + <p> + THE Hut Club went out on a picnic the next Saturday, and had a jolly time. + They camped upon an island in the middle of a shallow stream, and while + there made coffee and cooked their dinner, having brought most of the + necessary apparatus from the Hut. They fished a little, and hunted for + turtles in the water, and altogether had a good time, if nothing exciting + did occur. It was after nine o’clock at night when they reached town + again, footsore and weary, and Archie Dunn had hardly entered the house + before he was on the dining-room lounge, half-asleep. His mother seemed to + be out, and as he lay there he wondered how long it would be before she + came back. Archie truly loved his mother, but of late he had often thought + that he would like to leave home and go to the famous city, where he felt + sure he could get something to do. But he disliked the idea of leaving his + mother. + </p> + <p> + “I’m getting to be a big boy, now,” he often said to himself, “and it’s + time that I began to look out for myself. I’m nearly seventeen, and I + think I ought to be earning some money. This thing of belonging to Hut + Clubs and spending my time in going to picnics and to circuses ought to + stop. It’s all right for boys, but I’m getting to be a man, now.” + </p> + <p> + All these thoughts were flying through his mind when his mother came in. + “Oh, Archie,” she exclaimed, “I’ve been so worried about you. I’ve just + been over to Mrs. Sullivan’s to see if Dannie had come home, and whether + he had seen you. Wherever have you been?” + </p> + <p> + “We didn’t think it would take so long to walk home,” said Archie, jumping + up from the sofa, “but we were awfully tired, and we didn’t come very + fast. I’m so sorry you were worried. + </p> + <p> + “And I’m as hungry as a bear, mother. Can’t you find me something to eat?” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, dear,” said Mrs. Dunn, softly, “and when you’ve finished your supper + I have something for you. I won’t give it to you now for fear you won’t be + able to eat, but as soon as you have finished your meal, you shall have + it.” + </p> + <p> + So Archie was obliged to eat his baked beans and brown bread and drink his + milk without knowing what was in store for him, and he hurried as fast as + he could, so that he could learn. When he had finished he went into the + sitting-room, and found his mother sitting with a letter spread open upon + her lap. “Uncle Henry has written me asking if you cannot go with him to + New York on Monday, for a couple of days. He is obliged to go down there + on business, and says he will be glad to take you along and show you + something of the wonderful city, for he knows you won’t be any trouble to + him. Now I hardly know what to say, Archie. If I can feel that you are + behaving yourself properly, and are doing your best to be as little + trouble as possible, I am willing that you shall go.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, mother,” cried Archie, “I’ll promise anything. Only let me go this + once, and I’ll promise to stay at home all the rest of the summer.” + </p> + <p> + “All right, then,” said Mrs. Dunn. “You shall go on the first train Monday + morning, and Uncle Henry will join you at Heddens Corner. Run along to bed + now.” + </p> + <p> + Archie went up-stairs almost dumb with delight Was it really true that he + was to see the great city at last? He had heard some of the boys at school + telling what their fathers saw there, but he had never even hoped that he + would see it for himself so soon. Of course he had determined to see it + all some day, but that was to be far in the future. The lad could hardly + sleep for the joy of it all, and when he did finally lose consciousness, + it was only to dream of streets of gold, and great buildings reaching to + the skies. + </p> + <p> + Sunday passed slowly by. At Sunday school, Archie told the boys that he + was going to New York on the morrow, and from that moment he was the hero + of the class. The boys looked at him with wondering admiration, and seemed + scarcely able to realise that one of their number was to go so far from + home. The city was in reality little more than a hundred miles, but to + their boyish minds this distance seemed wonderfully great. + </p> + <p> + Early on Monday morning Archie was at the depot waiting for the train. His + mother was there to see him off, and there were tears in her eyes at the + thought of parting with her only child, if only for a day or two. And + Archie was radiant with delight at the glorious prospect ahead of him. He + walked nervously up and down the platform, and wished frequently that it + were not so early in the morning, so that some of the boys might be there + to see him off. Finally, the great hissing locomotive drew up, with its + long train of coaches, and Archie was soon aboard, hurrying off to Heddens + Corner and the city. In a few minutes Uncle Henry was with him, a tall, + fine-looking man, with an air of business. Uncle Henry kept the general + store at the Corner, and was an important person in the neighbourhood. He + was of some importance in the city, too, for his name was known in + politics, and his custom was always desired at the wholesale stores. So + Archie was going to see the city under good auspices, if his uncle would + only have time to take him about with him. + </p> + <p> + After a couple of hours, during which Archie kept his face glued to the + window-pane, watching the flying landscape, the great train pulled through + a long, dark tunnel, and finally entered an immense shed, covered with + glass where it came to a final stop. Crowds left the coaches, and passed + out of the station, where they were swallowed up in the great rush of + traffic. Some drove away in cabs and carriages. Some entered the + street-cars, and some went up a stairway and entered what seemed to Archie + a railway train in the air. + </p> + <p> + Uncle Henry told Archie to follow him carefully, and they, too, were soon + flying away from the neighbourhood of the terminal, past hotels, stores, + and dwellings, until they finally left the trolley-car, and passed through + a cross street into a long, quiet thoroughfare which looked old enough to + have been there for a hundred years. The houses were built far back from + the street, with pillars in front, and into one of these quaint old + dwellings went Archie and his uncle. + </p> + <p> + “I always stop down-town,” explained Uncle Henry, “because I am near to + the great wholesale establishments. It is central to the retail stores, + too, and to many of the places of interest.” + </p> + <p> + When they were settled in their room, Uncle Henry explained that he would + have to be away most of this first day, but that to-morrow he would take + Archie out and show him the sights. So Archie expected to remain indoors + all day; but when his uncle had left the house he decided that he couldn’t + possibly remain in this close room when so many wonderful things were + taking place outside. So he decided to walk up and down the street, + anyhow, and when he went out he felt like a prisoner just escaped from a + cell. But the noise was terrible, and there were a great many wagons and + trucks passing through the street. The greatest crowd seemed to be on that + cross street about two blocks away, so Archie decided to go there, and see + if there was anything new on that street. + </p> + <p> + He saw many wonderful things. There were cars running along without any + apparent motive power, there were thousands and thousands of people in the + streets, and the stores looked so handsome and interesting that he simply + couldn’t resist going into one or two of them, just to see what they were + like. And when he had finished with one or two he could think of no reason + why he shouldn’t go on up the street, where he was sure he would find a + great many more interesting things to see. So on and on he went, until at + last he was tired and hungry, and then, for the first time, he was a + little frightened, because he thought of all he had read about people + losing their way in the city, and not being able to find their relatives + again. But he was a brave boy, so he determined to make an effort to find + his way back without appealing to a policeman. And after a time he was + successful, and entered the queer old house in the ancient street at just + three o’clock in the afternoon. His uncle was there waiting for him, and + was nearly beside himself with apprehension. + </p> + <p> + “I was about to send out a general alarm for you, at the police station,” + he said. “How did you happen to go away?” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, I was so very tired of staying in the house,” said Archie, “and I + felt sure that I could find my way back without getting lost at all. And + to-morrow I’m sure I can get along all right, Uncle Henry, so you needn’t + bother with me at all, unless you want to.” + </p> + <p> + And it so happened that Mr. Kirk was very busy the next day, and would + have found it quite impossible to show Archie about. So it was fortunate + that he was able to go everywhere alone, or he would have had to return + home without seeing anything at all of the city. + </p> + <p> + As it was, he went here, there, and everywhere, and saw a great deal of + the city, the people, and the way in which they lived. The entire place + had a strange fascination for him, and all the time he was thinking how + glad he would be to live where he could see all this rush of business, + this varied life, every day. And he fully determined to return some day + and get something to do, so that he might work himself up, and come to own + one of the handsome houses on the avenues, or drive one of the elegant + carriages on the boulevard. And he observed every boy who passed him, and + talked with several of them, trying to find out whether positions were + easy to secure, and whether they paid much when they were secured. + </p> + <p> + So when they took the four o’clock train for home, and arrived at Archie’s + house in time for supper, he told more about the city boys and their work + than about the tall buildings, the Brooklyn Bridge, or the Central Park. + He talked so much, in fact, about the delights of the city boy, and the + money he earned, that after he had gone to bed Mrs. Dunn took her brother + aside and talked with him concerning Archie’s future. And between them + they definitely decided that Archie must not go to the city to work. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0003" id="link2HCH0003"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER III. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK—LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE DUNN was not more ambitious than many other boys of his age, but he + possessed one quality which is not developed in every boy, determination. + Once Archie decided upon doing a thing, once he had made up his mind that + it was truly a good thing to do, nothing could keep him from putting his + plans into action, and making an effort, at least, to accomplish his ends. + Most boys of seventeen have not decided what they want to become when they + are men, and, until his visit to the city, Archie was equally at sea + concerning his future. He knew, of course, that he wanted to be rich and + famous, but when he tried to think up some suitable profession which would + bring him these possessions, he was never able to decide. + </p> + <p> + The two days in the city with Uncle Henry had opened to his boyish mind a + new world, and when he returned to the humble home surrounded by gardens, + he felt that he would never be satisfied to live and work in this small + town. There was now no question in his mind but what the city was the + place for any one who wished to become either rich or famous. It would + certainly be impossible for him to make a name for himself in this + village, while in the city he would have every opportunity for improving + himself, and advancing himself in every way. He wondered, indeed, that he + had never thought of going to New York before, and was disgusted with + himself when he thought of the time he had wasted here at home. + </p> + <p> + But there was no use in thinking of the past. The thing to do now was to + get to the city as quickly as possible, for to Archie every day seemed + precious, and each delay kept him further from the consummation of his + hopes. It never occurred to the boy that his mother might have objections + to his leaving home. She had always been very ambitious for his future, + and he supposed that she would be delighted at the idea of having her boy + in the great city, where he would have innumerable chances for improving + himself. So when they sat on the front porch, one evening, and he told her + of his plan, he was surprised to hear his mother pleading with him to + remain at home. “Archie,” she said, “I am almost sure you will come to + some bad end in the city. You really must not go, for my sake, if for no + other reason.” + </p> + <p> + “But, mother, I can’t remain here in town always. I must go out into the + world some time to earn a living and make a place for myself, and I think + the sooner I go the better, don’t you?” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, Archie, but you’re so young, and you’ve had no experience. You have + no idea of the things there are in great cities to drag young men down. I + don’t think I could stand it to have you so far away from home and in such + danger.” + </p> + <p> + “Well, mother,” said Archie, “there isn’t much use in arguing about it. I + have reached a point where I don’t think I can be any longer satisfied at + home. I have been here seventeen years, and I think I can remain here that + much longer without improving myself. In the city I am sure I can make + rapid progress, and in a year or two you can come there and live with me.” + </p> + <p> + Archie got up from the porch and went down the street, while poor Mrs. + Dunn ran over next door to see her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan. When she had + entered the disorderly kitchen, and seated herself on one of the home-made + chairs, the anxious mother burst into tears. “I don’t know what to think + of Archie, Mrs. Sullivan,” she said. “He is determined, now, to go to New + York, and I know that if he goes I will never be able to see him again. I + am nigh distracted with worrying over it. I have talked with him, but he + seems determined, and I know I can never hold out against his entreaties + and arguments.” + </p> + <p> + “Sure, now, Mrs. Dunn,” said the Widow Sullivan, “don’t yez be a worryin’ + about ‘im at all. That Archie is a smart boy, he is, and if he goes to New + York he’ll come out all right, never fear, I only wish my Dannie had as + much get-up about him as your boy.” + </p> + <p> + “Yes, yes, Archie is very ambitious for his age,” said Mrs. Dunn, “but I + sometimes wish he were less so. I know I could keep him at home longer if + he wasn’t so anxious to be at work. I don’t believe I can let him go, Mrs. + Sullivan, not yet. I want him to stay in school another year, and then + I’ll think about it.” + </p> + <p> + “Well, ye’re wise, Mrs. Dunn, ye’re a wise woman,” said the Widow + Sullivan. “Since yer husband died ye’ve been a good mother to the lad, and + have brought ‘im up well. And now, how is yer chickens, Mrs. Dunn? Have ye + got that cochin hen a ‘settin’’ yit?” + </p> + <p> + And the two women began to discuss their various fowls, and the + conversation was so interesting that Mrs. Dunn remained late, and found + Archie in bed when she went home. “Ah, well, poor boy, I’ll have to tell + him of my decision in the morning. He’ll be terribly disappointed, and I + hate to do it I’m afraid it’s selfishness that makes me want to keep him + with me. I almost wish he would take things into his own hands, and start + for the city himself. I would be rid then of the responsibility of sending + him, and the question would be settled for me. Boys sometimes know best + how to settle their own difficulties, anyhow.” + </p> + <p> + Mrs. Dunn kneaded the bread before retiring, for to-morrow was Saturday, + and, therefore, baking-day, and then she went into her little room off the + kitchen, and prayed earnestly for her boy before sleeping. She prayed that + she might be helped in advising him, and that he might always do what was + best for himself and for his mother. + </p> + <p> + The next day was Saturday, and in the morning the Hut Club met, as usual, + and prepared to have an open-air dinner for this day. The furnace, which + had been knocked down during the week by the East Siders, was rebuilt, and + the skillet and other utensils were brought from the nearest kitchens. + Archie went to the grocery around the corner and bought five cents’ worth + of cakes, and then the six boys sat down in a circle and prepared to + devour their home-made feast. But before they began Archie stood up. “I + want to say that this will probably be my farewell dinner with the club,” + he said, in a low tone, “and I hope that you will appoint another + president in my place.” + </p> + <p> + The boys were horror-struck, but Archie refused to explain where and when + he was going. Finally, they refused to appoint another president, all + agreeing that Archie should hold that office for ever, wherever he was. + And the meal was eaten in silence, for the announcement had thrown a sort + of chill over the proceedings. When they had finished, Archie silently + shook hands with each of the boys, who were dumb with amazement, gathered + up his skillet and coffee-pot, and went home through the gate to the + chicken-lot. + </p> + <p> + “I wonder what he’s goin’ to do,” they all said, as in one breath, and as + there was seldom much fun in the club when Archie was absent, they all + went home in a few minutes, or down-town to watch the farmers, who were in + town to do their weekly buying. + </p> + <p> + When Archie reached home he went up-stairs to his little room, and began + to lay out a few things which he wanted to take with him, for he had + determined to start for New York this very night. Then he tied the things + up in a small bundle, and sat down to write a note to his mother. When he + had finished it, he pinned it up at the head of his cot, and this is what + it said: + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + “MY DARLING MOTHER:—Please don’t worry about me, I’m bound to + come through all right, and if anything happens to me, I promise + that I will write to you immediately and let you know. I have the + ten dollars which I have saved, and if I don’t get work at once I + will write to you for some more. Now, I am not doing this thing for + the sake of adventure, but because I am sure it is the best thing + for me, and I don’t want you to worry at all. I shall write to you + often and let you know just what I’m doing, so don’t worry, but be + a brave mother. I’m not going off this way as a sneak, but because + I want to avoid a ‘scene.’ + + “Your loving + + “ARCHIE.” + </pre> + <p> + And at three o’clock the next morning Archie Dunn got out of bed, + shouldered his bundle, and started off for the great city, which seemed to + be drawing him like a magnet. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0004" id="link2HCH0004"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY—CRUEL TREATMENT. +</pre> + <p> + WHEN daylight came, Archie was far out of the town walking quickly along + the southern road. He figured that he had walked nearly six miles in the + two hours since he had let himself out of the back door at home, and, as + he looked ahead, he planned that he would walk at least thirty miles every + day. Of course, he had never done much walking before, or he would have + known better than to have expected to accomplish so much in twelve hours, + but he felt fresh and full of strength this morning, and nothing seemed + too hard to accomplish. As yet he had not regretted his departure from + home. The excitement of it all, and the adventurous side of his exploit, + had kept him interested, and made him feel that he was a real hero. But he + was not so foolish as to imagine that there would not be times when he + would regret having set out for New York. He was too old and too sensible + for his age to allow his ambition to run away with him entirely, and he + fully expected to meet with many great discouragements. “But I’m sure of + one thing,” he said to himself, as he walked along, “I never will return + home until I have something to show for the trip. I won’t have the club + boys and the neighbours saying that Archie Dunn had to come home + discouraged. If I return without accomplishing anything, I will be held up + to the whole town as a boy who made a fool of himself by not taking his + friends’ advice, and I never will be made an example of if I can help it.” + And Archie walked faster as he thought of the possibility of failure. + </p> + <p> + When seven o’clock came he was passing through the county-seat, but though + there were many interesting things to look at in the town, Archie + determined not to stop. He was afraid he might meet some one he knew, who + would be sure to ask him where he was going with his bundle, and what he + was doing out so early. And anyhow he was very hungry, and decided to get + out of the town and to the farmhouses as soon as possible. “I can work for + my meal at a farmhouse,” he said to himself, “but in the town they’ll take + me for a regular tramp.” + </p> + <p> + So poor Archie walked quickly through the town, still keeping to the + southern road, and saying to himself, as he passed every milestone, “So + much nearer New York.” About a mile out in the country he came to a large + farmhouse, and he determined to enter and ask for a meal. He had hard work + to muster up enough courage to go in and ask for anything, but finally he + knocked timidly at the kitchen door, and was frightened by a large dog + which came barking around the corner. It seemed to him that the animal + would surely bite, but a large fat woman opened the door just in time to + let him in. “Hurry in, boy,” she said, “fer there’s no tellin’ what Tige + might do ef he once gets a hold of ye.” So Archie stepped into the large + kitchen, with its rafters overhead, and its dining-table in the corner. + “Sit down, boy,” said the woman. “I reckon you’s thet new lad thet’s come + ter work over at Mullins’s, ain’t ye?” + </p> + <p> + “No’m,” said Archie, “I don’t work anywhere. I’m on my way to New York, + where I expect to find a position, and I thought perhaps you’d allow me to + do a little work here this morning to earn my breakfast.” + </p> + <p> + Good Mrs. Lane, for that was the woman’s name, was horrified to think that + any one was alive and without breakfast at eight o’clock in the morning. + “Goodness me!” said she. “Why, you must be half-famished fer want of food, + ain’t ye?” And she bustled about the kitchen, putting the kettle on to + boil, and stirring up the fire. “You’ll have some nice ham and eggs, my + boy, and then I have somethin’ in mind fer you. I reckon yer ain’t in no + hurry ter get ter the city, be ye? Well, even if ye do be in a hurry, I + reckon you’ll be glad of the chance to earn four dollars. I ain’t goin’ to + ask ye no questions about how ye come to be walkin’ to New York, because I + never wuz no hand ter meddle in other folkses affairs, but ye look to be a + likely lad, and a strong un, and ez my sister’s husband, what lives two + miles down the pike, needs a boy to drive a plough fer a week, I b’lieve + ye’ll suit ‘im first-rate. So ez soon ez ye have finished yer vittles, + I’ll walk down there with ye, and we’ll see the old man.” + </p> + <p> + Archie hardly knew whether to be delighted with the prospect or not. Of + course four dollars would be nice to have, but he was anxious to get to + the city as soon as possible, and every day counted. But perhaps it would + be wrong, he thought, to throw away such a good chance to earn some money, + and he had decided to accept any offer the farmer made him, long before he + finished his breakfast. When he got up from the straight-backed chair, he + felt that he had never eaten a better meal in his life, and when Mrs. Lane + started off down the road, he gladly followed her. A week on such a farm + as this would be no unpleasant experience. Such food was not to be had + every day, he knew, and he of course would have precious little that was + good to eat when he reached the city. + </p> + <p> + They soon covered the two miles, Mrs. Lane getting along very fast for + such a large woman, and at last they stood before Hiram Tinch, who owned + the farm. Archie was made to describe his intentions, and was thoroughly + examined by Mr. Tinch. He told the farmer that he knew nothing about farm + work, but Mr. Tinch said he would soon teach him, and it was settled that + Archie was to remain on the farm a week. Mrs. Lane went inside the house + to see her sister, who looked sick with too much work, and the farmer told + Archie that he might as well start in, as there was no object in waiting. + So the boy donned a pair of “blue jean” trousers, and was taken into a + field, where a one-horse plough was standing. Archie knew how to hitch a + horse, so he went to the stable and secured his steed, and then harnessed + him to the plough. The farmer didn’t see fit to give him any instructions + about ploughing, and the poor boy hardly knew what to do, but rather than + ask he started off, and tried to guide the animal in the right direction, + as far as he knew it. Of course the horse went wrong, and the plough + refused to stay in the earth, and altogether the attempt was a miserable + failure. The farmer leaned against the fence, picking his teeth with a + pin, but when he saw the horse going crooked, and the plough bounding + along over the earth, his face grew livid with anger. For a minute he + seemed unable to speak, but strode toward Archie with a fierce look in his + eyes. Then he found his tongue, and opened such a tirade of vile words + that the poor boy shrank from him in terror. He was in mortal fear lest + the man should lay hands on him and commit some crime, so intense was his + rage, but Hiram Tinch seemed to know how far to go, and after five minutes + of cursing and swearing he took the plough in his own hands, and guided it + through the earth. “Now take it,” he growled at Archie, when he had gone a + furrow’s length, “and see ef ye can do better this time. Remember, not a + bite of dinner do ye get until this field is ploughed.” + </p> + <p> + Poor Archie was weak from fright, but there was nothing to do but to obey. + He looked at the vast field before him, and made up his mind that he would + get nothing to eat until night, anyhow, for it was already nearly noon. He + felt very much like bursting into tears, but he was too proud to give way + to his feelings. But he couldn’t help wishing that he were at home, + playing with the members of the Hut Club. “Those boys are much better off + than I am,” he said, over and over, “though they have made no effort to + improve themselves.” After a time, however, his ambition returned, and as + he looked ahead into the future, and remembered the wonderful things he + was going to accomplish, he felt more like working. + </p> + <p> + He finished the field at five o’clock in the afternoon, and was almost + fainting from hunger and from the hard work. The ploughing was fairly well + done, but Hiram Tinch could see no merit in the work. He swore at Archie + again, and gave him a supper of mush and milk. Mrs. Tinch sat by, and + Archie could see that she did not approve of his treatment. The poor woman + seemed afraid to speak, almost, but it was plain that she had a good + heart. So when Archie heard a noise in his garret room that night, he was + not surprised to see Mrs. Tinch at the window, placing some doughnuts and + sandwiches there for him to eat. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0005" id="link2HCH0005"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER V. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS—THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS. +</pre> + <p> + IT seemed to Archie that he had just fallen asleep when old Hiram Tinch + was shaking him awake. “Git up out o’ here now, ye lazy beggar, and git to + the field and finish that there ploughin’,” he growled, and the frightened + lad awakened from a horrible nightmare, only to find a worse experience + awaiting him in the light of day. He hastily drew on his trousers, and + didn’t wait to don either shoes or stockings, for if he was to spend the + day ploughing in a field, he knew he would be more comfortable in his bare + feet. When he reached the kitchen, he found that Farmer Tinch had already + eaten his breakfast, though it was not daylight. Archie was glad that he + was out of the way, and good Mrs. Tinch was glad of it, too, for she was + able to give the boy a good breakfast, and some good advice with it. + “Don’t you pay no attention to what my man says, laddie. He’s a powerful + man to swear and carry on, but I don’t think he’ll have the meanness to + strike you. Ef he does, ye must come to me, and I’ll see thet he doesn’t + do it no more.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was grateful for this spirit of friendliness, but in his heart he + thought that cruel words were often more painful than lashes, and he + heartily wished that his week was over. + </p> + <p> + All this day he spent on the farm, without once going into the road. + Farmer Tinch had warned him that if he saw him making for the road at any + time, he could go and never come back, and he would forfeit what money he + had already earned. So Archie ploughed the field from daylight till dark, + with a half hour at noon for a hurried dinner. He was glad when darkness + came, and after another supper of mush and milk he was thankful to have a + corn-husk bed to sleep on, and was soon in a stupor which was so sound as + to be almost like death. + </p> + <p> + Again the next morning he was awakened at daylight, and he was made to + work even harder than on the second day. He had by this time become + somewhat used to the labour, however, and stood it better. He was more + successful in his work, too, and Farmer Tinch had less opportunity for + cursing him. But at night he seemed more tired, even, than before, and he + longed for his home again. He thought of the cosy bed he would now be + enjoying if he had only taken his mother’s advice, and he felt almost like + getting up in the night and stealing away on the road to the north. But, + always a sensible lad, Archie realised that this discouragement could not + last, and he lost himself in sleep, looking forward three days, when his + week should be up, and he would be on his way to the city, with four + dollars more to add to his slender store. + </p> + <p> + The three days passed slowly, but at length the Saturday night came, and + he prepared to be off. But good Mrs. Tinch entreated him to remain with + them over Sunday, and, as Archie wasn’t sure that it would be quite right + for him to travel on Sunday, he decided to do so. So the next day he + brushed his only suit of clothes, and drove with his late employer to + church, where Farmer Tinch sat in a front seat and passed the bread and + wine at communion. Archie’s heart rose to his throat as he saw this + paragon so devout in church. He felt like rising in his seat and + denouncing him before all the people as a tyrant and a hard-hearted + wretch. But he kept quiet, though he found it impossible to partake of the + communion under such circumstances. + </p> + <p> + The Tinches had brought their dinner with them, and at noon they all sat + on one of the grassy mounds in the churchyard, to take some refreshment + before the afternoon service began. When they had finished, Archie + wandered off, and came to a crowd of boys who were romping behind the + church. When they saw him approach, they all stopped their noise, and + looked at him wonderingly. Evidently they were not used to seeing strange + boys. The silence was soon broken, however, by one of the boys calling + out, “Why, fellers, thet’s the chap what’s been workin’ fer Hiram Tinch.” + This announcement was enough to make Archie an even greater object of + interest than before, for the boys seemed to think that any person who + could work for Farmer Tinch, and come out of the ordeal none the worse for + wear, must be something wonderful. Archie was soon on good terms with them + all, however, and told them of his plan of going to New York. The boys + were all attention, and soon he was the hero of the occasion. When the + bell rung for the afternoon service he was still telling them of the + things he was going to do, and none of them wanted to go into the church. + Archie persuaded them to enter, however, but he was not surprised to meet + them all along the road when he left Tinch’s early Monday morning. + </p> + <p> + It was almost time to go to bed when they reached the farmhouse that + night, so Archie went at once to his attic, being anxious to start fresh + on his journey the next day. He was now determined to push on as rapidly + as possible, hoping to reach the city within three or four days. He was + somewhat afraid that he wouldn’t be able to do this, but he was going to + try, anyhow. + </p> + <p> + At daylight Monday morning he was on the way, and when the various boys he + met the day before said good-bye to him and wished him good luck, he felt + that his stay at Tinch’s had not been without benefits of some sort. He + had made some boy friends, and he was four dollars richer, Archie was + sensible enough, too, to realise that his experience would be a valuable + one to him in the future. He knew now what hard work was, at any rate. + </p> + <p> + The morning walk was delightful. The September weather was perfect, and + all along the road were fruit-trees laden with every sort of good thing to + eat a boy could wish for. And as the trees were on the public + thoroughfare, Archie did net hesitate to help himself freely as he went + along, so that he didn’t require any meal at noon. + </p> + <p> + As night drew near, however, he began to wonder what he would do for a + bed, and the question became more important with every hour. He had come + to no towns since morning, and knew that he couldn’t expect to reach one + of any size until the next day, anyhow. There were farmhouses, of course, + but after his experience of the past week the lad felt that he would + rather remain outdoors all night than risk being thrown in with another + Hiram Tinch. He didn’t know enough of farmers to know that few of them + resemble Mr. Tinch in nature, and he did what he thought was best in + keeping away from farmhouses after this. + </p> + <p> + It was five o’clock in the evening, and Archie was beginning to feel very + tired and hungry, when he came to the ruins of an old colonial mansion, + which lay far back from the road, surrounded by trees, and almost hid with + shrubbery. “How interesting,” he thought to himself. “It looks just like + the pictures of old ruins we see in geographies. I think I must go up and + see what they look like at close range.” And, fired with a spirit of + adventure, and making believe that he was an explorer in an ancient + country, the boy made his way through the trees and shrubbery. The ruins + looked more and more interesting as he advanced. This had evidently been a + magnificent estate at one time. There were massive pillars which had once + supported a stately portico at the front of the house, and above all there + rose a massive chimney, which seemed to be exceedingly well preserved. As + Archie came nearer, he was surprised to notice a thin column of smoke + rising from the top of the chimney, and for a moment he stood still with + fright. What could this mean? Who could be building a fire in the midst of + these ruins. It was almost like what one reads about in books, he thought. + </p> + <p> + For some time he could not decide what to do, whether he had better keep + on, or whether the wisest policy would be to get back to the road as + quickly as possible. Finally, his curiosity and thirst for adventure + persuaded him to go on, and he continued to push his way through the + shrubbery until he stood before the ruins. He then climbed a flight of + steps, and stood in what had once been the main entrance to this massive + palace. Before him he saw a scene which was almost weird in its + unusualness. A fire of pine-knots was blazing in the ruins of the great + fireplace, and seated in a semicircle around the fire were several men of + picturesque appearance, whose faces looked up angrily when they were + disturbed. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0006" id="link2HCH0006"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + STEALING A RIDE—KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE was dumbfounded. Never before had he been among such a motley + crowd, and his first impulse was to turn and run. But on second thought he + decided that it would be best to put on a bold face and walk up to the + men. This he did, and when he reached the fire the men jumped up and asked + him who he was. In a few words he told them his simple story, and they all + laughed and sat down again about the fire, making a place for him. “You’re + one of us, then, laddie,” said the leader of the gang. “We’re all soldiers + of fortune, all dependent upon the generous public for our livelihood. But + we’re not goin’ to the city. There’s nothin’ there for us, and our advice + to you is for you to steer clear of the place, too. Them police takes ye + and throws ye into jail as quick as a wink, and there’s no chance of + gettin’ anythink to eat at basement doors, neither. They’re all on to us, + there, laddie, and ye’d better stick to the country.” + </p> + <p> + This bit of advice was endorsed by the entire company, and it was in vain + that Archie tried to make them understand that he was no ordinary tramp, + walking about the country in search of an easy time. He tried to tell them + that he was going to the city to work, not to beg; but the leader, a big, + dirty fellow, weighing two hundred pounds or over, said, “Never mind, + laddie, we knows you’ve run away from home to get away from the folks, and + we appreciates yer position. If yer a mind to stand by us, we’ll stand by + you, and see thet ye comes to no harm.” + </p> + <p> + On thinking things over, Archie decided that it was perhaps the wisest + thing for him to appear to sympathise with the tramps, and make himself + agreeable while with them. He had undoubtedly run into a gang of the worst + sort of vagabonds, and there was no way of getting away from there without + arousing their suspicions. So he partook of their slender meal, and joined + in the general laughter when the leader, “Fattie Foy,” made some crude + attempt at punning. The meal was one to be remembered. The coffee had been + heated in an empty tomato can over the fire, and from its taste was + evidently a combination of various collections made from the farmhouses + round about. Besides the coffee there was a various collection of + sandwiches and bread and butter, and two pieces of cake. One man had + succeeded in striking a good house, and came back laden with pickles and + crackers and cheese, which were probably the remains of some picnic + basket. Another fellow had brought some pieces of cold bacon, and these + were warmed on sticks over the fire until they looked really appetising. + From some barn had come a half-dozen fresh eggs, and these were quickly + boiled in a can of hot water, and made a very fair showing on the slab of + granite which served as a table. + </p> + <p> + When everything was ready the provisions were equally divided among the + crowd, and every one shared alike. It made no difference how much more one + man collected than another, it was always shared with the entire crowd. + Poor Archie found it almost impossible to eat, but the men insisted that + he take something, so he did manage to swallow a few sips of coffee and + eat a slice of bread and butter. But as he looked about him at the dirty + hands and faces, and the filthy garments of the tramps, he determined not + to eat again while with them. + </p> + <p> + When the meal was over the two tin cans were washed at a spring of water, + and as it was now quite dark, they all sat close to the fire, in order to + see. Some one produced a pack of dirty cards, and they began a game of + some kind. Archie was asked to join, but he told them he didn’t know + anything about card-playing. The poor lad was beginning to wish he had + never left home, and felt more miserable than at any other period of the + journey. He walked over to a corner of the ruins where the light from the + fire did not penetrate, and, once there, he sat down and sobbed bitterly + for a time. When he had finished crying it seemed impossible for him to + sleep. The scene about the fire fascinated him. The men were seated in + every sort of picturesque attitude, and as the flickering light fell upon + their dark faces it wasn’t hard for the poor lad to imagine that he had + fallen among a crowd of brigands. He watched them as they played until he + could see no longer, and then he fell into a sound sleep. + </p> + <p> + When Archie woke it was still dark, but the moon was shining brightly + overhead, making everything as light as day. He rubbed his eyes and sat + up, and it was some time before he could realise where he was. Then, as he + saw the tramps lying about the ground, he remembered his adventures of the + night before, and, horrified that he had allowed himself to sleep, he + hastily jumped up, and determined to get away from the ruins as quickly as + possible. The tramps were all sleeping soundly, and the only noises to be + heard were the sound of their breathing and the blood-curdling hoot of + some owl perched on the pillars of the old portico. The boy picked his way + carefully between the bodies of the sleeping men, and in a minute stood + once more on the grand flight of steps outside. He was trembling for fear + some tramp would awake and prevent his going, and when a bat brushed him + in its flight he almost screamed with terror. Far out beyond the trees and + the shrubby he could see the road glistening in the moonlight, and he made + his way as rapidly as possible out of the grounds, and was once more on + his way to the city. + </p> + <p> + It was lonesome work, walking along a country road at night, and Archie + remembered with longing his cosy bed at home. The feeling of homesickness + kept growing within him, despite his efforts to down it, and when at last + the glorious autumn sun rose over the eastern horizon he was miserable + with longing for mother and for home. But he was too proud to even think + of turning back. He must reach the city at all hazards, homesick or not. + </p> + <p> + Archie did not think of breakfast this morning. His experience of the + night before seemed to have taken away his appetite entirely, and his only + thought was to walk as fast as possible, so that he could reach the city + soon. About nine o’clock he entered the outskirts of a busy town, and + while there he observed that the railroad going to the city passed through + the place. All at once a new idea occurred to him. He had so often heard + men and boys tell of how they had stolen a ride from one town to another. + Why shouldn’t he be able to get a ride on a freight train to the city. + Would it be wrong? Archie thought not, since so many men did it. And + anyhow it didn’t seem a wicked thing to cheat the railroad. He had heard + people say that the company ought to be cheated whenever possible, since + it cheated so many others. So, from being so tired and so anxious to reach + New York, Archie decided to try and steal a ride. He entered the yards, + where a train was being made up for the south, and there he saw a + cattle-car with an open door. He immediately jumped inside and shut the + door, squeezing himself into the farthest corner, hoping that he wouldn’t + be discovered. He soon found that he wasn’t alone, for a couple of tramps + were in the opposite corner, and they whispered to him not to make any + noise. “The brakie,” they said, “will soon be ‘round, and if he finds ye + he’ll put us all in jail.” + </p> + <p> + Poor Archie grew pale at the thought of being put in jail, and huddled + himself closer in the corner. After a time the train started, and the + tramps, he noticed, climbed up into some sort of compartment under the + roof of the car, where they wouldn’t be observed, leaving Archie alone + down-stairs. Things went smoothly for a time. The train went flying along, + and Archie counted every mile which brought him nearer to the city. + Finally the train pulled up at a crossing, and a brakeman came along and + threw open the door of the car. He was not long in discovering the + cowering figure in the corner, and his wrath was dreadful to look upon. + “So, ye cussed vagabond,” he growled, “ye thought ye’d steal a ride, did + ye? Get out o’ this now. Quick, out with ye.” Archie could have fainted, + and, as it was, he almost fell out of the car, propelled by the brakeman’s + boot. For awhile he stood dazed beside the track, and finally moved on. + “I’ll keep a ‘stiff upper lip,’” he said, “whatever happens.” But this was + by far the most discouraging adventure yet. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0007" id="link2HCH0007"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK—A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE. +</pre> + <p> + ON and on for the rest of the day walked Archie. His feet were sore, he + was weak from hunger, and he was made miserable with being homesick. + People who met him on the road turned around to look at the slender lad + with the pale face and the weary step, but he kept walking on, stopping + for nothing, and noticing no one. At noon he picked some apples in an + orchard, and these appeased his hunger. When evening drew near, however, + he felt that he could go without food no longer, so he didn’t hesitate to + stop at a house and ask for food. “I know mother would give a boy food if + one should come to our door,” he said to himself, “so I do not think it + wrong for me to ask for food here.” He was fortunate enough to strike a + pleasant housewife, who took him in and made him sit down at the kitchen + table, which she covered with good things to eat. There was cold roast + beef, some fried potatoes and a glass of good fresh milk. And then she + gave him some apple pie, so that when he had finished Archie felt better + than for many a day. While he ate he told the good woman why he was going + to New York, and her sympathy was enlisted at once. “Why, you poor lad,” + she exclaimed, “just to think of your being in the city all alone. And + what will your mother think?” + </p> + <p> + Archie couldn’t imagine what his mother did think. He had remembered her + every minute during the last few days, and was anxious to write her, so he + decided to ask the woman for some paper and a pencil. These were gladly + given him, and he sat down and told his mother that he was almost to New + York and that he had been having a splendid time. He was careful not to + say anything about his experience with Farmer Tinch, or the night he spent + with the tramps. He knew these things would only make her unhappy, and it + was just as well that she should think everything was smooth sailing for + him. His letter was filled with his enthusiasm and his hope for the + morrow, so that when good Mrs. Dunn received it she was overjoyed, and + hurried over to show it to the Widow Sullivan, who enjoyed it thoroughly + and said “I told you so.” Poor Mrs. Dunn had been having a very miserable + time of it. She was hardly surprised that morning when she awoke and found + Archie gone, but she was naturally much worried for fear some accident + would happen to him before he reached New York. Once there, she felt that + she needn’t worry much about him, for, strange to say, Mrs. Dunn had a + firm belief in the ability of city policemen to take care of every one, + and she knew that Archie would not be allowed to suffer for want of food + and a place to sleep. And when she received this letter, saying that + Archie was nearly to New York, and had even been so successful as to earn + some money, she felt more comfortable than for some time, Of course she + supposed that he would be home before long. She was positive that he + wouldn’t be able to get any work in the city, and knew that as soon as his + money gave out he would return. “It’s all for the best,” she said to Mrs. + Sullivan. “The habit of running away from home was born in the boy. His + father left home when he was no older than Archie, and no harm ever came + to him. So I’m not going to worry, Mrs. Sullivan.” And then Mrs. Dunn + would go back to her home, and at sight of Archie’s old hat or some of his + football paraphernalia, would burst into tears. + </p> + <p> + The good woman who gave Archie his supper refused to let him start out + again on the road that night. She told him that he must remain with them, + for they had an extra bed up over the kitchen which was never needed, and + that he might just as well sleep there as not. So for the first time in + nearly a week Archie slept comfortably, and, as he heard the familiar + sounds in the kitchen below him in the morning, it was hard for him to + make up his mind that he was not at home, and that it was not his mother + who was grinding the coffee in the kitchen below. He heard the ham frying + in the skillet, and the rattle of the dishes as his hostess set the table, + and then he dressed himself and hastened downstairs, feeling ready for a + good day’s walking. + </p> + <p> + When he had eaten his breakfast he started out again. The woman told him + that it was only about fifteen miles to New York, and that after he had + walked about six of them he could take a trolley-car and ride the + remainder of the distance for five cents. So he thanked her for her + kindness, and promised to let her know how he succeeded in the city, for + the woman was much interested in his future. He felt almost sorry to leave + the home-like place, but the prospect of reaching the city this very day + was enough to make him anxious to be off. He covered the six miles to the + trolley-car before eleven o’clock in the morning, and then in an hour and + a quarter more the trolley landed him in lower New York. + </p> + <p> + His sensations as he was whirled along the smooth pavements, past + beautiful buildings and handsome residences, may be better imagined than + described. After looking forward to this day for so long, he was almost + overcome at the realisation of his hopes, and took the utmost delight in + everything about him. When the car stopped at the terminus of the line, he + got out and walked up the busiest street in the neighbourhood. He hardly + knew what to do first, but continued walking until he came to the New York + end of the great Brooklyn Bridge. Then he couldn’t resist the desire to + walk across the bridge, and he started out upon the journey. Up the steps + he walked, and soon he had climbed as far as the middle of the magnificent + structure. There he stood for some time, looking out over Governor’s + Island, nestled like a green egg in a nest of red buildings, and past + Staten Island to the open sea beyond It was all grander, more beautiful + than anything he had ever seen before, and he felt glad that he had come. + Then in another direction he saw the never-ending succession of buildings, + some tall, some low ones, but all inhabited with swarms of people. “There + are three million people in this great city,” he said to himself, “and + over them in New Jersey, in those cities I see, there are a million more, + and I am one of four million.” The thought was too much for the boy, and + he continued his walk across the bridge. Once across, he came back again, + for Brooklyn was a strange place to him. In New York City he felt more at + home, for he had at least spent two days within its limits. + </p> + <p> + Once back in the busy streets, he decided to look about for a cheap place + to stay for the night. It was the middle of the afternoon now, and he felt + that he ought to make some preparation. He knew better than to apply at + the police station for lodging, for he knew they would probably turn him + over to the famous Gerry Society, which would send him back home before a + day had passed, and then where would his ambitions be? + </p> + <p> + He remembered the place where he had stayed with Uncle Henry, but he knew + that this would be too high-priced for his pocketbook, so he started up + the Bowery, where he expected to find some very cheap places. He didn’t + like the looks of the people he met in the street, but his experiences on + the way to New York had taught him not to be too particular about a little + dirt. So when he came to a rickety building with a sign up, “Beds, ten and + fifteen cents,” he immediately went up the dark, filthy stairway, and + found himself in a large room at the top which served as the “hotel” + office. There were rows of chairs in front of the windows and along the + walls, and in the chairs were the queerest-looking lot of men he had ever + seen. He didn’t pay any attention to them, though, but went up to the + seedy individual behind the desk, and asked him if he could get a bed for + the night. “Sure, Mike,” the man replied, and Archie signed his name in a + dirty book with torn pages. He paid the man ten cents, and asked if he + could leave his bundle while he went outside. “Sure, Mike,” was again his + answer, and the man took his little bundle of necessities and threw them + on the floor behind the counter. When Archie had gone out, a fat man with + a baby face came up and whispered to the clerk. “Anything in the bloke?” + he inquired. “Nit,” said the clerk, “don’t yer see his baggage? Does it + look like there’s anything in it?” And the mysterious conversation closed, + to be continued later in the evening. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0008" id="link2HCH0008"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VIII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + LOOKING FOR WORK—WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT. +</pre> + <p> + AFTER a couple of hours spent in going about the streets, Archie went into + a place where he bought some coffee and rolls for his supper. He paid only + five cents for three sweet rolls and a large cup of coffee which was not + at all bad to taste, and he returned to the lodging-house on the Bowery + feeling better than he had expected to feel when he started out from the + homestead where he spent the previous night, If he could get a good meal + for five or ten cents, and could sleep for ten cents more, he would have + enough to keep him going for some time. + </p> + <p> + The Bowery at night presented a wonderful appearance to Archie’s mind. The + brilliantly lighted shops, the cheap theatres with their bands of + musicians on the sidewalk in front of the entrance, were all attractive to + his boyish eyes, but he was wise enough to pass them all by, and to make + his way as quickly as possible to the cheap lodging-house. The street was + jammed with persons of every description. He was surprised particularly at + the number of Chinamen he met, for he didn’t know that a block or two away + was the centre of the Chinese population of New York, where the Celestials + have their theatre, their hotels, their great stores, and their + joss-house. There were many Italians in the street, too, and Polish Jews, + to say nothing of Frenchmen and Germans. Then there was the typical Bowery + “tough,” who swaggered up and down, looking for trouble, which he usually + finds before an evening passes. Archie was not afraid in this cosmopolitan + crowd. No one seemed to notice him, and, anyhow, there were a great many + policemen about, who seemed to keep a sharp lookout all the time. And as + Archie shared his mother’s faith in the city policeman, he felt no fear. + </p> + <p> + In the lodging-house everything looked very much as before. The chairs + were still occupied with filthy-looking men, who smoked and spat and + talked in undertones among themselves. The boy paid no attention to any of + them, but, walking up to the seedy individual behind the counter, asked + him if he could go to bed now. The man answered, “Certainly,” and sent a + fellow with Archie to show him his bed. It was in a long, narrow room, + which was poorly lighted with a few gas-jets here and there, and which was + filled with about thirty beds, all narrow, and all dirty. One of these was + pointed out to Archie, and then the man left him. The poor lad felt more + homesick than ever, and had it not been that he had a glorious to-morrow + to look forward to, he would have been very miserable indeed. As it was, + he undressed and got between the chilly sheets, when he remembered that he + hadn’t looked after his little roll of bills for a long time, and that + some of them might be missing. He crawled out of bed again, and felt + inside the lining of his coat for the purse. He had sewed it there for + safe-keeping until he reached the city, for he had some little change in + his pocket, which he knew would last him for several days. + </p> + <p> + The poor boy’s hand felt nothing but a cut in the lining, where the roll + of bills had been, and all at once he realised that the money must have + been stolen from him. And he at once thought of the night in the ruins, + when he fell asleep among the tramps, and there was no doubt in his mind + but that they had taken his money from him. This was a terrible blow. Here + he was, with just a few cents in his pocket, and no one to whom he could + appeal for aid. It was the worst predicament Archie had ever been in, and + he hardly knew what to do. He sat on the side of his dirty little bed for + awhile, and then he snuggled under the covers and was soon asleep again. + For a boy who has been walking all day seldom stays awake from worry. + </p> + <p> + But when he awoke in the morning, it was to realise the fact that he must + get some money this very day or go to the police station. The few cents he + had remaining were only enough to buy some coffee and bread for breakfast, + and the poor lad didn’t know where his next meal would come from. As he + went out, the clerk in the filthy office of the lodging-house told him + that he needn’t come back any more. + </p> + <p> + “Why did you tell him that?” asked the fat man with a sly face. + </p> + <p> + “Because I went through his clothes last night when he was asleep, and he + had only six cents in his pocket. We don’t want no starvin’ brats around + here, to bring the Gerry Society down upon us.” + </p> + <p> + It was well that Archie didn’t know his pockets had been searched while he + was asleep, or his faith in human nature would have been more shaken than + ever before. He had not suspected that the men in this lodging-house might + be dishonest. + </p> + <p> + “They are poor,” he said to himself when he saw them first, “but they may + be good men for all that.” + </p> + <p> + After a slender meal, Archie found a library where he looked over the + advertising columns of the morning papers, trying to find some position + open which he thought he might fill. There were several advertisements + calling for office boys, and all these he made note of, and then as he + looked down the page he noticed that a boy was wanted in a restaurant to + wash dishes. He decided that if he didn’t succeed in getting a place as + office boy, he might get the restaurant place. He knew that in a + restaurant he would be likely at least to get enough to eat. + </p> + <p> + For two hours he called at addresses of men who wanted office boys, but at + every place he was turned away. “We have already hired one,” some of them + said, and others told him that they never took any boys in the office who + were living away from home. Some asked him for recommendations, and when + he had none, they looked at him and told him “good morning.” It was all + terribly discouraging, and with every minute Archie was wishing more and + more that he were back home again. Somehow the city seemed different now + from what it had been when Uncle Henry was with him. Everything was less + bright, and the things he had been delighted with before were less + interesting now. + </p> + <p> + Finally, he entered a large, handsome suite of rooms, in one of the great + sky-scrapers, and was shown into a very elegant private office. There he + found an old gentleman seated in a great easy chair, looking over papers, + and keeping one eye upon a buzzing instrument at his side which seemed to + be spitting out long strips of paper, like a magician in a side-show. The + man looked up as he entered, and cleared his throat. “Ahem,” he said, “you + look as if you were from the country. I wonder, now, if you have came to + the city to seek your fortune.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was embarrassed. “Yes, sir, I suppose you might put it that way,” + he replied. + </p> + <p> + “Well,” continued the old gentleman, “my advice to you is to go back where + you came from as quickly as you can. Not one boy in a thousand will gain + either fame or fortune in New York, and you stand a wonderful chance of + sinking lower every year. And even if you do succeed, you will miss many + beautiful things in your life which may come to you in the country. You + can have a pleasant home there, and live an easy, natural life, while here + it will be years before you can expect to accomplish much, and you will + spend your life in a nervous strain. Think well, young man, before + choosing the great city as your sphere of usefulness.” + </p> + <p> + “I’ve made up my mind, sir,” said Archie. “I have quite decided to remain + in the city.” + </p> + <p> + “Very well,” said the old gentleman, “I hope you may never regret it. But + we have already hired an office boy. Good morning.” + </p> + <p> + Archie walked out, more discouraged than ever. Perhaps, after all, a + country life was not to be so much despised. This man ought to know what + he was talking about. But once outside, in the Broadway crowd, Archie + forgot everything about the country, and was lost in the delight of being + one of four million. + </p> + <p> + He now decided to accept the place in the restaurant, if it were not + taken, and, fortunately for him, it was not. So he rolled up his sleeves, + and began to wash dishes as if he had done nothing else in all his life + before. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0009" id="link2HCH0009"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IX. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + IN THE STREET AGAIN—THE POLICE STATION—VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, + AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR. +</pre> + <p> + ALL day long Archie washed dishes, and before night came he decided that + he had never before had such discouraging work. The restaurant was a + popular one, and there were very many dishes to be washed, to say nothing + of the pots and pans which were always dirty. Archie no sooner finished + one sink full of dishes than another large pile was waiting to be put + through the same operation, and there was no time at all for looking about + him. There was hardly time for eating, even, and at noon he was only able + to snatch a few mouthfuls. The work was not interesting, and it was a new + sort of labour to Archie, so that altogether he did not get on as well as + he might have wished. The cook was constantly nagging him, and telling him + to hurry up, and the poor lad tried his best to please him. But somehow + everything went wrong, and he was hardly surprised when the proprietor + came in at six o’clock with a new man for the place. “Come around in the + morning,” he said to Archie, “and I’ll pay your day’s wages.” + </p> + <p> + So the boy was in the street once more, with no money, and no place to + sleep. He wasn’t hungry, that was one thing, for he had been allowed to + eat a good meal before leaving the restaurant. But where was he to sleep, + and what was he to do on the morrow, when he would surely be hungry? His + experience at looking for work had not been encouraging, and he began to + have serious doubts as to whether he would ever get a place. Certainly he + would starve if he waited around New York long without anything to do. + </p> + <p> + It was quite dark at seven o’clock, and Archie walked over to the + brilliantly lighted street which ran north and south through the city. He + had never failed to find something interesting to look at there, and he + felt now that he would like to see the bright side of city life, even if + he couldn’t enjoy it himself. So all the evening he walked up and down the + street, watching the well-dressed crowds hurrying into the theatres and + the other almost innumerable places of amusement. He stared in + open-mouthed amazement at some of the costumes of the women he saw + alighting from carriages. Never before had he seen anything half so + beautiful, and if any one had told him that there were such dresses he + would have told them he didn’t believe it. Some of them, he thought, must + cost hundreds of dollars, and the jewels worn with them many hundreds + more. How interesting, how new, it all was to him! Once he thought of the + little home in the village, and at first wished that his mother might be + there to enjoy the sights with him. “But I wouldn’t want her to see me,” + he thought, “not while I am so miserable, and feeling so discouraged.” For + Archie was beginning to wonder if he hadn’t made a mistake in leaving + home, whether he had not been overconfident and hot-headed. But he decided + to try it a few days more, that is, if he could manage to live for that + length of time in the city. + </p> + <p> + At twelve o’clock he was walking up and down the street, which was still + bright with millions of lights, though the crowds had gone home from the + theatres, and the restaurants were beginning to be less popular. He was + still wondering how he was going to find a place to sleep, when he was + accosted by a policeman, and taken into a doorway. “I’ve been watching + you,” said the officer, “and I want to know why you are walking up and + down the street at this time of night.” + </p> + <p> + Archie could have cried from fright, but he remembered that he was under + suspicion, so decided to tell the policeman his whole story, and perhaps + he could help him out in some way. So he described his experiences during + the day, and was surprised at the interest shown by the officer in the + recital. When he had finished he was told that he would be taken to the + police station. “You needn’t be afraid, my lad,” said the policeman. “I’ll + see that the Gerry Society doesn’t get you and send you home, that is, if + you think you want to try it here a few days longer. You can sleep at the + station to-night, and the next morning you can try it again.” So to the + station they went, and Archie was, naturally, a little frightened when he + saw, for the first time, the cells, and the terribly severe appearance of + all his surroundings. But he was given a good bed in which to sleep, and + he passed a delightful night, dreaming of the wonderful adventures which + befell him in the city. + </p> + <p> + He was not awakened until eight o’clock, and then he found the good + policeman waiting to take him out to breakfast, He expressed surprise that + he should be so kind to him. + </p> + <p> + “I always thought that officers were cross and unpleasant,” he said, “but + you’re not that kind, anyhow.” + </p> + <p> + “Well,” laughed the officer, “we have to be cross very often, though we’re + sometimes sorry to be so. But I’ve taken a fancy to you, my lad. I like to + see a boy who does things. When a boy of seventeen is willing to come to + New York alone, and make his own way, without friends or influence of any + kind, it shows a proper spirit, and he ought to succeed. I know you’ll get + along if you only persevere. I’d advise you to keep on trying.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, I’m going to, now,” said Archie. “I was very homesick and discouraged + last night, but since I’ve met you I seem to have received a new impetus, + and I’m ready to make a new beginning.” + </p> + <p> + So Archie and the policeman parted friends. + </p> + <p> + “Come around to the station to-night if you want a bed, and you shall be + cared for,” said the officer, as he turned around the corner into the busy + street, where he was lost in the crowd. + </p> + <p> + Archie walked down the street, hardly knowing what to do first. He didn’t + feel like answering any more advertisements in the newspapers, and he + decided to go into a few stores and ask for work. He was about to do this + when he saw before him the magnificent building of the New York + Enterprise. It was a truly beautiful structure, rising fifteen stories + above the ground, and surmounted with an artistic tower, which could be + seen from almost any part of the city. The home of the city’s greatest + daily, it looked as if it were always welcoming strangers to the + metropolis, and Archie felt an irresistible impulse to enter. Everything + connected with a newspaper had for him the greatest fascination, and he + knew he would enjoy seeing through this wonderful building, which was + almost wholly occupied by the departments of the Enterprise. So he entered + the door, and passed from one floor to another, finally arriving at the + highest floor of all, where were located the editorial rooms of the + Evening Enterprise. All at once a new plan entered Archie’s fertile brain. + Why shouldn’t he be able to get something to do on a newspaper? It had + always been his greatest ambition to become a reporter, and here, although + he didn’t think the editor would take him in that capacity, he thought he + might get some sort of work in which he could work himself up. + </p> + <p> + There upon the door were the magic words: “Editor of the Evening + enterprise. No Admittance.” Archie opened the door and entered. He knew it + would be useless to send in his name. It was best to see the editor at + once, and without ceremony. He was seated before a large desk, which was + littered with papers of every description, and he was a very pleasant + person in appearance. Archie stood hesitating near the door, and remained + there a minute or two before the editor looked up. + </p> + <p> + “Well, my boy, what is it?” + </p> + <p> + Archie took courage. + </p> + <p> + “I—I want to be a reporter, sir, and I thought it would do no harm + to ask you for such a position, anyhow.” + </p> + <p> + The distinguished journalist wheeled about in his chair. + </p> + <p> + “What!” he exclaimed, “you want to be a reporter. Why, my dear boy, how + old are you?” + </p> + <p> + “I’ll be eighteen my next birthday,” said Archie, “and, sir, I’ve had some + experiences in the last two weeks, which make me feel as if I were about + five years older than I really am. I’ve been through some very trying + experiences, sir.” + </p> + <p> + The editor was interested at once. “Tell me what your experiences have + been,” he said, and Archie began, and told him his whole story; how he had + left home to win fame and fortune, and how he had worked on the farm for a + week with Farmer Tinch; how he had been robbed the night he stayed with + the tramps in the ancient ruins, and how he had finally reached the city. + Then he told him of the night in the lodging-house, of his dish-washing + experience in the restaurant, and how he had been taken from the street by + a policeman the night before, and allowed to sleep in the station-house. + When he had finished the editor had a broad grin upon his face. + </p> + <p> + “By Jove!” he exclaimed, “this is certainly rich stuff. There’s a good + story in it, I’ll be bound.” + </p> + <p> + Then, speaking to Archie, he said: + </p> + <p> + “Just wait here a minute, my boy, and I’ll see if we can’t put some money + in your way.” + </p> + <p> + He pressed a button at the side of his desk, and when a boy appeared, he + told him to bring “Mr. Jones, please, or one of the other reporters. And + tell Jones to bring an artist with him.” + </p> + <p> + The reporter and the artist soon stood before the editor, who told them, + with great glee, that he had a leading feature for the next evening + edition of the Enterprise. “Just talk to this boy, Jones, and see if you + can’t make two good columns on the front page and two for the inside from + his story. I think it’s great, myself. And you Cash,” he said, turning to + the artist, “you make a good sketch of the boy.” + </p> + <p> + Archie could hardly believe his eyes and ears. Just to think that he was + being interviewed, and that his picture was to be in the paper. It seemed + almost too good to be true. + </p> + <p> + When the reporter had finished with him, he was taken down-stairs to the + cashier’s office and given thirty dollars in bills. “This will pay you for + the interview,” said the editor, “and give you enough to fix up with. Now, + to-morrow, you come in again, and I think I can give you steady + employment.” + </p> + <p> + Oh, how happy Archie was! He went out into the street, and seemed to + fairly walk on air. Then he heard the newsboys crying, “Extra paper, read + about the Enterprise’s Boy Reporter.” And when Archie saw the paper, there + on the front page was his picture, together with the story of his + “startling adventures.” + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0010" id="link2HCH0010"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER X. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN—FEATURED AS “THE BOY REPORTER.” + </pre> + <p> + ARCHIE often speaks of the day when he visited the newspaper office for + the first time as the happiest day in all his life. The change from + despair and homesickness to the joy of being appreciated by some one was + so rapid that it made his head fairly swim with the exhilaration of + success. With thirty dollars in his pocket, and the knowledge that he + would have steady employment of the kind he desired on the morrow, he + walked up the Bowery feeling like a prince. He entered the lodging-house + where he had left his bundle of clothing, and so surprised the clerk by + his new appearance that he was invited to remain there for another night. + The shrewd man guessed that some good fortune must have befallen Archie, + or he wouldn’t be so happy. But the one night of misery which he had spent + in the squalid hotel was enough for Archie, and he walked hastily up-town + with his bundle, keeping a sharp lookout for a pleasant place where he + might get a room. In his previous wanderings he had seen several nice + houses with rooms to rent, but now that he wanted a room he found it + difficult to find any of these neighbourhoods. He was anxious to get + settled as quickly as possible, for he wanted to get everything done + to-day, so that to-morrow he could have time to do anything required of + him by the editor of the Enterprise. He must get a new suit of clothes, he + must get his hair cut, and last, but not least, he must write home to + mother and tell her of his great good fortune. + </p> + <p> + Finally, in his wanderings, Archie came to a beautiful square which was + surrounded on every side by business houses and tenements. But the square + itself and the houses on it were very quaint and very handsome, so that it + seemed to be a very oasis in the desert. The green trees, just a little + tinged with the brown and gold of autumn, reminded Archie of the front + yard at home, and he decided to get a room in one of the houses here if he + could possibly do so. + </p> + <p> + It so happened that there was a hall bedroom empty in one of the + best-looking places, and Archie at once engaged it. The price was more + reasonable than he had hoped for, even, and this made him happy, for as + yet he had no idea how much his earnings would be, and he was anxious to + be able to save something to send home, if he possibly could. The room was + nicely furnished, and looked out upon the fountain, with the green trees, + so that it was highly satisfactory in every respect. It didn’t take Archie + long to undo his bundle, and it was a pitiful display that greeted him + when it was opened. The little comb and brush, a piece of soap, a + Testament given him last Christmas by the teacher at Sunday school, a suit + of underwear, and a couple of handkerchiefs. The whole lot of things + hardly filled a corner in one of the bureau drawers, and Archie realised + that he must buy a great many things within a week or two. + </p> + <p> + But before going out to do any shopping, he sat down and wrote a long + letter home, describing his success of the morning, and telling his mother + of the editor’s promise to give him regular employment. He enclosed a copy + of the paper with his picture and the story of his adventures, and it made + him very happy to think of his mother’s feelings when she read it all. + Then, when he had finished, he went out to a post-office, and bought a + money-order for ten dollars, which he also enclosed. “I know I can spare + it,” he said to himself, “and it will gratify her so much.” Then, when the + letter with its contents was safely mailed, he bought himself a new suit + of clothing, and renovated himself in many ways, so that when he returned + to his room in the square it was nearly dark, and he looked a different + boy entirely. + </p> + <p> + Before going to bed, he determined to see his policeman friend, and tell + him of his good fortune. “He is probably expecting me to sleep in the + station,” Archie thought, “and it will be a great surprise to him.” But + when he met the good man, he found that he had already heard of his + success. + </p> + <p> + “I bought the Enterprise, and could hardly believe my eyes,” said he, “but + I always thought you would find some one to appreciate your pluck. I’m + mighty glad for you, my lad, and you must always let me know how you are + getting along.” This Archie promised to do, and returned to his lodging to + sleep. + </p> + <p> + The next morning he was on hand at the Enterprise office before the editor + himself was down. The place was quite as fascinating as it had been on the + preceding day, and he found something new to look at every minute. The + reporters at their desks, several of whom introduced themselves and + congratulated Archie on his perseverance, were a source of great interest + to him, and the copy-boys, running here and there with special copy for + the first edition, gave an air of hustling activity to the place that was + very attractive to this new reporter. + </p> + <p> + When the editor came he had already thought of something for Archie to do. + “Now you’ve been introduced to the public,” he said, “and we want to + feature you for a few days. Every one will be interested in knowing what + you are doing, and what is going to become of you. You must write us an + article for the paper to-day, telling about your experiences since + yesterday, about getting a new suit, and about hunting for a room. And you + can tell about your policeman friend, too.” + </p> + <p> + This was surprising. Archie couldn’t imagine why any one should be + interested in knowing about his daily life, but he sat down and succeeded + in writing a very interesting two columns about it. He was much surprised + that he should be able to write so easily and so well. Of course he knew + that composition and rhetoric had been his two strongest studies at + school, but he had never realised before that he had any great talent for + writing. When he had finished this article, the editor looked it over, and + said, “That’s great. You’re all right, my boy. We’ll make a great + journalist of you yet,” and of course this made Archie very happy. “Wait + until this story is set up,” said Mr. Jennings, the editor, “and I’ll see + what you can do in the way of correcting proofs.” + </p> + <p> + When the proofs came, in a very short time, he hardly knew what to do with + them. But in reading them he discovered several mistakes, which he lost no + time in correcting, and Mr. Jennings said that he had done very well + indeed. “Now you can spend the day in doing what you please. I would + suggest that you go about New York and have as many strange experiences as + possible, so that to-morrow you can write them up for us. And it will pay + you, by the way, to go out to Coney Island, which is a different place + from any you have seen before. You are sure to see some unusual things, + and in the morning you can bring me in two columns about it.” + </p> + <p> + Before leaving, Archie was asked if he needed any money. “You mustn’t + hesitate to ask for it, because you can have it as well to-day as on + Saturday.” But as he had left several dollars of the thirty he had + received the day before, Archie didn’t draw any more, and he thought it + most remarkable that the editor should have so much money to pay out. + </p> + <p> + He had no difficulty in getting a trolley-car to Coney Island, and, after + an hour’s riding through Brooklyn streets, he found himself in the most + unique and most delightful place imaginable, It was a queer-looking town, + with great wheels in the air, high towers, with elevators and innumerable + merry-go-rounds, and other sources of amusement. The noise was something + terrific. Hand-organs, street-pianos, and German bands were all playing at + the same time, while people hurried about from one place to another, + enjoying the hundreds of games and riding the various scenic railways and + carrousels. Archie stood mute with delight at it all, but before five + minutes had passed he had shot the chutes, and had ridden over a + steeplechase which took him through dark caverns, where dragons glared at + him and where electrical sparks were constantly flying through the air. It + was all so new, so different from anything he had seen before, that he was + simply lost in admiration. He was standing near a theatre, when a short, + dark man touched him on the arm, and said, “Come this way, young man, and + I’ll teach you the best game of all.” + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0011" id="link2HCH0011"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND—RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE was at first too much surprised to answer the man at all, but in a + few moments he remembered that he was now a reporter, and that it was his + duty to see all that he could, and have all the new experiences possible. + So he decided to follow the man, and find out what “the best thing of all” + in Coney Island was like. He was taken through several narrow alleyways, + and finally he found himself in front of a tumble-down structure, built + out directly over the water. It was very modest in appearance, and + everything seemed quiet about the place. The shades were carefully drawn, + and the dark man had to knock three times before the door was opened and + they were permitted to enter. Inside, Archie found himself in a handsomely + furnished apartment which differed greatly in appearance from the exterior + of the building. There was a rich velvet carpet, mahogany furniture, and a + great many small tables standing about the room. The place was filled with + men, mostly well-dressed, who were playing various games. Some were + dealing cards, others were twirling wheels with numbers on them, and some + were playing games with chips. It didn’t take Archie long to realise that + he had been steered into a gambling den of the worst kind, and he was + immediately on the alert for future developments. He watched every + movement of his new friend, and noticed that he found it necessary to + speak to several of those present in a low undertone. This didn’t worry + Archie, because he knew that he was in no danger except of losing money, + and he felt that he could afford to lose some money, since he was sure to + earn more by writing about the experience for the newspaper. + </p> + <p> + So he carefully observed all that was going on, making mental notes of the + peculiarities of the place and the people. When at last the dark man came + up and inquired if he wouldn’t like a chance to earn some money easily, he + very readily answered yes, and the man was overjoyed to find so willing a + victim. Then, of course, Archie was introduced to the mysteries of the + famous roulette wheel, of which he had read so much. Archie was interested + in everything, and didn’t mind losing four dollars in learning so much + that was new. He succeeded in getting away when he had lost this sum, + though the man assured him that he couldn’t help winning back all he had + lost, and much more, too, if he would but remain awhile longer. Archie was + firm, however, and passed out into the narrow alleyways again, feeling + that he had learned a great deal through a very small expenditure of + money. He gradually found his way back into the crowded Surf Avenue, where + there were hundreds of things, evidently, which he had not yet seen. The + crowds, too, seemed greater even than before, and there seemed to be + thousands of people arriving every hour from New York and Brooklyn, over + the various street-car and railway lines, and by the excursion boats + landing at the great iron pier. The noise was still deafening, and every + one seemed to be having a splendid time in every way. “Surely,” said + Archie to himself, “no one can feel blue or despondent in such a place as + this, where every one is full of fun, and apparently determined to have a + good time while here.” And he felt that he would like to remain longer, + but he knew he should go back again to the city, so that he might see the + editor, and tell him something about what he had seen and done. + </p> + <p> + So again he rode over the great Brooklyn bridge, and stopped on the other + side at the handsome building of the Enterprise. It made Archie very happy + to feel that he was now a reporter on such a great paper, and he found it + hard to realise that so much good fortune had come to him in such a short + time. He met reporters in the various hallways, and all of them spoke to + him pleasantly, so that he began to feel that he had never been thrown + with such pleasant men before. + </p> + <p> + He had no difficulty in seeing the editor this time, and found him a ready + listener to the story of his Coney Island experiences. He insisted on + Archie’s describing all the men he had seen in the gambling den, and then + asked him if he could identify them, if necessary, and also if he would be + able to find the place again. Archie gave good descriptions of most of the + men, and said that he could take any one to the place at any time. The + editor lost himself in thought for a few minutes, and at the end of that + time he rang for a copy-boy. “Ring for a messenger boy,” he said, “and + when he arrives come for a note which I want him to take to Mr. Pultzer’s + house.” Archie stared with amazement at Mr. Jennings, and waited for + further information. He wondered what was going to be done. He knew that + Mr. Pultzer owned the newspaper, and he knew that it must be something + important that Mr. Jennings wanted to write him about. He wasn’t long left + in the dark, and he felt very proud that Mr. Jennings should have + confidence enough in him to tell him about his plans. “I think you have + discovered something which will prove very important to the paper and the + public,” he said to Archie. “We have suspected for a long time that + gambling dens have been flourishing in Coney Island, but up to now we have + not been able to locate any of them. Now that you have found one, we hope + to arouse public opinion to the danger there is in such places, and we + hope to inspire a reform movement which will be strong enough to wipe them + out entirely. I will hear from Mr. Pultzer in a short time, and then I + want you to go down to the Island with some plain-clothes detectives and + two other reporters. And I don’t mind telling you now that there will be a + good sum in it for you if you succeed in arresting any of the leaders of + this gang. You can be excused for an hour now, if there’s anything you + want to do.” + </p> + <p> + Full of enthusiasm over the coming adventure and his part in it, Archie + hurried out to a quick-lunch counter and bought himself a light meal, for + he feared that he would have to remain at Coney Island through the + evening. Then, when he had finished, he returned to the newspaper office, + where he spent some time in getting acquainted with some of the reporters + who were working on the Morning Enterprise. He found them all very + pleasant to meet, and he learned a great many helpful things from their + conversation. The older men were able to give him many pointers concerning + things that he should, and should not, do. While he was in the office of + the Morning Enterprise Mr. Jennings came in, and, taking him along into + the private room of the managing editor, introduced him to Mr. Van + Bunting, who was the editorial head of the morning edition. Then Mr. + Jennings told of the new scheme, and Mr. Van Bunting entered into it so + thoroughly that before an hour three detectives, two reporters, and Archie + were on their way to the Island. + </p> + <p> + Once arrived in the resort, which was as noisy and bright as in the + afternoon, they all made a bee-line for the gambling den, headed by + Archie, who surprised the others with his certainty and confidence as to + which was the right direction. In a very few minutes they all stood in + front of the dilapidated structure built out over tide-water, and Archie + heard one of the detectives say that the place looked “mighty suspicious + like.” He gave three knocks just as the dark man had done in the + afternoon, and in a few minutes the door was cautiously opened and a head + made its appearance. The detectives lost no time in pushing their way in, + amid great confusion and cries of fear, and it seemed only a few seconds + until all the inmates were huddled in a corner, covered with pistols, and + wailing in fear, when they weren’t cursing through anger. Then they were + all arrested and taken to the police station, where they were all refused + bail, and placed in cells overnight. Then the reporters returned to the + office of the Enterprise, where Archie was told by Mr. Van Bunting to + write the story of his experience for the morning paper. This was his + first work for the morning edition, and he took great pains to make his + descriptions as complete as possible, and the details as accurate as he + knew how to make them. And his hard work was rewarded by words of praise + from the managing editor when he turned the copy in for editing. + </p> + <p> + Tired from his hard day’s work, Archie then went up-town to the quiet + square in which he had his home, and he was glad to get to bed. He had + been nervous and excited all day, and found it difficult to sleep, but + finally the tired eyelids lay quietly over the tired eyes, and Archie was + dreaming of the cool and pleasant arbour of grapes at home, and of how the + Hut Club was holding a special meeting there to devise ways and means of + welcoming home their distinguished fellow member, Mr. Archie Dunn, who had + achieved such great success in the city. + </p> + <p> + Notwithstanding his tired feeling, Archie was up early the next morning, + and out at the corner to buy an Enterprise. He hastily turned the pages, + trying to find the story of his Coney Island adventures, but he looked in + vain. It wasn’t visible anywhere. He was about to think that it had not + been thought worth while printing when he noticed on the front page, in + large letters, “The Boy Reporter’s Great Discovery,” and then followed the + complete account, just as he had written it. This was the best thing yet. + Just to think that his story had been considered important enough to print + upon the front page! He could hardly believe it. Surely he had made great + strides, and Archie began to realise that it is not experience that is + most needed in journalism, but something to write about. “I have simply + been fortunate in finding some interesting things,” he said, to himself, + and then, after a light breakfast in a quaint Italian restaurant around + the corner, he hurried down-town to the office of the newspaper. + </p> + <p> + Archie was beginning to feel, by now, that he had worked for a long time + upon the paper, and as he had become acquainted with almost every one + connected with it, this wasn’t a strange feeling for him to have. And it + was evident, too, that the editors intended to keep him busy for some time + to come, and Archie realised that he was in newspaper work to stay, for a + time, at least. And he was overjoyed at the prospect, for he found the + whole business as fascinating and as interesting as he had expected it + would be. + </p> + <p> + Mr. Jennings, of the evening edition, was at the office when Archie + arrived, and sent for him to come in. “Here is fifty dollars,” he said, + “for your work of yesterday, and you will have more coming to you if these + men are convicted. I want to congratulate you on what you have done so + far. Come in this afternoon, and I think Mr. Van Bunting will have a new + plan for you.” + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0012" id="link2HCH0012"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER—THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT + TO THE PHILIPPINES—LEAVING NEW YORK—IN CHICAGO. +</pre> + <p> + AT three o’clock in the afternoon Archie was seated in Mr. Van Bunting’s + office, together with Mr. Jennings and several of the chief members of the + editorial staffs of both editions of the paper. The editors had spread out + before them, on the large table, several maps, and most of them were + busily engaged in making notes on little paper pads. All the time, + however, an excited conversation was being carried on, for some editors + wanted Archie to proceed to the Philippines one way, and some thought that + the better plan would be for him to go by some other route. But the + important fact with Archie was that he was really going to be sent to the + Philippines as a war correspondent, and that he was going to start very + shortly. He had called on Mr. Van Bunting early in the afternoon, and had + then learned for the first time what the new plan was to be. When the + managing editor asked him how he would like to go to the Philippines, + Archie could scarcely reply, so delighted was he with the brilliant + prospect before him. He managed to stammer out a few words, though, in + spite of his surprise. “I always thought war correspondents were selected + from the most experienced men in journalism,” he said, but Mr. Van Bunting + only laughed. “That’s what we have already done, my boy,” he said, “and so + far none of our distinguished correspondents have sent us a thing worth + printing that we didn’t already know. You see they can’t send any more to + us in the way of news than we can get from the War Department in + Washington, and most of these men are too old fogy to send us anything out + of the ordinary line of war correspondence. Now, what we want is for you + to go over there and have some adventures, and write us something which + will be different from what we have had before from the Philippines. We + are sending you, because you have had no experience at such work, and will + be sure to send us something unusual, and that is what we want. If you can + only do as well in the tropics as you have done here in New York, we shall + be more than satisfied with your work. I am sorry that I won’t have time + to give you very complete instructions, but perhaps it will be as well. + And now some of the men are waiting outside to come in and talk this + matter over, so we’ll have them in now.” + </p> + <p> + And Archie found himself in the midst of an editorial conference, during + which many things were discussed. The meeting lasted more than two hours, + and finally it was decided that Archie should travel from New York to San + Francisco, and go from there to Manila on the army transport which was to + sail on the twenty-fifth of the month. This meant that he would have to + leave the city in two days’ time, and Archie announced himself as quite + willing to do this, as he had few preparations to make. The editors gave + him many instructions about how he was to address his correspondence, and + how he should proceed in the event of finding it necessary to send + despatches by cable. And at the end of the conference he felt that he knew + all that he would need to know, so that he could start off without fear of + not being able to fulfil his mission. As far as Archie could understand + it, his chief instructions as to duty were to the effect that he must have + as many experiences as possible of as many different kinds, and that he + must write about them in a perfectly natural way, just as if he were + writing a letter to the folks at home. And he thought, of course, that + this would be very easy to do. + </p> + <p> + Mr. Van Bunting gave him a letter of credit for six hundred dollars, which + amount, he said, would probably be sufficient to pay his expenses while he + was in the Philippines, and he also gave him a cheque for three hundred + dollars, which was intended to pay the expense of getting to Manila. “Of + course,” said Mr. Van Bunting, “you can spend as much or as little of this + as you please, and if you need more, and we find that the venture is + paying us, why, we will send it on demand.” Archie was so overcome with + the knowledge that he possessed nine hundred dollars, that he could hardly + thank the editor enough, and he made up his mind that he would spend as + little as possible of the sum, and bring back part of it to Mr. Van + Bunting upon his return. He couldn’t imagine how it would be possible for + him to spend so much money, and he felt that, after some of his + experiences since he left home, he ought to be able to economise in many + ways where other reporters wouldn’t know how to save at all. + </p> + <p> + When the two days were up Archie had made all his preparation, and was + ready to leave New York for Manila. He had sent a long letter home to his + mother, telling her of his great good fortune, and enclosing a cheque for + a hundred dollars, which she was to spend while he was gone. He told her + that he would send her more money from time to time, and felt very proud + as he mailed the letter. He told her, too, that if at any time she didn’t + hear from him on time, she could write to Mr. Van Bunting, and he would + let her know of his whereabouts. This was something which Mr. Van Bunting + had very thoughtfully advised him to do. “Your mother is sure to worry if + the mails are overdue,” he had said, “and if she writes to me, I will + always be able to tell her of your whereabouts, for we can hear of you + through our other correspondents, if not from your own despatches.” So + Archie felt that his mother shouldn’t worry, since he was such a fortunate + boy in so many ways. + </p> + <p> + The night before leaving he took a long farewell walk up Broadway. + Everything was bright with light, and there was, as usual, a great crowd + of pleasure-seekers on the sidewalks. It was all as fascinating as ever to + Archie, and he felt sorry that he was to leave it so soon. New York had + begun to grow on him, as it grows on any one living there for any length + of time, who is in a position to appreciate the city’s attractions. He + felt that he would almost rather be on Broadway than in the Philippines, + but of course he forgot this feeling when he remembered the confidence + which Mr. Van Bunting had reposed in him by sending him upon such an + important mission. So, after he had passed all the bright theatres and + restaurants, he turned down a quiet side street and returned to his + lodging, so that he might have a good night’s rest before starting on his + long journey. + </p> + <p> + At seven in the morning he was up again, and at nine o’clock he was + bidding farewell to his many friends in the editorial rooms of the Evening + Enterprise. Every one congratulated him upon his great good luck in + getting such a chance to distinguish himself, and when they had done + telling him that he had a great future before him, Archie felt happier + than ever before in all his life. + </p> + <p> + The train left the Grand Central Station at one o’clock, and Mr. Jennings + went with him to the station to see him well started upon the journey. + “You may be sure we are all much interested in you, Archie,” he said, as + the train was leaving, “and we shall look forward anxiously to your safe + return.” These words made Archie very glad, for it cheered him to know + that at least one of the editors liked him for himself as well as for what + he could do. + </p> + <p> + The Southwestern Limited seemed to fairly fly along the banks of the + beautiful Hudson, and everything was so delightful that Archie could + scarcely believe that only a week or two before he had been walking along + country roads, anxious to reach New York, that he might become an office + boy. Every thing in this train was as perfect as modern ingenuity could + make it, and there was no lack of interesting things to be examined, when + Archie tired of the landscape. Then, when the train had been two hours out + of New York, he discovered that the famous president of this great railway + system was aboard, and, mustering up his courage, he determined to + introduce himself. He had long been anxious to see this famous + after-dinner orator and statesman, and here was a chance which might not + come soon again. So he went back to the drawing-room, and found the great + man to be quite as pleasant as he was interesting, and Archie was asked to + seat himself and tell something about his experiences since leaving home. + Everything he said was listened to with great interest, and this + distinguished wit seemed to find many of the adventures very funny indeed. + “You have certainly had some wonderful experiences,” he said, when Archie + had finished, “and I can appreciate your anxiety to leave school. I had + that desire myself when I was a boy of about fifteen, but my father + succeeded in making me change my opinion on the subject, and without much + argument, unless you can call an ox-team and a stony pasture an argument. + I had been asking to stay at home from school for a long time. I said that + I was too old to be sitting there with a lot of girls and some younger + boys, and that I wanted to work. Finally, my father said that I could stay + at home if I cared to, and that he would let me work on the farm for a + time. I was overjoyed, of course, at the prospect of staying out of + school. + </p> + <p> + “The next morning I was awakened at four o’clock, and had to swallow my + breakfast in a hurry, because I was late, my father said. Then he took me + out to the barn and ordered me to hitch up the ox-team, and when this was + done he took me out to a pasture lot and told me to pick up all the + boulders there. Well, I picked up boulders all day long, and by evening my + back and arms were so sore I could hardly move them. I was too tired to + eat supper, and was soon asleep in bed. When my father awoke me at four + the next morning, I told him to let me alone and that I was going back to + school. After that I was content to stay in school, and said nothing more + about leaving until I had finished the course and was ready to go to + college.” + </p> + <p> + And Archie thought it very queer that such a famous man should have had + such experiences when a boy. He remained in the drawing-room for more than + an hour, and when he left he felt perfectly sure that he had been talking + with the most charming man in the world. + </p> + <p> + The train sped on and on, and when daylight came the next morning they + were passing through Northern Ohio. Early in the afternoon they reached a + great smoky metropolis, spread out for miles over the plains. Archie knew + that this must be Chicago, and he decided, as this was Saturday, and the + steamer wouldn’t leave San Francisco until the next Friday, that he would + have time to remain here over Sunday. So he left the train at the station + in Pacific Avenue, and, Finding a hotel near the station, he started out + to see something of the city famous for its dirt and for the World’s Fair, + two widely different things. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0013" id="link2HCH0013"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + SAN FRANCISCO—THE TRANSPORT GONE—WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY + PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER—THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE found Chicago to be so widely different from New York that + everything he saw was new and interesting to him. In the afternoon he + managed to see something of the congested business section of the city, + the tall office buildings, the great stores, and the famous Board of + Trade. It was all very fine, he thought, but still it wasn’t nearly so + fascinating to him as New York had been on the first day he visited it. + “Chicago seems so very much like some great town,” he explained to the + hotel clerk in the evening. “I feel as if I were not in a great city at + all, because there are not the evidences of a large and wealthy population + that we have everywhere in New York.” Archie spoke of New York as if he + had lived there always, and found much to criticise in Chicago. But toward + evening he went up to Lincoln Park and the beautiful North Shore, and he + felt that there was nothing more beautiful in New York than this + magnificent park, and this handsome Lake Shore Drive, with its great + houses whose lawns reached down almost to the lake itself. On the South + Side of the city, too, he found some handsome streets and residences, but + there was always that feeling of being in some rapidly growing town. It + wasn’t hard for Archie to realise that there were older houses in his + native town than could be found anywhere in the great city of Chicago. + </p> + <p> + The greatest difference between Chicago and New York was to be noticed in + the evening. Instead of the brilliantly lighted thoroughfares of upper + Broadway and Twenty-third and Thirty-fourth Streets, he found but one + street in Chicago which was at all illuminated, and the illuminations + there were chiefly signs in front of dime museums. The streets, too, were + not so crowded, and Archie almost longed that he could be back on + Broadway, if only for a little while. + </p> + <p> + On Sunday he found Chicago to be a more noisy city than he had ever been + in before on that day, and he found that the people made good use of their + one weekly holiday. All places of amusement were open, and everything was + running in “full blast.” + </p> + <p> + The parks seemed to be very popular, indeed, and there were numerous water + excursions upon Lake Michigan, to Milwaukee, St. Joe, and various other + neighbouring cities. The street-cars were crowded all day long, many of + them taking people to a Sunday game of baseball at the Athletic Park. All + of this was very interesting and very new to Archie, but it didn’t make + him anxious to remain in Chicago any longer than Monday morning, so on + that day he took the limited train for the Pacific Coast, for he had + determined not to stop off again until he reached Denver. + </p> + <p> + Days of weary travel over a level, uninteresting stretch of ground + followed the departure of the train from Chicago, and had not Archie found + some interesting persons to talk with he would have been very weary long + before reaching Denver. As it was, he managed to pass the time very + pleasantly until the train entered Colorado, and after that he found much + that was new to look at until he reached Denver. Here he remained for half + a day, just long enough to see something of the city and a little of the + neighbouring country. Then, taking a train for San Francisco, he reached + that city on Thursday afternoon, and immediately began to make + arrangements for sailing. He found, to his great disappointment, that the + army transport had sailed the previous day, contrary to the expectations + of the editors, and of the War Department itself, until the arrival of + important despatches from Manila, which made it necessary to start the + transport at once with supplies of ammunition. Archie hardly knew what to + do. He had not anticipated anything like this, and could scarcely think of + any plan for a time, but, finally, he proved himself equal to the + emergency. He went to the naval agent and asked him when the transport + would be due at Honolulu, and then he ascertained that a passenger steamer + sailing for that port on Saturday would reach the destination three days + sooner than the transport, so that by taking the liner he would have three + extra days in Honolulu, and would be able to reach Manila on schedule + time, after all. He at once decided that this was the thing for him to do, + and as soon as he thought of taking the steamer it occurred to him that he + might possibly be able to work his way to Honolulu, instead of paying the + regular passenger fare, which he knew was high. So he went down to the + great docks, and, after interviewing the second steward, he approached the + chief steward himself, and asked if there wasn’t something that he could + do aboard the ship to earn his passage. The chief steward was thoughtful + for a time, and finally said, “Well, yes, I believe there is. We haven’t + any one to peel vegetables yet, and if you think you care to do that work + I guess we can fix you up all right.” Archie didn’t wait to consider + whether peeling vegetables was hard work or not. He was too glad to have a + position of any kind aboard ship to be particular about what his work was + like, so he told the steward that he was willing to take the place. “Well, + be on hand at about eight in the morning, and we’ll see that you get to + Honolulu.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was overjoyed at his good management. “I am going to save about a + hundred dollars,” he said to himself, “and I will have this money to send + home to mother.” The rest of the afternoon and the evening he spent in + going about San Francisco, and he found it to be more like New York than + any city he had yet seen. There was the same cosmopolitan crowd on the + main thoroughfares, and the same foreign districts here and there + throughout the city. He found a great deal to interest him, especially at + the Presidio, where everything connected with the army monopolised his + attention. He made friends with many of the soldiers who were waiting to + be sent to the Philippines, and hoped, on leaving, that he would meet some + of them there, but he hardly expected that he would meet some of them in + such a strange manner as it was his fate to do in Luzon. + </p> + <p> + After a good night’s rest he was on hand early at the great steamer, where + there was such a scene of bustle and confusion as he had never seen + before, not even in New York. There was a throng of men with trucks who + were loading the late freight, and there was a constant din of noisy + voices, which, combined with the shrieks of escaping steam, made it + impossible to carry on a conversation. Archie hurried aboard to find the + steward, who immediately took him into the galley and introduced him to + the cook, a large, fat Frenchman, with small, blue eyes set far back in + his head. He seemed to be a pleasant man, and Archie thought that he would + like him very much. + </p> + <p> + “Well, does ze youngster vant to vork, eh! Eef he do, I say you pare zis + potate for dinee as quick you can.” And the fellow pointed to a great bag + of potatoes and a paring-knife. “Now you sit zere in da corner,” continued + the cook, “and keep out uf my vay.” Archie found a stool and sat down, + and, having brought an apron with him, he put it on and began work. The + cook watched him closely, so that Archie soon learned to pare the potatoes + very nicely, and of course he was able to get along faster and faster as + he became more and more experienced. He managed, through great effort, to + get the bag finished in time for dinner, or luncheon, as it was called on + the bill of fare, and then he soon had to begin on other vegetables, which + were to be served at the more complete evening meal. There were more + potatoes, and some turnips and apples as well, to be prepared, and it kept + the boy busy all the afternoon, cleaning as hard as he could, and never + seeming to get done. The cook urged him always to hurry, and seemed + determined to have everything ready on time. And Archie began to realise + that he was working under a rather severe master. + </p> + <p> + He was again successful in getting the vegetables finished in time for the + evening meal, and then he had an idea that he might be allowed to rest for + awhile, but he soon realised his mistake. He was advised to begin work on + the potatoes for breakfast if he didn’t want to get up at two o’clock in + the morning and pare them, so once more he took up the knife and began to + clean and scrape. It was ten o’clock before he had finished, and he found + himself too tired to spend any time on the after-deck with the crew, but + went at once down into the small, stuffy room where he was to sleep with + some of the stewards. His back ached from bending over, and his hands were + all sore from being scraped. + </p> + <p> + Things were not very pleasant in this bedroom, but poor Archie was glad + enough to be able to lie down on the hard straw tick and go to sleep. He + slept soundly until he was awakened at four o’clock in the morning by the + second cook, who ordered him up-stairs to work. There was no time to wash, + and no place where he could wash, so the boy was obliged to go up just as + he was, much as he disliked doing so. And once up-stairs there were + various chores which were waiting for him in the galley, so that he was + kept running until breakfast was served. And then it was time to begin + paring vegetables again. This turned out to be the invariable daily + programme, and Archie became rather discouraged. Had it not been for the + thought that by doing this he was saving money to send home, he would have + been miserable indeed, but this idea kept him hopeful. He was seasick, + too, for a time, and was obliged to keep cleaning vegetables in the galley + during the whole period of his suffering. The days when he was ill in this + way were the most disagreeable ones of the voyage, and Archie often + described afterward his feelings as he sat peeling potatoes with a bucket + standing beside him. Each night he slept like a log, and each morning he + was obliged to get up at four o’clock and start work again. It was the + same thing day after day, tiresome and monotonous, so that Archie wasn’t + sorry when the beautiful island hove in sight, and they anchored in the + picturesque bay of Honolulu. + </p> + <p> + Once at Honolulu, Archie’s term of service on board the liner was over, + and he was glad, indeed, to get ashore, where he learned that the + transport had not yet arrived, but was expected in two or three days’ + time. These two or three days Archie determined to spend in sightseeing, + and he spent his time to excellent advantage in visiting every quarter of + Honolulu and seeing every side of life in the Hawaiian capital. He found + it a delightful place. There was much that was interesting to see, the + people were pleasant to meet, and the climate was perfect. He was almost + sorry when he learned that the transport had anchored in the bay! + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0014" id="link2HCH0014"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT—A STORM AT SEA—ARRIVAL IN MANILA. +</pre> + <p> + THE transport did not remain long at Honolulu, and before leaving Archie + had several things which he wanted to do. In the first place, he felt that + he ought to write the story of his experiences so far, and send it to Mr. + Van Bunting; so he did sit down and describe in detail his experiences at + cleaning vegetables on board the Pacific liner. He wasn’t sure whether + this was anything that Mr. Van Bunting would care to print, but he decided + to send it on, anyhow. He would have been surprised had he observed the + enthusiasm with which this letter was read in the Enterprise office a + month later. He would have been no longer in any doubt as to whether it + was anything worth printing had he read the Enterprise of the following + day, when the letter appeared on the second page as one of the chief + features of the paper. + </p> + <p> + Before leaving, too, Archie sent a long, cheerful letter home, saying + nothing of his being seasick on board the liner, or of his having had to + work so hard. He devoted his letter to telling of the many interesting + things he had seen, and of his bright prospects for becoming a successful + newspaper man. He wrote a shorter letter to Jack Sullivan, which was + intended to be read to all the members of the Hut Club, for Archie felt + that it was no more than right that they should know something of his + success. He found it very hard to realise, away off here in Honolulu, that + he had ever been a member of the club, and that he had ever lived in tents + behind the barn. He felt very manly now, and his boyhood seemed far away + behind him, so far away that he now felt like a man of twenty-five rather + than like a boy of eighteen. He was beginning to realise that age is not + always governed by years alone, but that experience does much to make one + old. + </p> + <p> + As soon as the transport had anchored in the bay, Archie went aboard to + present his credentials to the commanding officer. He found the general + very pleasant to meet, and a very appreciative listener as he told of his + scheme for overtaking the transport. The officer was surprised, of course, + that such a young fellow should be going to the islands as correspondent, + but the things he said were very encouraging to Archie, “I tell you what,” + the general remarked, at one time during the conversation, “I believe that + a young fellow like Dunn, here, can find out a great many more interesting + things than an older man could ever discover. You see the youngster has + ambition and energy on his side, and ambition and energy are two mighty + powerful things when they’re combined. I’d hate to buck up against ‘em + myself.” The other officers agreed with the general in this remark, and + Archie began to feel that, after all, he might not have such a hard time + finding interesting things to write about as he had expected. + </p> + <p> + The transport remained in port but one day, and in thirty hours after her + arrival Archie found himself sailing again over the blue Pacific. The + weather, for a few days, was almost perfect. A cloudless sky overhead, a + warm breeze from the west, and a smooth sea made things very pleasant + aboard ship, and Archie began to realise that there are times when it is + delightful to be at sea. The vessel was very much overcrowded with troops, + and the sleeping quarters were but little more pleasant than aboard the + liner. Archie shared a stateroom with three sergeants, and they managed to + have a lively time during the voyage. They played games, told stories, and + slept in the afternoons, but all this, of course, grew rather tiresome + after a time, and the voyage was becoming monotonous, when there came a + severe storm which kept things moving for three days. + </p> + <p> + None of the navigating officers had expected a gale, so that when it came + every one was taken wholly by surprise, and it came so suddenly that there + was no time at all for preparation. The sky became quickly dark one + afternoon about three o’clock, and soon the whole horizon was a mass of + great black clouds, which every moment seemed to come lower and lower + until they directly overhung the ship. There was great excitement aboard + the ship. Officers hurried here and there shouting orders to their men, + and the cavalrymen rushed about in a frenzy of haste, trying to devise + means to save their horses, most of which were stabled upon the deck. + Archie looked on in breathless interest, and was surprised to find that he + wasn’t at all frightened. He even found himself making mental notes of the + scene, so that he could send the story of it all to Mr. Van Bunting when + he reached Manila. + </p> + <p> + There was but little time for rushing about, and it was soon evident that + the horses would many of them be lost, because there seemed to be + absolutely no way of saving them if the waves were high enough to break + over the bulwarks. The storm soon broke in great fury, beginning with a + fierce wind which swept the waves before it. There was but little rain, + and the waves rose higher and higher with every minute, until the heavy + ship began to roll and pitch in a frightful way, so that the soldiers + began to think, some of them, that she would certainly sink. Finally the + waves were so high they dashed themselves over the decks, and no one was + allowed above the gangways. The cries of the poor horses, as they felt + themselves being washed overboard, were frightful to hear, and many a + trooper cried himself as he thought of his horse foundering in the raging + sea without. Before many minutes all was as dark as night, though the + watch pointed to but four o’clock, and all lights were burning below deck. + It was impossible to keep a light above, for no lantern could burn in such + a storm. + </p> + <p> + The waves began gradually to subside at ten o’clock at night, and a slow + steady rain came, which soon calmed the sea to a great extent. As soon as + it was safe to go above deck, it was found that more than a hundred horses + had been lost overboard, and that one mast had been carried away. Down + below nearly every man was in his bunk, for there was scarcely a person + who was not seasick, and most of them wouldn’t have cared if the ship had + gone down with all aboard, such was their feeling of despondency. Archie + was as sick as any of the others, but was able to make notes of + occurrences just the same. And when he grew better the next day, he wrote + an excellent account of the storm to send to the Enterprise on his arrival + in Manila. + </p> + <p> + After this rough weather experience, every man aboard was anxious to reach + port, and when, after many more days, the Bay of Cavité was reached, a + great cheer went up from a thousand throats, for everyone was overjoyed at + the sight of land. + </p> + <p> + The transport came to anchor off the forts which had once been Spain’s, + and it was announced that no one would be allowed to land for two days, + until advices could be had from Manila and the interior of the island. + This was very trying for Archie, being obliged to sit on deck for two + whole days, looking at a shore which seemed very inviting, in spite of the + general dilapidated appearance of the various buildings and docks. + Everything looked different from anything he had seen before, and the boy + felt that he could hardly wait to be allowed to explore some of those + streets which were so narrow, and those houses which were built in such a + peculiar fashion. + </p> + <p> + Finally, the permission came for the troops to land, and Archie received + the permission of the general to remain with them as long as he wanted to + do so. And as he had no other plans, the young correspondent decided that + it would be a good plan for him to stay right with one of these regiments, + for the time being at any rate. He knew that they would be likely to be + sent to the front immediately, and the front seemed the place for him to + be. + </p> + <p> + And then he was already acquainted with many of the men, and with the + colonel, and he realised that this would be an advantage to him in his + work. So he made his plans to keep with them. + </p> + <p> + First they went to Manila, where they remained for a week. The quaint old + city was a veritable fairy-land of wonders to Archie, who had never before + been in a city so ancient, and here there were so many unusual things to + be seen. There seemed to be absolutely no end to the winding streets, + delightful old houses, and interesting churches, and the boy spent many + days in exploring every corner of the island capital. The colonel warned + him several times that he must look out for robbers and other suspicious + characters, but Archie laughed at his fears. But the colonel was right, as + he found later on. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0015" id="link2HCH0015"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES + AMONG THE NATIVES—SEIZED BY THE REBELS. +</pre> + <p> + THE days passed very quickly in Manila, the regiment was quartered in an + old palace which had once been used as a residence by the Spanish + governors of the islands, and Archie remained in the palace with them. + There was very little to do while they were there. Each morning there were + anxious inquiries for news from the front, but there was always the same + discouraging reply that no trace had yet been found of the fleeing + Aguinaldo. The men were gradually becoming disheartened at the long wait, + and there were frequent statements by the officers that Aguinaldo would + soon be caught if they were sent out after him. The dissatisfaction with + the general in command grew stronger every day, and at last things reached + a point where there was very little loyalty and patriotism displayed among + the troops. + </p> + <p> + The drilling was continued, however, by order of the colonel, and every + morning the troops marched out to a public square near the palace, and + went through the same old manoeuvres which they had practised for months + past. And it was harder for them to drill each week. At first they were + willing enough to work, for there was then some prospect of their being + able to use their knowledge in a fight, but now it was beginning to seem + that they would simply remain in this old palace for a few months longer, + and then go back again to San Francisco. With this opinion in their + hearts, it is not to be wondered at that most of the men became slouchy + and careless in their manners and dress, or that even the officers + themselves became disgusted at the long wait for marching orders. + </p> + <p> + Things had been going on in this way for a long time, when Archie made up + his mind that it was time he was hustling about and finding something to + write about which would be interesting to readers of the Enterprise. He + had sent two articles describing his life with the soldiers in the old + palace, but he knew that he ought to find something more exciting, and + more like his first articles. So, after much thought, he decided that a + good plan would be for him to take a little trip into the interior of the + island, to see whether he could find any traces of the insurgents. The + colonel had held all along for a month, now, that the Filipinos were + probably all about Manila, and still he couldn’t get the permission of the + general in command to go out and investigate the matter. The colonel + figured that it would be an easy thing for the insurgents to come as near + to the city as they cared to now, for Lawton and Wheeler were far away in + the interior after Aguinaldo, and the troops in Manila were quietly + drilling, and eating, and sleeping, with no thought of doing anything + else. This line of argument seemed very reasonable to Archie, and he + volunteered to go out and see if he could make any discoveries. The + colonel assured him that he would be in no danger, even if he were caught + by the rebels, for they would never suspect a boy of Archie’s age and size + of being a spy. So the lad felt no fear at all, and made what few + preparations there were to be made before starting. He secured a knapsack + from the commissary officer, and in this he placed what few belongings he + wanted to take with him, together with his note-books and some provisions + for the trip. Then he secured a small pistol, which he carried in his hip + pocket, and he was disappointed because the colonel would not allow him to + carry a rifle. And when he had everything ready he said good-bye to his + friends in the regiment, and departed from the palace amid a multitude of + cheers. At the last moment the colonel tried to dissuade him from + starting, for fear he might meet with some accident, but Archie was + determined to make the attempt. + </p> + <p> + It was his plan not to go farther than fifty miles in the interior, for he + thought that if he found no traces of the rebels in that distance there + would be little use in going farther into the forest, for, it would be + almost impossible to find them there. So he set out gaily upon his trip of + exploration, and Archie couldn’t remember when he had been so happy + before, save on that day when he first visited the office of the + Enterprise. This adventure was exciting enough to please the wildest boy + in America, and Archie could imagine how envious the other boys would be + if they could but know the trip he was having. It had an official air to + it, too, for had not the colonel been most anxious, in the beginning, that + he should go, and did he not say that he would reward him handsomely if he + were successful in locating any of the insurgents, or in proving that he + had been right when he said they were near Manila? It was all as perfect + an adventure as Archie could have imagined. He could not have planned a + better one if he had been able to select any trip he could think of. + </p> + <p> + He planned that it would take him at least three days to walk fifty miles, + and perhaps longer, for the roads were not very good in some places. He + knew that he would find many villages and towns along the way, too, for + the island was thinly settled in this neighbourhood. So if he were obliged + to rest, he would never be at a loss for a place to get a bed. Archie + couldn’t help thinking, as he walked along the road outside Manila, this + first morning, that he might find a body of the insurgents in possession + of one of these towns. They were very bold, he had heard, and they + probably knew that there were no American troops anywhere in the + neighbourhood, outside the city of Manila itself. And, knowing this, he + knew they wouldn’t hesitate to camp at the very gates of the city, for + they were marvellously successful in getting away into the interior + whenever an American force made its appearance. + </p> + <p> + As he thought of this possibility, Archie couldn’t help being a little + fearful of what might happen to him should he fall into the hands of the + insurgents, and he began to wonder if he had not been a little foolhardy, + after all, in starting off on such a wild-goose chase. “But I will have + something new to send Mr. Van Bunting about the interior towns,” he said + to himself, “and if I am captured, why, I will have a great deal to write + about when I am released.” This thought made the lad happy again, and he + trudged along the road with as much vim and energy as he had displayed + during those weary days when he was walking to New York to make his + fortune. And it was a much more interesting country in which to walk than + the New York State counties had been. The vegetation was rich and + luxuriant everywhere, palm-trees, vines, and flowers growing in profusion + all along the road. In every dooryard, in front of every hut, there grew + what seemed to Archie a veritable fairy bower of the most richly coloured + flowers in existence. And they were growing, apparently, without + cultivation. He had seen nothing like them before, even in California, and + he longed to pluck some of them to send home, if they had only been wax + instead of nature’s blossoms. As it was, he kept his arms filled with them + for awhile, but after a time he grew tired carrying them, and was obliged + to drop them by the roadside. + </p> + <p> + The country looked as if it might have been very prosperous at one time. + There were plantations laid out in excellent fashion, and the soil seemed + rich and fertile. But instead of growing crops, and storehouses filled + with spices and coffee, there was desolation everywhere, and it was easy + to see that the Spaniards had determined to leave but little behind them + for the Yankees. Every other farmhouse and wayside hut was deserted, their + occupants having gone, apparently, to join Aguinaldo, and the whole + country, outside the towns, seemed to be wholly deserted and left to grow + up in weeds and tangled vines. + </p> + <p> + The sun was warm, the sky was a perfect blue, and it seemed a delightful + day in every way. But it made Archie sad to walk through a district which + had been made so desolate, and he hadn’t walked many hours before he + wished that he might soon reach a town, where he could find some life, and + where he could remain overnight. For by the middle of the afternoon he was + tired walking, and made up his mind that fifteen miles was enough for any + one to do in one day. But he was obliged to keep on walking for two hours + longer before he reached a village, and the great sun was just sinking + behind the blue hills in the distance when he entered the one main village + street, which was long and narrow, winding in and out among the cabins and + huts, as if it had been laid out after the houses were built, for the + convenience of the people. It was a poor excuse for a public thoroughfare. + There had probably been a pavement of some sort at one time, but now the + street was a mass of rubbish of every sort, straw, dust, old bricks, and + bits of stone being thrown together in every rut, so that it was + exceedingly difficult to walk along with any comfort. + </p> + <p> + There was no life visible in the settlement. Almost every hut had its + shades drawn at the windows, and there was absolutely no one to be seen in + the street. As he passed down the road, Archie could catch occasional + glimpses of black eyes staring at him through a lattice, or he could hear + some muttered word as he walked close to a window. From these signs he + knew that he was observed, and he felt very much embarrassed as he + continued his walk down this deserted lane, for he felt instinctively now + that hundreds of eyes were watching his every movement. + </p> + <p> + Finally, he came to the public square, and he sat down here to look about + him. From general appearances, he judged this to be a town of some two + thousand inhabitants, for there was a very respectable administration + building, and a good-sized church. There were but two streets of any + consequence, the one by which he had entered the town, and another running + at right angles in the opposite direction. In this latter street, as he + stood in the square, he noticed a three-story structure with a sign + outside, and he decided to go there and make inquiries as to where he + might be able to secure a lodging for the night. It looked as if it might + be an inn of some sort, or at least a store, so he walked rapidly up to + the entrance and knocked twice upon the door. This place, in spite of its + sign, looked more deserted and shut-up than any other building he had yet + seen in the town, and he wondered whether he would receive any answer to + his knocks. It was indeed a long time before he heard a sound within, but + at last there was some muttering inside, the door flew open, and Archie + found himself in the arms of three Filipinos, who threw him upon the floor + and bound him, hands and feet. It was all so sudden that he had no time to + cry out, and before he could say anything at all he was thrown into a dark + room, and the door shut behind him. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0016" id="link2HCH0016"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + A PLEASANT CAPTOR—BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE—FIRST + GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO. +</pre> + <p> + FOR a long time Archie lay still upon the floor, being unable to move a + muscle from the shock of his encounter with the men, and because he was + tightly bound with ropes. And then he at last went off to sleep, feeling + frightened because he was in the hands of strange men, and a little + satisfied, too, because he was the victim of some adventure which might + turn out in a very interesting way. + </p> + <p> + When he awoke, it was morning, and the light came into the room through + two small square windows, set high up in the wall. Archie looked about the + room with great curiosity, but found little there to interest him. There + was nothing to be seen but an old bed without spring or mattress, and a + rickety chair with but three legs, which stood in one corner. The walls, + he was surprised to observe, were handsomely decorated with tapestries, + and Archie at once made up his mind that this had at one time been a + private dwelling-house, and had probably been owned by some rich Spaniard + who kept a store on the ground floor, and lived in these rooms. The + insurgents had probably driven the family out of the country and had taken + possession of the house, which they had stripped of everything useful, + leaving the tapestries and works of art behind them. + </p> + <p> + These suppositions were cut short by the entrance of a man who appeared to + be a half-breed, and who immediately began to speak to Archie in broken + English. The fellow had a pleasant face, and presented a fairly good + appearance, and Archie wondered how he could have come to this place. “I + suppose you have been wondering,” said the man, “why you have been thrown + into this room, and it won’t take me long to explain things. You see this + town belongs to us just now, and we don’t propose to have any Yankee spies + around here to tell Otis of our whereabouts. There ain’t no troops in this + town now, but there’s likely to be any minute, and we patriots was sent + here to take possession of things and arrange quarters for our army. Let + me tell you that the Filipino army will be in this town to-day, and if you + don’t look sharp you’ll be the first prisoner to be shot. Aguinaldo isn’t + a man to deal easily with spies, and if he thought you was out here for + that purpose he’d have you riddled with bullets in a minute.” The man came + up to Archie and began to undo the ropes. “I reckon I can trust you free + for awhile, for there’s no use in your trying to get away, with the + Filipino army all around the town. Sit down there now, and I’ll see that + you get some breakfast. You can tell, perhaps, that I ain’t no Filipino, + nor never was one. I’m from Arizona, U. S. A., and I’m fightin’ with these + rebels for what there is in it just now. I’m mighty curious to find out + how you come to be out in these diggin’s, youngster.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was willing enough to tell all about himself. He liked this man, in + spite of his being with the rebels, and he felt that he would be able to + make friends with him if he were careful to do so. And the best plan + seemed to be for him to tell all about himself, how he happened to go to + New York, and how he had been sent out here as a boy correspondent for the + Enterprise. The man from Arizona listened to the recital with open mouth + and eyes, and he frequently laughed outright at some of the experiences + Archie described. When the narrative was finished, he seized Archie’s + hand, and said, “My name’s Bill Hickson, and you can count on me after + this fer a friend, youngster. I’ll swan if I ever heard tell of sich nerve + in my life. I’ll see that you get out of this scrape all right, but you + must be careful to keep up appearances of being under guard. I’m a big-bug + in this Filipino shack, but I wouldn’t dare to let you out openly. So you + jist kind of lay around and look despondent, and depend on me to make + things as easy for you as I can. You kin come down-stairs now, if you + like, and I’ll present you to my friends. There don’t none of ‘em speak no + English but me, and all I can do is to interduce you, and tell ‘em that + you ain’t no spy, and that you are very sorry you ever ran up agin this + here town. And I guess I’ll be expressin’ your sentiments exactly, won’t + I?” Archie nodded, but in his heart he felt that he wasn’t sorry he had + run up against the town. This Bill Hickson, in himself, was a character + worth going miles to meet, and if what he said was true, Archie stood a + good chance of seeing the notorious Aguinaldo, with his army of Filipinos, + before the day was over. + </p> + <p> + When he reached the lower floor, he found several men lounging about in + another poorly furnished room, and they were all similar in appearance to + the men he had seen at the door the night before. They looked at him in an + indifferent way, and didn’t seem surprised that he should be walking about + without restraint. Bill Hickson stepped up to some of them, and, after a + few words in some language Archie didn’t understand, motioned for the boy + to step up. He was told to shake hands with “all the gents,” and after he + had done so he was offered a cigar, and Archie began to realise that it + was a very good thing that he had a friend at the Filipino court. He + thought, too, that if these men were samples, Aguinaldo had a very poor + lot of retainers, and later on he perceived the real cause for the failure + of the rebels to do anything more than keep up a constant retreat. It was + plain to see that the followers of the rebel leader were “in it for what + it was worth.” They had no difficulty, any of them, in getting enough to + eat, and often they had opportunities to enjoy themselves in great fashion + by taking possession of some Filipino village and ejecting the inmates of + some particularly fine house, with a well-stocked wine-cellar. + </p> + <p> + In looking out of the window Archie perceived that the town looked very + different this morning than when he saw it the evening before. Instead of + drawn blinds and shuttered windows, there was everywhere an evident + attempt at decoration in honour of the coming army. The streets were + crowded with a throng in holiday garb, and some of the soldiers of the + rebel army had already arrived, as they could be easily distinguished by + their ragged dress and ridiculous airs, walking up and down the street. It + was all such a scene as Archie had never seen before, and would have made + a great success as the scenario for a comic opera. But as a welcome to an + army, supposedly victorious, it was a dismal failure, and Archie wondered + what General Aguinaldo would think when he entered the town and saw such + shoddy patriotism everywhere. He hadn’t long to wait, however, before + seeing the famous rebel and the effect upon him of the celebration in his + honour. It was about ten o’clock in the morning when he rode into the + public square, followed by about two hundred ragged Filipinos, armed with + all sorts of guns and pistols. Archie saw the arrival from the roof of the + building which was his mock prison, and he could scarcely refrain from + laughing outright when he saw the boasted Filipino “army.” It was the + poorest excuse for a body of troops that he could imagine. + </p> + <p> + Aguinaldo rode a fine bay horse, as did several of his followers, but by + far the majority of the regiment, if such it could be called, was afoot, + and most of them were barefooted, too. The rebel leader looked very much + like most of his pictures, with the exception that he had an older look, + and some gray hairs about the temples. He was attired in a gaudy uniform + of some sort, with epaulets and a Spanish general’s hat, and he carried + himself with great dignity of manner. Dismounting from his horse, he + entered the administration building, where he held a conference with the + town officials, and probably made them pay over whatever money was in the + treasury “for the cause.” He remained within for two hours or more, and + all this time Archie stood upon the roof and watched the remarkable scene + in the streets below. The troops had scattered, and were engaged in + robbing the housewives of whatever they had in their houses to eat. And + the women seemed willing to provide them with whatever they could afford, + and there was much enthusiasm evident everywhere. But the celebration was + very quiet, in spite of the friendly reception, There were no bands of + music, no cheering, and no singing of battle-hymns. The whole affair + reminded Archie of some camp of a section of the famous Coxey army, when + he had seen it long ago. The soldiers were no better dressed than tramps, + and there was but little more discipline among them. + </p> + <p> + And the celebration and occupation of the town came to a sudden end. While + Archie stood upon the roof at noontime, he saw a runner enter the + administration building in great haste, and in a minute Aguinaldo came + hurrying down the steps. Then there was a great commotion in the streets, + and the two hundred followers of the chief were seen assembled in the + square, and before they were all there the general was riding out of the + town toward the interior of the island. There was no noise, and the + inhabitants stood about apparently speechless, and wondering what had + happened. Their reception had come to an untimely end, and their hero had + left them unceremoniously. Soon the last of the straggling troops were out + of the town, and just as Archie was beginning to think of going down from + the roof Bill Hickson stuck his head up and gave him some astonishing + news. “Stay where you’re at, young feller, till these fool Filipinos gits + away from here. You saw how they skedaddled, didn’t ye? Well, Uncle Sam is + comin’ after ‘em with shot-guns, and old Aggy heard the news just in time. + He is bound for the jungle, about forty miles southeast, and he won’t + reach it until to-morrow night, anyhow, and if the officers are quick they + may be able to catch him. Now you stay here, lad, and give ‘em the news + when they git here. They’ll thank you for it, and you may be the means of + gittin’ this fool of an Aguinaldo captured. If you does, why, your + future’s all right. And ye can tell the colonel, or whoever’s in command, + that Bill Hickson is still with ‘em, and that he’s doin’ his best fer + Uncle Sam, and tell ‘em that Aggy has got about three thousand troops + altogether, but only about a thousand with him. Now, good-bye, lad, and I + hope I’ll see ye again.” + </p> + <p> + And Archie saw brave Bill Hickson get down from the roof. He brushed some + tears from his eyes as he realised that here was a brave soldier doing + good work for his country. A moment later he saw him running across the + square with four of the Filipinos, and waving his hat to the “youngster” + as he went. He followed him with his eyes as long as he could, and then he + sat down and made a solemn vow that Bill Hickson should be named among the + heroes of the war. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0017" id="link2HCH0017"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS—ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE descended from the roof, and found everything below in a state of + wild disorder. The fleeing rebels had taken with them all they had time to + get together, but in their haste they had left behind many of their most + useful belongings. In a cupboard of the dining-room Archie found a supply + of food and wines sufficient to feed several people for a week, so he + supposed that it had been the intention of the occupants of the house to + remain for some days. The news that the Americans were coming upset all + their plans, however, and now, as often before, they were obliged to flee + before them, leaving behind most of their creature comforts in the way of + food and furniture. + </p> + <p> + “What a life they must be leading,” thought Archie to himself, “going from + one place to another, constantly endeavouring to hide from the Americans. + Now in some town, now in the wilderness, and again venturing as near as + possible to the boundaries of Manila.” And he could scarcely help admiring + their courage, or recklessness, rather, in camping so near the head of the + American government, where they might expect to be caught in a trap at any + moment. But Archie realised, too, that such an army can get away in a very + short time, and he began to have serious doubts as to whether the + Americans would ever be able to capture Aguinaldo and his men. For knowing + the islands perfectly, and being able to get from one point to another in + the easiest and quickest way, the rebels have a great deal in their + favour. + </p> + <p> + Selecting some canned beef and some native bread and cheese, Archie + managed to make a very good meal for himself, though he ate hurriedly for + fear some of the rebels might return. As soon as he had finished he + returned to his position on the roof, for there he knew that he would be + safe in case the building was entered by the townspeople. From his high + perch he looked down into the streets, and was surprised to find them as + quiet and as much deserted as they had been the night before. The news of + the coming of the Americans had been effective in quieting the enthusiasm + of the morning, and all the townsfolk had again entered their homes and + put the shutters up before their windows. One would have taken the place + for a deserted village, judging from appearances. But Archie knew that + within the shuttered windows and barred doors there were hundreds of + people waiting anxiously for the arrival of the American troops, and + making ready to come out, when required to do so, and again declare their + allegiance to the stars and stripes. The cowardly wretches were diplomatic + enough to be always on the side of the victorious. When the rebels + occupied the town they were loyal to them, and when the Americans came, as + they often did, they came out into the square and cheered loudly for Uncle + Sam. But of course the Americans knew very well that their sympathies were + with the rebels, and the rebels knew it, too, or they would never have + dared to venture so near Manila. + </p> + <p> + About five in the afternoon, there was a sound of many men marching along + the road, and in a little while Archie was able to see the Americans + coming down the street. It was a sight to cheer his heart after all his + experiences of the last day and night. The column was marching at + double-quick, and the handsome colonel rode a great gray horse at the head + of the regiment. Archie saw that they would reach the square in two or + three minutes, and, throwing discretion to the winds, he descended from + the roof, almost fell down the stairways in his haste, and was soon + running toward the administration building. He mounted the great steps + leading up to the portico, just as the colonel rode into the square, and + the expression of surprise on the faces of all the men was funny to see. + In a minute every hat was off, and the regiment was giving “three cheers + for the boy reporter,” while the colonel, rapidly dismounting, hurried up + to speak with Archie. + </p> + <p> + “Why, how did you come here?” he demanded. “Haven’t the rebels been here, + and how did you escape them? Which way did they go, and was Aguinaldo with + them? For pity’s sake, say something.” + </p> + <p> + Archie wasn’t long explaining things, and his news was so explicit and so + valuable that the colonel grasped his hand and said, almost with tears in + his eyes, “God bless you, lad. You may have aided us to catch the gang, + and anyhow you’ve proved your bravery.” + </p> + <p> + By this time the regiment was standing at ease, and all the men were + watching Archie and the colonel with great interest. Knowing that they + were all curious to learn how the lad happened to have escaped the rebels, + the good colonel made a short speech in which he explained everything. He + dwelt particularly upon the bravery of Bill Hickson, and held him up as a + model for all the men to follow. “And now three cheers for Bill Hickson + and our boy reporter again,” he cried, when he had finished, and they were + given with a will by all the men. + </p> + <p> + The regimental officers held a short consultation, and it was decided, on + the strength of the news brought by Archie, to push on after the rebels as + fast as was possible. But it was now sunset, and there was no use trying + to go farther to-night, so it was agreed that the best plan would be to + give the men a good rest overnight, as they had made the entire march from + Manila since five o’clock in the morning. “They will do all the better + to-morrow for the rest,” said the colonel. Archie was valuable in being + able to guide the officers to the building where he had been confined, + assuring them that they would find everything needful there in the way of + food, and a place to sleep. Some of the soldiers were quartered in various + houses of the town, for the people had soon turned out into the street + again, and had expressed their friendship for their “masters,” as they + called them. Archie could hardly refrain from laughing as he saw some of + those who in the morning had bowed down to Aguinaldo vowing everlasting + allegiance to our flag, and he assured the colonel that he couldn’t be too + careful while in the town to guard against surprises. “No one knows the + beasts better than I do,” was the answer. “I know they can’t be trusted.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was invited to remain in the building with the officers, and while + they prepared and ate a lunch he busied himself in writing a description + of his last two days’ experiences. He knew that a messenger would soon + start for Manila, and that a boat would leave that city on the next day + for Hong Kong, so he wanted to get his narrative written in order to send + it to Mr. Van Bunting at once. He felt that he had some very interesting + things to write about, for it wasn’t every correspondent who had seen + Aguinaldo, and had been captured by the rebel army. He knew that most of + them were content to remain in Manila, and send only what they could get + from the general in command, and that this description of the rebels would + be something new, at any rate. So he wrote it very carefully, and + succeeded in getting it ready in time to send, so that it would be in the + office of the Enterprise in less than a month. As he sat at the table + writing, Archie thought of the great changes which can take place in one’s + surroundings in a few weeks. It seemed ages to him since the day when he + left home for the first time, and the experiences he had on his way to New + York seemed now to belong to the far-away period of his boyhood. He was + beginning to feel very old now, because he had been through so much of + late, and he could hardly realise that he was still eighteen. + </p> + <p> + He wrote a short note to his mother at home, telling her not to worry, and + assuring her that he was in good health and in no danger whatever of being + captured by the rebels, for Archie felt quite safe after his experience + with the insurgent leaders. He knew that no one of their prisoners was + ever likely to come to a very bad end. They were far too slipshod in their + methods of holding prisoners. He was sorry not to be able to send a longer + letter home, but he knew that this note was much better than sending + nothing at all, and that it would make his mother very happy to hear from + him at all. + </p> + <p> + The officers, when Archie returned to the dining-room, if such it could be + called, were engaged in making a very good meal from the provisions in the + cupboard, and they thanked Archie warmly for leading them to such a good + place. “By Jove,” said one of the captains, “we sha’n’t want to return to + Manila at all, when we can get such grub as this is outside.” But the + colonel assured them all that they needn’t expect to find such + accommodations everywhere in the interior of the country. “No doubt we’ll + all be living on plantains in a day or two, if we don’t catch that fox of + an Aguinaldo. And I’m willin’ to bet now that we won’t find him. That + feller’s too slick for us. He’s proved it many a time before.” + </p> + <p> + “And to think that he was here only this morning! The nerve of him, to + come within twenty-five miles of Manila!” said another. + </p> + <p> + “I’ll be mighty well satisfied if we can catch a few of his ragged men,” + continued the colonel. “That will be something to have accomplished, + anyhow, and more than some other regiments have done, when they were sent + after him. He’s the cutest feller I’ve heard of in a long while. If it + wasn’t for Bill Hickson we’d never hear tell of him, even. He could enter + Manila, I believe, and go out again without us ever knowin’ it at all.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was now called on to tell something of the rebel leader’s + appearance, and how he had acted while in the town. + </p> + <p> + “I didn’t see very much of him,” said Archie, “because he spent most of + the morning with the big-bugs of the town, over in the administration + building. But when he rode into town on his horse he looked mighty + dignified, though he fell some in my estimation when I saw him standing + up. He looked rather dumpy then. He carried himself with a lot of dignity, + a little more than was becoming, I thought, and he received the cheers of + the people as a matter of course, and hardly took the trouble to + acknowledge them, even by a bow. The officers of the town treated him with + great deference, and I guess there’s no doubt but what the Filipinos look + upon him as their leader.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, there’s no doubt of that,” said the colonel. “We’ve learned that long + ago. They stand up for him whenever he needs them, and they give him all + they’ve got to help carry on the war.” + </p> + <p> + The meal finished, the officers smoked awhile, and then went to bed, for + they were to be up at four in the morning. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0018" id="link2HCH0018"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVIII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS—THE FIRST BATTLE—ARCHIE WOUNDED. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE was awakened at four the next morning by the sound of the bugle, + and, hastily dressing, he hurried down-stairs to learn the plans of the + officers. He found that they were going to start on the march as soon as + the men had drunk their morning coffee, and Archie immediately made + preparations to go with them. The colonel looked on in amazement. “Why are + you packing your knapsack!” he asked. “You surely don’t think you’re going + with us? You never in the world can stand this hard march in the hot sun.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh, yes, I think I can,” said Archie. “You see I have walked a great deal + in these last two months, and I don’t think I will have any difficulty in + keeping up with the troops. And I do so want to see some fighting, and to + learn whether you capture Aguinaldo. You don’t object to my going, now, do + you?” + </p> + <p> + “No,” said the colonel. “If you think you can stand the marching, and are + so anxious to come, why, I suppose you can do so. But you mustn’t blame me + if anything should happen to you.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was ready enough to promise this, for he had no idea that he would + meet with an accident of any kind, and so he continued to pack his things + in the knapsack. The rebels had emptied everything in a corner, and had + evidently intended taking the knapsack with them when they went; but they + left so hurriedly they couldn’t possibly think of everything, and so had + left it behind, much to Archie’s relief, for he would have been unable to + secure another one anywhere outside Manila. In a very short time the + regiment gathered in the streets immediately about the square, and soon + the men were marching out of the town, much to the gratification of the + residents, who watched them from their roofs and windows. Archie fell in + at the head of the column, and found no difficulty in keeping up with the + soldiers near him, though they were marching at a rapid rate. + </p> + <p> + The town limits were soon passed, and they swung into the white country + road, which presented the same scene of desolation which had been + everywhere visible to Archie on his way from Manila. The farm-houses were + nearly all deserted, and there was but little attempt at cultivating the + soil, which would have been productive enough had it not been overgrown + with tangled vines and weeds. And as they went farther into the country + the wilderness increased, until at last the road itself was filled with + growing vines, and the men had difficulty in walking. Every little while + some trooper would fall headlong, tripped by some vine, and the others + would laughingly help him up before passing on. These little incidents did + much to enliven the march, which became monotonous after the first six or + seven hours, and Archie appreciated the mishaps very much until he took a + few tumbles himself. He was usually, much to the amusement of the + officers, marching at the very head of the regiment, and “setting the + pace,” he said, so that he was more likely to trip than any of the others. + He was always the first to discover a snake in the road, too, and kept a + great stick with which to kill them. He seemed to have no fear of them, + but walked up to lay them out, and on one occasion the colonel warned him + just in time or he would certainly have been bitten by a snake whose bite + is certain death. This experience made him more careful, but he still kept + his place at the head of the regiment, and came to be called the mascot by + the men. + </p> + <p> + At noon the regiment halted at a grassy spot, where there were trees, and + made their dinners from their knapsacks. The officers warned them to go + carefully, or they would find themselves without provisions before + returning to Manila, for they had been so sure of catching the rebels at + the town behind that they had neglected to bring along many supplies. Now, + of course, they didn’t know how long it would take them to find them,—two + days at least, and probably longer. + </p> + <p> + Archie had stocked his knapsack with some food from the old headquarters + in the town, so that he felt safe for a few days, at any rate. He ate + carefully, however, and was careful not to waste anything, for he realised + that he might be called upon to aid some of the soldiers before long. + </p> + <p> + Dinner over, the regiment marched on again, for the officers now began to + think that they had made a mistake in not pursuing the fleeing rebels the + night before. They met several Spaniards, who told them that Aguinaldo had + marched all night long without stopping, so that he was now at least + thirty-six hours ahead of them, and some of the men began to be + discouraged, saying that it was no use following him up with such a small + force. “Other regiments have tried to find him in this way, and none of + them have succeeded,” said one of the privates to Archie. “They keep us + marching for three or four days, and finally they decide to return to + Manila, without having found any trace of the rascal beyond hearing that + he had passed this way or that.” + </p> + <p> + The officers couldn’t depend upon what the natives told them of + Aguinaldo’s movements, for, almost without exception, they were in his + favour, and always lied to the Americans to try to throw them off the + track. It was due to this that they proceeded very cautiously, and still, + notwithstanding their extreme care, they found themselves, when night came + on this first day, in a small village where no one had seen anything of + the rebel army. There was no denying the fact that they were off the + trail, and the colonel stormed about in a terrible way when he learned of + their mistake. There was no use going back in the dark to hunt for a trail + they had mistaken in the daylight, so the regiment remained in the village + overnight. They were a lot of very discouraged men, and the officers were + enraged at the mistake, for which there was no one but themselves to + blame. + </p> + <p> + Early in the morning they retraced their way, and started off in an + opposite direction to the one taken yesterday. It seemed that this must + certainly be the path taken by the rebels, but the regiment marched until + nearly noon without seeing any signs of them. Then, when they had halted + for dinner, the colonel decided to let the men rest while two companies + were sent ahead to reconnoitre, and report as to whether there were any + signs of men having passed this way. He was beginning to think that the + whole affair would be a wild-goose chase, and he decided that, if these + companies found nothing, the whole regiment would return to Manila + forthwith, probably to be the laughing-stock of the army there. + </p> + <p> + The remaining companies had nothing to do now but lay about on the soft + grass, and rest. They were encamped in a stretch of grassy loam in the + midst of what appeared to be a dense forest, and all about were evidences + of the great fertility of the soil. The vegetation was so dense that one + could scarcely see through it, and the glade was cool and pleasant, though + overhead the sun was shining as warm as ever. It was a lovely oasis in a + wilderness of undergrowth, and the men enjoyed it to the utmost. + </p> + <p> + About three in the afternoon the sound of firing was heard in the + distance. First there was one shot, then another, and several more at + rapid intervals. Archie was one of the first to jump to his feet, but in a + second every man was at attention, with his musket in his hands. The + colonel listened closely for two minutes, and then the firing began once + more, and this time it seemed nearer. He hesitated no longer, but gave the + order to march ahead. “They’ve evidently found the cowards at last,” he + muttered to Archie. “You stay here, where you will be out of danger.” But + Archie was determined to do nothing of the kind. He felt his pistol safe + in his hip pocket, and when the companies swung out of the forest and into + the road he was marching in his old place at the head of the column. Again + the colonel ordered him to remain behind, but Archie insisted that he + would not, “Then go to the rear,” cried the colonel, angry for the moment. + “I will not have you shot down by a rebel sharpshooter the very first + one.” And Archie knew that he would have to obey. + </p> + <p> + The column went ahead at double-quick, and finally broke into a steady + run. Every minute the noise of rifle-shots sounded nearer, and it seemed + probable that the two companies were retreating before the insurgents. The + men were wild to reach the scene of the firing, and the officers had all + they could do to keep them in line. All the time they were running hardly + a sound was heard save the noise of their boots upon the soft earth, and + they all knew that they could probably take the insurgents by surprise. + </p> + <p> + Archie’s heart was beating very hard as they drew nearer and nearer to the + scene. He felt that he was about to see his first fighting, and he + determined not to miss any part of it. So he gradually ran ahead until + finally he was almost at the head of the column again. + </p> + <p> + The troops made so little noise that the two companies, retreating slowly, + were upon them without knowing it. But when they discovered that their + comrades had come to their aid they set up such a cheering as Archie had + never heard before, and immediately faced about and went ahead again. The + rebels were about a quarter of a mile behind, marching rapidly forward, + and firing as they came. Some of them were running among the trees at the + roadside, firing incessantly, and hitting some poor soldier almost every + time they fired. They were the famous sharpshooters, of whom the soldiers + in Manila had heard so much. + </p> + <p> + When the rebels observed that the Americans had received reinforcements, + they halted suddenly, and before they could turn about the Yankees were + almost upon them, firing volleys into them as they came. Many of the + insurgents fell in the roadway, and the others fled wildly in every + direction. Most of them entered the dense forest, where the Americans + captured nearly a hundred of them after the others had surrendered, and + some were such good runners that they escaped down the roadway. The whole + rebel army presented a scene of wild confusion. Some of the men knelt and + begged for mercy, and some cried out in a horrible way as they saw the + dreaded Yankees advancing. But it was all over very soon. The prisoners + were placed in line, and marched back along the road, and the dead, of + which there were about fifty, were soon buried. Aguinaldo had escaped in + the forest, and no one suggested that he should be followed. All the + officers knew that such a course would be useless, and most of them were + very well satisfied with what had already been accomplished. The prisoners + numbered more than six hundred, and the dead a hundred more, while there + were about seventy-five wounded. So if what Bill Hickson said were true, + not more than two hundred insurgents could have escaped. + </p> + <p> + Among the seriously wounded was a man whom Archie recognised immediately + as one of his captors of two days previous, and while he was looking over + the bodies for the other men, he came suddenly to brave Bill Hickson, + lying face downward in the road. He almost screamed with fear that he + might be dead, and when one of the men hurried up to him he told him who + the man was. The colonel was soon on hand, and it was found that the brave + spy was not seriously wounded, and would recover soon under proper + treatment. + </p> + <p> + When the insurgent wounded were cared for, it was discovered that the two + companies sent out to reconnoitre had also suffered losses, and when they + marched back along the line of their retreat no less than five dead and + about twenty wounded were found. This sad news threw a gloom over the + entire regiment, and when they started back to Manila they marched in + quiet, and without rejoicing over their victory, which had proved so + costly. + </p> + <p> + Poor Archie, when they started to march, found, to his great disgust, that + he was so weak he couldn’t walk far, and he thought this must be due to + the fright he had received. He was very angry with himself, until the + surgeon examined him and announced that he had a bullet in his arm. And + then Archie confessed that he had felt a stinging sensation at one time + during the firing, but had thought nothing of it. Now his disgust was + turned to great delight, for the idea of being wounded in battle was + glorious to his mind. “I’ll bet I wounded more than one insurgent,” he + told the surgeon, “for I discharged every barrel of my revolver.” The + wound was not at all serious, but he was told to be quiet for a few days. + He was given one of the rebel horses to ride back to Manila, and he felt + like a real hero in many ways. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0019" id="link2HCH0019"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIX. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + RETURN TO MANILA—IN THE HOSPITAL—CONGRATULATED BY ALL—WRITING TO + THE PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES. +</pre> + <p> + IT took the regiment much longer to march back to Manila than it had taken + it to follow the rebels, for the wounded of both sides had to be carried, + and the arrangements for carrying them were very imperfect. Fortunately, + most of them were able to ride horses, and the officers were successful in + securing wagons enough to carry most of the others, but there were about a + dozen who could neither ride horses or lie in wagons, but had to be + carried on stretchers all the time. Of course this was slow work, and the + officers were glad enough when they reached the town with the three-story + building. Here they found things very much as they had left them, two days + before, save that the inhabitants were more abject than ever to them, now + that they had captured most of the rebel force. + </p> + <p> + It wasn’t an easy matter to find quarters for so many men, and some of the + Filipinos were obliged to camp in the public square overnight, while the + wounded and ill were given beds in the various houses of the town. The + inhabitants were required to furnish food, too, for the Americans were + entirely out of almost everything. They still had some hardtack, but of + meat and coffee there was none. The people of the town pretended to be + very glad to serve their “masters,” but every one knew that the natives + would be only too glad of a chance to cut the throat of every Yankee + soldier. + </p> + <p> + The officers again occupied the old building which they had used during + their former stay, and Archie was invited to share it with them, for they + expected to rest in this town over the next day, before proceeding to + Manila. The men’s uniforms and equipment generally needed cleaning and + repairing, and the colonel was anxious for them all to appear as well as + possible when they returned victorious to the island capital. So the next + day was spent in cleaning and washing, and by evening most of the soldiers + looked as if they had never left Manila. Then came a surprise for every + one, for into the town marched a regiment of militia from Manila, sent out + to see whether the first regiment needed reinforcements. They set up a + great cheer when they learned that most of the rebel force had been + captured, and the night was spent in a celebration of the great event. A + band was scraped up in the town, the great hall of the administration + building was thrown open, and there was dancing and music until an early + hour in the morning. All the belles of the town turned out to welcome the + soldiers, hypocrites that they were, and they danced with their enemies as + readily as they would waltz with their own dear Filipinos. Every one + seemed to have a good time, and the soldiers went to bed just in time to + get three hours’ sleep before starting for Manila in the morning. + </p> + <p> + It was a great sight to see the two regiments, with the prisoners, march + out of the town at five the next morning. They made a fine appearance in + their well-brushed uniforms and bright equipment. The townsfolk watched + them out of sight, and then most likely cursed them for a lot of + vagabonds, but the soldiers didn’t mind their curses. They were all very + happy at the prospect of getting back to Manila again, and no one was more + glad than Archie. He had somewhat recovered from his wound now, and rode + in his old place at the head of the column, where he was the centre of + interest to every one. The men congratulated him on having proved such an + excellent mascot, and he laughed and talked with them until he was tired. + </p> + <p> + The outskirts of the city were reached about five in the afternoon, and as + they marched through the streets to headquarters a band of music preceded + them, playing popular and patriotic airs. The sidewalks were crowded with + people, and Archie felt happier than for a long time, because every one + was curious to know who that boy could be riding at the head of the + troops, alongside the colonel. He was known to most of the other troops in + Manila, and received many a cheer from them as they saw his arm in a + sling, and when they finally reached the general’s headquarters, he was + honoured with a handshake and the congratulations of the commander + himself. This was the climax to a very happy day, and Archie went to bed + in his little old bunk feeling that he was a very lucky boy for having + been wounded in battle. + </p> + <p> + Of course the next few days were very busy ones for all the men, and for + Archie, too. He was obliged to tell, over and over, the story of his + experiences, and how he had managed to escape from the rebels when they + had him. This story always made the men roar with laughter, and increased + their already strong contempt for the Filipino army. He told, too, about + brave Bill Hickson, and that gentleman’s cot was always the centre of an + admiring throng of visitors, who shook his hand and told him how proud + they were of what he had accomplished. And all the poor hero could do was + to smile feebly, for he was still too ill to talk much. + </p> + <p> + Archie felt that he had almost volumes to write about his experiences in + battle, and he did send a very long account of this encounter to Mr. Van + Bunting. It was written in his boyish way, but one of the officers who + read it said that it was the best thing of its kind he had ever read, so + he wasn’t at all backward about mailing it. All the other newspaper + correspondents in Manila were wishing they had gone with the regiment and + witnessed the battle, but they had stayed in Manila, thinking that this + would be like the other expeditions of the kind, a mere wild-goose chase, + which wouldn’t amount to anything at all. They were all very anxious to + get the details of the affair from Archie, but he was shrewd enough not to + tell them anything of value. And the other correspondent of the Enterprise + in Manila insisted that Archie should send a cable message describing the + affair, as well as a written account, and this he finally consented to do. + The correspondent added a long account of Archie’s personal bravery, how + he had been wounded, and how he had ridden back to Manila at the head of + the column. Archie would have been very much embarrassed had he known + this, for he was still modest, but the first thing he knew of it was from + a letter he received a few weeks later from Mr. Van Bunting, + congratulating him on what he had accomplished, and telling him that he + had long since more than earned his six hundred dollars. But for weeks he + was ignorant that any one in New York knew of his being wounded. + </p> + <p> + The days now began to pass as before in the camp at Manila. The wound in + Archie’s arm was healing slowly, but he was hardly able to use that member + for a month or six weeks. Bill Hickson did not fare so well. He lay for + weeks on his cot in the hospital building, and was hardly strong enough, + for awhile, to talk. He was improving slowly, but the doctors said it + might be two months before he was able to walk about and take his former + active part in the campaign against the insurgents. This enforced quiet + was very trying to the brave man, and Archie spent many hours reading to + him, and telling of various things he had learned at school and elsewhere. + This constant companionship served to strengthen their already close + friendship, and it was soon known among all the troops that Bill Hickson + and the boy reporter were inseparable. And every one who knew the story of + their experiences looked upon them as the two chief heroes of the war so + far, because as yet there had been few feats of bravery in the desultory + campaigning against the rebels. General Funston had swum the river, of + course, but many held that not even that feat compared with the bravery of + Bill Hickson in serving as a spy under Aguinaldo’s very nose. The more + people heard about his experiences, the more remarkable they thought him + to be, until at last he was by far the most popular man in the army at + Manila. + </p> + <p> + Archie sent many interesting letters to Mr. Van Bunting, telling of the + adventures of the brave spy, and one day he received a cablegram telling + him to send at least one of these letters by every steamer, for people had + become interested in hearing about him. So for some time Archie wrote + about Bill Hickson rather than about himself, and was glad of the + opportunity to do so. He knew that if a letter were published every week + or two in the Enterprise Bill Hickson would soon be famous, and this was + something he was very anxious to accomplish. He felt that no fame could be + too great for such a man, and no praise too strong. + </p> + <p> + The commanding general decided, about this time, to begin a more active + campaign against the insurgents. It was now the month of December, and + with the beginning of the new year he wanted to inaugurate a series of + attacks against them in every part of the islands. He was beginning to + feel the criticisms of the papers at home, and of the newspaper men at + Manila, and he felt that something must be done immediately to retrieve + his lost reputation for active fighting. Every one, as soon as this + announcement was made, wondered what plan would be pursued to worry the + rebels into submission, for it was now generally agreed that the Americans + would hardly be able to capture the whole rebel army. It was too evident + that they were familiar with numerous hiding-places in the islands. The + only thing to do seemed to be to prevent their getting supplies, and to + drive them from one point to another, hoping that they would become + discouraged in the end and submit to the inevitable. + </p> + <p> + So far the campaigning had consisted chiefly of such expeditions as that + accompanied by Archie, and most of these had returned to Manila without + having even seen a rebel soldier. It was not surprising, then, that the + general was becoming discouraged, and that he was anxious to try a new + policy. + </p> + <p> + No one knew what the new plan would be until one day several cruisers and + gunboats made their appearance in the harbour. There had been no war-ships + at Manila for several weeks, and every one was surprised that so many + should arrive at once. There were rumours of a German onslaught, and also + gossip saying that Japan had decided to interfere, but all these were set + at naught when the general announced that the war-ships were to be sent + around the islands to bombard the rebel villages, and to drive the rebel + troops to the interior of the islands, where it would be hard for them to + receive supplies. + </p> + <p> + This news made Archie very happy, and a plan at once occurred to him. Why + shouldn’t he and Bill Hickson be allowed aboard a cruiser? It would be the + best thing possible for their health, and he set about getting the + necessary permit from the admiral. + </p> + <p> + Bill Hickson was able to be about now, and he was overjoyed when Archie + said he thought they could arrange to go. “I’d like nothing better than a + voyage in the good salt air. I believe it will do me more good than a + month in the hospital,” he said. Archie secured a very strong letter from + the general, and one day he stepped aboard the flag-ship in the harbour. + He had no difficulty in seeing the admiral, and found him to be a very + pleasant man to talk with. He read the letter carefully, and then shook + Archie cordially by the hand. “Yes,” he said, “I’ve heard of you, and of + your friend, too. Every one in Hong Kong knows how you two together + bearded old Aguinaldo in his den, and robbed him of most of his troops. It + did me good to read about it in the New York papers, too, and to know that + you are both getting your just measure of credit for the achievement.” + </p> + <p> + Archie blushed, and assured the admiral that he didn’t do very much, that + it was all owing to Bill Hickson’s bravery. “Oh, yes, I know,” laughed the + admiral, “you lay it to him, and he will most likely give you the credit. + I’ve seen your kind before. But I like you all the better for your + modesty, lad. Of course you and your friend can have a berth aboard ship, + and aboard the flag-ship, too, where I can see you both very often. You + can come aboard whenever you wish, and stay as long as you like.” + </p> + <p> + Archie could hardly thank the good officer for his kindness, and hurried + back to Manila. He found Bill Hickson waiting for him at the wharf, and + they rejoiced together over the good news. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0020" id="link2HCH0020"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XX. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP—BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN. +</pre> + <p> + IT was early one morning that Bill Hickson and Archie went aboard the + flag-ship, but all hands were on duty there, and the gallant cruiser was + raising anchor preparatory to sailing off on her errand of pacification by + means of shell and shot, The two newcomers were assigned a pleasant + stateroom where they would not be far from the cabin of the admiral + himself, and where they could step out of their door upon the + quarter-deck, and get all the fresh air they needed. It was a very + comfortable place, with two soft bunks, and every convenience usually + found aboard the fastest ocean liner. When the fellows saw it first, they + could hardly believe it could all be for them, but the officer assured + them that it had been given them by the admiral’s own orders. So there was + nothing for them to do but accept the kindness, and to settle themselves + down to having just as pleasant a time as possible during the coming weeks + at sea. + </p> + <p> + It was generally understood that the cruiser was to make a complete tour + around the island of Luzon, investigating every suspicious port, and + shelling towns when such action proved necessary to convince the rebels of + Uncle Sam’s superiority. The voyage was expected to occupy nearly a month, + for there was no reason for them to hurry, and the admiral said he would + like to take things easy. + </p> + <p> + Neither Hickson nor Archie had ever before been aboard a war-ship, and + they both found much to interest them during the first few days at sea. + Every movement of the crew, every action of the ship, was of great moment + to them, and they found no lack of entertainment in examining the great + guns and the equipment of the vessel in the way of firearms and + ammunition. Archie became much interested, too, in the science of + navigation, and spent much time with the captain on the bridge, or with + the pilot in the lookout, learning as much as possible about how the + movement of the vessel is controlled. Before long he had mastered the + rudiments of the art, and the captain told him that he might some day make + an excellent navigator if he continued to take as much interest in the + charts as he did now. And Archie told him that he was determined to master + as much as possible of the business during the voyage. Before he returned + to Manila he knew more about it all than even the captain would believe he + knew, and the knowledge was very valuable to him in days to come. + </p> + <p> + The two visitors aboard took their meals at the officers’ table, and they + kept the whole party interested for many days, with their stories of the + war in Luzon and of their very unusual adventures both at home and in the + Philippines. For it turned out that Bill Hickson had visited almost every + part of the United States, and had lived in all sorts of places. He had + been a cowboy in Texas, and a miner in the Klondike, and he had also been + a policeman in Chicago. He knew more stories to tell than any other man at + the table could think of, and he told them in a way that was wholly + charming. + </p> + <p> + Archie found that every one was very much interested in hearing about his + leaving home, and how he had happened to become a reporter on the New York + Enterprise. No one seemed to tire of listening to his stories of his + adventures in the great American city, and many of the officers told him + that they would give a good deal to have had his experiences in life. + </p> + <p> + And so it wasn’t long until the two chums were friendly with all on board, + and after awhile things went along as though Archie and Bill had never + lived elsewhere than aboard ship. There was nothing exciting for nearly a + week. The cruiser steamed slowly along the shore, sometimes stopping + entirely, while the officers levelled their glasses upon the beach, to see + whether there were any signs of the rebels being there. Sometimes, if + things looked suspicious, parties were sent ashore to reconnoitre, but + they seldom returned with news that would encourage the admiral to + investigate further. The days passed quietly, and the two convalescents + enjoyed themselves well enough. They were both much improved already by + the trip, and felt almost as well as ever. They each had a steamer chair, + and hour after hour they sat upon the deck and watched the ever-changing + panorama of the tropical shore. Now the beach would descend slowly to the + sea, and there would be numerous palm-trees and luxuriant vegetation + growing close within view, but again there would be steep clips, which + looked menacing to a ship in the dark. But it was all beautiful, cliffs or + sandy beach, and Archie thought he had seldom passed such a wholly + delightful week. + </p> + <p> + But, of course, it all became monotonous in time, and every one, even the + officers, longed for a change. The reconnoitring parties were sent out + more frequently now, and every one hoped each time that they would return + with news of the rebels, but they were always disappointed. The admiral + now determined to steam ahead more rapidly, so that they might get around + the western end of the island. It was evident that there were no + insurgents along this shore, and as there were no villages of any + consequence, either, he was anxious to reach the southern shore, where it + was known the rebels had recently been gathering. The towns, too, were + very numerous here on account of the excellent fishing, and it was hoped + that some good work might be accomplished for Uncle Sam before another + week passed. + </p> + <p> + Subsequent events soon proved the wisdom of the admiral’s plan. The + cruiser, it seemed, had no sooner rounded the western point than signs + were visible of rebel activity ashore. It was one Tuesday morning that a + village was sighted, built around a narrow inlet of the sea. When the + binoculars were levelled upon this harmless-appearing settlement, it was + soon perceived by the admiral that there were soldiers in the streets with + the rebel uniform, and that the insurgent flag was flying from the + administration building in the village square. All this was just what had + been expected, and there was great rejoicing aboard the cruiser. Every + man, without exception, almost, was anxious to be one of a party to be + sent ashore to attack the rebels, but the admiral hesitated before sending + any one at all. “It is impossible to tell from here,” he said, “how + numerous the rebels are, and it is quite possible that they may have a + large force of men in the village. If the appearance of the streets is any + sign, there must be quite a force of them in the place.” But every one + laughed at the very idea of there being a rebel company of any consequence + in the place, and the admiral was finally prevailed upon to send a boat + ashore, armed with thirty men. + </p> + <p> + “Remember,” he said, “if you come to grief, that I advised against this + venture. Don’t be too bold, or risk too much, for though I can shell the + place, that won’t help you any, once you are captives.” + </p> + <p> + But every one was anxious to be one of the party in the boat, and the + officers had a hard time making selections. “You can go, Archie, because + you’re a correspondent,” said the captain, “and you can go, Mr. Hickson, + because you’re a brave man,” and then he continued to pick out men until + the required number was secured. Of course there were many disappointed + ones left aboard the cruiser, but the captain assured them that they might + have their chance yet. + </p> + <p> + The boat was soon off, and it was noticed that there was great excitement + ashore as soon as the departure was observed. All the inhabitants, it + seemed, were gathered upon the beach, anxiously awaiting developments. + They seemed to be absolutely ignorant of what the presence of a war-ship + in their harbour meant, and were apparently not at all anxious as to the + outcome of this visit. One of the men told Archie that they had probably + never seen a war-ship before, and that they wouldn’t know a cannon at all. + “But we’ll let them know the meaning of our presence,” declared the + sailor, “if they shoot at us.” The boat drew every minute nearer the + shore, and it was soon perceived that there were many soldiers among the + crowd on the beach. Every one thought it remarkable that they should be so + quiet, but not one of the natives made a move until the boat was within + two hundred feet of the shore. Then one of the rebel soldiers suddenly + raised his rifle and fired at the boat. The lieutenant in command stood up + in the boat and gave the order to return the fire, and a perfect volley of + shot was poured into the crowd, which immediately scattered in every + direction. The rebel soldiers, however, seemed determined to stand their + ground, and they were so numerous, and kept up such a steady fire, that it + was deemed best to return to the cruiser, which was signalling for this + action on their part. So the boat was turned about as quickly as possible, + and the sailors pulled for the cruiser, amid the derisive yells of the + Filipinos, who had gathered again upon the beach. The rebel soldiers + continued their firing, but were such poor marksmen that but three of + their shots took effect. One sailor was shot in the arm, another in the + side, and still another was shot in the leg as he stood up to take aim at + the rebels. None of these wounds, it was afterward discovered, were at all + serious, though they were enough to arouse the anger of the entire crew. + </p> + <p> + When the boat reached the cruiser again, preparations were at once begun + for bombarding the town. The natives still stood upon the shore, and it + could be seen that they were immensely proud of their present victory. It + was amusing, then, to see the change in their behaviour when the great + six-inch gun of the cruiser belched forth a cloud of fire and smoke, and a + burning shell landed in the village street, apparently just in front of + the administration building, which was soon afire. The poor natives fled + in every direction, and the rebel soldiers followed their noble example, + and took to their heels, too. Another shell followed the first, and soon + several buildings were burning in the village. The admiral watched + developments carefully, and finally he decided that they would be glad to + surrender the village if another boat was sent ashore. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, the same boat started out again, with three new men in place + of those who were wounded, and for sake of effect the cruiser steamed + farther in toward shore. This time there were no crowds upon the beach, + and the thirty men marched to the burning buildings, where the natives + fell before them, begging for mercy. The soldiers were nowhere to be seen, + so the crew took possession of the town and slept there, in company with + thirty more sailors, that night. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0021" id="link2HCH0021"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + CONTINUING THE CRUISE—ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED—THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE’S + FRIEND—A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY—LONGING TO BE HOME + AGAIN. +</pre> + <p> + IT may go without saying that the sixty men from the cruiser had a very + interesting time before the night was over. The entire village was in a + constant uproar; the poor natives, horrified by what they had witnessed + during the afternoon, ran hither and thither, some even leaving the place + entirely and starting for the interior with their goods and families. The + rebel soldiers had evidently gone for good, and a small party sent out to + look for traces of them returned without learning anything of their + whereabouts. The bombardment of the village had certainly had great + effect. + </p> + <p> + It was only a tiny place, with possibly not more than a thousand + inhabitants, but there were evidences that it had been formerly a + flourishing town. There were fine residences in some of the streets, which + were now quite deserted, and there were some very respectable business + houses in the village square. All these had once been occupied by Spanish + traders, who had been driven away when the rebels came, and if the + insurgents had never come the town might now have been a booming place. + But the rebels were lazy, as usual, and did no work, so that now the fine + residences were vacant, and the business blocks stood empty. + </p> + <p> + Some of the sailors looked about for a casino, where they might be able to + find entertainment of some kind for the evening, but every place of + amusement was closed, and the streets were deserted. Since the occurrences + of the afternoon all the people had locked themselves into their houses, + to await the departure of the Americans. But, even though the casino was + closed, the Yankees managed to have a good time. They sang and danced and + played the banjo until an early hour in the morning, when they finally + went to sleep, leaving only two for a night watch, for there was no danger + that the insurgents would return, after their engagement, in which they + had lost six men. + </p> + <p> + When morning came, some officers landed from the cruiser, and all the + villagers were summoned to the public square and made to swear allegiance + to the American flag. + </p> + <p> + In the afternoon the cruiser steamed away again on her errand of forcible + pacification, and more days of quiet watchfulness followed, as the vessel + steamed along near the shore. There were many small villages along this + coast, but all of them seemed peaceful and free of insurgents. The captain + even said that some of the people in them probably didn’t know that there + had ever been a war between Spain and the United States. Archie, who had + enjoyed his experiences during the occupation of the last village, now + began to be impatient again at the long quiet. The day when the cruiser + bombarded the administration building would be a memorable one to him, and + the succeeding events were just such as he had been longing to see for + months. And then to think that he had taken part in the occupation of the + village. It was all very wonderful, but very real, too, and for several + days he took much pains in writing an article for the paper describing the + events leading up to and including the capture of the village. And in the + narration Bill Hickson was an important character. He had again proved + himself a hero of the first water by insisting that the boat proceed when + the first attempt was made to land, and by being the first man ashore when + a landing was finally effected. He was a leader in everything that was + done. He marched at the head of the squad when they marched through the + streets of the village, calling all the people to assemble in the public + square, and he stood beside the officers with his rifle handy when the + ceremony of swearing allegiance was gone through with. When it was all + over he was called to the admiral’s cabin aboard the cruiser and + congratulated for being so brave and so ever-ready to lead in any + dangerous undertaking; but Bill Hickson simply blushed and said he hadn’t + done “anything worth mentionin’.” The men aboard thought differently, + however, and he was even a greater hero after this adventure than he had + been before. + </p> + <p> + Archie, too, received the congratulations of the admiral. “You have been a + brave boy,” he said, “and deserve much credit for showing so little fear + in the face of danger. I hope you will be rewarded upon your return to New + York for your bravery while with us here.” Archie, too, blushed, and said + that he had no doubt that Mr. Van Bunting would treat him fairly when he + reached New York again. + </p> + <p> + And Archie was now beginning to wish that the time for his return would + soon arrive. It was the month of February, and he had been away from + America an age, it seemed to him. He felt that he had seen most of what + there was to be seen in the Philippines, and when this naval tour was over + with, the active campaigning would no doubt cease until the rainy season + was over. So for many reasons the boy wished he might be able to start + home soon, and as the days passed he became more and more anxious to + receive word from the Enterprise that he might return. He had sent many + interesting articles to the paper, and would be able to write many more + just as interesting upon his return, so he felt that the editors wouldn’t + object to his early return. + </p> + <p> + For an entire week the cruiser found no signs of the rebels, but at last + there came a day when they were steaming slowly along near the shore, and + saw, back among the trees, some specks of white resembling tents in shape. + Immediately the whole vessel was excited, and there was much gossip and + wonder as to what the tents could be doing there. The admiral at last + decided to send two boats ashore to investigate, and gave strict orders + that the men should be cautious and not allow themselves to be ambushed or + caught in a trap of any kind. Of course Archie and Bill Hickson were among + the crew of the first boat, and each was as fully armed as any of the + sailors. + </p> + <p> + The two boats pulled quietly for the shore, keeping close together, and + they were beached at the same time. The natives, or whoever occupied the + tents, had evidently not yet discovered them, and the men halted upon + landing to decide what they had better do. The tents could be plainly seen + through the trees, and there was smoke rising from a fire somewhere in the + neighbourhood, but there were no noises which could be heard so far away. + It was decided to march up to the tents and find out who occupied them, + and the column kept close together as they advanced, for things were so + quiet it was feared the rebels, if such they were, might be in ambush. + </p> + <p> + The men got within a hundred feet of the camp, when they heard several + terrible yells in succession, and several natives ran out from behind one + of the tents, screaming at the top of their voices, and not pausing to + look around at all. The officer in command of the company of men was much + disturbed by this demonstration, and, without pausing a moment, gave the + order to fire. Five of the natives fell immediately, but the other six + kept running, and soon disappeared among the trees on the other side of + the clearing. The men stood still awaiting developments, but though they + waited several minutes nothing more was heard, and it was decided that the + camp must be deserted. So they marched up to the tents, and then the + officer almost fainted, for inside the first one he entered was standing + an American flag, and scattered about were the accoutrements and camp + equipment belonging to an American force in the field. There was now no + doubt but what the tents belonged to an American regiment, and that the + fleeing natives were either servants or prisoners, more likely the former. + The men were all much excited at this discovery, and the officer ordered + the natives to be looked after at once. It was found, however, that all + but one were dead, and he expired within an hour, so that the men felt + that they had killed five innocent men, a thought which made some of them + weep, hardened though they were. + </p> + <p> + It was now decided to await the return of the regiment, which was out, the + officer thought, on a practice march, and could not possibly be gone much + longer. So the men lounged about on the grass for more than an hour. Then, + about three in the afternoon, a rifle-shot was heard in the near distance, + and instantly every man was on his feet, rifle in hand. “They must have + found the rebels,” said the officer; “so be ready, men, to help them out, + should they be retreating to the camp.” This supposition turned out to be + correct, for a few minutes later some members of the regiment came running + into camp and announced that a large body of insurgents was after them. + Later the remainder of the regiment followed, and the joy of the colonel + when he found these unexpected reinforcements was very great. “There must + be more than fifteen hundred rebels,” he said, “and they will all be on us + here in less than an hour, for their sharpshooters have been following us + up for a long time. I was beginning to think that we would be unable to + fight them, for they seem to be well equipped, but with the cruiser to + kelp us we can whip them at once. The thing to do will be to let them come + on without suspecting that we have received any help, and then, when the + fight is getting a little warm, or they are about to charge us, let the + cruiser fire a few shells into the air, and it will all be over. Most of + them are country troops, and have never seen a cruiser, so they will be + too much frightened to speak when they hear the thunder of the guns, and + see the shells explode in the air. And then they have a village about + three miles back from the coast, and if you can send a few shells into + that village it will simply ruin the insurgents. + </p> + <p> + “I had no idea of meeting these rebels,” the colonel then explained. “I + took the men out for a little practice marching, but before we had gone + far we encountered these sharpshooters, and later discovered that they had + all these men about a mile and a half away. Then we decided to return to + camp as quickly as possible, to get more ammunition, and we felt, too, + that we would stand a better chance of resisting them here among the + trees. But now we will soon finish them up, if you will just send a man + out to tell the admiral of our plans.” Archie immediately volunteered to + carry the information, and as he could be spared better than one of the + soldiers or sailors, he was permitted to undertake the mission. So he + started out, and was on board the cruiser in a very short time. The + admiral was dumbfounded to learn that American troops were encamped on the + shore, and in imminent danger of being defeated, and he at once set about + giving orders with great vigour. “We will show them how they can attack a + small regiment of Americans with their ridiculous army,” he declared, and + at once gave orders for the vessel to move inshore. “But wait,” he cried, + a minute later, “I see by my chart that there is a deep stream about a + mile up the coast, and if I am not mistaken we can enter this stream and + perhaps get very near the advancing rebels. We may even be able to destroy + them before they have a chance at our soldiers,” and the old admiral + almost danced in the enthusiasm of this idea. So the cruiser steamed + rapidly up the coast, and was soon at the mouth of the stream, which + seemed to be the estuary of some great river. Then she steamed up-stream, + and, sure enough, the admiral soon discovered the rebels marching rapidly + along the road, about half a mile away. They had evidently not perceived + the cruiser, on account of the high reeds growing along the banks, and the + admiral gave orders to begin firing. + </p> + <p> + The first shell rose high in the air and exploded with a deafening + thunder, and when the smoke cleared away it was seen that the insurgents + were almost paralysed with fright, and had just discovered the cruiser in + the river. But this first shell had not hurt any one, and another was + immediately ignited. This one exploded over the very heads of the troops, + and many of them must have been killed. Those who were not either killed + or wounded turned about and began to run, and their leaders were powerless + to make them stand their ground. One shell followed another from the + cruiser, and hundreds must have been killed outright among the insurgents. + Finally they were all running, and it was soon perceived that the + Americans had advanced, and were now pursuing them with great energy. So + the cruiser could fire no more shells, and the admiral ordered her about + and back to the anchorage onshore. + </p> + <p> + It would take many pages to describe in detail the events of the remainder + of that afternoon, as Archie witnessed them from the deck of the cruiser, + and learned of them later from Bill Hickson. The insurgents were nearly + all killed or taken prisoners, and it was found that they numbered nearly + two thousand. So it was a great achievement to have vanquished them all. + The affair turned out to have been the greatest victory of the war, so + far. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0022" id="link2HCH0022"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS—A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO + RETURN TO NEW YORK—BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO. +</pre> + <p> + ARCHIE left the cruiser when she was once more at anchor, and, going + ashore to the American camp, he found things in a very lively condition at + the close of the afternoon’s battle. Every man was very jubilant over the + retreat which had been turned into a great victory, and Archie was + congratulated on having been the lucky man to carry the news of the coming + of the rebels to the admiral. The officers were all in the best of humour, + except the colonel, who felt somewhat sad on account of the death of his + five faithful servants, as the men first shot turned out to have been. + </p> + <p> + “There were never any better men than they,” said the colonel, “and I + would almost as soon my own men had been shot.” But he bore the ship’s + company no malice for their mistake, which he said was a very natural one. + </p> + <p> + After the capture of so many rebels, and the killing of so many others, it + was felt that the rebel army in this part of the island was pretty well + disbanded, and that it would soon disappear altogether. It had been known, + from the very beginning of hostilities, that there was a large force of + insurgents somewhere in this neighbourhood, but not until to-day had the + colonel seen anything of them. But it was impossible, all the officers + said, that there could be any more troops about, for these two thousand + represented a very considerable portion of the entire rebel army. And now + that these were done away with, the colonel said there was no need of his + remaining any longer in this place, and that he would like to get back to + Manila as quickly as possible. Hearing this, the admiral said he thought + room could be made for all the men aboard the cruiser, and that they could + all return at once if they so desired. This generous offer was at once + accepted by the colonel, and the next day the work of embarkation began. + By night every man was aboard, and a place of some kind had been found + where he could sleep, but of course, every portion of the vessel was much + overcrowded. This only made things all the more lively, however, and + Archie, as well as all the others, thought he had never enjoyed any trip + so much as these three days spent in getting back again to Manila. There + was always fun of some sort going on. If some one wasn’t dancing, there + was sure to be singing. And then there were several ingenious games which + were invented for the occasion, so that time never passed slowly. Indeed, + there were many who were sorry when the capital was finally reached, but + Archie was not among these, for he expected some mail to be awaiting him + from the editor of the Enterprise. And he hoped that in this mail he would + find permission to return to New York. + </p> + <p> + All officials were very much surprised when the cruiser anchored off + Cavité, but the admiral explained that he thought it no use to spend more + time in touring the island, even though the month which it was supposed to + take him had not yet expired. He said that he felt sure there were no more + insurgent villages along the coast, because it was perfectly evident, from + all signs, that the rebels were all in one division. And this division, of + course, had been vanquished four days previously. + </p> + <p> + When the report of the engagement went the rounds there was much + enthusiasm, for it was felt that at last some progress was being made + against the insurgents. The admiral was a popular hero at once, and + Archie, with Bill Hickson, was again the centre of admiration and interest + in the old palace, where they both returned. + </p> + <p> + Archie was surprised to find no mail awaiting him, but he was not + discouraged, and wrote two long articles to send to the Enterprise. One + described the great engagement, and the other was descriptive of the daily + life aboard ship upon the return to Manila. These articles, with the + others he had written during the latter part of the cruise, were sent off + at once, and Archie felt confident that they would be read with great + interest by Mr. Van Bunting. And now the days passed very pleasantly in + Manila. He had a great deal to tell his comrades in the old regiment, for + none of them had been out of Manila since he left, and were very anxious + indeed to hear about the events of the round-the-island tour. And Archie + was very willing to tell them all he could, for he had been much + interested in the entire voyage, and never tired of talking about it. + </p> + <p> + Still, while things were very pleasant, and he was having a good time in + many ways, Archie was very anxious to see New York again and to get back + to America. And then, what was even more important with him, was the + knowledge that he would certainly be allowed to visit his mother upon his + return. Therefore he was a very happy boy when he one day received two + letters from the Enterprise office, one from Mr. Van Bunting, and one from + Mr. Jennings. They were both very encouraging and very friendly. Mr. Van + Bunting wrote to tell Archie how delighted they all had been with his + success in finding interesting things to write about, and he enclosed a + check for three hundred dollars, which he thought “would come in handy + now.” The letter from Mr. Jennings was of later date, and stated that he + had prevailed upon Mr. Van Bunting to allow Archie to return to New York, + to work upon the Evening Enterprise. It was a very delightful letter, + Archie thought. “We believe,” wrote Mr. Jennings, “that we can use you + here to very good advantage, and we will be glad to have you return as + soon as possible. I enclose two hundred dollars to pay your expenses home + again.” + </p> + <p> + So now it was all settled that Archie was to leave Manila for New York, + and, now that it was sure he was going, he felt somewhat reluctant to + leave the soldiers with whom he had become friendly, and to get away from + all this life of adventure which had been so interesting and so delightful + in many ways. It was hard, too, to leave the dear old palace in Manila, + through which he had wandered so often, and every room of which had for + him some story of a Spanish prince or a great governor-general, wealthy + and wise. There would be none of all this at home or in New York, but then + there would be something better; there would be mother, and the old grape + arbour, and the Hut Club. + </p> + <p> + On investigation, Archie found that the quickest way to get home would be + to travel by way of Hong Kong and Yokohama, taking the steamer from there + to San Francisco. It would take him more than a month to make the trip, + and, as it was now the second week in March, he could hardly expect to + reach New York before the first of May. He at once cabled Mr. Jennings + that he would leave at once for Hong Kong, and received an answer telling + him to do so by all means, and to continue to write letters describing his + trip. Archie knew that these letters would probably not reach New York any + sooner than he would, but he did write them, anyhow, and he did see some + of them appear in the paper after his arrival. + </p> + <p> + Archie was overjoyed to learn one day that Bill Hickson had received + permission from the commanding general to return to the United States, and + he at once hunted up the bashful hero, and insisted that he leave at once, + and make the trip with him. This was finally agreed to, and when it was + settled that the two old chums were to travel homeward together the whole + camp in Manila was interested in the news. They were both very popular, + and almost every night before their departure there was a pleasure party + of some kind arranged for them. One night they would give a regular + “stag,” as they called them, and then again they would arrange a sort of + musicale, at which there would be clog-dancing, banjo music, and various + games to increase the fun. + </p> + <p> + The four days passed very quickly indeed, and at last the day for sailing + arrived. There was a great throng at the pier to see them off, and there + was no end of good wishes and stories of the good times now gone by. When + the steamer finally moved out into the open, there were three cheers each + for Archie and “brave Bill Hickson,” in which every man appeared to join + with all his heart and voice. And there were tears in Archie’s eyes at + having to part from such true friends. It was hard to tell, too, when he + would ever see any of them again. He realised that hereafter his path and + theirs would probably lie in different directions. He was going to New + York to work as a reporter, and they, if they were not killed in battle, + would be scattered in all parts of the great United States, at the + mustering out of the troops. It was all very sad, and even Bill Hickson + seemed to feel the solemnity of the occasion, for he had nothing to say + for many hours after the vessel had started on its journey. + </p> + <p> + Archie, too, felt homesick at having to leave, and they went to bed very + early, apparently feeling that the best thing under such circumstances was + to be asleep. And when morning came they both felt somewhat better, for + Archie arose filled with hope for the future, and more anxious than ever + to reach home. Bill Hickson, too, was not loath to return to the United + States, even though he had no relatives waiting there to welcome him. The + poor fellow had been through a great deal while in the Philippines, and + his constitution was almost wrecked by the constant strain to which he was + subjected. He had never fully recovered from his accident of several weeks + before, and he felt that he needed a rest from the constant excitement and + worry of life in the army. He was tired, too, of being a spy. He had never + relished the work, but he had realised how necessary it was for the + Americans to have some one to follow up Aguinaldo and let the general know + of his movements. “They’ll be a long time catching him now,” he said, time + and again, to Archie. “He’s a much shrewder man than they think, and he + knows his Philippine Islands like a book. He can go from one place to + another without the Americans ever knowing where he disappeared to, and + without some one to follow him they will never be able to learn anything + of his movements.” + </p> + <p> + Bill had received nearly two hundred dollars in back pay, so he felt quite + rich, and Archie told him that if he should happen to run out, and need + more money, he would be very glad to furnish it to him, For Archie was now + determined to take Bill Hickson to New York, and introduce him to Mr. Van + Bunting, feeling sure that the wise editor would thank him for bringing to + his attention a man at once so interesting and so worthy as this hero of + the war had proved himself to be. But for the present Bill would discuss + nothing of the kind. He was thoroughly content to sit beside Archie on the + warm steamer deck, and watch the ever varied surface of the Indian Ocean. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0023" id="link2HCH0023"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXIII. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + HONG KONG—A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO—HONOLULU AGAIN—ARRIVAL IN SAN + FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS—ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN + NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR. +</pre> + <p> + AFTER a short and pleasant voyage they reached Hong Kong, and Archie found + this city to be much more interesting than he had expected to find it. It + was charming, he thought, to run across a place which combined the + conveniences of England and America with the picturesque oddities of China + and Japan, and he enjoyed himself to the utmost during the two days they + spent there. Bill Hickson enjoyed the place, too, and they would both have + liked to remain longer had it been possible for them to do so, but they + were anxious to see something of Japan before sailing for San Francisco, + and their steamer was due to leave Yokohama in eleven days. + </p> + <p> + But they did enjoy Hong Kong to the utmost while they were there. They + called first, of course, upon the American consul, whom they found to be + an exceedingly pleasant man. They learned, to their great surprise, that + he had read of Archie Dunn, and of Bill Hickson, too, in the Enterprise, + and Archie began to think that his paper had a much wider circulation than + even the editors claimed for it. He thought it very remarkable, at first, + that a man living in Hong Kong should have read about his Philippine + experiences in a New York paper, but of course, after he thought of it + awhile, it didn’t seem such a very remarkable thing, after all. And after + this, when they heard of people having read of them, they weren’t so much + surprised, having come to realise the tremendous circulation of this + paper. + </p> + <p> + The consul did all in his power to make their stay in Hong Kong pleasant. + He was anxious to have a formal dinner for them, but Bill Hickson said + that he would much prefer not having to dress up, and Archie was willing + for Bill’s sake to forego the honour. So they spent their two days in + going about the city, visiting the quaint Chinese shops, and seeing + everything of particular interest. They found many wonderful things to + look at, and Archie said that he couldn’t imagine any more delightful + place; but Bill told him to wait until they reached Japan, for he’d find + that much more charming than Hong Kong. “I’ve been there before,” said + Bill, “and I know what I’m talkin’ about, and I say there ain’t no such + place on earth as Japan for interestin’ things to look at, and pleasant + things to do.” And when, a few days later, Archie was initiated into some + of the mysteries of Japanese life by his experienced friend, he was + willing to admit the truth of all he had heard concerning the land of the + chrysanthemum. He found everything quite beyond his expectations. The + people themselves were more quaint in their dress and manners than he had + expected to find them, and the houses and the pagodas were much more + picturesque than he had imagined they would be. And the whole atmosphere + of the country seemed filled with romance and history, and it wasn’t at + all hard to believe that the Japanese have longer family trees than any + other nation on earth. + </p> + <p> + They spent a few days travelling through the provincial districts of the + little kingdom, and then they reached Tokio, where Bill was anxious to + spend several days. “I know some folks here who can take us around and + show us everything that’s worth seeing,” he said, “and we can spend our + time to better advantage here than anywhere else I know of.” And sure + enough, Bill did know some people in the capital city, some pleasant + English people, who had met the open-hearted Westerner when he was in the + city years before, and who had at once appreciated the true nobility of + his character. They were very kind to Archie,—so kind that the lad + thought he had never before met such pleasant people. And they were + thoroughly interested in all his adventures, from the time he left home + late in the preceding summer until now. He had to tell them all about his + New York adventures, and also about their experiences together in the + Philippines, and his new friends showed the greatest interest in all he + had to say, and seemed to find it all vastly entertaining. They were + anxious, Archie thought, to make him have a very good time in Tokio, to + make up for some of his hard experiences, and if this were indeed their + object, they succeeded admirably in accomplishing it. Every day was filled + with surprises, and every night Archie thought he had enjoyed himself more + this day than the day before. They travelled about the city so + persistently, on foot and in the quaint jinrikishas, that he felt that he + knew almost every part of Tokio, and he witnessed every side of native + existence, as well as the life in the foreign quarter. It was all + charmingly new and interesting, and, as in Hong Kong, they were both sorry + when the day for their sailing came around. And always since Archie has + declared that no one can be more kindly hospitable than the English. + </p> + <p> + The voyage from Yokohama to San Francisco was slow and monotonous, Archie + thought, for he was now very impatient to reach the United States, and he + had also grown very tired of travel by water. There were some very + pleasant passengers, but Archie couldn’t see that he had a much better + time than when he was peeling potatoes corning over. That was interesting + enough, anyhow. The only break in the monotony was the day they were + enabled to spend in Honolulu, and on that day Archie went again to some of + the places he had seen during his first visit to the attractive city. And + he called again upon some of the friends of his first visit, and found + that most of them had read of his great success as a war correspondent, + and of his many exciting experiences in the Philippines. They were all + profuse in congratulating him upon what he had accomplished, and every one + seemed to think he had been very successful indeed. + </p> + <p> + While they were in Honolulu a vessel arrived, bound for Japan, and Archie + was delighted to find it was the same vessel upon which he had worked his + passage from San Francisco on his way to Manila. He went aboard and met + some of the friends he had made there, and found that they all knew now + who it was they had carried as chore-boy in the galley. They all seemed + glad to hear of his success, and to know that he was coming home as a + first-class passenger. The cook treated him with much deference, and + started to apologise for his treatment of Archie on the way over; but the + boy stopped him, and told him that no apology was necessary. “I think I + may have been an unwilling worker,” he said, “because of course I didn’t + like the work at all, and it was hard for me to take an interest in + peeling potatoes when I was looking forward to accomplishing such great + things in the Philippines.” + </p> + <p> + “Oh,” said the cook, “you was a fine worker. Sure, I ain’t had so good a + boy since.” And Archie laughed to see the change in opinion which is + sometimes brought about by a change in circumstances. + </p> + <p> + Archie enjoyed the city quite as much as before, but he was glad, + nevertheless, when the steamer continued her voyage east. And then he + began to count the days until they should arrive in San Francisco, and of + course these last days seemed the longest ones of the voyage. But they + gradually passed away, and as they steamed ahead, coming nearer every hour + to that dear land called “home,” both Archie and Bill began to wonder how + they would like it all, after their adventurous life in the Philippines. + Bill, in particular, was doubtful whether he would again be able to settle + down to a quiet existence in some small place, and Archie assured him that + he must live in New York, where he would be sure to find things lively + enough to suit him. + </p> + <p> + At last came the eventful day when the great steamer threaded her way + through the beautiful Golden Gate, and discharged her passengers at the + pier. As Archie and Bill had but little baggage, they were almost the + first ones to leave the vessel, and were hurrying away to find a hotel + where they could remain overnight when Archie felt some one touch him on + the shoulder, and, turning about and seeing no one he knew, was about to + go on, when a man introduced himself as being the San Francisco + correspondent of the Enterprise. “And these gentlemen here,” said he, “are + reporters from the newspapers here. They would be glad to have you say a + few words about your experiences during the last few months.” Archie was + quite dumbfounded. It had never occurred to him that he was a person so + important as to be interviewed, but he was willing and glad to accommodate + the reporters, and told them to accompany him to his hotel. Once there, he + answered all their questions, and didn’t find it hard at all to give them + his opinion of the situation in the Philippines, and what he thought + should be done by the government to stop the rebellion. “The President + will soon put an end to it,” he said, “if he can only have the support of + Congress. But as long as there are members of Congress fighting his + policy, the insurgents are going to continue their insane efforts to + establish an independent government.” And some of the reporters smiled to + hear so young a fellow talking about the policy in the Philippines. They + felt that he was well-informed, however, and put down every word he said. + </p> + <p> + The interviews over, Archie and Bill went early to bed. The Enterprise + correspondent had telegraphed the news of their arrival to New York, and + had received word from Mr. Van Bunting to send them on to New York at + once. So, early in the morning, the two started for the East, and the + train seemed to travel quite as slowly as the steamer. “It does seem good + to be in our own country again,” they said a hundred times during the days + that followed, and when they reached the Empire State and began their + journey down the Hudson River, Archie could hardly restrain his enthusiasm + at being again in his native commonwealth. + </p> + <p> + There was quite a delegation at the Grand Central Station to meet them. + Mr. Jennings was there in person, and he explained that Mr. Van Bunting + was waiting anxiously at the office to see him. Then there were reporters + from the various other city papers, who wanted interviews, but Archie was + told to say whatever he had to say in the columns of the Enterprise, so he + had to deny the reporters for the first time. Bill Hickson was introduced + at once, and became the lion of the hour. Every one had read of him, and + was glad to shake his hand, and poor Bill was quite bewildered by so much + attention. They didn’t linger long at the station, however, but hurried + down to the Enterprise office, where Mr. Van Bunting was awaiting them. He + grasped Archie’s hand in his as they entered, and cried, “Well done, my + boy, well done.” And Archie felt as if he had grown three feet that + instant. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0024" id="link2HCH0024"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXIV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + DOING “SPECIAL” WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER—INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS + MEN—CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS. +</pre> + <p> + THERE was so much to tell Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting, that Archie + didn’t get away from the Enterprise office until seven o’clock in the + evening. And what a lot they did say to each other during the afternoon! + Archie told of all his experiences, and found them all anxious to hear + about them. He learned, to his joy, that everything he had sent had been + printed, and that the articles had made a great hit with the public. “We + would have liked to keep you there longer, but we knew you must be worn + out, and then we want you to stay right here, now, and see if you cannot + get us some good interviews and articles of various kinds for the Evening + Enterprise. The paper has been losing ground somewhat, of late, and we + need some new life for its pages. Of course the morning paper profited + greatly by your articles, but the evening edition seemed very weak in + comparison, and we think it only fair to Mr. Jennings to let him have you + on his staff for awhile now. So if you are willing, you can start in + to-morrow as a member of the staff. We will see that you are well paid for + what you write, or we will put you on salary, whichever you like. You can + think it over, and in the morning you can tell us which plan you like + best.” + </p> + <p> + Archie wanted to ask for a few days’ absence to return home, but he felt, + somehow, that he ought not to ask it just now. So he contented himself + with writing a long letter to his mother, in which he enclosed a very + large check, money which he had not used on his return to New York. He + told her that he would be home just as soon as he could get off for any + length of time, and he knew that she would now be looking forward to the + visit every day. She had written him about the enthusiasm displayed by + every one over his achievements, and how proud she was of what he had + accomplished. “I think I am the proudest mother in the country,” she wrote + one day, and this sentence made Archie very happy, of course, and more + anxious than ever to return home. He received a letter, too, from Jack + Sullivan, telling him how much the boys all thought of his success, and + how every member of the Hut Club had longed time and again to be with him. + “It all reads just like some book,” Jack wrote, “and we are dying to have + you come home and tell us all about it.” Then his mother sent him + clippings from the town papers, eulogising his efforts, and calling him + the “coming man of the State.” All this was very pleasant and very + encouraging, and Archie couldn’t help having a kindly feeling for the + townsfolk who thought so much of him. + </p> + <p> + New York was as delightful as ever. It was now the last of April, and the + trees were all green with fresh leaves, and the numerous little parks + scattered over the city were looking their very best. The asphalt + pavements looked clean and elegant when Archie thought of some other + streets he had seen, and the tall office buildings lifted their ornate + domes and cupolas into a sky of clear blue. “Surely,” he thought to + himself, “this is the most charming city in all the world.” Fifth Avenue, + with its crowds of fashionable folk, and its throng of vehicles, was a + delight of which he never tired, and when he went into the Bowery, just to + see how things were looking now, he found it quite as interesting and as + dirty as in the fall. + </p> + <p> + But the first place he visited was the dear little square away down-town, + where he had lived during those few happy days spent in New York. It, too, + looked the same, only the flowers and grass were fresher now, and the + fountain seemed to flow more joyously, now that spring was here. The house + where he had lodged was as clean as ever, and Archie at once decided to + engage a room here, where he could have his New York home. So he called + upon the motherly landlady, and was glad to learn that the room he had + first was still vacant, and that he could take possession at once. + </p> + <p> + As before, when he came to this house, Archie was almost out of clothing, + so he went out and fitted himself with everything he needed. And this time + he felt able to buy the best to be had, for he thought he had now earned + the privilege to dress well if he liked. And then, when he had everything + he needed to wear, he went out and bought many pretty things for his room, + for he felt that he would like to have it just as cosy and home-like as + possible. He wasn’t able to do much at it this first night, but in the + succeeding days he furnished the place in a charming way, so that the + landlady said it was the “handsomest room in the house, sir.” The dear old + lady could hardly understand this great change in her lodger’s + circumstances. She worried about it very often, and discussed the question + with many of the neighbours. “He come here last fall looking mighty + poor-like, but, lawsy me, he’s as fine now as any man on the avenue.” And + she never did understand it until one day she learned that her lodger was + the “very young man who had been to the war in the Philippines, and writ + about his battles in the Enterprise.” + </p> + <p> + There was no ceremony when Archie began work on the evening paper. Mr. + Jennings told him that he thought they understood each other pretty well, + and that he could use his own discretion, very often, about getting + articles. “You can be as independent as you like, Archie,” he said, “and + use your own ideas as much as you like.” This pleased the boy very much + indeed. He was beginning to feel now that he had really won his spurs, and + that he was a full-fledged journalist. It seemed scarcely possible that it + had taken him little more than six months to make this great advance in + circumstances, and yet he could see himself a few months previous, + sleeping in the station-house. Now his days of poverty were surely over, + and he would have a clear path ahead of him to accomplish his great + ambition to be a successful author and writer of books. For the present, + it was good experience for him to be working upon the Enterprise, and he + felt that he ought to be very much contented, since there were men old + enough to be his father who were not earning as much money. + </p> + <p> + He liked the work upon the evening paper very much. He didn’t have to get + down early in the morning, and at three o’clock in the afternoon he was + always through. He was very glad indeed that there was no night work, for + he now spent his evenings in studying shorthand, which he thought might be + helpful to him in many ways. He didn’t have much routine work to do upon + the paper in the beginning, but he told Mr. Jennings that he would like to + get as much experience as possible, so the good editor gave him a lot of + regular reporting to do, as well as the special work which was daily + featured in the paper. This special work consisted of interviews with + various successful men. Archie had always felt a great admiration for men + who had “done something,” and as New York was simply filled with wealthy + and successful men, who had started as poor boys, he found a wide field + for work. He found it very interesting to meet these men of affairs, and + have them tell him of their early struggles, how they had begun on the + farm or in the factory, and had worked themselves up through industry and + perseverance to the high places they now occupied. He found it very easy + to get access to most of them, for they had all read of his experiences in + the Enterprise, and Archie found that his fame as the “Boy Reporter” was + quite general and widespread. Some of the great men were quite as much + determined to interview him as he was anxious to interview them, so that + he usually got along very well by telling them first of his own + experiences, and then asking them about their own boyhood days. It was + work that never became monotonous, for each day he saw a man quite + different in most respects from the man he had interviewed the day before, + and of course every one had something different to say. + </p> + <p> + These interviews proved very successful when published in the Evening + Enterprise, and Mr. Jennings had him continue them during all the weeks + Archie was connected with the paper. And of course he did other things, + too, work which took him into every part of the great city, looking up + this event, or investigating this reported disappearance or murder. Archie + was quite successful in this line, too, and, as he was being paid by the + column, his weekly income was something larger than he had ever dared to + hope for in all his life. He was now enabled to study his stenography at + the best school, and to indulge himself in many things which had been + denied him before. He could, for instance, attend the performances of + grand opera, and hear the great musical artists of the world. He was able, + too, to read the best literature, and he gradually learned to appreciate + all the many good things in life. He was very glad to find himself + broadening in such a way, for he realised that he would not always want to + be a “Boy Reporter,” and that he had better be developing his mind in + every possible way. + </p> + <p> + He had not been back long in New York before he met all his old friends. + One of the first upon whom he called was the good policeman who had been + so very kind to him when he had no place to sleep. The large-hearted man + was as enthusiastic over his success as if he had been his own son, and + Archie felt that here was one true friend upon whom he could always + depend. The policeman never tired of telling about that first night when + he found Archie walking up and down Broadway, and he always spoke of him + to the other officers as “that boy of mine.” So the boy, who was now a + full-fledged reporter, spent as much time with this friend as possible, + and many a time he sat at the station-house telling them all of his + adventures in the Orient. + </p> + <p> + Another friend whom he met was the great railway president with whom he + had travelled to Chicago on his way to San Francisco. Archie had liked + this man from the very first, and he felt that in him he would always find + a friend, because he had shown such interest in his first undertaking. And + when he called upon him in his elegant office, he received a very cordial + greeting. + </p> + <p> + “No, indeed,” said the great man of affairs, “I have never forgotten our + trip West together, and I have followed you with much interest through the + columns of the Enterprise. And I am glad that you are back again in New + York, for I hope to see a great deal of you. You must come up to my house + some evening and tell us all about yourself.” + </p> + <p> + Archie was naturally much surprised to receive an invitation of this kind, + but he resolved to accept it, nevertheless. + </p> + <p> + Bill Hickson was now employed in the Brooklyn navy yard. He had been + featured for several days in the Enterprise, and had enjoyed the + excitement of New York for awhile, but he decided he would like to be at + work. So one day Archie learned that he was working at the navy yard. + </p> + <p> + “I’ve got to be with Uncle Sam,” was all the reason Bill would give for + his action. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0025" id="link2HCH0025"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXV. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE—STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL—LIVING + AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS. +</pre> + <p> + IT was now September. Archie had been in New York the whole summer + through, attending carefully to his work on the Evening Enterprise, and + continuing his study of stenography. He had taken occasional trips to Long + Branch and Asbury Park on Saturday afternoons, but every other day he + spent in working up ideas for the paper, and each evening he devoted to + the shorthand school. By this time, though, he felt that he knew all that + was necessary of shorthand, and found himself more free to go about in the + evenings. He visited his friends more frequently, and sometimes spent + whole evenings in studying works on English literature, for he was + ambitious to know more of the great work he had decided to make his own. + This study was not really work to him, for his interest in everything + connected with literature was so great that he found a pleasure in reading + even the most classical books on the subject, and of course so much + reading of this sort did a great deal to educate his mind along this line + of work. + </p> + <p> + One evening in the early fall, Archie decided to accept the invitation of + Mr. Depaw, the railway president, to call. So he carefully dressed himself + in the best he had, and walked up Fifth Avenue and into the side street + where the great man had his home. He rang the bell and presented his card, + and waited in the drawing-room for an answer. The footman was gone but a + moment, and returning, announced that the family would be down directly. + Archie was very much pleased that he was to meet the entire family, and + looked about him with great interest at the elegant furnishings of the + room in which he sat. He couldn’t help thinking how lovely it must be to + have so many books, so many pictures, and so many works of art of every + kind. The boy thought then that he would like to be a wealthy man, just to + be able to gratify his desires for beautiful things. + </p> + <p> + He had to wait only a short time before the genial Mr. Depaw entered the + room, accompanied by several members of the family. Archie was greeted + very warmly, and introduced to every one, and then they immediately began + an animated conversation, in which Archie soon found himself taking an + active part, much to his surprise. He felt that he had never before + realised what a great gift it is to be able to talk entertainingly, and + this evening was a revelation to him in the ways of good society. He found + that every one was much interested in the story of his adventures, and he + talked more about them than for a long time past. He was now beginning to + feel that his Philippine experiences were an old story, but he learned + that they were quite as entertaining as ever to these people. But they did + not talk entirely about Archie. They realised that this would be + embarrassing to him, and they were careful to guide the conversation into + a discussion of music and literature, and whatever else they imagined him + to like. And so it was that the evening passed very quickly, and it was + time to leave before he knew it. Then he was asked to be sure to call + again, and Mr. Depaw, as he accompanied him to the door, requested him to + call at his office on the following Wednesday, if possible. Archie + promised, and walked home down the avenue, wondering what it could be that + Mr. Depaw wanted to talk to him about. He didn’t worry long about it, + however, but went home and to bed as quickly as possible, for he had + formed a habit of rising at six o’clock in the morning to study. + </p> + <p> + The days passed quickly until Wednesday, and the afternoon of that day + found Archie in the waiting-room of Mr. Depaw’s office. He had not long to + sit there after sending in his card, for the busy man received him as soon + as he could get rid of his present visitor. He shook Archie warmly by the + hand as he entered, and then, pulling two chairs together, they sat down. + “I have been thinking for some time,” said Mr. Depaw, “that I need a sort + of private secretary. Of course I have men here at the office who take + dictation from me, and who fulfil the duties of a secretary to a certain + extent, but I want a young man who can attend somewhat to my personal + affairs; I want one whom I can trust, and one who is likely to grow as he + works along, so that eventually he may be able to fill any place I may + have open for him.” Then he stopped a moment, and Archie felt his heart + beating very fast beneath his coat. He waited almost breathlessly to hear + what Mr. Depaw would say next. + </p> + <p> + “Ever since I met you first,” he at last went on, “I have somehow thought + that you are the kind of a young fellow I would like. You are ambitious, + you are persevering, and you are willing to learn. You say, too, that you + know shorthand, and I know that you are a good penman. You have seen quite + a little of the world, I am sure, and I think you can prove yourself equal + to almost any occasion. The only question is whether you will care to give + up reporting for a position of this kind. I can assure you that I will pay + you as much as you are earning now, and I shall be glad to offer you a + home at my house, because I shall want you at my right hand all the time. + Do you think you will care to take the place?” + </p> + <p> + Archie could hardly speak, it was all so wonderful, but finally he + recovered himself sufficiently to explain his hesitancy in accepting the + position. “I would like just one day,” he said, “to consult with my + friends on the newspaper. You see Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting have + been very good to me, and I shouldn’t care to leave them now if they + object very strongly.” + </p> + <p> + “That’s quite right, quite right,” said Mr. Depaw. “I can appreciate your + feelings, and you can tell the editor that you will have some time for + writing, and that you will contribute occasional articles to his paper.” + Archie was now delighted. “Oh, thank you,” he cried. “I am sure I can come + now.” + </p> + <p> + “Well, come in at this time to-morrow,” said Mr. Depaw, “and let me know + what you have decided to do.” + </p> + <p> + Archie hurried at once to Mr. Jennings’s office to tell him the good news. + He wondered how his friend would take it, but all his fears were soon put + at rest. “Archie,” said Mr. Jennings, “this is the best opportunity you + can ever have to improve yourself in every way. Mr. Depaw is a man highly + respected all over the country, and a man who is known to be extraordinary + in many ways. Association with such a man will do more for you than four + years in college, and you will make a mistake if you do not accept his + offer. Of course we shall all be sorry to lose you here, but, as Mr. Depaw + says, you will have some time for writing, and we hope you will always + continue to do some work for us.” + </p> + <p> + Archie could almost have thrown his arms about Mr. Jennings’s neck to hug + him for his splendid feeling, and when, a little later, Mr. Van Bunting + said practically the same thing, he felt that he had never known two such + men. He assured them both that he would never forget them, but would try + and spend as much time as possible in the Enterprise office. + </p> + <p> + The next day he called again on Mr. Depaw, and told him of his decision to + accept the place, and the good man seemed overjoyed. “I will see that you + never forget it, Archie,” he said. It was arranged for him to begin work + the very next day. “You can transfer your things to my house as soon as + you like, for your room is waiting for you, and I will begin to-morrow to + teach you how to do things.” + </p> + <p> + And now Archie found it hard to leave the dear little room in the quaint + old square, which was looking now just as when he saw it first. The leaves + in the trees were turning brown and gold, and Archie realised that he had + been away from home more than a year. “Oh, I must go back soon,” he said + to himself, “or I shall simply die of homesickness.” + </p> + <p> + In a couple of days he was installed as a member of the Depaw household, + and he soon felt at home there. Every one was very kind to him, he was + given a handsome room, and everything seemed almost perfect. One of the + best things about it all was that he had access to the fine library, and + he longed for the long winter evenings when he could devour the many + interesting books he saw there. He was soon initiated into his work, and + it was much easier than he had expected. Mr. Depaw, of course, started him + very gradually, so that he learned as he went along. Every morning at + eight o’clock he was in the library with Mr. Depaw, taking dictation, and + receiving instructions for the day. They remained together here until ten + o’clock, when Mr. Depaw either walked or drove to his office. Archie + always accompanied him, and took charge of some of the mail there, + attending to it during the morning. Then at noon he returned to the house, + where he spent the afternoon in writing the letters which had been + dictated in the morning, and in doing various things for Mr. Depaw. The + evenings he always had to himself, and he had no difficulty in finding + enough to do at home without going out. He almost invariably passed the + evenings in reading, but occasionally he was asked to accompany the family + to some musical event at the opera house, for they had soon learned of his + love for music. + </p> + <p> + In work and study the winter passed quickly and happily for Archie, who + now felt quite at ease amid his elegant surroundings. His only wish was + that he might go home, and as spring approached Mr. Depaw promised him + that he should have a short vacation. The suggestion of Mr. Depaw that + Archie’s mother come to New York for a week was heartily accepted by + Archie, but when he wrote home Mrs. Dunn replied that she would rather + wait for Archie at home. She had never visited New York, and felt that she + wouldn’t like it. + </p> + <p> + Bill Hickson came over very often from the navy yard, and was always a + welcome visitor at Mr. Depaw’s office. He didn’t seem to care for his work + in Brooklyn, however, and Archie finally requested a place for him about + the elegant new station which the road had just constructed in the city. + Mr. Depaw very readily gave him an excellent position, one which he could + keep always if he so desired. And Bill was highly pleased with his new + work, so much so that he surprised them all one day in the spring by + leading into the once a young lady whom he introduced as his wife. Of + course Archie was very much pleased at this new development, for he had + often thought that his friend must be very lonely, living in a + boarding-house. + </p> + <p> + The days were all busy ones for Archie now. He had learned the work so + thoroughly that he was given more than ever to do, and he still continued + to write, too, for the Enterprise. He worked too hard, however, and in + April he looked so thin that Mr. Depaw sent him home for a week’s rest. + </p> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0026" id="link2HCH0026"> + <!-- H2 anchor --> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XXVI. + </h2> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + DECIDES TO VISIT HOME—A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN—A PUBLIC + CHARACTER NOW—DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB—DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL— + A TELEGRAM FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE. +</pre> + <p> + IT was a beautiful April day. There had been a light shower in the + morning, and now everything looked as fresh and green as possible all + along the railway. Archie lay back in his comfortable Wagner seat, + admiring the beauties of spring, and thinking, too, of the days he spent + in walking along this very road. It seemed hard to believe that he was now + secretary to the president of this railroad, and that he was returning + home, after a year and a half, a very successful young man. He had much to + think of in the hours it would take him to reach the little town. He tried + to remember everything about the place, and his mother as he saw her last, + and it wasn’t at all difficult for him to do so. But, oh, how he hoped + that things had not changed! He almost dreaded going home for fear he + would find things different. + </p> + <p> + He had changed, that much was sure. He knew that he had grown to look much + older than his years, and he knew that he was not looking particularly + strong. He used to be so sturdy, and he had such a splendid colour in his + cheeks. Mother would be sorry to see him now, but of course he would be + sure to improve very much during the week he was to remain among old + friends. + </p> + <p> + He was very anxious to see his boy friends, the members of the Hut Club, + and the boys and girls who were in his class at school. He had telegraphed + his mother that he was coming, so she would probably tell the boys about + it. He was sure they would be there. + </p> + <p> + Now the stations looked more familiar. This one just passed was near the + Tinch farm, and Archie remembered the days he spent working for old Hiram, + and how he had suffered. He wondered if the farmer had ever seen any + copies of the Enterprise. It would be very interesting to him to know that + his chore-boy was now a secretary to a millionaire. This next station he + remembered very well indeed, because he used to come here every fall to + visit the county fair, where he marvelled at the wonderful things he saw + in the side-shows. + </p> + <p> + And now the train was entering the limits of his own town. Here was the + old elevator, and the machine shop near the railway track. And, oh, there + was his own home, looking green and pleasant as the train sped by. It + almost brought tears to Archie’s eyes to think that he was so soon to see + his mother. Now they had reached the station, and he stood upon the car + platform ready to alight. My, what a crowd there was! and why did they + cheer as he made his appearance? All at once it dawned upon him that all + these people were here to meet him, and to bid him welcome home. He could + hardly speak as he found himself in his mother’s arms, and then he began + to shake the hands of the big crowd. They were all old friends, and then + there was the mayor, and the superintendent of schools, and quite a + delegation of leading citizens. How nice it was of them to welcome him in + this way! + </p> + <p> + After awhile the handshaking was over, and the mayor was able to get a few + minutes with Archie. “We are all very proud of what you have + accomplished,” he said, “and we want to give you a public reception + to-morrow night in the town hall, if you don’t object.” Archie stared + blankly at the mayor, and it was several moments before he realised the + meaning of the words. Then he was almost overcome. It was almost too good + to be true, it seemed, but he warmly thanked the mayor, and told him how + he appreciated the honour which they had done him. He said that he would + be glad to attend the reception. + </p> + <p> + The crowd was scattering now, and Archie, wild to reach home, took his + mother to a carriage, in which they drove rapidly out to the little house + among the trees and arbours. The old town looked beautiful in every way. + The great maple and oak trees along the road were green with new leaves, + and every dooryard was bright with snowballs and yellow roses. “This is + the very best time of the year,” he said to his mother, “and I am the very + happiest boy in all the world.” + </p> + <p> + “And I am the happiest mother,” was the answer. Then they sat in silence + until they reached the old home. They entered by the kitchen door, and, + once inside, and seated in the old cane rocking-chair, Archie bowed his + head in tears of joy at being home with mother once again. + </p> + <p> + The hours which followed were sweet with joy. Mrs. Dunn busied herself in + preparing the supper, and Archie hung around the kitchen, telling some of + the many things he had planned to tell. Mrs. Dunn was smiling, and Archie + thought her the sweetest mother any boy could have. She was changed + somewhat, but she looked very young to-day. + </p> + <p> + Supper over, Archie went over the fence to see the Sullivan boys, and he + found them looking much the same. He was truly glad to see them, and they, + of course, were glad to see him, too, though at first they were just a + little bashful, remembering, no doubt, all the things which had happened + to Archie since they saw him last. The boys were soon telling all about + the Hut Club, though, and Archie learned to his joy that it was still a + flourishing organisation. “We spoke of you every time we were together,” + said Jack, “and we always wished you were back again.” Archie was + delighted to hear that he had been missed, and all at once an idea came to + him which he put into execution three days later. He determined to give an + elegant dinner to this club of boys, and the very next day he sent to New + York for a caterer to arrange it. He wanted it to be something finer than + any of the boys had ever seen, and it certainly turned out to be so. The + caterer did his best, and when, three days later, the Hut Club sat down + together for the first time in more than eighteen months, they partook of + a dinner which would have done credit to Mr. Depaw’s table. It was a + memorable night for them all, and every boy enjoyed himself. + </p> + <p> + Archie enjoyed this Hut Club dinner more than anything else while he was + at home, though of course the great event of his stay was the public + reception at the Town Hall on the second evening after his arrival. This + was a truly grand affair. The town authorities hired a brass band, which + played inside the hall and out, and there was such a crowd in attendance + that many were turned away from the doors. It was a night that Archie will + never be able to forget. He sat on the platform, in company with the mayor + and other town officials, and he listened to several speeches + congratulating him on what he had accomplished since leaving the town. + Then he had to get up and tell them all of his experiences, from the time + he left until now. He told it in a simple manner, but from the close + attention he received it was evident his audience was deeply interested. + When he had finished, there were calls for “three cheers for Archie Dunn,” + and they were given with a will. Then Archie, rising from his seat, called + for “three cheers for the President of the United States,” and they, too, + were given, for Archie had told them all his feelings on the subject of + the President’s policy in the war. After this there were three cheers for + Mr. Depaw, whom one man said would be the next United States Senator from + the State. The meeting closed with some cheers for the New York + Enterprise, and then followed a long siege of handshaking for Archie, who + stood beside his mother on the floor in front of the platform. It was a + happy night for them both, and Mrs. Dunn said afterward that she could + never wish for anything more the rest of her life. + </p> + <p> + The fourth day of his visit was a Sunday, and, to Archie’s joy, brave Bill + Hickson and his wife came up from the city to spend the day. What a jolly + time they had, all day long! They went to church in the morning, where + they saw all the people, it seemed, whom they hadn’t seen before, and in + the afternoon there were many callers at the little house. The evening was + spent quietly by the happy four, talking of old times and plans for the + future. The town authorities were anxious to give Bill Hickson a reception + while he was in town, but the bashful hero declined the honour, and + returned with his wife to New York by the midnight train. + </p> + <p> + During the two succeeding days Archie talked a great deal with his mother, + and finally gained her consent to come to New York to live in a year’s + time. Mrs. Dunn had never really understood that Archie had so good a + position, but now that she realised what a splendid beginning he had made, + she was very willing to come and keep house for him. This question + settled, everything seemed wholly delightful in the cosy home, and Archie + settled down to enjoy the two remaining days of his visit in quiet rest. + He had already much improved during his stay, and was sure of going back + to the city feeling much better than for a long time past, and this made + Mrs. Dunn very happy. + </p> + <p> + But Archie didn’t stay his week out at home. On the fifth night he + attended a reception in his honour at one of the neighbours’ houses, and + he was just in the midst of a description of Tokio when a messenger boy + entered with a telegram for him. He opened it at once, and read it aloud + to the company: + </p> + <p> + “Dear Archie,” it said, “return as soon as possible. I sail for Europe on + Saturday’s steamer to remain six months, and wish you to accompany me.” It + was signed by Mr. Depaw, and there was great applause from the crowd when + he finished reading it. But Archie’s face was a study. He wasn’t sure + whether he wanted to go to Europe or not, but of course there was no + question about what he should do. He at once telegraphed a reply, saying + that he would reach the city to-morrow at noon, leaving home on the early + morning train. + </p> + <p> + Of course the reception soon broke up, and Archie walked quietly home with + his mother, who was saddened at the prospect of losing him so soon again. + She soon brightened, however, and began to plan things for him to do + abroad, and soon she entered into the preparation for his departure with + all her heart. But Archie was not so soon made glad, and he didn’t rest + until he made his mother promise to accompany him to the city on the + morrow to spend the two days previous to his departure in helping him get + ready. Mrs. Dunn wasn’t anxious to make the trip, but for Archie’s sake + she consented. + </p> + <p> + And early the next morning they left for the city, where the time passed + rapidly until the hour of the steamer’s sailing. At the pier they said + good-bye. Archie could hardly speak, but Mrs. Dunn was brave. “Archie,” + she said, “God has been with you so far and he will keep you yet. And + remember that a boy with honest ambition will always get along. You are + sure to have friends about you always, for you have proved that you + possess energy, perseverance and a good heart.” She said good-bye without + a tear, but as the steamer left the pier Archie saw, on looking back, a + sweet mother seated on a coil of rope, with her handkerchief to her eyes. + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + THE END. +</pre> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> <br /> <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter, by +Harry Steele Morrison + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + +***** This file should be named 4990-h.htm or 4990-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/9/4990/ + +Produced by Jim Weiler, and David Widger + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” + or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project +Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +“Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.” + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +“Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right +of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’ WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm’s +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. + +The Foundation’s principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation’s web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + </body> +</html> diff --git a/old/aboyr10.txt b/old/aboyr10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ea2cbe --- /dev/null +++ b/old/aboyr10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4958 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy Reporter +by Harry Steele Morrison + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: The Adventures of a Boy Reporter + +Author: Harry Steele Morrison + +Release Date: January, 2004 [EBook #4990] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on April 7, 2002] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + + + + +This eBook was produced by Jim Weiler, xooqi.com + + + + The Adventures of a Boy Reporter + +by Harry Steele Morrison, 1900 + + +CONTENTS. + +CHAPTER I. + +LIVING IN THE COUNTRY-- LIFE AT SCHOOL-- THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED-- THE COMING +OF THE CIRCUS + +CHAPTER II. + +ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS-- A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE +HENRY + +CHAPTER III. + +ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK-- LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT + +CHAPTER IV. + +WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY-- CRUEL TREATMENT + +CHAPTER V. + +THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS-- THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS + +CHAPTER VI. + +STEALING A RIDE-- KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN + +CHAPTER VII. + +ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK-- A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE + +CHAPTER VIII. + +LOOKING FOR WORK-- WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT + +CHAPTER IX. + +IN THE STREET AGAIN-- THE POLICE STATION-- VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, AND +IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR + +CHAPTER X. + +LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN-- FEATURED AS "THE BOY REPORTER" + +CHAPTER XI. + +A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND-- RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN + +CHAPTER XII. + +A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER-- THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT TO +THE PHILIPPINES-- LEAVING NEW YORK-- IN CHICAGO + +CHAPTER XIII. + +SAN FRANCISCO-- THE TRANSPORT GONE-- WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY PEELING +VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER-- THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT-- A STORM AT SEA-- ARRIVAL IN MANILA + +CHAPTER XV. + +ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR, AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES +AMONG THE NATIVES-- SEIZED BY THE REBELS + +CHAPTER XVI. + +A PLEASANT CAPTOR-- BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE-- FIRST +GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO + +CHAPTER XVII. + +ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS-- ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS-- THE FIRST BATTLE-- ARCHIE WOUNDED + +CHAPTER XIX. + +RETURN TO MANILA-- IN THE HOSPITAL-- CONGRATULATED BY ALL-- WRITING TO THE +PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES + +CHAPTER XX. + +AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP-- BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN + +CHAPTER XXI. + +CONTINUING THE CRUISE-- ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED-- THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE'S +FRIEND-- A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY-- LONGING TO BE HOME AGAIN + +CHAPTER XXII. + +RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS-- A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO RETURN +TO NEW YORK-- BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +HONG KONG-- A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO-- HONOLULU AGAIN-- ARRIVAL IN SAN +FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS-- ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN +NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +DOING "SPECIAL" WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER-- INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS MEN-- +CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS + +CHAPTER XXV. + +PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE-- STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL-- LIVING +AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +DECIDES TO VISIT HOME-- A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN-- A PUBLIC CHARACTER +NOW-- DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB-- DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL-- A TELEGRAM +FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE + _________________________________________________________________ + + THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER. + + CHAPTER I. + + LIVING IN THE COUNTRY-- LIFE AT SCHOOL-- THE HUT CLUB IS FORMED-- THE + COMING OF THE CIRCUS. + +"YES," said Mrs. Dunn to her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan, "we are +expecting great things of Archie, and yet we sometimes hardly know +what to think of the boy. He has the most remarkable ideas of things, +and there seems to be absolutely no limit to his ambition. He has long +since determined that he will some day be President, and he expects to +enter politics the day he is twenty-one." + +"Is that so, indeed," said Mrs. Sullivan. "Well, we can never tell +what is going to come of our boys. As I says to Dannie to-day, says I, +'Dannie, you must do your best to be somebody and make something of +yourself, for you and Jack bees all that I has to depend upon now.' +But Dannie pays no attention to my entreaties, and somehow it seems to +me that since Mr. Sullivan died the boys are gettin' worse and worse. +It's beyond me to control them, anyhow." + +"Oh, take heart, Mrs. Sullivan," said Mrs. Dunn, "our boys will all +turn out well in the end, and all we can do is to bring them up in the +best way we know, and trust to them to take care of themselves after +they leave home. Now Dannie is certainly an industrious lad. I hear +him pounding nails all day long in the back yard, and he made a good +job of shingling the woodshed the other day. He seems made to be a +carpenter." + +"Yes, I think so myself," said the Widow Sullivan. "The whole lot of +them is out by the railroad now, building a hut. They've organised a +'Hut Club' to-day, and never a lick of work have I had out of them +boys since mornin'. They've always got something going on, and when I +want a bit of water from the well, or a little wood from the shed, +they're never around." + +"Yes, but boys will be boys, Mrs. Sullivan, and we'd better keep them +contented at home as long as we can. They'll be leaving us soon +enough. It seems that no boys are content to stay in town any longer; +they're all anxious to be off to the city." + +"That's true, that's true, Mrs. Dunn," said Mrs. Sullivan. "I must be +going now. I'm much obliged for the rain-water, and whenever you want +a bit of milk call over the fence, and I'll bring it to you with +pleasure. It's a good neighbour you are, Mrs. Dunn." + +And Mrs. Sullivan went slowly around the house and out at the front +gate, while good Mrs. Dunn returned to her ironing, a few clothes +having to be ready for Sunday. + +While these mothers were discussing their boys, the youngsters +themselves were busy behind the barn, building a hut down near the +railway track. There were six of them altogether, the three extra +ones, besides Archie Dunn and the Sullivan boys, having come from +across the railway to play for the day. Two hours before they had +solemnly organised themselves into the "Hut Club," each boy walking +three times around the block blindfolded, and swearing upon his return +to be true to all the rules and regulations of the organisation, which +had been written with chalk on the side of the barn. The regulations +were numerous, but the most important one was that no East Side boys +were to be allowed within the club-room when it was built, and that +the club's policy should be one of warfare against the East Siders on +every occasion when they met. This fight against the East Side was, +indeed, responsible for the organisation of the club. It was felt +necessary to have some head to their forces, and some means of holding +together. So the club was organised, and now the next thing on the +programme was the erection of a hut to serve as a club-house. Archie +Dunn, who had been elected president, volunteered to get three boards +and a hammer if the other boys would each get two boards and some +nails. This proposition was agreed to, and when the boys returned from +their foraging expeditions it was found that there were more than +enough boards to build the hut, so the work began at once. Holes were +dug in the ground, and some posts planted as supports for the +structure, and then the boards were hastily nailed together from post +to post. In three hours the hut was practically completed, and it +remained only to lay a floor until they could hold their first meeting +in the new club-house. The floor itself was down by noon, and the club +then served a memorable dinner to mark the completion of the +structure. + +A hole was dug in the ground outside the door, and a furnace made. A +skillet was brought from Archie's house, together with some dishes and +a coffee-pot, and Dan Sullivan brought some more dishes, and six eggs +from his nests under the barn. The boys were obliged to make several +trips to and from the houses, but finally nearly everything was ready, +and the eggs were carefully cooked by Archie, who was really a good +housekeeper, from long experience in the kitchen with his mother. Some +potatoes were fried in the grease remaining in the skillet after the +eggs were cooked, and then the feast began. The eggs may have been +rather black with grease, and the potatoes were certainly not done, +but the boys all pronounced it the finest meal of their lives, +notwithstanding the bitter coffee, and the dirty bread, which had been +allowed to fall into the gutter beside the railway track. They were +eating in their own house, and they had cooked in the open air, "just +like tramps," Harry Rafe said, and it was little wonder that they +enjoyed the novel experience. + +The only trouble came when the meal was finished. No one wanted to +wash the dishes, and, finally, it was decided to return them to their +respective kitchens just as they were, and to let them be washed with +the rest of the dinner dishes at home. And this decision came near +putting an end to Hut Club dinners, for both Mrs. Dunn and the Widow +Sullivan were determined not to wash any more dirty dishes from the +hut. + +When the meal was over, the boys lounged about the hut, and Dan +Sullivan brought a lot of things from his sister's playhouse with +which to furnish it more suitably. Archie Dunn brought a lot of hay +from the loft in his mother's barn, and when a piece of old carpet was +spread upon it it made an acceptable couch. A piece of old carpet was +laid in front of the hut, too, where the boys could sit and watch the +trains switching back and forth on the railway, and the tramps who +were heating coffee in cans over by the cattle-pen. + +Finally, some cattle arrived in the pen to be loaded into cars for the +city, and the boys had just decided to go and watch the men loading +them, when an engine came up the side-track with the most beautiful +car they had ever seen, behind it. The car was painted in all colours +of the rainbow, and in giant letters was printed the magic name of +"The World's Greatest Show." + +The boys lost no time in getting down from the cattle-pen fence, and +the car had barely stopped when they were aboard. "Hooray," shouted +Charlie Huffman, "we'll all get jobs of passin' bills." And it was +with this end in view that they sought the advertising manager in the +car, who promised to give them all jobs when the circus came in two +weeks. The boys deluged him with questions of every sort. "Will there +be any elephants?" "Is there goin' to be a parade?" and "Will there be +any trapeze performances?" The poor man was finally obliged to lock +the door to keep them out, and the boys stood about the car until +nearly six o'clock, admiring the paintings, and speculating as to +whether they would be able to work their way into the circus or not, +when it finally came. Their speculations were interrupted by the +appearance on the scene of the Widow Sullivan with a good-sized maple +switch, which she used to good effect in getting the two Sullivans and +Archie Dunn home for supper. For Mrs. Dunn had given Mrs. Sullivan +instructions before she started, so that when Archie complained that +he had been whipped by "that woman next door," he received no sympathy +whatever. + +And when he went to bed at nine o'clock, he could hardly sleep for +thinking of the wonderful things which had happened this day. The +coming circus and the great Hut Club kept him awake until far after +ten, so that he got up too late for Sunday school the next morning, +and was punished accordingly. + +The next week was a hard one at school, and the boys had but little +time to devote to the club. But after four o'clock in the afternoon +they sometimes got together and did various things which improved +their club-house. Some very fair chairs were constructed from empty +soap boxes, and various contrivances were put together to guard +against the intrusion of any East Siders or tramps while they were +away at school. There was no padlock used, and any one coming up to +the hut would imagine it a simple thing to enter-- until he tried. But +the boys had fixed a secret cord which, when pulled, shifted the bar +inside, and every boy was sworn not to betray the existence of the +cord. + +The day set for the circus came nearer and nearer, and the boys began +to be anxious for fear the schools would not close, so that they could +attend. But the superintendent finally announced that they would; so +early on the eventful day the entire club was on the grounds, waiting +to get some work to do. Archie Dunn got the first job, being selected +to carry water for the elephant because he was stronger than any of +the others. But the rest were given something to do, and when the day +was over they had all seen the circus, and went to bed happy, to dream +of the great trip to be taken by the Hut Club on the next Saturday. + + CHAPTER II. + + ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS-- A TRIP TO NEW YORK WITH UNCLE + HENRY. + +THE Hut Club went out on a picnic the next Saturday, and had a jolly +time. They camped upon an island in the middle of a shallow stream, +and while there made coffee and cooked their dinner, having brought +most of the necessary apparatus from the Hut. They fished a little, +and hunted for turtles in the water, and altogether had a good time, +if nothing exciting did occur. It was after nine o'clock at night when +they reached town again, footsore and weary, and Archie Dunn had +hardly entered the house before he was on the dining-room lounge, +half-asleep. His mother seemed to be out, and as he lay there he +wondered how long it would be before she came back. Archie truly loved +his mother, but of late he had often thought that he would like to +leave home and go to the famous city, where he felt sure he could get +something to do. But he disliked the idea of leaving his mother. + +"I'm getting to be a big boy, now," he often said to himself, "and +it's time that I began to look out for myself. I'm nearly seventeen, +and I think I ought to be earning some money. This thing of belonging +to Hut Clubs and spending my time in going to picnics and to circuses +ought to stop. It's all right for boys, but I'm getting to be a man, +now." + +All these thoughts were flying through his mind when his mother came +in. "Oh, Archie," she exclaimed, "I've been so worried about you. I've +just been over to Mrs. Sullivan's to see if Dannie had come home, and +whether he had seen you. Wherever have you been?" + +"We didn't think it would take so long to walk home," said Archie, +jumping up from the sofa, "but we were awfully tired, and we didn't +come very fast. I'm so sorry you were worried. + +"And I'm as hungry as a bear, mother. Can't you find me something to +eat?" + +"Yes, dear," said Mrs. Dunn, softly, "and when you've finished your +supper I have something for you. I won't give it to you now for fear +you won't be able to eat, but as soon as you have finished your meal, +you shall have it." + +So Archie was obliged to eat his baked beans and brown bread and drink +his milk without knowing what was in store for him, and he hurried as +fast as he could, so that he could learn. When he had finished he went +into the sitting-room, and found his mother sitting with a letter +spread open upon her lap. "Uncle Henry has written me asking if you +cannot go with him to New York on Monday, for a couple of days. He is +obliged to go down there on business, and says he will be glad to take +you along and show you something of the wonderful city, for he knows +you won't be any trouble to him. Now I hardly know what to say, +Archie. If I can feel that you are behaving yourself properly, and are +doing your best to be as little trouble as possible, I am willing that +you shall go." + +"Oh, mother," cried Archie, "I'll promise anything. Only let me go +this once, and I'll promise to stay at home all the rest of the +summer." + +"All right, then," said Mrs. Dunn. "You shall go on the first train +Monday morning, and Uncle Henry will join you at Heddens Corner. Run +along to bed now." + +Archie went up-stairs almost dumb with delight Was it really true that +he was to see the great city at last? He had heard some of the boys at +school telling what their fathers saw there, but he had never even +hoped that he would see it for himself so soon. Of course he had +determined to see it all some day, but that was to be far in the +future. The lad could hardly sleep for the joy of it all, and when he +did finally lose consciousness, it was only to dream of streets of +gold, and great buildings reaching to the skies. + +Sunday passed slowly by. At Sunday school, Archie told the boys that +be was going to New York on the morrow, and from that moment he was +the hero of the class. The boys looked at him with wondering +admiration, and seemed scarcely able to realise that one of their +number was to go so far from home. The city was in reality little more +than a hundred miles, but to their boyish minds this distance seemed +wonderfully great. + +Early on Monday morning Archie was at the depot waiting for the train. +His mother was there to see him off, and there were tears in her eyes +at the thought of parting with her only child, if only for a day or +two. And Archie was radiant with delight at the glorious prospect +ahead of him. He walked nervously up and down the platform, and wished +frequently that it were not so early in the morning, so that some of +the boys might be there to see him off. Finally, the great hissing +locomotive drew up, with its long train of coaches, and Archie was +soon aboard, hurrying off to Heddens Corner and the city. In a few +minutes Uncle Henry was with him, a tall, fine-looking man, with an +air of business. Uncle Henry kept the general store at the Corner, and +was an important person in the neighbourhood. He was of some +importance in the city, too, for his name was known in politics, and +his custom was always desired at the wholesale stores. So Archie was +going to see the city under good auspices, if his uncle would only +have time to take him about with him. + +After a couple of hours, during which Archie kept his face glued to +the window-pane, watching the flying landscape, the great train pulled +through a long, dark tunnel, and finally entered an immense shed, +covered with glass where it came to a final stop. Crowds left the +coaches, and passed out of the station, where they were swallowed up +in the great rush of traffic. Some drove away in cabs and carriages. +Some entered the street-cars, and some went up a stairway and entered +what seemed to Archie a railway train in the air. + +Uncle Henry told Archie to follow him carefully, and they, too, were +soon flying away from the neighbourhood of the terminal, past hotels, +stores, and dwellings, until they finally left the trolley-car, and +passed through a cross street into a long, quiet thoroughfare which +looked old enough to have been there for a hundred years. The houses +were built far back from the street, with pillars in front, and into +one of these quaint old dwellings went Archie and his uncle. + +"I always stop down-town," explained Uncle Henry, "because I am near +to the great wholesale establishments. It is central to the retail +stores, too, and to many of the places of interest." + +When they were settled in their room, Uncle Henry explained that he +would have to be away most of this first day, but that to-morrow he +would take Archie out and show him the sights. So Archie expected to +remain indoors all day; but when his uncle had left the house he +decided that he couldn't possibly remain in this close room when so +many wonderful things were taking place outside. So he decided to walk +up and down the street, anyhow, and when he went out he felt like a +prisoner just escaped from a cell. But the noise was terrible, and +there were a great many wagons and trucks passing through the street. +The greatest crowd seemed to be on that cross street about two blocks +away, so Archie decided to go there, and see if there was anything new +on that street. + +He saw many wonderful things. There were cars running along without +any apparent motive power, there were thousands and thousands of +people in the streets, and the stores looked so handsome and +interesting that he simply couldn't resist going into one or two of +them, just to see what they were like. And when he had finished with +one or two he could think of no reason why he shouldn't go on up the +street, where he was sure he would find a great many more interesting +things to see. So on and on he went, until at last he was tired and +hungry, and then, for the first time, he was a little frightened, +because he thought of all he had read about people losing their way in +the city, and not being able to find their relatives again. But he was +a brave boy, so he determined to make an effort to find his way back +without appealing to a policeman. And after a time he was successful, +and entered the queer old house in the ancient street at just three +o'clock in the afternoon. His uncle was there waiting for him, and was +nearly beside himself with apprehension. + +"I was about to send out a general alarm for you, at the police +station," he said. "How did you happen to go away?" + +"Oh, I was so very tired of staying in the house," said Archie, "and I +felt sure that I could find my way back without getting lost at all. +And to-morrow I'm sure I can get along all right, Uncle Henry, so you +needn't bother with me at all, unless you want to." + +And it so happened that Mr. Kirk was very busy the next day, and would +have found it quite impossible to show Archie about. So it was +fortunate that he was able to go everywhere alone, or he would have +had to return home without seeing anything at all of the city. + +As it was, he went here, there, and everywhere, and saw a great deal +of the city, the people, and the way in which they lived. The entire +place had a strange fascination for him, and all the time he was +thinking how glad he would be to live where he could see all this rush +of business, this varied life, every day. And he fully determined to +return some day and get something to do, so that he might work himself +up, and come to own one of the handsome houses on the avenues, or +drive one of the elegant carriages on the boulevard. And he observed +every boy who passed him, and talked with several of them, trying to +find out whether positions were easy to secure, and whether they paid +much when they were secured. + +So when they took the four o'clock train for home, and arrived at +Archie's house in time for supper, he told more about the city boys +and their work than about the tall buildings, the Brooklyn Bridge, or +the Central Park. He talked so much, in fact, about the delights of +the city boy, and the money he earned, that after he had gone to bed +Mrs. Dunn took her brother aside and talked with him concerning +Archie's future. And between them they definitely decided that Archie +must not go to the city to work. + + CHAPTER III. + + ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK-- LEAVING HOME AT NIGHT. + +ARCHIE DUNN was not more ambitious than many other boys of his age, +but he possessed one quality which is not developed in every boy, +determination. Once Archie decided upon doing a thing, once he had +made up his mind that it was truly a good thing to do, nothing could +keep him from putting his plans into action, and making an effort, at +least, to accomplish his ends. Most boys of seventeen have not decided +what they want to become when they are men, and, until his visit to +the city, Archie was equally at sea concerning his future. He knew, of +course, that he wanted to be rich and famous, but when he tried to +think up some suitable profession which would bring him these +possessions, he was never able to decide. + +The two days in the city with Uncle Henry had opened to his boyish +mind a new world, and when he returned to the humble home surrounded +by gardens, he felt that he would never be satisfied to live and work +in this small town. There was now no question in his mind but what the +city was the place for any one who wished to become either rich or +famous. It would certainly be impossible for him to make a name for +himself in this village, while in the city he would have every +opportunity for improving himself, and advancing himself in every way. +He wondered, indeed, that he had never thought of going to New York +before, and was disgusted with himself when he thought of the time he +had wasted here at home. + +But there was no use in thinking of the past. The thing to do now was +to get to the city as quickly as possible, for to Archie every day +seemed precious, and each delay kept him further from the consummation +of his hopes. It never occurred to the boy that his mother might have +objections to his leaving home. She had always been very ambitious for +his future, and he supposed that she would be delighted at the idea of +having her boy in the great city, where he would have innumerable +chances for improving himself. So when they sat on the front porch, +one evening, and he told her of his plan, he was surprised to hear his +mother pleading with him to remain at home. "Archie," she said, "I am +almost sure you will come to some bad end in the city. You really must +not go, for my sake, if for no other reason." + +"But, mother, I can't remain here in town always. I must go out into +the world some time to earn a living and make a place for myself, and +I think the sooner I go the better, don't you?" + +"Yes, Archie, but you're so young, and you've had no experience. You +have no idea of the things there are in great cities to drag young men +down. I don't think I could stand it to have you so far away from home +and in such danger." + +"Well, mother," said Archie, "there isn't much use in arguing about +it. I have reached a point where I don't think I can be any longer +satisfied at home. I have been here seventeen years, and I think I can +remain here that much longer without improving myself. In the city I +am sure I can make rapid progress, and in a year or two you can come +there and live with me." + +Archie got up from the porch and went down the street, while poor Mrs. +Dunn ran over next door to see her neighbour, Mrs. Sullivan. When she +had entered the disorderly kitchen, and seated herself on one of the +home-made chairs, the anxious mother burst into tears. "I don't know +what to think of Archie, Mrs. Sullivan," she said. "He is determined, +now, to go to New York, and I know that if he goes I will never be +able to see him again. I am nigh distracted with worrying over it. I +have talked with him, but he seems determined, and I know I can never +hold out against his entreaties and arguments." + +"Sure, now, Mrs. Dunn," said the Widow Sullivan, "don't yez be a +worryin' about 'im at all. That Archie is a smart boy, he is, and if +he goes to New York he'll come out all right, never fear, I only wish +my Dannie had as much get-up about him as your boy." + +"Yes, yes, Archie is very ambitious for his age," said Mrs. Dunn, "but +I sometimes wish he were less so. I know I could keep him at home +longer if he wasn't so anxious to be at work. I don't believe I can +let him go, Mrs. Sullivan, not yet. I want him to stay in school +another year, and then I'll think about it." + +"Well, ye're wise, Mrs. Dunn, ye're a wise woman," said the Widow +Sullivan. "Since yer husband died ye've been a good mother to the lad, +and have brought 'im up well. And now, how is yer chickens, Mrs. Dunn? +Have ye got that cochin hen a 'settin'' yit?" + +And the two women began to discuss their various fowls, and the +conversation was so interesting that Mrs. Dunn remained late, and +found Archie in bed when she went home. "Ah, well, poor boy, I'll have +to tell him of my decision in the morning. He'll be terribly +disappointed, and I hate to do it I'm afraid it's selfishness that +makes me want to keep him with me. I almost wish he would take things +into his own hands, and start for the city himself. I would be rid +then of the responsibility of sending him, and the question would be +settled for me. Boys sometimes know best how to settle their own +difficulties, anyhow." + +Mrs. Dunn kneaded the bread before retiring, for to-morrow was +Saturday, and, therefore, baking-day, and then she went into her +little room off the kitchen, and prayed earnestly for her boy before +sleeping. She prayed that she might be helped in advising him, and +that he might always do what was best for himself and for his mother. + +The next day was Saturday, and in the morning the Hut Club met, as +usual, and prepared to have an open-air dinner for this day. The +furnace, which had been knocked down during the week by the East +Siders, was rebuilt, and the skillet and other utensils were brought +from the nearest kitchens. Archie went to the grocery around the +corner and bought five cents' worth of cakes, and then the six boys +sat down in a circle and prepared to devour their home-made feast. But +before they began Archie stood up. "I want to say that this will +probably be my farewell dinner with the club," he said, in a low tone, +"and I hope that you will appoint another president in my place." + +The boys were horror-struck, but Archie refused to explain where and +when he was going. Finally, they refused to appoint another president, +all agreeing that Archie should hold that office for ever, wherever he +was. And the meal was eaten in silence, for the announcement had +thrown a sort of chill over the proceedings. When they had finished, +Archie silently shook hands with each of the boys, who were dumb with +amazement, gathered up his skillet and coffee-pot, and went home +through the gate to the chicken-lot. + +"I wonder what he's goin' to do," they all said, as in one breath, and +as there was seldom much fun in the club when Archie was absent, they +all went home in a few minutes, or down-town to watch the farmers, who +were in town to do their weekly buying. + +When Archie reached home he went up-stairs to his little room, and +began to lay out a few things which he wanted to take with him, for he +had determined to start for New York this very night. Then he tied the +things up in a small bundle, and sat down to write a note to his +mother. When he had finished it, he pinned it up at the head of his +cot, and this is what it said: + + "MY DARLING MOTHER:-- Please don't worry about me, I'm bound to + come through all right, and if anything happens to me, I promise + that I will write to you immediately and let you know. I have the + ten dollars which I have saved, and if I don't get work at once I + will write to you for some more. Now, I am not doing this thing for + the sake of adventure, but because I am sure it is the best thing + for me, and I don't want you to worry at all. I shall write to you + often and let you know just what I'm doing, so don't worry, but be + a brave mother. I'm not going off this way as a sneak, but because + I want to avoid a 'scene.' + + "Your loving + + "ARCHIE." + +And at three o'clock the next morning Archie Dunn got out of bed, +shouldered his bundle, and started off for the great city, which +seemed to be drawing him like a magnet. + + CHAPTER IV. + + WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY-- CRUEL TREATMENT. + +WHEN daylight came, Archie was far out of the town walking quickly +along the southern road. He figured that he had walked nearly six +miles in the two hours since he had let himself out of the back door +at home, and, as he looked ahead, he planned that he would walk at +least thirty miles every day. Of course, he had never done much +walking before, or he would have known better than to have expected to +accomplish so much in twelve hours, but he felt fresh and full of +strength this morning, and nothing seemed too hard to accomplish. As +yet he had not regretted his departure from home. The excitement of it +all, and the adventurous side of his exploit, had kept him interested, +and made him feel that he was a real hero. But he was not so foolish +as to imagine that there would not be times when he would regret +having set out for New York. He was too old and too sensible for his +age to allow his ambition to run away with him entirely, and he fully +expected to meet with many great discouragements. "But I'm sure of one +thing," he said to himself, as he walked along, "I never will return +home until I have something to show for the trip. I won't have the +club boys and the neighbours saying that Archie Dunn had to come home +discouraged. If I return without accomplishing anything, I will be +held up to the whole town as a boy who made a fool of himself by not +taking his friends' advice, and I never will be made an example of if +I can help it." And Archie walked faster as he thought of the +possibility of failure. + +When seven o'clock came he was passing through the county-seat, but +though there were many interesting things to look at in the town, +Archie determined not to stop. He was afraid he might meet some one he +knew, who would be sure to ask him where he was going with his bundle, +and what he was doing out so early. And anyhow he was very hungry, and +decided to get out of the town and to the farmhouses as soon as +possible. "I can work for my meal at a farmhouse," he said to himself, +"but in the town they'll take me for a regular tramp." + +So poor Archie walked quickly through the town, still keeping to the +southern road, and saying to himself, as he passed every milestone, +"So much nearer New York." About a mile out in the country he came to +a large farmhouse, and he determined to enter and ask for a meal. He +had hard work to muster up enough courage to go in and ask for +anything, but finally he knocked timidly at the kitchen door, and was +frightened by a large dog which came barking around the corner. It +seemed to him that the animal would surely bite, but a large fat woman +opened the door just in time to let him in. "Hurry in, boy," she said, +"fer there's no tellin' what Tige might do ef he once gets a hold of +ye." So Archie stepped into the large kitchen, with its rafters +overhead, and its dining-table in the corner. "Sit down, boy," said +the woman. "I reckon you's thet new lad thet's come ter work over at +Mullins's, ain't ye?" + +"No'm," said Archie, "I don't work anywhere. I'm on my way to New +York, where I expect to find a position, and I thought perhaps you'd +allow me to do a little work here this morning to earn my breakfast." + +Good Mrs. Lane, for that was the woman's name, was horrified to think +that any one was alive and without breakfast at eight o'clock in the +morning. "Goodness me!" said she. "Why, you must be half-famished fer +want of food, ain't ye?" And she bustled about the kitchen, putting +the kettle on to boil, and stirring up the fire. "You'll have some +nice ham and eggs, my boy, and then I have somethin' in mind fer you. +I reckon yer ain't in no hurry ter get ter the city, be ye? Well, even +if ye do be in a hurry, I reckon you'll be glad of the chance to earn +four dollars. I ain't goin' to ask ye no questions about how ye come +to be walkin' to New York, because I never wuz no hand ter meddle in +other folkses affairs, but ye look to be a likely lad, and a strong +un, and ez my sister's husband, what lives two miles down the pike, +needs a boy to drive a plough fer a week, I b'lieve ye'll suit 'im +first-rate. So ez soon ez ye have finished yer vittles, I'll walk down +there with ye, and we'll see the old man." + +Archie hardly knew whether to be delighted with the prospect or not. +Of course four dollars would be nice to have, but he was anxious to +get to the city as soon as possible, and every day counted. But +perhaps it would be wrong, he thought, to throw away such a good +chance to earn some money, and he had decided to accept any offer the +farmer made him, long before he finished his breakfast. When he got up +from the straight-backed chair, he felt that he had never eaten a +better meal in his life, and when Mrs. Lane started off down the road, +he gladly followed her. A week on such a farm as this would be no +unpleasant experience. Such food was not to be had every day, he knew, +and he of course would have precious little that was good to eat when +he reached the city. + +They soon covered the two miles, Mrs. Lane getting along very fast for +such a large woman, and at last they stood before Hiram Tinch, who +owned the farm. Archie was made to describe his intentions, and was +thoroughly examined by Mr. Tinch. He told the farmer that he knew +nothing about farm work, but Mr. Tinch said he would soon teach him, +and it was settled that Archie was to remain on the farm a week. Mrs. +Lane went inside the house to see her sister, who looked sick with too +much work, and the farmer told Archie that he might as well start in, +as there was no object in waiting. So the boy donned a pair of "blue +jean" trousers, and was taken into a field, where a one-horse plough +was standing. Archie knew how to hitch a horse, so he went to the +stable and secured his steed, and then harnessed him to the plough. +The farmer didn't see fit to give him any instructions about +ploughing, and the poor boy hardly knew what to do, but rather than +ask he started off, and tried to guide the animal in the right +direction, as far as he knew it. Of course the horse went wrong, and +the plough refused to stay in the earth, and altogether the attempt +was a miserable failure. The farmer leaned against the fence, picking +his teeth with a pin, but when he saw the horse going crooked, and the +plough bounding along over the earth, his face grew livid with anger. +For a minute he seemed unable to speak, but strode toward Archie with +a fierce look in his eyes. Then he found his tongue, and opened such a +tirade of vile words that the poor boy shrank from him in terror. He +was in mortal fear lest the man should lay hands on him and commit +some crime, so intense was his rage, but Hiram Tinch seemed to know +how far to go, and after five minutes of cursing and swearing he took +the plough in his own hands, and guided it through the earth. "Now +take it," he growled at Archie, when he had gone a furrow's length, +"and see ef ye can do better this time. Remember, not a bite of dinner +do ye get until this field is ploughed." + +Poor Archie was weak from fright, but there was nothing to do but to +obey. He looked at the vast field before him, and made up his mind +that he would get nothing to eat until night, anyhow, for it was +already nearly noon. He felt very much like bursting into tears, but +he was too proud to give way to his feelings. But he couldn't help +wishing that he were at home, playing with the members of the Hut +Club. "Those boys are much better off than I am," he said, over and +over, "though they have made no effort to improve themselves." After a +time, however, his ambition returned, and as he looked ahead into the +future, and remembered the wonderful things he was going to +accomplish, he felt more like working. + +He finished the field at five o'clock in the afternoon, and was almost +fainting from hunger and from the hard work. The ploughing was fairly +well done, but Hiram Tinch could see no merit in the work. He swore at +Archie again, and gave him a supper of mush and milk. Mrs. Tinch sat +by, and Archie could see that she did not approve of his treatment. +The poor woman seemed afraid to speak, almost, but it was plain that +she had a good heart. So when Archie heard a noise in his garret room +that night, he was not surprised to see Mrs. Tinch at the window, +placing some doughnuts and sandwiches there for him to eat. + + CHAPTER V. + + THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS-- THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE TRAMPS. + +IT seemed to Archie that he had just fallen asleep when old Hiram +Tinch was shaking him awake. "Git up out o' here now, ye lazy beggar, +and git to the field and finish that there ploughin'," he growled, and +the frightened lad awakened from a horrible nightmare, only to find a +worse experience awaiting him in the light of day. He hastily drew on +his trousers, and didn't wait to don either shoes or stockings, for if +he was to spend the day ploughing in a field, he knew he would be more +comfortable in his bare feet. When he reached the kitchen, he found +that Farmer Tinch had already eaten his breakfast, though it was not +daylight. Archie was glad that he was out of the way, and good Mrs. +Tinch was glad of it, too, for she was able to give the boy a good +breakfast, and some good advice with it. "Don't you pay no attention +to what my man says, laddie. He's a powerful man to swear and carry +on, but I don't think he'll have the meanness to strike you. Ef he +does, ye must come to me, and I'll see thet he doesn't do it no more." + +Archie was grateful for this spirit of friendliness, but in his heart +he thought that cruel words were often more painful than lashes, and +he heartily wished that his week was over. + +All this day he spent on the farm, without once going into the road. +Farmer Tinch had warned him that if he saw him making for the road at +any time, he could go and never come back, and he would forfeit what +money he had already earned. So Archie ploughed the field from +daylight till dark, with a half hour at noon for a hurried dinner. He +was glad when darkness came, and after another supper of mush and milk +he was thankful to have a corn-husk bed to sleep on, and was soon in a +stupor which was so sound as to be almost like death. + +Again the next morning he was awakened at daylight, and he was made to +work even harder than on the second day. He had by this time become +somewhat used to the labour, however, and stood it better. He was more +successful in his work, too, and Farmer Tinch had less opportunity for +cursing him. But at night he seemed more tired, even, than before, and +he longed for his home again. He thought of the cosy bed he would now +be enjoying if he had only taken his mother's advice, and he felt +almost like getting up in the night and stealing away on the road to +the north. But, always a sensible lad, Archie realised that this +discouragement could not last, and he lost himself in sleep, looking +forward three days, when his week should be up, and he would be on his +way to the city, with four dollars more to add to his slender store. + +The three days passed slowly, but at length the Saturday night came, +and he prepared to be off. But good Mrs. Tinch entreated him to remain +with them over Sunday, and, as Archie wasn't sure that it would be +quite right for him to travel on Sunday, he decided to do so. So the +next day he brushed his only suit of clothes, and drove with his late +employer to church, where Farmer Tinch sat in a front seat and passed +the bread and wine at communion. Archie's heart rose to his throat as +he saw this paragon so devout in church. He felt like rising in his +seat and denouncing him before all the people as a tyrant and a +hard-hearted wretch. But he kept quiet, though he found it impossible +to partake of the communion under such circumstances. + +The Tinches had brought their dinner with them, and at noon they all +sat on one of the grassy mounds in the churchyard, to take some +refreshment before the afternoon service began. When they had +finished, Archie wandered off, and came to a crowd of boys who were +romping behind the church. When they saw him approach, they all +stopped their noise, and looked at him wonderingly. Evidently they +were not used to seeing strange boys. The silence was soon broken, +however, by one of the boys calling out, "Why, fellers, thet's the +chap what's been workin' fer Hiram Tinch." This announcement was +enough to make Archie an even greater object of interest than before, +for the boys seemed to think that any person who could work for Farmer +Tinch, and come out of the ordeal none the worse for wear, must be +something wonderful. Archie was soon on good terms with them all, +however, and told them of his plan of going to New York. The boys were +all attention, and soon he was the hero of the occasion. When the bell +rung for the afternoon service he was still telling them of the things +he was going to do, and none of them wanted to go into the church. +Archie persuaded them to enter, however, but he was not surprised to +meet them all along the road when he left Tinch's early Monday +morning. + +It was almost time to go to bed when they reached the farmhouse that +night, so Archie went at once to his attic, being anxious to start +fresh on his journey the next day. He was now determined to push on as +rapidly as possible, hoping to reach the city within three or four +days. He was somewhat afraid that he wouldn't be able to do this, but +he was going to try, anyhow. + +At daylight Monday morning he was on the way, and when the various +boys he met the day before said good-bye to him and wished him good +luck, he felt that his stay at Tinch's had not been without benefits +of some sort. He had made some boy friends, and he was four dollars +richer, Archie was sensible enough, too, to realise that his +experience would be a valuable one to him in the future. He knew now +what hard work was, at any rate. + +The morning walk was delightful. The September weather was perfect, +and all along the road were fruit-trees laden with every sort of good +thing to eat a boy could wish for. And as the trees were on the public +thoroughfare, Archie did net hesitate to help himself freely as he +went along, so that he didn't require any meal at noon. + +As night drew near, however, he began to wonder what he would do for a +bed, and the question became more important with every hour. He had +come to no towns since morning, and knew that he couldn't expect to +reach one of any size until the next day, anyhow. There were +farmhouses, of course, but after his experience of the past week the +lad felt that he would rather remain outdoors all night than risk +being thrown in with another Hiram Tinch. He didn't know enough of +farmers to know that few of them resemble Mr. Tinch in nature, and he +did what he thought was best in keeping away from farmhouses after +this. + +It was five o'clock in the evening, and Archie was beginning to feel +very tired and hungry, when he came to the ruins of an old colonial +mansion, which lay far back from the road, surrounded by trees, and +almost hid with shrubbery. "How interesting," he thought to himself. +"It looks just like the pictures of old ruins we see in geographies. I +think I must go up and see what they look like at close range." And, +fired with a spirit of adventure, and making believe that he was an +explorer in an ancient country, the boy made his way through the trees +and shrubbery. The ruins looked more and more interesting as he +advanced. This had evidently been a magnificent estate at one time. +There were massive pillars which had once supported a stately portico +at the front of the house, and above all there rose a massive chimney, +which seemed to be exceedingly well preserved. As Archie came nearer, +he was surprised to notice a thin column of smoke rising from the top +of the chimney, and for a moment he stood still with fright. What +could this mean? Who could be building a fire in the midst of these +ruins. It was almost like what one reads about in books, he thought. + +For some time he could not decide what to do, whether he had better +keep on, or whether the wisest policy would be to get back to the road +as quickly as possible. Finally, his curiosity and thirst for +adventure persuaded him to go on, and he continued to push his way +through the shrubbery until he stood before the ruins. He then climbed +a flight of steps, and stood in what had once been the main entrance +to this massive palace. Before him he saw a scene which was almost +weird in its unusualness. A fire of pine-knots was blazing in the +ruins of the great fireplace, and seated in a semicircle around the +fire were several men of picturesque appearance, whose faces looked up +angrily when they were disturbed. + + CHAPTER VI. + + STEALING A RIDE-- KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN. + +ARCHIE was dumbfounded. Never before had he been among such a motley +crowd, and his first impulse was to turn and run. But on second +thought he decided that it would be best to put on a bold face and +walk up to the men. This he did, and when he reached the fire the men +jumped up and asked him who he was. In a few words he told them his +simple story, and they all laughed and sat down again about the fire, +making a place for him. "You're one of us, then, laddie," said the +leader of the gang. "We're all soldiers of fortune, all dependent upon +the generous public for our livelihood. But we're not goin' to the +city. There's nothin' there for us, and our advice to you is for you +to steer clear of the place, too. Them police takes ye and throws ye +into jail as quick as a wink, and there's no chance of gettin' +anythink to eat at basement doors, neither. They're all on to us, +there, laddie, and ye'd better stick to the country." + +This bit of advice was endorsed by the entire company, and it was in +vain that Archie tried to make them understand that he was no ordinary +tramp, walking about the country in search of an easy time. He tried +to tell them that he was going to the city to work, not to beg; but +the leader, a big, dirty fellow, weighing two hundred pounds or over, +said, "Never mind, laddie, we knows you've run away from home to get +away from the folks, and we appreciates yer position. If yer a mind to +stand by us, we'll stand by you, and see thet ye comes to no harm." + +On thinking things over, Archie decided that it was perhaps the wisest +thing for him to appear to sympathise with the tramps, and make +himself agreeable while with them. He had undoubtedly run into a gang +of the worst sort of vagabonds, and there was no way of getting away +from there without arousing their suspicions. So he partook of their +slender meal, and joined in the general laughter when the leader, +"Fattie Foy," made some crude attempt at punning. The meal was one to +be remembered. The coffee had been heated in an empty tomato can over +the fire, and from its taste was evidently a combination of various +collections made from the farmhouses round about. Besides the coffee +there was a various collection of sandwiches and bread and butter, and +two pieces of cake. One man had succeeded in striking a good house, +and came back laden with pickles and crackers and cheese, which were +probably the remains of some picnic basket. Another fellow had brought +some pieces of cold bacon, and these were warmed on sticks over the +fire until they looked really appetising. From some barn had come a +half-dozen fresh eggs, and these were quickly boiled in a can of hot +water, and made a very fair showing on the slab of granite which +served as a table. + +When everything was ready the provisions were equally divided among +the crowd, and every one shared alike. It made no difference how much +more one man collected than another, it was always shared with the +entire crowd. Poor Archie found it almost impossible to eat, but the +men insisted that he take something, so he did manage to swallow a few +sips of coffee and eat a slice of bread and butter. But as he looked +about him at the dirty hands and faces, and the filthy garments of the +tramps, he determined not to eat again while with them. + +When the meal was over the two tin cans were washed at a spring of +water, and as it was now quite dark, they all sat close to the fire, +in order to see. Some one produced a pack of dirty cards, and they +began a game of some kind. Archie was asked to join, but he told them +he didn't know anything about card-playing. The poor lad was beginning +to wish he had never left home, and felt more miserable than at any +other period of the journey. He walked over to a corner of the ruins +where the light from the fire did not penetrate, and, once there, he +sat down and sobbed bitterly for a time. When he had finished crying +it seemed impossible for him to sleep. The scene about the fire +fascinated him. The men were seated in every sort of picturesque +attitude, and as the flickering light fell upon their dark faces it +wasn't hard for the poor lad to imagine that he had fallen among a +crowd of brigands. He watched them as they played until he could see +no longer, and then he fell into a sound sleep. + +When Archie woke it was still dark, but the moon was shining brightly +overhead, making everything as light as day. He rubbed his eyes and +sat up, and it was some time before he could realise where he was. +Then, as he saw the tramps lying about the ground, he remembered his +adventures of the night before, and, horrified that he had allowed +himself to sleep, he hastily jumped up, and determined to get away +from the ruins as quickly as possible. The tramps were all sleeping +soundly, and the only noises to be heard were the sound of their +breathing and the blood-curdling hoot of some owl perched on the +pillars of the old portico. The boy picked his way carefully between +the bodies of the sleeping men, and in a minute stood once more on the +grand flight of steps outside. He was trembling for fear some tramp +would awake and prevent his going, and when a bat brushed him in its +flight he almost screamed with terror. Far out beyond the trees and +the shrubby he could see the road glistening in the moonlight, and he +made his way as rapidly as possible out of the grounds, and was once +more on his way to the city. + +It was lonesome work, walking along a country road at night, and +Archie remembered with longing his cosy bed at home. The feeling of +homesickness kept growing within him, despite his efforts to down it, +and when at last the glorious autumn sun rose over the eastern horizon +he was miserable with longing for mother and for home. But he was too +proud to even think of turning back. He must reach the city at all +hazards, homesick or not. + +Archie did not think of breakfast this morning. His experience of the +night before seemed to have taken away his appetite entirely, and his +only thought was to walk as fast as possible, so that he could reach +the city soon. About nine o'clock he entered the outskirts of a busy +town, and while there he observed that the railroad going to the city +passed through the place. All at once a new idea occurred to him. He +had so often heard men and boys tell of how they had stolen a ride +from one town to another. Why shouldn't he be able to get a ride on a +freight train to the city. Would it be wrong? Archie thought not, +since so many men did it. And anyhow it didn't seem a wicked thing to +cheat the railroad. He had heard people say that the company ought to +be cheated whenever possible, since it cheated so many others. So, +from being so tired and so anxious to reach New York, Archie decided +to try and steal a ride. He entered the yards, where a train was being +made up for the south, and there he saw a cattle-car with an open +door. He immediately jumped inside and shut the door, squeezing +himself into the farthest corner, hoping that he wouldn't be +discovered. He soon found that he wasn't alone, for a couple of tramps +were in the opposite corner, and they whispered to him not to make any +noise. "The brakie," they said, "will soon be 'round, and if he finds +ye he'll put us all in jail." + +Poor Archie grew pale at the thought of being put in jail, and huddled +himself closer in the corner. After a time the train started, and the +tramps, he noticed, climbed up into some sort of compartment under the +roof of the car, where they wouldn't be observed, leaving Archie alone +down-stairs. Things went smoothly for a time. The train went flying +along, and Archie counted every mile which brought him nearer to the +city. Finally the train pulled up at a crossing, and a brakeman came +along and threw open the door of the car. He was not long in +discovering the cowering figure in the corner, and his wrath was +dreadful to look upon. "So, ye cussed vagabond," he growled, "ye +thought ye'd steal a ride, did ye? Get out o' this now. Quick, out +with ye." Archie could have fainted, and, as it was, he almost fell +out of the car, propelled by the brakeman's boot. For awhile he stood +dazed beside the track, and finally moved on. "I'll keep a 'stiff +upper lip,'" he said, "whatever happens." But this was by far the most +discouraging adventure yet. + + CHAPTER VII. + + ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK-- A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE. + +ON and on for the rest of the day walked Archie. His feet were sore, +he was weak from hunger, and he was made miserable with being +homesick. People who met him on the road turned around to look at the +slender lad with the pale face and the weary step, but he kept walking +on, stopping for nothing, and noticing no one. At noon he picked some +apples in an orchard, and these appeased his hunger. When evening drew +near, however, he felt that he could go without food no longer, so he +didn't hesitate to stop at a house and ask for food. "I know mother +would give a boy food if one should come to our door," he said to +himself, "so I do not think it wrong for me to ask for food here." He +was fortunate enough to strike a pleasant housewife, who took him in +and made him sit down at the kitchen table, which she covered with +good things to eat. There was cold roast beef, some fried potatoes and +a glass of good fresh milk. And then she gave him some apple pie, so +that when he had finished Archie felt better than for many a day. +While he ate he told the good woman why he was going to New York, and +her sympathy was enlisted at once. "Why, you poor lad," she exclaimed, +"just to think of your being in the city all alone. And what will your +mother think?" + +Archie couldn't imagine what his mother did think. He had remembered +her every minute during the last few days, and was anxious to write +her, so he decided to ask the woman for some paper and a pencil. These +were gladly given him, and he sat down and told his mother that he was +almost to New York and that he had been having a splendid time. He was +careful not to say anything about his experience with Farmer Tinch, or +the night he spent with the tramps. He knew these things would only +make her unhappy, and it was just as well that she should think +everything was smooth sailing for him. His letter was filled with his +enthusiasm and his hope for the morrow, so that when good Mrs. Dunn +received it she was overjoyed, and hurried over to show it to the +Widow Sullivan, who enjoyed it thoroughly and said "I told you so." +Poor Mrs. Dunn had been having a very miserable time of it. She was +hardly surprised that morning when she awoke and found Archie gone, +but she was naturally much worried for fear some accident would happen +to him before he reached New York. Once there, she felt that she +needn't worry much about him, for, strange to say, Mrs. Dunn had a +firm belief in the ability of city policemen to take care of every +one, and she knew that Archie would not be allowed to suffer for want +of food and a place to sleep. And when she received this letter, +saying that Archie was nearly to New York, and had even been so +successful as to earn some money, she felt more comfortable than for +some time, Of course she supposed that he would be home before long. +She was positive that he wouldn't be able to get any work in the city, +and knew that as soon as his money gave out he would return. "It's all +for the best," she said to Mrs. Sullivan. "The habit of running away +from home was born in the boy. His father left home when he was no +older than Archie, and no harm ever came to him. So I'm not going to +worry, Mrs. Sullivan." And then Mrs. Dunn would go back to her home, +and at sight of Archie's old hat or some of his football +paraphernalia, would burst into tears. + +The good woman who gave Archie his supper refused to let him start out +again on the road that night. She told him that he must remain with +them, for they had an extra bed up over the kitchen which was never +needed, and that he might just as well sleep there as not. So for the +first time in nearly a week Archie slept comfortably, and, as he heard +the familiar sounds in the kitchen below him in the morning, it was +hard for him to make up his mind that he was not at home, and that it +was not his mother who was grinding the coffee in the kitchen below. +He heard the ham frying in the skillet, and the rattle of the dishes +as his hostess set the table, and then he dressed himself and hastened +downstairs, feeling ready for a good day's walking. + +When he had eaten his breakfast he started out again. The woman told +him that it was only about fifteen miles to New York, and that after +he had walked about six of them he could take a trolley-car and ride +the remainder of the distance for five cents. So he thanked her for +her kindness, and promised to let her know how he succeeded in the +city, for the woman was much interested in his future. He felt almost +sorry to leave the home-like place, but the prospect of reaching the +city this very day was enough to make him anxious to be off. He +covered the six miles to the trolley-car before eleven o'clock in the +morning, and then in an hour and a quarter more the trolley landed him +in lower New York. + +His sensations as he was whirled along the smooth pavements, past +beautiful buildings and handsome residences, may be better imagined +than described. After looking forward to this day for so long, he was +almost overcome at the realisation of his hopes, and took the utmost +delight in everything about him. When the car stopped at the terminus +of the line, he got out and walked up the busiest street in the +neighbourhood. He hardly knew what to do first, but continued walking +until he came to the New York end of the great Brooklyn Bridge. Then +he couldn't resist the desire to walk across the bridge, and he +started out upon the journey. Up the steps he walked, and soon he had +climbed as far as the middle of the magnificent structure. There he +stood for some time, looking out over Governor's Island, nestled like +a green egg in a nest of red buildings, and past Staten Island to the +open sea beyond It was all grander, more beautiful than anything he +had ever seen before, and he felt glad that he had come. Then in +another direction he saw the never-ending succession of buildings, +some tall, some low ones, but all inhabited with swarms of people. +"There are three million people in this great city," he said to +himself, "and over them in New Jersey, in those cities I see, there +are a million more, and I am one of four million." The thought was too +much for the boy, and he continued his walk across the bridge. Once +across, he came back again, for Brooklyn was a strange place to him. +In New York City he felt more at home, for he had at least spent two +days within its limits. + +Once back in the busy streets, he decided to look about for a cheap +place to stay for the night. It was the middle of the afternoon now, +and he felt that he ought to make some preparation. He knew better +than to apply at the police station for lodging, for he knew they +would probably turn him over to the famous Gerry Society, which would +send him back home before a day had passed, and then where would his +ambitions be? + +He remembered the place where he had stayed with Uncle Henry, but he +knew that this would be too high-priced for his pocketbook, so he +started up the Bowery, where he expected to find some very cheap +places. He didn't like the looks of the people he met in the street, +but his experiences on the way to New York had taught him not to be +too particular about a little dirt. So when he came to a rickety +building with a sign up, "Beds, ten and fifteen cents," he immediately +went up the dark, filthy stairway, and found himself in a large room +at the top which served as the "hotel" office. There were rows of +chairs in front of the windows and along the walls, and in the chairs +were the queerest-looking lot of men he had ever seen. He didn't pay +any attention to them, though, but went up to the seedy individual +behind the desk, and asked him if he could get a bed for the night. +"Sure, Mike," the man replied, and Archie signed his name in a dirty +book with torn pages. He paid the man ten cents, and asked if he could +leave his bundle while he went outside. "Sure, Mike," was again his +answer, and the man took his little bundle of necessities and threw +them on the floor behind the counter. When Archie had gone out, a fat +man with a baby face came up and whispered to the clerk. "Anything in +the bloke?" he inquired. "Nit," said the clerk, "don't yer see his +baggage? Does it look like there's anything in it?" And the mysterious +conversation closed, to be continued later in the evening. + + CHAPTER VIII. + + LOOKING FOR WORK-- WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY RESTAURANT. + +AFTER a couple of hours spent in going about the streets, Archie went +into a place where he bought some coffee and rolls for his supper. He +paid only five cents for three sweet rolls and a large cup of coffee +which was not at all bad to taste, and he returned to the +lodging-house on the Bowery feeling better than he had expected to +feel when he started out from the homestead where he spent the +previous night, If he could get a good meal for five or ten cents, and +could sleep for ten cents more, he would have enough to keep him going +for some time. + +The Bowery at night presented a wonderful appearance to Archie's mind. +The brilliantly lighted shops, the cheap theatres with their bands of +musicians on the sidewalk in front of the entrance, were all +attractive to his boyish eyes, but he was wise enough to pass them all +by, and to make his way as quickly as possible to the cheap +lodging-house. The street was jammed with persons of every +description. He was surprised particularly at the number of Chinamen +he met, for he didn't know that a block or two away was the centre of +the Chinese population of New York, where the Celestials have their +theatre, their hotels, their great stores, and their joss-house. There +were many Italians in the street, too, and Polish Jews, to say nothing +of Frenchmen and Germans. Then there was the typical Bowery "tough," +who swaggered up and down, looking for trouble, which he usually finds +before an evening passes. Archie was not afraid in this cosmopolitan +crowd. No one seemed to notice him, and, anyhow, there were a great +many policemen about, who seemed to keep a sharp lookout all the time. +And as Archie shared his mother's faith in the city policeman, he felt +no fear. + +In the lodging-house everything looked very much as before. The chairs +were still occupied with filthy-looking men, who smoked and spat and +talked in undertones among themselves. The boy paid no attention to +any of them, but, walking up to the seedy individual behind the +counter, asked him if he could go to bed now. The man answered, +"Certainly," and sent a fellow with Archie to show him his bed. It was +in a long, narrow room, which was poorly lighted with a few gas-jets +here and there, and which was filled with about thirty beds, all +narrow, and all dirty. One of these was pointed out to Archie, and +then the man left him. The poor lad felt more homesick than ever, and +had it not been that he had a glorious to-morrow to look forward to, +he would have been very miserable indeed. As it was, he undressed and +got between the chilly sheets, when he remembered that he hadn't +looked after his little roll of bills for a long time, and that some +of them might be missing. He crawled out of bed again, and felt inside +the lining of his coat for the purse. He had sewed it there for +safe-keeping until he reached the city, for he had some little change +in his pocket, which he knew would last him for several days. + +The poor boy's hand felt nothing but a cut in the lining, where the +roll of bills had been, and all at once he realised that the money +must have been stolen from him. And he at once thought of the night in +the ruins, when he fell asleep among the tramps, and there was no +doubt in his mind but that they had taken his money from him. This was +a terrible blow. Here he was, with just a few cents in his pocket, and +no one to whom he could appeal for aid. It was the worst predicament +Archie had ever been in, and he hardly knew what to do. He sat on the +side of his dirty little bed for awhile, and then he snuggled under +the covers and was soon asleep again. For a boy who has been walking +all day seldom stays awake from worry. + +But when he awoke in the morning, it was to realise the fact that he +must get some money this very day or go to the police station. The few +cents he had remaining were only enough to buy some coffee and bread +for breakfast, and the poor lad didn't know where his next meal would +come from. As he went out, the clerk in the filthy office of the +lodging-house told him that he needn't come back any more. + +"Why did you tell him that?" asked the fat man with a sly face. + +"Because I went through his clothes last night when he was asleep, and +he had only six cents in his pocket. We don't want no starvin' brats +around here, to bring the Gerry Society down upon us." + +It was well that Archie didn't know his pockets had been searched +while he was asleep, or his faith in human nature would have been more +shaken than ever before. He had not suspected that the men in this +lodging-house might be dishonest. + +"They are poor," he said to himself when he saw them first, "but they +may be good men for all that." + +After a slender meal, Archie found a library where he looked over the +advertising columns of the morning papers, trying to find some +position open which he thought he might fill. There were several +advertisements calling for office boys, and all these he made note of, +and then as he looked down the page he noticed that a boy was wanted +in a restaurant to wash dishes. He decided that if he didn't succeed +in getting a place as office boy, he might get the restaurant place. +He knew that in a restaurant he would be likely at least to get enough +to eat. + +For two hours he called at addresses of men who wanted office boys, +but at every place he was turned away. "We have already hired one," +some of them said, and others told him that they never took any boys +in the office who were living away from home. Some asked him for +recommendations, and when he had none, they looked at him and told him +"good morning." It was all terribly discouraging, and with every +minute Archie was wishing more and more that he were back home again. +Somehow the city seemed different now from what it had been when Uncle +Henry was with him. Everything was less bright, and the things he had +been delighted with before were less interesting now. + +Finally, he entered a large, handsome suite of rooms, in one of the +great sky-scrapers, and was shown into a very elegant private office. +There he found an old gentleman seated in a great easy chair, looking +over papers, and keeping one eye upon a buzzing instrument at his side +which seemed to be spitting out long strips of paper, like a magician +in a side-show. The man looked up as he entered, and cleared his +throat. "Ahem," he said, "you look as if you were from the country. I +wonder, now, if you have came to the city to seek your fortune." + +Archie was embarrassed. "Yes, sir, I suppose you might put it that +way," he replied. + +"Well," continued the old gentleman, "my advice to you is to go back +where you came from as quickly as you can. Not one boy in a thousand +will gain either fame or fortune in New York, and you stand a +wonderful chance of sinking lower every year. And even if you do +succeed, you will miss many beautiful things in your life which may +come to you in the country. You can have a pleasant home there, and +live an easy, natural life, while here it will be years before you can +expect to accomplish much, and you will spend your life in a nervous +strain. Think well, young man, before choosing the great city as your +sphere of usefulness." + +"I've made up my mind, sir," said Archie. "I have quite decided to +remain in the city." + +"Very well," said the old gentleman, "I hope you may never regret it. +But we have already hired an office boy. Good morning." + +Archie walked out, more discouraged than ever. Perhaps, after all, a +country life was not to be so much despised. This man ought to know +what he was talking about. But once outside, in the Broadway crowd, +Archie forgot everything about the country, and was lost in the +delight of being one of four million. + +He now decided to accept the place in the restaurant, if it were not +taken, and, fortunately for him, it was not. So he rolled up his +sleeves, and began to wash dishes as if he had done nothing else in +all his life before. + + CHAPTER IX. + + IN THE STREET AGAIN-- THE POLICE STATION-- VISITS THE NEWSPAPER OFFICE, + AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR. + +ALL day long Archie washed dishes, and before night came he decided +that he had never before had such discouraging work. The restaurant +was a popular one, and there were very many dishes to be washed, to +say nothing of the pots and pans which were always dirty. Archie no +sooner finished one sink full of dishes than another large pile was +waiting to be put through the same operation, and there was no time at +all for looking about him. There was hardly time for eating, even, and +at noon he was only able to snatch a few mouthfuls. The work was not +interesting, and it was a new sort of labour to Archie, so that +altogether he did not get on as well as he might have wished. The cook +was constantly nagging him, and telling him to hurry up, and the poor +lad tried his best to please him. But somehow everything went wrong, +and he was hardly surprised when the proprietor came in at six o'clock +with a new man for the place. "Come around in the morning," he said to +Archie, "and I'll pay your day's wages." + +So the boy was in the street once more, with no money, and no place to +sleep. He wasn't hungry, that was one thing, for he had been allowed +to eat a good meal before leaving the restaurant. But where was he to +sleep, and what was he to do on the morrow, when he would surely be +hungry? His experience at looking for work had not been encouraging, +and he began to have serious doubts as to whether he would ever get a +place. Certainly he would starve if he waited around New York long +without anything to do. + +It was quite dark at seven o'clock, and Archie walked over to the +brilliantly lighted street which ran north and south through the city. +He had never failed to find something interesting to look at there, +and he felt now that he would like to see the bright side of city +life, even if he couldn't enjoy it himself. So all the evening he +walked up and down the street, watching the well-dressed crowds +hurrying into the theatres and the other almost innumerable places of +amusement. He stared in open-mouthed amazement at some of the costumes +of the women he saw alighting from carriages. Never before had he seen +anything half so beautiful, and if any one had told him that there +were such dresses he would have told them he didn't believe it. Some +of them, he thought, must cost hundreds of dollars, and the jewels +worn with them many hundreds more. How interesting, how new, it all +was to him! Once he thought of the little home in the village, and at +first wished that his mother might be there to enjoy the sights with +him. "But I wouldn't want her to see me," he thought, "not while I am +so miserable, and feeling so discouraged." For Archie was beginning to +wonder if he hadn't made a mistake in leaving home, whether he had not +been overconfident and hot-headed. But he decided to try it a few days +more, that is, if he could manage to live for that length of time in +the city. + +At twelve o'clock he was walking up and down the street, which was +still bright with millions of lights, though the crowds had gone home +from the theatres, and the restaurants were beginning to be less +popular. He was still wondering how he was going to find a place to +sleep, when he was accosted by a policeman, and taken into a doorway. +"I've been watching you," said the officer, "and I want to know why +you are walking up and down the street at this time of night." + +Archie could have cried from fright, but he remembered that he was +under suspicion, so decided to tell the policeman his whole story, and +perhaps he could help him out in some way. So he described his +experiences during the day, and was surprised at the interest shown by +the officer in the recital. When he had finished he was told that he +would be taken to the police station. "You needn't be afraid, my lad," +said the policeman. "I'll see that the Gerry Society doesn't get you +and send you home, that is, if you think you want to try it here a few +days longer. You can sleep at the station to-night, and the next +morning you can try it again." So to the station they went, and Archie +was, naturally, a little frightened when he saw, for the first time, +the cells, and the terribly severe appearance of all his surroundings. +But he was given a good bed in which to sleep, and he passed a +delightful night, dreaming of the wonderful adventures which befell +him in the city. + +He was not awakened until eight o'clock, and then he found the good +policeman waiting to take him out to breakfast, He expressed surprise +that he should be so kind to him. + +"I always thought that officers were cross and unpleasant," he said, +"but you're not that kind, anyhow." + +"Well," laughed the officer, "we have to be cross very often, though +we're sometimes sorry to be so. But I've taken a fancy to you, my lad. +I like to see a boy who does things. When a boy of seventeen is +willing to come to New York alone, and make his own way, without +friends or influence of any kind, it shows a proper spirit, and he +ought to succeed. I know you'll get along if you only persevere. I'd +advise you to keep on trying." + +"Oh, I'm going to, now," said Archie. "I was very homesick and +discouraged last night, but since I've met you I seem to have received +a new impetus, and I'm ready to make a new beginning." + +So Archie and the policeman parted friends. + +"Come around to the station to-night if you want a bed, and you shall +be cared for," said the officer, as he turned around the corner into +the busy street, where he was lost in the crowd. + +Archie walked down the street, hardly knowing what to do first. He +didn't feel like answering any more advertisements in the newspapers, +and he decided to go into a few stores and ask for work. He was about +to do this when he saw before him the magnificent building of the New +York Enterprise. It was a truly beautiful structure, rising fifteen +stories above the ground, and surmounted with an artistic tower, which +could be seen from almost any part of the city. The home of the city's +greatest daily, it looked as if it were always welcoming strangers to +the metropolis, and Archie felt an irresistible impulse to enter. +Everything connected with a newspaper had for him the greatest +fascination, and he knew he would enjoy seeing through this wonderful +building, which was almost wholly occupied by the departments of the +Enterprise. So he entered the door, and passed from one floor to +another, finally arriving at the highest floor of all, where were +located the editorial rooms of the Evening Enterprise. All at once a +new plan entered Archie's fertile brain. Why shouldn't he be able to +get something to do on a newspaper? It had always been his greatest +ambition to become a reporter, and here, although he didn't think the +editor would take him in that capacity, he thought he might get some +sort of work. in which he could work himself up. + +There upon the door were the magic words: "Editor of the Evening +enterprise. No Admittance." Archie opened the door and entered. He +knew it would be useless to send in his name. It was best to see the +editor at once, and without ceremony. He was seated before a large +desk, which was littered with papers of every description, and he was +a very pleasant person in appearance. Archie stood hesitating near the +door, and remained there a minute or two before the editor looked up. + +"Well, my boy, what is it?" + +Archie took courage. + +"I-- I want to be a reporter, sir, and I thought it would do no harm +to ask you for such a position, anyhow." + +The distinguished journalist wheeled about in his chair. + +"What!" he exclaimed, "you want to be a reporter. Why, my dear boy, +how old are you?" + +"I'll be eighteen my next birthday," said Archie, "and, sir, I've had +some experiences in the last two weeks, which make me feel as if I +were about five years older than I really am. I've been through some +very trying experiences, sir." + +The editor was interested at once. "Tell me what your experiences have +been," he said, and Archie began, and told him his whole story; how he +had left home to win fame and fortune, and how he had worked on the +farm for a week with Farmer Tinch; how he had been robbed the night he +stayed with the tramps in the ancient ruins, and how he had finally +reached the city. Then he told him of the night in the lodging-house, +of his dish-washing experience in the restaurant, and how he had been +taken from the street by a policeman the night before, and allowed to +sleep in the station-house. When he had finished the editor had a +broad grin upon his face. + +"By Jove!" he exclaimed, "this is certainly rich stuff. There's a good +story in it, I'll be bound." + +Then, speaking to Archie, he said: + +"Just wait here a minute, my boy, and I'll see if we can't put some +money in your way." + +He pressed a button at the side of his desk, and when a boy appeared, +he told him to bring "Mr. Jones, please, or one of the other +reporters. And tell Jones to bring an artist with him." + +The reporter and the artist soon stood before the editor, who told +them, with great glee, that he had a leading feature for the next +evening edition of the Enterprise. "Just talk to this boy, Jones, and +see if you can't make two good columns on the front page and two for +the inside from his story. I think it's great, myself. And you Cash," +he said, turning to the artist, "you make a good sketch of the boy." + +Archie could hardly believe his eyes and ears. Just to think that he +was being interviewed, and that his picture was to be in the paper. It +seemed almost too good to be true. + +When the reporter had finished with him, he was taken down-stairs to +the cashier's office and given thirty dollars in bills. "This will pay +you for the interview," said the editor, "and give you enough to fix +up with. Now, to-morrow, you come in again, and I think I can give you +steady employment." + +Oh, how happy Archie was! He went out into the street, and seemed to +fairly walk on air. Then he heard the newsboys crying, "Extra paper, +read about the Enterprise's Boy Reporter." And when Archie saw the +paper, there on the front page was his picture, together with the +story of his "startling adventures." + + CHAPTER X. + + LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN-- FEATURED AS "THE BOY REPORTER." + +ARCHIE often speaks of the day when he visited the newspaper office +for the first time as the happiest day in all his life. The change +from despair and homesickness to the joy of being appreciated by some +one was so rapid that it made his head fairly swim with the +exhilaration of success. With thirty dollars in his pocket, and the +knowledge that he would have steady employment of the kind he desired +on the morrow, he walked up the Bowery feeling like a prince. He +entered the lodging-house where he had left his bundle of clothing, +and so surprised the clerk by his new appearance that he was invited +to remain there for another night. The shrewd man guessed that some +good fortune must have befallen Archie, or he wouldn't be so happy. +But the one night of misery which he had spent in the squalid hotel +was enough for Archie, and he walked hastily up-town with his bundle, +keeping a sharp lookout for a pleasant place where he might get a +room. In his previous wanderings he had seen several nice houses with +rooms to rent, but now that he wanted a room he found it difficult to +find any of these neighbourhoods. He was anxious to get settled as +quickly as possible, for he wanted to get everything done to-day, so +that to-morrow he could have time to do anything required of him by +the editor of the Enterprise. He must get a new suit of clothes, be +must get his hair cut, and last, but not least, he must write home to +mother and tell her of his great good fortune. + +Finally, in his wanderings, Archie came to a beautiful square which +was surrounded on every side by business houses and tenements. But the +square itself and the houses on it were very quaint and very handsome, +so that it seemed to be a very oasis in the desert. The green trees, +just a little tinged with the brown and gold of autumn, reminded +Archie of the front yard at home, and he decided to get a room in one +of the houses here if he could possibly do so. + +It so happened that there was a hall bedroom empty in one of the +best-looking places, and Archie at once engaged it. The price was more +reasonable than he had hoped for, even, and this made him happy, for +as yet he had no idea how much his earnings would be, and he was +anxious to be able to save something to send home, if he possibly +could. The room was nicely furnished, and looked out upon the +fountain, with the green trees, so that it was highly satisfactory in +every respect. It didn't take Archie long to undo his bundle, and it +was a pitiful display that greeted him when it was opened. The little +comb and brush, a piece of soap, a Testament given him last Christmas +by the teacher at Sunday school, a suit of underwear, and a couple of +handkerchiefs. The whole lot of things hardly filled a corner in one +of the bureau drawers, and Archie realised that he must buy a great +many things within a week or two. + +But before going out to do any shopping, he sat down and wrote a long +letter home, describing his success of the morning, and telling his +mother of the editor's promise to give him regular employment. He +enclosed a copy of the paper with his picture and the story of his +adventures, and it made him very happy to think of his mother's +feelings when she read it all. Then, when he had finished, he went out +to a post-office, and bought a money-order for ten dollars, which he +also enclosed. "I know I can spare it," he said to himself, "and it +will gratify her so much." Then, when the letter with its contents was +safely mailed, he bought himself a new suit of clothing, and renovated +himself in many ways, so that when he returned to his room in the +square it was nearly dark, and he looked a different boy entirely. + +Before going to bed, he determined to see his policeman friend, and +tell him of his good fortune. "He is probably expecting me to sleep in +the station," Archie thought, "and it will be a great surprise to +him." But when he met the good man, he found that he had already heard +of his success. + +"I bought the Enterprise, and could hardly believe my eyes," said he, +"but I always thought you would find some one to appreciate your +pluck. I'm mighty glad for you, my lad, and you must always let me +know how you are getting along." This Archie promised to do, and +returned to his lodging to sleep. + +The next morning he was on hand at the Enterprise office before the +editor himself was down. The place was quite as fascinating as it had +been on the preceding day, and he found something new to look at every +minute. The reporters at their desks, several of whom introduced +themselves and congratulated Archie on his perseverance, were a source +of great interest to him, and the copy-boys, running here and there +with special copy for the first edition, gave an air of hustling +activity to the place that was very attractive to this new reporter. + +When the editor came he had already thought of something for Archie to +do. "Now you've been introduced to the public," he said, "and we want +to feature you for a few days. Every one will be interested in knowing +what you are doing, and what is going to become of you. You must write +us an article for the paper to-day, telling about your experiences +since yesterday, about getting a new suit, and about hunting for a +room. And you can tell about your policeman friend, too." + +This was surprising. Archie couldn't imagine why any one should be +interested in knowing about his daily life, but he sat down and +succeeded in writing a very interesting two columns about it. He was +much surprised that he should be able to write so easily and so well. +Of course he knew that composition and rhetoric had been his two +strongest studies at school, but he had never realised before that he +had any great talent for writing. When he had finished this article, +the editor looked it over, and said, "That's great. You're all right, +my boy. We'll make a great journalist of you yet," and of course this +made Archie very happy. "Wait until this story is set up," said Mr. +Jennings, the editor, "and I'll see what you can do in the way of +correcting proofs." + +When the proofs came, in a very short time, he hardly knew what to do +with them. But in reading them he discovered several mistakes, which +he lost no time in correcting, and Mr. Jennings said that he had done +very well indeed. "Now you can spend the day in doing what you please. +I would suggest that you go about New York and have as many strange +experiences as possible, so that to-morrow you can write them up for +us. And it will pay you, by the way, to go out to Coney Island, which +is a different place from any you have seen before. You are sure to +see some unusual things, and in the morning you can bring me in two +columns about it." + +Before leaving, Archie was asked if he needed any money. "You mustn't +hesitate to ask for it, because you can have it as well to-day as on +Saturday." But as he had left several dollars of the thirty he had +received the day before, Archie didn't draw any more, and he thought +it most remarkable that the editor should have so much money to pay +out. + +He had no difficulty in getting a trolley-car to Coney Island, and, +after an hour's riding through Brooklyn streets, he found himself in +the most unique and most delightful place imaginable, It was a +queer-looking town, with great wheels in the air, high towers, with +elevators and innumerable merry-go-rounds, and other sources of +amusement. The noise was something terrific. Hand-organs, +street-pianos, and German bands were all playing at the same time, +while people hurried about from one place to another, enjoying the +hundreds of games and riding the various scenic railways and +carrousels. Archie stood mute with delight at it all, but before five +minutes had passed he had shot the chutes, and had ridden over a +steeplechase which took him through dark caverns, where dragons glared +at him and where electrical sparks were constantly flying through the +air. It was all so new, so different from anything he had seen before, +that he was simply lost in admiration. He was standing near a theatre, +when a short, dark man touched him on the arm, and said, "Come this +way, young man, and I'll teach you the best game of all." + + CHAPTER XI. + + A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND-- RAIDING A GAMBLING DEN. + +ARCHIE was at first too much surprised to answer the man at all, but +in a few moments he remembered that he was now a reporter, and that it +was his duty to see all that he could, and have all the new +experiences possible. So he decided to follow the man, and find out +what "the best thing of all" in Coney Island was like. He was taken +through several narrow alleyways, and finally he found himself in +front of a tumble-down structure, built out directly over the water. +It was very modest in appearance, and everything seemed quiet about +the place. The shades were carefully drawn, and the dark man had to +knock three times before the door was opened and they were permitted +to enter. Inside, Archie found himself in a handsomely furnished +apartment which differed greatly in appearance from the exterior of +the building. There was a rich velvet carpet, mahogany furniture, and +a great many small tables standing about the room. The place was +filled with men, mostly well-dressed, who were playing various games. +Some were dealing cards, others were twirling wheels with numbers on +them, and some were playing games with chips. It didn't take Archie +long to realise that he had been steered into a gambling den of the +worst kind, and he was immediately on the alert for future +developments. He watched every movement of his new friend, and noticed +that he found it necessary to speak to several of those present in a +low undertone. This didn't worry Archie, because he knew that he was +in no danger except of losing money, and he felt that he could afford +to lose some money, since he was sure to earn more by writing about +the experience for the newspaper. + +So he carefully observed all that was going on, making mental notes of +the peculiarities of the place and the people. When at last the dark +man came up and inquired if he wouldn't like a chance to earn some +money easily, he very readily answered yes, and the man was overjoyed +to find so willing a victim. Then, of course, Archie was introduced to +the mysteries of the famous roulette wheel, of which he had read so +much. Archie was interested in everything, and didn't mind losing four +dollars in learning so much that was new. He succeeded in getting away +when he had lost this sum, though the man assured him that he couldn't +help winning back all he had lost, and much more, too, if he would but +remain awhile longer. Archie was firm, however, and passed out into +the narrow alleyways again, feeling that he had learned a great deal +through a very small expenditure of money. He gradually found his way +back into the crowded Surf Avenue, where there were hundreds of +things, evidently, which he had not yet seen. The crowds, too, seemed +greater even than before, and there seemed to be thousands of people +arriving every hour from New York and Brooklyn, over the various +street-car and railway lines, and by the excursion boats landing at +the great iron pier. The noise was still deafening, and every one +seemed to be having a splendid time in every way. "Surely," said +Archie to himself, "no one can feel blue or despondent in such a place +as this, where every one is full of fun, and apparently determined to +have a good time while here." And he felt that he would like to remain +longer, but he knew he should go back again to the city, so that he +might see the editor, and tell him something about what he had seen +and done. + +So again he rode over the great Brooklyn bridge, and stopped on the +other side at the handsome building of the Enterprise. It made Archie +very happy to feel that he was now a reporter on such a great paper, +and he found it hard to realise that so much good fortune had come to +him in such a short time. He met reporters in the various hallways, +and all of them spoke to him pleasantly, so that he began to feel that +he had never been thrown with such pleasant men before. + +He had no difficulty in seeing the editor this time, and found him a +ready listener to the story of his Coney Island experiences. He +insisted on Archie's describing all the men he had seen in the +gambling den, and then asked him if he could identify them, if +necessary, and also if he would be able to find the place again. +Archie gave good descriptions of most of the men, and said that he +could take any one to the place at any time. The editor lost himself +in thought for a few minutes, and at the end of that time he rang for +a copy-boy. "Ring for a messenger boy," he said, "and when he arrives +come for a note which I want him to take to Mr. Pultzer's house." +Archie stared with amazement at Mr. Jennings, and waited for further +information. He wondered what was going to be done. He knew that Mr. +Pultzer owned the newspaper, and he knew that it must be something +important that Mr. Jennings wanted to write him about. He wasn't long +left in the dark, and he felt very proud that Mr. Jennings should have +confidence enough in him to tell him about his plans. "I think you +have discovered something which will prove very important to the paper +and the public," he said to Archie. "We have suspected for a long time +that gambling dens have been flourishing in Coney Island, but up to +now we have not been able to locate any of them. Now that you have +found one, we hope to arouse public opinion to the danger there is in +such places, and we hope to inspire a reform movement which will be +strong enough to wipe them out entirely. I will hear from Mr. Pultzer +in a short time, and then I want you to go down to the Island with +some plain-clothes detectives and two other reporters. And I don't +mind telling you now that there will be a good sum in it for you if +you succeed in arresting any of the leaders of this gang. You can be +excused for an hour now, if there's anything you want to do." + +Full of enthusiasm over the coming adventure and his part in it, +Archie hurried out to a quick-lunch counter and bought himself a light +meal, for he feared that he would have to remain at Coney Island +through the evening. Then, when he had finished, he returned to the +newspaper office, where he spent some time in getting acquainted with +some of the reporters who were working on the Morning Enterprise. He +found them all very pleasant to meet, and he learned a great many +helpful things from their conversation. The older men were able to +give him many pointers concerning things that he should, and should +not, do. While he was in the office of the Morning Enterprise Mr. +Jennings came in, and, taking him along into the private room of the +managing editor, introduced him to Mr. Van Bunting, who was the +editorial head of the morning edition. Then Mr. Jennings told of the +new scheme, and Mr. Van Bunting entered into it so thoroughly that +before an hour three detectives, two reporters, and Archie were on +their way to the Island. + +Once arrived in the resort, which was as noisy and bright as in the +afternoon, they all made a bee-line for the gambling den, headed by +Archie, who surprised the others with his certainty and confidence as +to which was the right direction. In a very few minutes they all stood +in front of the dilapidated structure built out over tide-water, and +Archie heard one of the detectives say that the place looked "mighty +suspicious like." He gave three knocks just as the dark man had done +in the afternoon, and in a few minutes the door was cautiously opened +and a head made its appearance. The detectives lost no time in pushing +their way in, amid great confusion and cries of fear, and it seemed +only a few seconds until all the inmates were huddled in a corner, +covered with pistols, and wailing in fear, when they weren't cursing +through anger. Then they were all arrested and taken to the police +station, where they were all refused bail, and placed in cells +overnight. Then the reporters returned to the office of the +Enterprise, where Archie was told by Mr. Van Bunting to write the +story of his experience for the morning paper. This was his first work +for the morning edition, and he took great pains to make his +descriptions as complete as possible, and the details as accurate as +he knew how to make them. And his hard work was rewarded by words of +praise from the managing editor when he turned the copy in for +editing. + +Tired from his hard day's work, Archie then went up-town to the quiet +square in which he had his home, and he was glad to get to bed. He had +been nervous and excited all day, and found it difficult to sleep, but +finally the tired eyelids lay quietly over the tired eyes, and Archie +was dreaming of the cool and pleasant arbour of grapes at home, and of +how the Hut Club was holding a special meeting there to devise ways +and means of welcoming home their distinguished fellow member, Mr. +Archie Dunn, who had achieved such great success in the city. + +Notwithstanding his tired feeling, Archie was up early the next +morning, and out at the corner to buy an Enterprise. He hastily turned +the pages, trying to find the story of his Coney Island adventures, +but he looked in vain. It wasn't visible anywhere. He was about to +think that it had not been thought worth while printing when he +noticed on the front page, in large letters, "The Boy Reporter's Great +Discovery," and then followed the complete account, just as he had +written it. This was the best thing yet. Just to think that his story +had been considered important enough to print upon the front page! He +could hardly believe it. Surely he had made great strides, and Archie +began to realise that it is not experience that is most needed in +journalism, but something to write about. "I have simply been +fortunate in finding some interesting things," he said, to himself, +and then, after a light breakfast in a quaint Italian restaurant +around the corner, he hurried down-town to the office of the +newspaper. + +Archie was beginning to feel, by now, that he had worked for a long +time upon the paper, and as he had become acquainted with almost every +one connected with it, this wasn't a strange feeling for him to have. +And it was evident, too, that the editors intended to keep him busy +for some time to come, and Archie realised that he was in newspaper +work to stay, for a time, at least. And he was overjoyed at the +prospect, for he found the whole business as fascinating and as +interesting as he had expected it would be. + +Mr. Jennings, of the evening edition, was at the office when Archie +arrived, and sent for him to come in. "Here is fifty dollars," he +said, "for your work of yesterday, and you will have more coming to +you if these men are convicted. I want to congratulate you on what you +have done so far. Come in this afternoon, and I think Mr. Van Bunting +will have a new plan for you." + + CHAPTER XII. + + A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER-- THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS CORRESPONDENT + TO THE PHILIPPINES-- LEAVING NEW YORK-- IN CHICAGO. + +AT three o'clock in the afternoon Archie was seated in Mr. Van +Bunting's office, together with Mr. Jennings and several of the chief +members of the editorial staffs of both editions of the paper. The +editors had spread out before them, on the large table, several maps, +and most of them were busily engaged in making notes on little paper +pads. All the time, however, an excited conversation was being carried +on, for some editors wanted Archie to proceed to the Philippines one +way, and some thought that the better plan would be for him to go by +some other route. But the important fact with Archie was that he was +really going to be sent to the Philippines as a war correspondent, and +that he was going to start very shortly. He had called on Mr. Van +Bunting early in the afternoon, and had then learned for the first +time what the new plan was to be. When the managing editor asked him +how he would like to go to the Philippines, Archie could scarcely +reply, so delighted was he with the brilliant prospect before him. He +managed to stammer out a few words, though, in spite of his surprise. +"I always thought war correspondents were selected from the most +experienced men in journalism," he said, but Mr. Van Bunting only +laughed. "That's what we have already done, my boy," he said, "and so +far none of our distinguished correspondents have sent us a thing +worth printing that we didn't already know. You see they can't send +any more to us in the way of news than we can get from the War +Department in Washington, and most of these men are too old fogy to +send us anything out of the ordinary line of war correspondence. Now, +what we want is for you to go over there and have some adventures, and +write us something which will be different from what we have had +before from the Philippines. We are sending you, because you have had +no experience at such work, and will be sure to send us something +unusual, and that is what we want. If you can only do as well in the +tropics as you have done here in New York, we shall be more than +satisfied with your work. I am sorry that I won't have time to give +you very complete instructions, but perhaps it will be as well. And +now some of the men are waiting outside to come in and talk this +matter over, so we'll have them in now." + +And Archie found himself in the midst of an editorial conference, +during which many things were discussed. The meeting lasted more than +two hours, and finally it was decided that Archie should travel from +New York to San Francisco, and go from there to Manila on the army +transport which was to sail on the twenty-fifth of the month. This +meant that he would have to leave the city in two days' time, and +Archie announced himself as quite willing to do this, as he had few +preparations to make. The editors gave him many instructions about how +he was to address his correspondence, and how he should proceed in the +event of finding it necessary to send despatches by cable. And at the +end of the conference he felt that he knew all that he would need to +know, so that he could start off without fear of not being able to +fulfil his mission. As far as Archie could understand it, his chief +instructions as to duty were to the effect that he must have as many +experiences as possible of as many different kinds, and that he must +write about them in a perfectly natural way, just as if he were +writing a letter to the folks at home. And he thought, of course, that +this would be very easy to do. + +Mr. Van Bunting gave him a letter of credit for six hundred dollars, +which amount, he said, would probably be sufficient to pay his +expenses while he was in the Philippines, and he also gave him a +cheque for three hundred dollars, which was intended to pay the +expense of getting to Manila. "Of course," said Mr. Van Bunting, "you +can spend as much or as little of this as you please, and if you need +more, and we find that the venture is paying us, why, we will send it +on demand." Archie was so overcome with the knowledge that he +possessed nine hundred dollars, that he could hardly thank the editor +enough, and he made up his mind that he would spend as little as +possible of the sum, and bring back part of it to Mr. Van Bunting upon +his return. He couldn't imagine how it would be possible for him to +spend so much money, and he felt that, after some of his experiences +since he left home, he ought to be able to economise in many ways +where other reporters wouldn't know how to save at all. + +When the two days were up Archie had made all his preparation, and was +ready to leave New York for Manila. He had sent a long letter home to +his mother, telling her of his great good fortune, and enclosing a +cheque for a hundred dollars, which she was to spend while he was +gone. He told her that he would send her more money from time to time, +and felt very proud as he mailed the letter. He told her, too, that if +at any time she didn't hear from him on time, she could write to Mr. +Van Bunting, and he would let her know of his whereabouts. This was +something which Mr. Van Bunting had very thoughtfully advised him to +do. "Your mother is sure to worry if the mails are overdue," he had +said, "and if she writes to me, I will always be able to tell her of +your whereabouts, for we can hear of you through our other +correspondents, if not from your own despatches." So Archie felt that +his mother shouldn't worry, since he was such a fortunate boy in so +many ways. + +The night before leaving he took a long farewell walk up Broadway. +Everything was bright with light, and there was, as usual, a great +crowd of pleasure-seekers on the sidewalks. It was all as fascinating +as ever to Archie, and he felt sorry that he was to leave it so soon. +New York had begun to grow on him, as it grows on any one living there +for any length of time, who is in a position to appreciate the city's +attractions. He felt that he would almost rather be on Broadway than +in the Philippines, but of course he forgot this feeling when he +remembered the confidence which Mr. Van Bunting had reposed in him by +sending him upon such an important mission. So, after he had passed +all the bright theatres and restaurants, he turned down a quiet side +street and returned to his lodging, so that he might have a good +night's rest before starting on his long journey. + +At seven in the morning he was up again, and at nine o'clock he was +bidding farewell to his many friends in the editorial rooms of the +Evening Enterprise. Every one congratulated him upon his great good +luck in getting such a chance to distinguish himself, and when they +had done telling him that he had a great future before him, Archie +felt happier than ever before in all his life. + +The train left the Grand Central Station at one o'clock, and Mr. +Jennings went with him to the station to see him well started upon the +journey. "You may be sure we are all much interested in you, Archie," +he said, as the train was leaving, "and we shall look forward +anxiously to your safe return." These words made Archie very glad, for +it cheered him to know that at least one of the editors liked him for +himself as well as for what he could do. + +The Southwestern Limited seemed to fairly fly along the banks of the +beautiful Hudson, and everything was so delightful that Archie could +scarcely believe that only a week or two before he had been walking +along country roads, anxious to reach New York, that he might become +an office boy. Every thing in this train was as perfect as modern +ingenuity could make it, and there was no lack of interesting things +to be examined, when Archie tired of the landscape. Then, when the +train had been two hours out of New York, he discovered that the +famous president of this great railway system was aboard, and, +mustering up his courage, he determined to introduce himself. He had +long been anxious to see this famous after-dinner orator and +statesman, and here was a chance which might not come soon again. So +he went back to the drawing-room, and found the great man to be quite +as pleasant as he was interesting, and Archie was asked to seat +himself and tell something about his experiences since leaving home. +Everything he said was listened to with great interest, and this +distinguished wit seemed to find many of the adventures very funny +indeed. "You have certainly had some wonderful experiences," he said, +when Archie had finished, "and I can appreciate your anxiety to leave +school. I had that desire myself when I was a boy of about fifteen, +but my father succeeded in making me change my opinion on the subject, +and without much argument, unless you can call an ox-team and a stony +pasture an argument. I had been asking to stay at home from school for +a long time. I said that I was too old to be sitting there with a lot +of girls and some younger boys, and that I wanted to work. Finally, my +father said that I could stay at home if I cared to, and that he would +let me work on the farm for a time. I was overjoyed, of course, at the +prospect of staying out of school. + +"The next morning I was awakened at four o'clock, and had to swallow +my breakfast in a hurry, because I was late, my father said. Then he +took me out to the barn and ordered me to hitch up the ox-team, and +when this was done he took me out to a pasture lot and told me to pick +up all the boulders there. Well, I picked up boulders all day long, +and by evening my back and arms were so sore I could hardly move them. +I was too tired to eat supper, and was soon asleep in bed. When my +father awoke me at four the next morning, I told him to let me alone +and that I was going back to school. After that I was content to stay +in school, and said nothing more about leaving until I had finished +the course and was ready to go to college." + +And Archie thought it very queer that such a famous man should have +had such experiences when a boy. He remained in the drawing-room for +more than an hour, and when he left he felt perfectly sure that he had +been talking with the most charming man in the world. + +The train sped on and on, and when daylight came the next morning they +were passing through Northern Ohio. Early in the afternoon they +reached a great smoky metropolis, spread out for miles over the +plains. Archie knew that this must be Chicago, and he decided, as this +was Saturday, and the steamer wouldn't leave San Francisco until the +next Friday, that he would have time to remain here over Sunday. So he +left the train at the station in Pacific Avenue, and, Finding a hotel +near the station, he started out to see something of the city famous +for its dirt and for the World's Fair, two widely different things. + + CHAPTER XIII. + + SAN FRANCISCO-- THE TRANSPORT GONE-- WORKING HIS WAY TO HONOLULU BY + PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER-- THE CAPITAL OF HAWAII. + +ARCHIE found Chicago to be so widely different from New York that +everything he saw was new and interesting to him. In the afternoon he +managed to see something of the congested business section of the +city, the tall office buildings, the great stores, and the famous +Board of Trade. It was all very fine, he thought, but still it wasn't +nearly so fascinating to him as New York had been on the first day he +visited it. "Chicago seems so very much like some great town," he +explained to the hotel clerk in the evening. "I feel as if I were not +in a great city at all, because there are not the evidences of a large +and wealthy population that we have everywhere in New York." Archie +spoke of New York as if he had lived there always, and found much to +criticise in Chicago. But toward evening he went up to Lincoln Park +and the beautiful North Shore, and he felt that there was nothing more +beautiful in New York than this magnificent park, and this handsome +Lake Shore Drive, with its great houses whose lawns reached down +almost to the lake itself. On the South Side of the city, too, he +found some handsome streets and residences, but there was always that +feeling of being in some rapidly growing town. It wasn't hard for +Archie to realise that there were older houses in his native town than +could be found anywhere in the great city of Chicago. + +The greatest difference between Chicago and New York was to be noticed +in the evening. Instead of the brilliantly lighted thoroughfares of +upper Broadway and Twenty-third and Thirty-fourth Streets, he found +but one street in Chicago which was at all illuminated, and the +illuminations there were chiefly signs in front of dime museums. The +streets, too, were not so crowded, and Archie almost longed that he +could be back on Broadway, if only for a little while. + +On Sunday he found Chicago to be a more noisy city than he had ever +been in before on that day, and he found that the people made good use +of their one weekly holiday. All places of amusement were open, and +everything was running in "full blast." + +The parks seemed to be very popular, indeed, and there were numerous +water excursions upon Lake Michigan, to Milwaukee, St. Joe, and +various other neighbouring cities. The street-cars were crowded all +day long, many of them taking people to a Sunday game of baseball at +the Athletic Park. All of this was very interesting and very new to +Archie, but it didn't make him anxious to remain in Chicago any longer +than Monday morning, so on that day he took the limited train for the +Pacific Coast, for he had determined not to stop off again until he +reached Denver. + +Days of weary travel over a level, uninteresting stretch of ground +followed the departure of the train from Chicago, and had not Archie +found some interesting persons to talk with he would have been very +weary long before reaching Denver. As it was, he managed to pass the +time very pleasantly until the train entered Colorado, and after that +he found much that was new to look at until he reached Denver. Here he +remained for half a day, just long enough to see something of the city +and a little of the neighbouring country. Then, taking a train for San +Francisco, he reached that city on Thursday afternoon, and immediately +began to make arrangements for sailing. He found, to his great +disappointment, that the army transport had sailed the previous day, +contrary to the expectations of the editors, and of the War Department +itself, until the arrival of important despatches from Manila, which +made it necessary to start the transport at once with supplies of +ammunition. Archie hardly knew what to do. He had not anticipated +anything like this, and could scarcely think of any plan for a time, +but, finally, he proved himself equal to the emergency. He went to the +naval agent and asked him when the transport would be due at Honolulu, +and then he ascertained that a passenger steamer sailing for that port +on Saturday would reach the destination three days sooner than the +transport, so that by taking the liner he would have three extra days +in Honolulu, and would be able to reach Manila on schedule time, after +all. He at once decided that this was the thing for him to do, and as +soon as he thought of taking the steamer it occurred to him that he +might possibly be able to work his way to Honolulu, instead of paying +the regular passenger fare, which he knew was high. So he went down to +the great docks, and, after interviewing the second steward, he +approached the chief steward himself, and asked if there wasn't +something that he could do aboard the ship to earn his passage. The +chief steward was thoughtful for a time, and finally said, "Well, yes, +I believe there is. We haven't any one to peel vegetables yet, and if +you think you care to do that work I guess we can fix you up all +right." Archie didn't wait to consider whether peeling vegetables was +hard work or not. He was too glad to have a position of any kind +aboard ship to be particular about what his work was like, so he told +the steward that he was willing to take the place. "Well, be on hand +at about eight in the morning, and we'll see that you get to +Honolulu." + +Archie was overjoyed at his good management. "I am going to save about +a hundred dollars," he said to himself, "and I will have this money to +send home to mother." The rest of the afternoon and the evening he +spent in going about San Francisco, and he found it to be more like +New York than any city he had yet seen. There was the same +cosmopolitan crowd on the main thoroughfares, and the same foreign +districts here and there throughout the city. He found a great deal to +interest him, especially at the Presidio, where everything connected +with the army monopolised his attention. He made friends with many of +the soldiers who were waiting to be sent to the Philippines, and +hoped, on leaving, that he would meet some of them there, but he +hardly expected that he would meet some of them in such a strange +manner as it was his fate to do in Luzon. + +After a good night's rest he was on hand early at the great steamer, +where there was such a scene of bustle and confusion as he had never +seen before, not even in New York. There was a throng of men with +trucks who were loading the late freight, and there was a constant din +of noisy voices, which, combined with the shrieks of escaping steam, +made it impossible to carry on a conversation. Archie hurried aboard +to find the steward, who immediately took him into the galley and +introduced him to the cook, a large, fat Frenchman, with small, blue +eyes set far back in his head. He seemed to be a pleasant man, and +Archie thought that he would like him very much. + +"Well, does ze youngster vant to vork, eh! Eef he do, I say you pare +zis potate for dinee as quick you can." And the fellow pointed to a +great bag of potatoes and a paring-knife. "Now you sit zere in da +corner," continued the cook, "and keep out uf my vay." Archie found a +stool and sat down, and, having brought an apron with him, he put it +on and began work. The cook watched him closely, so that Archie soon +learned to pare the potatoes very nicely, and of course he was able to +get along faster and faster as he became more and more experienced. He +managed, through great effort, to get the bag finished in time for +dinner, or luncheon, as it was called on the bill of fare, and then he +soon had to begin on other vegetables, which were to be served at the +more complete evening meal. There were more potatoes, and some turnips +and apples as well, to be prepared, and it kept the boy busy all the +afternoon, cleaning as hard as he could, and never seeming to get +done. The cook urged him always to hurry, and seemed determined to +have everything ready on time. And Archie began to realise that he was +working under a rather severe master. + +He was again successful in getting the vegetables finished in time for +the evening meal, and then he had an idea that he might be allowed to +rest for awhile, but he soon realised his mistake. He was advised to +begin work on the potatoes for breakfast if he didn't want to get up +at two o'clock in the morning and pare them, so once more he took up +the knife and began to clean and scrape. It was ten o'clock before he +had finished, and he found himself too tired to spend any time on the +after-deck with the crew, but went at once down into the small, stuffy +room where he was to sleep with some of the stewards. His back ached +from bending over, and his hands were all sore from being scraped. + +Things were not very pleasant in this bedroom, but poor Archie was +glad enough to be able to lie down on the hard straw tick and go to +sleep. He slept soundly until he was awakened at four o'clock in the +morning by the second cook, who ordered him up-stairs to work. There +was no time to wash, and no place where he could wash, so the boy was +obliged to go up just as he was, much as he disliked doing so. And +once up-stairs there were various chores which were waiting for him in +the galley, so that he was kept running until breakfast was served. +And then it was time to begin paring vegetables again. This turned out +to be the invariable daily programme, and Archie became rather +discouraged. Had it not been for the thought that by doing this he was +saving money to send home, he would have been miserable indeed, but +this idea kept him hopeful. He was seasick, too, for a time, and was +obliged to keep cleaning vegetables in the galley during the whole +period of his suffering. The days when he was ill in this way were the +most disagreeable ones of the voyage, and Archie often described +afterward his feelings as he sat peeling potatoes with a bucket +standing beside him. Each night he slept like a log, and each morning +he was obliged to get up at four o'clock and start work again. It was +the same thing day after day, tiresome and monotonous, so that Archie +wasn't sorry when the beautiful island hove in sight, and they +anchored in the picturesque bay of Honolulu. + +Once at Honolulu, Archie's term of service on board the liner was +over, and he was glad, indeed, to get ashore, where he learned that +the transport had not yet arrived, but was expected in two or three +days' time. These two or three days Archie determined to spend in +sightseeing, and he spent his time to excellent advantage in visiting +every quarter of Honolulu and seeing every side of life in the +Hawaiian capital. He found it a delightful place. There was much that +was interesting to see, the people were pleasant to meet, and the +climate was perfect. He was almost sorry when he learned that the +transport had anchored in the bay! + + CHAPTER XIV. + + THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT-- A STORM AT SEA-- ARRIVAL IN MANILA. + +THE transport did not remain long at Honolulu, and before leaving +Archie had several things which he wanted to do. In the first place, +he felt that he ought to write the story of his experiences so far, +and send it to Mr. Van Bunting; so he did sit down and describe in +detail his experiences at cleaning vegetables on board the Pacific +liner. He wasn't sure whether this was anything that Mr. Van Bunting +would care to print, but he decided to send it on, anyhow. He would +have been surprised had he observed the enthusiasm with which this +letter was read in the Enterprise office a month later. He would have +been no longer in any doubt as to whether it was anything worth +printing had he read the Enterprise of the following day, when the +letter appeared on the second page as one of the chief features of the +paper. + +Before leaving, too, Archie sent a long, cheerful letter home, saying +nothing of his being seasick on board the liner, or of his having had +to work so hard. He devoted his letter to telling of the many +interesting things he had seen, and of his bright prospects for +becoming a successful newspaper man. He wrote a shorter letter to Jack +Sullivan, which was intended to be read to all the members of the Hut +Club, for Archie felt that it was no more than right that they should +know something of his success. He found it very hard to realise, away +off here in Honolulu, that he had ever been a member of the club, and +that he had ever lived in tents behind the barn. He felt very manly +now, and his boyhood seemed far away behind him, so far away that he +now felt like a man of twenty-five rather than like a boy of eighteen. +He was beginning to realise that age is not always governed by years +alone, but that experience does much to make one old. + +As soon as the transport had anchored in the bay, Archie went aboard +to present his credentials to the commanding officer. He found the +general very pleasant to meet, and a very appreciative listener as he +told of his scheme for overtaking the transport. The officer was +surprised, of course, that such a young fellow should be going to the +islands as correspondent, but the things he said were very encouraging +to Archie, "I tell you what," the general remarked, at one time during +the conversation, "I believe that a young fellow like Dunn, here, can +find out a great many more interesting things than an older man could +ever discover. You see the youngster has ambition and energy on his +side, and ambition and energy are two mighty powerful things when +they're combined. I'd hate to buck up against 'em myself." The other +officers agreed with the general in this remark, and Archie began to +feel that, after all, he might not have such a hard time finding +interesting things to write about as he had expected. + +The transport remained in port but one day, and in thirty hours after +her arrival Archie found himself sailing again over the blue Pacific. +The weather, for a few days, was almost perfect. A cloudless sky +overhead, a warm breeze from the west, and a smooth sea made things +very pleasant aboard ship, and Archie began to realise that there are +times when it is delightful to be at sea. The vessel was very much +overcrowded with troops, and the sleeping quarters were but little +more pleasant than aboard the liner. Archie shared a stateroom with +three sergeants, and they managed to have a lively time during the +voyage. They played games, told stories, and slept in the afternoons, +but all this, of course, grew rather tiresome after a time, and the +voyage was becoming monotonous, when there came a severe storm which +kept things moving for three days. + +None of the navigating officers had expected a gale, so that when it +came every one was taken wholly by surprise, and it came so suddenly +that there was no time at all for preparation. The sky became quickly +dark one afternoon about three o'clock, and soon the whole horizon was +a mass of great black clouds, which every moment seemed to come lower +and lower until they directly overhung the ship. There was great +excitement aboard the ship. Officers hurried here and there shouting +orders to their men, and the cavalrymen rushed about in a frenzy of +haste, trying to devise means to save their horses, most of which were +stabled upon the deck. Archie looked on in breathless interest, and +was surprised to find that he wasn't at all frightened. He even found +himself making mental notes of the scene, so that he could send the +story of it all to Mr. Van Bunting when he reached Manila. + +There was but little time for rushing about, and it was soon evident +that the horses would many of them be lost, because there seemed to be +absolutely no way of saving them if the waves were high enough to +break over the bulwarks. The storm soon broke in great fury, beginning +with a fierce wind which swept the waves before it. There was but +little rain, and the waves rose higher and higher with every minute, +until the heavy ship began to roll and pitch in a frightful way, so +that the soldiers began to think, some of them, that she would +certainly sink. Finally the waves were so high they dashed themselves +over the decks, and no one was allowed above the gangways. The cries +of the poor horses, as they felt themselves being washed overboard, +were frightful to hear, and many a trooper cried himself as he thought +of his horse foundering in the raging sea without. Before many minutes +all was as dark as night, though the watch pointed to but four +o'clock, and all lights were burning below deck. It was impossible to +keep a light above, for no lantern could burn in such a storm. + +The waves began gradually to subside at ten o'clock at night, and a +slow steady rain came, which soon calmed the sea to a great extent. As +soon as it was safe to go above deck, it was found that more than a +hundred horses had been lost overboard, and that one mast had been +carried away. Down below nearly every man was in his bunk, for there +was scarcely a person who was not seasick, and most of them wouldn't +have cared if the ship had gone down with all aboard, such was their +feeling of despondency. Archie was as sick as any of the others, but +was able to make notes of occurrences just the same. And when he grew +better the next day, he wrote an excellent account of the storm to +send to the Enterprise on his arrival in Manila. + +After this rough weather experience, every man aboard was anxious to +reach port, and when, after many more days, the Bay of Cavit was +reached, a great cheer went up from a thousand throats, for everyone +was overjoyed at the sight of land. + +The transport came to anchor off the forts which had once been +Spain's, and it was announced that no one would be allowed to land for +two days, until advices could be had from Manila and the interior of +the island. This was very trying for Archie, being obliged to sit on +deck for two whole days, looking at a shore which seemed very +inviting, in spite of the general dilapidated appearance of the +various buildings and docks. Everything looked different from anything +he had seen before, and the boy felt that he could hardly wait to be +allowed to explore some of those streets which were so narrow, and +those houses which were built in such a peculiar fashion. + +Finally, the permission came for the troops to land, and Archie +received the permission of the general to remain with them as long as +he wanted to do so. And as he had no other plans, the young +correspondent decided that it would be a good plan for him to stay +right with one of these regiments, for the time being at any rate. He +knew that they would be likely to be sent to the front immediately, +and the front seemed the place for him to be. + +And then he was already acquainted with many of the men, and with the +colonel, and he realised that this would be an advantage to him in his +work. So he made his plans to keep with them. + +First they went to Manila, where they remained for a week. The quaint +old city was a veritable fairy-land of wonders to Archie, who had +never before been in a city so ancient, and here there were so many +unusual things to be seen. There seemed to be absolutely no end to the +winding streets, delightful old houses, and interesting churches, and +the boy spent many days in exploring every corner of the island +capital. The colonel warned him several times that he must look out +for robbers and other suspicious characters, but Archie laughed at his +fears. But the colonel was right, as he found later on. + + CHAPTER XV. + + ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR AND HAS SOME STRANGE ADVENTURES + AMONG THE NATIVES-- SEIZED BY THE REBELS. + +THE days passed very quickly in Manila. the regiment was quartered in +an old palace which had once been used as a residence by the Spanish +governors of the islands, and Archie remained in the palace with them. +There was very little to do while they were there. Each morning there +were anxious inquiries for news from the front, but there was always +the same discouraging reply that no trace had yet been found of the +fleeing Aguinaldo. The men were gradually becoming disheartened at the +long wait, and there were frequent statements by the officers that +Aguinaldo would soon be caught if they were sent out after him. The +dissatisfaction with the general in command grew stronger every day, +and at last things reached a point where there was very little loyalty +and patriotism displayed among the troops. + +The drilling was continued, however, by order of the colonel, and +every morning the troops marched out to a public square near the +palace, and went through the same old manoeuvres which they had +practised for months past. And it was harder for them to drill each +week. At first they were willing enough to work, for there was then +some prospect of their being able to use their knowledge in a fight, +but now it was beginning to seem that they would simply remain in this +old palace for a few months longer, and then go back again to San +Francisco. With this opinion in their hearts, it is not to be wondered +at that most of the men became slouchy and careless in their manners +and dress, or that even the officers themselves became disgusted at +the long wait for marching orders. + +Things had been going on in this way for a long time, when Archie made +up his mind that it was time he was hustling about and finding +something to write about which would be interesting to readers of the +Enterprise. He had sent two articles describing his life with the +soldiers in the old palace, but he knew that he ought to find +something more exciting, and more like his first articles. So, after +much thought, he decided that a good plan would be for him to take a +little trip into the interior of the island, to see whether he could +find any traces of the insurgents. The colonel had held all along for +a month, now, that the Filipinos were probably all about Manila, and +still he couldn't get the permission of the general in command to go +out and investigate the matter. The colonel figured that it would be +an easy thing for the insurgents to come as near to the city as they +cared to now, for Lawton and Wheeler were far away in the interior +after Aguinaldo, and the troops in Manila were quietly drilling, and +eating, and sleeping, with no thought of doing anything else. This +line of argument seemed very reasonable to Archie, and he volunteered +to go out and see if he could make any discoveries. The colonel +assured him that he would be in no danger, even if he were caught by +the rebels, for they would never suspect a boy of Archie's age and +size of being a spy. So the lad felt no fear at all, and made what few +preparations there were to be made before starting. He secured a +knapsack from the commissary officer, and in this he placed what few +belongings he wanted to take with him, together with his note-books +and some provisions for the trip. Then he secured a small pistol, +which he carried in his hip pocket, and he was disappointed because +the colonel would not allow him to carry a rifle. And when he had +everything ready he said good-bye to his friends in the regiment, and +departed from the palace amid a multitude of cheers. At the last +moment the colonel tried to dissuade him from starting, for fear he +might meet with some accident, but Archie was determined to make the +attempt. + +It was his plan not to go farther than fifty miles in the interior, +for he thought that if he found no traces of the rebels in that +distance there would be little use in going farther into the forest, +for, it would be almost impossible to find them there. So he set out +gaily upon his trip of exploration, and Archie couldn't remember when +he had been so happy before, save on that day when he first visited +the office of the Enterprise. This adventure was exciting enough to +please the wildest boy in America, and Archie could imagine how +envious the other boys would be if they could but know the trip he was +having. It had an official air to it, too, for had not the colonel +been most anxious, in the beginning, that he should go, and did he not +say that he would reward him handsomely if he were successful in +locating any of the insurgents, or in proving that he had been right +when he said they were near Manila? It was all as perfect an adventure +as Archie could have imagined. He could not have planned a better one +if he had been able to select any trip he could think of. + +He planned that it would take him at least three days to walk fifty +miles, and perhaps longer, for the roads were not very good in some +places. He knew that he would find many villages and towns along the +way, too, for the island was thinly settled in this neighbourhood. So +if he were obliged to rest, he would never be at a loss for a place to +get a bed. Archie couldn't help thinking, as he walked along the road +outside Manila, this first morning, that he might find a body of the +insurgents in possession of one of these towns. They were very bold, +he had heard, and they probably knew that there were no American +troops anywhere in the neighbourhood, outside the city of Manila +itself. And, knowing this, he knew they wouldn't hesitate to camp at +the very gates of the city, for they were marvellously successful in +getting away into the interior whenever an American force made its +appearance. + +As he thought of this possibility, Archie couldn't help being a little +fearful of what might happen to him should he fall into the hands of +the insurgents, and he began to wonder if he had not been a little +foolhardy, after all, in starting off on such a wild-goose chase. "But +I will have something new to send Mr. Van Bunting about the interior +towns," he said to himself, "and if I am captured, why, I will have a +great deal to write about when I am released." This thought made the +lad happy again, and he trudged along the road with as much vim and +energy as he had displayed during those weary days when he was walking +to New York to make his fortune. And it was a much more interesting +country in which to walk than the New York State counties had been. +The vegetation was rich and luxuriant everywhere, palm-trees, vines, +and flowers growing in profusion all along the road. In every +dooryard, in front of every hut, there grew what seemed to Archie a +veritable fairy bower of the most richly coloured flowers in +existence. And they were growing, apparently, without cultivation. He +had seen nothing like them before, even in California, and he longed +to pluck some of them to send home, if they had only been wax instead +of nature's blossoms. As it was, he kept his arms filled with them for +awhile, but after a time he grew tired carrying them, and was obliged +to drop them by the roadside. + +The country looked as if it might have been very prosperous at one +time. There were plantations laid out in excellent fashion, and the +soil seemed rich and fertile. But instead of growing crops, and +storehouses filled with spices and coffee, there was desolation +everywhere, and it was easy to see that the Spaniards had determined +to leave but little behind them for the Yankees. Every other farmhouse +and wayside hut was deserted, their occupants having gone, apparently, +to join Aguinaldo, and the whole country, outside the towns, seemed to +be wholly deserted and left to grow up in weeds and tangled vines. + +The sun was warm, the sky was a perfect blue, and it seemed a +delightful day in every way. But it made Archie sad to walk through a +district which had been made so desolate, and he hadn't walked many +hours before he wished that he might soon reach a town, where he could +find some life, and where he could remain overnight. For by the middle +of the afternoon he was tired walking, and made up his mind that +fifteen miles was enough for any one to do in one day. But he was +obliged to keep on walking for two hours longer before he reached a +village, and the great sun was just sinking behind the blue hills in +the distance when he entered the one main village street, which was +long and narrow, winding in and out among the cabins and huts, as if +it had been laid out after the houses were built, for the convenience +of the people. It was a poor excuse for a public thoroughfare. There +had probably been a pavement of some sort at one time, but now the +street was a mass of rubbish of every sort, straw, dust, old bricks, +and bits of stone being thrown together in every rut, so that it was +exceedingly difficult to walk along with any comfort. + +There was no life visible in the settlement. Almost every hut had its +shades drawn at the windows, and there was absolutely no one to be +seen in the street. As he passed down the road, Archie could catch +occasional glimpses of black eyes staring at him through a lattice, or +he could hear some muttered word as he walked close to a window. From +these signs he knew that he was observed, and he felt very much +embarrassed as he continued his walk down this deserted lane, for he +felt instinctively now that hundreds of eyes were watching his every +movement. + +Finally, he came to the public square, and he sat down here to look +about him. From general appearances, he judged this to be a town of +some two thousand inhabitants, for there was a very respectable +administration building, and a good-sized church. There were but two +streets of any consequence, the one by which he had entered the town, +and another running at right angles in the opposite direction. In this +latter street, as he stood in the square, he noticed a three-story +structure with a sign outside, and he decided to go there and make +inquiries as to where he might be able to secure a lodging for the +night. It looked as if it might be an inn of some sort, or at least a +store, so he walked rapidly up to the entrance and knocked twice upon +the door. This place, in spite of its sign, looked more deserted and +shut-up than any other building he had yet seen in the town, and he +wondered whether he would receive any answer to his knocks. It was +indeed a long time before he heard a sound within, but at last there +was some muttering inside, the door flew open, and Archie found +himself in the arms of three Filipinos, who threw him upon the floor +and bound him, hands and feet. It was all so sudden that he had no +time to cry out, and before he could say anything at all he was thrown +into a dark room, and the door shut behind him. + + CHAPTER XVI. + + A PLEASANT CAPTOR-- BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO ESCAPE-- FIRST + GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO. + +FOR a long time Archie lay still upon the floor, being unable to move +a muscle from the shock of his encounter with the men, and because he +was tightly bound with ropes. And then he at last went off to sleep, +feeling frightened because he was in the hands of strange men, and a +little satisfied, too, because he was the victim of some adventure +which might turn out in a very interesting way. + +When he awoke, it was morning, and the light came into the room +through two small square windows, set high up in the wall. Archie +looked about the room with great curiosity, but found little there to +interest him. There was nothing to be seen but an old bed without +spring or mattress, and a rickety chair with but three legs, which +stood in one corner. The walls, he was surprised to observe, were +handsomely decorated with tapestries, and Archie at once made up his +mind that this had at one time been a private dwelling-house, and had +probably been owned by some rich Spaniard who kept a store on the +ground floor, and lived in these rooms. The insurgents had probably +driven the family out of the country and had taken possession of the +house, which they had stripped of everything useful, leaving the +tapestries and works of art behind them. + +These suppositions were cut short by the entrance of a man who +appeared to be a half-breed, and who immediately began to speak to +Archie in broken English. The fellow had a pleasant face, and +presented a fairly good appearance, and Archie wondered how he could +have come to this place. "I suppose you have been wondering," said the +man, "why you have been thrown into this room, and it won't take me +long to explain things. You see this town belongs to us just now, and +we don't propose to have any Yankee spies around here to tell Otis of +our whereabouts. There ain't no troops in this town now, but there's +likely to be any minute, and we patriots was sent here to take +possession of things and arrange quarters for our army. Let me tell +you that the Filipino army will be in this town to-day, and if you +don't look sharp you'll be the first prisoner to be shot. Aguinaldo +isn't a man to deal easily with spies, and if he thought you was out +here for that purpose he'd have you riddled with bullets in a minute." +The man came up to Archie and began to undo the ropes. "I reckon I can +trust you free for awhile, for there's no use in your trying to get +away, with the Filipino army all around the town. Sit down there now, +and I'll see that you get some breakfast. You can tell, perhaps, that +I ain't no Filipino, nor never was one. I'm from Arizona, U. S. A., +and I'm fightin' with these rebels for what there is in it just now. +I'm mighty curious to find out how you come to be out in these +diggin's, youngster." + +Archie was willing enough to tell all about himself. He liked this +man, in spite of his being with the rebels, and he felt that he would +be able to make friends with him if he were careful to do so. And the +best plan seemed to be for him to tell all about himself, how he +happened to go to New York, and how he had been sent out here as a boy +correspondent for the Enterprise. The man from Arizona listened to the +recital with open mouth and eyes, and he frequently laughed outright +at some of the experiences Archie described. When the narrative was +finished, he seized Archie's hand, and said, "My name's Bill Hickson, +and you can count on me after this fer a friend, youngster. I'll swan +if I ever heard tell of sich nerve in my life. I'll see that you get +out of this scrape all right, but you must be careful to keep up +appearances of being under guard. I'm a big-bug in this Filipino +shack, but I wouldn't dare to let you out openly. So you jist kind of +lay around and look despondent, and depend on me to make things as +easy for you as I can. You kin come down-stairs now, if you like, and +I'll present you to my friends. There don't none of 'em speak no +English but me, and all I can do is to interduce you, and tell 'em +that you ain't no spy, and that you are very sorry you ever ran up +agin this here town. And I guess I'll be expressin' your sentiments +exactly, won't I?" Archie nodded, but in his heart he felt that he +wasn't sorry he had run up against the town. This Bill Hickson, in +himself, was a character worth going miles to meet, and if what he +said was true, Archie stood a good chance of seeing the notorious +Aguinaldo, with his army of Filipinos, before the day was over. + +When he reached the lower floor, he found several men lounging about +in another poorly furnished room, and they were all similar in +appearance to the men he had seen at the door the night before. They +looked at him in an indifferent way, and didn't seem surprised that he +should be walking about without restraint. Bill Hickson stepped up to +some of them, and, after a few words in some language Archie didn't +understand, motioned for the boy to step up. He was told to shake +hands with "all the gents," and after he had done so he was offered a +cigar, and Archie began to realise that it was a very good thing that +he had a friend at the Filipino court. He thought, too, that if these +men were samples, Aguinaldo had a very poor lot of retainers, and +later on he perceived the real cause for the failure of the rebels to +do anything more than keep up a constant retreat. It was plain to see +that the followers of the rebel leader were "in it for what it was +worth." They had no difficulty, any of them, in getting enough to eat, +and often they had opportunities to enjoy themselves in great fashion +by taking possession of some Filipino village and ejecting the inmates +of some particularly fine house, with a well-stocked wine-cellar. + +In looking out of the window Archie perceived that the town looked +very different this morning than when he saw it the evening before. +Instead of drawn blinds and shuttered windows, there was everywhere an +evident attempt at decoration in honour of the coming army. The +streets were crowded with a throng in holiday garb, and some of the +soldiers of the rebel army had already arrived, as they could be +easily distinguished by their ragged dress and ridiculous airs, +walking up and down the street. It was all such a scene as Archie had +never seen before, and would have made a great success as the scenario +for a comic opera. But as a welcome to an army, supposedly victorious, +it was a dismal failure, and Archie wondered what General Aguinaldo +would think when he entered the town and saw such shoddy patriotism +everywhere. He hadn't long to wait, however, before seeing the famous +rebel and the effect upon him of the celebration in his honour. It was +about ten o'clock in the morning when he rode into the public square, +followed by about two hundred ragged Filipinos, armed with all sorts +of guns and pistols. Archie saw the arrival from the roof of the +building which was his mock prison, and he could scarcely refrain from +laughing outright when he saw the boasted Filipino "army." It was the +poorest excuse for a body of troops that he could imagine. + +Aguinaldo rode a fine bay horse, as did several of his followers, but +by far the majority of the regiment, if such it could be called, was +afoot, and most of them were barefooted, too. The rebel leader looked +very much like most of his pictures, with the exception that he had an +older look, and some gray hairs about the temples. He was attired in a +gaudy uniform of some sort, with epaulets and a Spanish general's hat, +and he carried himself with great dignity of manner. Dismounting from +his horse, he entered the administration building, where he held a +conference with the town officials, and probably made them pay over +whatever money was in the treasury "for the cause." He remained within +for two hours or more, and all this time Archie stood upon the roof +and watched the remarkable scene in the streets below. The troops had +scattered, and were engaged in robbing the housewives of whatever they +had in their houses to eat. And the women seemed willing to provide +them with whatever they could afford, and there was much enthusiasm +evident everywhere. But the celebration was very quiet, in spite of +the friendly reception, There were no bands of music, no cheering, and +no singing of battle-hymns. The whole affair reminded Archie of some +camp of a section of the famous Coxey army, when he had seen it long +ago. The soldiers were no better dressed than tramps, and there was +but little more discipline among them. + +And the celebration and occupation of the town came to a sudden end. +While Archie stood upon the roof at noontime, he saw a runner enter +the administration building in great haste, and in a minute Aguinaldo +came hurrying down the steps. Then there was a great commotion in the +streets, and the two hundred followers of the chief were seen +assembled in the square, and before they were all there the general +was riding out of the town toward the interior of the island. There +was no noise, and the inhabitants stood about apparently speechless, +and wondering what had happened. Their reception had come to an +untimely end, and their hero had left them unceremoniously. Soon the +last of the straggling troops were out of the town, and just as Archie +was beginning to think of going down from the roof Bill Hickson stuck +his head up and gave him some astonishing news. "Stay where you're at, +young feller, till these fool Filipinos gits away from here. You saw +how they skedaddled, didn't ye? Well, Uncle Sam is comin' after 'em +with shot-guns, and old Aggy heard the news just in time. He is bound +for the jungle, about forty miles southeast, and he won't reach it +until to-morrow night, anyhow, and if the officers are quick they may +be able to catch him. Now you stay here, lad, and give 'em the news +when they git here. They'll thank you for it, and you may be the means +of gittin' this fool of an Aguinaldo captured. If you does, why, your +future's all right. And ye can tell the colonel, or whoever's in +command, that Bill Hickson is still with 'em, and that he's doin' his +best fer Uncle Sam, and tell 'em that Aggy has got about three +thousand troops altogether, but only about a thousand with him. Now, +good-bye, lad, and I hope I'll see ye again." + +And Archie saw brave Bill Hickson get down from the roof. He brushed +some tears from his eyes as he realised that here was a brave soldier +doing good work for his country. A moment later he saw him running +across the square with four of the Filipinos, and waving his hat to +the "youngster" as he went. He followed him with his eyes as long as +he could, and then he sat down and made a solemn vow that Bill Hickson +should be named among the heroes of the war. + + CHAPTER XVII. + + ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS-- ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE REGIMENT. + +ARCHIE descended from the roof, and found everything below in a state +of wild disorder. The fleeing rebels had taken with them all they had +time to get together, but in their haste they had left behind many of +their most useful belongings. In a cupboard of the dining-room Archie +found a supply of food and wines sufficient to feed several people for +a week, so he supposed that it had been the intention of the occupants +of the house to remain for some days. The news that the Americans were +coming upset all their plans, however, and now, as often before, they +were obliged to flee before them, leaving behind most of their +creature comforts in the way of food and furniture. + +"What a life they must be leading," thought Archie to himself, "going +from one place to another, constantly endeavouring to hide from the +Americans. Now in some town, now in the wilderness, and again +venturing as near as possible to the boundaries of Manila." And he +could scarcely help admiring their courage, or recklessness, rather, +in camping so near the head of the American government, where they +might expect to be caught in a trap at any moment. But Archie +realised, too, that such an army can get away in a very short time, +and he began to have serious doubts as to whether the Americans would +ever be able to capture Aguinaldo and his men. For knowing the islands +perfectly, and being able to get from one point to another in the +easiest and quickest way, the rebels have a great deal in their +favour. + +Selecting some canned beef and some native bread and cheese, Archie +managed to make a very good meal for himself, though he ate hurriedly +for fear some of the rebels might return. As soon as he had finished +he returned to his position on the roof, for there he knew that he +would be safe in case the building was entered by the townspeople. +From his high perch he looked down into the streets, and was surprised +to find them as quiet and as much deserted as they had been the night +before. The news of the coming of the Americans had been effective in +quieting the enthusiasm of the morning, and all the townsfolk had +again entered their homes and put the shutters up before their +windows. One would have taken the place for a deserted village, +judging from appearances. But Archie knew that within the shuttered +windows and barred doors there were hundreds of people waiting +anxiously for the arrival of the American troops, and making ready to +come out, when required to do so, and again declare their allegiance +to the stars and stripes. The cowardly wretches were diplomatic enough +to be always on the side of the victorious. When the rebels occupied +the town they were loyal to them, and when the Americans came, as they +often did, they came out into the square and cheered loudly for Uncle +Sam. But of course the Americans knew very well that their sympathies +were with the rebels, and the rebels knew it, too, or they would never +have dared to venture so near Manila. + +About five in the afternoon, there was a sound of many men marching +along the road, and in a little while Archie was able to see the +Americans coming down the street. It was a sight to cheer his heart +after all his experiences of the last day and night. The column was +marching at double-quick, and the handsome colonel rode a great gray +horse at the head of the regiment. Archie saw that they would reach +the square in two or three minutes, and, throwing discretion to the +winds, he descended from the roof, almost fell down the stairways in +his haste, and was soon running toward the administration building. He +mounted the great steps leading up to the portico, just as the colonel +rode into the square, and the expression of surprise on the faces of +all the men was funny to see. In a minute every hat was off, and the +regiment was giving "three cheers for the boy reporter," while the +colonel, rapidly dismounting, hurried up to speak with Archie. + +"Why, how did you come here?" he demanded. "Haven't the rebels been +here, and how did you escape them? Which way did they go, and was +Aguinaldo with them? For pity's sake, say something." + +Archie wasn't long explaining things, and his news was so explicit and +so valuable that the colonel grasped his hand and said, almost with +tears in his eyes, "God bless you, lad. You may have aided us to catch +the gang, and anyhow you've proved your bravery." + +By this time the regiment was standing at ease, and all the men were +watching Archie and the colonel with great interest. Knowing that they +were all curious to learn how the lad happened to have escaped the +rebels, the good colonel made a short speech in which he explained +everything. He dwelt particularly upon the bravery of Bill Hickson, +and held him up as a model for all the men to follow. "And now three +cheers for Bill Hickson and our boy reporter again," he cried, when he +had finished, and they were given with a will by all the men. + +The regimental officers held a short consultation, and it was decided, +on the strength of the news brought by Archie, to push on after the +rebels as fast as was possible. But it was now sunset, and there was +no use trying to go farther to-night, so it was agreed that the best +plan would be to give the men a good rest overnight, as they had made +the entire march from Manila since five o'clock in the morning. "They +will do all the better to-morrow for the rest," said the colonel. +Archie was valuable in being able to guide the officers to the +building where he had been confined, assuring them that they would +find everything needful there in the way of food, and a place to +sleep. Some of the soldiers were quartered in various houses of the +town, for the people had soon turned out into the street again, and +had expressed their friendship for their "masters," as they called +them. Archie could hardly refrain from laughing as he saw some of +those who in the morning had bowed down to Aguinaldo vowing +everlasting allegiance to our flag, and he assured the colonel that he +couldn't be too careful while in the town to guard against surprises. +"No one knows the beasts better than I do," was the answer. "I know +they can't be trusted." + +Archie was invited to remain in the building with the officers, and +while they prepared and ate a lunch he busied himself in writing a +description of his last two days' experiences. He knew that a +messenger would soon start for Manila, and that a boat would leave +that city on the next day for Hong Kong, so be wanted to get his +narrative written in order to send it to Mr. Van Bunting at once. He +felt that he had some very interesting things to write about, for it +wasn't every correspondent who had seen Aguinaldo, and had been +captured by the rebel army. He knew that most of them were content to +remain in Manila, and send only what they could get from the general +in command, and that this description of the rebels would be something +new, at any rate. So he wrote it very carefully, and succeeded in +getting it ready in time to send, so that it would be in the office of +the Enterprise in less than a month. As he sat at the table writing, +Archie thought of the great changes which can take place in one's +surroundings in a few weeks. It seemed ages to him since the day when +he left home for the first time, and the experiences he had on his way +to New York seemed now to belong to the far-away period of his +boyhood. He was beginning to feel very old now, because he had been +through so much of late, and he could hardly realise that he was still +eighteen. + +He wrote a short note to his mother at home, telling her not to worry, +and assuring her that he was in good health and in no danger whatever +of being captured by the rebels, for Archie felt quite safe after his +experience with the insurgent leaders. He knew that no one of their +prisoners was ever likely to come to a very bad end. They were far too +slipshod in their methods of holding prisoners. He was sorry not to be +able to send a longer letter home, but he knew that this note was much +better than sending nothing at all, and that it would make his mother +very happy to hear from him at all. + +The officers, when Archie returned to the dining-room, if such it +could be called, were engaged in making a very good meal from the +provisions in the cupboard, and they thanked Archie warmly for leading +them to such a good place. "By Jove," said one of the captains, "we +sha'n't want to return to Manila at all, when we can get such grub as +this is outside." But the colonel assured them all that they needn't +expect to find such accommodations everywhere in the interior of the +country. "No doubt we'll all be living on plantains in a day or two, +if we don't catch that fox of an Aguinaldo. And I'm willin' to bet now +that we won't find him. That feller's too slick for us. He's proved it +many a time before." + +"And to think that he was here only this morning! The nerve of him, to +come within twenty-five miles of Manila!" said another. + +"I'll be mighty well satisfied if we can catch a few of his ragged +men," continued the colonel. "That will be something to have +accomplished, anyhow, and more than some other regiments have done, +when they were sent after him. He's the cutest feller I've heard of in +a long while. If it wasn't for Bill Hickson we'd never hear tell of +him, even. He could enter Manila, I believe, and go out again without +us ever knowin' it at all." + +Archie was now called on to tell something of the rebel leader's +appearance, and how he had acted while in the town. + +"I didn't see very much of him," said Archie, "because he spent most +of the morning with the big-bugs of the town, over in the +administration building. But when he rode into town on his horse he +looked mighty dignified, though he fell some in my estimation when I +saw him standing up. He looked rather dumpy then. He carried himself +with a lot of dignity, a little more than was becoming, I thought, and +he received the cheers of the people as a matter of course, and hardly +took the trouble to acknowledge them, even by a bow. The officers of +the town treated him with great deference, and I guess there's no +doubt but what the Filipinos look upon him as their leader." + +"Oh, there's no doubt of that," said the colonel. "We've learned that +long ago. They stand up for him whenever he needs them, and they give +him all they've got to help carry on the war." + +The meal finished, the officers smoked awhile, and then went to bed, +for they were to be up at four in the morning. + + CHAPTER XVIII. + + THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS-- THE FIRST BATTLE-- ARCHIE WOUNDED. + +ARCHIE was awakened at four the next morning by the sound of the +bugle, and, hastily dressing, he hurried down-stairs to learn the +plans of the officers. He found that they were going to start on the +march as soon as the men had drunk their morning coffee, and Archie +immediately made preparations to go with them. The colonel looked on +in amazement. "Why are you packing your knapsack!" he asked. "You +surely don't think you're going with us? You never in the world can +stand this hard march in the hot sun." + +"Oh, yes, I think I can," said Archie. "You see I have walked a great +deal in these last two months, and I don't think I will have any +difficulty in keeping up with the troops. And I do so want to see some +fighting, and to learn whether you capture Aguinaldo. You don't object +to my going, now, do you?" + +"No," said the colonel. "If you think you can stand the marching, and +are so anxious to come, why, I suppose you can do so. But you mustn't +blame me if anything should happen to you." + +Archie was ready enough to promise this, for he had no idea that he +would meet with an accident of any kind, and so he continued to pack +his things in the knapsack. The rebels had emptied everything in a +corner, and had evidently intended taking the knapsack with them when +they went; but they left so hurriedly they couldn't possibly think of +everything, and so had left it behind, much to Archie's relief, for he +would have been unable to secure another one anywhere outside Manila. +In a very short time the regiment gathered in the streets immediately +about the square, and soon the men were marching out of the town, much +to the gratification of the residents, who watched them from their +roofs and windows. Archie fell in at the head of the column, and found +no difficulty in keeping up with the soldiers near him, though they +were marching at a rapid rate. + +The town limits were soon passed, and they swung into the white +country road, which presented the same scene of desolation which had +been everywhere visible to Archie on his way from Manila. The +farm-houses were nearly all deserted, and there was but little attempt +at cultivating the soil, which would have been productive enough had +it not been overgrown with tangled vines and weeds. And as they went +farther into the country the wilderness increased, until at last the +road itself was filled with growing vines, and the men had difficulty +in walking. Every little while some trooper would fall headlong, +tripped by some vine, and the others would laughingly help him up +before passing on. These little incidents did much to enliven the +march, which became monotonous after the first six or seven hours, and +Archie appreciated the mishaps very much until he took a few tumbles +himself. He was usually, much to the amusement of the officers, +marching at the very head of the regiment, and "setting the pace," he +said, so that he was more likely to trip than any of the others. He +was always the first to discover a snake in the road, too, and kept a +great stick with which to kill them. He seemed to have no fear of +them, but walked up to lay them out, and on one occasion the colonel +warned him just in time or he would certainly have been bitten by a +snake whose bite is certain death. This experience made him more +careful, but he still kept his place at the head of the regiment, and +came to be called the mascot by the men. + +At noon the regiment halted at a grassy spot, where there were trees, +and made their dinners from their knapsacks. The officers warned them +to go carefully, or they would find themselves without provisions +before returning to Manila, for they had been so sure of catching the +rebels at the town behind that they had neglected to bring along many +supplies. Now, of course, they didn't know how long it would take them +to find them,-- two days at least, and probably longer. + +Archie had stocked his knapsack with some food from the old +headquarters in the town, so that he felt safe for a few days, at any +rate. He ate carefully, however, and was careful not to waste +anything, for he realised that he might be called upon to aid some of +the soldiers before long, + +Dinner over, the regiment marched on again, for the officers now began +to think that they had made a mistake in not pursuing the fleeing +rebels the night before. They met several Spaniards, who told them +that Aguinaldo had marched all night long without stopping, so that he +was now at least thirty-six hours ahead of them, and some of the men +began to be discouraged, saying that it was no use following him up +with such a small force. "Other regiments have tried to find him in +this way, and none of them have succeeded," said one of the privates +to Archie. "They keep us marching for three or four days, and finally +they decide to return to Manila, without having found any trace of the +rascal beyond hearing that he had passed this way or that." + +The officers couldn't depend upon what the natives told them of +Aguinaldo's movements, for, almost without exception, they were in his +favour, and always lied to the Americans to try to throw them off the +track. It was due to this that they proceeded very cautiously, and +still, notwithstanding their extreme care, they found themselves, when +night came on this first day, in a small village where no one had seen +anything of the rebel army. There was no denying the fact that they +were off the trail, and the colonel stormed about in a terrible way +when he learned of their mistake. There was no use going back in the +dark to hunt for a trail they had mistaken in the daylight, so the +regiment remained in the village overnight. They were a lot of very +discouraged men, and the officers were enraged at the mistake, for +which there was no one but themselves to blame. + +Early in the morning they retraced their way, and started off in an +opposite direction to the one taken yesterday. It seemed that this +must certainly be the path taken by the rebels, but the regiment +marched until nearly noon without seeing any signs of them. Then, when +they had halted for dinner, the colonel decided to let the men rest +while two companies were sent ahead to reconnoitre, and report as to +whether there were any signs of men having passed this way. He was +beginning to think that the whole affair would be a wild-goose chase, +and he decided that, if these companies found nothing, the whole +regiment would return to Manila forthwith, probably to be the +laughing-stock of the army there. + +The remaining companies had nothing to do now but lay about on the +soft grass, and rest. They were encamped in a stretch of grassy loam +in the midst of what appeared to be a dense forest, and all about were +evidences of the great fertility of the soil. The vegetation was so +dense that one could scarcely see through it, and the glade was cool +and pleasant, though overhead the sun was shining as warm as ever. It +was a lovely oasis in a wilderness of undergrowth, and the men enjoyed +it to the utmost. + +About three in the afternoon the sound of firing was heard in the +distance. First there was one shot, then another, and several more at +rapid intervals. Archie was one of the first to jump to his feet, but +in a second every man was at attention, with his musket in his hands. +The colonel listened closely for two minutes, and then the firing +began once more, and this time it seemed nearer. He hesitated no +longer, but gave the order to march ahead. "They've evidently found +the cowards at last," he muttered to Archie. "You stay here, where you +will be out of danger." But Archie was determined to do nothing of the +kind. He felt his pistol safe in his hip pocket, and when the +companies swung out of the forest and into the road he was marching in +his old place at the head of the column. Again the colonel ordered him +to remain behind, but Archie insisted that he would not, "Then go to +the rear," cried the colonel, angry for the moment. "I will not have +you shot down by a rebel sharpshooter the very first one." And Archie +knew that he would have to obey. + +The column went ahead at double-quick, and finally broke into a steady +run. Every minute the noise of rifle-shots sounded nearer, and it +seemed probable that the two companies were retreating before the +insurgents. The men were wild to reach the scene of the firing, and +the officers had all they could do to keep them in line. All the time +they were running hardly a sound was heard save the noise of their +boots upon the soft earth, and they all knew that they could probably +take the insurgents by surprise. + +Archie's heart was beating very hard as they drew nearer and nearer to +the scene. He felt that he was about to see his first fighting, and he +determined not to miss any part of it. So he gradually ran ahead until +finally he was almost at the head of the column again. + +The troops made so little noise that the two companies, retreating +slowly, were upon them without knowing it. But when they discovered +that their comrades had come to their aid they set up such a cheering +as Archie had never heard before, and immediately faced about and went +ahead again. The rebels were about a quarter of a mile behind, +marching rapidly forward, and firing as they came. Some of them were +running among the trees at the roadside, firing incessantly, and +hitting some poor soldier almost every time they fired. They were the +famous sharpshooters, of whom the soldiers in Manila had heard so +much. + +When the rebels observed that the Americans had received +reinforcements, they halted suddenly, and before they could turn about +the Yankees were almost upon them, firing volleys into them as they +came. Many of the insurgents fell in the roadway, and the others fled +wildly in every direction. Most of them entered the dense forest, +where the Americans captured nearly a hundred of them after the others +had surrendered, and some were such good runners that they escaped +down the roadway. The whole rebel army presented a scene of wild +confusion. Some of the men knelt and begged for mercy, and some cried +out in a horrible way as they saw the dreaded Yankees advancing. But +it was all over very soon. The prisoners were placed in line, and +marched back along the road, and the dead, of which there were about +fifty, were soon buried. Aguinaldo had escaped in the forest, and no +one suggested that he should be followed. All the officers knew that +such a course would be useless, and most of them were very well +satisfied with what had already been accomplished. The prisoners +numbered more than six hundred, and the dead a hundred more, while +there were about seventy-five wounded. So if what Bill Hickson said +were true, not more than two hundred insurgents could have escaped. + +Among the seriously wounded was a man whom Archie recognised +immediately as one of his captors of two days previous, and while he +was looking over the bodies for the other men, he came suddenly to +brave Bill Hickson, lying face downward in the road. He almost +screamed with fear that he might be dead, and when one of the men +hurried up to him he told him who the man was. The colonel was soon on +hand, and it was found that the brave spy was not seriously wounded, +and would recover soon under proper treatment. + +When the insurgent wounded were cared for, it was discovered that the +two companies sent out to reconnoitre had also suffered losses, and +when they marched back along the line of their retreat no less than +five dead and about twenty wounded were found. This sad news threw a +gloom over the entire regiment, and when they started back to Manila +they marched in quiet, and without rejoicing over their victory, which +had proved so costly. + +Poor Archie, when they started to march, found, to his great disgust, +that he was so weak he couldn't walk far, and he thought this must be +due to the fright he had received. He was very angry with himself, +until the surgeon examined him and announced that he had a bullet in +his arm. And then Archie confessed that he had felt a stinging +sensation at one time during the firing, but had thought nothing of +it. Now his disgust was turned to great delight, for the idea of being +wounded in battle was glorious to his mind. "I'll bet I wounded more +than one insurgent," he told the surgeon, "for I discharged every +barrel of my revolver." The wound was not at all serious, but he was +told to be quiet for a few days. He was given one of the rebel horses +to ride back to Manila, and he felt like a real hero in many ways. + + CHAPTER XIX. + + RETURN TO MANILA-- IN THE HOSPITAL-- CONGRATULATED BY ALL-- WRITING TO + THE PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES. + +IT took the regiment much longer to march back to Manila than it had +taken it to follow the rebels, for the wounded of both sides had to be +carried, and the arrangements for carrying them were very imperfect. +Fortunately, most of them were able to ride horses, and the officers +were successful in securing wagons enough to carry most of the others, +but there were about a dozen who could neither ride horses or lie in +wagons, but had to be carried on stretchers all the time. Of course +this was slow work, and the officers were glad enough when they +reached the town with the three-story building. Here they found things +very much as they had left them, two days before, save that the +inhabitants were more abject than ever to them, now that they had +captured most of the rebel force. + +It wasn't an easy matter to find quarters for so many men, and some of +the Filipinos were obliged to camp in the public square overnight, +while the wounded and ill were given beds in the various houses of the +town. The inhabitants were required to furnish food, too, for the +Americans were entirely out of almost everything. They still had some +hardtack, but of meat and coffee there was none. The people of the +town pretended to be very glad to serve their "masters," but every one +knew that the natives would be only too glad of a chance to cut the +throat of every Yankee soldier. + +The officers again occupied the old building which they had used +during their former stay, and Archie was invited to share it with +them, for they expected to rest in this town over the next day, before +proceeding to Manila. The men's uniforms and equipment generally +needed cleaning and repairing, and the colonel was anxious for them +all to appear as well as possible when they returned victorious to the +island capital. So the next day was spent in cleaning and washing, and +by evening most of the soldiers looked as if they had never left +Manila. Then came a surprise for every one, for into the town marched +a regiment of militia from Manila, sent out to see whether the first +regiment needed reinforcements. They set up a great cheer when they +learned that most of the rebel force had been captured, and the night +was spent in a celebration of the great event. A band was scraped up +in the town, the great hall of the administration building was thrown +open, and there was dancing and music until an early hour in the +morning. All the belles of the town turned out to welcome the +soldiers, hypocrites that they were, and they danced with their +enemies as readily as they would waltz with their own dear Filipinos. +Every one seemed to have a good time, and the soldiers went to bed +just in time to get three hours' sleep before starting for Manila in +the morning. + +It was a great sight to see the two regiments, with the prisoners, +march out of the town at five the next morning. They made a fine +appearance in their well-brushed uniforms and bright equipment. The +townsfolk watched them out of sight, and then most likely cursed them +for a lot of vagabonds, but the soldiers didn't mind their curses. +They were all very happy at the prospect of getting back to Manila +again, and no one was more glad than Archie. He had somewhat recovered +from his wound now, and rode in his old place at the head of the +column, where he was the centre of interest to every one. The men +congratulated him on having proved such an excellent mascot, and he +laughed and talked with them until he was tired. + +The outskirts of the city were reached about five in the afternoon, +and as they marched through the streets to headquarters a band of +music preceded them, playing popular and patriotic airs. The sidewalks +were crowded with people, and Archie felt happier than for a long +time, because every one was curious to know who that boy could be +riding at the head of the troops, alongside the colonel. He was known +to most of the other troops in Manila, and received many a cheer from +them as they saw his arm in a sling, and when they finally reached the +general's headquarters, he was honoured with a handshake and the +congratulations of the commander himself. This was the climax to a +very happy day, and Archie went to bed in his little old bunk feeling +that he was a very lucky boy for having been wounded in battle. + +Of course the next few days were very busy ones for all the men, and +for Archie, too. He was obliged to tell, over and over, the story of +his experiences, and how he had managed to escape from the rebels when +they had him. This story always made the men roar with laughter, and +increased their already strong contempt for the Filipino army. He +told, too, about brave Bill Hickson, and that gentleman's cot was +always the centre of an admiring throng of visitors, who shook his +hand and told him how proud they were of what he had accomplished. And +all the poor hero could do was to smile feebly, for he was still too +ill to talk much. + +Archie felt that he had almost volumes to write about his experiences +in battle, and he did send a very long account of this encounter to +Mr. Van Bunting. It was written in his boyish way, but one of the +officers who read it said that it was the best thing of its kind he +had ever read, so he wasn't at all backward about mailing it. All the +other newspaper correspondents in Manila were wishing they had gone +with the regiment and witnessed the battle, but they had stayed in +Manila, thinking that this would be like the other expeditions of the +kind, a mere wild-goose chase, which wouldn't amount to anything at +all. They were all very anxious to get the details of the affair from +Archie, but he was shrewd enough not to tell them anything of value. +And the other correspondent of the Enterprise in Manila insisted that +Archie should send a cable message describing the affair, as well as a +written account, and this he finally consented to do. The +correspondent added a long account of Archie's personal bravery, how +he had been wounded, and how he had ridden back to Manila at the head +of the column. Archie would have been very much embarrassed had he +known this, for he was still modest, but the first thing he knew of it +was from a letter he received a few weeks later from Mr. Van Bunting, +congratulating him on what he had accomplished, and telling him that +he had long since more than earned his six hundred dollars. But for +weeks he was ignorant that any one in New York knew of his being +wounded. + +The days now began to pass as before in the camp at Manila. The wound +in Archie's arm was healing slowly, but he was hardly able to use that +member for a month or six weeks. Bill Hickson did not fare so well. He +lay for weeks on his cot in the hospital building, and was hardly +strong enough, for awhile, to talk. He was improving slowly, but the +doctors said it might be two months before he was able to walk about +and take his former active part in the campaign against the +insurgents. This enforced quiet was very trying to the brave man, and +Archie spent many hours reading to him, and telling of various things +he had learned at school and elsewhere. This constant companionship +served to strengthen their already close friendship, and it was soon +known among all the troops that Bill Hickson and the boy reporter were +inseparable. And every one who knew the story of their experiences +looked upon them as the two chief heroes of the war so far, because as +yet there had been few feats of bravery in the desultory campaigning +against the rebels. General Funston had swum the river, of course, but +many held that not even that feat compared with the bravery of Bill +Hickson in serving as a spy under Aguinaldo's very nose. The more +people heard about his experiences, the more remarkable they thought +him to be, until at last he was by far the most popular man in the +army at Manila. + +Archie sent many interesting letters to Mr. Van Bunting, telling of +the adventures of the brave spy, and one day he received a cablegram +telling him to send at least one of these letters by every steamer, +for people had become interested in hearing about him. So for some +time Archie wrote about Bill Hickson rather than about himself, and +was glad of the opportunity to do so. He knew that if a letter were +published every week or two in the Enterprise Bill Hickson would soon +be famous, and this was something he was very anxious to accomplish. +He felt that no fame could be too great for such a man, and no praise +too strong. + +The commanding general decided, about this time, to begin a more +active campaign against the insurgents. It was now the month of +December, and with the beginning of the new year he wanted to +inaugurate a series of attacks against them in every part of the +islands. He was beginning to feel the criticisms of the papers at +home, and of the newspaper men at Manila, and he felt that something +must be done immediately to retrieve his lost reputation for active +fighting. Every one, as soon as this announcement was made, wondered +what plan would be pursued to worry the rebels into submission, for it +was now generally agreed that the Americans would hardly be able to +capture the whole rebel army. It was too evident that they were +familiar with numerous hiding-places in the islands. The only thing to +do seemed to be to prevent their getting supplies, and to drive them +from one point to another, hoping that they would become discouraged +in the end and submit to the inevitable. + +So far the campaigning had consisted chiefly of such expeditions as +that accompanied by Archie, and most of these had returned to Manila +without having even seen a rebel soldier. It was not surprising, then, +that the general was becoming discouraged, and that he was anxious to +try a new policy. + +No one knew what the new plan would be until one day several cruisers +and gunboats made their appearance in the harbour. There had been no +war-ships at Manila for several weeks, and every one was surprised +that so many should arrive at once. There were rumours of a German +onslaught, and also gossip saying that Japan had decided to interfere, +but all these were set at naught when the general announced that the +war-ships were to be sent around the islands to bombard the rebel +villages, and to drive the rebel troops to the interior of the +islands, where it would be hard for them to receive supplies. + +This news made Archie very happy, and a plan at once occurred to him. +Why shouldn't he and Bill Hickson be allowed aboard a cruiser? It +would be the best thing possible for their health, and he set about +getting the necessary permit from the admiral. + +Bill Hickson was able to be about now, and he was overjoyed when +Archie said he thought they could arrange to go. "I'd like nothing +better than a voyage in the good salt air. I believe it will do me +more good than a month in the hospital," he said. Archie secured a +very strong letter from the general, and one day he stepped aboard the +flag-ship in the harbour. He had no difficulty in seeing the admiral, +and found him to be a very pleasant man to talk with. He read the +letter carefully, and then shook Archie cordially by the hand. "Yes," +he said, "I've heard of you, and of your friend, too. Every one in +Hong Kong knows how you two together bearded old Aguinaldo in his den, +and robbed him of most of his troops. It did me good to read about it +in the New York papers, too, and to know that you are both getting +your just measure of credit for the achievement." + +Archie blushed, and assured the admiral that he didn't do very much, +that it was all owing to Bill Hickson's bravery. "Oh, yes, I know," +laughed the admiral, "you lay it to him, and he will most likely give +you the credit. I've seen your kind before. But I like you all the +better for your modesty, lad. Of course you and your friend can have a +berth aboard ship, and aboard the flag-ship, too, where I can see you +both very often. You can come aboard whenever you wish, and stay as +long as you like." + +Archie could hardly thank the good officer for his kindness, and +hurried back to Manila. He found Bill Hickson waiting for him at the +wharf, and they rejoiced together over the good news. + + CHAPTER XX. + + AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP-- BOMBARDING A FILIPINO TOWN. + +IT was early one morning that Bill Hickson and Archie went aboard the +flag-ship, but all hands were on duty there, and the gallant cruiser +was raising anchor preparatory to sailing off on her errand of +pacification by means of shell and shot, The two newcomers were +assigned a pleasant stateroom where they would not be far from the +cabin of the admiral himself, and where they could step out of their +door upon the quarter-deck, and get all the fresh air they needed. It +was a very comfortable place, with two soft bunks, and every +convenience usually found aboard the fastest ocean liner. When the +fellows saw it first, they could hardly believe it could all be for +them, but the officer assured them that it had been given them by the +admiral's own orders. So there was nothing for them to do but accept +the kindness, and to settle themselves down to having just as pleasant +a time as possible during the coming weeks at sea. + +It was generally understood that the cruiser was to make a complete +tour around the island of Luzon, investigating every suspicious port, +and shelling towns when such action proved necessary to convince the +rebels of Uncle Sam's superiority. The voyage was expected to occupy +nearly a month, for there was no reason for them to hurry, and the +admiral said he would like to take things easy. + +Neither Hickson nor Archie had ever before been aboard a war-ship, and +they both found much to interest them during the first few days at +sea. Every movement of the crew, every action of the ship, was of +great moment to them, and they found no lack of entertainment in +examining the great guns and the equipment of the vessel in the way of +firearms and ammunition. Archie became much interested, too, in the +science of navigation, and spent much time with the captain on the +bridge, or with the pilot in the lookout, learning as much as possible +about how the movement of the vessel is controlled. Before long he had +mastered the rudiments of the art, and the captain told him that he +might some day make an excellent navigator if he continued to take as +much interest in the charts as he did now. And Archie told him that he +was determined to master as much as possible of the business during +the voyage. Before he returned to Manila he knew more about it all +than even the captain would believe he knew, and the knowledge was +very valuable to him in days to come. + +The two visitors aboard took their meals at the officers' table, and +they kept the whole party interested for many days, with their stories +of the war in Luzon and of their very unusual adventures both at home +and in the Philippines. For it turned out that Bill Hickson had +visited almost every part of the United States, and had lived in all +sorts of places. He had been a cowboy in Texas, and a miner in the +Klondike, and he had also been a policeman in Chicago. He knew more +stories to tell than any other man at the table could think of, and he +told them in a way that was wholly charming. + +Archie found that every one was very much interested in hearing about +his leaving home, and how he had happened to become a reporter on the +New York Enterprise. No one seemed to tire of listening to his stories +of his adventures in the great American city, and many of the officers +told him that they would give a good deal to have had his experiences +in life. + +And so it wasn't long until the two chums were friendly with all on +board, and after awhile things went along as though Archie and Bill +had never lived elsewhere than aboard ship. There was nothing exciting +for nearly a week. The cruiser steamed slowly along the shore, +sometimes stopping entirely, while the officers levelled their glasses +upon the beach, to see whether there were any signs of the rebels +being there. Sometimes, if things looked suspicious, parties were sent +ashore to reconnoitre, but they seldom returned with news that would +encourage the admiral to investigate further. The days passed quietly, +and the two convalescents enjoyed themselves well enough. They were +both much improved already by the trip, and felt almost as well as +ever. They each had a steamer chair, and hour after hour they sat upon +the deck and watched the ever-changing panorama of the tropical shore. +Now the beach would descend slowly to the sea, and there would be +numerous palm-trees and luxuriant vegetation growing close within +view, but again there would be steep clips, which looked menacing to a +ship in the dark. But it was all beautiful, cliffs or sandy beach, and +Archie thought he had seldom passed such a wholly delightful week. + +But, of course, it all became monotonous in time, and every one, even +the officers, longed for a change. The reconnoitring parties were sent +out more frequently now, and every one hoped each time that they would +return with news of the rebels, but they were always disappointed. The +admiral now determined to steam ahead more rapidly, so that they might +get around the western end of the island. It was evident that there +were no insurgents along this shore, and as there were no villages of +any consequence, either, he was anxious to reach the southern shore, +where it was known the rebels had recently been gathering. The towns, +too, were very numerous here on account of the excellent fishing, and +it was hoped that some good work might be accomplished for Uncle Sam +before another week passed. + +Subsequent events soon proved the wisdom of the admiral's plan. The +cruiser, it seemed, had no sooner rounded the western point than signs +were visible of rebel activity ashore. It was one Tuesday morning that +a village was sighted, built around a narrow inlet of the sea. When +the binoculars were levelled upon this harmless-appearing settlement, +it was soon perceived by the admiral that there were soldiers in the +streets with the rebel uniform, and that the insurgent flag was flying +from the administration building in the village square. All this was +just what had been expected, and there was great rejoicing aboard the +cruiser. Every man, without exception, almost, was anxious to be one +of a party to be sent ashore to attack the rebels, but the admiral +hesitated before sending any one at all. "It is impossible to tell +from here," he said, "how numerous the rebels are, and it is quite +possible that they may have a large force of men in the village. If +the appearance of the streets is any sign, there must be quite a force +of them in the place." But every one laughed at the very idea of there +being a rebel company of any consequence in the place, and the admiral +was finally prevailed upon to send a boat ashore, armed with thirty +men. + +"Remember," he said, "if you come to grief, that I advised against +this venture. Don't be too bold, or risk too much, for though I can +shell the place, that won't help you any, once you are captives." + +But every one was anxious to be one of the party in the boat, and the +officers had a hard time making selections. "You can go, Archie, +because you're a correspondent," said the captain, "and you can go, +Mr. Hickson, because you're a brave man," and then he continued to +pick out men until the required number was secured. Of course there +were many disappointed ones left aboard the cruiser, but the captain +assured them that they might have their chance yet. + +The boat was soon off, and it was noticed that there was great +excitement ashore as soon as the departure was observed. All the +inhabitants, it seemed, were gathered upon the beach, anxiously +awaiting developments. They seemed to be absolutely ignorant of what +the presence of a war-ship in their harbour meant, and were apparently +not at all anxious as to the outcome of this visit. One of the men +told Archie that they had probably never seen a war-ship before, and +that they wouldn't know a cannon at all. "But we'll let them know the +meaning of our presence," declared the sailor, "if they shoot at us." +The boat drew every minute nearer the shore, and it was soon perceived +that there were many soldiers among the crowd on the beach. Every one +thought it remarkable that they should be so quiet, but not one of the +natives made a move until the boat was within two hundred feet of the +shore. Then one of the rebel soldiers suddenly raised his rifle and +fired at the boat. The lieutenant in command stood up in the boat and +gave the order to return the fire, and a perfect volley of shot was +poured into the crowd, which immediately scattered in every direction. +The rebel soldiers, however, seemed determined to stand their ground, +and they were so numerous, and kept up such a steady fire, that it was +deemed best to return to the cruiser, which was signalling for this +action on their part. So the boat was turned about as quickly as +possible, and the sailors pulled for the cruiser, amid the derisive +yells of the Filipinos, who had gathered again upon the beach. The +rebel soldiers continued their firing, but were such poor marksmen +that but three of their shots took effect. One sailor was shot in the +arm, another in the side, and still another was shot in the leg as he +stood up to take aim at the rebels. None of these wounds, it was +afterward discovered, were at all serious, though they were enough to +arouse the anger of the entire crew. + +When the boat reached the cruiser again, preparations were at once +begun for bombarding the town. The natives still stood upon the shore, +and it could be seen that they were immensely proud of their present +victory. It was amusing, then, to see the change in their behaviour +when the great six-inch gun of the cruiser belched forth a cloud of +fire and smoke, and a burning shell landed in the village street, +apparently just in front of the administration building, which was +soon afire. The poor natives fled in every direction, and the rebel +soldiers followed their noble example, and took to their heels, too. +Another shell followed the first, and soon several buildings were +burning in the village. The admiral watched developments carefully, +and finally he decided that they would be glad to surrender the +village if another boat was sent ashore. + +Accordingly, the same boat started out again, with three new men in +place of those who were wounded, and for sake of effect the cruiser +steamed farther in toward shore. This time there were no crowds upon +the beach, and the thirty men marched to the burning buildings, where +the natives fell before them, begging for mercy. The soldiers were +nowhere to be seen, so the crew took possession of the town and slept +there, in company with thirty more sailors, that night. + + CHAPTER XXI. + + CONTINUING THE CRUISE-- ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED-- THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE'S + FRIEND-- A GREAT BATTLE AND AN UNEXPECTED VICTORY-- LONGING TO BE HOME + AGAIN. + +IT may go without saying that the sixty men from the cruiser had a +very interesting time before the night was over. The entire village +was in a constant uproar; the poor natives, horrified by what they had +witnessed during the afternoon, ran hither and thither, some even +leaving the place entirely and starting for the interior with their +goods and families. The rebel soldiers had evidently gone for good, +and a small party sent out to look for traces of them returned without +learning anything of their whereabouts. The bombardment of the village +had certainly had great effect. + +It was only a tiny place, with possibly not more than a thousand +inhabitants, but there were evidences that it had been formerly a +flourishing town. There were fine residences in some of the streets, +which were now quite deserted, and there were some very respectable +business houses in the village square. All these had once been +occupied by Spanish traders, who had been driven away when the rebels +came, and if the insurgents had never come the town might now have +been a booming place. But the rebels were lazy, as usual, and did no +work, so that now the fine residences were vacant, and the business +blocks stood empty. + +Some of the sailors looked about for a casino, where they might be +able to find entertainment of some kind for the evening, but every +place of amusement was closed, and the streets were deserted. Since +the occurrences of the afternoon all the people had locked themselves +into their houses, to await the departure of the Americans. But, even +though the casino was closed, the Yankees managed to have a good time. +They sang and danced and played the banjo until an early hour in the +morning, when they finally went to sleep, leaving only two for a night +watch, for there was no danger that the insurgents would return, after +their engagement, in which they had lost six men. + +When morning came, some officers landed from the cruiser, and all the +villagers were summoned to the public square and made to swear +allegiance to the American flag. + +In the afternoon the cruiser steamed away again on her errand of +forcible pacification, and more days of quiet watchfulness followed, +as the vessel steamed along near the shore. There were many small +villages along this coast, but all of them seemed peaceful and free of +insurgents. The captain even said that some of the people in them +probably didn't know that there had ever been a war between Spain and +the United States. Archie, who had enjoyed his experiences during the +occupation of the last village, now began to be impatient again at the +long quiet. The day when the cruiser bombarded the administration +building would be a memorable one to him, and the succeeding events +were just such as he had been longing to see for months. And then to +think that he had taken part in the occupation of the village. It was +all very wonderful, but very real, too, and for several days he took +much pains in writing an article for the paper describing the events +leading up to and including the capture of the village. And in the +narration Bill Hickson was an important character. He had again proved +himself a hero of the first water by insisting that the boat proceed +when the first attempt was made to land, and by being the first man +ashore when a landing was finally effected. He was a leader in +everything that was done. He marched at the head of the squad when +they marched through the streets of the village, calling all the +people to assemble in the public square, and be stood beside the +officers with his rifle handy when the ceremony of swearing allegiance +was gone through with. When it was all over he was called to the +admiral's cabin aboard the cruiser and congratulated for being so +brave and so ever-ready to lead in any dangerous undertaking; but Bill +Hickson simply blushed and said he hadn't done "anything worth +mentionin'." The men aboard thought differently, however, and he was +even a greater hero after this adventure than he had been before. + +Archie, too, received the congratulations of the admiral. "You have +been a brave boy," he said, "and deserve much credit for showing so +little fear in the face of danger. I hope you will be rewarded upon +your return to New York for your bravery while with us here." Archie, +too, blushed, and said that he had no doubt that Mr. Van Bunting would +treat him fairly when he reached New York again. + +And Archie was now beginning to wish that the time for his return +would soon arrive. It was the month of February, and he had been away +from America an age, it seemed to him. He felt that he had seen most +of what there was to be seen in the Philippines, and when this naval +tour was over with, the active campaigning would no doubt cease until +the rainy season was over. So for many reasons the boy wished he might +be able to start home soon, and as the days passed he became more and +more anxious to receive word from the Enterprise that he might return. +He had sent many interesting articles to the paper, and would be able +to write many more just as interesting upon his return, so he felt +that the editors wouldn't object to his early return. + +For an entire week the cruiser found no signs of the rebels, but at +last there came a day when they were steaming slowly along near the +shore, and saw, back among the trees, some specks of white resembling +tents in shape. Immediately the whole vessel was excited, and there +was much gossip and wonder as to what the tents could be doing there. +The admiral at last decided to send two boats ashore to investigate, +and gave strict orders that the men should be cautious and not allow +themselves to be ambushed or caught in a trap of any kind. Of course +Archie and Bill Hickson were among the crew of the first boat, and +each was as fully armed as any of the sailors. + +The two boats pulled quietly for the shore, keeping close together, +and they were beached at the same time. The natives, or whoever +occupied the tents, had evidently not yet discovered them, and the men +halted upon landing to decide what they had better do. The tents could +be plainly seen through the trees, and there was smoke rising from a +fire somewhere in the neighbourhood, but there were no noises which +could be heard so far away. It was decided to march up to the tents +and find out who occupied them, and the column kept close together as +they advanced, for things were so quiet it was feared the rebels, if +such they were, might be in ambush. + +The men got within a hundred feet of the camp, when they heard several +terrible yells in succession, and several natives ran out from behind +one of the tents, screaming at the top of their voices, and not +pausing to look around at all. The officer in command of the company +of men was much disturbed by this demonstration, and, without pausing +a moment, gave the order to fire. Five of the natives fell +immediately, but the other six kept running, and soon disappeared +among the trees on the other side of the clearing. The men stood still +awaiting developments, but though they waited several minutes nothing +more was heard, and it was decided that the camp must be deserted. So +they marched up to the tents, and then the officer almost fainted, for +inside the first one he entered was standing an American flag, and +scattered about were the accoutrements and camp equipment belonging to +an American force in the field. There was now no doubt but what the +tents belonged to an American regiment, and that the fleeing natives +were either servants or prisoners, more likely the former. The men +were all much excited at this discovery, and the officer ordered the +natives to be looked after at once. It was found, however, that all +but one were dead, and he expired within an hour, so that the men felt +that they had killed five innocent men, a thought which made some of +them weep, hardened though they were. + +It was now decided to await the return of the regiment, which was out, +the officer thought, on a practice march, and could not possibly be +gone much longer. So the men lounged about on the grass for more than +an hour. Then, about three in the afternoon, a rifle-shot was heard in +the near distance, and instantly every man was on his feet, rifle in +hand. "They must have found the rebels," said the officer; "so be +ready, men, to help them out, should they be retreating to the camp." +This supposition turned out to be correct, for a few minutes later +some members of the regiment came running into camp and announced that +a large body of insurgents was after them. Later the remainder of the +regiment followed, and the joy of the colonel when he found these +unexpected reinforcements was very great. "There must be more than +fifteen hundred rebels," he said, "and they will all be on us here in +less than an hour, for their sharpshooters have been following us up +for a long time. I was beginning to think that we would be unable to +fight them, for they seem to be well equipped, but with the cruiser to +kelp us we can whip them at once. The thing to do will be to let them +come on without suspecting that we have received any help, and then, +when the fight is getting a little warm, or they are about to charge +us, let the cruiser fire a few shells into the air, and it will all be +over. Most of them are country troops, and have never seen a cruiser, +so they will be too much frightened to speak when they hear the +thunder of the guns, and see the shells explode in the air. And then +they have a village about three miles back from the coast, and if you +can send a few shells into that village it will simply ruin the +insurgents. + +"I had no idea of meeting these rebels," the colonel then explained. +"I took the men out for a little practice marching, but before we had +gone far we encountered these sharpshooters, and later discovered that +they had all these men about a mile and a half away. Then we decided +to return to camp as quickly as possible, to get more ammunition, and +we felt, too, that we would stand a better chance of resisting them +here among the trees. But now we will soon finish them up, if you will +just send a man out to tell the admiral of our plans." Archie +immediately volunteered to carry the information, and as he could be +spared better than one of the soldiers or sailors, he was permitted to +undertake the mission. So he started out, and was on board the cruiser +in a very short time. The admiral was dumbfounded to learn that +American troops were encamped on the shore, and in imminent danger of +being defeated, and he at once set about giving orders with great +vigour. "We will show them how they can attack a small regiment of +Americans with their ridiculous army," he declared, and at once gave +orders for the vessel to move inshore. "But wait," he cried, a minute +later, "I see by my chart that there is a deep stream about a mile up +the coast, and if I am not mistaken we can enter this stream and +perhaps get very near the advancing rebels. We may even be able to +destroy them before they have a chance at our soldiers," and the old +admiral almost danced in the enthusiasm of this idea. So the cruiser +steamed rapidly up the coast, and was soon at the mouth of the stream, +which seemed to be the estuary of some great river. Then she steamed +up-stream, and, sure enough, the admiral soon discovered the rebels +marching rapidly along the road, about half a mile away. They had +evidently not perceived the cruiser, on account of the high reeds +growing along the banks, and the admiral gave orders to begin firing. + +The first shell rose high in the air and exploded with a deafening +thunder, and when the smoke cleared away it was seen that the +insurgents were almost paralysed with fright, and had just discovered +the cruiser in the river. But this first shell had not hurt any one, +and another was immediately ignited. This one exploded over the very +heads of the troops, and many of them must have been killed. Those who +were not either killed or wounded turned about and began to run, and +their leaders were powerless to make them stand their ground. One +shell followed another from the cruiser, and hundreds must have been +killed outright among the insurgents. Finally they were all running, +and it was soon perceived that the Americans had advanced, and were +now pursuing them with great energy. So the cruiser could fire no more +shells, and the admiral ordered her about and back to the anchorage +onshore. + +It would take many pages to describe in detail the events of the +remainder of that afternoon, as Archie witnessed them from the deck of +the cruiser, and learned of them later from Bill Hickson. The +insurgents were nearly all killed or taken prisoners, and it was found +that they numbered nearly two thousand. So it was a great achievement +to have vanquished them all. The affair turned out to have been the +greatest victory of the war, so far. + + CHAPTER XXII. + + RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS-- A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH PERMISSION TO + RETURN TO NEW YORK-- BILL HICKSON GOES, TOO. + +ARCHIE left the cruiser when she was once more at anchor, and, going +ashore to the American camp, he found things in a very lively +condition at the close of the afternoon's battle. Every man was very +jubilant over the retreat which had been turned into a great victory, +and Archie was congratulated on having been the lucky man to carry the +news of the coming of the rebels to the admiral. The officers were all +in the best of humour, except the colonel, who felt somewhat sad on +account of the death of his five faithful servants, as the men first +shot turned out to have been. + +"There were never any better men than they," said the colonel, "and I +would almost as soon my own men had been shot." But he bore the ship's +company no malice for their mistake, which he said was a very natural +one. + +After the capture of so many rebels, and the killing of so many +others, it was felt that the rebel army in this part of the island was +pretty well disbanded, and that it would soon disappear altogether. It +had been known, from the very beginning of hostilities, that there was +a large force of insurgents somewhere in this neighbourhood, but not +until to-day had the colonel seen anything of them. But it was +impossible, all the officers said, that there could be any more troops +about, for these two thousand represented a very considerable portion +of the entire rebel army. And now that these were done away with, the +colonel said there was no need of his remaining any longer in this +place, and that he would like to get back to Manila as quickly as +possible. Hearing this, the admiral said he thought room could be made +for all the men aboard the cruiser, and that they could all return at +once if they so desired. This generous offer was at once accepted by +the colonel, and the next day the work of embarkation began. By night +every man was aboard, and a place of some kind had been found where he +could sleep, but of course, every portion of the vessel was much +overcrowded. This only made things all the more lively, however, and +Archie, as well as all the others, thought he had never enjoyed any +trip so much as these three days spent in getting back again to +Manila. There was always fun of some sort going on. If some one wasn't +dancing, there was sure to be singing. And then there were several +ingenious games which were invented for the occasion, so that time +never passed slowly. Indeed, there were many who were sorry when the +capital was finally reached, but Archie was not among these, for he +expected some mail to be awaiting him from the editor of the +Enterprise. And he hoped that in this mail he would find permission to +return to New York. + +All officials were very much surprised when the cruiser anchored off +Cavit, but the admiral explained that he thought it no use to spend +more time in touring the island, even though the month which it was +supposed to take him had not yet expired. He said that he felt sure +there were no more insurgent villages along the coast, because it was +perfectly evident, from all signs, that the rebels were all in one +division. And this division, of course, had been vanquished four days +previously. + +When the report of the engagement went the rounds there was much +enthusiasm, for it was felt that at last some progress was being made +against the insurgents. The admiral was a popular hero at once, and +Archie, with Bill Hickson, was again the centre of admiration and +interest in the old palace, where they both returned. + +Archie was surprised to find no mail awaiting him, but he was not +discouraged, and wrote two long articles to send to the Enterprise. +One described the great engagement, and the other was descriptive of +the daily life aboard ship upon the return to Manila. These articles, +with the others he had written during the latter part of the cruise, +were sent off at once, and Archie felt confident that they would be +read with great interest by Mr. Van Bunting. And now the days passed +very pleasantly in Manila. He had a great deal to tell his comrades in +the old regiment, for none of them had been out of Manila since he +left, and were very anxious indeed to hear about the events of the +round-the-island tour. And Archie was very willing to tell them all he +could, for he had been much interested in the entire voyage, and never +tired of talking about it. + +Still, while things were very pleasant, and he was having a good time +in many ways, Archie was very anxious to see New York again and to get +back to America. And then, what was even more important with him, was +the knowledge that he would certainly be allowed to visit his mother +upon his return. Therefore he was a very happy boy when he one day +received two letters from the Enterprise office, one from Mr. Van +Bunting, and one from Mr. Jennings. They were both very encouraging +and very friendly. Mr. Van Bunting wrote to tell Archie how delighted +they all had been with his success in finding interesting things to +write about, and he enclosed a check for three hundred dollars, which +he thought "would come in handy now." The letter from Mr. Jennings was +of later date, and stated that he had prevailed upon Mr. Van Bunting +to allow Archie to return to New York, to work upon the Evening +Enterprise. It was a very delightful letter, Archie thought. "We +believe," wrote Mr. Jennings, "that we can use you here to very good +advantage, and we will be glad to have you return as soon as possible. +I enclose two hundred dollars to pay your expenses home again." + +So now it was all settled that Archie was to leave Manila for New +York, and, now that it was sure he was going, he felt somewhat +reluctant to leave the soldiers with whom he had become friendly, and +to get away from all this life of adventure which had been so +interesting and so delightful in many ways. It was hard, too, to leave +the dear old palace in Manila, through which he had wandered so often, +and every room of which had for him some story of a Spanish prince or +a great governor-general, wealthy and wise. There would be none of all +this at home or in New York, but then there would be something better; +there would be mother, and the old grape arbour, and the Hut Club. + +On investigation, Archie found that the quickest way to get home would +be to travel by way of Hong Kong and Yokohama, taking the steamer from +there to San Francisco. It would take him more than a month to make +the trip, and, as it was now the second week in March, he could hardly +expect to reach New York before the first of May. He at once cabled +Mr. Jennings that he would leave at once for Hong Kong, and received +an answer telling him to do so by all means, and to continue to write +letters describing his trip. Archie knew that these letters would +probably not reach New York any sooner than he would, but he did write +them, anyhow, and he did see some of them appear in the paper after +his arrival. + +Archie was overjoyed to learn one day that Bill Hickson had received +permission from the commanding general to return to the United States, +and he at once hunted up the bashful hero, and insisted that he leave +at once, and make the trip with him. This was finally agreed to, and +when it was settled that the two old chums were to travel homeward +together the whole camp in Manila was interested in the news. They +were both very popular, and almost every night before their departure +there was a pleasure party of some kind arranged for them. One night +they would give a regular "stag," as they called them, and then again +they would arrange a sort of musicale, at which there would be +clog-dancing, banjo music, and various games to increase the fun. + +The four days passed very quickly indeed, and at last the day for +sailing arrived. There was a great throng at the pier to see them off, +and there was no end of good wishes and stories of the good times now +gone by. When the steamer finally moved out into the open, there were +three cheers each for Archie and "brave Bill Hickson," in which every +man appeared to join with all his heart and voice. And there were +tears in Archie's eyes at having to part from such true friends. It +was hard to tell, too, when he would ever see any of them again. He +realised that hereafter his path and theirs would probably lie in +different directions. He was going to New York to work as a reporter, +and they, if they were not killed in battle, would be scattered in all +parts of the great United States, at the mustering out of the troops. +It was all very sad, and even Bill Hickson seemed to feel the +solemnity of the occasion, for he had nothing to say for many hours +after the vessel had started on its journey. + +Archie, too, felt homesick at having to leave, and they went to bed +very early, apparently feeling that the best thing under such +circumstances was to be asleep. And when morning came they both felt +somewhat better, for Archie arose filled with hope for the future, and +more anxious than ever to reach home. Bill Hickson, too, was not loath +to return to the United States, even though he had no relatives +waiting there to welcome him. The poor fellow had been through a great +deal while in the Philippines, and his constitution was almost wrecked +by the constant strain to which he was subjected. He had never fully +recovered from his accident of several weeks before, and he felt that +he needed a rest from the constant excitement and worry of life in the +army. He was tired, too, of being a spy. He had never relished the +work, but he had realised how necessary it was for the Americans to +have some one to follow up Aguinaldo and let the general know of his +movements. "They'll be a long time catching him now," he said, time +and again, to Archie. "He's a much shrewder man than they think, and +he knows his Philippine Islands like a book. He can go from one place +to another without the Americans ever knowing where he disappeared to, +and without some one to follow him they will never be able to learn +anything of his movements." + +Bill had received nearly two hundred dollars in back pay, so he felt +quite rich, and Archie told him that if he should happen to run out, +and need more money, he would be very glad to furnish it to him, For +Archie was now determined to take Bill Hickson to New York, and +introduce him to Mr. Van Bunting, feeling sure that the wise editor +would thank him for bringing to his attention a man at once so +interesting and so worthy as this hero of the war had proved himself +to be. But for the present Bill would discuss nothing of the kind. He +was thoroughly content to sit beside Archie on the warm steamer deck, +and watch the ever varied surface of the Indian Ocean. + + CHAPTER XXIII. + + HONG KONG-- A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO-- HONOLULU AGAIN-- ARRIVAL IN SAN + FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY THE PRESS-- ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN + NEW YORK, AND ARE THE HEROES OF THE HOUR. + +AFTER a short and pleasant voyage they reached Hong Kong, and Archie +found this city to be much more interesting than he had expected to +find it. It was charming, he thought, to run across a place which +combined the conveniences of England and America with the picturesque +oddities of China and Japan, and he enjoyed himself to the utmost +during the two days they spent there. Bill Hickson enjoyed the place, +too, and they would both have liked to remain longer had it been +possible for them to do so, but they were anxious to see something of +Japan before sailing for San Francisco, and their steamer was due to +leave Yokohama in eleven days. + +But they did enjoy Hong Kong to the utmost while they were there. They +called first, of course, upon the American consul, whom they found to +be an exceedingly pleasant man. They learned, to their great surprise, +that he had read of Archie Dunn, and of Bill Hickson, too, in the +Enterprise, and Archie began to think that his paper had a much wider +circulation than even the editors claimed for it. He thought it very +remarkable, at first, that a man living in Hong Kong should have read +about his Philippine experiences in a New York paper, but of course, +after he thought of it awhile, it didn't seem such a very remarkable +thing, after all. And after this, when they heard of people having +read of them, they weren't so much surprised, having come to realise +the tremendous circulation of this paper. + +The consul did all in his power to make their stay in Hong Kong +pleasant. He was anxious to have a formal dinner for them, but Bill +Hickson said that he would much prefer not having to dress up, and +Archie was willing for Bill's sake to forego the honour. So they spent +their two days in going about the city, visiting the quaint Chinese +shops, and seeing everything of particular interest. They found many +wonderful things to look at, and Archie said that he couldn't imagine +any more delightful place; but Bill told him to wait until they +reached Japan, for he'd find that much more charming than Hong Kong. +"I've been there before," said Bill, "and I know what I'm talkin' +about, and I say there ain't no such place on earth as Japan for +interestin' things to look at, and pleasant things to do." And when, a +few days later, Archie was initiated into some of the mysteries of +Japanese life by his experienced friend, he was willing to admit the +truth of all he had heard concerning the land of the chrysanthemum. He +found everything quite beyond his expectations. The people themselves +were more quaint in their dress and manners than he had expected to +find them, and the houses and the pagodas were much more picturesque +than he had imagined they would be. And the whole atmosphere of the +country seemed filled with romance and history, and it wasn't at all +hard to believe that the Japanese have longer family trees than any +other nation on earth. + +They spent a few days travelling through the provincial districts of +the little kingdom, and then they reached Tokio, where Bill was +anxious to spend several days. "I know some folks here who can take us +around and show us everything that's worth seeing," he said, "and we +can spend our time to better advantage here than anywhere else I know +of." And sure enough, Bill did know some people in the capital city, +some pleasant English people, who had met the open-hearted Westerner +when he was in the city years before, and who had at once appreciated +the true nobility of his character. They were very kind to Archie,-- +so kind that the lad thought he had never before met such pleasant +people. And they were thoroughly interested in all his adventures, +from the time he left home late in the preceding summer until now. He +had to tell them all about his New York adventures, and also about +their experiences together in the Philippines, and his new friends +showed the greatest interest in all he had to say, and seemed to find +it all vastly entertaining. They were anxious, Archie thought, to make +him have a very good time in Tokio, to make up for some of his hard +experiences, and if this were indeed their object, they succeeded +admirably in accomplishing it. Every day was filled with surprises, +and every night Archie thought he had enjoyed himself more this day +than the day before. They travelled about the city so persistently, on +foot and in the quaint jinrikishas, that he felt that he knew almost +every part of Tokio, and he witnessed every side of native existence, +as well as the life in the foreign quarter. It was all charmingly new +and interesting, and, as in Hong Kong, they were both sorry when the +day for their sailing came around. And always since Archie has +declared that no one can be more kindly hospitable than the English. + +The voyage from Yokohama to San Francisco was slow and monotonous, +Archie thought, for he was now very impatient to reach the United +States, and he had also grown very tired of travel by water. There +were some very pleasant passengers, but Archie couldn't see that he +had a much better time than when he was peeling potatoes corning over. +That was interesting enough, anyhow. The only break in the monotony +was the day they were enabled to spend in Honolulu, and on that day +Archie went again to some of the places he had seen during his first +visit to the attractive city. And he called again upon some of the +friends of his first visit, and found that most of them had read of +his great success as a war correspondent, and of his many exciting +experiences in the Philippines. They were all profuse in +congratulating him upon what he had accomplished, and every one seemed +to think he had been very successful indeed. + +While they were in Honolulu a vessel arrived, bound for Japan, and +Archie was delighted to find it was the same vessel upon which he had +worked his passage from San Francisco on his way to Manila. He went +aboard and met some of the friends he had made there, and found that +they all knew now who it was they had carried as chore-boy in the +galley. They all seemed glad to hear of his success, and to know that +he was coming home as a first-class passenger. The cook treated him +with much deference, and started to apologise for his treatment of +Archie on the way over; but the boy stopped him, and told him that no +apology was necessary. "I think I may have been an unwilling worker," +he said, "because of course I didn't like the work at all, and it was +hard for me to take an interest in peeling potatoes when I was looking +forward to accomplishing such great things in the Philippines." + +"Oh," said the cook, "you was a fine worker. Sure, I ain't had so good +a boy since." And Archie laughed to see the change in opinion which is +sometimes brought about by a change in circumstances. + +Archie enjoyed the city quite as much as before, but he was glad, +nevertheless, when the steamer continued her voyage east. And then he +began to count the days until they should arrive in San Francisco, and +of course these last days seemed the longest ones of the voyage. But +they gradually passed away, and as they steamed ahead, coming nearer +every hour to that dear land called "home," both Archie and Bill began +to wonder how they would like it all, after their adventurous life in +the Philippines. Bill, in particular, was doubtful whether he would +again be able to settle down to a quiet existence in some small place, +and Archie assured him that he must live in New York, where he would +be sure to find things lively enough to suit him. + +At last came the eventful day when the great steamer threaded her way +through the beautiful Golden Gate, and discharged her passengers at +the pier. As Archie and Bill had but little baggage, they were almost +the first ones to leave the vessel, and were hurrying away to find a +hotel where they could remain overnight when Archie felt some one +touch him on the shoulder, and, turning about and seeing no one he +knew, was about to go on, when a man introduced himself as being the +San Francisco correspondent of the Enterprise. "And these gentlemen +here," said he, "are reporters from the newspapers here. They would be +glad to have you say a few words about your experiences during the +last few months." Archie was quite dumbfounded. It had never occurred +to him that he was a person so important as to be interviewed, but he +was willing and glad to accommodate the reporters, and told them to +accompany him to his hotel. Once there, he answered all their +questions, and didn't find it hard at all to give them his opinion of +the situation in the Philippines, and what he thought should be done +by the government to stop the rebellion. "The President will soon put +an end to it," he said, "if he can only have the support of Congress. +But as long as there are members of Congress fighting his policy, the +insurgents are going to continue their insane efforts to establish an +independent government." And some of the reporters smiled to hear so +young a fellow talking about the policy in the Philippines. They felt +that he was well-informed, however, and put down every word he said. + +The interviews over, Archie and Bill went early to bed. The Enterprise +correspondent had telegraphed the news of their arrival to New York, +and had received word from Mr. Van Bunting to send them on to New York +at once. So, early in the morning, the two started for the East, and +the train seemed to travel quite as slowly as the steamer. "It does +seem good to be in our own country again," they said a hundred times +during the days that followed, and when they reached the Empire State +and began their journey down the Hudson River, Archie could hardly +restrain his enthusiasm at being again in his native commonwealth. + +There was quite a delegation at the Grand Central Station to meet +them. Mr. Jennings was there in person, and he explained that Mr. Van +Bunting was waiting anxiously at the office to see him. Then there +were reporters from the various other city papers, who wanted +interviews, but Archie was told to say whatever he had to say in the +columns of the Enterprise, so he had to deny the reporters for the +first time. Bill Hickson was introduced at once, and became the lion +of the hour. Every one had read of him, and was glad to shake his +hand, and poor Bill was quite bewildered by so much attention. They +didn't linger long at the station, however, but hurried down to the +Enterprise office, where Mr. Van Bunting was awaiting them. He grasped +Archie's hand in his as they entered, and cried, "Well done, my boy, +well done." And Archie felt as if he had grown three feet that +instant. + + CHAPTER XXIV. + + DOING "SPECIAL" WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER-- INTERVIEWS WITH FAMOUS + MEN-- CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS. + +THERE was so much to tell Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting, that +Archie didn't get away from the Enterprise office until seven o'clock +in the evening. And what a lot they did say to each other during the +afternoon! Archie told of all his experiences, and found them all +anxious to hear about them. He learned, to his joy, that everything he +had sent had been printed, and that the articles had made a great hit +with the public. "We would have liked to keep you there longer, but we +knew you must be worn out, and then we want you to stay right here, +now, and see if you cannot get us some good interviews and articles of +various kinds for the Evening Enterprise. The paper has been losing +ground somewhat, of late, and we need some new life for its pages. Of +course the morning paper profited greatly by your articles, but the +evening edition seemed very weak in comparison, and we think it only +fair to Mr. Jennings to let him have you on his staff for awhile now. +So if you are willing, you can start in to-morrow as a member of the +staff. We will see that you are well paid for what you write, or we +will put you on salary, whichever you like. You can think it over, and +in the morning you can tell us which plan you like best." + +Archie wanted to ask for a few days' absence to return home, but he +felt, somehow, that he ought not to ask it just now. So he contented +himself with writing a long letter to his mother, in which he enclosed +a very large check, money which he had not used on his return to New +York. He told her that he would be home just as soon as he could get +off for any length of time, and he knew that she would now be looking +forward to the visit every day. She had written him about the +enthusiasm displayed by every one over his achievements, and how proud +she was of what he had accomplished. "I think I am the proudest mother +in the country," she wrote one day, and this sentence made Archie very +happy, of course, and more anxious than ever to return home. He +received a letter, too, from Jack Sullivan, telling him how much the +boys all thought of his success, and how every member of the Hut Club +had longed time and again to be with him. "It all reads just like some +book," Jack wrote, "and we are dying to have you come home and tell us +all about it." Then his mother sent him clippings from the town +papers, eulogising his efforts, and calling him the "coming man of the +State." All this was very pleasant and very encouraging, and Archie +couldn't help having a kindly feeling for the townsfolk who thought so +much of him. + +New York was as delightful as ever. It was now the last of April, and +the trees were all green with fresh leaves, and the numerous little +parks scattered over the city were looking their very best. The +asphalt pavements looked clean and elegant when Archie thought of some +other streets he had seen, and the tall office buildings lifted their +ornate domes and cupolas into a sky of clear blue. "Surely," he +thought to himself, "this is the most charming city in all the world." +Fifth Avenue, with its crowds of fashionable folk, and its throng of +vehicles, was a delight of which he never tired, and when he went into +the Bowery, just to see how things were looking now, he found it quite +as interesting and as dirty as in the fall. + +But the first place he visited was the dear little square away +down-town, where he had lived during those few happy days spent in New +York. It, too, looked the same, only the flowers and grass were +fresher now, and the fountain seemed to flow more joyously, now that +spring was here. The house where he had lodged was as clean as ever, +and Archie at once decided to engage a room here, where he could have +his New York home. So he called upon the motherly landlady, and was +glad to learn that the room he had first was still vacant, and that he +could take possession at once. + +As before, when he came to this house, Archie was almost out of +clothing, so he went out and fitted himself with everything he needed. +And this time he felt able to buy the best to be had, for he thought +he had now earned the privilege to dress well if he liked. And then, +when he had everything he needed to wear, he went out and bought many +pretty things for his room, for he felt that he would like to have it +just as cosy and home-like as possible. He wasn't able to do much at +it this first night, but in the succeeding days he furnished the place +in a charming way, so that the landlady said it was the "handsomest +room in the house, sir." The dear old lady could hardly understand +this great change in her lodger's circumstances. She worried about it +very often, and discussed the question with many of the neighbours. +"He come here last fall looking mighty poor-like, but, lawsy me, he's +as fine now as any man on the avenue." And she never did understand it +until one day she learned that her lodger was the "very young man who +had been to the war in the Philippines, and writ about his battles in +the Enterprise." + +There was no ceremony when Archie began work on the evening paper. Mr. +Jennings told him that he thought they understood each other pretty +well, and that he could use his own discretion, very often, about +getting articles. "You can be as independent as you like, Archie," he +said, "and use your own ideas as much as you like." This pleased the +boy very much indeed. He was beginning to feel now that he had really +won his spurs, and that he was a full-fledged journalist. It seemed +scarcely possible that it had taken him little more than six months to +make this great advance in circumstances, and yet he could see himself +a few months previous, sleeping in the station-house. Now his days of +poverty were surely over, and he would have a clear path ahead of him +to accomplish his great ambition to be a successful author and writer +of books. For the present, it was good experience for him to be +working upon the Enterprise, and he felt that he ought to be very much +contented, since there were men old enough to be his father who were +not earning as much money. + +He liked the work upon the evening paper very much. He didn't have to +get down early in the morning, and at three o'clock in the afternoon +he was always through. He was very glad indeed that there was no night +work, for he now spent his evenings in studying shorthand, which he +thought might be helpful to him in many ways. He didn't have much +routine work to do upon the paper in the beginning, but he told Mr. +Jennings that he would like to get as much experience as possible, so +the good editor gave him a lot of regular reporting to do, as well as +the special work which was daily featured in the paper. This special +work consisted of interviews with various successful men. Archie had +always felt a great admiration for men who had "done something," and +as New York was simply filled with wealthy and successful men, who had +started as poor boys, he found a wide field for work. He found it very +interesting to meet these men of affairs, and have them tell him of +their early struggles, how they had begun on the farm or in the +factory, and had worked themselves up through industry and +perseverance to the high places they now occupied. He found it very +easy to get access to most of them, for they had all read of his +experiences in the Enterprise, and Archie found that his fame as the +"Boy Reporter" was quite general and widespread. Some of the great men +were quite as much determined to interview him as he was anxious to +interview them, so that he usually got along very well by telling them +first of his own experiences, and then asking them about their own +boyhood days. It was work that never became monotonous, for each day +he saw a man quite different in most respects from the man he had +interviewed the day before, and of course every one had something +different to say. + +These interviews proved very successful when published in the Evening +Enterprise, and Mr. Jennings had him continue them during all the +weeks Archie was connected with the paper. And of course he did other +things, too, work which took him into every part of the great city, +looking up this event, or investigating this reported disappearance or +murder. Archie was quite successful in this line, too, and, as he was +being paid by the column, his weekly income was something larger than +he had ever dared to hope for in all his life. He was now enabled to +study his stenography at the best school, and to indulge himself in +many things which had been denied him before. He could, for instance, +attend the performances of grand opera, and hear the great musical +artists of the world. He was able, too, to read the best literature, +and he gradually learned to appreciate all the many good things in +life. He was very glad to find himself broadening in such a way, for +he realised that he would not always want to be a "Boy Reporter," and +that he had better be developing his mind in every possible way. + +He had not been back long in New York before he met all his old +friends. One of the first upon whom he called was the good policeman +who had been so very kind to him when he had no place to sleep. The +large-hearted man was as enthusiastic over his success as if he had +been his own son, and Archie felt that here was one true friend upon +whom he could always depend. The policeman never tired of telling +about that first night when he found Archie walking up and down +Broadway, and he always spoke of him to the other officers as "that +boy of mine." So the boy, who was now a full-fledged reporter, spent +as much time with this friend as possible, and many a time he sat at +the station-house telling them all of his adventures in the Orient. + +Another friend whom he met was the great railway president with whom +he had travelled to Chicago on his way to San Francisco. Archie had +liked this man from the very first, and he felt that in him he would +always find a friend, because he had shown such interest in his first +undertaking. And when he called upon him in his elegant office, he +received a very cordial greeting. + +"No, indeed," said the great man of affairs, "I have never forgotten +our trip West together, and I have followed you with much interest +through the columns of the Enterprise. And I am glad that you are back +again in New York, for I hope to see a great deal of you. You must +come up to my house some evening and tell us all about yourself." + +Archie was naturally much surprised to receive an invitation of this +kind, but he resolved to accept it, nevertheless. + +Bill Hickson was now employed in the Brooklyn navy yard. He had been +featured for several days in the Enterprise, and had enjoyed the +excitement of New York for awhile, but he decided he would like to be +at work. So one day Archie learned that he was working at the navy +yard. + +"I've got to be with Uncle Sam," was all the reason Bill would give +for his action. + + CHAPTER XXV. + + PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE-- STUDYING AT EVENING SCHOOL-- LIVING + AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS. + +IT was now September. Archie had been in New York the whole summer +through, attending carefully to his work on the Evening Enterprise, +and continuing his study of stenography. He had taken occasional trips +to Long Branch and Asbury Park on Saturday afternoons, but every other +day he spent in working up ideas for the paper, and each evening he +devoted to the shorthand school. By this time, though, he felt that he +knew all that was necessary of shorthand, and found himself more free +to go about in the evenings. He visited his friends more frequently, +and sometimes spent whole evenings in studying works on English +literature, for he was ambitious to know more of the great work he had +decided to make his own. This study was not really work to him, for +his interest in everything connected with literature was so great that +he found a pleasure in reading even the most classical books on the +subject, and of course so much reading of this sort did a great deal +to educate his mind along this line of work. + +One evening in the early fall, Archie decided to accept the invitation +of Mr. Depaw, the railway president, to call. So he carefully dressed +himself in the best he had, and walked up Fifth Avenue and into the +side street where the great man had his home. He rang the bell and +presented his card, and waited in the drawing-room for an answer. The +footman was gone but a moment, and returning, announced that the +family would be down directly. Archie was very much pleased that he +was to meet the entire family, and looked about him with great +interest at the elegant furnishings of the room in which he sat. He +couldn't help thinking how lovely it must be to have so many books, so +many pictures, and so many works of art of every kind. The boy thought +then that he would like to be a wealthy man, just to be able to +gratify his desires for beautiful things. + +He had to wait only a short time before the genial Mr. Depaw entered +the room, accompanied by several members of the family. Archie was +greeted very warmly, and introduced to every one, and then they +immediately began an animated conversation, in which Archie soon found +himself taking an active part, much to his surprise. He felt that he +had never before realised what a great gift it is to be able to talk +entertainingly, and this evening was a revelation to him in the ways +of good society. He found that every one was much interested in the +story of his adventures, and he talked more about them than for a long +time past. He was now beginning to feel that his Philippine +experiences were an old story, but he learned that they were quite as +entertaining as ever to these people. But they did not talk entirely +about Archie. They realised that this would be embarrassing to him, +and they were careful to guide the conversation into a discussion of +music and literature, and whatever else they imagined him to like. And +so it was that the evening passed very quickly, and it was time to +leave before he knew it. Then he was asked to be sure to call again, +and Mr. Depaw, as he accompanied him to the door, requested him to +call at his office on the following Wednesday, if possible. Archie +promised, and walked home down the avenue, wondering what it could be +that Mr. Depaw wanted to talk to him about. He didn't worry long about +it, however, but went home and to bed as quickly as possible, for he +had formed a habit of rising at six o'clock in the morning to study. + +The days passed quickly until Wednesday, and the afternoon of that day +found Archie in the waiting-room of Mr. Depaw's office. He had not +long to sit there after sending in his card, for the busy man received +him as soon as he could get rid of his present visitor. He shook +Archie warmly by the hand as he entered, and then, pulling two chairs +together, they sat down. "I have been thinking for some time," said +Mr. Depaw, "that I need a sort of private secretary. Of course I have +men here at the office who take dictation from me, and who fulfil the +duties of a secretary to a certain extent, but I want a young man who +can attend somewhat to my personal affairs; I want one whom I can +trust, and one who is likely to grow as he works along, so that +eventually he may be able to fill any place I may have open for him." +Then he stopped a moment, and Archie felt his heart beating very fast +beneath his coat. He waited almost breathlessly to hear what Mr. Depaw +would say next. + +"Ever since I met you first," he at last went on, "I have somehow +thought that you are the kind of a young fellow I would like. You are +ambitious, you are persevering, and you are willing to learn. You say, +too, that you know shorthand, and I know that you are a good penman. +You have seen quite a little of the world, I am sure, and I think you +can prove yourself equal to almost any occasion. The only question is +whether you will care to give up reporting for a position of this +kind. I can assure you that I will pay you as much as you are earning +now, and I shall be glad to offer you a home at my house, because I +shall want you at my right hand all the time. Do you think you will +care to take the place?" + +Archie could hardly speak, it was all so wonderful, but finally he +recovered himself sufficiently to explain his hesitancy in accepting +the position. "I would like just one day," he said, "to consult with +my friends on the newspaper. You see Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting +have been very good to me, and I shouldn't care to leave them now if +they object very strongly." + +"That's quite right, quite right," said Mr. Depaw. "I can appreciate +your feelings, and you can tell the editor that you will have some +time for writing, and that you will contribute occasional articles to +his paper." Archie was now delighted. "Oh, thank you," he cried. "I am +sure I can come now." + +"Well, come in at this time to-morrow," said Mr. Depaw, "and let me +know what you have decided to do." + +Archie hurried at once to Mr. Jennings's office to tell him the good +news. He wondered how his friend would take it, but all his fears were +soon put at rest. "Archie," said Mr. Jennings, "this is the best +opportunity you can ever have to improve yourself in every way. Mr. +Depaw is a man highly respected all over the country, and a man who is +known to be extraordinary in many ways. Association with such a man +will do more for you than four years in college, and you will make a +mistake if you do not accept his offer. Of course we shall all be +sorry to lose you here, but, as Mr. Depaw says, you will have some +time for writing, and we hope you will always continue to do some work +for us." + +Archie could almost have thrown his arms about Mr. Jennings's neck to +hug him for his splendid feeling, and when, a little later, Mr. Van +Bunting said practically the same thing, he felt that he had never +known two such men. He assured them both that he would never forget +them, but would try and spend as much time as possible in the +Enterprise office. + +The next day he called again on Mr. Depaw, and told him of his +decision to accept the place, and the good man seemed overjoyed. "I +will see that you never forget it, Archie," he said. It was arranged +for him to begin work the very next day. "You can transfer your things +to my house as soon as you like, for your room is waiting for you, and +I will begin to-morrow to teach you how to do things." + +And now Archie found it hard to leave the dear little room in the +quaint old square, which was looking now just as when he saw it first. +The leaves in the trees were turning brown and gold, and Archie +realised that he had been away from home more than a year. "Oh, I must +go back soon," he said to himself, "or I shall simply die of +homesickness." + +In a couple of days he was installed as a member of the Depaw +household, and he soon felt at home there. Every one was very kind to +him, he was given a handsome room, and everything seemed almost +perfect. One of the best things about it all was that he had access to +the fine library, and he longed for the long winter evenings when he +could devour the many interesting books he saw there. He was soon +initiated into his work, and it was much easier than he had expected. +Mr. Depaw, of course, started him very gradually, so that he learned +as he went along. Every morning at eight o'clock he was in the library +with Mr. Depaw, taking dictation, and receiving instructions for the +day. They remained together here until ten o'clock, when Mr. Depaw +either walked or drove to his office. Archie always accompanied him, +and took charge of some of the mail there, attending to it during the +morning. Then at noon he returned to the house, where he spent the +afternoon in writing the letters which had been dictated in the +morning, and in doing various things for Mr. Depaw. The evenings he +always had to himself, and he had no difficulty in finding enough to +do at home without going out. He almost invariably passed the evenings +in reading, but occasionally he was asked to accompany the family to +some musical event at the opera house, for they had soon learned of +his love for music. + +In work and study the winter passed quickly and happily for Archie, +who now felt quite at ease amid his elegant surroundings. His only +wish was that he might go home, and as spring approached Mr. Depaw +promised him that he should have a short vacation. The suggestion of +Mr. Depaw that Archie's mother come to New York for a week was +heartily accepted by Archie, but when he wrote home Mrs. Dunn replied +that she would rather wait for Archie at home. She had never visited +New York, and felt that she wouldn't like it. + +Bill Hickson came over very often from the navy yard, and was always a +welcome visitor at Mr. Depaw's office. He didn't seem to care for his +work in Brooklyn, however, and Archie finally requested a place for +him about the elegant new station which the road had just constructed +in the city. Mr. Depaw very readily gave him an excellent position, +one which he could keep always if he so desired. And Bill was highly +pleased with his new work, so much so that he surprised them all one +day in the spring by leading into the once a young lady whom he +introduced as his wife. Of course Archie was very much pleased at this +new development, for he had often thought that his friend must be very +lonely, living in a boarding-house. + +The days were all busy ones for Archie now. He had learned the work so +thoroughly that he was given more than ever to do, and he still +continued to write, too, for the Enterprise. He worked too hard, +however, and in April he looked so thin that Mr. Depaw sent him home +for a week's rest. + + CHAPTER XXVI. + + DECIDES TO VISIT HOME-- A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE TOWN-- A PUBLIC + CHARACTER NOW-- DINNER TO THE HUT CLUB-- DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL-- + A TELEGRAM FROM HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE. + +IT was a beautiful April day. There had been a light shower in the +morning, and now everything looked as fresh and green as possible all +along the railway. Archie lay back in his comfortable Wagner seat, +admiring the beauties of spring, and thinking, too, of the days he +spent in walking along this very road. It seemed hard to believe that +he was now secretary to the president of this railroad, and that he +was returning home, after a year and a half, a very successful young +man. He had much to think of in the hours it would take him to reach +the little town. He tried to remember everything about the place, and +his mother as he saw her last, and it wasn't at all difficult for him +to do so. But, oh, how he hoped that things had not changed! He almost +dreaded going home for fear he would find things different. + +He had changed, that much was sure. He knew that he had grown to look +much older than his years, and he knew that he was not looking +particularly strong. He used to be so sturdy, and he had such a +splendid colour in his cheeks. Mother would be sorry to see him now, +but of course he would be sure to improve very much during the week he +was to remain among old friends. + +He was very anxious to see his boy friends, the members of the Hut +Club, and the boys and girls who were in his class at school. He had +telegraphed his mother that he was coming, so she would probably tell +the boys about it. He was sure they would be there. + +Now the stations looked more familiar. This one just passed was near +the Tinch farm, and Archie remembered the days he spent working for +old Hiram, and how he had suffered. He wondered if the farmer had ever +seen any copies of the Enterprise. It would be very interesting to him +to know that his chore-boy was now a secretary to a millionaire. This +next station he remembered very well indeed, because he used to come +here every fall to visit the county fair, where he marvelled at the +wonderful things he saw in the side-shows. + +And now the train was entering the limits of his own town. Here was +the old elevator, and the machine shop near the railway track. And, +oh, there was his own home, looking green and pleasant as the train +sped by. It almost brought tears to Archie's eyes to think that he was +so soon to see his mother. Now they had reached the station, and he +stood upon the car platform ready to alight. My, what a crowd there +was! and why did they cheer as he made his appearance? All at once it +dawned upon him that all these people were here to meet him, and to +bid him welcome home. He could hardly speak as he found himself in his +mother's arms, and then he began to shake the hands of the big crowd. +They were all old friends, and then there was the mayor, and the +superintendent of schools, and quite a delegation of leading citizens. +How nice it was of them to welcome him in this way! + +After awhile the handshaking was over, and the mayor was able to get a +few minutes with Archie. "We are all very proud of what you have +accomplished," he said, "and we want to give you a public reception +to-morrow night in the town hall, if you don't object." Archie stared +blankly at the mayor, and it was several moments before he realised +the meaning of the words. Then he was almost overcome. It was almost +too good to be true, it seemed, but he warmly thanked the mayor, and +told him how he appreciated the honour which they had done him. He +said that he would be glad to attend the reception. + +The crowd was scattering now, and Archie, wild to reach home, took his +mother to a carriage, in which they drove rapidly out to the little +house among the trees and arbours. The old town looked beautiful in +every way. The great maple and oak trees along the road were green +with new leaves, and every dooryard was bright with snowballs and +yellow roses. "This is the very best time of the year," he said to his +mother, "and I am the very happiest boy in all the world." + +"And I am the happiest mother," was the answer. Then they sat in +silence until they reached the old home. They entered by the kitchen +door, and, once inside, and seated in the old cane rocking-chair, +Archie bowed his head in tears of joy at being home with mother once +again. + +The hours which followed were sweet with joy. Mrs. Dunn busied herself +in preparing the supper, and Archie hung around the kitchen, telling +some of the many things he had planned to tell. Mrs. Dunn was smiling, +and Archie thought her the sweetest mother any boy could have. She was +changed somewhat, but she looked very young to-day. + +Supper over, Archie went over the fence to see the Sullivan boys, and +he found them looking much the same. He was truly glad to see them, +and they, of course, were glad to see him, too, though at first they +were just a little bashful, remembering, no doubt, all the things +which had happened to Archie since they saw him last. The boys were +soon telling all about the Hut Club, though, and Archie learned to his +joy that it was still a flourishing organisation. "We spoke of you +every time we were together," said Jack, "and we always wished you +were back again." Archie was delighted to hear that he had been +missed, and all at once an idea came to him which he put into +execution three days later. He determined to give an elegant dinner to +this club of boys, and the very next day he sent to New York for a +caterer to arrange it. He wanted it to be something finer than any of +the boys had ever seen, and it certainly turned out to be so. The +caterer did his best, and when, three days later, the Hut Club sat +down together for the first time in more than eighteen months, they +partook of a dinner which would have done credit to Mr. Depaw's table. +It was a memorable night for them all, and every boy enjoyed himself. + +Archie enjoyed this Hut Club dinner more than anything else while he +was at home, though of course the great event of his stay was the +public reception at the Town Hall on the second evening after his +arrival. This was a truly grand affair. The town authorities hired a +brass band, which played inside the hall and out, and there was such a +crowd in attendance that many were turned away from the doors. It was +a night that Archie will never be able to forget. He sat on the +platform, in company with the mayor and other town officials, and he +listened to several speeches congratulating him on what he had +accomplished since leaving the town. Then he had to get up and tell +them all of his experiences, from the time he left until now. He told +it in a simple manner, but from the close attention he received it was +evident his audience was deeply interested. When he had finished, +there were calls for "three cheers for Archie Dunn," and they were +given with a will. Then Archie, rising from his seat, called for +"three cheers for the President of the United States," and they, too, +were given, for Archie had told them all his feelings on the subject +of the President's policy in the war. After this there were three +cheers for Mr. Depaw, whom one man said would be the next United +States Senator from the State. The meeting closed with some cheers for +the New York Enterprise, and then followed a long siege of handshaking +for Archie, who stood beside his mother on the floor in front of the +platform. It was a happy night for them both, and Mrs. Dunn said +afterward that she could never wish for anything more the rest of her +life. + +The fourth day of his visit was a Sunday, and, to Archie's joy, brave +Bill Hickson and his wife came up from the city to spend the day. What +a jolly time they had, all day long! They went to church in the +morning, where they saw all the people, it seemed, whom they hadn't +seen before, and in the afternoon there were many callers at the +little house. The evening was spent quietly by the happy four, talking +of old times and plans for the future. The town authorities were +anxious to give Bill Hickson a reception while he was in town, but the +bashful hero declined the honour, and returned with his wife to New +York by the midnight train. + +During the two succeeding days Archie talked a great deal with his +mother, and finally gained her consent to come to New York to live in +a year's time. Mrs. Dunn had never really understood that Archie had +so good a position, but now that she realised what a splendid +beginning he had made, she was very willing to come and keep house for +him. This question settled, everything seemed wholly delightful in the +cosy home, and Archie settled down to enjoy the two remaining days of +his visit in quiet rest. He had already much improved during his stay, +and was sure of going back to the city feeling much better than for a +long time past, and this made Mrs. Dunn very happy. + +But Archie didn't stay his week out at home. On the fifth night he +attended a reception in his honour at one of the neighbours' houses, +and he was just in the midst of a description of Tokio when a +messenger boy entered with a telegram for him. He opened it at once, +and read it aloud to the company: + +"Dear Archie," it said, "return as soon as possible. I sail for Europe +on Saturday's steamer to remain six months, and wish you to accompany +me." It was signed by Mr. Depaw, and there was great applause from the +crowd when he finished reading it. But Archie's face was a study. He +wasn't sure whether he wanted to go to Europe or not, but of course +there was no question about what he should do. He at once telegraphed +a reply, saying that he would reach the city to-morrow at noon, +leaving home on the early morning train. + +Of course the reception soon broke up, and Archie walked quietly home +with his mother, who was saddened at the prospect of losing him so +soon again. She soon brightened, however, and began to plan things for +him to do abroad, and soon she entered into the preparation for his +departure with all her heart. But Archie was not so soon made glad, +and he didn't rest until he made his mother promise to accompany him +to the city on the morrow to spend the two days previous to his +departure in helping him get ready. Mrs. Dunn wasn't anxious to make +the trip, but for Archie's sake she consented. + +And early the next morning they left for the city, where the time +passed rapidly until the hour of the steamer's sailing. At the pier +they said good-bye. Archie could hardly speak, but Mrs. Dunn was +brave. "Archie," she said, "God has been with you so far and he will +keep you yet. And remember that a boy with honest ambition will always +get along. You are sure to have friends about you always, for you have +proved that you possess energy, perseverance and a good heart." She +said good-bye without a tear, but as the steamer left the pier Archie +saw, on looking back, a sweet mother seated on a coil of rope, with +her handkerchief to her eyes. + + THE END. + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + +This file should be named aboyr10.txt or aboyr10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, aboyr11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, aboyr10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext04 + +Or /etext03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/aboyr10.zip b/old/aboyr10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..83b15f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/aboyr10.zip diff --git a/old/aboyr10h.htm b/old/aboyr10h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..061ea38 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/aboyr10h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,5440 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<title>Adventures of a Boy Reporter</title> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content= +"text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<style type="text/css"> +<!-- +body {margin:10%; text-align:justify} +blockquote {font-size:14pt} +P {font-size:14pt} +--> +</style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Adventures of a Boy +Reporter by Harry Steele Morrison</h1> + +<pre> +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: The Adventures of a Boy Reporter + +Author: Harry Steele Morrison + +Release Date: January, 2004 [EBook #4990] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on April 7, 2002] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + + + + +This eBook was produced by Jim Weiler, xooqi.com + +</pre> + +<h1>The Adventures of a Boy Reporter</h1> + +<h2>by Harry Steele Morrison, 1900</h2> + +<h4>THE WORLD SYNDICATE PUBLISHING CO.</h4> + +<h4>CLEVELAND, O. NEW YORK, N.Y.</h4> + +<h4>Printed in the United States of America</h4> + +<hr> +<center> +<table summary="boy" cellpadding="2" width="40%"> +<tr> +<td> +<h2>CONTENTS.</h2> + +<h4>CHAPTER I.</h4> + +<h5>LIVING IN THE COUNTRY— LIFE AT SCHOOL— THE HUT CLUB +IS FORMED— THE COMING OF THE CIRCUS</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER II.</h4> + +<h5>ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS— A TRIP TO NEW +YORK WITH UNCLE HENRY</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER III.</h4> + +<h5>ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK— LEAVING +HOME AT NIGHT</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER IV.</h4> + +<h5>WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY— CRUEL +TREATMENT</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER V.</h4> + +<h5>THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS— THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE +TRAMPS</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER VI.</h4> + +<h5>STEALING A RIDE— KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER VII.</h4> + +<h5>ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK— A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER VIII.</h4> + +<h5>LOOKING FOR WORK— WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY +RESTAURANT</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER IX.</h4> + +<h5>IN THE STREET AGAIN— THE POLICE STATION— VISITS THE +NEWSPAPER OFFICE, AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER X.</h4> + +<h5>LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN— FEATURED AS "THE BOY +REPORTER"</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XI.</h4> + +<h5>A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND— RAIDING A GAMBLING +DEN</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XII.</h4> + +<h5>A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER— THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS +CORRESPONDENT TO THE PHILIPPINES— LEAVING NEW YORK— IN +CHICAGO</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XIII.</h4> + +<h5>SAN FRANCISCO— THE TRANSPORT GONE— WORKING HIS WAY +TO HONOLULU BY PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER— THE +CAPITAL OF HAWAII</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XIV.</h4> + +<h5>THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT— A STORM AT SEA— +ARRIVAL IN MANILA</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XV.</h4> + +<h5>ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR, AND HAS SOME STRANGE +ADVENTURES AMONG THE NATIVES— SEIZED BY THE REBELS</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XVI.</h4> + +<h5>A PLEASANT CAPTOR— BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO +ESCAPE— FIRST GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XVII.</h4> + +<h5>ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS— ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE +REGIMENT</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XVIII.</h4> + +<h5>THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS— THE FIRST BATTLE— +ARCHIE WOUNDED</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XIX.</h4> + +<h5>RETURN TO MANILA— IN THE HOSPITAL— CONGRATULATED BY +ALL— WRITING TO THE PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XX.</h4> + +<h5>AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP— BOMBARDING A FILIPINO +TOWN</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XXI.</h4> + +<h5>CONTINUING THE CRUISE— ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED— +THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE'S FRIEND— A GREAT BATTLE AND AN +UNEXPECTED VICTORY— LONGING TO BE HOME AGAIN</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XXII.</h4> + +<h5>RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS— A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH +PERMISSION TO RETURN TO NEW YORK— BILL HICKSON GOES, +TOO</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XXIII.</h4> + +<h5>HONG KONG— A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO— HONOLULU +AGAIN— ARRIVAL IN SAN FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY +THE PRESS— ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN NEW YORK, AND ARE THE +HEROES OF THE HOUR</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XXIV.</h4> + +<h5>DOING "SPECIAL" WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER— INTERVIEWS +WITH FAMOUS MEN— CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XXV.</h4> + +<h5>PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE— STUDYING AT EVENING +SCHOOL— LIVING AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS</h5> + +<h4>CHAPTER XXVI.</h4> + +<h5>DECIDES TO VISIT HOME— A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE +TOWN— A PUBLIC CHARACTER NOW— DINNER TO THE HUT +CLUB— DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL— A TELEGRAM FROM +HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE</h5> +</td> +</tr> +</table> +</center> + +<hr> +<h3>THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER.</h3> + +<h3>CHAPTER I.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>LIVING IN THE COUNTRY— LIFE AT SCHOOL— THE HUT CLUB +IS FORMED— THE COMING OF THE CIRCUS.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>"Y<small>ES</small>," said Mrs. Dunn to her neighbour, Mrs. +Sullivan, "we are expecting great things of Archie, and yet we +sometimes hardly know what to think of the boy. He has the most +remarkable ideas of things, and there seems to be absolutely no +limit to his ambition. He has long since determined that he will +some day be President, and he expects to enter politics the day +he is twenty-one."</p> + +<p>"Is that so, indeed," said Mrs. Sullivan. "Well, we can never +tell what is going to come of our boys. As I says to Dannie +to-day, says I, 'Dannie, you must do your best to be somebody and +make something of yourself, for you and Jack bees all that I has +to depend upon now.' But Dannie pays no attention to my +entreaties, and somehow it seems to me that since Mr. Sullivan +died the boys are gettin' worse and worse. It's beyond me to +control them, anyhow."</p> + +<p>"Oh, take heart, Mrs. Sullivan," said Mrs. Dunn, "our boys +will all turn out well in the end, and all we can do is to bring +them up in the best way we know, and trust to them to take care +of themselves after they leave home. Now Dannie is certainly an +industrious lad. I hear him pounding nails all day long in the +back yard, and he made a good job of shingling the woodshed the +other day. He seems made to be a carpenter."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I think so myself," said the Widow Sullivan. "The whole +lot of them is out by the railroad now, building a hut. They've +organised a 'Hut Club' to-day, and never a lick of work have I +had out of them boys since mornin'. They've always got something +going on, and when I want a bit of water from the well, or a +little wood from the shed, they're never around."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but boys will be boys, Mrs. Sullivan, and we'd better +keep them contented at home as long as we can. They'll be leaving +us soon enough. It seems that no boys are content to stay in town +any longer; they're all anxious to be off to the city."</p> + +<p>"That's true, that's true, Mrs. Dunn," said Mrs. Sullivan. "I +must be going now. I'm much obliged for the rain-water, and +whenever you want a bit of milk call over the fence, and I'll +bring it to you with pleasure. It's a good neighbour you are, +Mrs. Dunn."</p> + +<p>And Mrs. Sullivan went slowly around the house and out at the +front gate, while good Mrs. Dunn returned to her ironing, a few +clothes having to be ready for Sunday.</p> + +<p>While these mothers were discussing their boys, the youngsters +themselves were busy behind the barn, building a hut down near +the railway track. There were six of them altogether, the three +extra ones, besides Archie Dunn and the Sullivan boys, having +come from across the railway to play for the day. Two hours +before they had solemnly organised themselves into the "Hut +Club," each boy walking three times around the block blindfolded, +and swearing upon his return to be true to all the rules and +regulations of the organisation, which had been written with +chalk on the side of the barn. The regulations were numerous, but +the most important one was that no East Side boys were to be +allowed within the club-room when it was built, and that the +club's policy should be one of warfare against the East Siders on +every occasion when they met. This fight against the East Side +was, indeed, responsible for the organisation of the club. It was +felt necessary to have some head to their forces, and some means +of holding together. So the club was organised, and now the next +thing on the programme was the erection of a hut to serve as a +club-house. Archie Dunn, who had been elected president, +volunteered to get three boards and a hammer if the other boys +would each get two boards and some nails. This proposition was +agreed to, and when the boys returned from their foraging +expeditions it was found that there were more than enough boards +to build the hut, so the work began at once. Holes were dug in +the ground, and some posts planted as supports for the structure, +and then the boards were hastily nailed together from post to +post. In three hours the hut was practically completed, and it +remained only to lay a floor until they could hold their first +meeting in the new club-house. The floor itself was down by noon, +and the club then served a memorable dinner to mark the +completion of the structure.</p> + +<p>A hole was dug in the ground outside the door, and a furnace +made. A skillet was brought from Archie's house, together with +some dishes and a coffee-pot, and Dan Sullivan brought some more +dishes, and six eggs from his nests under the barn. The boys were +obliged to make several trips to and from the houses, but finally +nearly everything was ready, and the eggs were carefully cooked +by Archie, who was really a good housekeeper, from long +experience in the kitchen with his mother. Some potatoes were +fried in the grease remaining in the skillet after the eggs were +cooked, and then the feast began. The eggs may have been rather +black with grease, and the potatoes were certainly not done, but +the boys all pronounced it the finest meal of their lives, +notwithstanding the bitter coffee, and the dirty bread, which had +been allowed to fall into the gutter beside the railway track. +They were eating in their own house, and they had cooked in the +open air, "just like tramps," Harry Rafe said, and it was little +wonder that they enjoyed the novel experience.</p> + +<p>The only trouble came when the meal was finished. No one +wanted to wash the dishes, and, finally, it was decided to return +them to their respective kitchens just as they were, and to let +them be washed with the rest of the dinner dishes at home. And +this decision came near putting an end to Hut Club dinners, for +both Mrs. Dunn and the Widow Sullivan were determined not to wash +any more dirty dishes from the hut.</p> + +<p>When the meal was over, the boys lounged about the hut, and +Dan Sullivan brought a lot of things from his sister's playhouse +with which to furnish it more suitably. Archie Dunn brought a lot +of hay from the loft in his mother's barn, and when a piece of +old carpet was spread upon it it made an acceptable couch. A +piece of old carpet was laid in front of the hut, too, where the +boys could sit and watch the trains switching back and forth on +the railway, and the tramps who were heating coffee in cans over +by the cattle-pen.</p> + +<p>Finally, some cattle arrived in the pen to be loaded into cars +for the city, and the boys had just decided to go and watch the +men loading them, when an engine came up the side-track with the +most beautiful car they had ever seen, behind it. The car was +painted in all colours of the rainbow, and in giant letters was +printed the magic name of "The World's Greatest Show."</p> + +<p>The boys lost no time in getting down from the cattle-pen +fence, and the car had barely stopped when they were aboard. +"Hooray," shouted Charlie Huffman, "we'll all get jobs of passin' +bills." And it was with this end in view that they sought the +advertising manager in the car, who promised to give them all +jobs when the circus came in two weeks. The boys deluged him with +questions of every sort. "Will there be any elephants?" "Is there +goin' to be a parade?" and "Will there be any trapeze +performances?" The poor man was finally obliged to lock the door +to keep them out, and the boys stood about the car until nearly +six o'clock, admiring the paintings, and speculating as to +whether they would be able to work their way into the circus or +not, when it finally came. Their speculations were interrupted by +the appearance on the scene of the Widow Sullivan with a +good-sized maple switch, which she used to good effect in getting +the two Sullivans and Archie Dunn home for supper. For Mrs. Dunn +had given Mrs. Sullivan instructions before she started, so that +when Archie complained that he had been whipped by "that woman +next door," he received no sympathy whatever.</p> + +<p>And when he went to bed at nine o'clock, he could hardly sleep +for thinking of the wonderful things which had happened this day. +The coming circus and the great Hut Club kept him awake until far +after ten, so that he got up too late for Sunday school the next +morning, and was punished accordingly.</p> + +<p>The next week was a hard one at school, and the boys had but +little time to devote to the club. But after four o'clock in the +afternoon they sometimes got together and did various things +which improved their club-house. Some very fair chairs were +constructed from empty soap boxes, and various contrivances were +put together to guard against the intrusion of any East Siders or +tramps while they were away at school. There was no padlock used, +and any one coming up to the hut would imagine it a simple thing +to enter— until he tried. But the boys had fixed a secret +cord which, when pulled, shifted the bar inside, and every boy +was sworn not to betray the existence of the cord.</p> + +<p>The day set for the circus came nearer and nearer, and the +boys began to be anxious for fear the schools would not close, so +that they could attend. But the superintendent finally announced +that they would; so early on the eventful day the entire club was +on the grounds, waiting to get some work to do. Archie Dunn got +the first job, being selected to carry water for the elephant +because he was stronger than any of the others. But the rest were +given something to do, and when the day was over they had all +seen the circus, and went to bed happy, to dream of the great +trip to be taken by the Hut Club on the next Saturday.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER II.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>ARCHIE LONGS FOR A CHANGE IN SURROUNDINGS— A TRIP TO NEW +YORK WITH UNCLE HENRY.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>T<small>HE</small> Hut Club went out on a picnic the next +Saturday, and had a jolly time. They camped upon an island in the +middle of a shallow stream, and while there made coffee and +cooked their dinner, having brought most of the necessary +apparatus from the Hut. They fished a little, and hunted for +turtles in the water, and altogether had a good time, if nothing +exciting did occur. It was after nine o'clock at night when they +reached town again, footsore and weary, and Archie Dunn had +hardly entered the house before he was on the dining-room lounge, +half-asleep. His mother seemed to be out, and as he lay there he +wondered how long it would be before she came back. Archie truly +loved his mother, but of late he had often thought that he would +like to leave home and go to the famous city, where he felt sure +he could get something to do. But he disliked the idea of leaving +his mother.</p> + +<p>"I'm getting to be a big boy, now," he often said to himself, +"and it's time that I began to look out for myself. I'm nearly +seventeen, and I think I ought to be earning some money. This +thing of belonging to Hut Clubs and spending my time in going to +picnics and to circuses ought to stop. It's all right for boys, +but I'm getting to be a man, now."</p> + +<p>All these thoughts were flying through his mind when his +mother came in. "Oh, Archie," she exclaimed, "I've been so +worried about you. I've just been over to Mrs. Sullivan's to see +if Dannie had come home, and whether he had seen you. Wherever +have you been?"</p> + +<p>"We didn't think it would take so long to walk home," said +Archie, jumping up from the sofa, "but we were awfully tired, and +we didn't come very fast. I'm so sorry you were worried.</p> + +<p>"And I'm as hungry as a bear, mother. Can't you find me +something to eat?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, dear," said Mrs. Dunn, softly, "and when you've finished +your supper I have something for you. I won't give it to you now +for fear you won't be able to eat, but as soon as you have +finished your meal, you shall have it."</p> + +<p>So Archie was obliged to eat his baked beans and brown bread +and drink his milk without knowing what was in store for him, and +he hurried as fast as he could, so that he could learn. When he +had finished he went into the sitting-room, and found his mother +sitting with a letter spread open upon her lap. "Uncle Henry has +written me asking if you cannot go with him to New York on +Monday, for a couple of days. He is obliged to go down there on +business, and says he will be glad to take you along and show you +something of the wonderful city, for he knows you won't be any +trouble to him. Now I hardly know what to say, Archie. If I can +feel that you are behaving yourself properly, and are doing your +best to be as little trouble as possible, I am willing that you +shall go."</p> + +<p><i>"Oh,</i> mother," cried Archie, "I'll promise anything. +Only let me go this once, and I'll promise to stay at home all +the rest of the summer."</p> + +<p>"All right, then," said Mrs. Dunn. "You shall go on the first +train Monday morning, and Uncle Henry will join you at Heddens +Corner. Run along to bed now."</p> + +<p>Archie went up-stairs almost dumb with delight Was it really +true that he was to see the great city at last? He had heard some +of the boys at school telling what their fathers saw there, but +he had never even hoped that he would see it for himself so soon. +Of course he had determined to see it all some day, but that was +to be far in the future. The lad could hardly sleep for the joy +of it all, and when he did finally lose consciousness, it was +only to dream of streets of gold, and great buildings reaching to +the skies.</p> + +<p>Sunday passed slowly by. At Sunday school, Archie told the +boys that be was going to New York on the morrow, and from that +moment he was the hero of the class. The boys looked at him with +wondering admiration, and seemed scarcely able to realise that +one of their number was to go so far from home. The city was in +reality little more than a hundred miles, but to their boyish +minds this distance seemed wonderfully great.</p> + +<p>Early on Monday morning Archie was at the depot waiting for +the train. His mother was there to see him off, and there were +tears in her eyes at the thought of parting with her only child, +if only for a day or two. And Archie was radiant with delight at +the glorious prospect ahead of him. He walked nervously up and +down the platform, and wished frequently that it were not so +early in the morning, so that some of the boys might be there to +see him off. Finally, the great hissing locomotive drew up, with +its long train of coaches, and Archie was soon aboard, hurrying +off to Heddens Corner and the city. In a few minutes Uncle Henry +was with him, a tall, fine-looking man, with an air of business. +Uncle Henry kept the general store at the Corner, and was an +important person in the neighbourhood. He was of some importance +in the city, too, for his name was known in politics, and his +custom was always desired at the wholesale stores. So Archie was +going to see the city under good auspices, if his uncle would +only have time to take him about with him.</p> + +<p>After a couple of hours, during which Archie kept his face +glued to the window-pane, watching the flying landscape, the +great train pulled through a long, dark tunnel, and finally +entered an immense shed, covered with glass where it came to a +final stop. Crowds left the coaches, and passed out of the +station, where they were swallowed up in the great rush of +traffic. Some drove away in cabs and carriages. Some entered the +street-cars, and some went up a stairway and entered what seemed +to Archie a railway train in the air.</p> + +<p>Uncle Henry told Archie to follow him carefully, and they, +too, were soon flying away from the neighbourhood of the +terminal, past hotels, stores, and dwellings, until they finally +left the trolley-car, and passed through a cross street into a +long, quiet thoroughfare which looked old enough to have been +there for a hundred years. The houses were built far back from +the street, with pillars in front, and into one of these quaint +old dwellings went Archie and his uncle.</p> + +<p>"I always stop down-town," explained Uncle Henry, "because I +am near to the great wholesale establishments. It is central to +the retail stores, too, and to many of the places of +interest."</p> + +<p>When they were settled in their room, Uncle Henry explained +that he would have to be away most of this first day, but that +to-morrow he would take Archie out and show him the sights. So +Archie expected to remain indoors all day; but when his uncle had +left the house he decided that he couldn't possibly remain in +this close room when so many wonderful things were taking place +outside. So he decided to walk up and down the street, anyhow, +and when he went out he felt like a prisoner just escaped from a +cell. But the noise was terrible, and there were a great many +wagons and trucks passing through the street. The greatest crowd +seemed to be on that cross street about two blocks away, so +Archie decided to go there, and see if there was anything new on +that street.</p> + +<p>He saw many wonderful things. There were cars running along +without any apparent motive power, there were thousands and +thousands of people in the streets, and the stores looked so +handsome and interesting that he simply couldn't resist going +into one or two of them, just to see what they were like. And +when he had finished with one or two he could think of no reason +why he shouldn't go on up the street, where he was sure he would +find a great many more interesting things to see. So on and on he +went, until at last he was tired and hungry, and then, for the +first time, he was a little frightened, because he thought of all +he had read about people losing their way in the city, and not +being able to find their relatives again. But he was a brave boy, +so he determined to make an effort to find his way back without +appealing to a policeman. And after a time he was successful, and +entered the queer old house in the ancient street at just three +o'clock in the afternoon. His uncle was there waiting for him, +and was nearly beside himself with apprehension.</p> + +<p>"I was about to send out a general alarm for you, at the +police station," he said. "How did you happen to go away?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, I was so very tired of staying in the house," said +Archie, "and I felt sure that I could find my way back without +getting lost at all. And to-morrow I'm sure I can get along all +right, Uncle Henry, so you needn't bother with me at all, unless +you want to."</p> + +<p>And it so happened that Mr. Kirk was very busy the next day, +and would have found it quite impossible to show Archie about. So +it was fortunate that he was able to go everywhere alone, or he +would have had to return home without seeing anything at all of +the city.</p> + +<p>As it was, he went here, there, and everywhere, and saw a +great deal of the city, the people, and the way in which they +lived. The entire place had a strange fascination for him, and +all the time he was thinking how glad he would be to live where +he could see all this rush of business, this varied life, every +<i>day.</i> And he fully determined to return some day and get +something to do, so that he might work himself up, and come to +own one of the handsome houses on the avenues, or drive one of +the elegant carriages on the boulevard. And he observed every boy +who passed him, and talked with several of them, trying to find +out whether positions were easy to secure, and whether they paid +much when they were secured.</p> + +<p>So when they took the four o'clock train for home, and arrived +at Archie's house in time for supper, he told more about the city +boys and their work than about the tall buildings, the Brooklyn +Bridge, or the Central Park. He talked so much, in fact, about +the delights of the city boy, and the money he earned, that after +he had gone to bed Mrs. Dunn took her brother aside and talked +with him concerning Archie's future. And between them they +definitely decided that Archie must not go to the city to +work.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER III.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>ARCHIE DETERMINES TO GO TO THE CITY TO WORK— LEAVING +HOME AT NIGHT.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>RCHIE</small> D<small>UNN</small> was not more +ambitious than many other boys of his age, but he possessed one +quality which is not developed in every boy, determination. Once +Archie decided upon doing a thing, once he had made up his mind +that it was truly a good thing to do, nothing could keep him from +putting his plans into action, and making an effort, at least, to +accomplish his ends. Most boys of seventeen have not decided what +they want to become when they are men, and, until his visit to +the city, Archie was equally at sea concerning his future. He +knew, of course, that he wanted to be rich and famous, but when +he tried to think up some suitable profession which would bring +him these possessions, he was never able to decide.</p> + +<p>The two days in the city with Uncle Henry had opened to his +boyish mind a new world, and when he returned to the humble home +surrounded by gardens, he felt that he would never be satisfied +to live and work in this small town. There was now no question in +his mind but what the city was the place for any one who wished +to become either rich or famous. It would certainly be impossible +for him to make a name for himself in this village, while in the +city he would have every opportunity for improving himself, and +advancing himself in every way. He wondered, indeed, that he had +never thought of going to New York before, and was disgusted with +himself when he thought of the time he had wasted here at +home.</p> + +<p>But there was no use in thinking of the past. The thing to do +now was to get to the city as quickly as possible, for to Archie +every day seemed precious, and each delay kept him further from +the consummation of his hopes. It never occurred to the boy that +his mother might have objections to his leaving home. She had +always been very ambitious for his future, and he supposed that +she would be delighted at the idea of having her boy in the great +city, where he would have innumerable chances for improving +himself. So when they sat on the front porch, one evening, and he +told her of his plan, he was surprised to hear his mother +pleading with him to remain at home. "Archie," she said, "I am +almost sure you will come to some bad end in the city. You really +must not go, for my sake, if for no other reason."</p> + +<p>"But, mother, I can't remain here in town always. I must go +out into the world some time to earn a living and make a place +for myself, and I think the sooner I go the better, don't +you?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, Archie, but you're so young, and you've had no +experience. You have no idea of the things there are in great +cities to drag young men down. I don't think I could stand it to +have you so far away from home and in such danger."</p> + +<p>"Well, mother," said Archie, "there isn't much use in arguing +about it. I have reached a point where I don't think I can be any +longer satisfied at home. I have been here seventeen years, and I +think I can remain here that much longer without improving +myself. In the city I am sure I can make rapid progress, and in a +year or two you can come there and live with me."</p> + +<p>Archie got up from the porch and went down the street, while +poor Mrs. Dunn ran over next door to see her neighbour, Mrs. +Sullivan. When she had entered the disorderly kitchen, and seated +herself on one of the home-made chairs, the anxious mother burst +into tears. "I don't know what to think of Archie, Mrs. +Sullivan," she said. "He is determined, now, to go to New York, +and I know that if he goes I will never be able to see him again. +I am nigh distracted with worrying over it. I have talked with +him, but he seems determined, and I know I can never hold out +against his entreaties and arguments."</p> + +<p>"Sure, now, Mrs. Dunn," said the Widow Sullivan, "don't yez be +a worryin' about 'im at all. That Archie is a smart boy, he is, +and if he goes to New York he'll come out all right, never fear, +I only wish my Dannie had as much get-up about him as your +boy."</p> + +<p>"Yes, yes, Archie is very ambitious for his age," said Mrs. +Dunn, "but I sometimes wish he were less so. I know I could keep +him at home longer if he wasn't so anxious to be at work. I don't +believe I can let him go, Mrs. Sullivan, not yet. I want him to +stay in school another year, and then I'll think about it."</p> + +<p>"Well, ye're wise, Mrs. Dunn, ye're a wise woman," said the +Widow Sullivan. "Since yer husband died ye've been a good mother +to the lad, and have brought 'im up well. And now, how is yer +chickens, Mrs. Dunn? Have ye got that cochin hen a 'settin'' +yit?"</p> + +<p>And the two women began to discuss their various fowls, and +the conversation was so interesting that Mrs. Dunn remained late, +and found Archie in bed when she went home. "Ah, well, poor boy, +I'll have to tell him of my decision in the morning. He'll be +terribly disappointed, and I hate to do it I'm afraid it's +selfishness that makes me want to keep him with me. I almost wish +he would take things into his own hands, and start for the city +himself. I would be rid then of the responsibility of sending +him, and the question would be settled for me. Boys sometimes +know best how to settle their own difficulties, anyhow."</p> + +<p>Mrs. Dunn kneaded the bread before retiring, for to-morrow was +Saturday, and, therefore, baking-day, and then she went into her +little room off the kitchen, and prayed earnestly for her boy +before sleeping. She prayed that she might be helped in advising +him, and that he might always do what was best for himself and +for his mother.</p> + +<p>The next day was Saturday, and in the morning the Hut Club +met, as usual, and prepared to have an open-air dinner for this +day. The furnace, which had been knocked down during the week by +the East Siders, was rebuilt, and the skillet and other utensils +were brought from the nearest kitchens. Archie went to the +grocery around the corner and bought five cents' worth of cakes, +and then the six boys sat down in a circle and prepared to devour +their home-made feast. But before they began Archie stood up. "I +want to say that this will probably be my farewell dinner with +the club," he said, in a low tone, "and I hope that you will +appoint another president in my place."</p> + +<p>The boys were horror-struck, but Archie refused to explain +where and when he was going. Finally, they refused to appoint +another president, all agreeing that Archie should hold that +office for ever, wherever he was. And the meal was eaten in +silence, for the announcement had thrown a sort of chill over the +proceedings. When they had finished, Archie silently shook hands +with each of the boys, who were dumb with amazement, gathered up +his skillet and coffee-pot, and went home through the gate to the +chicken-lot.</p> + +<p>"I wonder what he's goin' to do," they all said, as in one +breath, and as there was seldom much fun in the club when Archie +was absent, they all went home in a few minutes, or down-town to +watch the farmers, who were in town to do their weekly +buying.</p> + +<p>When Archie reached home he went up-stairs to his little room, +and began to lay out a few things which he wanted to take with +him, for he had determined to start for New York this very night. +Then he tied the things up in a small bundle, and sat down to +write a note to his mother. When he had finished it, he pinned it +up at the head of his cot, and this is what it said:</p> + +<blockquote> +<p>"M<small>Y</small> D<small>ARLING</small> +M<small>OTHER</small>:— Please don't worry about me, I'm +bound to come through all right, and if anything happens to me, I +promise that I will write to you immediately and let you know. I +have the ten dollars which I have saved, and if I don't get work +at once I will write to you for some more. Now, I am not doing +this thing for the sake of adventure, but because I am sure it is +the best thing for me, and I don't want you to worry at all. I +shall write to you often and let you know just what I'm doing, so +don't worry, but be a brave mother. I'm not going off this way as +a sneak, but because I want to avoid a 'scene.'</p> + +<p class="center" align="center">"Your loving</p> + +<p align="Right" class="right">"A<small>RCHIE."</small></p> +</blockquote> + +<p>And at three o'clock the next morning Archie Dunn got out of +bed, shouldered his bundle, and started off for the great city, +which seemed to be drawing him like a magnet.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER IV.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>WORKING ON A FARM TO EARN SOME MONEY— CRUEL +TREATMENT.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>W<small>HEN</small> daylight came, Archie was far out of the +town walking quickly along the southern road. He figured that he +had walked nearly six miles in the two hours since he had let +himself out of the back door at home, and, as he looked ahead, he +planned that he would walk at least thirty miles every day. Of +course, he had never done much walking before, or he would have +known better than to have expected to accomplish so much in +twelve hours, but he felt fresh and full of strength this +morning, and nothing seemed too hard to accomplish. As yet he had +not regretted his departure from home. The excitement of it all, +and the adventurous side of his exploit, had kept him interested, +and made him feel that he was a real hero. But he was not so +foolish as to imagine that there would not be times when he would +regret having set out for New York. He was too old and too +sensible for his age to allow his ambition to run away with him +entirely, and he fully expected to meet with many great +discouragements. "But I'm sure of one thing," he said to himself, +as he walked along, "I never will return home until I have +something to show for the trip. I won't have the club boys and +the neighbours saying that Archie Dunn had to come home +discouraged. If I return without accomplishing anything, I will +be held up to the whole town as a boy who made a fool of himself +by not taking his friends' advice, and I never will be made an +example of if I can help it." And Archie walked faster as he +thought of the possibility of failure.</p> + +<p>When seven o'clock came he was passing through the +county-seat, but though there were many interesting things to +look at in the town, Archie determined not to stop. He was afraid +he might meet some one he knew, who would be sure to ask him +where he was going with his bundle, and what he was doing out so +early. And anyhow he was very hungry, and decided to get out of +the town and to the farmhouses as soon as possible. "I can work +for my meal at a farmhouse," he said to himself, "but in the town +they'll take me for a regular tramp."</p> + +<p>So poor Archie walked quickly through the town, still keeping +to the southern road, and saying to himself, as he passed every +milestone, "So much nearer New York." About a mile out in the +country he came to a large farmhouse, and he determined to enter +and ask for a meal. He had hard work to muster up enough courage +to go in and ask for anything, but finally he knocked timidly at +the kitchen door, and was frightened by a large dog which came +barking around the corner. It seemed to him that the animal would +surely bite, but a large fat woman opened the door just in time +to let him in. "Hurry in, boy," she said, "fer there's no tellin' +what Tige might do ef he once gets a hold of ye." So Archie +stepped into the large kitchen, with its rafters overhead, and +its dining-table in the corner. "Sit down, boy," said the woman. +"I reckon you's thet new lad thet's come ter work over at +Mullins's, ain't ye?"</p> + +<p>"No'm," said Archie, "I don't work anywhere. I'm on my way to +New York, where I expect to find a position, and I thought +perhaps you'd allow me to do a little work here this morning to +earn my breakfast."</p> + +<p>Good Mrs. Lane, for that was the woman's name, was horrified +to think that any one was alive and without breakfast at eight +o'clock in the morning. "Goodness me!" said she. "Why, you must +be half-famished fer want of food, ain't ye?" And she bustled +about the kitchen, putting the kettle on to boil, and stirring up +the fire. "You'll have some nice ham and eggs, my boy, and then I +have somethin' in mind fer you. I reckon yer ain't in no hurry +ter get ter the city, be ye? Well, even if ye do be in a hurry, I +reckon you'll be glad of the chance to earn four dollars. I ain't +goin' to ask ye no questions about how ye come to be walkin' to +New York, because I never wuz no hand ter meddle in other folkses +affairs, but ye look to be a likely lad, and a strong un, and ez +my sister's husband, what lives two miles down the pike, needs a +boy to drive a plough fer a week, I b'lieve ye'll suit 'im +first-rate. So ez soon ez ye have finished yer vittles, I'll walk +down there with ye, and we'll see the old man."</p> + +<p>Archie hardly knew whether to be delighted with the prospect +or not. Of course four dollars would be nice to have, but he was +anxious to get to the city as soon as possible, and every day +counted. But perhaps it would be wrong, he thought, to throw away +such a good chance to earn some money, and he had decided to +accept any offer the farmer made him, long before he finished his +breakfast. When he got up from the straight-backed chair, he felt +that he had never eaten a better meal in his life, and when Mrs. +Lane started off down the road, he gladly followed her. A week on +such a farm as this would be no unpleasant experience. Such food +was not to be had every day, he knew, and he of course would have +precious little that was good to eat when he reached the +city.</p> + +<p>They soon covered the two miles, Mrs. Lane getting along very +fast for such a large woman, and at last they stood before Hiram +Tinch, who owned the farm. Archie was made to describe his +intentions, and was thoroughly examined by Mr. Tinch. He told the +farmer that he knew nothing about farm work, but Mr. Tinch said +he would soon teach him, and it was settled that Archie was to +remain on the farm a week. Mrs. Lane went inside the house to see +her sister, who looked sick with too much work, and the farmer +told Archie that he might as well start in, as there was no +object in waiting. So the boy donned a pair of "blue jean" +trousers, and was taken into a field, where a one-horse plough +was standing. Archie knew how to hitch a horse, so he went to the +stable and secured his steed, and then harnessed him to the +plough. The farmer didn't see fit to give him any instructions +about ploughing, and the poor boy hardly knew what to do, but +rather than ask he started off, and tried to guide the animal in +the right direction, as far as he knew it. Of course the horse +went wrong, and the plough refused to stay in the earth, and +altogether the attempt was a miserable failure. The farmer leaned +against the fence, picking his teeth with a pin, but when he saw +the horse going crooked, and the plough bounding along over the +earth, his face grew livid with anger. For a minute he seemed +unable to speak, but strode toward Archie with a fierce look in +his eyes. Then he found his tongue, and opened such a tirade of +vile words that the poor boy shrank from him in terror. He was in +mortal fear lest the man should lay hands on him and commit some +crime, so intense was his rage, but Hiram Tinch seemed to know +how far to go, and after five minutes of cursing and swearing he +took the plough in his own hands, and guided it through the +earth. "Now take it," he growled at Archie, when he had gone a +furrow's length, "and see ef ye can do better this time. +Remember, not a bite of dinner do ye get until this field is +ploughed."</p> + +<p>Poor Archie was weak from fright, but there was nothing to do +but to obey. He looked at the vast field before him, and made up +his mind that he would get nothing to eat until night, anyhow, +for it was already nearly noon. He felt very much like bursting +into tears, but he was too proud to give way to his feelings. But +he couldn't help wishing that he were at home, playing with the +members of the Hut Club. "Those boys are much better off than I +am," he said, over and over, "though they have made no effort to +improve themselves." After a time, however, his ambition +returned, and as he looked ahead into the future, and remembered +the wonderful things he was going to accomplish, he felt more +like working.</p> + +<p>He finished the field at five o'clock in the afternoon, and +was almost fainting from hunger and from the hard work. The +ploughing was fairly well done, but Hiram Tinch could see no +merit in the work. He swore at Archie again, and gave him a +supper of mush and milk. Mrs. Tinch sat by, and Archie could see +that she did not approve of his treatment. The poor woman seemed +afraid to speak, almost, but it was plain that she had a good +heart. So when Archie heard a noise in his garret room that +night, he was not surprised to see Mrs. Tinch at the window, +placing some doughnuts and sandwiches there for him to eat.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER V.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>THE NIGHT AMONG THE RUINS— THE CAMP-FIRE OF THE +TRAMPS.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>I<small>T</small> seemed to Archie that he had just fallen +asleep when old Hiram Tinch was shaking him awake. "Git up out o' +here now, ye lazy beggar, and git to the field and finish that +there ploughin'," he growled, and the frightened lad awakened +from a horrible nightmare, only to find a worse experience +awaiting him in the light of day. He hastily drew on his +trousers, and didn't wait to don either shoes or stockings, for +if he was to spend the day ploughing in a field, he knew he would +be more comfortable in his bare feet. When he reached the +kitchen, he found that Farmer Tinch had already eaten his +breakfast, though it was not daylight. Archie was glad that he +was out of the way, and good Mrs. Tinch was glad of it, too, for +she was able to give the boy a good breakfast, and some good +advice with it. "Don't you pay no attention to what my man says, +laddie. He's a powerful man to swear and carry on, but I don't +think he'll have the meanness to strike you. Ef he does, ye must +come to me, and I'll see thet he doesn't do it no more."</p> + +<p>Archie was grateful for this spirit of friendliness, but in +his heart he thought that cruel words were often more painful +than lashes, and he heartily wished that his week was over.</p> + +<p>All this day he spent on the farm, without once going into the +road. Farmer Tinch had warned him that if he saw him making for +the road at any time, he could go and never come back, and he +would forfeit what money he had already earned. So Archie +ploughed the field from daylight till dark, with a half hour at +noon for a hurried dinner. He was glad when darkness came, and +after another supper of mush and milk he was thankful to have a +corn-husk bed to sleep on, and was soon in a stupor which was so +sound as to be almost like death.</p> + +<p>Again the next morning he was awakened at daylight, and he was +made to work even harder than on the second day. He had by this +time become somewhat used to the labour, however, and stood it +better. He was more successful in his work, too, and Farmer Tinch +had less opportunity for cursing him. But at night he seemed more +tired, even, than before, and he longed for his home again. He +thought of the cosy bed he would now be enjoying if he had only +taken his mother's advice, and he felt almost like getting up in +the night and stealing away on the road to the north. But, always +a sensible lad, Archie realised that this discouragement could +not last, and he lost himself in sleep, looking forward three +days, when his week should be up, and he would be on his way to +the city, with four dollars more to add to his slender store.</p> + +<p>The three days passed slowly, but at length the Saturday night +came, and he prepared to be off. But good Mrs. Tinch entreated +him to remain with them over Sunday, and, as Archie wasn't sure +that it would be quite right for him to travel on Sunday, he +decided to do so. So the next day he brushed his only suit of +clothes, and drove with his late employer to church, where Farmer +Tinch sat in a front seat and passed the bread and wine at +communion. Archie's heart rose to his throat as he saw this +paragon so devout in church. He felt like rising in his seat and +denouncing him before all the people as a tyrant and a +hard-hearted wretch. But he kept quiet, though he found it +impossible to partake of the communion under such +circumstances.</p> + +<p>The Tinches had brought their dinner with them, and at noon +they all sat on one of the grassy mounds in the churchyard, to +take some refreshment before the afternoon service began. When +they had finished, Archie wandered off, and came to a crowd of +boys who were romping behind the church. When they saw him +approach, they all stopped their noise, and looked at him +wonderingly. Evidently they were not used to seeing strange boys. +The silence was soon broken, however, by one of the boys calling +out, "Why, fellers, thet's the chap what's been workin' fer Hiram +Tinch." This announcement was enough to make Archie an even +greater object of interest than before, for the boys seemed to +think that any person who could work for Farmer Tinch, and come +out of the ordeal none the worse for wear, must be something +wonderful. Archie was soon on good terms with them all, however, +and told them of his plan of going to New York. The boys were all +attention, and soon he was the hero of the occasion. When the +bell rung for the afternoon service he was still telling them of +the things he was going to do, and none of them wanted to go into +the church. Archie persuaded them to enter, however, but he was +not surprised to meet them all along the road when he left +Tinch's early Monday morning.</p> + +<p>It was almost time to go to bed when they reached the +farmhouse that night, so Archie went at once to his attic, being +anxious to start fresh on his journey the next day. He was now +determined to push on as rapidly as possible, hoping to reach the +city within three or four days. He was somewhat afraid that he +wouldn't be able to do this, but he was going to try, anyhow.</p> + +<p>At daylight Monday morning he was on the way, and when the +various boys he met the day before said good-bye to him and +wished him good luck, he felt that his stay at Tinch's had not +been without benefits of some sort. He had made some boy friends, +and he was four dollars richer, Archie was sensible enough, too, +to realise that his experience would be a valuable one to him in +the future. He knew now what hard work was, at any rate.</p> + +<p>The morning walk was delightful. The September weather was +perfect, and all along the road were fruit-trees laden with every +sort of good thing to eat a boy could wish for. And as the trees +were on the public thoroughfare, Archie did net hesitate to help +himself freely as he went along, so that he didn't require any +meal at noon.</p> + +<p>As night drew near, however, he began to wonder what he would +do for a bed, and the question became more important with every +hour. He had come to no towns since morning, and knew that he +couldn't expect to reach one of any size until the next day, +anyhow. There were farmhouses, of course, but after his +experience of the past week the lad felt that he would rather +remain outdoors all night than risk being thrown in with another +Hiram Tinch. He didn't know enough of farmers to know that few of +them resemble Mr. Tinch in nature, and he did what he thought was +best in keeping away from farmhouses after this.</p> + +<p>It was five o'clock in the evening, and Archie was beginning +to feel very tired and hungry, when he came to the ruins of an +old colonial mansion, which lay far back from the road, +surrounded by trees, and almost hid with shrubbery. "How +interesting," he thought to himself. "It looks just like the +pictures of old ruins we see in geographies. I think I must go up +and see what they look like at close range." And, fired with a +spirit of adventure, and making believe that he was an explorer +in an ancient country, the boy made his way through the trees and +shrubbery. The ruins looked more and more interesting as he +advanced. This had evidently been a magnificent estate at one +time. There were massive pillars which had once supported a +stately portico at the front of the house, and above all there +rose a massive chimney, which seemed to be exceedingly well +preserved. As Archie came nearer, he was surprised to notice a +thin column of smoke rising from the top of the chimney, and for +a moment he stood still with fright. What could this mean? Who +could be building a fire in the midst of these ruins. It was +almost like what one reads about in books, he thought.</p> + +<p>For some time he could not decide what to do, whether he had +better keep on, or whether the wisest policy would be to get back +to the road as quickly as possible. Finally, his curiosity and +thirst for adventure persuaded him to go on, and he continued to +push his way through the shrubbery until he stood before the +ruins. He then climbed a flight of steps, and stood in what had +once been the main entrance to this massive palace. Before him he +saw a scene which was almost weird in its unusualness. A fire of +pine-knots was blazing in the ruins of the great fireplace, and +seated in a semicircle around the fire were several men of +picturesque appearance, whose faces looked up angrily when they +were disturbed.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER VI.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>STEALING A RIDE— KICKED OUT BY THE BRAKEMAN.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>RCHIE</small> was dumbfounded. Never before had he +been among such a motley crowd, and his first impulse was to turn +and run. But on second thought he decided that it would be best +to put on a bold face and walk up to the men. This he did, and +when he reached the fire the men jumped up and asked him who he +was. In a few words he told them his simple story, and they all +laughed and sat down again about the fire, making a place for +him. "You're one of us, then, laddie," said the leader of the +gang. "We're all soldiers of fortune, all dependent upon the +generous public for our livelihood. But we're not goin' to the +city. There's nothin' there for us, and our advice to you is for +you to steer clear of the place, too. Them police takes ye and +throws ye into jail as quick as a wink, and there's no chance of +gettin' anythink to eat at basement doors, neither. They're all +on to us, there, laddie, and ye'd better stick to the +country."</p> + +<p>This bit of advice was endorsed by the entire company, and it +was in vain that Archie tried to make them understand that he was +no ordinary tramp, walking about the country in search of an easy +time. He tried to tell them that he was going to the city to +work, not to beg; but the leader, a big, dirty fellow, weighing +two hundred pounds or over, said, "Never mind, laddie, we knows +you've run away from home to get away from the folks, and we +appreciates yer position. If yer a mind to stand by us, we'll +stand by you, and see thet ye comes to no harm."</p> + +<p>On thinking things over, Archie decided that it was perhaps +the wisest thing for him to appear to sympathise with the tramps, +and make himself agreeable while with them. He had undoubtedly +run into a gang of the worst sort of vagabonds, and there was no +way of getting away from there without arousing their suspicions. +So he partook of their slender meal, and joined in the general +laughter when the leader, "Fattie Foy," made some crude attempt +at punning. The meal was one to be remembered. The coffee had +been heated in an empty tomato can over the fire, and from its +taste was evidently a combination of various collections made +from the farmhouses round about. Besides the coffee there was a +various collection of sandwiches and bread and butter, and two +pieces of cake. One man had succeeded in striking a good house, +and came back laden with pickles and crackers and cheese, which +were probably the remains of some picnic basket. Another fellow +had brought some pieces of cold bacon, and these were warmed on +sticks over the fire until they looked really appetising. From +some barn had come a half-dozen fresh eggs, and these were +quickly boiled in a can of hot water, and made a very fair +showing on the slab of granite which served as a table.</p> + +<p>When everything was ready the provisions were equally divided +among the crowd, and every one shared alike. It made no +difference how much more one man collected than another, it was +always shared with the entire crowd. Poor Archie found it almost +impossible to eat, but the men insisted that he take something, +so he did manage to swallow a few sips of coffee and eat a slice +of bread and butter. But as he looked about him at the dirty +hands and faces, and the filthy garments of the tramps, he +determined not to eat again while with them.</p> + +<p>When the meal was over the two tin cans were washed at a +spring of water, and as it was now quite dark, they all sat close +to the fire, in order to see. Some one produced a pack of dirty +cards, and they began a game of some kind. Archie was asked to +join, but he told them he didn't know anything about +card-playing. The poor lad was beginning to wish he had never +left home, and felt more miserable than at any other period of +the journey. He walked over to a corner of the ruins where the +light from the fire did not penetrate, and, once there, he sat +down and sobbed bitterly for a time. When he had finished crying +it seemed impossible for him to sleep. The scene about the fire +fascinated him. The men were seated in every sort of picturesque +attitude, and as the flickering light fell upon their dark faces +it wasn't hard for the poor lad to imagine that he had fallen +among a crowd of brigands. He watched them as they played until +he could see no longer, and then he fell into a sound sleep.</p> + +<p>When Archie woke it was still dark, but the moon was shining +brightly overhead, making everything as light as day. He rubbed +his eyes and sat up, and it was some time before he could realise +where he was. Then, as he saw the tramps lying about the ground, +he remembered his adventures of the night before, and, horrified +that he had allowed himself to sleep, he hastily jumped up, and +determined to get away from the ruins as quickly as possible. The +tramps were all sleeping soundly, and the only noises to be heard +were the sound of their breathing and the blood-curdling hoot of +some owl perched on the pillars of the old portico. The boy +picked his way carefully between the bodies of the sleeping men, +and in a minute stood once more on the grand flight of steps +outside. He was trembling for fear some tramp would awake and +prevent his going, and when a bat brushed him in its flight he +almost screamed with terror. Far out beyond the trees and the +shrubby he could see the road glistening in the moonlight, and he +made his way as rapidly as possible out of the grounds, and was +once more on his way to the city.</p> + +<p>It was lonesome work, walking along a country road at night, +and Archie remembered with longing his cosy bed at home. The +feeling of homesickness kept growing within him, despite his +efforts to down it, and when at last the glorious autumn sun rose +over the eastern horizon he was miserable with longing for mother +and for home. But he was too proud to even think of turning back. +He must reach the city at all hazards, homesick or not.</p> + +<p>Archie did not think of breakfast this morning. His experience +of the night before seemed to have taken away his appetite +entirely, and his only thought was to walk as fast as possible, +so that he could reach the city soon. About nine o'clock he +entered the outskirts of a busy town, and while there he observed +that the railroad going to the city passed through the place. All +at once a new idea occurred to him. He had so often heard men and +boys tell of how they had stolen a ride from one town to another. +Why shouldn't he be able to get a ride on a freight train to the +city. Would it be wrong? Archie thought not, since so many men +did it. And anyhow it didn't seem a wicked thing to cheat the +railroad. He had heard people say that the company ought to be +cheated whenever possible, since it cheated so many others. So, +from being so tired and so anxious to reach New York, Archie +decided to try and steal a ride. He entered the yards, where a +train was being made up for the south, and there he saw a +cattle-car with an open door. He immediately jumped inside and +shut the door, squeezing himself into the farthest corner, hoping +that he wouldn't be discovered. He soon found that he wasn't +alone, for a couple of tramps were in the opposite corner, and +they whispered to him not to make any noise. "The brakie," they +said, "will soon be 'round, and if he finds ye he'll put us all +in jail."</p> + +<p>Poor Archie grew pale at the thought of being put in jail, and +huddled himself closer in the corner. After a time the train +started, and the tramps, he noticed, climbed up into some sort of +compartment under the roof of the car, where they wouldn't be +observed, leaving Archie alone down-stairs. Things went smoothly +for a time. The train went flying along, and Archie counted every +mile which brought him nearer to the city. Finally the train +pulled up at a crossing, and a brakeman came along and threw open +the door of the car. He was not long in discovering the cowering +figure in the corner, and his wrath was dreadful to look upon. +"So, ye cussed vagabond," he growled, "ye thought ye'd steal a +ride, did ye? Get out o' this now. Quick, out with ye." Archie +could have fainted, and, as it was, he almost fell out of the +car, propelled by the brakeman's boot. For awhile he stood dazed +beside the track, and finally moved on. "I'll keep a 'stiff upper +lip,'" he said, "whatever happens." But this was by far the most +discouraging adventure yet.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER VII.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>ARRIVAL IN NEW YORK— A NIGHT IN A LODGING-HOUSE.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>O<small>N</small> and on for the rest of the day walked +Archie. His feet were sore, he was weak from hunger, and he was +made miserable with being homesick. People who met him on the +road turned around to look at the slender lad with the pale face +and the weary step, but he kept walking on, stopping for nothing, +and noticing no one. At noon he picked some apples in an orchard, +and these appeased his hunger. When evening drew near, however, +he felt that he could go without food no longer, so he didn't +hesitate to stop at a house and ask for food. "I know mother +would give a boy food if one should come to our door," he said to +himself, "so I do not think it wrong for me to ask for food +here." He was fortunate enough to strike a pleasant housewife, +who took him in and made him sit down at the kitchen table, which +she covered with good things to eat. There was cold roast beef, +some fried potatoes and a glass of good fresh milk. And then she +gave him some apple pie, so that when he had finished Archie felt +better than for many a day. While he ate he told the good woman +why he was going to New York, and her sympathy was enlisted at +once. "Why, you poor lad," she exclaimed, "just to think of your +being in the city all alone. And what will your mother +think?"</p> + +<p>Archie couldn't imagine what his mother did think. He had +remembered her every minute during the last few days, and was +anxious to write her, so he decided to ask the woman for some +paper and a pencil. These were gladly given him, and he sat down +and told his mother that he was almost to New York and that he +had been having a splendid time. He was careful not to say +anything about his experience with Farmer Tinch, or the night he +spent with the tramps. He knew these things would only make her +unhappy, and it was just as well that she should think everything +was smooth sailing for him. His letter was filled with his +enthusiasm and his hope for the morrow, so that when good Mrs. +Dunn received it she was overjoyed, and hurried over to show it +to the Widow Sullivan, who enjoyed it thoroughly and said "I told +you so." Poor Mrs. Dunn had been having a very miserable time of +it. She was hardly surprised that morning when she awoke and +found Archie gone, but she was naturally much worried for fear +some accident would happen to him before he reached New York. +Once there, she felt that she needn't worry much about him, for, +strange to say, Mrs. Dunn had a firm belief in the ability of +city policemen to take care of every one, and she knew that +Archie would not be allowed to suffer for want of food and a +place to sleep. And when she received this letter, saying that +Archie was nearly to New York, and had even been so successful as +to earn some money, she felt more comfortable than for some time, +Of course she supposed that he would be home before long. She was +positive that he wouldn't be able to get any work in the city, +and knew that as soon as his money gave out he would return. +"It's all for the best," she said to Mrs. Sullivan. "The habit of +running away from home was born in the boy. His father left home +when he was no older than Archie, and no harm ever came to him. +So I'm not going to worry, Mrs. Sullivan." And then Mrs. Dunn +would go back to her home, and at sight of Archie's old hat or +some of his football paraphernalia, would burst into tears.</p> + +<p>The good woman who gave Archie his supper refused to let him +start out again on the road that night. She told him that he must +remain with them, for they had an extra bed up over the kitchen +which was never needed, and that he might just as well sleep +there as not. So for the first time in nearly a week Archie slept +comfortably, and, as he heard the familiar sounds in the kitchen +below him in the morning, it was hard for him to make up his mind +that he was not at home, and that it was not his mother who was +grinding the coffee in the kitchen below. He heard the ham frying +in the skillet, and the rattle of the dishes as his hostess set +the table, and then he dressed himself and hastened downstairs, +feeling ready for a good day's walking.</p> + +<p>When he had eaten his breakfast he started out again. The +woman told him that it was only about fifteen miles to New York, +and that after he had walked about six of them he could take a +trolley-car and ride the remainder of the distance for five +cents. So he thanked her for her kindness, and promised to let +her know how he succeeded in the city, for the woman was much +interested in his future. He felt almost sorry to leave the +home-like place, but the prospect of reaching the city this very +day was enough to make him anxious to be off. He covered the six +miles to the trolley-car before eleven o'clock in the morning, +and then in an hour and a quarter more the trolley landed him in +lower New York.</p> + +<p>His sensations as he was whirled along the smooth pavements, +past beautiful buildings and handsome residences, may be better +imagined than described. After looking forward to this day for so +long, he was almost overcome at the realisation of his hopes, and +took the utmost delight in everything about him. When the car +stopped at the terminus of the line, he got out and walked up the +busiest street in the neighbourhood. He hardly knew what to do +first, but continued walking until he came to the New York end of +the great Brooklyn Bridge. Then he couldn't resist the desire to +walk across the bridge, and he started out upon the journey. Up +the steps he walked, and soon he had climbed as far as the middle +of the magnificent structure. There he stood for some time, +looking out over Governor's Island, nestled like a green egg in a +nest of red buildings, and past Staten Island to the open sea +beyond It was all grander, more beautiful than anything he had +ever seen before, and he felt glad that he had come. Then in +another direction he saw the never-ending succession of +buildings, some tall, some low ones, but all inhabited with +swarms of people. "There are three million people in this great +city," he said to himself, "and over them in New Jersey, in those +cities I see, there are a million more, and I am one of four +million." The thought was too much for the boy, and he continued +his walk across the bridge. Once across, he came back again, for +Brooklyn was a strange place to him. In New York City he felt +more at home, for he had at least spent two days within its +limits.</p> + +<p>Once back in the busy streets, he decided to look about for a +cheap place to stay for the night. It was the middle of the +afternoon now, and he felt that he ought to make some +preparation. He knew better than to apply at the police station +for lodging, for he knew they would probably turn him over to the +famous Gerry Society, which would send him back home before a day +had passed, and then where would his ambitions be?</p> + +<p>He remembered the place where he had stayed with Uncle Henry, +but he knew that this would be too high-priced for his +pocketbook, so he started up the Bowery, where he expected to +find some very cheap places. He didn't like the looks of the +people he met in the street, but his experiences on the way to +New York had taught him not to be too particular about a little +dirt. So when he came to a rickety building with a sign up, +"Beds, ten and fifteen cents," he immediately went up the dark, +filthy stairway, and found himself in a large room at the top +which served as the "hotel" office. There were rows of chairs in +front of the windows and along the walls, and in the chairs were +the queerest-looking lot of men he had ever seen. He didn't pay +any attention to them, though, but went up to the seedy +individual behind the desk, and asked him if he could get a bed +for the night. "Sure, Mike," the man replied, and Archie signed +his name in a dirty book with torn pages. He paid the man ten +cents, and asked if he could leave his bundle while he went +outside. "Sure, Mike," was again his answer, and the man took his +little bundle of necessities and threw them on the floor behind +the counter. When Archie had gone out, a fat man with a baby face +came up and whispered to the clerk. "Anything in the bloke?" he +inquired. "Nit," said the clerk, "don't yer see his baggage? Does +it look like there's anything in it?" And the mysterious +conversation closed, to be continued later in the evening.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER VIII.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>LOOKING FOR WORK— WASHING DISHES IN A BOWERY +RESTAURANT.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>FTER</small> a couple of hours spent in going about +the streets, Archie went into a place where he bought some coffee +and rolls for his supper. He paid only five cents for three sweet +rolls and a large cup of coffee which was not at all bad to +taste, and he returned to the lodging-house on the Bowery feeling +better than he had expected to feel when he started out from the +homestead where he spent the previous night, If he could get a +good meal for five or ten cents, and could sleep for ten cents +more, he would have enough to keep him going for some time.</p> + +<p>The Bowery at night presented a wonderful appearance to +Archie's mind. The brilliantly lighted shops, the cheap theatres +with their bands of musicians on the sidewalk in front of the +entrance, were all attractive to his boyish eyes, but he was wise +enough to pass them all by, and to make his way as quickly as +possible to the cheap lodging-house. The street was jammed with +persons of every description. He was surprised particularly at +the number of Chinamen he met, for he didn't know that a block or +two away was the centre of the Chinese population of New York, +where the Celestials have their theatre, their hotels, their +great stores, and their joss-house. There were many Italians in +the street, too, and Polish Jews, to say nothing of Frenchmen and +Germans. Then there was the typical Bowery "tough," who swaggered +up and down, looking for trouble, which he usually finds before +an evening passes. Archie was not afraid in this cosmopolitan +crowd. No one seemed to notice him, and, anyhow, there were a +great many policemen about, who seemed to keep a sharp lookout +all the time. And as Archie shared his mother's faith in the city +policeman, he felt no fear.</p> + +<p>In the lodging-house everything looked very much as before. +The chairs were still occupied with filthy-looking men, who +smoked and spat and talked in undertones among themselves. The +boy paid no attention to any of them, but, walking up to the +seedy individual behind the counter, asked him if he could go to +bed now. The man answered, "Certainly," and sent a fellow with +Archie to show him his bed. It was in a long, narrow room, which +was poorly lighted with a few gas-jets here and there, and which +was filled with about thirty beds, all narrow, and all dirty. One +of these was pointed out to Archie, and then the man left him. +The poor lad felt more homesick than ever, and had it not been +that he had a glorious to-morrow to look forward to, he would +have been very miserable indeed. As it was, he undressed and got +between the chilly sheets, when he remembered that he hadn't +looked after his little roll of bills for a long time, and that +some of them might be missing. He crawled out of bed again, and +felt inside the lining of his coat for the purse. He had sewed it +there for safe-keeping until he reached the city, for he had some +little change in his pocket, which he knew would last him for +several days.</p> + +<p>The poor boy's hand felt nothing but a cut in the lining, +where the roll of bills had been, and all at once he realised +that the money must have been stolen from him. And he at once +thought of the night in the ruins, when he fell asleep among the +tramps, and there was no doubt in his mind but that they had +taken his money from him. This was a terrible blow. Here he was, +with just a few cents in his pocket, and no one to whom he could +appeal for aid. It was the worst predicament Archie had ever been +in, and he hardly knew what to do. He sat on the side of his +dirty little bed for awhile, and then he snuggled under the +covers and was soon asleep again. For a boy who has been walking +all day seldom stays awake from worry.</p> + +<p>But when he awoke in the morning, it was to realise the fact +that he must get some money this very day or go to the police +station. The few cents he had remaining were only enough to buy +some coffee and bread for breakfast, and the poor lad didn't know +where his next meal would come from. As he went out, the clerk in +the filthy office of the lodging-house told him that he needn't +come back any more.</p> + +<p>"Why did you tell him that?" asked the fat man with a sly +face.</p> + +<p>"Because I went through his clothes last night when he was +asleep, and he had only six cents in his pocket. We don't want no +starvin' brats around here, to bring the Gerry Society down upon +us."</p> + +<p>It was well that Archie didn't know his pockets had been +searched while he was asleep, or his faith in human nature would +have been more shaken than ever before. He had not suspected that +the men in this lodging-house might be dishonest.</p> + +<p>"They are poor," he said to himself when he saw them first, +"but they may be good men for all that."</p> + +<p>After a slender meal, Archie found a library where he looked +over the advertising columns of the morning papers, trying to +find some position open which he thought he might fill. There +were several advertisements calling for office boys, and all +these he made note of, and then as he looked down the page he +noticed that a boy was wanted in a restaurant to wash dishes. He +decided that if he didn't succeed in getting a place as office +boy, he might get the restaurant place. He knew that in a +restaurant he would be likely at least to get enough to eat.</p> + +<p>For two hours he called at addresses of men who wanted office +boys, but at every place he was turned away. "We have already +hired one," some of them said, and others told him that they +never took any boys in the office who were living away from home. +Some asked him for recommendations, and when he had none, they +looked at him and told him "good morning." It was all terribly +discouraging, and with every minute Archie was wishing more and +more that he were back home again. Somehow the city seemed +different now from what it had been when Uncle Henry was with +him. Everything was less bright, and the things he had been +delighted with before were less interesting now.</p> + +<p>Finally, he entered a large, handsome suite of rooms, in one +of the great sky-scrapers, and was shown into a very elegant +private office. There he found an old gentleman seated in a great +easy chair, looking over papers, and keeping one eye upon a +buzzing instrument at his side which seemed to be spitting out +long strips of paper, like a magician in a side-show. The man +looked up as he entered, and cleared his throat. "Ahem," he said, +"you look as if you were from the country. I wonder, now, if you +have came to the city to seek your fortune."</p> + +<p>Archie was embarrassed. "Yes, sir, I suppose you might put it +that way," he replied.</p> + +<p>"Well," continued the old gentleman, "my advice to you is to +go back where you came from as quickly as you can. Not one boy in +a thousand will gain either fame or fortune in New York, and you +stand a wonderful chance of sinking lower every year. And even if +you do succeed, you will miss many beautiful things in your life +which may come to you in the country. You can have a pleasant +home there, and live an easy, natural life, while here it will be +years before you can expect to accomplish much, and you will +spend your life in a nervous strain. Think well, young man, +before choosing the great city as your sphere of usefulness."</p> + +<p>"I've made up my mind, sir," said Archie. "I have quite +decided to remain in the city."</p> + +<p>"Very well," said the old gentleman, "I hope you may never +regret it. But we have already hired an office boy. Good +morning."</p> + +<p>Archie walked out, more discouraged than ever. Perhaps, after +all, a country life was not to be so much despised. This man +ought to know what he was talking about. But once outside, in the +Broadway crowd, Archie forgot everything about the country, and +was lost in the delight of being one of four million.</p> + +<p>He now decided to accept the place in the restaurant, if it +were not taken, and, fortunately for him, it was not. So he +rolled up his sleeves, and began to wash dishes as if he had done +nothing else in all his life before.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER IX.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>IN THE STREET AGAIN— THE POLICE STATION— VISITS THE +NEWSPAPER OFFICE, AND IS KINDLY RECEIVED BY THE EDITOR.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>LL</small> day long Archie washed dishes, and before +night came he decided that he had never before had such +discouraging work. The restaurant was a popular one, and there +were very many dishes to be washed, to say nothing of the pots +and pans which were always dirty. Archie no sooner finished one +sink full of dishes than another large pile was waiting to be put +through the same operation, and there was no time at all for +looking about him. There was hardly time for eating, even, and at +noon he was only able to snatch a few mouthfuls. The work was not +interesting, and it was a new sort of labour to Archie, so that +altogether he did not get on as well as he might have wished. The +cook was constantly nagging him, and telling him to hurry up, and +the poor lad tried his best to please him. But somehow everything +went wrong, and he was hardly surprised when the proprietor came +in at six o'clock with a new man for the place. "Come around in +the morning," he said to Archie, "and I'll pay your day's +wages."</p> + +<p>So the boy was in the street once more, with no money, and no +place to sleep. He wasn't hungry, that was one thing, for he had +been allowed to eat a good meal before leaving the restaurant. +But where was he to sleep, and what was he to do on the morrow, +when he would surely be hungry? His experience at looking for +work had not been encouraging, and he began to have serious +doubts as to whether he would ever get a place. Certainly he +would starve if he waited around New York long without anything +to do.</p> + +<p>It was quite dark at seven o'clock, and Archie walked over to +the brilliantly lighted street which ran north and south through +the city. He had never failed to find something interesting to +look at there, and he felt now that he would like to see the +bright side of city life, even if he couldn't enjoy it himself. +So all the evening he walked up and down the street, watching the +well-dressed crowds hurrying into the theatres and the other +almost innumerable places of amusement. He stared in open-mouthed +amazement at some of the costumes of the women he saw alighting +from carriages. Never before had he seen anything half so +beautiful, and if any one had told him that there were such +dresses he would have told them he didn't believe it. Some of +them, he thought, must cost hundreds of dollars, and the jewels +worn with them many hundreds more. How interesting, how new, it +all was to him! Once he thought of the little home in the +village, and at first wished that his mother might be there to +enjoy the sights with him. "But I wouldn't want her to see me," +he thought, "not while I am so miserable, and feeling so +discouraged." For Archie was beginning to wonder if he hadn't +made a mistake in leaving home, whether he had not been +overconfident and hot-headed. But he decided to try it a few days +more, that is, if he could manage to live for that length of time +in the city.</p> + +<p>At twelve o'clock he was walking up and down the street, which +was still bright with millions of lights, though the crowds had +gone home from the theatres, and the restaurants were beginning +to be less popular. He was still wondering how he was going to +find a place to sleep, when he was accosted by a policeman, and +taken into a doorway. "I've been watching you," said the officer, +"and I want to know why you are walking up and down the street at +this time of night."</p> + +<p>Archie could have cried from fright, but he remembered that he +was under suspicion, so decided to tell the policeman his whole +story, and perhaps he could help him out in some way. So he +described his experiences during the day, and was surprised at +the interest shown by the officer in the recital. When he had +finished he was told that he would be taken to the police +station. "You needn't be afraid, my lad," said the policeman. +"I'll see that the Gerry Society doesn't get you and send you +home, that is, if you think you want to try it here a few days +longer. You can sleep at the station to-night, and the next +morning you can try it again." So to the station they went, and +Archie was, naturally, a little frightened when he saw, for the +first time, the cells, and the terribly severe appearance of all +his surroundings. But he was given a good bed in which to sleep, +and he passed a delightful night, dreaming of the wonderful +adventures which befell him in the city.</p> + +<p>He was not awakened until eight o'clock, and then he found the +good policeman waiting to take him out to breakfast, He expressed +surprise that he should be so kind to him.</p> + +<p>"I always thought that officers were cross and unpleasant," he +said, "but you're not that kind, anyhow."</p> + +<p>"Well," laughed the officer, "we have to be cross very often, +though we're sometimes sorry to be so. But I've taken a fancy to +you, my lad. I like to see a boy who does things. When a boy of +seventeen is willing to come to New York alone, and make his own +way, without friends or influence of any kind, it shows a proper +spirit, and he ought to succeed. I know you'll get along if you +only persevere. I'd advise you to keep on trying."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I'm going to, now," said Archie. "I was very homesick and +discouraged last night, but since I've met you I seem to have +received a new impetus, and I'm ready to make a new +beginning."</p> + +<p>So Archie and the policeman parted friends.</p> + +<p>"Come around to the station to-night if you want a bed, and +you shall be cared for," said the officer, as he turned around +the corner into the busy street, where he was lost in the +crowd.</p> + +<p>Archie walked down the street, hardly knowing what to do +first. He didn't feel like answering any more advertisements in +the newspapers, and he decided to go into a few stores and ask +for work. He was about to do this when he saw before him the +magnificent building of the New York <i>Enterprise.</i> It was a +truly beautiful structure, rising fifteen stories above the +ground, and surmounted with an artistic tower, which could be +seen from almost any part of the city. The home of the city's +greatest daily, it looked as if it were always welcoming +strangers to the metropolis, and Archie felt an irresistible +impulse to enter. Everything connected with a newspaper had for +him the greatest fascination, and he knew he would enjoy seeing +through this wonderful building, which was almost wholly occupied +by the departments of the <i>Enterprise.</i> So he entered the +door, and passed from one floor to another, finally arriving at +the highest floor of all, where were located the editorial rooms +of the <i>Evening Enterprise.</i> All at once a new plan entered +Archie's fertile brain. Why shouldn't he be able to get something +to do on a newspaper? It had always been his greatest ambition to +become a reporter, and here, although he didn't think the editor +would take him in that capacity, he thought he might get some +sort of work. in which he could work himself up.</p> + +<p>There upon the door were the magic words: "Editor of the +<i>Evening enterprise.</i> No Admittance." Archie opened the door +and entered. He knew it would be useless to send in his name. It +was best to see the editor at once, and without ceremony. He was +seated before a large desk, which was littered with papers of +every description, and he was a very pleasant person in +appearance. Archie stood hesitating near the door, and remained +there a minute or two before the editor looked up.</p> + +<p>"Well, my boy, what is it?"</p> + +<p>Archie took courage.</p> + +<p>"I— I want to be a reporter, sir, and I thought it would +do no harm to ask you for such a position, anyhow."</p> + +<p>The distinguished journalist wheeled about in his chair.</p> + +<p>"What!" he exclaimed, "you want to be a reporter. Why, my dear +boy, how old are you?"</p> + +<p>"I'll be eighteen my next birthday," said Archie, "and, sir, +I've had some experiences in the last two weeks, which make me +feel as if I were about five years older than I really am. I've +been through some very trying experiences, sir."</p> + +<p>The editor was interested at once. "Tell me what your +experiences have been," he said, and Archie began, and told him +his whole story; how he had left home to win fame and fortune, +and how he had worked on the farm for a week with Farmer Tinch; +how he had been robbed the night he stayed with the tramps in the +ancient ruins, and how he had finally reached the city. Then he +told him of the night in the lodging-house, of his dish-washing +experience in the restaurant, and how he had been taken from the +street by a policeman the night before, and allowed to sleep in +the station-house. When he had finished the editor had a broad +grin upon his face.</p> + +<p>"By Jove!" he exclaimed, "this is certainly rich stuff. +There's a good story in it, I'll be bound."</p> + +<p>Then, speaking to Archie, he said:</p> + +<p>"Just wait here a minute, my boy, and I'll see if we can't put +some money in your way."</p> + +<p>He pressed a button at the side of his desk, and when a boy +appeared, he told him to bring "Mr. Jones, please, or one of the +other reporters. And tell Jones to bring an artist with him."</p> + +<p>The reporter and the artist soon stood before the editor, who +told them, with great glee, that he had a leading feature for the +next evening edition of the <i>Enterprise.</i> "Just talk to this +boy, Jones, and see if you can't make two good columns on the +front page and two for the inside from his story. I think it's +great, myself. And you Cash," he said, turning to the artist, +"you make a good sketch of the boy."</p> + +<p>Archie could hardly believe his eyes and ears. Just to think +that he was being interviewed, and that his picture was to be in +the paper. It seemed almost too good to be true.</p> + +<p>When the reporter had finished with him, he was taken +down-stairs to the cashier's office and given thirty dollars in +bills. "This will pay you for the interview," said the editor, +"and give you enough to fix up with. Now, to-morrow, you come in +again, and I think I can give you steady employment."</p> + +<p>Oh, how happy Archie was! He went out into the street, and +seemed to fairly walk on air. Then he heard the newsboys crying, +"Extra paper, read about the <i>Enterprise's</i> Boy Reporter." +And when Archie saw the paper, there on the front page was his +picture, together with the story of his "startling +adventures."</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER X.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>LIVING IN COMFORT AGAIN— FEATURED AS "THE BOY +REPORTER."</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>RCHIE</small> often speaks of the day when he visited +the newspaper office for the first time as the happiest day in +all his life. The change from despair and homesickness to the joy +of being appreciated by some one was so rapid that it made his +head fairly swim with the exhilaration of success. With thirty +dollars in his pocket, and the knowledge that he would have +steady employment of the kind he desired on the morrow, he walked +up the Bowery feeling like a prince. He entered the lodging-house +where he had left his bundle of clothing, and so surprised the +clerk by his new appearance that he was invited to remain there +for another night. The shrewd man guessed that some good fortune +must have befallen Archie, or he wouldn't be so happy. But the +one night of misery which he had spent in the squalid hotel was +enough for Archie, and he walked hastily up-town with his bundle, +keeping a sharp lookout for a pleasant place where he might get a +room. In his previous wanderings he had seen several nice houses +with rooms to rent, but now that he wanted a room he found it +difficult to find any of these neighbourhoods. He was anxious to +get settled as quickly as possible, for he wanted to get +everything done to-day, so that to-morrow he could have time to +do anything required of him by the editor of the +<i>Enterprise.</i> He must get a new suit of clothes, be must get +his hair cut, and last, but not least, he must write home to +mother and tell her of his great good fortune.</p> + +<p>Finally, in his wanderings, Archie came to a beautiful square +which was surrounded on every side by business houses and +tenements. But the square itself and the houses on it were very +quaint and very handsome, so that it seemed to be a very oasis in +the desert. The green trees, just a little tinged with the brown +and gold of autumn, reminded Archie of the front yard at home, +and he decided to get a room in one of the houses here if he +could possibly do so.</p> + +<p>It so happened that there was a hall bedroom empty in one of +the best-looking places, and Archie at once engaged it. The price +was more reasonable than he had hoped for, even, and this made +him happy, for as yet he had no idea how much his earnings would +be, and he was anxious to be able to save something to send home, +if he possibly could. The room was nicely furnished, and looked +out upon the fountain, with the green trees, so that it was +highly satisfactory in every respect. It didn't take Archie long +to undo his bundle, and it was a pitiful display that greeted him +when it was opened. The little comb and brush, a piece of soap, a +Testament given him last Christmas by the teacher at Sunday +school, a suit of underwear, and a couple of handkerchiefs. The +whole lot of things hardly filled a corner in one of the bureau +drawers, and Archie realised that he must buy a great many things +within a week or two.</p> + +<p>But before going out to do any shopping, he sat down and wrote +a long letter home, describing his success of the morning, and +telling his mother of the editor's promise to give him regular +employment. He enclosed a copy of the paper with his picture and +the story of his adventures, and it made him very happy to think +of his mother's feelings when she read it all. Then, when he had +finished, he went out to a post-office, and bought a money-order +for ten dollars, which he also enclosed. "I know I can spare it," +he said to himself, "and it will gratify her so much." Then, when +the letter with its contents was safely mailed, he bought himself +a new suit of clothing, and renovated himself in many ways, so +that when he returned to his room in the square it was nearly +dark, and he looked a different boy entirely.</p> + +<p>Before going to bed, he determined to see his policeman +friend, and tell him of his good fortune. "He is probably +expecting me to sleep in the station," Archie thought, "and it +will be a great surprise to him." But when he met the good man, +he found that he had already heard of his success.</p> + +<p>"I bought the <i>Enterprise,</i> and could hardly believe my +eyes," said he, "but I always thought you would find some one to +appreciate your pluck. I'm mighty glad for you, my lad, and you +must always let me know how you are getting along." This Archie +promised to do, and returned to his lodging to sleep.</p> + +<p>The next morning he was on hand at the <i>Enterprise</i> +office before the editor himself was down. The place was quite as +fascinating as it had been on the preceding day, and he found +something new to look at every minute. The reporters at their +desks, several of whom introduced themselves and congratulated +Archie on his perseverance, were a source of great interest to +him, and the copy-boys, running here and there with special copy +for the first edition, gave an air of hustling activity to the +place that was very attractive to this new reporter.</p> + +<p>When the editor came he had already thought of something for +Archie to do. "Now you've been introduced to the public," he +said, "and we want to feature you for a few days. Every one will +be interested in knowing what you are doing, and what is going to +become of you. You must write us an article for the paper to-day, +telling about your experiences since yesterday, about getting a +new suit, and about hunting for a room. And you can tell about +your policeman friend, too."</p> + +<p>This was surprising. Archie couldn't imagine why any one +should be interested in knowing about his daily life, but he sat +down and succeeded in writing a very interesting two columns +about it. He was much surprised that he should be able to write +so easily and so well. Of course he knew that composition and +rhetoric had been his two strongest studies at school, but he had +never realised before that he had any great talent for writing. +When he had finished this article, the editor looked it over, and +said, "That's great. You're all right, my boy. We'll make a great +journalist of you yet," and of course this made Archie very +happy. "Wait until this story is set up," said Mr. Jennings, the +editor, "and I'll see what you can do in the way of correcting +proofs."</p> + +<p>When the proofs came, in a very short time, he hardly knew +what to do with them. But in reading them he discovered several +mistakes, which he lost no time in correcting, and Mr. Jennings +said that he had done very well indeed. "Now you can spend the +day in doing what you please. I would suggest that you go about +New York and have as many strange experiences as possible, so +that to-morrow you can write them up for us. And it will pay you, +by the way, to go out to Coney Island, which is a different place +from any you have seen before. You are sure to see some unusual +things, and in the morning you can bring me in two columns about +it."</p> + +<p>Before leaving, Archie was asked if he needed any money. "You +mustn't hesitate to ask for it, because you can have it as well +to-day as on Saturday." But as he had left several dollars of the +thirty he had received the day before, Archie didn't draw any +more, and he thought it most remarkable that the editor should +have so much money to pay out.</p> + +<p>He had no difficulty in getting a trolley-car to Coney Island, +and, after an hour's riding through Brooklyn streets, he found +himself in the most unique and most delightful place imaginable, +It was a queer-looking town, with great wheels in the air, high +towers, with elevators and innumerable merry-go-rounds, and other +sources of amusement. The noise was something terrific. +Hand-organs, street-pianos, and German bands were all playing at +the same time, while people hurried about from one place to +another, enjoying the hundreds of games and riding the various +scenic railways and carrousels. Archie stood mute with delight at +it all, but before five minutes had passed he had shot the +chutes, and had ridden over a steeplechase which took him through +dark caverns, where dragons glared at him and where electrical +sparks were constantly flying through the air. It was all so new, +so different from anything he had seen before, that he was simply +lost in admiration. He was standing near a theatre, when a short, +dark man touched him on the arm, and said, "Come this way, young +man, and I'll teach you the best game of all."</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XI.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>A DAY AND A NIGHT IN CONEY ISLAND— RAIDING A GAMBLING +DEN.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>RCHIE</small> was at first too much surprised to +answer the man at all, but in a few moments he remembered that he +was now a reporter, and that it was his duty to see all that he +could, and have all the new experiences possible. So he decided +to follow the man, and find out what "the best thing of all" in +Coney Island was like. He was taken through several narrow +alleyways, and finally he found himself in front of a tumble-down +structure, built out directly over the water. It was very modest +in appearance, and everything seemed quiet about the place. The +shades were carefully drawn, and the dark man had to knock three +times before the door was opened and they were permitted to +enter. Inside, Archie found himself in a handsomely furnished +apartment which differed greatly in appearance from the exterior +of the building. There was a rich velvet carpet, mahogany +furniture, and a great many small tables standing about the room. +The place was filled with men, mostly well-dressed, who were +playing various games. Some were dealing cards, others were +twirling wheels with numbers on them, and some were playing games +with chips. It didn't take Archie long to realise that he had +been steered into a gambling den of the worst kind, and he was +immediately on the alert for future developments. He watched +every movement of his new friend, and noticed that he found it +necessary to speak to several of those present in a low +undertone. This didn't worry Archie, because he knew that he was +in no danger except of losing money, and he felt that he could +afford to lose some money, since he was sure to earn more by +writing about the experience for the newspaper.</p> + +<p>So he carefully observed all that was going on, making mental +notes of the peculiarities of the place and the people. When at +last the dark man came up and inquired if he wouldn't like a +chance to earn some money easily, he very readily answered yes, +and the man was overjoyed to find so willing a victim. Then, of +course, Archie was introduced to the mysteries of the famous +roulette wheel, of which he had read so much. Archie was +interested in everything, and didn't mind losing four dollars in +learning so much that was new. He succeeded in getting away when +he had lost this sum, though the man assured him that he couldn't +help winning back all he had lost, and much more, too, if he +would but remain awhile longer. Archie was firm, however, and +passed out into the narrow alleyways again, feeling that he had +learned a great deal through a very small expenditure of money. +He gradually found his way back into the crowded Surf Avenue, +where there were hundreds of things, evidently, which he had not +yet seen. The crowds, too, seemed greater even than before, and +there seemed to be thousands of people arriving every hour from +New York and Brooklyn, over the various street-car and railway +lines, and by the excursion boats landing at the great iron pier. +The noise was still deafening, and every one seemed to be having +a splendid time in every way. "Surely," said Archie to himself, +"no one can feel blue or despondent in such a place as this, +where every one is full of fun, and apparently determined to have +a good time while here." And he felt that he would like to remain +longer, but he knew he should go back again to the city, so that +he might see the editor, and tell him something about what he had +seen and done.</p> + +<p>So again he rode over the great Brooklyn bridge, and stopped +on the other side at the handsome building of the +<i>Enterprise.</i> It made Archie very happy to feel that he was +now a reporter on such a great paper, and he found it hard to +realise that so much good fortune had come to him in such a short +time. He met reporters in the various hallways, and all of them +spoke to him pleasantly, so that he began to feel that he had +never been thrown with such pleasant men before.</p> + +<p>He had no difficulty in seeing the editor this time, and found +him a ready listener to the story of his Coney Island +experiences. He insisted on Archie's describing all the men he +had seen in the gambling den, and then asked him if he could +identify them, if necessary, and also if he would be able to find +the place again. Archie gave good descriptions of most of the +men, and said that he could take any one to the place at any +time. The editor lost himself in thought for a few minutes, and +at the end of that time he rang for a copy-boy. "Ring for a +messenger boy," he said, "and when he arrives come for a note +which I want him to take to Mr. Pultzer's house." Archie stared +with amazement at Mr. Jennings, and waited for further +information. He wondered what was going to be done. He knew that +Mr. Pultzer owned the newspaper, and he knew that it must be +something important that Mr. Jennings wanted to write him about. +He wasn't long left in the dark, and he felt very proud that Mr. +Jennings should have confidence enough in him to tell him about +his plans. "I think you have discovered something which will +prove very important to the paper and the public," he said to +Archie. "We have suspected for a long time that gambling dens +have been flourishing in Coney Island, but up to now we have not +been able to locate any of them. Now that you have found one, we +hope to arouse public opinion to the danger there is in such +places, and we hope to inspire a reform movement which will be +strong enough to wipe them out entirely. I will hear from Mr. +Pultzer in a short time, and then I want you to go down to the +Island with some plain-clothes detectives and two other +reporters. And I don't mind telling you now that there will be a +good sum in it for you if you succeed in arresting any of the +leaders of this gang. You can be excused for an hour now, if +there's anything you want to do."</p> + +<p>Full of enthusiasm over the coming adventure and his part in +it, Archie hurried out to a quick-lunch counter and bought +himself a light meal, for he feared that he would have to remain +at Coney Island through the evening. Then, when he had finished, +he returned to the newspaper office, where he spent some time in +getting acquainted with some of the reporters who were working on +the <i>Morning Enterprise.</i> He found them all very pleasant to +meet, and he learned a great many helpful things from their +conversation. The older men were able to give him many pointers +concerning things that he should, and should not, do. While he +was in the office of the <i>Morning Enterprise</i> Mr. Jennings +came in, and, taking him along into the private room of the +managing editor, introduced him to Mr. Van Bunting, who was the +editorial head of the morning edition. Then Mr. Jennings told of +the new scheme, and Mr. Van Bunting entered into it so thoroughly +that before an hour three detectives, two reporters, and Archie +were on their way to the Island.</p> + +<p>Once arrived in the resort, which was as noisy and bright as +in the afternoon, they all made a bee-line for the gambling den, +headed by Archie, who surprised the others with his certainty and +confidence as to which was the right direction. In a very few +minutes they all stood in front of the dilapidated structure +built out over tide-water, and Archie heard one of the detectives +say that the place looked "mighty suspicious like." He gave three +knocks just as the dark man had done in the afternoon, and in a +few minutes the door was cautiously opened and a head made its +appearance. The detectives lost no time in pushing their way in, +amid great confusion and cries of fear, and it seemed only a few +seconds until all the inmates were huddled in a corner, covered +with pistols, and wailing in fear, when they weren't cursing +through anger. Then they were all arrested and taken to the +police station, where they were all refused bail, and placed in +cells overnight. Then the reporters returned to the office of the +<i>Enterprise,</i> where Archie was told by Mr. Van Bunting to +write the story of his experience for the morning paper. This was +his first work for the morning edition, and he took great pains +to make his descriptions as complete as possible, and the details +as accurate as he knew how to make them. And his hard work was +rewarded by words of praise from the managing editor when he +turned the copy in for editing.</p> + +<p>Tired from his hard day's work, Archie then went up-town to +the quiet square in which he had his home, and he was glad to get +to bed. He had been nervous and excited all day, and found it +difficult to sleep, but finally the tired eyelids lay quietly +over the tired eyes, and Archie was dreaming of the cool and +pleasant arbour of grapes at home, and of how the Hut Club was +holding a special meeting there to devise ways and means of +welcoming home their distinguished fellow member, Mr. Archie +Dunn, who had achieved such great success in the city.</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding his tired feeling, Archie was up early the +next morning, and out at the corner to buy an <i>Enterprise.</i> +He hastily turned the pages, trying to find the story of his +Coney Island adventures, but he looked in vain. It wasn't visible +anywhere. He was about to think that it had not been thought +worth while printing when he noticed on the front page, in large +letters, "The Boy Reporter's Great Discovery," and then followed +the complete account, just as he had written it. This was the +best thing yet. Just to think that his story had been considered +important enough to print upon the front page! He could hardly +believe it. Surely he had made great strides, and Archie began to +realise that it is not experience that is most needed in +journalism, but something to write about. "I have simply been +fortunate in finding some interesting things," he said, to +himself, and then, after a light breakfast in a quaint Italian +restaurant around the corner, he hurried down-town to the office +of the newspaper.</p> + +<p>Archie was beginning to feel, by now, that he had worked for a +long time upon the paper, and as he had become acquainted with +almost every one connected with it, this wasn't a strange feeling +for him to have. And it was evident, too, that the editors +intended to keep him busy for some time to come, and Archie +realised that he was in newspaper work to stay, for a time, at +least. And he was overjoyed at the prospect, for he found the +whole business as fascinating and as interesting as he had +expected it would be.</p> + +<p>Mr. Jennings, of the evening edition, was at the office when +Archie arrived, and sent for him to come in. "Here is fifty +dollars," he said, "for your work of yesterday, and you will have +more coming to you if these men are convicted. I want to +congratulate you on what you have done so far. Come in this +afternoon, and I think Mr. Van Bunting will have a new plan for +you."</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XII.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>A SUCCESSFUL REPORTER— THE EDITOR DECIDES TO SEND HIM AS +CORRESPONDENT TO THE PHILIPPINES— LEAVING NEW YORK— IN +CHICAGO.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>T</small> three o'clock in the afternoon Archie was +seated in Mr. Van Bunting's office, together with Mr. Jennings +and several of the chief members of the editorial staffs of both +editions of the paper. The editors had spread out before them, on +the large table, several maps, and most of them were busily +engaged in making notes on little paper pads. All the time, +however, an excited conversation was being carried on, for some +editors wanted Archie to proceed to the Philippines one way, and +some thought that the better plan would be for him to go by some +other route. But the important fact with Archie was that he was +really going to be sent to the Philippines as a war +correspondent, and that he was going to start very shortly. He +had called on Mr. Van Bunting early in the afternoon, and had +then learned for the first time what the new plan was to be. When +the managing editor asked him how he would like to go to the +Philippines, Archie could scarcely reply, so delighted was he +with the brilliant prospect before him. He managed to stammer out +a few words, though, in spite of his surprise. "I always thought +war correspondents were selected from the most experienced men in +journalism," he said, but Mr. Van Bunting only laughed. "That's +what we have already done, my boy," he said, "and so far none of +our distinguished correspondents have sent us a thing worth +printing that we didn't already know. You see they can't send any +more to us in the way of news than we can get from the War +Department in Washington, and most of these men are too old fogy +to send us anything out of the ordinary line of war +correspondence. Now, what we want is for you to go over there and +have some adventures, and write us something which will be +different from what we have had before from the Philippines. We +are sending you, because you have had no experience at such work, +and will be sure to send us something unusual, and that is what +we want. If you can only do as well in the tropics as you have +done here in New York, we shall be more than satisfied with your +work. I am sorry that I won't have time to give you very complete +instructions, but perhaps it will be as well. And now some of the +men are waiting outside to come in and talk this matter over, so +we'll have them in now."</p> + +<p>And Archie found himself in the midst of an editorial +conference, during which many things were discussed. The meeting +lasted more than two hours, and finally it was decided that +Archie should travel from New York to San Francisco, and go from +there to Manila on the army transport which was to sail on the +twenty-fifth of the month. This meant that he would have to leave +the city in two days' time, and Archie announced himself as quite +willing to do this, as he had few preparations to make. The +editors gave him many instructions about how he was to address +his correspondence, and how he should proceed in the event of +finding it necessary to send despatches by cable. And at the end +of the conference he felt that he knew all that he would need to +know, so that he could start off without fear of not being able +to fulfil his mission. As far as Archie could understand it, his +chief instructions as to duty were to the effect that he must +have as many experiences as possible of as many different kinds, +and that he must write about them in a perfectly natural way, +just as if he were writing a letter to the folks at home. And he +thought, of course, that this would be very easy to do.</p> + +<p>Mr. Van Bunting gave him a letter of credit for six hundred +dollars, which amount, he said, would probably be sufficient to +pay his expenses while he was in the Philippines, and he also +gave him a cheque for three hundred dollars, which was intended +to pay the expense of getting to Manila. "Of course," said Mr. +Van Bunting, "you can spend as much or as little of this as you +please, and if you need more, and we find that the venture is +paying us, why, we will send it on demand." Archie was so +overcome with the knowledge that he possessed nine hundred +dollars, that he could hardly thank the editor enough, and he +made up his mind that he would spend as little as possible of the +sum, and bring back part of it to Mr. Van Bunting upon his +return. He couldn't imagine how it would be possible for him to +spend so much money, and he felt that, after some of his +experiences since he left home, he ought to be able to economise +in many ways where other reporters wouldn't know how to save at +all.</p> + +<p>When the two days were up Archie had made all his preparation, +and was ready to leave New York for Manila. He had sent a long +letter home to his mother, telling her of his great good fortune, +and enclosing a cheque for a hundred dollars, which she was to +spend while he was gone. He told her that he would send her more +money from time to time, and felt very proud as he mailed the +letter. He told her, too, that if at any time she didn't hear +from him on time, she could write to Mr. Van Bunting, and he +would let her know of his whereabouts. This was something which +Mr. Van Bunting had very thoughtfully advised him to do. "Your +mother is sure to worry if the mails are overdue," he had said, +"and if she writes to me, I will always be able to tell her of +your whereabouts, for we can hear of you through our other +correspondents, if not from your own despatches." So Archie felt +that his mother shouldn't worry, since he was such a fortunate +boy in so many ways.</p> + +<p>The night before leaving he took a long farewell walk up +Broadway. Everything was bright with light, and there was, as +usual, a great crowd of pleasure-seekers on the sidewalks. It was +all as fascinating as ever to Archie, and he felt sorry that he +was to leave it so soon. New York had begun to grow on him, as it +grows on any one living there for any length of time, who is in a +position to appreciate the city's attractions. He felt that he +would almost rather be on Broadway than in the Philippines, but +of course he forgot this feeling when he remembered the +confidence which Mr. Van Bunting had reposed in him by sending +him upon such an important mission. So, after he had passed all +the bright theatres and restaurants, he turned down a quiet side +street and returned to his lodging, so that he might have a good +night's rest before starting on his long journey.</p> + +<p>At seven in the morning he was up again, and at nine o'clock +he was bidding farewell to his many friends in the editorial +rooms of the <i>Evening Enterprise.</i> Every one congratulated +him upon his great good luck in getting such a chance to +distinguish himself, and when they had done telling him that he +had a great future before him, Archie felt happier than ever +before in all his life.</p> + +<p>The train left the Grand Central Station at one o'clock, and +Mr. Jennings went with him to the station to see him well started +upon the journey. "You may be sure we are all much interested in +you, Archie," he said, as the train was leaving, "and we shall +look forward anxiously to your safe return." These words made +Archie very glad, for it cheered him to know that at least one of +the editors liked him for himself as well as for what he could +do.</p> + +<p>The Southwestern Limited seemed to fairly fly along the banks +of the beautiful Hudson, and everything was so delightful that +Archie could scarcely believe that only a week or two before he +had been walking along country roads, anxious to reach New York, +that he might become an office boy. Every thing in this train was +as perfect as modern ingenuity could make it, and there was no +lack of interesting things to be examined, when Archie tired of +the landscape. Then, when the train had been two hours out of New +York, he discovered that the famous president of this great +railway system was aboard, and, mustering up his courage, he +determined to introduce himself. He had long been anxious to see +this famous after-dinner orator and statesman, and here was a +chance which might not come soon again. So he went back to the +drawing-room, and found the great man to be quite as pleasant as +he was interesting, and Archie was asked to seat himself and tell +something about his experiences since leaving home. Everything he +said was listened to with great interest, and this distinguished +wit seemed to find many of the adventures very funny indeed. "You +have certainly had some wonderful experiences," he said, when +Archie had finished, "and I can appreciate your anxiety to leave +school. I had that desire myself when I was a boy of about +fifteen, but my father succeeded in making me change my opinion +on the subject, and without much argument, unless you can call an +ox-team and a stony pasture an argument. I had been asking to +stay at home from school for a long time. I said that I was too +old to be sitting there with a lot of girls and some younger +boys, and that I wanted to work. Finally, my father said that I +could stay at home if I cared to, and that he would let me work +on the farm for a time. I was overjoyed, of course, at the +prospect of staying out of school.</p> + +<p>"The next morning I was awakened at four o'clock, and had to +swallow my breakfast in a hurry, because I was late, my father +said. Then he took me out to the barn and ordered me to hitch up +the ox-team, and when this was done he took me out to a pasture +lot and told me to pick up all the boulders there. Well, I picked +up boulders all day long, and by evening my back and arms were so +sore I could hardly move them. I was too tired to eat supper, and +was soon asleep in bed. When my father awoke me at four the next +morning, I told him to let me alone and that I was going back to +school. After that I was content to stay in school, and said +nothing more about leaving until I had finished the course and +was ready to go to college."</p> + +<p>And Archie thought it very queer that such a famous man should +have had such experiences when a boy. He remained in the +drawing-room for more than an hour, and when he left he felt +perfectly sure that he had been talking with the most charming +man in the world.</p> + +<p>The train sped on and on, and when daylight came the next +morning they were passing through Northern Ohio. Early in the +afternoon they reached a great smoky metropolis, spread out for +miles over the plains. Archie knew that this must be Chicago, and +he decided, as this was Saturday, and the steamer wouldn't leave +San Francisco until the next Friday, that he would have time to +remain here over Sunday. So he left the train at the station in +Pacific Avenue, and, Finding a hotel near the station, he started +out to see something of the city famous for its dirt and for the +World's Fair, two widely different things.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XIII.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>SAN FRANCISCO— THE TRANSPORT GONE— WORKING HIS WAY +TO HONOLULU BY PEELING VEGETABLES ON A PACIFIC LINER— THE +CAPITAL OF HAWAII.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>RCHIE</small> found Chicago to be so widely different +from New York that everything he saw was new and interesting to +him. In the afternoon he managed to see something of the +congested business section of the city, the tall office +buildings, the great stores, and the famous Board of Trade. It +was all very fine, he thought, but still it wasn't nearly so +fascinating to him as New York had been on the first day he +visited it. "Chicago seems so very much like some great town," he +explained to the hotel clerk in the evening. "I feel as if I were +not in a great city at all, because there are not the evidences +of a large and wealthy population that we have everywhere in New +York." Archie spoke of New York as if he had lived there always, +and found much to criticise in Chicago. But toward evening he +went up to Lincoln Park and the beautiful North Shore, and he +felt that there was nothing more beautiful in New York than this +magnificent park, and this handsome Lake Shore Drive, with its +great houses whose lawns reached down almost to the lake itself. +On the South Side of the city, too, he found some handsome +streets and residences, but there was always that feeling of +being in some rapidly growing town. It wasn't hard for Archie to +realise that there were older houses in his native town than +could be found anywhere in the great city of Chicago.</p> + +<p>The greatest difference between Chicago and New York was to be +noticed in the evening. Instead of the brilliantly lighted +thoroughfares of upper Broadway and Twenty-third and +Thirty-fourth Streets, he found but one street in Chicago which +was at all illuminated, and the illuminations there were chiefly +signs in front of dime museums. The streets, too, were not so +crowded, and Archie almost longed that he could be back on +Broadway, if only for a little while.</p> + +<p>On Sunday he found Chicago to be a more noisy city than he had +ever been in before on that day, and he found that the people +made good use of their one weekly holiday. All places of +amusement were open, and everything was running in "full +blast."</p> + +<p>The parks seemed to be very popular, indeed, and there were +numerous water excursions upon Lake Michigan, to Milwaukee, St. +Joe, and various other neighbouring cities. The street-cars were +crowded all day long, many of them taking people to a Sunday game +of baseball at the Athletic Park. All of this was very +interesting and very new to Archie, but it didn't make him +anxious to remain in Chicago any longer than Monday morning, so +on that day he took the limited train for the Pacific Coast, for +he had determined not to stop off again until he reached +Denver.</p> + +<p>Days of weary travel over a level, uninteresting stretch of +ground followed the departure of the train from Chicago, and had +not Archie found some interesting persons to talk with he would +have been very weary long before reaching Denver. As it was, he +managed to pass the time very pleasantly until the train entered +Colorado, and after that he found much that was new to look at +until he reached Denver. Here he remained for half a day, just +long enough to see something of the city and a little of the +neighbouring country. Then, taking a train for San Francisco, he +reached that city on Thursday afternoon, and immediately began to +make arrangements for sailing. He found, to his great +disappointment, that the army transport had sailed the previous +day, contrary to the expectations of the editors, and of the War +Department itself, until the arrival of important despatches from +Manila, which made it necessary to start the transport at once +with supplies of ammunition. Archie hardly knew what to do. He +had not anticipated anything like this, and could scarcely think +of any plan for a time, but, finally, he proved himself equal to +the emergency. He went to the naval agent and asked him when the +transport would be due at Honolulu, and then he ascertained that +a passenger steamer sailing for that port on Saturday would reach +the destination three days sooner than the transport, so that by +taking the liner he would have three extra days in Honolulu, and +would be able to reach Manila on schedule time, after all. He at +once decided that this was the thing for him to do, and as soon +as he thought of taking the steamer it occurred to him that he +might possibly be able to work his way to Honolulu, instead of +paying the regular passenger fare, which he knew was high. So he +went down to the great docks, and, after interviewing the second +steward, he approached the chief steward himself, and asked if +there wasn't something that he could do aboard the ship to earn +his passage. The chief steward was thoughtful for a time, and +finally said, "Well, yes, I believe there is. We haven't any one +to peel vegetables yet, and if you think you care to do that work +I guess we can fix you up all right." Archie didn't wait to +consider whether peeling vegetables was hard work or not. He was +too glad to have a position of any kind aboard ship to be +particular about what his work was like, so he told the steward +that he was willing to take the place. "Well, be on hand at about +eight in the morning, and we'll see that you get to +Honolulu."</p> + +<p>Archie was overjoyed at his good management. "I am going to +save about a hundred dollars," he said to himself, "and I will +have this money to send home to mother." The rest of the +afternoon and the evening he spent in going about San Francisco, +and he found it to be more like New York than any city he had yet +seen. There was the same cosmopolitan crowd on the main +thoroughfares, and the same foreign districts here and there +throughout the city. He found a great deal to interest him, +especially at the Presidio, where everything connected with the +army monopolised his attention. He made friends with many of the +soldiers who were waiting to be sent to the Philippines, and +hoped, on leaving, that he would meet some of them there, but he +hardly expected that he would meet some of them in such a strange +manner as it was his fate to do in Luzon.</p> + +<p>After a good night's rest he was on hand early at the great +steamer, where there was such a scene of bustle and confusion as +he had never seen before, not even in New York. There was a +throng of men with trucks who were loading the late freight, and +there was a constant din of noisy voices, which, combined with +the shrieks of escaping steam, made it impossible to carry on a +conversation. Archie hurried aboard to find the steward, who +immediately took him into the galley and introduced him to the +cook, a large, fat Frenchman, with small, blue eyes set far back +in his head. He seemed to be a pleasant man, and Archie thought +that he would like him very much.</p> + +<p>"Well, does ze youngster vant to vork, eh! Eef he do, I say +you pare zis potate for dinee as quick you can." And the fellow +pointed to a great bag of potatoes and a paring-knife. "Now you +sit zere in da corner," continued the cook, "and keep out uf my +vay." Archie found a stool and sat down, and, having brought an +apron with him, he put it on and began work. The cook watched him +closely, so that Archie soon learned to pare the potatoes very +nicely, and of course he was able to get along faster and faster +as he became more and more experienced. He managed, through great +effort, to get the bag finished in time for dinner, or luncheon, +as it was called on the bill of fare, and then he soon had to +begin on other vegetables, which were to be served at the more +complete evening meal. There were more potatoes, and some turnips +and apples as well, to be prepared, and it kept the boy busy all +the afternoon, cleaning as hard as he could, and never seeming to +get done. The cook urged him always to hurry, and seemed +determined to have everything ready on time. And Archie began to +realise that he was working under a rather severe master.</p> + +<p>He was again successful in getting the vegetables finished in +time for the evening meal, and then he had an idea that he might +be allowed to rest for awhile, but he soon realised his mistake. +He was advised to begin work on the potatoes for breakfast if he +didn't want to get up at two o'clock in the morning and pare +them, so once more he took up the knife and began to clean and +scrape. It was ten o'clock before he had finished, and he found +himself too tired to spend any time on the after-deck with the +crew, but went at once down into the small, stuffy room where he +was to sleep with some of the stewards. His back ached from +bending over, and his hands were all sore from being scraped.</p> + +<p>Things were not very pleasant in this bedroom, but poor Archie +was glad enough to be able to lie down on the hard straw tick and +go to sleep. He slept soundly until he was awakened at four +o'clock in the morning by the second cook, who ordered him +up-stairs to work. There was no time to wash, and no place where +he could wash, so the boy was obliged to go up just as he was, +much as he disliked doing so. And once up-stairs there were +various chores which were waiting for him in the galley, so that +he was kept running until breakfast was served. And then it was +time to begin paring vegetables again. This turned out to be the +invariable daily programme, and Archie became rather discouraged. +Had it not been for the thought that by doing this he was saving +money to send home, he would have been miserable indeed, but this +idea kept him hopeful. He was seasick, too, for a time, and was +obliged to keep cleaning vegetables in the galley during the +whole period of his suffering. The days when he was ill in this +way were the most disagreeable ones of the voyage, and Archie +often described afterward his feelings as he sat peeling potatoes +with a bucket standing beside him. Each night he slept like a +log, and each morning he was obliged to get up at four o'clock +and start work again. It was the same thing day after day, +tiresome and monotonous, so that Archie wasn't sorry when the +beautiful island hove in sight, and they anchored in the +picturesque bay of Honolulu.</p> + +<p>Once at Honolulu, Archie's term of service on board the liner +was over, and he was glad, indeed, to get ashore, where he +learned that the transport had not yet arrived, but was expected +in two or three days' time. These two or three days Archie +determined to spend in sightseeing, and he spent his time to +excellent advantage in visiting every quarter of Honolulu and +seeing every side of life in the Hawaiian capital. He found it a +delightful place. There was much that was interesting to see, the +people were pleasant to meet, and the climate was perfect. He was +almost sorry when he learned that the transport had anchored in +the bay!</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XIV.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>THE VOYAGE ON THE TRANSPORT— A STORM AT SEA— +ARRIVAL IN MANILA.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>T<small>HE</small> transport did not remain long at Honolulu, +and before leaving Archie had several things which he wanted to +do. In the first place, he felt that he ought to write the story +of his experiences so far, and send it to Mr. Van Bunting; so he +did sit down and describe in detail his experiences at cleaning +vegetables on board the Pacific liner. He wasn't sure whether +this was anything that Mr. Van Bunting would care to print, but +he decided to send it on, anyhow. He would have been surprised +had he observed the enthusiasm with which this letter was read in +the <i>Enterprise</i> office a month later. He would have been no +longer in any doubt as to whether it was anything worth printing +had he read the <i>Enterprise</i> of the following day, when the +letter appeared on the second page as one of the chief features +of the paper.</p> + +<p>Before leaving, too, Archie sent a long, cheerful letter home, +saying nothing of his being seasick on board the liner, or of his +having had to work so hard. He devoted his letter to telling of +the many interesting things he had seen, and of his bright +prospects for becoming a successful newspaper man. He wrote a +shorter letter to Jack Sullivan, which was intended to be read to +all the members of the Hut Club, for Archie felt that it was no +more than right that they should know something of his success. +He found it very hard to realise, away off here in Honolulu, that +he had ever been a member of the club, and that he had ever lived +in tents behind the barn. He felt very manly now, and his boyhood +seemed far away behind him, so far away that he now felt like a +man of twenty-five rather than like a boy of eighteen. He was +beginning to realise that age is not always governed by years +alone, but that experience does much to make one old.</p> + +<p>As soon as the transport had anchored in the bay, Archie went +aboard to present his credentials to the commanding officer. He +found the general very pleasant to meet, and a very appreciative +listener as he told of his scheme for overtaking the transport. +The officer was surprised, of course, that such a young fellow +should be going to the islands as correspondent, but the things +he said were very encouraging to Archie, "I tell you what," the +general remarked, at one time during the conversation, "I believe +that a young fellow like Dunn, here, can find out a great many +more interesting things than an older man could ever discover. +You see the youngster has ambition and energy on his side, and +ambition and energy are two mighty powerful things when they're +combined. I'd hate to buck up against 'em myself." The other +officers agreed with the general in this remark, and Archie began +to feel that, after all, he might not have such a hard time +finding interesting things to write about as he had expected.</p> + +<p>The transport remained in port but one day, and in thirty +hours after her arrival Archie found himself sailing again over +the blue Pacific. The weather, for a few days, was almost +perfect. A cloudless sky overhead, a warm breeze from the west, +and a smooth sea made things very pleasant aboard ship, and +Archie began to realise that there are times when it is +delightful to be at sea. The vessel was very much overcrowded +with troops, and the sleeping quarters were but little more +pleasant than aboard the liner. Archie shared a stateroom with +three sergeants, and they managed to have a lively time during +the voyage. They played games, told stories, and slept in the +afternoons, but all this, of course, grew rather tiresome after a +time, and the voyage was becoming monotonous, when there came a +severe storm which kept things moving for three days.</p> + +<p>None of the navigating officers had expected a gale, so that +when it came every one was taken wholly by surprise, and it came +so suddenly that there was no time at all for preparation. The +sky became quickly dark one afternoon about three o'clock, and +soon the whole horizon was a mass of great black clouds, which +every moment seemed to come lower and lower until they directly +overhung the ship. There was great excitement aboard the ship. +Officers hurried here and there shouting orders to their men, and +the cavalrymen rushed about in a frenzy of haste, trying to +devise means to save their horses, most of which were stabled +upon the deck. Archie looked on in breathless interest, and was +surprised to find that he wasn't at all frightened. He even found +himself making mental notes of the scene, so that he could send +the story of it all to Mr. Van Bunting when he reached +Manila.</p> + +<p>There was but little time for rushing about, and it was soon +evident that the horses would many of them be lost, because there +seemed to be absolutely no way of saving them if the waves were +high enough to break over the bulwarks. The storm soon broke in +great fury, beginning with a fierce wind which swept the waves +before it. There was but little rain, and the waves rose higher +and higher with every minute, until the heavy ship began to roll +and pitch in a frightful way, so that the soldiers began to +think, some of them, that she would certainly sink. Finally the +waves were so high they dashed themselves over the decks, and no +one was allowed above the gangways. The cries of the poor horses, +as they felt themselves being washed overboard, were frightful to +hear, and many a trooper cried himself as he thought of his horse +foundering in the raging sea without. Before many minutes all was +as dark as night, though the watch pointed to but four o'clock, +and all lights were burning below deck. It was impossible to keep +a light above, for no lantern could burn in such a storm.</p> + +<p>The waves began gradually to subside at ten o'clock at night, +and a slow steady rain came, which soon calmed the sea to a great +extent. As soon as it was safe to go above deck, it was found +that more than a hundred horses had been lost overboard, and that +one mast had been carried away. Down below nearly every man was +in his bunk, for there was scarcely a person who was not seasick, +and most of them wouldn't have cared if the ship had gone down +with all aboard, such was their feeling of despondency. Archie +was as sick as any of the others, but was able to make notes of +occurrences just the same. And when he grew better the next day, +he wrote an excellent account of the storm to send to the +<i>Enterprise</i> on his arrival in Manila.</p> + +<p>After this rough weather experience, every man aboard was +anxious to reach port, and when, after many more days, the Bay of +Cavité was reached, a great cheer went up from a thousand +throats, for everyone was overjoyed at the sight of land.</p> + +<p>The transport came to anchor off the forts which had once been +Spain's, and it was announced that no one would be allowed to +land for two days, until advices could be had from Manila and the +interior of the island. This was very trying for Archie, being +obliged to sit on deck for two whole days, looking at a shore +which seemed very inviting, in spite of the general dilapidated +appearance of the various buildings and docks. Everything looked +different from anything he had seen before, and the boy felt that +he could hardly wait to be allowed to explore some of those +streets which were so narrow, and those houses which were built +in such a peculiar fashion.</p> + +<p>Finally, the permission came for the troops to land, and +Archie received the permission of the general to remain with them +as long as he wanted to do so. And as he had no other plans, the +young correspondent decided that it would be a good plan for him +to stay right with one of these regiments, for the time being at +any rate. He knew that they would be likely to be sent to the +front immediately, and the front seemed the place for him to +be.</p> + +<p>And then he was already acquainted with many of the men, and +with the colonel, and he realised that this would be an advantage +to him in his work. So he made his plans to keep with them.</p> + +<p>First they went to Manila, where they remained for a week. The +quaint old city was a veritable fairy-land of wonders to Archie, +who had never before been in a city so ancient, and here there +were so many unusual things to be seen. There seemed to be +absolutely no end to the winding streets, delightful old houses, +and interesting churches, and the boy spent many days in +exploring every corner of the island capital. The colonel warned +him several times that he must look out for robbers and other +suspicious characters, but Archie laughed at his fears. But the +colonel was right, as he found later on.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XV.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>ARCHIE STARTS OUT ON AN EXPLORING TOUR AND HAS SOME STRANGE +ADVENTURES AMONG THE NATIVES— SEIZED BY THE REBELS.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>T<small>HE</small> days passed very quickly in Manila. the +regiment was quartered in an old palace which had once been used +as a residence by the Spanish governors of the islands, and +Archie remained in the palace with them. There was very little to +do while they were there. Each morning there were anxious +inquiries for news from the front, but there was always the same +discouraging reply that no trace had yet been found of the +fleeing Aguinaldo. The men were gradually becoming disheartened +at the long wait, and there were frequent statements by the +officers that Aguinaldo would soon be caught if they were sent +out after him. The dissatisfaction with the general in command +grew stronger every day, and at last things reached a point where +there was very little loyalty and patriotism displayed among the +troops.</p> + +<p>The drilling was continued, however, by order of the colonel, +and every morning the troops marched out to a public square near +the palace, and went through the same old manoeuvres which they +had practised for months past. And it was harder for them to +drill each week. At first they were willing enough to work, for +there was then some prospect of their being able to use their +knowledge in a fight, but now it was beginning to seem that they +would simply remain in this old palace for a few months longer, +and then go back again to San Francisco. With this opinion in +their hearts, it is not to be wondered at that most of the men +became slouchy and careless in their manners and dress, or that +even the officers themselves became disgusted at the long wait +for marching orders.</p> + +<p>Things had been going on in this way for a long time, when +Archie made up his mind that it was time he was hustling about +and finding something to write about which would be interesting +to readers of the <i>Enterprise.</i> He had sent two articles +describing his life with the soldiers in the old palace, but he +knew that he ought to find something more exciting, and more like +his first articles. So, after much thought, he decided that a +good plan would be for him to take a little trip into the +interior of the island, to see whether he could find any traces +of the insurgents. The colonel had held all along for a month, +now, that the Filipinos were probably all about Manila, and still +he couldn't get the permission of the general in command to go +out and investigate the matter. The colonel figured that it would +be an easy thing for the insurgents to come as near to the city +as they cared to now, for Lawton and Wheeler were far away in the +interior after Aguinaldo, and the troops in Manila were quietly +drilling, and eating, and sleeping, with no thought of doing +anything else. This line of argument seemed very reasonable to +Archie, and he volunteered to go out and see if he could make any +discoveries. The colonel assured him that he would be in no +danger, even if he were caught by the rebels, for they would +never suspect a boy of Archie's age and size of being a spy. So +the lad felt no fear at all, and made what few preparations there +were to be made before starting. He secured a knapsack from the +commissary officer, and in this he placed what few belongings he +wanted to take with him, together with his note-books and some +provisions for the trip. Then he secured a small pistol, which he +carried in his hip pocket, and he was disappointed because the +colonel would not allow him to carry a rifle. And when he had +everything ready he said good-bye to his friends in the regiment, +and departed from the palace amid a multitude of cheers. At the +last moment the colonel tried to dissuade him from starting, for +fear he might meet with some accident, but Archie was determined +to make the attempt.</p> + +<p>It was his plan not to go farther than fifty miles in the +interior, for he thought that if he found no traces of the rebels +in that distance there would be little use in going farther into +the forest, for, it would be almost impossible to find them +there. So he set out gaily upon his trip of exploration, and +Archie couldn't remember when he had been so happy before, save +on that day when he first visited the office of the +<i>Enterprise.</i> This adventure was exciting enough to please +the wildest boy in America, and Archie could imagine how envious +the other boys would be if they could but know the trip he was +having. It had an official air to it, too, for had not the +colonel been most anxious, in the beginning, that he should go, +and did he not say that he would reward him handsomely if he were +successful in locating any of the insurgents, or in proving that +he had been right when he said they were near Manila? It was all +as perfect an adventure as Archie could have imagined. He could +not have planned a better one if he had been able to select any +trip he could think of.</p> + +<p>He planned that it would take him at least three days to walk +fifty miles, and perhaps longer, for the roads were not very good +in some places. He knew that he would find many villages and +towns along the way, too, for the island was thinly settled in +this neighbourhood. So if he were obliged to rest, he would never +be at a loss for a place to get a bed. Archie couldn't help +thinking, as he walked along the road outside Manila, this first +morning, that he might find a body of the insurgents in +possession of one of these towns. They were very bold, he had +heard, and they probably knew that there were no American troops +anywhere in the neighbourhood, outside the city of Manila itself. +And, knowing this, he knew they wouldn't hesitate to camp at the +very gates of the city, for they were marvellously successful in +getting away into the interior whenever an American force made +its appearance.</p> + +<p>As he thought of this possibility, Archie couldn't help being +a little fearful of what might happen to him should he fall into +the hands of the insurgents, and he began to wonder if he had not +been a little foolhardy, after all, in starting off on such a +wild-goose chase. "But I will have something new to send Mr. Van +Bunting about the interior towns," he said to himself, "and if I +am captured, why, I will have a great deal to write about when I +am released." This thought made the lad happy again, and he +trudged along the road with as much vim and energy as he had +displayed during those weary days when he was walking to New York +to make his fortune. And it was a much more interesting country +in which to walk than the New York State counties had been. The +vegetation was rich and luxuriant everywhere, palm-trees, vines, +and flowers growing in profusion all along the road. In every +dooryard, in front of every hut, there grew what seemed to Archie +a veritable fairy bower of the most richly coloured flowers in +existence. And they were growing, apparently, without +cultivation. He had seen nothing like them before, even in +California, and he longed to pluck some of them to send home, if +they had only been wax instead of nature's blossoms. As it was, +he kept his arms filled with them for awhile, but after a time he +grew tired carrying them, and was obliged to drop them by the +roadside.</p> + +<p>The country looked as if it might have been very prosperous at +one time. There were plantations laid out in excellent fashion, +and the soil seemed rich and fertile. But instead of growing +crops, and storehouses filled with spices and coffee, there was +desolation everywhere, and it was easy to see that the Spaniards +had determined to leave but little behind them for the Yankees. +Every other farmhouse and wayside hut was deserted, their +occupants having gone, apparently, to join Aguinaldo, and the +whole country, outside the towns, seemed to be wholly deserted +and left to grow up in weeds and tangled vines.</p> + +<p>The sun was warm, the sky was a perfect blue, and it seemed a +delightful day in every way. But it made Archie sad to walk +through a district which had been made so desolate, and he hadn't +walked many hours before he wished that he might soon reach a +town, where he could find some life, and where he could remain +overnight. For by the middle of the afternoon he was tired +walking, and made up his mind that fifteen miles was enough for +any one to do in one day. But he was obliged to keep on walking +for two hours longer before he reached a village, and the great +sun was just sinking behind the blue hills in the distance when +he entered the one main village street, which was long and +narrow, winding in and out among the cabins and huts, as if it +had been laid out after the houses were built, for the +convenience of the people. It was a poor excuse for a public +thoroughfare. There had probably been a pavement of some sort at +one time, but now the street was a mass of rubbish of every sort, +straw, dust, old bricks, and bits of stone being thrown together +in every rut, so that it was exceedingly difficult to walk along +with any comfort.</p> + +<p>There was no life visible in the settlement. Almost every hut +had its shades drawn at the windows, and there was absolutely no +one to be seen in the street. As he passed down the road, Archie +could catch occasional glimpses of black eyes staring at him +through a lattice, or he could hear some muttered word as he +walked close to a window. From these signs he knew that he was +observed, and he felt very much embarrassed as he continued his +walk down this deserted lane, for he felt instinctively now that +hundreds of eyes were watching his every movement.</p> + +<p>Finally, he came to the public square, and he sat down here to +look about him. From general appearances, he judged this to be a +town of some two thousand inhabitants, for there was a very +respectable administration building, and a good-sized church. +There were but two streets of any consequence, the one by which +he had entered the town, and another running at right angles in +the opposite direction. In this latter street, as he stood in the +square, he noticed a three-story structure with a sign outside, +and he decided to go there and make inquiries as to where he +might be able to secure a lodging for the night. It looked as if +it might be an inn of some sort, or at least a store, so he +walked rapidly up to the entrance and knocked twice upon the +door. This place, in spite of its sign, looked more deserted and +shut-up than any other building he had yet seen in the town, and +he wondered whether he would receive any answer to his knocks. It +was indeed a long time before he heard a sound within, but at +last there was some muttering inside, the door flew open, and +Archie found himself in the arms of three Filipinos, who threw +him upon the floor and bound him, hands and feet. It was all so +sudden that he had no time to cry out, and before he could say +anything at all he was thrown into a dark room, and the door shut +behind him.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XVI.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>A PLEASANT CAPTOR— BRAVE BILL HICKSON ALLOWS ARCHIE TO +ESCAPE— FIRST GLIMPSE OF AGUINALDO.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>F<small>OR</small> a long time Archie lay still upon the +floor, being unable to move a muscle from the shock of his +encounter with the men, and because he was tightly bound with +ropes. And then he at last went off to sleep, feeling frightened +because he was in the hands of strange men, and a little +satisfied, too, because he was the victim of some adventure which +might turn out in a very interesting way.</p> + +<p>When he awoke, it was morning, and the light came into the +room through two small square windows, set high up in the wall. +Archie looked about the room with great curiosity, but found +little there to interest him. There was nothing to be seen but an +old bed without spring or mattress, and a rickety chair with but +three legs, which stood in one corner. The walls, he was +surprised to observe, were handsomely decorated with tapestries, +and Archie at once made up his mind that this had at one time +been a private dwelling-house, and had probably been owned by +some rich Spaniard who kept a store on the ground floor, and +lived in these rooms. The insurgents had probably driven the +family out of the country and had taken possession of the house, +which they had stripped of everything useful, leaving the +tapestries and works of art behind them.</p> + +<p>These suppositions were cut short by the entrance of a man who +appeared to be a half-breed, and who immediately began to speak +to Archie in broken English. The fellow had a pleasant face, and +presented a fairly good appearance, and Archie wondered how he +could have come to this place. "I suppose you have been +wondering," said the man, "why you have been thrown into this +room, and it won't take me long to explain things. You see this +town belongs to us just now, and we don't propose to have any +Yankee spies around here to tell Otis of our whereabouts. There +ain't no troops in this town now, but there's likely to be any +minute, and we patriots was sent here to take possession of +things and arrange quarters for our army. Let me tell you that +the Filipino army will be in this town to-day, and if you don't +look sharp you'll be the first prisoner to be shot. Aguinaldo +isn't a man to deal easily with spies, and if he thought you was +out here for that purpose he'd have you riddled with bullets in a +minute." The man came up to Archie and began to undo the ropes. +"I reckon I can trust you free for awhile, for there's no use in +your trying to get away, with the Filipino army all around the +town. Sit down there now, and I'll see that you get some +breakfast. You can tell, perhaps, that I ain't no Filipino, nor +never was one. I'm from Arizona, U. S. A., and I'm fightin' with +these rebels for what there is in it just now. I'm mighty curious +to find out how you come to be out in these diggin's, +youngster."</p> + +<p>Archie was willing enough to tell all about himself. He liked +this man, in spite of his being with the rebels, and he felt that +he would be able to make friends with him if he were careful to +do so. And the best plan seemed to be for him to tell all about +himself, how he happened to go to New York, and how he had been +sent out here as a boy correspondent for the <i>Enterprise.</i> +The man from Arizona listened to the recital with open mouth and +eyes, and he frequently laughed outright at some of the +experiences Archie described. When the narrative was finished, he +seized Archie's hand, and said, "My name's Bill Hickson, and you +can count on me after this fer a friend, youngster. I'll swan if +I ever heard tell of sich nerve in my life. I'll see that you get +out of this scrape all right, but you must be careful to keep up +appearances of being under guard. I'm a big-bug in this Filipino +shack, but I wouldn't dare to let you out openly. So you jist +kind of lay around and look despondent, and depend on me to make +things as easy for you as I can. You kin come down-stairs now, if +you like, and I'll present you to my friends. There don't none of +'em speak no English but me, and all I can do is to interduce +you, and tell 'em that you ain't no spy, and that you are very +sorry you ever ran up agin this here town. And I guess I'll be +expressin' your sentiments exactly, won't I?" Archie nodded, but +in his heart he felt that he wasn't sorry he had run up against +the town. This Bill Hickson, in himself, was a character worth +going miles to meet, and if what he said was true, Archie stood a +good chance of seeing the notorious Aguinaldo, with his army of +Filipinos, before the day was over.</p> + +<p>When he reached the lower floor, he found several men lounging +about in another poorly furnished room, and they were all similar +in appearance to the men he had seen at the door the night +before. They looked at him in an indifferent way, and didn't seem +surprised that he should be walking about without restraint. Bill +Hickson stepped up to some of them, and, after a few words in +some language Archie didn't understand, motioned for the boy to +step up. He was told to shake hands with "all the gents," and +after he had done so he was offered a cigar, and Archie began to +realise that it was a very good thing that he had a friend at the +Filipino court. He thought, too, that if these men were samples, +Aguinaldo had a very poor lot of retainers, and later on he +perceived the real cause for the failure of the rebels to do +anything more than keep up a constant retreat. It was plain to +see that the followers of the rebel leader were "in it for what +it was worth." They had no difficulty, any of them, in getting +enough to eat, and often they had opportunities to enjoy +themselves in great fashion by taking possession of some Filipino +village and ejecting the inmates of some particularly fine house, +with a well-stocked wine-cellar.</p> + +<p>In looking out of the window Archie perceived that the town +looked very different this morning than when he saw it the +evening before. Instead of drawn blinds and shuttered windows, +there was everywhere an evident attempt at decoration in honour +of the coming army. The streets were crowded with a throng in +holiday garb, and some of the soldiers of the rebel army had +already arrived, as they could be easily distinguished by their +ragged dress and ridiculous airs, walking up and down the street. +It was all such a scene as Archie had never seen before, and +would have made a great success as the scenario for a comic +opera. But as a welcome to an army, supposedly victorious, it was +a dismal failure, and Archie wondered what General Aguinaldo +would think when he entered the town and saw such shoddy +patriotism everywhere. He hadn't long to wait, however, before +seeing the famous rebel and the effect upon him of the +celebration in his honour. It was about ten o'clock in the +morning when he rode into the public square, followed by about +two hundred ragged Filipinos, armed with all sorts of guns and +pistols. Archie saw the arrival from the roof of the building +which was his mock prison, and he could scarcely refrain from +laughing outright when he saw the boasted Filipino "army." It was +the poorest excuse for a body of troops that he could +imagine.</p> + +<p>Aguinaldo rode a fine bay horse, as did several of his +followers, but by far the majority of the regiment, if such it +could be called, was afoot, and most of them were barefooted, +too. The rebel leader looked very much like most of his pictures, +with the exception that he had an older look, and some gray hairs +about the temples. He was attired in a gaudy uniform of some +sort, with epaulets and a Spanish general's hat, and he carried +himself with great dignity of manner. Dismounting from his horse, +he entered the administration building, where he held a +conference with the town officials, and probably made them pay +over whatever money was in the treasury "for the cause." He +remained within for two hours or more, and all this time Archie +stood upon the roof and watched the remarkable scene in the +streets below. The troops had scattered, and were engaged in +robbing the housewives of whatever they had in their houses to +eat. And the women seemed willing to provide them with whatever +they could afford, and there was much enthusiasm evident +everywhere. But the celebration was very quiet, in spite of the +friendly reception, There were no bands of music, no cheering, +and no singing of battle-hymns. The whole affair reminded Archie +of some camp of a section of the famous Coxey army, when he had +seen it long ago. The soldiers were no better dressed than +tramps, and there was but little more discipline among them.</p> + +<p>And the celebration and occupation of the town came to a +sudden end. While Archie stood upon the roof at noontime, he saw +a runner enter the administration building in great haste, and in +a minute Aguinaldo came hurrying down the steps. Then there was a +great commotion in the streets, and the two hundred followers of +the chief were seen assembled in the square, and before they were +all there the general was riding out of the town toward the +interior of the island. There was no noise, and the inhabitants +stood about apparently speechless, and wondering what had +happened. Their reception had come to an untimely end, and their +hero had left them unceremoniously. Soon the last of the +straggling troops were out of the town, and just as Archie was +beginning to think of going down from the roof Bill Hickson stuck +his head up and gave him some astonishing news. "Stay where +you're at, young feller, till these fool Filipinos gits away from +here. You saw how they skedaddled, didn't ye? Well, Uncle Sam is +comin' after 'em with shot-guns, and old Aggy heard the news just +in time. He is bound for the jungle, about forty miles southeast, +and he won't reach it until to-morrow night, anyhow, and if the +officers are quick they may be able to catch him. Now you stay +here, lad, and give 'em the news when they git here. They'll +thank you for it, and you may be the means of gittin' this fool +of an Aguinaldo captured. If you does, why, your future's all +right. And ye can tell the colonel, or whoever's in command, that +Bill Hickson is still with 'em, and that he's doin' his best fer +Uncle Sam, and tell 'em that Aggy has got about three thousand +troops altogether, but only about a thousand with him. Now, +good-bye, lad, and I hope I'll see ye again."</p> + +<p>And Archie saw brave Bill Hickson get down from the roof. He +brushed some tears from his eyes as he realised that here was a +brave soldier doing good work for his country. A moment later he +saw him running across the square with four of the Filipinos, and +waving his hat to the "youngster" as he went. He followed him +with his eyes as long as he could, and then he sat down and made +a solemn vow that Bill Hickson should be named among the heroes +of the war.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XVII.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN TROOPS— ARCHIE THE HERO OF THE +REGIMENT.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>RCHIE</small> descended from the roof, and found +everything below in a state of wild disorder. The fleeing rebels +had taken with them all they had time to get together, but in +their haste they had left behind many of their most useful +belongings. In a cupboard of the dining-room Archie found a +supply of food and wines sufficient to feed several people for a +week, so he supposed that it had been the intention of the +occupants of the house to remain for some days. The news that the +Americans were coming upset all their plans, however, and now, as +often before, they were obliged to flee before them, leaving +behind most of their creature comforts in the way of food and +furniture.</p> + +<p>"What a life they must be leading," thought Archie to himself, +"going from one place to another, constantly endeavouring to hide +from the Americans. Now in some town, now in the wilderness, and +again venturing as near as possible to the boundaries of Manila." +And he could scarcely help admiring their courage, or +recklessness, rather, in camping so near the head of the American +government, where they might expect to be caught in a trap at any +moment. But Archie realised, too, that such an army can get away +in a very short time, and he began to have serious doubts as to +whether the Americans would ever be able to capture Aguinaldo and +his men. For knowing the islands perfectly, and being able to get +from one point to another in the easiest and quickest way, the +rebels have a great deal in their favour.</p> + +<p>Selecting some canned beef and some native bread and cheese, +Archie managed to make a very good meal for himself, though he +ate hurriedly for fear some of the rebels might return. As soon +as he had finished he returned to his position on the roof, for +there he knew that he would be safe in case the building was +entered by the townspeople. From his high perch he looked down +into the streets, and was surprised to find them as quiet and as +much deserted as they had been the night before. The news of the +coming of the Americans had been effective in quieting the +enthusiasm of the morning, and all the townsfolk had again +entered their homes and put the shutters up before their windows. +One would have taken the place for a deserted village, judging +from appearances. But Archie knew that within the shuttered +windows and barred doors there were hundreds of people waiting +anxiously for the arrival of the American troops, and making +ready to come out, when required to do so, and again declare +their allegiance to the stars and stripes. The cowardly wretches +were diplomatic enough to be always on the side of the +victorious. When the rebels occupied the town they were loyal to +them, and when the Americans came, as they often did, they came +out into the square and cheered loudly for Uncle Sam. But of +course the Americans knew very well that their sympathies were +with the rebels, and the rebels knew it, too, or they would never +have dared to venture so near Manila.</p> + +<p>About five in the afternoon, there was a sound of many men +marching along the road, and in a little while Archie was able to +see the Americans coming down the street. It was a sight to cheer +his heart after all his experiences of the last day and night. +The column was marching at double-quick, and the handsome colonel +rode a great gray horse at the head of the regiment. Archie saw +that they would reach the square in two or three minutes, and, +throwing discretion to the winds, he descended from the roof, +almost fell down the stairways in his haste, and was soon running +toward the administration building. He mounted the great steps +leading up to the portico, just as the colonel rode into the +square, and the expression of surprise on the faces of all the +men was funny to see. In a minute every hat was off, and the +regiment was giving "three cheers for the boy reporter," while +the colonel, rapidly dismounting, hurried up to speak with +Archie.</p> + +<p>"Why, how did you come here?" he demanded. "Haven't the rebels +been here, and how did you escape them? Which way did they go, +and was Aguinaldo with them? For pity's sake, say something."</p> + +<p>Archie wasn't long explaining things, and his news was so +explicit and so valuable that the colonel grasped his hand and +said, almost with tears in his eyes, "God bless you, lad. You may +have aided us to catch the gang, and anyhow you've proved your +bravery."</p> + +<p>By this time the regiment was standing at ease, and all the +men were watching Archie and the colonel with great interest. +Knowing that they were all curious to learn how the lad happened +to have escaped the rebels, the good colonel made a short speech +in which he explained everything. He dwelt particularly upon the +bravery of Bill Hickson, and held him up as a model for all the +men to follow. "And now three cheers for Bill Hickson and our boy +reporter again," he cried, when he had finished, and they were +given with a will by all the men.</p> + +<p>The regimental officers held a short consultation, and it was +decided, on the strength of the news brought by Archie, to push +on after the rebels as fast as was possible. But it was now +sunset, and there was no use trying to go farther to-night, so it +was agreed that the best plan would be to give the men a good +rest overnight, as they had made the entire march from Manila +since five o'clock in the morning. "They will do all the better +to-morrow for the rest," said the colonel. Archie was valuable in +being able to guide the officers to the building where he had +been confined, assuring them that they would find everything +needful there in the way of food, and a place to sleep. Some of +the soldiers were quartered in various houses of the town, for +the people had soon turned out into the street again, and had +expressed their friendship for their "masters," as they called +them. Archie could hardly refrain from laughing as he saw some of +those who in the morning had bowed down to Aguinaldo vowing +everlasting allegiance to our flag, and he assured the colonel +that he couldn't be too careful while in the town to guard +against surprises. "No one knows the beasts better than I do," +was the answer. "I know they can't be trusted."</p> + +<p>Archie was invited to remain in the building with the +officers, and while they prepared and ate a lunch he busied +himself in writing a description of his last two days' +experiences. He knew that a messenger would soon start for +Manila, and that a boat would leave that city on the next day for +Hong Kong, so be wanted to get his narrative written in order to +send it to Mr. Van Bunting at once. He felt that he had some very +interesting things to write about, for it wasn't every +correspondent who had seen Aguinaldo, and had been captured by +the rebel army. He knew that most of them were content to remain +in Manila, and send only what they could get from the general in +command, and that this description of the rebels would be +something new, at any rate. So he wrote it very carefully, and +succeeded in getting it ready in time to send, so that it would +be in the office of the <i>Enterprise</i> in less than a month. +As he sat at the table writing, Archie thought of the great +changes which can take place in one's surroundings in a few +weeks. It seemed ages to him since the day when he left home for +the first time, and the experiences he had on his way to New York +seemed now to belong to the far-away period of his boyhood. He +was beginning to feel very old now, because he had been through +so much of late, and he could hardly realise that he was still +eighteen.</p> + +<p>He wrote a short note to his mother at home, telling her not +to worry, and assuring her that he was in good health and in no +danger whatever of being captured by the rebels, for Archie felt +quite safe after his experience with the insurgent leaders. He +knew that no one of their prisoners was ever likely to come to a +very bad end. They were far too slipshod in their methods of +holding prisoners. He was sorry not to be able to send a longer +letter home, but he knew that this note was much better than +sending nothing at all, and that it would make his mother very +happy to hear from him at all.</p> + +<p>The officers, when Archie returned to the dining-room, if such +it could be called, were engaged in making a very good meal from +the provisions in the cupboard, and they thanked Archie warmly +for leading them to such a good place. "By Jove," said one of the +captains, "we sha'n't want to return to Manila at all, when we +can get such grub as this is outside." But the colonel assured +them all that they needn't expect to find such accommodations +everywhere in the interior of the country. "No doubt we'll all be +living on plantains in a day or two, if we don't catch that fox +of an Aguinaldo. And I'm willin' to bet now that we won't find +him. That feller's too slick for us. He's proved it many a time +before."</p> + +<p>"And to think that he was here only this morning! The nerve of +him, to come within twenty-five miles of Manila!" said +another.</p> + +<p>"I'll be mighty well satisfied if we can catch a few of his +ragged men," continued the colonel. "That will be something to +have accomplished, anyhow, and more than some other regiments +have done, when they were sent after him. He's the cutest feller +I've heard of in a long while. If it wasn't for Bill Hickson we'd +never hear tell of him, even. He could enter Manila, I believe, +and go out again without us ever knowin' it at all."</p> + +<p>Archie was now called on to tell something of the rebel +leader's appearance, and how he had acted while in the town.</p> + +<p>"I didn't see very much of him," said Archie, "because he +spent most of the morning with the big-bugs of the town, over in +the administration building. But when he rode into town on his +horse he looked mighty dignified, though he fell some in my +estimation when I saw him standing up. He looked rather dumpy +then. He carried himself with a lot of dignity, a little more +than was becoming, I thought, and he received the cheers of the +people as a matter of course, and hardly took the trouble to +acknowledge them, even by a bow. The officers of the town treated +him with great deference, and I guess there's no doubt but what +the Filipinos look upon him as their leader."</p> + +<p>"Oh, there's no doubt of that," said the colonel. "We've +learned that long ago. They stand up for him whenever he needs +them, and they give him all they've got to help carry on the +war."</p> + +<p>The meal finished, the officers smoked awhile, and then went +to bed, for they were to be up at four in the morning.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XVIII.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>THE MARCH AFTER THE REBELS— THE FIRST BATTLE— +ARCHIE WOUNDED.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>RCHIE</small> was awakened at four the next morning by +the sound of the bugle, and, hastily dressing, he hurried +down-stairs to learn the plans of the officers. He found that +they were going to start on the march as soon as the men had +drunk their morning coffee, and Archie immediately made +preparations to go with them. The colonel looked on in amazement. +"Why are you packing your knapsack!" he asked. "You surely don't +think you're going with us? You never in the world can stand this +hard march in the hot sun."</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, I think I can," said Archie. "You see I have walked +a great deal in these last two months, and I don't think I will +have any difficulty in keeping up with the troops. And I do so +want to see some fighting, and to learn whether you capture +Aguinaldo. You don't object to my going, now, do you?"</p> + +<p>"No," said the colonel. "If you think you can stand the +marching, and are so anxious to come, why, I suppose you can do +so. But you mustn't blame me if anything should happen to +you."</p> + +<p>Archie was ready enough to promise this, for he had no idea +that he would meet with an accident of any kind, and so he +continued to pack his things in the knapsack. The rebels had +emptied everything in a corner, and had evidently intended taking +the knapsack with them when they went; but they left so hurriedly +they couldn't possibly think of everything, and so had left it +behind, much to Archie's relief, for he would have been unable to +secure another one anywhere outside Manila. In a very short time +the regiment gathered in the streets immediately about the +square, and soon the men were marching out of the town, much to +the gratification of the residents, who watched them from their +roofs and windows. Archie fell in at the head of the column, and +found no difficulty in keeping up with the soldiers near him, +though they were marching at a rapid rate.</p> + +<p>The town limits were soon passed, and they swung into the +white country road, which presented the same scene of desolation +which had been everywhere visible to Archie on his way from +Manila. The farm-houses were nearly all deserted, and there was +but little attempt at cultivating the soil, which would have been +productive enough had it not been overgrown with tangled vines +and weeds. And as they went farther into the country the +wilderness increased, until at last the road itself was filled +with growing vines, and the men had difficulty in walking. Every +little while some trooper would fall headlong, tripped by some +vine, and the others would laughingly help him up before passing +on. These little incidents did much to enliven the march, which +became monotonous after the first six or seven hours, and Archie +appreciated the mishaps very much until he took a few tumbles +himself. He was usually, much to the amusement of the officers, +marching at the very head of the regiment, and "setting the +pace," he said, so that he was more likely to trip than any of +the others. He was always the first to discover a snake in the +road, too, and kept a great stick with which to kill them. He +seemed to have no fear of them, but walked up to lay them out, +and on one occasion the colonel warned him just in time or he +would certainly have been bitten by a snake whose bite is certain +death. This experience made him more careful, but he still kept +his place at the head of the regiment, and came to be called the +mascot by the men.</p> + +<p>At noon the regiment halted at a grassy spot, where there were +trees, and made their dinners from their knapsacks. The officers +warned them to go carefully, or they would find themselves +without provisions before returning to Manila, for they had been +so sure of catching the rebels at the town behind that they had +neglected to bring along many supplies. Now, of course, they +didn't know how long it would take them to find them,— two +days at least, and probably longer.</p> + +<p>Archie had stocked his knapsack with some food from the old +headquarters in the town, so that he felt safe for a few days, at +any rate. He ate carefully, however, and was careful not to waste +anything, for he realised that he might be called upon to aid +some of the soldiers before long,</p> + +<p>Dinner over, the regiment marched on again, for the officers +now began to think that they had made a mistake in not pursuing +the fleeing rebels the night before. They met several Spaniards, +who told them that Aguinaldo had marched all night long without +stopping, so that he was now at least thirty-six hours ahead of +them, and some of the men began to be discouraged, saying that it +was no use following him up with such a small force. "Other +regiments have tried to find him in this way, and none of them +have succeeded," said one of the privates to Archie. "They keep +us marching for three or four days, and finally they decide to +return to Manila, without having found any trace of the rascal +beyond hearing that he had passed this way or that."</p> + +<p>The officers couldn't depend upon what the natives told them +of Aguinaldo's movements, for, almost without exception, they +were in his favour, and always lied to the Americans to try to +throw them off the track. It was due to this that they proceeded +very cautiously, and still, notwithstanding their extreme care, +they found themselves, when night came on this first day, in a +small village where no one had seen anything of the rebel army. +There was no denying the fact that they were off the trail, and +the colonel stormed about in a terrible way when he learned of +their mistake. There was no use going back in the dark to hunt +for a trail they had mistaken in the daylight, so the regiment +remained in the village overnight. They were a lot of very +discouraged men, and the officers were enraged at the mistake, +for which there was no one but themselves to blame.</p> + +<p>Early in the morning they retraced their way, and started off +in an opposite direction to the one taken yesterday. It seemed +that this must certainly be the path taken by the rebels, but the +regiment marched until nearly noon without seeing any signs of +them. Then, when they had halted for dinner, the colonel decided +to let the men rest while two companies were sent ahead to +reconnoitre, and report as to whether there were any signs of men +having passed this way. He was beginning to think that the whole +affair would be a wild-goose chase, and he decided that, if these +companies found nothing, the whole regiment would return to +Manila forthwith, probably to be the laughing-stock of the army +there.</p> + +<p>The remaining companies had nothing to do now but lay about on +the soft grass, and rest. They were encamped in a stretch of +grassy loam in the midst of what appeared to be a dense forest, +and all about were evidences of the great fertility of the soil. +The vegetation was so dense that one could scarcely see through +it, and the glade was cool and pleasant, though overhead the sun +was shining as warm as ever. It was a lovely oasis in a +wilderness of undergrowth, and the men enjoyed it to the +utmost.</p> + +<p>About three in the afternoon the sound of firing was heard in +the distance. First there was one shot, then another, and several +more at rapid intervals. Archie was one of the first to jump to +his feet, but in a second every man was at attention, with his +musket in his hands. The colonel listened closely for two +minutes, and then the firing began once more, and this time it +seemed nearer. He hesitated no longer, but gave the order to +march ahead. "They've evidently found the cowards at last," he +muttered to Archie. "You stay here, where you will be out of +danger." But Archie was determined to do nothing of the kind. He +felt his pistol safe in his hip pocket, and when the companies +swung out of the forest and into the road he was marching in his +old place at the head of the column. Again the colonel ordered +him to remain behind, but Archie insisted that he would not, +"Then go to the rear," cried the colonel, angry for the moment. +"I will not have you shot down by a rebel sharpshooter the very +first one." And Archie knew that he would have to obey.</p> + +<p>The column went ahead at double-quick, and finally broke into +a steady run. Every minute the noise of rifle-shots sounded +nearer, and it seemed probable that the two companies were +retreating before the insurgents. The men were wild to reach the +scene of the firing, and the officers had all they could do to +keep them in line. All the time they were running hardly a sound +was heard save the noise of their boots upon the soft earth, and +they all knew that they could probably take the insurgents by +surprise.</p> + +<p>Archie's heart was beating very hard as they drew nearer and +nearer to the scene. He felt that he was about to see his first +fighting, and he determined not to miss any part of it. So he +gradually ran ahead until finally he was almost at the head of +the column again.</p> + +<p>The troops made so little noise that the two companies, +retreating slowly, were upon them without knowing it. But when +they discovered that their comrades had come to their aid they +set up such a cheering as Archie had never heard before, and +immediately faced about and went ahead again. The rebels were +about a quarter of a mile behind, marching rapidly forward, and +firing as they came. Some of them were running among the trees at +the roadside, firing incessantly, and hitting some poor soldier +almost every time they fired. They were the famous sharpshooters, +of whom the soldiers in Manila had heard so much.</p> + +<p>When the rebels observed that the Americans had received +reinforcements, they halted suddenly, and before they could turn +about the Yankees were almost upon them, firing volleys into them +as they came. Many of the insurgents fell in the roadway, and the +others fled wildly in every direction. Most of them entered the +dense forest, where the Americans captured nearly a hundred of +them after the others had surrendered, and some were such good +runners that they escaped down the roadway. The whole rebel army +presented a scene of wild confusion. Some of the men knelt and +begged for mercy, and some cried out in a horrible way as they +saw the dreaded Yankees advancing. But it was all over very soon. +The prisoners were placed in line, and marched back along the +road, and the dead, of which there were about fifty, were soon +buried. Aguinaldo had escaped in the forest, and no one suggested +that he should be followed. All the officers knew that such a +course would be useless, and most of them were very well +satisfied with what had already been accomplished. The prisoners +numbered more than six hundred, and the dead a hundred more, +while there were about seventy-five wounded. So if what Bill +Hickson said were true, not more than two hundred insurgents +could have escaped.</p> + +<p>Among the seriously wounded was a man whom Archie recognised +immediately as one of his captors of two days previous, and while +he was looking over the bodies for the other men, he came +suddenly to brave Bill Hickson, lying face downward in the road. +He almost screamed with fear that he might be dead, and when one +of the men hurried up to him he told him who the man was. The +colonel was soon on hand, and it was found that the brave spy was +not seriously wounded, and would recover soon under proper +treatment.</p> + +<p>When the insurgent wounded were cared for, it was discovered +that the two companies sent out to reconnoitre had also suffered +losses, and when they marched back along the line of their +retreat no less than five dead and about twenty wounded were +found. This sad news threw a gloom over the entire regiment, and +when they started back to Manila they marched in quiet, and +without rejoicing over their victory, which had proved so +costly.</p> + +<p>Poor Archie, when they started to march, found, to his great +disgust, that he was so weak he couldn't walk far, and he thought +this must be due to the fright he had received. He was very angry +with himself, until the surgeon examined him and announced that +he had a bullet in his arm. And then Archie confessed that he had +felt a stinging sensation at one time during the firing, but had +thought nothing of it. Now his disgust was turned to great +delight, for the idea of being wounded in battle was glorious to +his mind. "I'll bet I wounded more than one insurgent," he told +the surgeon, "for I discharged every barrel of my revolver." The +wound was not at all serious, but he was told to be quiet for a +few days. He was given one of the rebel horses to ride back to +Manila, and he felt like a real hero in many ways.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XIX.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>RETURN TO MANILA— IN THE HOSPITAL— CONGRATULATED BY +ALL— WRITING TO THE PAPER OF HIS EXPERIENCES.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>I<small>T</small> took the regiment much longer to march back +to Manila than it had taken it to follow the rebels, for the +wounded of both sides had to be carried, and the arrangements for +carrying them were very imperfect. Fortunately, most of them were +able to ride horses, and the officers were successful in securing +wagons enough to carry most of the others, but there were about a +dozen who could neither ride horses or lie in wagons, but had to +be carried on stretchers all the time. Of course this was slow +work, and the officers were glad enough when they reached the +town with the three-story building. Here they found things very +much as they had left them, two days before, save that the +inhabitants were more abject than ever to them, now that they had +captured most of the rebel force.</p> + +<p>It wasn't an easy matter to find quarters for so many men, and +some of the Filipinos were obliged to camp in the public square +overnight, while the wounded and ill were given beds in the +various houses of the town. The inhabitants were required to +furnish food, too, for the Americans were entirely out of almost +everything. They still had some hardtack, but of meat and coffee +there was none. The people of the town pretended to be very glad +to serve their "masters," but every one knew that the natives +would be only too glad of a chance to cut the throat of every +Yankee soldier.</p> + +<p>The officers again occupied the old building which they had +used during their former stay, and Archie was invited to share it +with them, for they expected to rest in this town over the next +day, before proceeding to Manila. The men's uniforms and +equipment generally needed cleaning and repairing, and the +colonel was anxious for them all to appear as well as possible +when they returned victorious to the island capital. So the next +day was spent in cleaning and washing, and by evening most of the +soldiers looked as if they had never left Manila. Then came a +surprise for every one, for into the town marched a regiment of +militia from Manila, sent out to see whether the first regiment +needed reinforcements. They set up a great cheer when they +learned that most of the rebel force had been captured, and the +night was spent in a celebration of the great event. A band was +scraped up in the town, the great hall of the administration +building was thrown open, and there was dancing and music until +an early hour in the morning. All the belles of the town turned +out to welcome the soldiers, hypocrites that they were, and they +danced with their enemies as readily as they would waltz with +their own dear Filipinos. Every one seemed to have a good time, +and the soldiers went to bed just in time to get three hours' +sleep before starting for Manila in the morning.</p> + +<p>It was a great sight to see the two regiments, with the +prisoners, march out of the town at five the next morning. They +made a fine appearance in their well-brushed uniforms and bright +equipment. The townsfolk watched them out of sight, and then most +likely cursed them for a lot of vagabonds, but the soldiers +didn't mind their curses. They were all very happy at the +prospect of getting back to Manila again, and no one was more +glad than Archie. He had somewhat recovered from his wound now, +and rode in his old place at the head of the column, where he was +the centre of interest to every one. The men congratulated him on +having proved such an excellent mascot, and he laughed and talked +with them until he was tired.</p> + +<p>The outskirts of the city were reached about five in the +afternoon, and as they marched through the streets to +headquarters a band of music preceded them, playing popular and +patriotic airs. The sidewalks were crowded with people, and +Archie felt happier than for a long time, because every one was +curious to know who that boy could be riding at the head of the +troops, alongside the colonel. He was known to most of the other +troops in Manila, and received many a cheer from them as they saw +his arm in a sling, and when they finally reached the general's +headquarters, he was honoured with a handshake and the +congratulations of the commander himself. This was the climax to +a very happy day, and Archie went to bed in his little old bunk +feeling that he was a very lucky boy for having been wounded in +battle.</p> + +<p>Of course the next few days were very busy ones for all the +men, and for Archie, too. He was obliged to tell, over and over, +the story of his experiences, and how he had managed to escape +from the rebels when they had him. This story always made the men +roar with laughter, and increased their already strong contempt +for the Filipino army. He told, too, about brave Bill Hickson, +and that gentleman's cot was always the centre of an admiring +throng of visitors, who shook his hand and told him how proud +they were of what he had accomplished. And all the poor hero +could do was to smile feebly, for he was still too ill to talk +much.</p> + +<p>Archie felt that he had almost volumes to write about his +experiences in battle, and he did send a very long account of +this encounter to Mr. Van Bunting. It was written in his boyish +way, but one of the officers who read it said that it was the +best thing of its kind he had ever read, so he wasn't at all +backward about mailing it. All the other newspaper correspondents +in Manila were wishing they had gone with the regiment and +witnessed the battle, but they had stayed in Manila, thinking +that this would be like the other expeditions of the kind, a mere +wild-goose chase, which wouldn't amount to anything at all. They +were all very anxious to get the details of the affair from +Archie, but he was shrewd enough not to tell them anything of +value. And the other correspondent of the <i>Enterprise</i> in +Manila insisted that Archie should send a cable message +describing the affair, as well as a written account, and this he +finally consented to do. The correspondent added a long account +of Archie's personal bravery, how he had been wounded, and how he +had ridden back to Manila at the head of the column. Archie would +have been very much embarrassed had he known this, for he was +still modest, but the first thing he knew of it was from a letter +he received a few weeks later from Mr. Van Bunting, +congratulating him on what he had accomplished, and telling him +that he had long since more than earned his six hundred dollars. +But for weeks he was ignorant that any one in New York knew of +his being wounded.</p> + +<p>The days now began to pass as before in the camp at Manila. +The wound in Archie's arm was healing slowly, but he was hardly +able to use that member for a month or six weeks. Bill Hickson +did not fare so well. He lay for weeks on his cot in the hospital +building, and was hardly strong enough, for awhile, to talk. He +was improving slowly, but the doctors said it might be two months +before he was able to walk about and take his former active part +in the campaign against the insurgents. This enforced quiet was +very trying to the brave man, and Archie spent many hours reading +to him, and telling of various things he had learned at school +and elsewhere. This constant companionship served to strengthen +their already close friendship, and it was soon known among all +the troops that Bill Hickson and the boy reporter were +inseparable. And every one who knew the story of their +experiences looked upon them as the two chief heroes of the war +so far, because as yet there had been few feats of bravery in the +desultory campaigning against the rebels. General Funston had +swum the river, of course, but many held that not even that feat +compared with the bravery of Bill Hickson in serving as a spy +under Aguinaldo's very nose. The more people heard about his +experiences, the more remarkable they thought him to be, until at +last he was by far the most popular man in the army at +Manila.</p> + +<p>Archie sent many interesting letters to Mr. Van Bunting, +telling of the adventures of the brave spy, and one day he +received a cablegram telling him to send at least one of these +letters by every steamer, for people had become interested in +hearing about him. So for some time Archie wrote about Bill +Hickson rather than about himself, and was glad of the +opportunity to do so. He knew that if a letter were published +every week or two in the <i>Enterprise</i> Bill Hickson would +soon be famous, and this was something he was very anxious to +accomplish. He felt that no fame could be too great for such a +man, and no praise too strong.</p> + +<p>The commanding general decided, about this time, to begin a +more active campaign against the insurgents. It was now the month +of December, and with the beginning of the new year he wanted to +inaugurate a series of attacks against them in every part of the +islands. He was beginning to feel the criticisms of the papers at +home, and of the newspaper men at Manila, and he felt that +something must be done immediately to retrieve his lost +reputation for active fighting. Every one, as soon as this +announcement was made, wondered what plan would be pursued to +worry the rebels into submission, for it was now generally agreed +that the Americans would hardly be able to capture the whole +rebel army. It was too evident that they were familiar with +numerous hiding-places in the islands. The only thing to do +seemed to be to prevent their getting supplies, and to drive them +from one point to another, hoping that they would become +discouraged in the end and submit to the inevitable.</p> + +<p>So far the campaigning had consisted chiefly of such +expeditions as that accompanied by Archie, and most of these had +returned to Manila without having even seen a rebel soldier. It +was not surprising, then, that the general was becoming +discouraged, and that he was anxious to try a new policy.</p> + +<p>No one knew what the new plan would be until one day several +cruisers and gunboats made their appearance in the harbour. There +had been no war-ships at Manila for several weeks, and every one +was surprised that so many should arrive at once. There were +rumours of a German onslaught, and also gossip saying that Japan +had decided to interfere, but all these were set at naught when +the general announced that the war-ships were to be sent around +the islands to bombard the rebel villages, and to drive the rebel +troops to the interior of the islands, where it would be hard for +them to receive supplies.</p> + +<p>This news made Archie very happy, and a plan at once occurred +to him. Why shouldn't he and Bill Hickson be allowed aboard a +cruiser? It would be the best thing possible for their health, +and he set about getting the necessary permit from the +admiral.</p> + +<p>Bill Hickson was able to be about now, and he was overjoyed +when Archie said he thought they could arrange to go. "I'd like +nothing better than a voyage in the good salt air. I believe it +will do me more good than a month in the hospital," he said. +Archie secured a very strong letter from the general, and one day +he stepped aboard the flag-ship in the harbour. He had no +difficulty in seeing the admiral, and found him to be a very +pleasant man to talk with. He read the letter carefully, and then +shook Archie cordially by the hand. "Yes," he said, "I've heard +of you, and of your friend, too. Every one in Hong Kong knows how +you two together bearded old Aguinaldo in his den, and robbed him +of most of his troops. It did me good to read about it in the New +York papers, too, and to know that you are both getting your just +measure of credit for the achievement."</p> + +<p>Archie blushed, and assured the admiral that he didn't do very +much, that it was all owing to Bill Hickson's bravery. "Oh, yes, +I know," laughed the admiral, "you lay it to him, and he will +most likely give you the credit. I've seen your kind before. But +I like you all the better for your modesty, lad. Of course you +and your friend can have a berth aboard ship, and aboard the +flag-ship, too, where I can see you both very often. You can come +aboard whenever you wish, and stay as long as you like."</p> + +<p>Archie could hardly thank the good officer for his kindness, +and hurried back to Manila. He found Bill Hickson waiting for him +at the wharf, and they rejoiced together over the good news.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XX.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>AROUND THE ISLAND ON A WAR-SHIP— BOMBARDING A FILIPINO +TOWN.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>I<small>T</small> was early one morning that Bill Hickson and +Archie went aboard the flag-ship, but all hands were on duty +there, and the gallant cruiser was raising anchor preparatory to +sailing off on her errand of pacification by means of shell and +shot, The two newcomers were assigned a pleasant stateroom where +they would not be far from the cabin of the admiral himself, and +where they could step out of their door upon the quarter-deck, +and get all the fresh air they needed. It was a very comfortable +place, with two soft bunks, and every convenience usually found +aboard the fastest ocean liner. When the fellows saw it first, +they could hardly believe it could all be for them, but the +officer assured them that it had been given them by the admiral's +own orders. So there was nothing for them to do but accept the +kindness, and to settle themselves down to having just as +pleasant a time as possible during the coming weeks at sea.</p> + +<p>It was generally understood that the cruiser was to make a +complete tour around the island of Luzon, investigating every +suspicious port, and shelling towns when such action proved +necessary to convince the rebels of Uncle Sam's superiority. The +voyage was expected to occupy nearly a month, for there was no +reason for them to hurry, and the admiral said he would like to +take things easy.</p> + +<p>Neither Hickson nor Archie had ever before been aboard a +war-ship, and they both found much to interest them during the +first few days at sea. Every movement of the crew, every action +of the ship, was of great moment to them, and they found no lack +of entertainment in examining the great guns and the equipment of +the vessel in the way of firearms and ammunition. Archie became +much interested, too, in the science of navigation, and spent +much time with the captain on the bridge, or with the pilot in +the lookout, learning as much as possible about how the movement +of the vessel is controlled. Before long he had mastered the +rudiments of the art, and the captain told him that he might some +day make an excellent navigator if he continued to take as much +interest in the charts as he did now. And Archie told him that he +was determined to master as much as possible of the business +during the voyage. Before he returned to Manila he knew more +about it all than even the captain would believe he knew, and the +knowledge was very valuable to him in days to come.</p> + +<p>The two visitors aboard took their meals at the officers' +table, and they kept the whole party interested for many days, +with their stories of the war in Luzon and of their very unusual +adventures both at home and in the Philippines. For it turned out +that Bill Hickson had visited almost every part of the United +States, and had lived in all sorts of places. He had been a +cowboy in Texas, and a miner in the Klondike, and he had also +been a policeman in Chicago. He knew more stories to tell than +any other man at the table could think of, and he told them in a +way that was wholly charming.</p> + +<p>Archie found that every one was very much interested in +hearing about his leaving home, and how he had happened to become +a reporter on the New York <i>Enterprise.</i> No one seemed to +tire of listening to his stories of his adventures in the great +American city, and many of the officers told him that they would +give a good deal to have had his experiences in life.</p> + +<p>And so it wasn't long until the two chums were friendly with +all on board, and after awhile things went along as though Archie +and Bill had never lived elsewhere than aboard ship. There was +nothing exciting for nearly a week. The cruiser steamed slowly +along the shore, sometimes stopping entirely, while the officers +levelled their glasses upon the beach, to see whether there were +any signs of the rebels being there. Sometimes, if things looked +suspicious, parties were sent ashore to reconnoitre, but they +seldom returned with news that would encourage the admiral to +investigate further. The days passed quietly, and the two +convalescents enjoyed themselves well enough. They were both much +improved already by the trip, and felt almost as well as ever. +They each had a steamer chair, and hour after hour they sat upon +the deck and watched the ever-changing panorama of the tropical +shore. Now the beach would descend slowly to the sea, and there +would be numerous palm-trees and luxuriant vegetation growing +close within view, but again there would be steep clips, which +looked menacing to a ship in the dark. But it was all beautiful, +cliffs or sandy beach, and Archie thought he had seldom passed +such a wholly delightful week.</p> + +<p>But, of course, it all became monotonous in time, and every +one, even the officers, longed for a change. The reconnoitring +parties were sent out more frequently now, and every one hoped +each time that they would return with news of the rebels, but +they were always disappointed. The admiral now determined to +steam ahead more rapidly, so that they might get around the +western end of the island. It was evident that there were no +insurgents along this shore, and as there were no villages of any +consequence, either, he was anxious to reach the southern shore, +where it was known the rebels had recently been gathering. The +towns, too, were very numerous here on account of the excellent +fishing, and it was hoped that some good work might be +accomplished for Uncle Sam before another week passed.</p> + +<p>Subsequent events soon proved the wisdom of the admiral's +plan. The cruiser, it seemed, had no sooner rounded the western +point than signs were visible of rebel activity ashore. It was +one Tuesday morning that a village was sighted, built around a +narrow inlet of the sea. When the binoculars were levelled upon +this harmless-appearing settlement, it was soon perceived by the +admiral that there were soldiers in the streets with the rebel +uniform, and that the insurgent flag was flying from the +administration building in the village square. All this was just +what had been expected, and there was great rejoicing aboard the +cruiser. Every man, without exception, almost, was anxious to be +one of a party to be sent ashore to attack the rebels, but the +admiral hesitated before sending any one at all. "It is +impossible to tell from here," he said, "how numerous the rebels +are, and it is quite possible that they may have a large force of +men in the village. If the appearance of the streets is any sign, +there must be quite a force of them in the place." But every one +laughed at the very idea of there being a rebel company of any +consequence in the place, and the admiral was finally prevailed +upon to send a boat ashore, armed with thirty men.</p> + +<p>"Remember," he said, "if you come to grief, that I advised +against this venture. Don't be too bold, or risk too much, for +though I can shell the place, that won't help you any, once you +are captives."</p> + +<p>But every one was anxious to be one of the party in the boat, +and the officers had a hard time making selections. "You can go, +Archie, because you're a correspondent," said the captain, "and +you can go, Mr. Hickson, because you're a brave man," and then he +continued to pick out men until the required number was secured. +Of course there were many disappointed ones left aboard the +cruiser, but the captain assured them that they might have their +chance yet.</p> + +<p>The boat was soon off, and it was noticed that there was great +excitement ashore as soon as the departure was observed. All the +inhabitants, it seemed, were gathered upon the beach, anxiously +awaiting developments. They seemed to be absolutely ignorant of +what the presence of a war-ship in their harbour meant, and were +apparently not at all anxious as to the outcome of this visit. +One of the men told Archie that they had probably never seen a +war-ship before, and that they wouldn't know a cannon at all. +"But we'll let them know the meaning of our presence," declared +the sailor, "if they shoot at us." The boat drew every minute +nearer the shore, and it was soon perceived that there were many +soldiers among the crowd on the beach. Every one thought it +remarkable that they should be so quiet, but not one of the +natives made a move until the boat was within two hundred feet of +the shore. Then one of the rebel soldiers suddenly raised his +rifle and fired at the boat. The lieutenant in command stood up +in the boat and gave the order to return the fire, and a perfect +volley of shot was poured into the crowd, which immediately +scattered in every direction. The rebel soldiers, however, seemed +determined to stand their ground, and they were so numerous, and +kept up such a steady fire, that it was deemed best to return to +the cruiser, which was signalling for this action on their part. +So the boat was turned about as quickly as possible, and the +sailors pulled for the cruiser, amid the derisive yells of the +Filipinos, who had gathered again upon the beach. The rebel +soldiers continued their firing, but were such poor marksmen that +but three of their shots took effect. One sailor was shot in the +arm, another in the side, and still another was shot in the leg +as he stood up to take aim at the rebels. None of these wounds, +it was afterward discovered, were at all serious, though they +were enough to arouse the anger of the entire crew.</p> + +<p>When the boat reached the cruiser again, preparations were at +once begun for bombarding the town. The natives still stood upon +the shore, and it could be seen that they were immensely proud of +their present victory. It was amusing, then, to see the change in +their behaviour when the great six-inch gun of the cruiser +belched forth a cloud of fire and smoke, and a burning shell +landed in the village street, apparently just in front of the +administration building, which was soon afire. The poor natives +fled in every direction, and the rebel soldiers followed their +noble example, and took to their heels, too. Another shell +followed the first, and soon several buildings were burning in +the village. The admiral watched developments carefully, and +finally he decided that they would be glad to surrender the +village if another boat was sent ashore.</p> + +<p>Accordingly, the same boat started out again, with three new +men in place of those who were wounded, and for sake of effect +the cruiser steamed farther in toward shore. This time there were +no crowds upon the beach, and the thirty men marched to the +burning buildings, where the natives fell before them, begging +for mercy. The soldiers were nowhere to be seen, so the crew took +possession of the town and slept there, in company with thirty +more sailors, that night.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XXI.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>CONTINUING THE CRUISE— ANOTHER VILLAGE CAPTURED— +THE ADMIRAL ARCHIE'S FRIEND— A GREAT BATTLE AND AN +UNEXPECTED VICTORY— LONGING TO BE HOME AGAIN.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>I<small>T</small> may go without saying that the sixty men +from the cruiser had a very interesting time before the night was +over. The entire village was in a constant uproar; the poor +natives, horrified by what they had witnessed during the +afternoon, ran hither and thither, some even leaving the place +entirely and starting for the interior with their goods and +families. The rebel soldiers had evidently gone for good, and a +small party sent out to look for traces of them returned without +learning anything of their whereabouts. The bombardment of the +village had certainly had great effect.</p> + +<p>It was only a tiny place, with possibly not more than a +thousand inhabitants, but there were evidences that it had been +formerly a flourishing town. There were fine residences in some +of the streets, which were now quite deserted, and there were +some very respectable business houses in the village square. All +these had once been occupied by Spanish traders, who had been +driven away when the rebels came, and if the insurgents had never +come the town might now have been a booming place. But the rebels +were lazy, as usual, and did no work, so that now the fine +residences were vacant, and the business blocks stood empty.</p> + +<p>Some of the sailors looked about for a casino, where they +might be able to find entertainment of some kind for the evening, +but every place of amusement was closed, and the streets were +deserted. Since the occurrences of the afternoon all the people +had locked themselves into their houses, to await the departure +of the Americans. But, even though the casino was closed, the +Yankees managed to have a good time. They sang and danced and +played the banjo until an early hour in the morning, when they +finally went to sleep, leaving only two for a night watch, for +there was no danger that the insurgents would return, after their +engagement, in which they had lost six men.</p> + +<p>When morning came, some officers landed from the cruiser, and +all the villagers were summoned to the public square and made to +swear allegiance to the American flag.</p> + +<p>In the afternoon the cruiser steamed away again on her errand +of forcible pacification, and more days of quiet watchfulness +followed, as the vessel steamed along near the shore. There were +many small villages along this coast, but all of them seemed +peaceful and free of insurgents. The captain even said that some +of the people in them probably didn't know that there had ever +been a war between Spain and the United States. Archie, who had +enjoyed his experiences during the occupation of the last +village, now began to be impatient again at the long quiet. The +day when the cruiser bombarded the administration building would +be a memorable one to him, and the succeeding events were just +such as he had been longing to see for months. And then to think +that he had taken part in the occupation of the village. It was +all very wonderful, but very real, too, and for several days he +took much pains in writing an article for the paper describing +the events leading up to and including the capture of the +village. And in the narration Bill Hickson was an important +character. He had again proved himself a hero of the first water +by insisting that the boat proceed when the first attempt was +made to land, and by being the first man ashore when a landing +was finally effected. He was a leader in everything that was +done. He marched at the head of the squad when they marched +through the streets of the village, calling all the people to +assemble in the public square, and be stood beside the officers +with his rifle handy when the ceremony of swearing allegiance was +gone through with. When it was all over he was called to the +admiral's cabin aboard the cruiser and congratulated for being so +brave and so ever-ready to lead in any dangerous undertaking; but +Bill Hickson simply blushed and said he hadn't done "anything +worth mentionin'." The men aboard thought differently, however, +and he was even a greater hero after this adventure than he had +been before.</p> + +<p>Archie, too, received the congratulations of the admiral. "You +have been a brave boy," he said, "and deserve much credit for +showing so little fear in the face of danger. I hope you will be +rewarded upon your return to New York for your bravery while with +us here." Archie, too, blushed, and said that he had no doubt +that Mr. Van Bunting would treat him fairly when he reached New +York again.</p> + +<p>And Archie was now beginning to wish that the time for his +return would soon arrive. It was the month of February, and he +had been away from America an age, it seemed to him. He felt that +he had seen most of what there was to be seen in the Philippines, +and when this naval tour was over with, the active campaigning +would no doubt cease until the rainy season was over. So for many +reasons the boy wished he might be able to start home soon, and +as the days passed he became more and more anxious to receive +word from the <i>Enterprise</i> that he might return. He had sent +many interesting articles to the paper, and would be able to +write many more just as interesting upon his return, so he felt +that the editors wouldn't object to his early return.</p> + +<p>For an entire week the cruiser found no signs of the rebels, +but at last there came a day when they were steaming slowly along +near the shore, and saw, back among the trees, some specks of +white resembling tents in shape. Immediately the whole vessel was +excited, and there was much gossip and wonder as to what the +tents could be doing there. The admiral at last decided to send +two boats ashore to investigate, and gave strict orders that the +men should be cautious and not allow themselves to be ambushed or +caught in a trap of any kind. Of course Archie and Bill Hickson +were among the crew of the first boat, and each was as fully +armed as any of the sailors.</p> + +<p>The two boats pulled quietly for the shore, keeping close +together, and they were beached at the same time. The natives, or +whoever occupied the tents, had evidently not yet discovered +them, and the men halted upon landing to decide what they had +better do. The tents could be plainly seen through the trees, and +there was smoke rising from a fire somewhere in the +neighbourhood, but there were no noises which could be heard so +far away. It was decided to march up to the tents and find out +who occupied them, and the column kept close together as they +advanced, for things were so quiet it was feared the rebels, if +such they were, might be in ambush.</p> + +<p>The men got within a hundred feet of the camp, when they heard +several terrible yells in succession, and several natives ran out +from behind one of the tents, screaming at the top of their +voices, and not pausing to look around at all. The officer in +command of the company of men was much disturbed by this +demonstration, and, without pausing a moment, gave the order to +fire. Five of the natives fell immediately, but the other six +kept running, and soon disappeared among the trees on the other +side of the clearing. The men stood still awaiting developments, +but though they waited several minutes nothing more was heard, +and it was decided that the camp must be deserted. So they +marched up to the tents, and then the officer almost fainted, for +inside the first one he entered was standing an American flag, +and scattered about were the accoutrements and camp equipment +belonging to an American force in the field. There was now no +doubt but what the tents belonged to an American regiment, and +that the fleeing natives were either servants or prisoners, more +likely the former. The men were all much excited at this +discovery, and the officer ordered the natives to be looked after +at once. It was found, however, that all but one were dead, and +he expired within an hour, so that the men felt that they had +killed five innocent men, a thought which made some of them weep, +hardened though they were.</p> + +<p>It was now decided to await the return of the regiment, which +was out, the officer thought, on a practice march, and could not +possibly be gone much longer. So the men lounged about on the +grass for more than an hour. Then, about three in the afternoon, +a rifle-shot was heard in the near distance, and instantly every +man was on his feet, rifle in hand. "They must have found the +rebels," said the officer; "so be ready, men, to help them out, +should they be retreating to the camp." This supposition turned +out to be correct, for a few minutes later some members of the +regiment came running into camp and announced that a large body +of insurgents was after them. Later the remainder of the regiment +followed, and the joy of the colonel when he found these +unexpected reinforcements was very great. "There must be more +than fifteen hundred rebels," he said, "and they will all be on +us here in less than an hour, for their sharpshooters have been +following us up for a long time. I was beginning to think that we +would be unable to fight them, for they seem to be well equipped, +but with the cruiser to kelp us we can whip them at once. The +thing to do will be to let them come on without suspecting that +we have received any help, and then, when the fight is getting a +little warm, or they are about to charge us, let the cruiser fire +a few shells into the air, and it will all be over. Most of them +are country troops, and have never seen a cruiser, so they will +be too much frightened to speak when they hear the thunder of the +guns, and see the shells explode in the air. And then they have a +village about three miles back from the coast, and if you can +send a few shells into that village it will simply ruin the +insurgents.</p> + +<p>"I had no idea of meeting these rebels," the colonel then +explained. "I took the men out for a little practice marching, +but before we had gone far we encountered these sharpshooters, +and later discovered that they had all these men about a mile and +a half away. Then we decided to return to camp as quickly as +possible, to get more ammunition, and we felt, too, that we would +stand a better chance of resisting them here among the trees. But +now we will soon finish them up, if you will just send a man out +to tell the admiral of our plans." Archie immediately volunteered +to carry the information, and as he could be spared better than +one of the soldiers or sailors, he was permitted to undertake the +mission. So he started out, and was on board the cruiser in a +very short time. The admiral was dumbfounded to learn that +American troops were encamped on the shore, and in imminent +danger of being defeated, and he at once set about giving orders +with great vigour. "We will show them how they can attack a small +regiment of Americans with their ridiculous army," he declared, +and at once gave orders for the vessel to move inshore. "But +wait," he cried, a minute later, "I see by my chart that there is +a deep stream about a mile up the coast, and if I am not mistaken +we can enter this stream and perhaps get very near the advancing +rebels. We may even be able to destroy them before they have a +chance at our soldiers," and the old admiral almost danced in the +enthusiasm of this idea. So the cruiser steamed rapidly up the +coast, and was soon at the mouth of the stream, which seemed to +be the estuary of some great river. Then she steamed up-stream, +and, sure enough, the admiral soon discovered the rebels marching +rapidly along the road, about half a mile away. They had +evidently not perceived the cruiser, on account of the high reeds +growing along the banks, and the admiral gave orders to begin +firing.</p> + +<p>The first shell rose high in the air and exploded with a +deafening thunder, and when the smoke cleared away it was seen +that the insurgents were almost paralysed with fright, and had +just discovered the cruiser in the river. But this first shell +had not hurt any one, and another was immediately ignited. This +one exploded over the very heads of the troops, and many of them +must have been killed. Those who were not either killed or +wounded turned about and began to run, and their leaders were +powerless to make them stand their ground. One shell followed +another from the cruiser, and hundreds must have been killed +outright among the insurgents. Finally they were all running, and +it was soon perceived that the Americans had advanced, and were +now pursuing them with great energy. So the cruiser could fire no +more shells, and the admiral ordered her about and back to the +anchorage onshore.</p> + +<p>It would take many pages to describe in detail the events of +the remainder of that afternoon, as Archie witnessed them from +the deck of the cruiser, and learned of them later from Bill +Hickson. The insurgents were nearly all killed or taken +prisoners, and it was found that they numbered nearly two +thousand. So it was a great achievement to have vanquished them +all. The affair turned out to have been the greatest victory of +the war, so far.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XXII.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>RETURN TO HEADQUARTERS— A LETTER FROM THE EDITOR, WITH +PERMISSION TO RETURN TO NEW YORK— BILL HICKSON GOES, +TOO.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>RCHIE</small> left the cruiser when she was once more +at anchor, and, going ashore to the American camp, he found +things in a very lively condition at the close of the afternoon's +battle. Every man was very jubilant over the retreat which had +been turned into a great victory, and Archie was congratulated on +having been the lucky man to carry the news of the coming of the +rebels to the admiral. The officers were all in the best of +humour, except the colonel, who felt somewhat sad on account of +the death of his five faithful servants, as the men first shot +turned out to have been.</p> + +<p>"There were never any better men than they," said the colonel, +"and I would almost as soon my own men had been shot." But he +bore the ship's company no malice for their mistake, which he +said was a very natural one.</p> + +<p>After the capture of so many rebels, and the killing of so +many others, it was felt that the rebel army in this part of the +island was pretty well disbanded, and that it would soon +disappear altogether. It had been known, from the very beginning +of hostilities, that there was a large force of insurgents +somewhere in this neighbourhood, but not until to-day had the +colonel seen anything of them. But it was impossible, all the +officers said, that there could be any more troops about, for +these two thousand represented a very considerable portion of the +entire rebel army. And now that these were done away with, the +colonel said there was no need of his remaining any longer in +this place, and that he would like to get back to Manila as +quickly as possible. Hearing this, the admiral said he thought +room could be made for all the men aboard the cruiser, and that +they could all return at once if they so desired. This generous +offer was at once accepted by the colonel, and the next day the +work of embarkation began. By night every man was aboard, and a +place of some kind had been found where he could sleep, but of +course, every portion of the vessel was much overcrowded. This +only made things all the more lively, however, and Archie, as +well as all the others, thought he had never enjoyed any trip so +much as these three days spent in getting back again to Manila. +There was always fun of some sort going on. If some one wasn't +dancing, there was sure to be singing. And then there were +several ingenious games which were invented for the occasion, so +that time never passed slowly. Indeed, there were many who were +sorry when the capital was finally reached, but Archie was not +among these, for he expected some mail to be awaiting him from +the editor of the <i>Enterprise.</i> And he hoped that in this +mail he would find permission to return to New York.</p> + +<p>All officials were very much surprised when the cruiser +anchored off Cavité, but the admiral explained that he +thought it no use to spend more time in touring the island, even +though the month which it was supposed to take him had not yet +expired. He said that he felt sure there were no more insurgent +villages along the coast, because it was perfectly evident, from +all signs, that the rebels were all in one division. And this +division, of course, had been vanquished four days +previously.</p> + +<p>When the report of the engagement went the rounds there was +much enthusiasm, for it was felt that at last some progress was +being made against the insurgents. The admiral was a popular hero +at once, and Archie, with Bill Hickson, was again the centre of +admiration and interest in the old palace, where they both +returned.</p> + +<p>Archie was surprised to find no mail awaiting him, but he was +not discouraged, and wrote two long articles to send to the +<i>Enterprise.</i> One described the great engagement, and the +other was descriptive of the daily life aboard ship upon the +return to Manila. These articles, with the others he had written +during the latter part of the cruise, were sent off at once, and +Archie felt confident that they would be read with great interest +by Mr. Van Bunting. And now the days passed very pleasantly in +Manila. He had a great deal to tell his comrades in the old +regiment, for none of them had been out of Manila since he left, +and were very anxious indeed to hear about the events of the +round-the-island tour. And Archie was very willing to tell them +all he could, for he had been much interested in the entire +voyage, and never tired of talking about it.</p> + +<p>Still, while things were very pleasant, and he was having a +good time in many ways, Archie was very anxious to see New York +again and to get back to America. And then, what was even more +important with him, was the knowledge that he would certainly be +allowed to visit his mother upon his return. Therefore he was a +very happy boy when he one day received two letters from the +<i>Enterprise</i> office, one from Mr. Van Bunting, and one from +Mr. Jennings. They were both very encouraging and very friendly. +Mr. Van Bunting wrote to tell Archie how delighted they all had +been with his success in finding interesting things to write +about, and he enclosed a check for three hundred dollars, which +he thought "would come in handy now." The letter from Mr. +Jennings was of later date, and stated that he had prevailed upon +Mr. Van Bunting to allow Archie to return to New York, to work +upon the <i>Evening Enterprise.</i> It was a very delightful +letter, Archie thought. "We believe," wrote Mr. Jennings, "that +we can use you here to very good advantage, and we will be glad +to have you return as soon as possible. I enclose two hundred +dollars to pay your expenses home again."</p> + +<p>So now it was all settled that Archie was to leave Manila for +New York, and, now that it was sure he was going, he felt +somewhat reluctant to leave the soldiers with whom he had become +friendly, and to get away from all this life of adventure which +had been so interesting and so delightful in many ways. It was +hard, too, to leave the dear old palace in Manila, through which +he had wandered so often, and every room of which had for him +some story of a Spanish prince or a great governor-general, +wealthy and wise. There would be none of all this at home or in +New York, but then there would be something better; there would +be mother, and the old grape arbour, and the Hut Club.</p> + +<p>On investigation, Archie found that the quickest way to get +home would be to travel by way of Hong Kong and Yokohama, taking +the steamer from there to San Francisco. It would take him more +than a month to make the trip, and, as it was now the second week +in March, he could hardly expect to reach New York before the +first of May. He at once cabled Mr. Jennings that he would leave +at once for Hong Kong, and received an answer telling him to do +so by all means, and to continue to write letters describing his +trip. Archie knew that these letters would probably not reach New +York any sooner than he would, but he did write them, anyhow, and +he did see some of them appear in the paper after his +arrival.</p> + +<p>Archie was overjoyed to learn one day that Bill Hickson had +received permission from the commanding general to return to the +United States, and he at once hunted up the bashful hero, and +insisted that he leave at once, and make the trip with him. This +was finally agreed to, and when it was settled that the two old +chums were to travel homeward together the whole camp in Manila +was interested in the news. They were both very popular, and +almost every night before their departure there was a pleasure +party of some kind arranged for them. One night they would give a +regular "stag," as they called them, and then again they would +arrange a sort of musicale, at which there would be clog-dancing, +banjo music, and various games to increase the fun.</p> + +<p>The four days passed very quickly indeed, and at last the day +for sailing arrived. There was a great throng at the pier to see +them off, and there was no end of good wishes and stories of the +good times now gone by. When the steamer finally moved out into +the open, there were three cheers each for Archie and "brave Bill +Hickson," in which every man appeared to join with all his heart +and voice. And there were tears in Archie's eyes at having to +part from such true friends. It was hard to tell, too, when he +would ever see any of them again. He realised that hereafter his +path and theirs would probably lie in different directions. He +was going to New York to work as a reporter, and they, if they +were not killed in battle, would be scattered in all parts of the +great United States, at the mustering out of the troops. It was +all very sad, and even Bill Hickson seemed to feel the solemnity +of the occasion, for he had nothing to say for many hours after +the vessel had started on its journey.</p> + +<p>Archie, too, felt homesick at having to leave, and they went +to bed very early, apparently feeling that the best thing under +such circumstances was to be asleep. And when morning came they +both felt somewhat better, for Archie arose filled with hope for +the future, and more anxious than ever to reach home. Bill +Hickson, too, was not loath to return to the United States, even +though he had no relatives waiting there to welcome him. The poor +fellow had been through a great deal while in the Philippines, +and his constitution was almost wrecked by the constant strain to +which he was subjected. He had never fully recovered from his +accident of several weeks before, and he felt that he needed a +rest from the constant excitement and worry of life in the army. +He was tired, too, of being a spy. He had never relished the +work, but he had realised how necessary it was for the Americans +to have some one to follow up Aguinaldo and let the general know +of his movements. "They'll be a long time catching him now," he +said, time and again, to Archie. "He's a much shrewder man than +they think, and he knows his Philippine Islands like a book. He +can go from one place to another without the Americans ever +knowing where he disappeared to, and without some one to follow +him they will never be able to learn anything of his +movements."</p> + +<p>Bill had received nearly two hundred dollars in back pay, so +he felt quite rich, and Archie told him that if he should happen +to run out, and need more money, he would be very glad to furnish +it to him, For Archie was now determined to take Bill Hickson to +New York, and introduce him to Mr. Van Bunting, feeling sure that +the wise editor would thank him for bringing to his attention a +man at once so interesting and so worthy as this hero of the war +had proved himself to be. But for the present Bill would discuss +nothing of the kind. He was thoroughly content to sit beside +Archie on the warm steamer deck, and watch the ever varied +surface of the Indian Ocean.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XXIII.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>HONG KONG— A HAPPY TIME IN TOKIO— HONOLULU +AGAIN— ARRIVAL IN SAN FRANCISCO, AND A GREAT RECEPTION BY +THE PRESS— ARCHIE AND BILL ARRIVE IN NEW YORK, AND ARE THE +HEROES OF THE HOUR.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>A<small>FTER</small> a short and pleasant voyage they reached +Hong Kong, and Archie found this city to be much more interesting +than he had expected to find it. It was charming, he thought, to +run across a place which combined the conveniences of England and +America with the picturesque oddities of China and Japan, and he +enjoyed himself to the utmost during the two days they spent +there. Bill Hickson enjoyed the place, too, and they would both +have liked to remain longer had it been possible for them to do +so, but they were anxious to see something of Japan before +sailing for San Francisco, and their steamer was due to leave +Yokohama in eleven days.</p> + +<p>But they did enjoy Hong Kong to the utmost while they were +there. They called first, of course, upon the American consul, +whom they found to be an exceedingly pleasant man. They learned, +to their great surprise, that he had read of Archie Dunn, and of +Bill Hickson, too, in the <i>Enterprise,</i> and Archie began to +think that his paper had a much wider circulation than even the +editors claimed for it. He thought it very remarkable, at first, +that a man living in Hong Kong should have read about his +Philippine experiences in a New York paper, but of course, after +he thought of it awhile, it didn't seem such a very remarkable +thing, after all. And after this, when they heard of people +having read of them, they weren't so much surprised, having come +to realise the tremendous circulation of this paper.</p> + +<p>The consul did all in his power to make their stay in Hong +Kong pleasant. He was anxious to have a formal dinner for them, +but Bill Hickson said that he would much prefer not having to +dress up, and Archie was willing for Bill's sake to forego the +honour. So they spent their two days in going about the city, +visiting the quaint Chinese shops, and seeing everything of +particular interest. They found many wonderful things to look at, +and Archie said that he couldn't imagine any more delightful +place; but Bill told him to wait until they reached Japan, for +he'd find that much more charming than Hong Kong. "I've been +there before," said Bill, "and I know what I'm talkin' about, and +I say there ain't no such place on earth as Japan for interestin' +things to look at, and pleasant things to do." And when, a few +days later, Archie was initiated into some of the mysteries of +Japanese life by his experienced friend, he was willing to admit +the truth of all he had heard concerning the land of the +chrysanthemum. He found everything quite beyond his expectations. +The people themselves were more quaint in their dress and manners +than he had expected to find them, and the houses and the pagodas +were much more picturesque than he had imagined they would be. +And the whole atmosphere of the country seemed filled with +romance and history, and it wasn't at all hard to believe that +the Japanese have longer family trees than any other nation on +earth.</p> + +<p>They spent a few days travelling through the provincial +districts of the little kingdom, and then they reached Tokio, +where Bill was anxious to spend several days. "I know some folks +here who can take us around and show us everything that's worth +seeing," he said, "and we can spend our time to better advantage +here than anywhere else I know of." And sure enough, Bill did +know some people in the capital city, some pleasant English +people, who had met the open-hearted Westerner when he was in the +city years before, and who had at once appreciated the true +nobility of his character. They were very kind to Archie,— +so kind that the lad thought he had never before met such +pleasant people. And they were thoroughly interested in all his +adventures, from the time he left home late in the preceding +summer until now. He had to tell them all about his New York +adventures, and also about their experiences together in the +Philippines, and his new friends showed the greatest interest in +all he had to say, and seemed to find it all vastly entertaining. +They were anxious, Archie thought, to make him have a very good +time in Tokio, to make up for some of his hard experiences, and +if this were indeed their object, they succeeded admirably in +accomplishing it. Every day was filled with surprises, and every +night Archie thought he had enjoyed himself more this day than +the day before. They travelled about the city so persistently, on +foot and in the quaint jinrikishas, that he felt that he knew +almost every part of Tokio, and he witnessed every side of native +existence, as well as the life in the foreign quarter. It was all +charmingly new and interesting, and, as in Hong Kong, they were +both sorry when the day for their sailing came around. And always +since Archie has declared that no one can be more kindly +hospitable than the English.</p> + +<p>The voyage from Yokohama to San Francisco was slow and +monotonous, Archie thought, for he was now very impatient to +reach the United States, and he had also grown very tired of +travel by water. There were some very pleasant passengers, but +Archie couldn't see that he had a much better time than when he +was peeling potatoes corning over. That was interesting enough, +anyhow. The only break in the monotony was the day they were +enabled to spend in Honolulu, and on that day Archie went again +to some of the places he had seen during his first visit to the +attractive city. And he called again upon some of the friends of +his first visit, and found that most of them had read of his +great success as a war correspondent, and of his many exciting +experiences in the Philippines. They were all profuse in +congratulating him upon what he had accomplished, and every one +seemed to think he had been very successful indeed.</p> + +<p>While they were in Honolulu a vessel arrived, bound for Japan, +and Archie was delighted to find it was the same vessel upon +which he had worked his passage from San Francisco on his way to +Manila. He went aboard and met some of the friends he had made +there, and found that they all knew now who it was they had +carried as chore-boy in the galley. They all seemed glad to hear +of his success, and to know that he was coming home as a +first-class passenger. The cook treated him with much deference, +and started to apologise for his treatment of Archie on the way +over; but the boy stopped him, and told him that no apology was +necessary. "I think I may have been an unwilling worker," he +said, "because of course I didn't like the work at all, and it +was hard for me to take an interest in peeling potatoes when I +was looking forward to accomplishing such great things in the +Philippines."</p> + +<p>"Oh," said the cook, "you was a fine worker. Sure, I ain't had +so good a boy since." And Archie laughed to see the change in +opinion which is sometimes brought about by a change in +circumstances.</p> + +<p>Archie enjoyed the city quite as much as before, but he was +glad, nevertheless, when the steamer continued her voyage east. +And then he began to count the days until they should arrive in +San Francisco, and of course these last days seemed the longest +ones of the voyage. But they gradually passed away, and as they +steamed ahead, coming nearer every hour to that dear land called +"home," both Archie and Bill began to wonder how they would like +it all, after their adventurous life in the Philippines. Bill, in +particular, was doubtful whether he would again be able to settle +down to a quiet existence in some small place, and Archie assured +him that he must live in New York, where he would be sure to find +things lively enough to suit him.</p> + +<p>At last came the eventful day when the great steamer threaded +her way through the beautiful Golden Gate, and discharged her +passengers at the pier. As Archie and Bill had but little +baggage, they were almost the first ones to leave the vessel, and +were hurrying away to find a hotel where they could remain +overnight when Archie felt some one touch him on the shoulder, +and, turning about and seeing no one he knew, was about to go on, +when a man introduced himself as being the San Francisco +correspondent of the <i>Enterprise.</i> "And these gentlemen +here," said he, "are reporters from the newspapers here. They +would be glad to have you say a few words about your experiences +during the last few months." Archie was quite dumbfounded. It had +never occurred to him that he was a person so important as to be +interviewed, but he was willing and glad to accommodate the +reporters, and told them to accompany him to his hotel. Once +there, he answered all their questions, and didn't find it hard +at all to give them his opinion of the situation in the +Philippines, and what he thought should be done by the government +to stop the rebellion. "The President will soon put an end to +it," he said, "if he can only have the support of Congress. But +as long as there are members of Congress fighting his policy, the +insurgents are going to continue their insane efforts to +establish an independent government." And some of the reporters +smiled to hear so young a fellow talking about the policy in the +Philippines. They felt that he was well-informed, however, and +put down every word he said.</p> + +<p>The interviews over, Archie and Bill went early to bed. The +<i>Enterprise</i> correspondent had telegraphed the news of their +arrival to New York, and had received word from Mr. Van Bunting +to send them on to New York at once. So, early in the morning, +the two started for the East, and the train seemed to travel +quite as slowly as the steamer. "It does seem good to be in our +own country again," they said a hundred times during the days +that followed, and when they reached the Empire State and began +their journey down the Hudson River, Archie could hardly restrain +his enthusiasm at being again in his native commonwealth.</p> + +<p>There was quite a delegation at the Grand Central Station to +meet them. Mr. Jennings was there in person, and he explained +that Mr. Van Bunting was waiting anxiously at the office to see +him. Then there were reporters from the various other city +papers, who wanted interviews, but Archie was told to say +whatever he had to say in the columns of the <i>Enterprise,</i> +so he had to deny the reporters for the first time. Bill Hickson +was introduced at once, and became the lion of the hour. Every +one had read of him, and was glad to shake his hand, and poor +Bill was quite bewildered by so much attention. They didn't +linger long at the station, however, but hurried down to the +<i>Enterprise</i> office, where Mr. Van Bunting was awaiting +them. He grasped Archie's hand in his as they entered, and cried, +"Well done, my boy, well done." And Archie felt as if he had +grown three feet that instant.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XXIV.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>DOING "SPECIAL" WORK UPON THE EVENING PAPER— INTERVIEWS +WITH FAMOUS MEN— CALLS UPON OLD FRIENDS.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>T<small>HERE</small> was so much to tell Mr. Jennings and Mr. +Van Bunting, that Archie didn't get away from the +<i>Enterprise</i> office until seven o'clock in the evening. And +what a lot they did say to each other during the afternoon! +Archie told of all his experiences, and found them all anxious to +hear about them. He learned, to his joy, that everything he had +sent had been printed, and that the articles had made a great hit +with the public. "We would have liked to keep you there longer, +but we knew you must be worn out, and then we want you to stay +right here, now, and see if you cannot get us some good +interviews and articles of various kinds for the <i>Evening +Enterprise.</i> The paper has been losing ground somewhat, of +late, and we need some new life for its pages. Of course the +morning paper profited greatly by your articles, but the evening +edition seemed very weak in comparison, and we think it only fair +to Mr. Jennings to let him have you on his staff for awhile now. +So if you are willing, you can start in to-morrow as a member of +the staff. We will see that you are well paid for what you write, +or we will put you on salary, whichever you like. You can think +it over, and in the morning you can tell us which plan you like +best."</p> + +<p>Archie wanted to ask for a few days' absence to return home, +but he felt, somehow, that he ought not to ask it just now. So he +contented himself with writing a long letter to his mother, in +which he enclosed a very large check, money which he had not used +on his return to New York. He told her that he would be home just +as soon as he could get off for any length of time, and he knew +that she would now be looking forward to the visit every day. She +had written him about the enthusiasm displayed by every one over +his achievements, and how proud she was of what he had +accomplished. "I think I am the proudest mother in the country," +she wrote one day, and this sentence made Archie very happy, of +course, and more anxious than ever to return home. He received a +letter, too, from Jack Sullivan, telling him how much the boys +all thought of his success, and how every member of the Hut Club +had longed time and again to be with him. "It all reads just like +some book," Jack wrote, "and we are dying to have you come home +and tell us all about it." Then his mother sent him clippings +from the town papers, eulogising his efforts, and calling him the +"coming man of the State." All this was very pleasant and very +encouraging, and Archie couldn't help having a kindly feeling for +the townsfolk who thought so much of him.</p> + +<p>New York was as delightful as ever. It was now the last of +April, and the trees were all green with fresh leaves, and the +numerous little parks scattered over the city were looking their +very best. The asphalt pavements looked clean and elegant when +Archie thought of some other streets he had seen, and the tall +office buildings lifted their ornate domes and cupolas into a sky +of clear blue. "Surely," he thought to himself, "this is the most +charming city in all the world." Fifth Avenue, with its crowds of +fashionable folk, and its throng of vehicles, was a delight of +which he never tired, and when he went into the Bowery, just to +see how things were looking now, he found it quite as interesting +and as dirty as in the fall.</p> + +<p>But the first place he visited was the dear little square away +down-town, where he had lived during those few happy days spent +in New York. It, too, looked the same, only the flowers and grass +were fresher now, and the fountain seemed to flow more joyously, +now that spring was here. The house where he had lodged was as +clean as ever, and Archie at once decided to engage a room here, +where he could have his New York home. So he called upon the +motherly landlady, and was glad to learn that the room he had +first was still vacant, and that he could take possession at +once.</p> + +<p>As before, when he came to this house, Archie was almost out +of clothing, so he went out and fitted himself with everything he +needed. And this time he felt able to buy the best to be had, for +he thought he had now earned the privilege to dress well if he +liked. And then, when he had everything he needed to wear, he +went out and bought many pretty things for his room, for he felt +that he would like to have it just as cosy and home-like as +possible. He wasn't able to do much at it this first night, but +in the succeeding days he furnished the place in a charming way, +so that the landlady said it was the "handsomest room in the +house, sir." The dear old lady could hardly understand this great +change in her lodger's circumstances. She worried about it very +often, and discussed the question with many of the neighbours. +"He come here last fall looking mighty poor-like, but, lawsy me, +he's as fine now as any man on the avenue." And she never did +understand it until one day she learned that her lodger was the +"very young man who had been to the war in the Philippines, and +writ about his battles in the <i>Enterprise."</i></p> + +<p>There was no ceremony when Archie began work on the evening +paper. Mr. Jennings told him that he thought they understood each +other pretty well, and that he could use his own discretion, very +often, about getting articles. "You can be as independent as you +like, Archie," he said, "and use your own ideas as much as you +like." This pleased the boy very much indeed. He was beginning to +feel now that he had really won his spurs, and that he was a +full-fledged journalist. It seemed scarcely possible that it had +taken him little more than six months to make this great advance +in circumstances, and yet he could see himself a few months +previous, sleeping in the station-house. Now his days of poverty +were surely over, and he would have a clear path ahead of him to +accomplish his great ambition to be a successful author and +writer of books. For the present, it was good experience for him +to be working upon the <i>Enterprise,</i> and he felt that he +ought to be very much contented, since there were men old enough +to be his father who were not earning as much money.</p> + +<p>He liked the work upon the evening paper very much. He didn't +have to get down early in the morning, and at three o'clock in +the afternoon he was always through. He was very glad indeed that +there was no night work, for he now spent his evenings in +studying shorthand, which he thought might be helpful to him in +many ways. He didn't have much routine work to do upon the paper +in the beginning, but he told Mr. Jennings that he would like to +get as much experience as possible, so the good editor gave him a +lot of regular reporting to do, as well as the special work which +was daily featured in the paper. This special work consisted of +interviews with various successful men. Archie had always felt a +great admiration for men who had "done something," and as New +York was simply filled with wealthy and successful men, who had +started as poor boys, he found a wide field for work. He found it +very interesting to meet these men of affairs, and have them tell +him of their early struggles, how they had begun on the farm or +in the factory, and had worked themselves up through industry and +perseverance to the high places they now occupied. He found it +very easy to get access to most of them, for they had all read of +his experiences in the <i>Enterprise,</i> and Archie found that +his fame as the "Boy Reporter" was quite general and widespread. +Some of the great men were quite as much determined to interview +him as he was anxious to interview them, so that he usually got +along very well by telling them first of his own experiences, and +then asking them about their own boyhood days. It was work that +never became monotonous, for each day he saw a man quite +different in most respects from the man he had interviewed the +day before, and of course every one had something different to +say.</p> + +<p>These interviews proved very successful when published in the +<i>Evening Enterprise,</i> and Mr. Jennings had him continue them +during all the weeks Archie was connected with the paper. And of +course he did other things, too, work which took him into every +part of the great city, looking up this event, or investigating +this reported disappearance or murder. Archie was quite +successful in this line, too, and, as he was being paid by the +column, his weekly income was something larger than he had ever +dared to hope for in all his life. He was now enabled to study +his stenography at the best school, and to indulge himself in +many things which had been denied him before. He could, for +instance, attend the performances of grand opera, and hear the +great musical artists of the world. He was able, too, to read the +best literature, and he gradually learned to appreciate all the +many good things in life. He was very glad to find himself +broadening in such a way, for he realised that he would not +always want to be a "Boy Reporter," and that he had better be +developing his mind in every possible way.</p> + +<p>He had not been back long in New York before he met all his +old friends. One of the first upon whom he called was the good +policeman who had been so very kind to him when he had no place +to sleep. The large-hearted man was as enthusiastic over his +success as if he had been his own son, and Archie felt that here +was one true friend upon whom he could always depend. The +policeman never tired of telling about that first night when he +found Archie walking up and down Broadway, and he always spoke of +him to the other officers as "that boy of mine." So the boy, who +was now a full-fledged reporter, spent as much time with this +friend as possible, and many a time he sat at the station-house +telling them all of his adventures in the Orient.</p> + +<p>Another friend whom he met was the great railway president +with whom he had travelled to Chicago on his way to San +Francisco. Archie had liked this man from the very first, and he +felt that in him he would always find a friend, because he had +shown such interest in his first undertaking. And when he called +upon him in his elegant office, he received a very cordial +greeting.</p> + +<p>"No, indeed," said the great man of affairs, "I have never +forgotten our trip West together, and I have followed you with +much interest through the columns of the <i>Enterprise.</i> And I +am glad that you are back again in New York, for I hope to see a +great deal of you. You must come up to my house some evening and +tell us all about yourself."</p> + +<p>Archie was naturally much surprised to receive an invitation +of this kind, but he resolved to accept it, nevertheless.</p> + +<p>Bill Hickson was now employed in the Brooklyn navy yard. He +had been featured for several days in the <i>Enterprise,</i> and +had enjoyed the excitement of New York for awhile, but he decided +he would like to be at work. So one day Archie learned that he +was working at the navy yard.</p> + +<p>"I've got to be with Uncle Sam," was all the reason Bill would +give for his action.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XXV.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>PRIVATE SECRETARY TO A MILLIONAIRE— STUDYING AT EVENING +SCHOOL— LIVING AMID ELEGANT SURROUNDINGS.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>I<small>T</small> was now September. Archie had been in New +York the whole summer through, attending carefully to his work on +the <i>Evening Enterprise,</i> and continuing his study of +stenography. He had taken occasional trips to Long Branch and +Asbury Park on Saturday afternoons, but every other day he spent +in working up ideas for the paper, and each evening he devoted to +the shorthand school. By this time, though, he felt that he knew +all that was necessary of shorthand, and found himself more free +to go about in the evenings. He visited his friends more +frequently, and sometimes spent whole evenings in studying works +on English literature, for he was ambitious to know more of the +great work he had decided to make his own. This study was not +really work to him, for his interest in everything connected with +literature was so great that he found a pleasure in reading even +the most classical books on the subject, and of course so much +reading of this sort did a great deal to educate his mind along +this line of work.</p> + +<p>One evening in the early fall, Archie decided to accept the +invitation of Mr. Depaw, the railway president, to call. So he +carefully dressed himself in the best he had, and walked up Fifth +Avenue and into the side street where the great man had his home. +He rang the bell and presented his card, and waited in the +drawing-room for an answer. The footman was gone but a moment, +and returning, announced that the family would be down directly. +Archie was very much pleased that he was to meet the entire +family, and looked about him with great interest at the elegant +furnishings of the room in which he sat. He couldn't help +thinking how lovely it must be to have so many books, so many +pictures, and so many works of art of every kind. The boy thought +then that he would like to be a wealthy man, just to be able to +gratify his desires for beautiful things.</p> + +<p>He had to wait only a short time before the genial Mr. Depaw +entered the room, accompanied by several members of the family. +Archie was greeted very warmly, and introduced to every one, and +then they immediately began an animated conversation, in which +Archie soon found himself taking an active part, much to his +surprise. He felt that he had never before realised what a great +gift it is to be able to talk entertainingly, and this evening +was a revelation to him in the ways of good society. He found +that every one was much interested in the story of his +adventures, and he talked more about them than for a long time +past. He was now beginning to feel that his Philippine +experiences were an old story, but he learned that they were +quite as entertaining as ever to these people. But they did not +talk entirely about Archie. They realised that this would be +embarrassing to him, and they were careful to guide the +conversation into a discussion of music and literature, and +whatever else they imagined him to like. And so it was that the +evening passed very quickly, and it was time to leave before he +knew it. Then he was asked to be sure to call again, and Mr. +Depaw, as he accompanied him to the door, requested him to call +at his office on the following Wednesday, if possible. Archie +promised, and walked home down the avenue, wondering what it +could be that Mr. Depaw wanted to talk to him about. He didn't +worry long about it, however, but went home and to bed as quickly +as possible, for he had formed a habit of rising at six o'clock +in the morning to study.</p> + +<p>The days passed quickly until Wednesday, and the afternoon of +that day found Archie in the waiting-room of Mr. Depaw's office. +He had not long to sit there after sending in his card, for the +busy man received him as soon as he could get rid of his present +visitor. He shook Archie warmly by the hand as he entered, and +then, pulling two chairs together, they sat down. "I have been +thinking for some time," said Mr. Depaw, "that I need a sort of +private secretary. Of course I have men here at the office who +take dictation from me, and who fulfil the duties of a secretary +to a certain extent, but I want a young man who can attend +somewhat to my personal affairs; I want one whom I can trust, and +one who is likely to grow as he works along, so that eventually +he may be able to fill any place I may have open for him." Then +he stopped a moment, and Archie felt his heart beating very fast +beneath his coat. He waited almost breathlessly to hear what Mr. +Depaw would say next.</p> + +<p>"Ever since I met you first," he at last went on, "I have +somehow thought that you are the kind of a young fellow I would +like. You are ambitious, you are persevering, and you are willing +to learn. You say, too, that you know shorthand, and I know that +you are a good penman. You have seen quite a little of the world, +I am sure, and I think you can prove yourself equal to almost any +occasion. The only question is whether you will care to give up +reporting for a position of this kind. I can assure you that I +will pay you as much as you are earning now, and I shall be glad +to offer you a home at my house, because I shall want you at my +right hand all the time. Do you think you will care to take the +place?"</p> + +<p>Archie could hardly speak, it was all so wonderful, but +finally he recovered himself sufficiently to explain his +hesitancy in accepting the position. "I would like just one day," +he said, "to consult with my friends on the newspaper. You see +Mr. Jennings and Mr. Van Bunting have been very good to me, and I +shouldn't care to leave them now if they object very +strongly."</p> + +<p>"That's quite right, quite right," said Mr. Depaw. "I can +appreciate your feelings, and you can tell the editor that you +will have some time for writing, and that you will contribute +occasional articles to his paper." Archie was now delighted. "Oh, +thank you," he cried. "I am sure I can come now."</p> + +<p>"Well, come in at this time to-morrow," said Mr. Depaw, "and +let me know what you have decided to do."</p> + +<p>Archie hurried at once to Mr. Jennings's office to tell him +the good news. He wondered how his friend would take it, but all +his fears were soon put at rest. "Archie," said Mr. Jennings, +"this is the best opportunity you can ever have to improve +yourself in every way. Mr. Depaw is a man highly respected all +over the country, and a man who is known to be extraordinary in +many ways. Association with such a man will do more for you than +four years in college, and you will make a mistake if you do not +accept his offer. Of course we shall all be sorry to lose you +here, but, as Mr. Depaw says, you will have some time for +writing, and we hope you will always continue to do some work for +us."</p> + +<p>Archie could almost have thrown his arms about Mr. Jennings's +neck to hug him for his splendid feeling, and when, a little +later, Mr. Van Bunting said practically the same thing, he felt +that he had never known two such men. He assured them both that +he would never forget them, but would try and spend as much time +as possible in the <i>Enterprise</i> office.</p> + +<p>The next day he called again on Mr. Depaw, and told him of his +decision to accept the place, and the good man seemed overjoyed. +"I will see that you never forget it, Archie," he said. It was +arranged for him to begin work the very next day. "You can +transfer your things to my house as soon as you like, for your +room is waiting for you, and I will begin to-morrow to teach you +how to do things."</p> + +<p>And now Archie found it hard to leave the dear little room in +the quaint old square, which was looking now just as when he saw +it first. The leaves in the trees were turning brown and gold, +and Archie realised that he had been away from home more than a +year. "Oh, I must go back soon," he said to himself, "or I shall +simply die of homesickness."</p> + +<p>In a couple of days he was installed as a member of the Depaw +household, and he soon felt at home there. Every one was very +kind to him, he was given a handsome room, and everything seemed +almost perfect. One of the best things about it all was that he +had access to the fine library, and he longed for the long winter +evenings when he could devour the many interesting books he saw +there. He was soon initiated into his work, and it was much +easier than he had expected. Mr. Depaw, of course, started him +very gradually, so that he learned as he went along. Every +morning at eight o'clock he was in the library with Mr. Depaw, +taking dictation, and receiving instructions for the day. They +remained together here until ten o'clock, when Mr. Depaw either +walked or drove to his office. Archie always accompanied him, and +took charge of some of the mail there, attending to it during the +morning. Then at noon he returned to the house, where he spent +the afternoon in writing the letters which had been dictated in +the morning, and in doing various things for Mr. Depaw. The +evenings he always had to himself, and he had no difficulty in +finding enough to do at home without going out. He almost +invariably passed the evenings in reading, but occasionally he +was asked to accompany the family to some musical event at the +opera house, for they had soon learned of his love for music.</p> + +<p>In work and study the winter passed quickly and happily for +Archie, who now felt quite at ease amid his elegant surroundings. +His only wish was that he might go home, and as spring approached +Mr. Depaw promised him that he should have a short vacation. The +suggestion of Mr. Depaw that Archie's mother come to New York for +a week was heartily accepted by Archie, but when he wrote home +Mrs. Dunn replied that she would rather wait for Archie at home. +She had never visited New York, and felt that she wouldn't like +it.</p> + +<p>Bill Hickson came over very often from the navy yard, and was +always a welcome visitor at Mr. Depaw's office. He didn't seem to +care for his work in Brooklyn, however, and Archie finally +requested a place for him about the elegant new station which the +road had just constructed in the city. Mr. Depaw very readily +gave him an excellent position, one which he could keep always if +he so desired. And Bill was highly pleased with his new work, so +much so that he surprised them all one day in the spring by +leading into the once a young lady whom he introduced as his +wife. Of course Archie was very much pleased at this new +development, for he had often thought that his friend must be +very lonely, living in a boarding-house.</p> + +<p>The days were all busy ones for Archie now. He had learned the +work so thoroughly that he was given more than ever to do, and he +still continued to write, too, for the <i>Enterprise.</i> He +worked too hard, however, and in April he looked so thin that Mr. +Depaw sent him home for a week's rest.</p> + +<h3>CHAPTER XXVI.</h3> + +<blockquote> +<h5>DECIDES TO VISIT HOME— A GREAT RECEPTION IN THE +TOWN— A PUBLIC CHARACTER NOW— DINNER TO THE HUT +CLUB— DEMONSTRATION AT THE TOWN HALL— A TELEGRAM FROM +HIS EMPLOYER LEAVING FOR EUROPE.</h5> +</blockquote> + +<p>I<small>T</small> was a beautiful April day. There had been a +light shower in the morning, and now everything looked as fresh +and green as possible all along the railway. Archie lay back in +his comfortable Wagner seat, admiring the beauties of spring, and +thinking, too, of the days he spent in walking along this very +road. It seemed hard to believe that he was now secretary to the +president of this railroad, and that he was returning home, after +a year and a half, a very successful young man. He had much to +think of in the hours it would take him to reach the little town. +He tried to remember everything about the place, and his mother +as he saw her last, and it wasn't at all difficult for him to do +so. But, oh, how he hoped that things had not changed! He almost +dreaded going home for fear he would find things different.</p> + +<p>He had changed, that much was sure. He knew that he had grown +to look much older than his years, and he knew that he was not +looking particularly strong. He used to be so sturdy, and he had +such a splendid colour in his cheeks. Mother would be sorry to +see him now, but of course he would be sure to improve very much +during the week he was to remain among old friends.</p> + +<p>He was very anxious to see his boy friends, the members of the +Hut Club, and the boys and girls who were in his class at school. +He had telegraphed his mother that he was coming, so she would +probably tell the boys about it. He was sure they would be +there.</p> + +<p>Now the stations looked more familiar. This one just passed +was near the Tinch farm, and Archie remembered the days he spent +working for old Hiram, and how he had suffered. He wondered if +the farmer had ever seen any copies of the <i>Enterprise.</i> It +would be very interesting to him to know that his chore-boy was +now a secretary to a millionaire. This next station he remembered +very well indeed, because he used to come here every fall to +visit the county fair, where he marvelled at the wonderful things +he saw in the side-shows.</p> + +<p>And now the train was entering the limits of his own town. +Here was the old elevator, and the machine shop near the railway +track. And, oh, there was his own home, looking green and +pleasant as the train sped by. It almost brought tears to +Archie's eyes to think that he was so soon to see his mother. Now +they had reached the station, and he stood upon the car platform +ready to alight. My, what a crowd there was! and why did they +cheer as he made his appearance? All at once it dawned upon him +that all these people were here to meet him, and to bid him +welcome home. He could hardly speak as he found himself in his +mother's arms, and then he began to shake the hands of the big +crowd. They were all old friends, and then there was the mayor, +and the superintendent of schools, and quite a delegation of +leading citizens. How nice it was of them to welcome him in this +way!</p> + +<p>After awhile the handshaking was over, and the mayor was able +to get a few minutes with Archie. "We are all very proud of what +you have accomplished," he said, "and we want to give you a +public reception to-morrow night in the town hall, if you don't +object." Archie stared blankly at the mayor, and it was several +moments before he realised the meaning of the words. Then he was +almost overcome. It was almost too good to be true, it seemed, +but he warmly thanked the mayor, and told him how he appreciated +the honour which they had done him. He said that he would be glad +to attend the reception.</p> + +<p>The crowd was scattering now, and Archie, wild to reach home, +took his mother to a carriage, in which they drove rapidly out to +the little house among the trees and arbours. The old town looked +beautiful in every way. The great maple and oak trees along the +road were green with new leaves, and every dooryard was bright +with snowballs and yellow roses. "This is the very best time of +the year," he said to his mother, "and I am the very happiest boy +in all the world."</p> + +<p>"And I am the happiest mother," was the answer. Then they sat +in silence until they reached the old home. They entered by the +kitchen door, and, once inside, and seated in the old cane +rocking-chair, Archie bowed his head in tears of joy at being +home with mother once again.</p> + +<p>The hours which followed were sweet with joy. Mrs. Dunn busied +herself in preparing the supper, and Archie hung around the +kitchen, telling some of the many things he had planned to tell. +Mrs. Dunn was smiling, and Archie thought her the sweetest mother +any boy could have. She was changed somewhat, but she looked very +young to-day.</p> + +<p>Supper over, Archie went over the fence to see the Sullivan +boys, and he found them looking much the same. He was truly glad +to see them, and they, of course, were glad to see him, too, +though at first they were just a little bashful, remembering, no +doubt, all the things which had happened to Archie since they saw +him last. The boys were soon telling all about the Hut Club, +though, and Archie learned to his joy that it was still a +flourishing organisation. "We spoke of you every time we were +together," said Jack, "and we always wished you were back again." +Archie was delighted to hear that he had been missed, and all at +once an idea came to him which he put into execution three days +later. He determined to give an elegant dinner to this club of +boys, and the very next day he sent to New York for a caterer to +arrange it. He wanted it to be something finer than any of the +boys had ever seen, and it certainly turned out to be so. The +caterer did his best, and when, three days later, the Hut Club +sat down together for the first time in more than eighteen +months, they partook of a dinner which would have done credit to +Mr. Depaw's table. It was a memorable night for them all, and +every boy enjoyed himself.</p> + +<p>Archie enjoyed this Hut Club dinner more than anything else +while he was at home, though of course the great event of his +stay was the public reception at the Town Hall on the second +evening after his arrival. This was a truly grand affair. The +town authorities hired a brass band, which played inside the hall +and out, and there was such a crowd in attendance that many were +turned away from the doors. It was a night that Archie will never +be able to forget. He sat on the platform, in company with the +mayor and other town officials, and he listened to several +speeches congratulating him on what he had accomplished since +leaving the town. Then he had to get up and tell them all of his +experiences, from the time he left until now. He told it in a +simple manner, but from the close attention he received it was +evident his audience was deeply interested. When he had finished, +there were calls for "three cheers for Archie Dunn," and they +were given with a will. Then Archie, rising from his seat, called +for "three cheers for the President of the United States," and +they, too, were given, for Archie had told them all his feelings +on the subject of the President's policy in the war. After this +there were three cheers for Mr. Depaw, whom one man said would be +the next United States Senator from the State. The meeting closed +with some cheers for the New York <i>Enterprise,</i> and then +followed a long siege of handshaking for Archie, who stood beside +his mother on the floor in front of the platform. It was a happy +night for them both, and Mrs. Dunn said afterward that she could +never wish for anything more the rest of her life.</p> + +<p>The fourth day of his visit was a Sunday, and, to Archie's +joy, brave Bill Hickson and his wife came up from the city to +spend the day. What a jolly time they had, all day long! They +went to church in the morning, where they saw all the people, it +seemed, whom they hadn't seen before, and in the afternoon there +were many callers at the little house. The evening was spent +quietly by the happy four, talking of old times and plans for the +future. The town authorities were anxious to give Bill Hickson a +reception while he was in town, but the bashful hero declined the +honour, and returned with his wife to New York by the midnight +train.</p> + +<p>During the two succeeding days Archie talked a great deal with +his mother, and finally gained her consent to come to New York to +live in a year's time. Mrs. Dunn had never really understood that +Archie had so good a position, but now that she realised what a +splendid beginning he had made, she was very willing to come and +keep house for him. This question settled, everything seemed +wholly delightful in the cosy home, and Archie settled down to +enjoy the two remaining days of his visit in quiet rest. He had +already much improved during his stay, and was sure of going back +to the city feeling much better than for a long time past, and +this made Mrs. Dunn very happy.</p> + +<p>But Archie didn't stay his week out at home. On the fifth +night he attended a reception in his honour at one of the +neighbours' houses, and he was just in the midst of a description +of Tokio when a messenger boy entered with a telegram for him. He +opened it at once, and read it aloud to the company:</p> + +<p>"Dear Archie," it said, "return as soon as possible. I sail +for Europe on Saturday's steamer to remain six months, and wish +you to accompany me." It was signed by Mr. Depaw, and there was +great applause from the crowd when he finished reading it. But +Archie's face was a study. He wasn't sure whether he wanted to go +to Europe or not, but of course there was no question about what +he should do. He at once telegraphed a reply, saying that he +would reach the city to-morrow at noon, leaving home on the early +morning train.</p> + +<p>Of course the reception soon broke up, and Archie walked +quietly home with his mother, who was saddened at the prospect of +losing him so soon again. She soon brightened, however, and began +to plan things for him to do abroad, and soon she entered into +the preparation for his departure with all her heart. But Archie +was not so soon made glad, and he didn't rest until he made his +mother promise to accompany him to the city on the morrow to +spend the two days previous to his departure in helping him get +ready. Mrs. Dunn wasn't anxious to make the trip, but for +Archie's sake she consented.</p> + +<p>And early the next morning they left for the city, where the +time passed rapidly until the hour of the steamer's sailing. At +the pier they said good-bye. Archie could hardly speak, but Mrs. +Dunn was brave. "Archie," she said, "God has been with you so far +and he will keep you yet. And remember that a boy with honest +ambition will always get along. You are sure to have friends +about you always, for you have proved that you possess energy, +perseverance and a good heart." She said good-bye without a tear, +but as the steamer left the pier Archie saw, on looking back, a +sweet mother seated on a coil of rope, with her handkerchief to +her eyes.</p> + +<h4>THE END.</h4> + +<pre> +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THE ADVENTURES OF A BOY REPORTER *** + +This file should be named aboyr10.txt or aboyr10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, aboyr11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, aboyr10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +<a href="http://gutenberg.net">http://gutenberg.net</a> or +<a href="http://promo.net/pg">http://promo.net/pg</a> + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +<a href= +"http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04">http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04</a> or +<a href= +"ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03">ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03</a> + +Or /etext03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +<a href= +"http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html">http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html</a> + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +<a href="mailto:hart@pobox.com">hart@pobox.com</a> + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + + + +</pre> +</body> +</html> + + diff --git a/old/aboyr10h.zip b/old/aboyr10h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e9159c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/aboyr10h.zip |